A GEOGRAPHICAL HISTORY of AFRICA, Written in Arabic and Italian by JOHN LEO a More, borne in Granada, and brought up in Barbary. Wherein he hath at large described, not only the qualities, situations, and true distances of the regions, cities, towns, mountains, rivers, and other places throughout all the north and principal parts of Africa; but also the descents and families of their kings, the causes and events of their wars, with their manners, customs, religions, and civil government, and many other memorable matters: gathered partly out of his own diligent observations, and partly out of the ancient records and Chronicles of the Arabians and Moors. Before which, out of the best ancient and modern writers, is prefixed a general description of Africa, and also a particular treatise of all the main lands and Isles undescribed by john Leo. And after the same is annexed a relation of the great Princes, and the manifold religions in that part of the world. Translated and collected by JOHN PORY, lately of Gonevill and Caius College in Cambridge. LONDINI, Impensis Georg. Bishop. 1600 TO THE RIGHT Honourable sir ROBERT CECIL Knight, principal Secretary to her Majesty, Master of the Court of Wards and Liveries, and one of her highness most Honourable privy Counsel. LO here the first fruits, or rather the tender buds and blossoms of my labours. Which least in this their winterly sprouting they might perhaps by some bitter blasts of censure be frost-nipped, I humbly recommend to your Honourable protection. Most due they are only to yourself, being for the greatest part nothing else, but a large illustration of certain southern voyages of the English, already dedicated to your Honour. And at this time especially I thought they would prove the more acceptable: in that the Marocan ambassador (whose Kings dominions are here most amply and particularly described) hath so lately treated with your Honour concerning matters of that estate. Vouchsafe therefore (right Honourable) according to your accustomed humanity towards learning, to accept of this Geographical history, in like manner as it pleased your Honour not long since most favourably to take in good part those commendable endeavours of my reverend friend M. Richard Hakluyt: who out of his mature judgement in these studies, knowing the excellency of this story above all others in the same kind, was the only man that moved me to translate it. At London this three and fortieth most joyful Coronation-day of her sacred Majesty. 1600. Your Honours always most ready to be commanded JOHN PORY. To the Reader. Give me leave (gentle Readers) if not to present unto your knowledge, because some perhaps may aswell be informed as myself; yet, to call to your remembrance, some few particulars, concerning this Geographical History, and john Leo the author thereof. Who albeit by birth a More, and by religion for many years a Mahometan: yet if you consider his Parentage, Wit, Education, Learning, Employments, Travels, and his conversion to Christianity; you shall find him not altogether unfit to undertake such an enterprise; nor unworthy to be regarded. First therefore his Parentage seemeth not to have been ignoble: seeing (as in his second book himself testifieth) an Uncle of his was so Honourable a person, and so excellent an Orator and Poet; that he was sent as a principal Ambassador, from the king of Fez, to the king of Tombuto. And whether this our Author were borne at Granada in Spain, (as it is most likely) or in some part of Africa; certain it is, that in natural sharpness and 〈◊〉 of Wit, he most lively resembled those great and classical authors, Pomponius Mela, justinus Historicus, Columella, Seneca, Quintilian, Orosius, Prudentius, Martial, Juvenal, Avicen, etc. reputed all for Spanish writers; as likewise Terentius After, Tertullian, Saint Augustine, Victor, Optatus, etc. known to be writers of Africa. But amongst great variety which are to be found in the process of this not able discourse, I will here lay before your view one only pattern of his surpassing wit. In his second book therefore, if you peruse the description of Mount Tenueves, you shall there find the learned and sweet Arabian verses of john Leo, not being then fully sixteen years of age, so highly esteemed by the Prince of the same mountain, that in recompense thereof, after bountiful entertainment, he dismissed him with gifts of great value. Neither wanted he the best Education that all Barbary could afford. For being even from his tender years trained up at the University of Fez, in Grammar, Poetry, Rhetoric, Philosophy, History, Cabala, Astronomy, and other ingenuous sciences, and having so great acquaintance and conversation in the king's court: how could he choose but prove in his kind a most accomplished and absolute man? So as I may justly say (if the comparison be tolerable) that as Moses was learned in all the wisdom of the Egyptians; so likewise was Leo, in that of the Arabians and Moors. And that he was not meanly, but extraordinarily learned; let me keep silence, that the admirable fruits of his rare Learning, and this Geographical History among the rest may bear record. Besides which, he wrote an Arabian Grammar, highly commended by a great Linguist of Italy, who had the sight and examination thereof; as likewise a book of the lives of the Arabian Philosophers; and a discourse of the religion of Mahumet; with divers excellent Poems, and other monuments of his industry, which are not come to light. Now as concerning his Employments, were they not such as might well beseem a man of good worth? For (to omit how many courts and camps of princes he had frequented) did not he, as himself in his third book witnesseth, personally serve king Mahumet of Fez in his wars against Arzilla? And was he not at another time, as appeareth out of his second Book, in service and honourable place under the same king of Fez, and sent ambassador by him to the king of Maroco? Yea, how often in regard of his singular knowledge and judgement in the laws of those countries, was he appointed, and sometimes constrained at divers strange cities and towns through which he traveled, to become a judge and arbiter in matters of greatest moment? Moreover as touching his exceeding great Travels, had he not at the first been a More and a Mahometan in religion, and most skilful in the languages and customs of the Arabians and Africans, and for the most part traveled in Carovans, or under the authority, safe conduct, and commendation of great princes: I marvel much how ever he should have escaped so many thousands of imminent dangers. And (all the former notwithstanding) I marvel much more how ever he escaped them. For how many desolate cold mountains, and huge dry, and barren deserts passed he? How often was he in hazard to have been captived, or to 〈◊〉 had his throat cut by the prouling Arabians, and wild Moors? And how hardly many times escaped he the lions greedy mouth, and the devouring jaws of the Crocodile? But if you will needs have a brief journal of his travels: you may see in the end of his eight book, what he writeth for himself. Wherefore (saith he) if it shall please God to vouchsafe me longer life, I purpose to describe all the regions of Asia which I have traveled: to wit, Arabia Deserta, Arabia Petrea, Arabia Felix, the Asian part of Egypt, Armenia, and some part of Tartary; all which countries I saw and passed through in the time of my youth. Likewise I will describe my last voyages from Constantinople to Egypt, and from thence unto Italy, etc. Besides all which places he had also been at Tauris in Persia: and of his own country, and other African regions adjoining and remote, he was so diligent a traveler; that there was no kingdom, province, signory, or city; nor scarcely any town, village mountain, valley, river, or forest, etc. which he left unuisited. And so much the more credit and commendation deserveth this worthy History of his; in that it is (except the antiquities, and certain other incidents) nothing else but a large Itinerarium or journal of his African voyages: neither describeth he almost any one particular place, where himself had not sometime been an eyewitness. But, not to forget His conversion to Christianity, amidst all these his busy and dangerous travels, it pleased the divine providence, for the discovery and manifestation of God's wonderful works, and of his dreadful and just judgements performed in Africa (which before the time of john Leo, were either utterly concealed, or unperfectly and fabulously reported both by ancient and late writers) to deliver this author of ours, and this present Geographical History, into the hands of certain Italian Pirates, about the isle of Gerbi, situate in the gulf of Capes, between the cities of Tunis and Tripoli in Barbary. Being thus taken, the Pirates presented him and his Book unto Pope Leo the tenth: who esteeming of him as of a most rich and invaluable prize, greatly rejoiced at his arrival, and gave him most kind entertainment and liberal maintenance, till such time as he had won him to be baptised in the name of Christ, and to be called john Leo, after the Pope's own name. And so during his abode in Italy, learning the Italian tongue, he translated this book thereinto, being before written in Arabic. Thus much of john Leo. Now let us acquaint you with the History itself. First therefore from so worthy an author, how could an history proceed but of special worth and consequence? For proof whereof, I appeal unto the translations thereof into Latin, Italian, Spanish, French, English, and (if I be not deceived) into some other languages; which argue a general 〈◊〉 of the same. I appeal also to the grand and most judicial Cosmographer * Read pag. 58. of places undescribed by john Leo. Master john Baptista Ramusius, sometime Secretary to the state of Venice, who in the Preface to his first volume of voyages, so highly commendeth it to learned Fracastoro, and placeth it every word in the very forefront of his discourses, as the principal & most praisewoorthy of them all. And were renowned Ortelius alive, I would under correction report me to him; whether his map of Barbary and Biledulgerid, as also in his last Additament that of the kingdoms of Maroco and Fez, were not particularly and from point to point framed out of this present relation, which he also in two places at the least preferreth far before all other histories written of Africa. But to leave the testimonies of others, and to come nearer to the matter itself; like as our prime and peerless English Antiquary master William Camden in his learned Britannia, 〈◊〉 exactly described England, Scotland, Ireland, and the isles adjacent (the which by Leander for 〈◊〉, by Damianus a Goez briefly for Spain, by Belforest for France, by Munster for upper Germany, by Guiccardini for the Netherlandes, and by others for other countries hath been performed) so likewise this our author john Leo in the history ensuing hath so largely, particularly, and methodically deciphered the countries of Barbary, Numidia, Libya, The land of Negroes, and the hither part of Egypt, as (I take it) never any writer either before or since his time hath done. For if you shall thoroughly consider him, what kingdom, province, city, town, village, mountain, valley, river; yea, what temple, college, hospital, bathstove, Inn; or what other memorable matter doth he omit? So doth he most judicially describe the temperature of the climate, and the nature of the soil, as also the dispositions, manners, rites, customs, and most ancient pedigrees of the inhabitants, together with the alterations of religion and estate, the conquests and overthrows of the romans, Goths, and Arabians, and other things (by the way) right worthy the observation. So that the Africans may justly say to him, and the English to master Camden, as the prince of Roman orators did unto Marcus Varro the learnedst of his nation. Nos in patria nostra peregrinantes errantesque tanquam hospites, tui Tull. Acad, quaest, lib. libri quasi domum deduxerunt, ut possemus aliquando, qui & ubi essemus, agnoscere. Tuaetatem patriae, tu descriptiones temporum, tu sacrorum iura, tu domesticam, tu bellicam disciplinam, tu sedem regionum & locorum, etc. Which may thus be rudely 〈◊〉. wandering up and down like Pilgrims in our own native soil, thy books have as it were led us the right way home; that we might at length acknowledge both who and where we are. Thou hast revealed the antiquity of our nation, the order of times, the rites of our religion, our manner of government both in peace and war, yea thou hast described the situations of countries and places, etc. Now as concerning the additions before and after this Geographical History; having had some spare-howers since it came first under the press; I thought good (both for the Readers satisfaction, and that john Leo might not appear too solitary upon the stage) to bestow a part of them in collecting and digesting the same. The chief scope of this my enterprise is, to make a brief and cursory description of all those main lands and isles of Africa, which mine author in his nine books hath omitted. For he in very deed leaveth untouched all those parts of the African continent which lie to the south of the fifteen kingdoms of Negroes, and to the east of Nilus. For the manifestation whereof, I have (as truly as I could conjecture) in the map adjoined to this book, caused a list or border of small pricks to be engraven; which running westward from the mouth of Nilus to The straits of Gibraltar, and from thence southward to the coast of Guinie, and then eastward to the banks of Nilus, and so northward to the place where it began; doth with advantage include all places treated of by Leo, and excludeth the residue which by way of Preface we have described before the beginning of his African history. Likewise at the latter end I have put down certain relations of the great Princes of Africa, and of the Christian, jewish, Mahometan, and Gentilish religions there 〈◊〉. The Princes of greatest account either inhabiting or at least possessing large territories there, are first The grand Neguz or Christian Emperor of Abassia or the higher Ethiopia, commonly called Presbyter john or (as Zagazabo his own The variety of this emperors names read in a marginal note Pag. 12. of places undescribed by john Leo. ambassador would have him) Precious john; but because 〈◊〉 all the Ethiopic relation of Francis Aluarez, being the best that ever was written of those parts, he is continually named Prete janni, in imitation of him I also most commonly call him by that name. And so likewise though Zagazabo (for the more magnificent reputation of his prince) will have his dominions called Ethiopia; yet with the consent of some approved authors, and also to distinguish the country of this emperor from many other regions situate both in the higher Ethiopia, and in the lower; I have set it down in my map, and in my discourses do most usually speak thereof under the name of Abassia. The other great Princes entreated of in the said relations, are The K. of Spain, The Turkish Emperor, The * Or Xeriso, or Serifo. Xarifo otherwise called The Miramonin, or the king of Maroco Sus and Fez, and the emperor of Monomotapa. My method in the discourse before Leo is, after a general preface of Africa, to begin at the Red sea, where Leo endeth; and thence (as well in the description of the main lands, as of the isles by him untouched) to proceed on southerly to the cape of Buena esperança; from which cape we return toward the north, describing all along the western countries and isles of Africa, till we have brought our whole descriptions to an end upon the most southwesterly parts 〈◊〉 Barbary, where our author john Leo beginneth his. Et quoniam (as one saith) turpe non est, per quos profeceris, agnoscere: my principal authors out of whom I have gathered this store, are, of the ancienter note, Ptolemey, Strabo, Pliny, Diodorus Siculus, etc. and amongst later writers, I have helped myself out of sundry discourses in the first Italian volume of Baptista Ramusio, as likewise out of john Barros, Castanneda, Ortelius, Osorius de reb. gest. Eman. Matthew Dresserus, Quadus, Isolario del mundo, john Huighen van Linschoten, & out of the Hollanders late voyages to the east Indies, and to San Tomés: but I am much more beholding to the history of Philippo Pigafetta, to the Ethiopic relations of Francis Aluarez, & of Damianus a Goez, and beyond all comparison (both for matter and method) most of all, to the learned Astronomer and Geographer Antonius Maginus of Padua, and to the universal relations written in Italian by G. B. B. And here, before I surcease, I must admonish the Reader of certain faults escaped in some copies: as namely in the description of the isles in the Barbarian bay, Açotatado, for Açotado; in a marginal note over against the description of Tombuto in the seventh book of john Leo, Money for Gold; in the relation of the Christianity of Egypt, Hypostasis twice together, in stead of Hypostases; and in the discourse of the Christianity of Congo, Paulo Aquitino, for Panso Aquitimo. Other literal faults (if there be any) will not be hard for the Reader himself to amend. AFRICA map A general description of all Africa, together with a comparison of the ancient and new names of all the principal countries and provinces therein. THat part of inhabited land extending southward, Africa otherwise called Libya. which we call Africa, and the Greeks Libya, is one of the three general parts of the world known unto our ancestors; which in very The greater part of Africa unknown in 〈◊〉 ages. deed was not thoroughly by them discovered, both because the Inlands could not be travailed in regard of huge deserts full of dangerous sands, which being driven with the wind, put travailers in extreme hazard of their lives; and also by reason of the long and perilous navigation upon the African coasts, for which cause it was by very few of ancient times compassed by navigation, much less searched or entirely known. Of which few, the principal were Hanno a Carthaginian captain sent by the governors of that commonwealth When Africa was sailed round about. for discovery of the said land, and one Eudoxus that fled from Ptolemaeus Lathyrus, the king of Alexandria. Howbeit in these latter times it hath been often * And since also by the English, French, and Dutch. by the Portugals sailed round about, and diligently searched, especially along the shore, even from the straits of Gibraltar to the entrance of the red sea: * 〈◊〉 Dias doubled the cape before; but returned fearefuily without proceeding any farther. The 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉 of this word Africa. but the first Portugal that ever doubled the cape of Buena esperança, and coasted the south and southeast parts of Africa, in former 〈◊〉 unknown, was Vasco da Gama, in the year 1497. who from hence sailed to Calicut in the east Indies, to the unspeakable gain of the Portugals. To omit john Leo his etymologies of this name Africa; Festus will have it to be derived from the Greek word 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, which signifieth horror or cold, and from 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 the particle privative, as who should say, Africa is a place free from all horror and extremity of cold, because it lieth open to the heavens, and is sandy, dry, and desert. Others say that it is called Africa quasi Aprica, that is exposed and subject to the scorching beams of the sun, the most part there of lying between the Tropics. josephus will have Why 〈◊〉 was called Libya. it so called from 〈◊〉 one of the posterity of Abraham, and others from Afer son to Hercules of Libya. But it was by the greeks called Libya, because it was in old time conquered by Libs the king of Mauritania. In the holy Scriptures it is called Chamesis, by the Arabians and Ethiopians 〈◊〉, and by the Indians Besecath. In situation & shape this land of Africa is almost an islle, being by a very The situation and shape of Africa. small and narrow neckland (passing between the Mediterran sea and the gulf of Arabia, 〈◊〉 the red sea) conjoined to Asia, and in extension of ground being almost twice as big as Europe, albeit for inhabitants it is not half so populous. Wherefore though in longitude from west to east Africa A comparison between Africa and Europe. be shorter than Europe in some places, yet extendeth it so far unto the south, that Europe in that respect is nothing comparable unto it: for Africa containeth almost seventy degrees in latitude, whereas Europe stretcheth but five and thirty degrees: moreover Africa is more uniform and spacious; but Europe is of a more distracted and manifold shape, being in sundry The causes why Africa is so slenderly inhabited. places dispersed & restrained by the sea. Howbeit notwithstanding Africa hath far greater extension of ground than Europe, yet is it not so populous, nor so commodious to inhabit: for the land of Africa is in many places unhabitable; the principal causes whereof are, the scarcity of water, the barrenness of the soil, being either covered with 〈◊〉 sand, dust, or ashes, or else being subject to extreme heat of the sun: also there Sandie seas in Africa. are certain dangerous heaps of sand, which being raised by the wind, are driven up and down like the waves of a tempestuous sea: In brief, there are such abundance of venomous and hurtful creatures, that for fear of them the land in some places can very hardly, & in others by no means be manured or inhabited, be it never so fruitful. Wherefore in divers parts this region lieth waste and unpeopled: howbeit where it is inhabited, it is exceeding fertile, and that especially in the north parts thereof, lying over against Europe, where (according to the report of many historiographers, and cosmographers) it was in ancient times abundantly furnished with inhabitants: so likewise all the western coast between Cabo de buena esperança, and Cabo Negro situate about nineteen degrees of southerly latitude, containeth many plains, hills, valleys, and other places most fruitful and pleasant, it being there a continual spring, and elsewhere also it is very fertile, as it shall be declared more at large in the particular descriptions of each region. The Equinoctial circle doth in a manner divide Africa in the very The position of Africa, according to the heavens. midst thereof; from whence it stretcheth not only to each tropic, but also twelve degrees almost beyond them both: wherefore the greater part is comprised between the said Tropiques under the Torrid or burnt Zone, for which only cause the ancient writers supposed it to be unhabitable and desert in so many places: which indeed is much rather to be ascribed to the waste wilderness, the barren and sandy soil, and the 〈◊〉 of waters and fountains. It comprehendeth therefore fully and perfecty the three first northerly climates, and so many and the like climates southerly; for it is situate between the eleventh north Parallel, and the eleventh Antiparallele, or south Parallel, both which are equally distant from the Equinoctial on either side. But about either of the foresaid extremes, the longest day consisteth of fowerteene hours and one fourth part, and about the midst, of twelve hours exactly. Likewise as touching the longitude, Africa stretcheth from the Meridian under four degrees to the Meridian under fower-score and two degrees of longitude, to wit, from Cabo Roxo, or the Red cape on the west, to Cape Guardafu on the east side, between which two capes is the greatest breadth of Africa. Africa hath too narrow bounds allotted unto it by john Leo and certain The bounds of Africa. others, for they disjoin the greater part of Egypt and all Ethiopia therefrom. Wherefore it is more convenient in this behalf to follow Ptolemey, and the late writers, limiting the same on the north with the Mediterran sea, and the straits of Gibraltar; on the east with the Red sea or the Arabian gulf, and the small neckland of Asia passing between the Mediterran sea, and the said gulf; on the south (at the cape of Buena esperança, where it endeth in form of a wedge) with the main Ocean partly called the Ethiopian sea, as being near unto the land of Ethiopia; and on the west, from the hither side of the Equinoctial line, with the Atlantike Ocean, (called by Ptolemey Mare Occiduum, by Dionysius Hesperium, and part thereof by the Spaniards Mar del Norte) but beyond the Equinoctial line it is bounded westward with the Ethiopian sea. Africa hath very many and most exceeding great mountains, the principal The mountains of Africa. whereof is Mount-Atlas, whose tops of incredible height rising out of Mount Atlas. the midst of sandy deserts, exalt themselves above the clouds. This mountain beginneth westward at that place, where it distinguisheth the Ocean by the name of Atlanticus: from whence by a perpetual ridge, after many windings and turnings, it extendeth east toward the confines of Egypt: moreover it is in most places round, hard to ascend, craggy, steep, impassable, cold, barren, shady, and every where full of woods and fountains, with clouds always hovering about the tops thereof, being forlorn and desolate toward the Ocean, but over against * The provinces of 〈◊〉, Alger, Bugia, Constantina, and Tunis. Africa minor, most fertile, and abounding with plenty of corn and of thick woods which are clad with a kind of moss no whit inferior to silk. The tops of this mountain are covered with deep snows even in the midst of summer: and sometimes when the North winds blow any thing sharp, the snow falleth in such abundance, that it hideth the trees growing upon the sides thereof, and is deadly both to man and beast. Moreover the fountains which are here found, are so extreme cold in Extreme cold fountains. the hottest of summer, as if a man should dip his hand therein but for a short space, it would lose both life, sense, and motion. Besides Mount Atlas Mountains called Os Picos 〈◊〉: that is to say, sharp pointed. john 〈◊〉: Dec. 1. lib. 8. cap. 4. those mountains likewise are very famous, which being situate on the south part of Africa, are called by the Portugals Os Picosfragosos: for by reason of their surpassing height and craggy cliffs it is impossible to scale them, and they are bare, forlorn, and destitute of all relief. Likewise the cape commonly called Sierra Leonais as it were framed out of an exceeding high mountain, which may be kenned a mighty distance off: the top of this mountain is continually overshadowed with clouds, which often send forth dreadful thunder and lightning: whereupon some think it to have been called by Ptolemey, and by Hanno of Carthage, The chariot of the gods. The mountains of the moon also, known of old, and situate under the Lunae montes. Tropic of Capricorn, being very high and craggy, are inhabited by barbarous and savage people, near unto which are valleys of such exceeding depth, as if they reached to the centre of the earth. Likewise there are certain mountains in Angola called Cabambe containing most rich siluer-mines, etc. Also in Africa are certain mighty lakes, which for their extension seem The lake of Zembre, which by some others is placed under the Equinoctial. rather to be seas, the principal whereof called by some Zembre, being situate by a number of huge mountains, and distant from the Equinoctial eleven or twelve degrees to the south, containeth about five hundred leagues in compass, out of which lake do spring the famous rivers of Nilus, Zaire, and Cuama, and some affirm very strange sea-monsters to be therein. Africa likewise hath many exceeding great rivers, as namely Nilus, Niger, The rivers of Africa. Senaga, Gambra, Zaire, Abagni, Tagassi, Coluez, Coavo, Cuama, and Maniche, or Rio del spirito santo, all which are in a manner of the same quality and disposition; for with their yeerlie in undations they do most wonderfully fatten and enrich the soil of the territories adjoining. Nilus' the Nilus. most famous river of the world, dividing Egypt in the midst, and with his overflows making it most fruitful, continueth in his yearly increase forty days, and forty days in decrease; to wit, from the seventeenth of june to the sixth of October: and this river after a mighty long course through Ethiopia and Egypt, dischargeth his streams into the Mediterran sea. The river of Niger, running through the land of Negroes, called of old (as Solinus Niger. supposed) by the natural inhabitants Astabus, and (according to Marmolius) Hued Nijar in the Arabian tongue, is now esteemed by Paulus iovius to be Gambra, and by Cadamosta the river of Senaga; but that both of them are deceived, it is evident out of the description of Sanutus, who putteth down the two foresaid rivers severally, and thinketh Niger to be that which is now called Rio grand. This river taketh his beginning, as some think, out of a certain desert to the east, called Seu, or springeth rather out of a lake, and after a long race, falleth at length into the western Ocean. It increaseth also, for the space of forty days like Nilus, and is for so long space decreasing about the very same time; by which inundation it bringeth such fruitfulness unto all the land of Negroes (certain mountains only excepted) as no place in the world can be imagined more fertile. Senaga or Canaga, a most notable river, called, as some think, Baratis by Ptolemey, and for the length thereof, and manifold strange creatures therein contained, comparable to Nilus, severeth by his winding channel the barren and naked soil, from the green and fruitful. Moreover it maketh a separation between nations of sundry colours: for the people on this side are of a dead ash-colour, lean, and of a small stature; but on the farther side they are exceeding black, of tall and manly stature, and very well proportioned: howbeit near unto the river on either side, they are of a mean colour, complexion, and stature between both the above mentioned. It falleth into the sea by two mouths, the principal whereof is about a mile broad, up into the which the sea entereth almost 60. miles. It springeth (according to john Barros) out of two lakes (the greater whereof is now called the lake of Gaoga, but heretofore by Ptolemey Chelonidae paludes, and the lesser Ptolemey calleth Nubaepalus) as also out of a river named by Ptolemey Ghir. This river of Senaga hath great variety of strange fishes, and other creatures that These two rivers of Senaga and Gambra are not certainly known, whether they be main rivers of themselves, or branches and mouths of Niger. live in the water, as namely, sea-horses, crocodiles, winged serpents, and such like: near unto it also are great store of Elephants, wild bores, lions, and leopards. Gambra or Gambea a very great river, lying between Senaga and Niger, and esteemed by Sanutus to be that which Ptolemey called Stachir, fetcheth his original from the lake of Libya, and from the fountains which Ptolemey assigneth to the river of Niger: this river in greatness and depth exceedeth Senaga, and hath many unknown rivers falling thereinto, and bringeth forth all kinds of living creatures that Senaga doth. In the midst of this river standeth the Isle of Elephants, so called, in regard of The isle of Elephants. great numbers of those beasts. The river Zaire beginneth out of the same lake from whence Nilus springeth: this being one of the greatest rivers of all Africa, and utterly unknown unto ancient writers, containeth at the mouth eight and twenty miles in breadth, having a very safe harbour for ships to ride in: also there are many and great Islands in the channel thereof, and sundry rivers do fall thereinto, the principal whereof are Vumba, Barbela, Coanza, and Lelunda: in brief, this river Zaire running through These two rivers of Cuama and Magnice (according to Philippo Pigafetta) spring both out of the great lake and are not branches of one river. the kingdom of Congo, disgorgeth itself into the main Ethiopian sea. Out of the same lake, which is the very fountain of Nilus, springeth another notable and famous river, which after a long race toward the south and east, is divided into two branches: the northerly branch, which is exceeding great (for it 〈◊〉 fix great rivers thereinto, and is navigable for the space of seven hundred miles) being properly called Cuama, and the other branch more southerly, which is very great also, being named Manich or Magnice, or Rio del spirito santo. The promontories, capes, or headlands of Africa be very many, the most The promontories or capes of Africa. famous and principal whereof are, The cape of Buena esperança, or good hope, Cabo verde, and Cabo de los corrientes. The cape of Buena esperança Cabo de buena esperanza. or good hope is the extreme southerly point of all Africa, being a most renowned and dangerous promontory, which in the year one thousand four hundred ninety seven was the second time discovered by Vasco da Gama at the commandment of Don Emanuel king of Portugal: this cape the mariners were wont to call the lion of the Ocean, and the tempestuous cape, by reason of the ruffling and roaring of the winds, which they found there for the most part very boisterons: for the sea thereabout is exceeding rough, by reason of the continual fury of the winds; neither will any navigatours touch upon the cape, except they be enforced by mere necessity. Cabo verde or The green head-land, is esteemed by some to be the same Cabo 〈◊〉. which Ptolemey calleth Promontorium Arsinarium, & is compassed on either side by the rivers of Senega and Gambra. Cabo de los corrientes, otherwise Cabo de los corrientes. called the cape of San Sebastian, stretcheth forth itself right over against the south end of the great Isle of Madagascar: it is a cape well known, by reason it is so dangerous to double, which the Moors durst not pass for a very long time. And here as concerning the strange beasts, fishes, serpents, trees, plants, and roots of Africa, as likewise touching the diseases, whereto the African people are most subject; and the variety of languages (excepting the Chaldaean, Egyptian, Turkish, Italian, and Spanish tongues) which are now and have been of ancient times spoken in Africa; I refer the Reader to the first and last books of john Leo, and to other places, where they are at large and purposely entreated of. Moreover this part of the world is inhabited especially by five principal The inhabitants of Africa. nations, to wit, by the people called Cafri or Cafates, that is to say outlaws, or lawless, by the Abassins, the Egyptians, the Arabians, and the Africans or Moors, properly so called; which last are of two kinds, namely The diversity of religions in Africa. white or tawny Moors, and Negroes or black Moors. Of all which nations some are Gentiles which worship Idols; others of the sect of Mahumet; some others Christians; and some jewish in religion; the greatest part of which people are thought to be descended from Cham the cursed son of Noah; except some Arabians of the lineage of Sem, which afterward passed into Africa. Now the Arabians inhabiting Africa are divided into many several kinds, possessing divers and sundry habitations and regions; for some dwell near the sea shore, which retain the name of Arabians; but others inhabiting the inland, are called Baduini. There be likewise infinite swarms of Arabians, which with their wives and children, lead a vagrant and roguish life in the deserts, using tents in stead of houses: these are notable thieves, and very troublesome both to their neighbour-inhabitants, and also to merchants: for which cause travelers and merchants dare not pass over the African deserts alone, but only in Carovans, which are great companies of merchants riding, and transporting their goods upon their camels and asses: who go very strong, and in great numbers, for fear of the said thievish Arabians. Ptolemey in his fourth book of Geography divideth Africa into twelve The ancient division of Africa by Ptolemey; and a comparison of the ancient with the modern names. regions or provinces: namely, Mauritania Tingitana, Mauritania Caesariensis, Numidia, Africa propria, Cyrenaica, Marmarica, Libya propria, AEgyptus superior, AEgyptus inferior, Libya interior, AEthiopia sub AEgypto, & AEthiopia interior. Mauritania Tingitana, the most rich and beautiful cowtrey of Africa, Mauritania Tingitana, being all one with the kingdoms of Maroco and Fez. so named of the city Tingis, which we at this day call Tanger, was sometimes also (as Pliny witnesseth) called Borgundiana: moreover others have called it by the names of Mauritania Sitiphensis, Hispania Transfretana, and Hispania Tingitana: but Solinus termeth the same Mauritania inferior. The inhabitants were of old named by the Grecians Maurusijs, and by the romans Mauri, but the Spaniards at this present term them Alarabes. In this part of Africa are now contained two stately kingdoms, namely the kingdom of Maroco, 〈◊〉 the kingdom of Fez; both which are environed with the mountains of Atlas, the Ocean and the Mediterran seas, and to the east with the river of Muluia. Mauritania Caesariensis, named according to the city of Caesaria, Mauritania Caesariensis called at this present Tremizen, and Aiger. which was so called after the name of Claudius Caesar, at this present bearing the name of Tiguident or Tegdemt, which word in the Arabian tongue signifieth ancient; was by Victor Vticensis, termed Mauritania maior; by Strabo Massilia, and Massaesilia, and the inhabitants thereof by Pliny Massaesuli. At this present it containeth the kingdom of Tremizen, as Dominias Niger, and Girava are of opinion. Numidia the ancient, called in the time of Ptolomey, The new, but by Numidia the ancient, containing Bugia, Constantina, Bona, Mezzab, etc. the greeks (as Pliny testifieth) Metagonitis, and the inhabitants thereof Numidae, and Nomades; is that region which lieth between The great river, and the river Megerada, over which country king Masinissa bare rule. It containeth now (as I conjecture) the provinces of Bugia, Constantina, Bona, and Mezzab. Howbeit at this present we understand by Numidia that region which lieth between the mountains of Atlas and the Libyan deserts, called by john Leo and Marmolius Biledulgerid, or the land of Dates, because this is the only region for plenty of Dates, in all Africa. Africa propria, situate upon the Mediterran sea, between the regions Africa 〈◊〉 all one with the kingdom of Tunis. of old Numidia, and the Cyrene, is called by Pliny Zeugitania, who divideth it into the ancient and the new. At this present it is the kingdom of Tunis, for it containeth Byzacium, which by Strabo is accounted a part of Africa propria. The head of this province in times past was Carthage, whereof at this present there are nothing but ruins extant. Cyrene, or Cyrenaica, by Pliny called Pentapolis, and by the Hebrews Cyrene now called Mesrata. Lebahim, is esteemed by Girava to be at this present called Corene, and by Andrew Thevet, Assadib: but john Leo and Marmolius name it Mesrata. Marmarica is called by Pliny Mareotis, and Libya: howbeit at this present Marmarica comprehended in the desert of Barcha. the desert of Barcha, described by john Leo in his sixth book, containeth a great part of Cyrenaica, and all Marmarica. But Libya propria, retaineth till this present the name of Libya, and is Libya propria, called Sarra. that part which the Arabians call Sarra, which word signifieth a desert. Both the ancient Ethiopias' are now possessed by the Abassins, under AEthiopia, now called Abassia. the dominion of Prete janni. Egypt retaineth even till this day, the ancient name. The best modern division of Africa, for these our times is to add unto the four general parts, Barbaria, Numidia, Libya, and the land of Negroes, set down by john Leo, three other general parts to wit, Egypt; the inner or the upper Ethiopia, containing Troglodytica, Nubia, and the empire of Prete janni; and the lower, or the extreme Ethiopia, stretching from the said empire along the sea-coast, and through the Inland even to the Cape of Buena Esperança. Thus much of Africa in general. Now it remaineth that we briefly describe in particular all the principal main lands, and islands, (undescribed by john Leo) which thereto belong, or adjoin; beginning first with the Red sea one of the chief limits of Africa, and from thence shaping our course along the eastern or farthest quarters thereof, through the dominions of Prete janni, the land of Zanguebar, the empires of Mohenemuge, and Monomotapa, and the region of Cafraria: and then, having doubled the cape of Buena esperança, range we along the western parts by the kingdoms of Angola, Congo, Anzichi, Benin, Ghinea, and by the capes of Sierra Leona, Capo verde, and the castle of Arguin, till we have brought ourselves to finish our course, upon the most southwesterne parts of Barbary, from whence our author john Leo beginneth his. A particular description of all the known borders, coasts and inlands of Africa, which john Leo hath left undescribed: collected out of sundry ancient and late writers. Of the red sea. THe red sea called by others the Arabian gulf, and the straight of Mecha, containing in length twelve hundred miles, and in breadth but one hundred, is divided into three partitions or channels; the middlemost whereof being called The large or deep sea, is without danger navigable both day and night, because it hath from five and twenty to fifty fathoms water, especially from the isle of Camaran even to Suez standing at the very bottom of the gulf: the other two partitions, which are the eastern and western extremities, are encumbered with so many little isles and rocks, as it is impossible to sail over them but only by daylight, and with most expert pilots, which are to be hired at a small island lying overthwart the This isle I take to be Babelmandel. very mouth or entrance of the red sea; which the ancient kings of Egypt (if the report of Strabo be true) barred with a chain, from the African, to the Arabian side. This sea is very scarce of fish; perhaps because there fall no rivers thereinto, which with their fresh and sweet waters do much delight and nourish the fish; and the strand or shore thereof is destitute of all green grass, herbs, or weeds. The ports and havens of this sea are for the most part very dangerous and difficult to enter, by reason of the manifold windings and turnings, which must be made, to avoid the rocks. At the very head or North end of this gulf, standeth Suez, which heretofore Suez called of old Heroum civitas, and Hazion Geber. seemeth to have been called Civitas Heroum, and in the times of David and Solomon Hazion-Geber, from whence the fleets of those parts were sent to Ophir for gold and other rich commodities. Under the Egyptian Ptolemeys and the Romans, this town flourished exceedingly, by reason of the infinite quantity of merchandise brought thither from the east Indies, and Arabia. But now it is nothing so frequented; partly in regard of the mighty concourse and traffic which Mecha draweth unto itself, and partly by reason of the Portugals conveyance of spices and other Indian commodities about the cape of Buena esperança. At this present the great Arsenale signifieth a storehouse for munition, and for all necessaries to build, repair, and furnish a fleet. Turk hath there an Arsenal, with certain galleys, for fear of the Portugals aforesaid: against whom there have been dispatched from this place two great fleets, one for the assailing of 〈◊〉, and another for Ormuz. Howbeit because all the countries round about are utterly destitute of wood, it is a matter of infinite charge to furnish forth a fleet from hence; for they are constrained to fetch their timber as far as Caramania, partly by sea, and partly upon camels backs. At this town of Suez they have no fresh water; but all their water is brought them from a place six miles distant upon camels backs, being notwithstanding brackish and bitter. The western shore of the Red sea is inhabited with people called in old Troglodytae were a people that lived in caves under the earth to avoid the extreme heat, being derived 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. time Troglodytae, which at this present do all of them yield obedience to the great Turk: who considering, that the fleets of the Portugals entered very often into the Red sea, and were there received by the subjects of Prete Gianni, and did him great damage; hath thereupon taken occasion not only to conquer the Troglodytae, but also to waste and subdue a great part of Barnagasso, the most Northerly province of the said Prete. So that the audacious attempts of the Portugals in those parts have bred two most A great part of Barnagasso subdued by the Turk. dangerous and bad effects; the one is, that the Arabians have most strongly fortified all their sea-townes, which before lay naked and without fortification; the other, for that the Turk also hath been occasioned thereby to make war against the Prete. Wherefore they ought not to have undertaken any such enterprise, but with full resolution and sufficient forces to accomplish the same: for lesser attempts serve to no other end, but only to rouse and arm the enemy, which was before secure and quiet. Neither is it here to be omitted, that in the foresaid sea, a man can sail in no ships nor barks, but only those of the great Turk, or at least with his licence, paying unto him for tribute a good part of the freight. For this purpose he hath certain Magazines or storehouses of timber, which is brought partly from the gulf of Satalia, and partly from Nicomedia, and other places upon the Euxin sea, unto Rosetto and Alexandria; from whence it is afterward transported to Cairo, and thence to Suez. This sea is called the Red sea, not in regard that the waters thereofbe all red, but (as some think) from certain red rushes which grow upon the shore: and (as others are of opinion) from a kind of red earth which in sundry places it hath at the bottom: which earth dieth not the very substance of the water red, but by transparence causeth it (especially near the shore) to appear of that colour. Africa Troglodytica. THat sandy, barren, and desert part of Africa which lieth between Nilus and the Red sea, especially to the south of the tropic, was in old times inhabited by the Troglodytae, a people so called, because of their dwelling in caves under the ground. Along this western coast of the Red sea runneth a ridge of mountains, which being an occasion that the inland rivers can not fall into the said sea, they are forced to discharge themselves into Nilus. The foresaid mountains and sea coast are now inhabited by Mahumetans, being partly Arabians, and partly Turks: which not many years ago have attempted to sail that sea, and to invade the regions adjoining. The natural inhabitants are a rude barbarous people, and very poor and beggarly. The chief places of habitation are Corondol, a special good port; Alcosser a place well known, because that near unto it the said mountains open themselves, and give passage to the bringing in of the fruits and commodities of Abassia; Suachen esteemed one of the principal ports in all the straits, and being made by an island. Here resideth the Bassa of the great Turk, which is called the governor of Abassia, with three thousand soldiers or thereabout. Next followeth Ercoco the only haven town of the Prete, lying over against the little isle of Mazua: and here the mountains make an other opening or passage, for transporting of victuals out of the land of the said Prete janni. From hence almost to the very entrance of the Red sea, the coast is at this present uninhabited, forlorn, and desert. Likewise from Suachen to Mazua is a continual wood, the trees whereof are but of small worth. Just within the said entrance standeth the town and port of Vela, under the jurisdiction of the king of Dancali a Moor. Upon all this west shore of the Red sea, as likewise upon the contrary east shore, scarcity of water is the cause, why there are so few, and so small places of habitation: and the people run and flock together, where they may find any pit or fountain of water. Some curious reader might here expect, because I have now passed so near the frontiers of Egypt, that I should make an exact description of that most famous and fruitful province, and likewise of the great city of Alcair, and of the inundation and decrease of Nilus: all which, because they are expressed in most orient & lively colours by our author john Leo; I should show myself both injurious to him, and tedious to all judicial readers, in anticipating and forestall that, before the beginning of his book, which he so near the end doth in such large and particular wise entreat of. Now therefore let us proceed to the upper or inner Ethiopia, beginning with the first and most northerly province thereof called Nubia. Nubia. PAssing therefore westward from the Island of Siene, you enter into the province of Nubia, bordering on the west upon Gaoga, eastward upon the river Nilus, towards the North, upon Egypt, and southward upon the desert of Goran. The inhabitants thereof called by Strabo 〈◊〉, live at this present (as Francisco Aluarez reporteth) a most miserable and wretched kind of life: for having lost the sincerity and light of the gospel, they do embrace infinite corruptions of the jewish and Mahometan religions. At the same time when the foresaid Aluarez was in Abassia, there came certain messengers out of Nubia, to make suit unto the Prete, that he would send them priests, and such persons as might preach and administer the sacraments unto them. But he returned answer, that he could not in regard of the scarcity of great clergiemen in his dominions: The said messengers reported, that the Nubians had sent often to Rome for a bishop; but being afterward by the invasions of the Moors and the calamity of war, cut short of that assistance, they fell for want of teachers and ministers, into extreme ignorance of Christian religion, and by little and little were infected with the impious and abominable sects of the jews and mahometans. Some Portugals travailing to those parts, saw many churches destroyed by the hands of the Arabians, and in some places the pictures of saints painted upon the walls. They are governed by women, and call their Queen Gava. Their principal city called Dangala, and consisting Dangala the head city of Nubia. of about ten thousand households, is a place of great traffic, because it is so near unto Egypt and the river Nilus. All their other habitations are villages and base cottages. Their houses are built of clay, and covered with straw. The chief commodities of this region are rice, stone-sugar, sanders, ivory, (for they take many elephants) as likewise abundance of civet, and gold in great plenty. The country is for the most part sandy: howbeit there are certain mighty lakes, by the benefit whereof a great part of Nubia is watered and made fruitful. The Isle of Meroe. MEroe called at this time by the names of Guengare, Amara, and Nobe, being the greatest and fairestisle which Nilus maketh, and resembled by Herodotus to the shape of a target, containeth in breadth a thousand, and in length three thousand stadios or furlongs. It aboundeth with gold, silver, copper, iron, Eben-wood, palmtrees, and other such commodities as are in Nubia. Some write, that there grow canes or reeds of so huge a bigness, that the people make boats of them. here also you have mineral salt, and lions, elephants, and leopards. This island is inhabited by Mahumetans, who are confederate with the Moors against Prete janni. Strabo affirmeth, that in old time the authority of the priests of this island was so great, that by a mean and ordinary messenger they would command the king to murder himself, and would substitute an other in his room. But at length, one king having in a certain temple put all the said priests to death, quite abolished that monstrous custom. And here as Nilus unfoldeth himself into two branches, to embrace this Island, he receiveth from the east the river of Abagni, and from the west the river Sarabotto, which have likewise other smaller rivers falling into them. The Abassins are of opinion, that the Queen of Saba, which traveled so far to hear the wisdom of Solomon, was mistress of this isle. Paulus jonius saith, here are three kings, one a Gentile, the second a Moor, and the third a Christian, subject unto the Prete. From Meroe to Siene it is accounted fifteen days journey by water. * Or AEthiopia the higher. Abassia, or the empire of Prete janni. THe Abassins are a people subject to * Commonly called in Latin writers, Presbyter johannes, by the Moors Asiclabassi, and by the Abassins his own subjects Acegue, that is, Emperor, & Neguz which importeth a king, and Belul also, being all one with Encoe in the Chaldean tongue, both which words signify precious or high. Prete janni: whose empire (if we consider the style which he useth in his letters) hath most ample confines. For he entituleth himself emperor of the great and higher Ethiopia, king of Goiame, which (as Botero supposeth) is situate between Nilus and Zaire; of Vangue a kingdom beyond Zaire; of Damut which confineth with the land of the Anzichi; and towards the south he is called king of Cafate and Bagamidri, two provinces bordering upon the first great lake, which is the original fountain of Nilus; as likewise of the kingdoms of Xoa, Fatigar, Angote, Baru, Baaliganze, Adea, Amara, Ambea, Vaguc, Tigremahon, Sabaim, where the Queen of Saba governed, and lastly of * Or Barnagasso Barnagaes, and lord as far as Nubia, which bordereth upon Egypt. But at this present the centre or midst of his Empire (as john Barros writeth) is the lake of Barcena. For it extendeth eastward toward the Red sea, as far as Suaquen, the space of two hundred twenty and two leagues. Howbeit between the sea and his dominions runneth a ridge of mountains inhabited by Moors, who are masters of all the sea-coast along, except the port of Ercoco, which belongeth to the Prete. And likewise on the west, his empire is restrained by another mountainous ridge stretching along the river of Nilus; where are found most rich mines of gold; Most rich gold-mines. amongst which are the mines of Damut and of Sinassij, wholly in the possession of Gentiles which pay tribute unto the Prete. Northward it is bounded by an imaginary line supposed to be drawn from Suachen to the beginning of the isle Meroe above mentioned; which line extendeth an hundred and five and twenty leagues. From thence the Abassin borders trend south somewhat crookedly in manner of a bow, as far as the kingdom of Adea (from the mountains whereof springeth a river called by Ptolemey * And by the late writers 〈◊〉. Raptus which falleth into the sea about Melinde) for the space of two hundred and fifty nine leagues; next unto the which borders, inhabit certain Gentiles of black colour, with curled hair. And here the 〈◊〉 empire is limited by the kingdom of Adel, the head city whereof called Arar, standeth in the latitude nine degrees. So that all this great empire may contain in compass six hundred threescore and two leagues, little more or less. It is refreshed and watered by two mighty rivers which convey their streams into Nilus, called by Ptolemey Astaboras and Astapus, and by the natural inhabitants Abagni and Tagassi; the first whereof taketh his original from the lake of Barcena, and the second from the lake of Colue. Barcena lieth in seven degrees of north latitude; & Colue under the very Equinoctial. The first (besides Abagni) engendereth also the river of Zeila: and the second (besides Tagassi) giveth essence to the river of Quilimanci. Between Abagni and the Red sea lieth the province of Barnagasso: between Abagni and Tagassi are the kingdoms of Angote and Fatigar; and more towards the * Sinus Barbaricus, a mighty gulf on the backside of Africa, stretching (as some will have it) from 4. degrees of northerly to 17. of southerly latitude. bay of Barbarians, the provinces of Adea and of Baru; and somewhat lower, that of Amara. In brief, beyond the river of Tagassi lie the regions of Bileguanzi, and of Tigremahon. The Abassins have no great knowledge of Nilus by reason of the mountains which divide them from it; for which cause they call Abagni the father of rivers. Howbeit they say that upon Nilus do inhabit two great and populous nations; one of jews towards the west, under the government of a mighty king; the other more southerly, consisting of amazons or warlike women; whereof we will speak more at large in our relation of Monomotapa. Throughout all the dominion of the Prete there is not any one city of importance, either for multitude of inhabitants, for magnificent buildings, or for any other respect. For the greatest towns there, contain not above two thousand households; the houses being (cottagelike) reared up with clay and covered with straw, or such like base matter. Also Ptolemey entreating of these parts, maketh mention but of three or four cities only, which he appointeth to the south of the Isle Meroe. Howbeit in some places upon the frontiers of Abassia there are certain towns very fairly built, and much frequented for traffic. The Portugals in their travails throughout the empire have often declared unto the Abassins, how much better it were, for avoiding of the outrageous injuries and losses daily inflicted by the Moors and mahometans both upon their goods and persons, if the emperor would build cities and castles strongly walled and fortified. Whereunto they made answer, that the power of their Neguz, or emperor, consisted not in stonewalles, but in the arms of his people. They use not ordinarily any lime or stone, but only for the building of churches (saying, that so it becometh us to make a difference between the houses of men, and churches dedicated to God) and of their Beteneguz or houses of the emperor, wherein the governors of provinces are placed to execute justice. These Beteneguz stand continually open, and yet in the governors Of these Beteneguz read Francis Aluarez cap. 42. absence no man dare enter into them, under pain of being punished as a traitor. Moreover in the city of Axuma (esteemed by them to have been the seat of the Queen of Saba) stand certain ruinous buildings like unto pyramids; which by reason of their greatness, remain even till this present, notwithstanding their many years antiquity. Likewise there are in this country divers churches and oratory's hewn out of the hard rock, consisting but of one only stone, some sixty, some forty, and some thirty * Or yards: for Braccia signifieth both. fathoms long, being full of windows, and engraven with strange and unknown characters. Three such churches there are of twelve * Or yards: for Braccia signifieth both. fathoms broad and eighty in length. The Abassins which are subject to the Prete, hold opinion, that their Of Melich read more at large in Francisco Aluarez cap. 37. and cap. 138. prince deriveth his pedigree from 〈◊〉 the son of Solomon, which (as they say) he begot of the Queen of Saba; and that themselves are descended from the officers and attendants which Solomon appointed unto this his son when he sent him home unto his mother: which seemeth not altogether unlikely, if you consider the jewish ceremonies of circumcision, observing of the sabaoth, & such like, which they use until this present: likewise they abhor swine's flesh and certain other meats, which they call unclean. The Prete absolutely governeth in all matters, except it be in administering of the sacraments, and ordaining of priests. He giveth and taketh away benefices at his pleasure; and in punishing offenders, maketh no difference between his clergy and laity. The administration of their sacraments is wholly referred to the Abuna or Patriarch. The Prete is lord and owner of all the lands and possessions in his empire, except those of the church; which are in number infinite; for the monasteries of saint Antony (besides which there are none of any other order) and the colleges of the Canons and of the hermits, together with the parishes, are innumerable. They are all provided by the king, both of revenues and of ornaments. They have two winters and two summers; which they discern not by cold and heat, but by rainy and fair weather. They begin their year upon the 26. of August, and divide it into twelve months, each month containing thirty days, whereunto they add every common year five days, and in the leap year six, which odd days they call Pagomen, that is, The end of the year. Their ordinary journeys in traveling are twelve miles a day. The common harlots dwell without their towns, and have wages allowed them out of the common purse: neither may they enter into any cities, nor apparel themselves, but only in yellow. The soil of Abassia aboundeth generally with grain, and in especial with 〈◊〉 and all kinds of Pulse, but not so much with wheat; they have 〈◊〉 likewise (not knowing how to refine it) and honey, and cotton-wool, oranges, cedars, and lemons, grow naturally there. They have neither melons, citrons, nor rape-roots: but many plants & herbs different from ours. Their drink is made of barley and millet: neither have they any wine made of grapes, but only in the houses of the emperor, and the * Or 〈◊〉. Abuna. They are not destitute of Elephants, mules; lions, tigers, ounces, and dear. Their own country horses are but of a small size: how beit they have also of the Arabian and Egyptian breed, the colts whereof within four days after they be fole, they use to suckle with kine. They have great and terribles apes; and infinite sorts of birds; but neither cuckoos nor Pies, so far as ever could be learned. here are likewise great store of mines of gold, silver, iron, and copper; but they know not how to dig and refine the same: for the people of this country are so rude and ignorant, that they have no knowledge nor use of any art or occupation. Insomuch as they esteem the carpenters or smiths craft for an unlawful and diabolical kind of science; and such as exercise the same, live among them like infamous persons; neither are they permitted to enter into any of their churches. In the kingdom of Bagamidri are found most excellent mines of silver, which they know none other way how to take from the ore, but only by melting it with fire into thin plates. Goiame aboundeth with base gold. In the kingdom of Damut they dig and refine it somewhat better. They have neither the art of making cloth (for which cause the greater part of them go clad in beasts skins) nor yet the manner of hawking, fowling, or hunting; so that their country's swarm with partridges, quails, pheasants, crane's, geese, hens, hares, dear, and other like creatures: neither know they how to make any full use or benefit of the fruitfulness of their country, nor of the commodity of rivers. They sow mill for the most part, sometimes in one place, and sometimes in another, according as the rain giveth them opportunity. In sum, they show no wit nor dexterity in any thing so much as in robbery and war; unto both which they have a kind of natural inclination. Which is occasioned (as I suppose) by the continual voyages made by the Prete, and by their usual living in the wide fields, and that in divers and sundry places. For to travail continually, and remain in the fields without any stable or firm habitation, compelleth men as it were, of necessity, to lay hold on all that comes next to hand, be it their own, or belonging to others. They are not much subject to tempests; but to an inconvenience far more intolerable, namely to innumerable swarms of locusts, which bring such desolation upon them, as is most dreadful to consider: for they consume whole provinces, leaving them quite destitute of succour both for man and beast. They use no stamped coin in all this empire, but instead thereof certain rude pieces of gold, and little balls of iron, especially in Angote; as likewise salt and pepper, which are the greatest riches that they can enjoy. Hence it is, that the tributes which are paid to the prince, consist only of such things as his own dominions do naturally afford; as namely of salt, gold, silver, corn, hides, elephants teeth, the horn of the Rhinoceros, with slaves, and such like. Which form of tribute (being most agreeable to nature) is used also in other parts of Africa. Their salt is taken out of a certain great mountain in the province of Balgada, and is made into square pieces. The most populous place in all Abassia is the court of the Prete, wheresoever it resideth; and there are erected five or six thousand tents of cotton of divers colours, with so notable a distinction of streets, lanes, market-places, and Tribunals; that even in a moment every man knoweth his own station and the place where he is to do his business. A man may conjecture the greatness of this court, if he do but consider, that (according to the report of some who have there been personally present) besides the camels which carry the tents, the mules of carriage exceed the number of fifty thousand. Their mules serve them to carry burdens, and to ride upon: but their horses are only for the wars. The mahometans have now brought this prince to great extremity: but heretofore while he was in his flourishing estate, he lived so majestically, that he never spoke but by an interpreter; nor would be seen to his subjects, but only upon solemn days. At other times it was held as a great favour, if he did show but the half part of his feet to ambassadors, and to his favourites. And no marvel: for amongst the Ethiopians it hath been an ancient custom (as Strabo writeth) To adore their kings like gods, who for the most part live enclosed at home. This so strange and stately kind of government, did exceedingly abase his subjects, whom the Prete used like slaves; so that upon the smallest occasions that might be, he would deprive them of all honour and dignity, were they never so great. Abassia containeth many large plains, and very high mountains, all fruitful. In some places you shall have most extreme could and frosty weather: but not any snow throughout the whole empire, no not in the mountains. The Prete hath many moors in his dominions, and upon his borders; but the most populous of all others are the Moors called Dobas, who are The Moors called Dobas. bound by a law never to marry, till they can bring most evident testimony, that each of them hath slain twelve Christians. Wherefore the Abassin merchantspasse not by their country, but with most strong guards. A particular and brief relation of all the kingdoms and provinces subject to the Christian Emperor of Abassia, commonly called Prete janni. 〈◊〉. OF all the provinces subject unto the Prete, that of * Barnagaez. Barnagasso is best known unto us, because it is so near unto the Red sea; over against the shore whereof it stretcheth in length from Suachen, almost as far as the very mouth or entrance of the straight, being (as is before said) bounded on the south part with the mighty river of Abagni, which runneth westward out Out of this lake also the river of Zeila runneth eastward into the Red sea. of the lake of Barcena into Nilus. Howbeit it hath no other port upon the Red sea but only Ercoco, situate near the Isle of Mazua; neither hath the Prete any port but this, in all his dominions; so that he is (as it were) on all sides land-locked, which is one of the greatest defects in any empire, kingdom or state, that can be imagined. This province is full of towns & villages, as likewise of rivers and pools which make it exceeding fruitful. The Viceroy or governor hereof, called also by the name of * 〈◊〉 in the Abassin tongue signifieth the Sea, and Neguz a king: so that Barnagaez or Barnagasso, is as much as king of the sea, or Lord high admiral. Barnagasso, resideth in the city of Beroa, otherwise called Barua, and by Ptolemey (as Sanutus thinketh) Colove, situate upon a pleasant river abounding with fish. Unto him likewise are subject the governments of Danfila and of Canfila, near unto the borders of Egypt. Certain years past the great Turk's forces have mightily afflicted this province, destroying the towns, and leading the people captive: so that in the end Isaac the lord Barnagasso was enforced to compound with the Turks lieutenant (bearing title, The Bassa of Abassia, and residing in Suachen) for the yearly tribute of a thousand ounces of gold. Over and beside he payeth every year unto his sovereign the Prete, an hundred and fifty excellent horses, with cloth of silk and of cotton, and other matters. On the most westerly part of Barnagasso, beginneth a mighty ridge of mountains, which for a good space waxing narrower and narrower, at length in the kingdom of Angote dilateth 〈◊〉 self into a round form, All persons of the Abassin blood royal enclosed within a mighty roundel of mountains. Francis Aluarez cap. 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, etc. environing with the steep sides, and impassable tops thereof, many fruitful and pleasant valleys, for the space of fifteen days journey in compass: within which valleys (as it were in walled castles) all persons whatsoever, both male and female, of the Abassin blood royal, are under pain of most extreme punishment, together with their whole families, limited to remain. Within this great roundel or enclosure of mountains, there is (among many others) contained one lesser, which is begirt around with a mountainous wall so craggy, steep, and unscaleable, that no man can come in or out, but only by a certain basket drawn up and down upon a rope: neither is it possible to famish the parties within by a siege, be it never so long: for they have fruitful ground, with houses, a church, a monastery, cisterns of water, and all other necessaries for the continual maintenance of five hundred persons. Within this strong citadel of mountains (for the avoiding of all tumults and seditions) are locked up those great personages which come nearest in blood to the Prete, and are in possibility of the crown; and here must they all live and die, except a very few of them, who attain at length unto the government of the empire. The Abassins have a tradition, that one Abraham an emperor of theirs being admonished in a dream, that he should keep his dominions in tranquility by the means aforesaid, was the first that found this mountain, and used it for the same purpose. Tigremahon. TIgremahon, a very large kingdom, lieth between the river Marabo, Nilus, the Red sea, and the kingdom of Angote. The governor here of payeth for yearly tribute unto the Prete two hundred Arabian horsés, a great quantity of silk and cotton-cloth, and very much gold. Unto this kingdom is subject the province of Tigray, wherein stands the city of Caxumo, sometimes the royal seat of the Queen of Saba (which they say was called Maqueda, of whom Solomon begat a son named Melich, before mentioned) which city was the seat likewise of Queen Candace. Also to the said kingdom of Tigremahon belong the provinces of Sabaim, Torrates, Balgada, and others. Angote. THis kingdom standing between the kingdoms of Tigremahon and Amara, is full of mountains and valleys, and aboundeth mightily with all kind of corn and cattle. The inhabitants eat but one meal in four and twenty hours, and that always in the night: their food is most commonly raw flesh, with a kind of sauce made of an oxegall. In stead of money they use salt, and little balls of iron, as is before said. Unto this kingdom do belong the provinces of Abuguna, and Guanamora, with other regions and places. Amara. THe kingdom of Amara bordering north upon Angote, east upon Xoa, south upon Damut, and extending west almost as far as Nilus; is for the most part a plain region, without mountains, very fertile, and abounding with cattle. Upon the frontiers of this kingdom standeth the foresaid large, high, and 〈◊〉 mountain, wherein the sons, brethren, and kinsfolks of the Prete are most warily kept, and from whence after his decease the heir apparent is brought, to be invested in the empire. The kingdom of Xoa situate between the kingdoms of Amara, Damut, and Fatigar, containeth many deep valleys, and aboundeth with all kind of corn and cattle. In the kingdom of Goiame are two mighty lakes, from which Nilus is said to fetch his original. here is exceeding plenty of gold unrefined: the north part of this region is full of deserts and mountainous places. Bagamidri one of the largest kingdoms in all the upper Ethiopia, extendeth in length by the river Nilus, the space almost of six hundred miles: and in 〈◊〉 kingdom are many mostrich siluer-mines. The kingdom of Fatigar lying between the kingdoms of Adel, and of Xoa, consisteth the greatest part of champion grounds, which yield wheat, barley, and other grain most plentifully. In this kingdom stands an exceeding high mountain, on the top whereof is a lake of twelve miles in compass, abounding with great variety of fish, and from this mountain 〈◊〉 many rivers stored with fish also. The kingdom of Damut (as Sanutus affirmeth) doth border upon the kingdom of Xoa, and is enclosed on either side with the lake of Barcena, and the land of Zanguebar. Howbeit others place Damut between the kingdoms of Vangue and Goiame toward the west, which opinion seemeth most probable. This country aboundeth with gold, ginger, grapes, corn, and beasts of all sorts. The slaves of this kingdom are much esteemed, and are commonly sold throughout all Arabia, Persia, and Egypt, where they prove most valiant soldiers. The greater part of the people of Damut are Gentiles, and the residue Christians, who have certain monasteries. In this kingdom is that exceeding high and dreadful The mountain of death. mountain, (having one narrow passage only to ascend by) whither the Prete sendeth his nobles which are convicted of any heinous crime, to suffer ignominious death with hunger and cold. About the fountains of Nilus some say, that there are amazons or women-warriers, most valiant Of these Amazons read more in the discourse of Monomotapa following. and redoubted, which use bows and arrows, and live under the government of a Queen: as likewise the people called Cafri or Cafates, being as black as pitch, and of a mighty stature, and (as some think) descended of the jews; but now they are idolaters, and most deadly enemies to the Christians; for they make continual assaults upon the Abassins, dispoiling them both of life and goods: but all the daytime they lie lurking in mountains, woods, and deep valleys. The style used by Prete janni in his letters. I the king, whose name the lions do reverence, and who by the grace of This style is taken out of a letter written by David the Emperor of AEthiopia 1524. God was at my baptism called Athani Tingil, that is, The incense of the virgin, but now at the beginning of my reign, took upon me the name of David; beloved of God, the pillar of faith, descended of the tribe of 〈◊〉, the son of David, the son of Solomon, the son of the pillar of Zion, the son of the seed of jacob, the son of the hand of Marie; the son of Nahu according to the flesh, the son of the holy Apostles Peter and Fawl according to grace, Emperor of the higher and greater 〈◊〉, and of most large kingdoms, territories, and jurisdictions, the king of Xoa, Caffate, Fatigar, Angote, Barú, Baaliganze, Adea, Vangue, and Goiame, where the fountains of Nilus are; as likewise of 〈◊〉, Baguamedri, Ambea, 〈◊〉, Tigremahon, Sabaim the country of the Queen of Saba, of Barnagasso, and lord as far as Nubia, which confineth upon Egypt. Certain answers of Don Francisco Aluarez, (who from the year 1520. for the space of six years next ensuing, had travailed and remained in the country of PRETE JANNI with the Portugal ambassador Rodrigo de Lima) made unto sundry demands or questions of the Archbishop of Bragança, concerning the state of the foresaid country and prince, and of the disposition, manners, and customs of the people. Io. Bap. Ramusius, vol. 1. delle voiag. fol. 254. 255. THe Ethiopian Emperor called Prete janni hath no settled place of abode where he continually resideth; but is always flitting up and down, sometimes to one place, and sometimes to another, and liveth in tents set up in the fields, environed with a kind of fortification; of which tents there may be in his camp of all sorts to the number of 5000. or 6000; and of horsemen and mules 50000. and upwards. It is a general custom of the Prete and of all his subjects not to pass on horseback by any church (so great is their reverence to holy places) but so soon as they approach thereunto, they light upon the ground, and having passed by, they mount on horseback again. Whensoever the Prete marcheth with all his troops, there is carried before him upon the shoulders of certain priests an altar and a consecrated stone, whereon they use to administer their communion: the priests appointed to carry it upon a frame of wood, are eight in number, serving four and four by turns; before whom goeth a clerk with a censer and a little bell sounding; at the sight and noise whereof all persons forsake the way, and such as are on horseback, dismount. In all this country there is not any town consisting of above 1600. families, & there are very few that have so many: neither are there any castles or walled places; but 〈◊〉 many villages, and infinite numbers of people. Their houses are built round, all of earth, flat-roofed, and covered with a kind of thatch which will last the time of a man's life, being compassed about with courts or yards. They have no bridges of stone upon their rivers, but all of wood. They sleep commonly upon oxe-hides, or else upon certain couches corded & sustained with thongs made of the said hides. They have no kind of tables to eat their meat upon, but have it served in upon plain & very broad platters of wood, without any tablecloth at al. Also they have certain great deep dishes like basons made of black earth shining in manner of jet, with other cups of the same earth, out of which they use to drink water & wine. Many of them eat raw flesh, but others broil it upon the coals or firebrands: and some places there are so destitute of wood, that the people are feign to dress their meat with oxe-dung. Their armour and weapons be Azagaie or short darts, some few swords, and certain shirts of male very long and straight, and (as some of our men which have seen them do report) made of naughty and unserviceable matter. They have bows and arrows great store, but not with feathers as ours be: as likewise helmets and head-pieces, but very few, and first brought in since they began to have traffic with the Portugals: howbeit they have many strong targets. Of artillery they had * 1526. at our departure fourteen small yron-peeces, which they had bought of certain Turks that usually came to traffic upon the coast; for which pieces the Prete willed that they should have their uttermost demand, to the end they might be the willinger to return and bring more; and he caused some of his servants also to learn how to discharge them. The river of Nilus, I myself never saw, although at one time I was Philippo 〈◊〉 will have 〈◊〉 to spring out of one great lake only, which is to the south of Goiame. within thirty miles thereof: howbeit some of our Portugals have traveled to the very fountains of Nilus, which are two great lakes comparable to seas, situate in the kingdom of Goiame; out of which having conveyed itself a small distance, this river embraceth certain Islets, and then holdeth on his course to Egypt. The reason why Nilus yearly overfloweth Egypt, is, because the general The true cause of the increase of Nilus. winter of Ethiopia holding on with most mighty and continual rains from the middle of june to the midst of September, doth make the said river so exceedingly to swell, that the waters thereof cover all the plain country of Egypt. In all the foresaid dominions of the Prete, they use not to write one to another, neither do the officers of justice commit any of their affairs to writing, but all matters are dispatched by messengers and by words of mouth: only it was told me, that the revenues and tributes of the Prete, are put down in writing both upon the receit, and at the disbursement. The emperor Prete janni hath two special princely names, to wit, Acegue, which signifieth an emperor, and Neguz, a king. The Patriarch or archeprelate of all Abassia is called Abuna, that is to say, Father; neither is there any in all the whole empire which ordaineth ministers, but only he. There is no wine of the grape made publicly in any place, but only in the houses of the Prete and of the Patriarch; for if it be made any other where, it is done by stealth. The wine which is used in their communions, they make of raisins steeped ten days in water, and afterward strained in a winepress; and it is a most cordial, delicate, and strong wine. In this country is great abundance of gold, silver, copper, and tin, but the people are ignorant how to work it out of the mines: neither have they any coin of gold or silver, but all their bargains are made by bartering of one commodity for another. Also they truck little pieces of gold, some weighing a dram, and some an ounce. But salt is the principal thing which runneth currant for money throughout all the emperors dominions. Some places there are which yield wheat and barley, and others millet in great plenty; and where the said grains are not reaped, there groweth Tafo daguza, a seed utterly unknown in these parts, as likewise lentils, beans, pease, fitches', and all kind of pulse in abundance. here are infinite store of sugar canes, which they know neither how to boil nor refine, but eat it raw. There be great plenty of fair grapes and peaches, which are ripe in the months of February and April. Of oranges, lemons, and citrons, the quantity is innumerable; for they grow most naturally out of the Abassin soil: garden-herbes there are but few, because the people delight neither to set nor sow them. All the whole country is full of Basill, which groweth very tall both in the woods and upon the mountains: so are there likewise other odoriferous herbs of divers sorts, but unknown unto us. Of trees common with us I remember none other kinds growing there, but only Cypresses, damsin-trees, sallowes by the water's side, and trees of juiubas. Honey there is exceeding great plenty all the country over: neither are their bee-hives placed abroad in the open air as ours are: but they set them in chambers, where making a little hole in the wall, the bees go thick in and out, and come home laden with honey. Wherefore there is great quantity gathered in all the empire, but especially in the monasteries, where they make it a great part of their sustenance. There are found also swarms of bees in the woods and upon the mountains, near whom they place certain hollow boxes made of bark, which being filled with honicombes, they take up, and carry home to their houses. They gather much wax, whereof they make their candles, because they have no use of tallow. They have no oil of olives, but of another kind which they call Hena: Oil strained out of an herb. and the herb whereout they strain it, is like a little vine-leafe: neither hath this oil any smell at all, but in colour it is as beautiful as gold. here likewise they have store of flax, but they know not how to make cloth thereof. Here is also great plenty of cotton, whereof they make cloth of divers colours. One country there is so extremely cold, that the people are enforced to clad themselves in very course cloth of a dark tawny. Concerning physic, and the cure of diseases, they know very little or nothing; but for aches in any parts of their bodies the only remedy which they use is to apply cupping-glasses; and for headaches they let the great vain of the temples blood. Howbeit they have certain herbs, the juice whereof being drunk, serveth them in steed of a purgation. There would in this country be gathered infinite store of fruit, and far greater quantity of corn, were not the poor commons most miserably oppressed by their superiors, who extort all their substance from them; so that they never till nor plant any more, than they must of mere necessity. In no place wheresoever I traveled, could I see any shambles of flesh, but only at the court of the Prete: for in other places no man may kill an ox, though it be his own, without licence from the governor of the country. As touching their ordinary proceeding in justice, they use not to put Their manner of justice. any to sudden death, but beat them with bastonadoes according to the quality of the offence, and likewise they pluck out their eyes, and cut off their hands and feet: howbeit during mine abode there I saw one burnt for robbing of a church. The common sort speak truth very seldom, though it be upon an oath, unless they be forced to swear By the head of the King. They fear exceedingly to be excommunicated; so that being enjoined any thing that tendeth to their prejudice, if they do it at all, it is done for fear of excommunication. Their depositions or oaths are performed in this manner. The party to Their manner of swearing. be deposed goeth accompanied with two priests, carrying with them fire and incense to the church-door, whereon he layeth his hand; and then the said priests adjure him to tell the truth, saying: If thou swear falsely, as the lion 〈◊〉 the beasts of the forest, so let the devil devour thy soul; and as corn is ground under the millstone, so let him grind thy bones; and finally, as the fire burneth up the wood, so may thy soul burn in the fire of hell: and the party sworn, answereth to every of the former clauses, Amen. But if thou speak truth, let thy life be prolonged with honour, and thy soul enter into Paradise with the blessed: and he again answereth, Amen. Which being done, he giveth testimony of the matter in question. No person may sit in their churches, nor enter into them with his The ceremonies 〈◊〉 in their Churches. shoes on, nor spit within them, neither may any dog or any other creature void of reason come within them. They confess themselves standing upon their feet, and so standing likewise, receive absolution. They 〈◊〉 their form of public prayer after one and the same manner, both in the churches of their Canons, and of their friars: which friars have no wives; but the Canons and priests are permitted to have. Where the Canons live together, they go each man to diet at his own house; but the friars eat their meat in common. Their ecclesiastical governors are called Licanati. The sons of the Canons are, as it were by inheritance, Canons; but priests sons have no such privilege, unless they be ordained by the Abuna. They pay no tithes to any churches, but the clergy are maintained by great possessions belonging to their churches and monasteries. Also when any priest is cited, he is convented before a secular judge. Whereas I said, they sit not in their churches, it is to be understood, that always without the church door stand a great number of wooden crutches, such as lame men use to go upon; where every man taketh his own, and leaneth thereupon all the time of their divine service. All their books (which they have in great numbers) are written in parchment, for paper they have none; and the language wherein they are written named Tigia, is all one with the Abassin language: but so it was called from the name of the first town in all that empire, which was converted to the Christian religion. All their churches have two curtains, one about their great altar, with bells, within which curtain none may enter but only priests: also they have another curtain stretching through the midst of their church, and within that may no man come, but such as have taken holy orders: insomuch that many gentlemen and honourable persons take orders upon them, only that they may have access into their churches. The greater part of their monasteries are built upon high mountains, or in some deep valley: they have great revenues and jurisdictions; and in many of them they eat no flesh all the year long. Neither do they spend any store of fish, because they know not how to take it. Upon the walls of all their churches are painted the pictures of Christ, of the blessed virgin Marie, of the apostles, prophets and angels, and in every one the picture of Saint George a horseback. They have no roods, neither will they suffer Christ crucified to be painted, because they say, they are not worthy to behold him in that passion. All their priests, friars, and noblemen continually carry crosses in their hands; but the meaner sort of people carry them about their necks. Their movable feasts, namely Easter, the feast of Ascension & Whitsuntide, they observe at the very same days and times that we do. Likewise as concerning the feasts of Christmas, the Circumcision, the epiphany, and other the feasts of the saints, they agree wholly with us, though in some other things they vary. They have great store of leprous persons, who are not put apart from the rest of the people, but live in company with them: and many there are who for charity and devotions sake do wash them, and heal their wounds. They have a kind of trumpets, but not of the best, and likewise certain Their musical instruments. drums of brass which are brought from Cairo, and of wood also covered with leather at both ends, and cymbals like unto ours, and certain great basons whereon they make a noise. There are flutes in like sort, and a kind of square instruments with strings, not much unlike to an harp, which they call David Mozan, that is to say, the harp of David; and with these haps they sound before the Prete, but some what rudely. Their horses of the countrey-breed are in number infinite, but such small hackney-iades, that they do them little service: howbeit those that are brought out of Arabia and Egypt are most excellent and beautiful horses: and the great horse-masters also in Abassia have certain breeds or races of them, which being new fole, they suffer not to suck the dam above three days, if they be such as they mean to back betimes: but separating them from their dams, they suckle them with kine, and by that means they prove most sightly and gallant horses. Hitherto Aluarez. Thus much (I hope) may suffice to have been spoken concerning the upper or Inner Ethiopia which containeth the empire of Prete janni: now sithence we are so far proceeded, let us take also a cursory and brief survey of the lower or extreme Ethiopia, extending itself in form of a spears point, or a wedge, as far as thirty five degrees of southerly latitude. Of the lower or extreme Ethiopia. THis part of Africa being utterly unknown to Ptolemey and all the ancient writers, but in these later times, thoroughly discovered by the Portugals, especially along the coast, beginneth to the Northwest about the great river of Zaire, not far from the Equinoctial: from whence stretching southward to thirty five degrees, and then Northward along the sea-coast on the backside of Africa, as far as the very mouth or entrance of the Arabian gulf, it limiteth the south and east frontiers of the Abassin Empire last before described. In this part also are many particulars very memorable, as namely besides sundry great empires & kingdoms, The famous mountains of the moon, the mighty rivers of Magnice Cuama, and Coavo, springing out of the lake Zembre, the renowned cape of good hope, and other matters whereof we will entreat in their due places. This portion of Africa is divided into six principal parts, namely: The land of Aian, the land of Zanguebar, the empire of Mohenemugi, the empire of Monomotapa, the region of Cafraria, & the kingdom of Congo. Aian the first general part of Ethiopia the lower. THe land of Aian is accounted by the Arabians to be that region The river of Quilimanci in nine degrees of northerly latitude. which lieth between the narrow entrance into the Red sea, and the river of Quilimanci; being upon the sea-coast for the most part inhabited by the said Arabians; but the inland-partes thereof are peopled with a black nation which are Idolaters. It comprehendeth two kingdoms; Adel and Adea. Adel is a very large kingdom, and extendeth from the mouth of the Adel the first general part of Aian. Arabian gulf to the cape of Guardafu called of old by Ptolemey Aromata promontorium. South and west it bordereth upon the dominions of Prete janni, about the kingdom of Fatigar. The king of this country being a Moor, is accounted amongst the mahometans a most holy man, and very much reverenced by them, because he wageth continual war with the Christians, taking captive many of the Abassins, and sending them to the great Turk, and the princes of Arabia, of whom he receiveth great aid for the maintenance of his wars, both of horse and foot. The people of Adel are of the colour of an olive, being very warlike, notwithstanding that the greatest part of them want weapons. Their principal city is called * Or Arar. Anar, as some are of opinion. Unto this kingdom is subject the city of Zeila inhabited by Mooes, situate on a sandy and low soil, which some suppose to be built in the very same place, without the entrance of the Red sea, where Ptolemey placed the ancient mart-towne of Aualites. This city is Ptol. geog. lib. 4. cap. 7. a place of great traffic; for hither they bring out of India, cloth, elephants teeth, frankincense, pepper, gold, and other rich merchandise. The territory adjoining yieldeth abundance of honey, wax, and great quantity of oil, which they make not of olives, but of a kind of dainty plums: it affourdeth likewise such plenty of 〈◊〉, of cattle, and of fruits differing from ours, that they are transported by shipping to other nations. Barbora likewise, a city of the Moors, standeth in this kingdom of Adel, and hath a commodious haven, whereunto resort many ships laden with merchandise, from Aden in Arabia, and from Cambaya upon the river of Indus. The citizens are black people, and their wealth consisteth most of all in flesh. In the year 1541. Gradaameth the king of this place, after many mischiefs which he had done to Claudius the emperor of Abassia, being vanquished by Christopher de Gama, the Indian Viceroy of john the third king of Portugal; he did by means of the soldiers and warlike provisions, which were sent him from the Sheque or governor of Zebit, overcome the Portugals & the Abassins. Howbeit afterward having sent the said forces back again to Zebit, himself was slain, and his whole army overthrown by king Claudius aforesaid. But certain years after, the successor of Gradaameth having in a warlike encounter subdued the Prete, rode in triumph upon a little ass; signifying thereby, that he ascribed not the victory to his own forces, but to the power of God, Adea, the second kingdom of the land of Aian, situate upon the eastern Adea, the second part of Aian. Ocean, is confined northward by the kingdom of Adel, & westward by the Abassin empire. It is exceeding fruitful, & one part thereof mightily aboundeth with woods, the residue being sufficiently stored with cattle & corn. The inhabitants being moors by religion, and paying tribute to the emperor of Abassia, are (as they of Adel beforenamed) originally descended of the Arabians: who many hundred years ago, partly by their rich traffic, and especially by force of arms, became lords not only of Aian, but of all the sea-coast along as far as Cabo de los corrientes, standing in the southerly latitude of four and twenty degrees. In all which space the cities standing upon the sea-coast; before the Portugals discovered the east Indies, lay open and unfortified to the sea (because the Arabians themselves were absolute lords thereof) but were strongly walled toward the land, for fear of the Cafri, or lawless wild Negroes, who were deadly enemies to the Arabians, and utterly misliked their so near neighbourhood. Howbeit since the Portugals taking of Magadazo, and divers other towns upon the coast, they have applied themselves very much to fortification. But, to return The kingdom and city of Magadazo. to the matter where we left, unto the foresaid kingdom of Adea belongeth the kingdom of Magadazo, so called of the principal city therein, which is a most strong, beautiful, and rich place, and is subject to the kingly government of a Moor. The territory adjacent is exceeding fruitful, abounding with sheep, kine, horses, wheat, barley, and other kinds of grain. It hath also an excellent haven, and much frequented by the ships of Aden and Cambaya, which come thither laden with sundry kinds of cloth, with spices and other merchandise; and from hence they carry elephants teeth, gold, slaves, honey, and wax. The inhabitants are of an olive-colour, and some of them black, like unto the nations adjoining, and they go naked from the girdlestead upward, and speak the Arabian tongue. They are but meanly weaponed, which causeth them to shoot poisoned arrows. This city was in times past head of all the towns and cities of the Moors standing along this coast for a great distance. Zanguebar or Zanzibar, the second general part of the lower Ethiopia. ZAnzibar or Zanguebar, so called by the Arabians and Persians, is that tract of land, which runneth along some part of the dominions of Prete janni, and from thence extendeth itself by the east of Mohenemugi, till it joineth with the frontiers of Monomotapa. Howbeit some there are who under the name of Zanzibar will have all the south part of Africa to be understood, even as far as Cabo Negro, which stretcheth into the western Ocean about 18. degrees of southerly latitude: so that they comprehend therein the empires of Mohenemugi and Monomotapa, and all the land of Cafraria. But in this controversy we rather choose to follow the opinion of Sanutus, affirming with him, that the said maritime tract of Zanguebar (as it is by us before limited) is allow, fenny, and woody country, with many great and small rivers running through it: which extremity of moisture in those hot climates causeth the air to be most unwholesome and pestilent. The inhabitants are for the most part black, with curled hair, being Idolaters, and much addicted to sorcery and witchcraft. They go naked all the upper part of their bodies, covering their neither parts with clothes of divers colours, and with beasts skins. And this tract of land stretching along the sea-coast from the river Quilimanci to the river of Magnice containeth the kingdoms and territories of Melinde, Mombaza, Quiloa, Moçambique, Sofala, and others. Melinde, the most Northerly kingdom of Zanguebar, situate in two degrees Melinde the first part of Zanguebar. and an half of southerly latitude, and stretching from the coast up into the main for the space of an hundred miles, hath a strong and stately city of the same name, being seventy miles distant from Mombaça. It aboundeth with Rice, Millet, flesh, lemons, citrons, and all kinds of fruits: but as for corn, it is brought hither out of Cambaya. The inhabitants (especially on the sea coast) are moors and mahometans: who build their houses very sumptuously after the manner of Europe. They are of a colour inclining to white, and some black people they have also among them, which are for the greatest part Idolaters: howbeit all of them pretend a kind of civility both in their apparel, and in the decency and furniture of their houses. The women are white, and sumptuously attired after the Arabian fashion with cloth of silk. Likewise they adorn their necks, arms, hands, and feet with bracelets and jewels of gold and silver. When they go abroad out of their houses, they cover themselves with a vail of taffeta, so that they are not known but when they themselves list. Upon this coast of Melinde you have a very safe harbour, whereunto the ships that sail those seas do usually resort. In brief the inhabitants are a kind, true-harted, & trusty people, & courteous to strangers. They have always been in league with the Portugals, giving them most friendly entertainment, & reposing much confidence in them; neither have they ever done them any injury. The kingdom of Mombaça, being the second general part of Zanguebar, Mombaza the second portion of Zanguebar. and situate in three degrees and an half beyond the Equinoctial line, bordering to the north upon Melinde, and to the south upon Quiloa; is so called after the name of a certain isle and city upon the coast, both which are named Mombaça, and are peopled with Mahumetans: their houses are of many stories high, and beautified with pictures both graven and painted. Their kings are mahometans, and most deadly enemies to the Christians: one of the which taking upon him to resist the Portugals, was himself quite vanquished and overthrown, and constrained to leave his city to the sack and spoil of his enemies, who found therein a good quantity of gold, silver, and pearl; and likewise cloth of cotton, of silk, and of gold, with great numbers of slaves, & such other commodities. Howbeit they remained not there any long time, but were enforced to abandon the place in regard of the most unwholesome and infectious air. This kingdom is tributary to the great empire of Mohenemugi. The kingdom of Quiloa situate in nine degrees toward the pole Antarctic, Quiloathe third part of 〈◊〉. and (like the last before mentioned) taking the denomination thereof from a certain isle and city both called by the name of Quiloa; may be accounted for the third portion of the land of Zanguebar. This island hath a very fresh and cool air, and is replenished with trees always green, and with plenty of all kind of victuals. It is situate at the mouth of the great river Coavo which springeth out of the same lake from whence Nilus floweth, and is called also by some Quiloa, and by others Tahiva, and runneth from the said lake, eastward for the space of six hundred miles, till it approacheth near the sea, where the stream thereof is so forcible, that at the very mouth or outlet, dispersing itself into two branches, it shapeth out a great island, to the west where of upon the coast you may behold the little isle and the city of Quiloa, being separated from the main by a very narrow arm of the sea. This isle (as also the great isle before named) is inhabited by Mahumetans, who are of colour whitish. Their women are comely, and rich in their attire. Their houses are fairly built of lime and stone, and have within them very gallant and costly furniture, and without they are environed with gardens and orchards full of sundry delicate fruits and herbs. Of this island the whole kingdom (as is aforesaid) took the name; which upon the coast extendeth itself to Cabo Delgado, or the slender Cape (being the limit between Moçambique and this kingdom of Quiloa) & from thence it stretcheth unto the foresaid river of Coavo. In old time this kingdom of Quiloa was the chiefest of all the principalities there adjoining; for the Arabians which were masters thereof had enlarged their dominions for the space of nine hundred miles, so that all the sea-coast and the islands, as far as Cabo de los Corrientes situate in four and twenty degrees of southerly latitude, were tributary and subject thereunto. Whereupon when the Portugals arrived in those countries, the king of this place trusted so much to himself, that he thought he was able with his own forces, not only to make a defensive war against them, but also to drive them from those places, which they had already surprised. Howbeit, quite contrary to his expectation, he was by the Portugals utterly vanquished and put to flight. Who seizing upon the isle and city, enriched themselves with the great booties & spoils that they found therein. Thus the mighty king of Quiloa (who before the Portugals arrival in those parts, enjoyed also the chief commodity of the rich gold mines of Sofala) became atlength, by a composition made with Don Pedro Cabral, tributary to the crown of Portugal, paying for tribute at the first five hundred, and afterward fifteen hundred pieces of gold. Upon the foresaid isle the Portugals erected a fortress, which their king afterward commanded them to deface, considering that there were other forts sufficient enough for that coast. Between the two mighty rivers of Coavo and Cuama (both which Mozambique the fourth part of Zanguebar. spring out of one lake with Nilus) among the kingdoms of Mombara, Mozimba, Maevas, and Embeoe, which are not as yet perfectly discovered, lieth the kingdom of Moçambique, so called of three small islets, situate in the mouth of the river * Or Moghincats. Meghincate in fowerteene and a half, or fifteen degrees of southerly latitude, which kingdom in ancient time by Ptolemey was called Promontorium 〈◊〉. In the principal of the three foresaid isles, there is a very commodious and secure haven, capable of all kind of vessels, and there also the Portugals have built a very strong fort: where albeit in regard of the lownes and moisture of the soil, being full of bogs and fens, the air be most unwholesome, and in manner pestilent: yet the opportunity of the place, and the plenty of victuals, have made it one of the most famous and frequented havens in all that Ocean. For which cause the fleets which sail from Portugal to the east Indies, when they are out of hope to perform their voyage in summer, do usually resort to spend the whole winter at Moçambique: and those Portugal ships also which come from the Indies toward Europe, must of necessity touch at this place, to furnish themselves with victuals. Along these coasts do sail certain Moors in vessels sowed or fastened together with thongs of leather, the sails whereof they make of Palme-leaves, and in stead of pitch and tallow, they calke them with gum which they gather in the woods. Unto this kingdom of Moçambique belongeth the province of Angoscia, so Angoscia. called from certain isles of that name, lying directly over against it, which province stretcheth to the river of Cuama. It is inhabited by Mahumetans and Gentiles, who are for the greatest part merchants, and do traffic along that coast with the same wares and commodities wherewith the people of Sofala do trade. Sofala, or Sefala, the fifth and last general part of Zanguebar, is a small Sofala the fifth part of Zanguebar. kingdom lying upon the sea-coast, between the rivers of Cuama and Magnice, being so called after the name of a river running through it, in which river lieth an Island, which is the head and principal place of the whole country. On this Island the Portugals 〈◊〉 built a most strong fort, by means whereof they are become Lords of the richest trade in all those parts. For (to say nothing of the ivory, Amber, and slaves which are hither brought) all the gold in a manner that is taken out of those manifold and endless mines of Sofala and all the Inland-countries thereabouts, is here exchanged unto the Portugals for cotton-cloth, silks, and other commodities of Cambaia: all which is thought yearly to amount unto the sum of two millions of gold. This golden trade was first in the power of the Moors of Magadazo; and afterward it befell to them of Quiloa. The inhabitants of Sofala are Mahumetans, being governed by a king of the same sect, who yieldeth obedience to the crown of Portugal, because he will not be subject to the empire of Monomotapa. Neither is it here to be omitted, that in these parts under the name of ivory, are bartered not only elephants teeth, but also the teeth of sea-horses: which creatures are commonly found in the rivers of Nilus, Niger, Coavo, Cuama, Magnice, and all other the great rivers of Africa. The empire of Mohenemugi, the third general part of the lower Ethiopia. THis mighty empire bordering south upon the kingdom of Moçambique, and the empire of Monomotapa; to the river Coavo, and beyond; west with the river Nilus; North upon the dominions of Prete janni; and east upon the kingdoms of Melinde, Mombaça, and Quiloa, hath not many years ago been discovered or at least heard of by the Portugals, upon occasion perhaps of the wars, which with unfortunate success they have waged against Monomotapa. The emperor of this country holdeth a continual league with the princes of Melinde, Mombaça, and Quiloa, towards the sea, for traffics sake: for they provide his dominions with cloth of cotton, cloth of silk, and sundry other commodities brought from Arabia, Persia, Cambaya, and India, which are very well esteemed in those parts: but among the rest they bring especially certain little balls, of a red colour, and in substance like unto glass, being made in Cambaya of a kind of Bitumen or clammy clay, which balls they use to wear like beads about their necks. They serve also to them in stead of money, for gold they make none account of. Likewise with the silks that are brought unto them they apparel themselves from the girdle downward. In exchange of all the foresaid wares and commodities they give gold, silver, copper, and ivory. Howbeit upon his Inland frontiers to the south and south-west, he maintaineth continual and bloody wars against the emperor of Monomotapa, his principal and greatest forces consisting of a most barbarous and fierce nation, called by the people of Congo Giachi, but by themselves Agag, who inhabit from the first great lake which is the fountain of Nilus, for a certain space upon both sides of the said river, and then afterward on the western bank as far as the second great lake from whence Zaire hath his chief original, & thence even to the confines of Prete janni. They are a wild and lawless people, living (after the manner of the ancient Scythians and Nomades, and like the Tartars and Baduin-Arabians of these times) a vagrant kind of life, under cabins and cottages in the open forests. They are of stature tall, and of countenance most terrible, making lines upon their cheeks with certain iron-instruments, and turning their eyelids backward, whereby they cast upon their enemies a most dreadful and astonishing aspect. They are man-eaters, and courageous in battle. For their armour of defence they use certain Pavises or great targets wherewith they cover their whole bodies, being otherwise naked: and their offensive weapons are darts and daggers. It is not many years since these cruel savages ranging westward from Nilus, invaded the kingdom of Congo, vanquished the inhabitants in sundry battles, took the head city, and forced the king Don Alvaro to flee for succour and safety unto the isle of horses, in the mouth of the great river Zaire, being one of the extreme frontiers of his dominions. Where the king himself was taken with an incurable dropsy, and his people in great numbers died of famine; who to relieve their extreme necessities, sold their wives, their children, and their own selves for slaves unto the Portugals. Howbeit these warlike Giacchi, notwithstanding their haughty courage, and great exploits, are no whit feared, but rather most boldly encountered, and sometimes vanquished by the Amazons or women warriors of Monomotapa. Which two nations, what by warlike stratagems, and what by open and main force, do often fight the most desperate and doubtful battles, that are performed in all those southern parts. The empire of Monomotapa, the fourth general part of the lower Ethiopia. BEnomotapa, Benomotaxa, or Monomotapa is a large empire, so called after the name of the prince thereof, who in religion is a Gentile, and for extension of dominions, and military forces, a renowned and mighty emperor; in the language of whose subjects an emperor is signified by this word Monomotapa. This empire of his lieth, as it were, in an Island which containeth in compass seven hundred and fifty, or (as some think) one thousand leagues, being limited on the northwest by the great lake whereout Nilus springeth; on the south, by the river Magnice and the tributary kingdom of Butua or Toroa; on the east it hath the sea-coast and the kingdom of Sofala, which in very deed is a member thereof; and the North part abutteth upon the river of Cuama, and the empire of Mohenemugi. That part of this great Island which lieth between the mouth of Cuama, Some will have Magnice and Cuama to be two branches of one mighty river springing out of the great lake; which being so, they must quite separate Monomotapa from the same lake. and the cape de los Corrientes, is a very pleasant, wholesome, and fruitful country. And from the said cape to the river of Magnice, the whole region aboundeth with beasts both great and small; but it is cold by reason of the sharp brizes which come off the sea; and so destitute of wood, that the people for fuel are constrained to use the dung of beasts, and they apparel themselves in their skins. Along the bank of the river Cuama are divers hills and downs covered with trees, and valleys likewise watered with rivers, being pleasantly situate, and well peopled. Here are such plenty of Elephants, as it seemeth by the great quantity of their teeth, that there are yearly slain between four and five thousand. Their elephants are nine cubits high, and five cubits in thickness: They have long and broad ears, little eyes, short tails, and great bellies: and some are of opinion, that Ethiopia yieldeth as many elephants, as Europe doth oxen. The towns and villages of this empire are very few, and their buildings are of wood and clay, covered with thatch. None may have doors to their houses but only great personages. Their principal cities are * This place both in regard of the name and situation may seem to have been Agysimba mentioned by Ptolemey. Zimbas, and Benamataza, the first whereof is one and twenty, and the second fifteen days journey from Sofala. They serve this emperor at the table upon their knees: to sit before him, is all one, as with us for a man to stand upon his feet, neither may any presume to stand in his presence, but only great lords. He is tasted unto, not before, but after he hath eaten and drunk. For his arms he hath a spade and two darts. Tribute he taketh none, but only certain days service and gifts presented unto him; without which there is no appearing in his sight. He carrieth, whithersoever he go, four hundred dogs, as a most sure and trusty guard. He keepeth all the heirs of his tributary princes, as vassals, and as pledges of their father's loyalty. There are no prisons in all his empire: for sufficient testimony being brought of the commission of any crime, justice is executed out of hand: and of all offences none are punished with greater severity and rigour, than witchcraft, theft, and adultery. His people are of a mean 〈◊〉, black, and well proportioned. They are Gentiles in religion, having no idols, but worshipping one only God whom they call Mozimo. They go appareled in cloth of cotton, either made by themselves, or brought from other countries: howbeit the king will in no case wear any foreign cloth for fear of poison or such like treachery: and the meaner sort of his subjects are clad in beasts skins. Among all the armies and legions of soldiers, which this emperor (for the defence of his great estate) is forced to maintain, his Amazons or women warriors before mentionied are the most valiant, being indeed the very sinews and chief strength of all his military forces. These women, after the manner of the ancient Scythish or Asiatike Amazons, so much spoken of in histories of former times, sear off their left paps, that they might not be an hindrance unto them in their shooting. They are most expert in warlike stratagems, and swift of foot. Their weapons are bows and arrows. At certain times for generations sake they accompany with men; sending the male children home to their fathers, but keeping their daughters unto themselves. They inhabit towards the west, not far from the beginning of Nilus, in certain places which themselves make choice of, and which are granted unto them by the favour of the Emperor. This empire of Monomotapa comprehendeth not only the foresaid great island, but stretcheth itself farther also toward the cape of Buena esperanca, as far as the kingdoms of Butua or Toroa, which being governed by particular lords, do acknowledge Monomotapa for their sovereign. Throughout all this emperors dominions is found infinite quantity of gold, in the earth, in the rocks, and in the rivers. The gold-mines of this country nearest unto Sofala are those of Manica, upon a plain environed with mountains; and those also in the province of Matuca, which is inhabited by the people called Battonghis, and situate between the Equinoctial line and the Tropic of Capricorn. These mines are distant from Sofala, between the space of 300. and six hundred miles: but those of the provinces of Boro and Quiticui are fifteen hundred miles distant towards the west. Others there are also in the kingdoms of Toroa or Butua: so that from hence or from Sofala, or from some other part of Monomotapa, some are of opinion, that Salomon's gold for the adorning of the temple at jerusalem, was brought by sea. A thing in truth not very unlikely: for here in Toroa, and in divers places of Monomotapa are till this day remaining many huge and ancient buildings of timber, lime and stone, being of singular workmanship, the like whereof are not to be found in all the provinces there about. here is also a mighty wall of five and twenty spans thick, which the people asoribe to the workmanship of the devil, being accounted from Sofala five hundred and ten miles the nearest way. All other houses throughout this empire (as is aforesaid) consist of timber, clay, and thatch. And here I may boldly affirm, that the ancient buildings of this part of Africa, & along the coast of the east Indies, may not only be compared, but even preferred before the buildings of Europe. The authors of which ancient monuments are unknown: but the later African buildings have been erected by the Arabians. In the time of Sebastian king of Portugal, the emperor of Monomotapa and many of his nobles were baptised: howbeit afterward being seduced by certain Moors, he put Gonsaluo silva to death, who converted him to the Christian religion. Whereupon Sebastian king of Portugal sent against him an army of * Mine author here setteth down too great a number. sixteen thousand, consisting for the most part of gentlemen and men of quality, under the conduct of Francisco Barretto. The Monomotapa being afraid of the Portugal forces, offered Barretto as good and acceptable conditions of peace as might be desired: but he not contented with reason, was quite overthrown, not by his enemies, but by the unwholesome air of Ethiopia, and by the manifold diseases which consumed his people. Cafraria the fifth general part of the lower Ethiopia. CAfraria, or the land of the Cafri we esteem to be both the coasts and inlands of the extreme southerly point of Africa, beginning from the river Magnice, and thence extending by Cabo da pescaria, Terra do Natal, Bahia damn lagoa, Bahia fermosa, about the cape of Buena esperança, by the bay called Agoada Saldanha, and thence Northward along the western coast of Africa, as far as Cabo Negro, or the black cape, which is situate very near unto eighteen degrees of Southerly latitude. The said Cape of Buena esperança is divided into three smaller headlands or capes; The westermost, being called Cabo de buena esperança, or The cape of good hope after the name of the whole promontory, and being cut from the rest of the firm land: The middlemost is named Cabo falso, because the Portugals in their voyage homewards from the east Indies, have sometimes mistaken this for the true cape beforementioned; between which two capes runneth into the sea a mighty river called by the Portugals Rio dolce (where their caraks often take in fresh water) and by the natural inhabitants Camissa, which springeth out of a small lake called Gale, situate among The mountains of the moon so much celebrated by ancient geographers: The third and eastermost cape stretching farthest into the sea, is called Cabo das Agulhas, or the cape of Needles, because there the needles of dials touched with the loadstone, stand directly North, without any variation either to the east or to the west: between this cape and the foresaid westermost cape (which lie forth into the sea like two horns) is the breadth of this mighty promontory, containing about five and twenty leagues; the length whereof from the river of Fernando Poo, where it beginneth to iuttie forth into the sea, along the western coast southward, to the cape das Agulhas, amounteth to two thousand two hundred Italian miles; and from Cabo das Agulhas, along the eastern shore northward, to Cape Guardafu, are three thousand three hundred of the same miles. This cape at the first discovery thereof was called by Navigators, The Lion of the sea; & Cabo tormentoso, or The tempestuous cape; not so much, as I take it, for the dangerous and stormy seas more about this cape than any other; but partly in regard of the chargeable, dangerous, and long travels of the Portugals before they could attain unto it; and partly because of the great compass which in their voyages outward they are constrained to fetch for the doubling thereof; and partly also in regard of some tempestuous and stormy weather wherewith they have been encountered at this Cape; which notwithstanding at certain times is an ordinary matter upon all shores and promontories over the face of the whole earth. And albeit some will not come within sight of this cape, but keep a great distance off, for fear of the dangerous seas beating thereupon (as namely Francis de Almeida who sailed above an hundred leagues to the south, in forty degrees G. B. B. Rel. un. dell. Afr. Part. 1. lib. 2. of latitude; Pedro de Agnaia in forty five; and Vasco Carualho in forty seven, where in the month of july eight of his men died for cold) yet we find by the late and modern experience of sir Francis Drake, master Candish, master Lancaster in his return from the east Indies, and of the Hollanders in their navigations thither, begun in the year 1595. that those seas are at sometimes not only free from stormy tempests, but most pleasant also to sail upon, with fair and gentle weather. And as the Spaniards for a long time (that they might discourage all other nations from attempting navigation upon The south sea beyond America) blinded all Christendom with a report, that the straits of Magellan were unrepasable: so perhaps the Portugals, to terrify all others from sailing to the east Indies, and to keep the gain and secrets of that rich trade entire unto themselves, have in their writings and relations made the doubling of the cape of Buena Esperança, and the crossing over those seas, a matter of far greater difficulty and danger, than it is of late manifestly found to be. The name of Buena esperança or good hope, was given unto this promontory by john the second king of Portugal; because that when his fleets had once doubled this cape, either outward or homeward, they then steadfastly hoped in good time to perform the residue of their voyage; otherwise not. In the midst of this cape lieth a plot of ground of that beauty and delight, as that without any human industry it may compare with the most artificial gardens of Europe. On the top of this place, nature minding as it were to excel herself, hath framed a great plain, which for beautiful situation, fruitfulness of herbs, variety of flowers, and flourishing verdure of all things, seemeth to resemble a terrestrial paradise. The Portugals term it 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 unfitly, The table of the cape. And to the end they might not fail of the means to enjoy so pleasant a place, there is close under it a very good harbour which is called The port of Conception. The people of this place called in the Arabian tongue Cafri, Caffres, or Cafates, that is to say, lawless or outlaws, are for the most part exceeding black of colour, which very thing may be a sufficient argument, that the sun is not the sole or chief cause of their blackness; for in divers other countries where the heat thereof is far more scorching and intolerable, there are tawny, brown, yellowish, ashcoloured, and white people; so that the cause there of seemeth rather to be an hereditary quality transfused from the parents, than the intemperature of an hot climate, though it also may be some furtherance thereunto. The Hollanders in the year 1595. entering the harbour of Saint Bras, somewhat to the east of Cabo das Agulhas, had conversation & truck with some of these Caffres, whom they found to be a stout and valiant people, but very base and contemptible in their behaviour and apparel, being clad in ox and sheep's skins, wrapped about their shoulders with the hairy sides inward, in form of a mantle. Their weapons are a kind of small slender darts or pikes, some whereof are headed with some kind of metal, the residue being unheaded, and hardened only at the points with fire. They cover their privy parts with a sheeps tail, which is bound up before and behind with a girdle. Their horne-beasts are, like those of Spain, very well limmed and proportioned. Their sheep are great and fair, not having any wool on their backs, but a kind of harsh hair like goats. Other particulars by them observed, for brevities sake, I omit. Now that we may proceed in describing the residue of Cafraria, having sailed about the cape of Buena esperança westward, albeit the coast in regard of the greatness thereof may seem to lie directly north, yet for the space of seventeen degrees, till you come to Cabo Negro, (the farthest Northwesterne bound of this fifth part of the lower Ethiopia) it trendeth somewhat to the west: along which coast somewhat within the land appeareth a mighty rank or ridge of mountains, called by the Portugals Os picos fragosos, Os Picos fragosos. that is, the ragged points or spires, being besides their excessive height, craggy, rough, and steep, lying bare, desolate, and utterly void of all succour, and serving for no other end, but for an object to the winds, and a mark for the tempests. The residue of the coast, till you come to Cabo Negro, sometimes lying low and sometimes high, sometimes shooting into the sea, and sometimes again gently retiring, containeth many plains, hills, valleys, and places most fertile and delightful; some of them being always of so fresh and pleasant view, as they seem to represent a continual spring. The sixth and last part of the lower or extreme Ethiopia, containing the kingdom of Congo; whereunto in times past were tributary and subject the kingdoms of Matama, and Angola to the south; the kingdoms of Quisama, and Pangelungoes to the east; and to the north the kingdom of Anzicana inhabited by the Anzichi, and Loango peopled by the Bramas. FIrst therefore (according to our proposed order) The kingdom of Matama. that we may begin with the most southerly parts; The kingdom of Matama so called after the name of the king thereof, (who being a Gentile ruleth over divers provinces named Quimbebe) bordereth north upon the first great lake whereout Nilus springeth, and upon the south frontiers of Angola; east it abutteth upon the western bank of the river Bagamidri; and stretcheth south as far as the river Bravagul, which springeth out of the mountains of the moon. This country standeth in a good & wholesome air, & aboundeth with mines of crystal & other metals, & hath victuals great plenty. And although the people thereof & their neighbour-borderers do traffic together; yet the king of Matama and the king of Angola wage war oftentimes one against another: also the said river Bagamidri divideth this kingdom of Matama from the great empire of Monomotapa before described, which lieth to the east thereof. Next followeth Angola, a kingdom subject in times passed to the king of Angola. Congo, the governor whereof not very many years ago, growing exceedingly rich & mighty, rebelled against his sovereign, & by divers attempts shaking off the yoke of superiority, became himself an absolute prince. This country, by reason that the people are suffered to have as many wives as they list, is a place most wonderfully populous. They go whole millions of them to the wars, not leaving any men of service behind: but for want of victuals they are often constrained to leave their enterprises half undone. Upon this king, Paulo Diaz, who remained governor in these parts for the king of Portugal, waged war: the reason was, because certain Portugal merchants and others going by way of traffic to Cabaza, a town situate an hundred and fifty miles from the sea, where the king of Angola usually resideth; they were by order from this king, the same year that king Sebastian died in Barbary, suddenly spoiled of their goods, and part of them slain; it being alleged, that they were all spies, and came to undermine the present state. Whereupon Paulo Diaz provided himself, and with two galeots did many notable exploits on both sides of the river Coanza. Finally having built a fort in a very commodious and hilly ground, at the confluence or meeting of the river last mentioned, and the river Luiola, with a small number of Portugals, joined to the aid sent him from the king of Congo and from certain princes of Angola his confederates, he gave the foresaid king (notwithstanding his innumerable troops of Negroes) divers & sundry overthrows. The said river Coanza springeth out of the lake of Aquelunda, situate westward of the great lake whereour Nilus takes his original. In this kingdom are the mountains of Cabambe, The siluer-mines of Cabambe. abounding with rich and excellent silver mines; which have ministered the chief occasion of all the foresaid wars. This region aboundeth also with other minerals, and with cattle of all sorts. Most true it is, that dogs-flesh is here accounted of all others the daintiest meat; for which cause they bring up and fatten great plenty of dogs for the shambles. Yea it hath been constantly affirmed, that a great dog accustomed to the bull was sold in exchange of two and twenty slaves, the value of whom could not amount to much less than two hundred and twenty ducats. The priests of Angola called gang, are held in such estimation and account, as the people are verily persuaded, that they have in their power abundance and scarcity, life and death. For they have knowledge of medicinable herbs, and of deadly poisons also, which they keep secret unto themselves; and by means of their familiarity with the devil, they often foretell things to come. Towards the lake of Aquelunda before mentioned, lieth a country called Quizama. Quizama; the inhabitants whereof being governed after the manner of a common wealth, have showed themselves very friendly to the Portugals, and have done them special good service in their wars against the king of Angola. Thus having briefly pointed at the former three bordering countries, let us now with like brevity pass through the kingdom of Congo itself. Bahia das 〈◊〉, or the bay of cows. This kingdom therefore (accounting Angola, as indeed it is, a member thereof) beginneth at Bahia das vacas in thirteen, and endeth at Cabo da Caterina in two degrees and an half of southerly latitude. True it is that the coast near unto the said Bay of cows is subject to the king of Congo, but the inland is governed by him of Angola. East and west it stretcheth from the sea in breadth as far as the lake of Aquelunda, for the space of six hundred miles, and is divided into six provinces: namely, the province The six provinces of Congo. of Pemba, situate in the very hart and centre of the whole kingdom; Batta, the most easterly province, where the ancient writers seem to have placed Agisymba; Pango which bordereth upon the Pangelungi; Sundi the most Northerly province; Sogno which stretcheth over the mouth of the great river Zaire; and Bamba which is the principal of all the rest both for extension of ground, for riches, and for military forces. In the province of Pemba, or rather in a several territory by itself, standeth the S. Saluador the chief city of Congo. city of Sant Saluador, in former times called Banza, being the metropolitan of all Congo, and the seat of the king, situate an hundred and fifty miles from the sea, upon a rocky and high mountain; on the very top whereof is a goodly plain abounding with fountains of wholesome and sweet water, and with all other good things which are requisite either for the sustenance, or solace of mankind: and upon this plain where Sant Saluador is seated, there may inhabit to the number of an hundred thousand persons. In this city the Portugals have a ward by themselves, separate from the rest, containing a mile in compass: and about that bigness also is the palace or house of the king. The residue of the people dwell for the most part scatteringly in villages. It is a place enriched by nature with corn, cattle, fruits, and wholesome springs of water in great abundance. The principal river of all Congo called Zaire, taketh his chief original The great 〈◊〉 of Zaire. out of the second lake of Nilus, lying under the Equinoctial line: and albeit this is one of the mightiest rivers of all Africa, being eight and twenty miles broad at the mouth, yet was it utterly unknown to ancient writers. Amongst other rivers it 〈◊〉 Vumba and Barbela, which spring out of the first great lake. In this country are sundry other rivers also, which fetch their original out of the lake of Aquelunda: the principal whereof are Coanza, which divideth the kingdom of Congo from that of Angola, and the Crocodiles. river Lelunda, which breedeth crocodiles & water-horses which the Greeks call Hippopotami, of which creatures the isle of horses in the mouth of the river Zaire taketh denomination. The Hippopotamus or water-horse is Water-horses. somewhat tawny, of the colour of a lion; in the night he comes on land to feed upon the grass, and keepeth in the water all the day time. The Africans tame and manage some of these horses, and they prove exceeding swift; but a man must beware how he pass over deep rivers with them, for they will suddenly dive under water. Also in these rivers of Ethiopia are bred a kind of oxen, which live every night upon the land. Here likewise breedeth another strange creature, called in the Congonian language Ambize Angulo, that is to say, a hogge-fish, being so exceeding fat, and of such greatness, that some of them weigh above five hundred pound. This abundance of waters, together with the heat of the climate, which proceedeth from the nearness of the sun, causeth the country to be most fruitful of plants, herbs, fruits, and corn; & much more fertile would it be, if nature were helped forward by the industry of the inhabitants. here also, besides goats, sheep, dear, Gugelle, coneys, hares, civet-cats, and ostriches, are great swarms of tigers, which are very hurtful both to man and beast. The Zebra or Zabra of this country being about the bigness of a mule, is a The Zabra. beast of incomparable swiftness, streaked about the body, legs, ears, and other parts, with black, white and brown circles of three fingers broad; which do make a pleasant show. Buffles, wild asses called by the greeks Onagri, and Dantes (of whose hard skins they make all their targets) range in herds up and down the woods. Also here are infinite store of elephants The elephant. of such monstrous bigness, that by the report of sundry credible persons, some of their teeth do weigh two hundred pounds, at sixteen ounces the pound: upon the plains this beast is swifter than any horse, by reason of his long steps; only he cannot turn with such celerity. Trees he overturneth with the strength of his back, or breaketh them between his teeth; or standeth upright upon his hinder feet, to browse upon the leaves and tender sprigs. The she elephants bear their brood in their wombs two years before they bring forth young ones: neither are they great with young, but only from seven years to seven years. This creature is said to live 150. years; he is of a gentle disposition; and relying upon his great strength, he hurteth none but such as do him injury; only he will in a sporting manner gently heave up with his 〈◊〉 such persons as he meeteth. He loveth the water beyond measure, and will stand up to the mid-body therein, bathing the ridge of his back, and other parts with his long promuscis or trunk. His skin is four fingers thick; and it is reported, that an elephant of this country being stricken with a little gun called Petrera, was not wounded therewith, but so sore bruised inwardly, that within three days after he died. here are likewise reported to be mighty adders or snakes of five and twenty spans long, and five spans broad, which will swallow up an whole stag, or any other creature of that bigness. Neither are they here destitute of Indie-cockes and hens, partridges, feasants, and innumerable birds of pray, both of the land and of the sea; whereof some dive under the water, which the Portugals call Pelicans. Over against the most southerly part of the said kingdom of Congo, The isle and haven of Loanda. where it confineth with Angola, lieth an Isle called Loanda, being twenty miles long, and but one mile broad at the most, between which and the main land is the best port of all that Ocean. About this Isle do haunt infinite store of whales, where notwithstanding no amber at all is found; which is a manifest argument that it proceedeth notfrom these creatures. Here they fish for certain little shells, which in Congo and the countries adjoining are used in steed of money. The well-waters of this Isle, when the sea ebbeth, are salt, but when it floweth they are most fresh and sweet. In this Isle the Portugals have a town from whence they traffic to Congo and Angola: and amongst other commodities, they get every year in those parts about five thousand slaves; the custom of which trade belongeth by ancient constitutions unto the crown of Portugal. To the north of Congo upon the sea coast beginneth the kingdom of Loango. Loango tributary in times passed to the king of Congo: It aboundeth with elephants; and the inhabitants called Bramas are circumcised after the jewish manner. Next upon them do border the Anzichi, who are possessed of large Anzichi. countries, namely from the river Zaire even to the deserts of Nubia. They abound with mines of copper, and with sanders both Red, and Grace which are the best; and some are of opinion, that here groweth the right Lignum Aquilae, which is of so excellent virtue in physic. They have one supreme king, with many princes under him. They traffic in Congo, and carry home from thence salt and great shells to be used for coin (which are brought thither from the Isle of San Tomés) in exchange of their cloth of the palm tree, and of ivory: but the chief commodities which they part from, are slaves of their own nation and of Nubia: and the said shells they use also instead of jewels and ornaments. Both they and the Bramas before mentioned do carry for their defence in the wars, certain targets made of the skin of a beast which in Germany is called Dante: their weapons offensive be little bows and short arrows, which they shoot with such wonderful celerity, as they will discharge twenty one after another, before the first arrow fall to the ground. They have shambles of mans-flesh as we have of beeves and muttons. They eat their enemies which they take in the wars: their slaves which they cannot make away for a good round price, they sell unto the butchers: and some will offer themselves to the slaughter, for the love of their princes and patrons: so silly they are, that to do their lords a pleasure, they will not refuse present death: wherefore the Portugals repose not so much trust in any kind of slaves as in them: and they are very valiant also in the wars. But, to return unto the sea-coast; from the mouth of the river Zaire Northward, the land bearing out somewhat more to the west, is framed into three headlands, namely, Cabo primero, Cabo da Caterina, and the cape of Lopo Gonsalues, which is a cape very well known in regard of the eminency and outstretching thereof. Itlyeth in one degree of southerly latitude, Over against which cape within the land do inhabit the people called Bramas in the kingdom of Loango beforementioned. From hence for the space of five or six degrees, till you come to Punta delgada, or The slender point, the coast lieth in a manner directly North; most of which tract is inhabited by a nation of Negroes called Ambus. North of the said slender point you have Rio does Camarones', or the river of shrimps, which is full of little Isles; not far from which river are The countries of Biafar and Medra, inhabited with people which are addicted to enchantments, witchcrafts, and all kind of abominable sorceries. Much more might be said concerning this sixth part of the lower Ethiopia: but because it is in so ample and methodical a manner described in the history of Philippo Pigafetta, most judiciously and aptly Englished by the learned Master Abraham Hartwell; I refer the reader thereunto, as to the principal and the very fountain of all other discourses which have been written to any purpose of Congo and the countries adjoining. Of the countries of Benin, Meleghete, Ghinea, and Sierra Leona. WEstward from the country's last mentioned lieth the kingdom of Benin, having a very proper town of that name, and an haven called Gurte. The 〈◊〉 live in Idolatry, and are a rude and brutish nation; notwithstanding that their prince is served with such high reverence, and never cometh in sight but with great solemnity, & many ceremonies: at whose death his chief favourites count it the greatest point of honour to be buried with him, to the end (as they vainly imagine) they may do him service in another world. This country aboundeth with long pepper called Of this long pepper read Ramusius, vol. 1. fol. 115. pag. 2. by the Portugals Pimienta dal rabo, which is as much to say, as ppeper with a tail: This tailed or long pepper so far excelleth the pepper of the east Indies, that an ounce thereof is of more force then half a pound of that other. For which cause the kings of Portugal have done what lay in them, to keep it from being brought into these parts of Europe, lest it should too much abase the estimation and price of their Indian pepper. All which notwithstanding there hath been great quantity secretly conveyed from thence by the Portugals: as likewise the English and French nations, and of late years the Hollanders have had great traffic into those parts. Next follow the kingdoms of Temian and Dauma; and lower to the The provinces of Temian, Dauma, and 〈◊〉. south the province of Meleghete, a place very famous and well known, in regard of a little red grain which there groweth, being in shape somewhat like to the 〈◊〉 of Italy, but of a most vehement and fiery taste: and these little grains are by the apothecary's called Grana Paradisi. Here also is made Grana Paradisi. of 〈◊〉 and the ashes of the palm-tree, a kind of soap, which hath double the force of ours. For which cause it is forbidden by the Portugals, who The 〈◊〉 of Mina. have upon that coast a little to the east of Cabo das tres puntas, in the northerly latitude of five degrees, a strong castle called San Georgio de lá Mina, whereunto by way of traffic they draw all the gold and riches of the countries adjoining. Westward of these lieth the country of Ghinea, inhabited by a people which the ancient writers called * Pliny calleth them 〈◊〉. Autolatae, and Ichthyophagi: Ghinea is so named, according to the chief city thereof called Genni, being situate upon the river of Sanega. The people of this country towards the sea-coast live upon fish; and they of the inland sustain themselves with Lizards and such like creatures; & in some places more temperate their food consisteth of herbs and milk. They converse together in great families; and they fight oftentimes for water and for pastures; neither have they 〈◊〉 knowledge of learning or liberal arts. So long as the sun continueth in our northern signs, that is, from the xj. of March to the xiii. of September, this people in regard of extreme 〈◊〉 heat, are constrained all the day time (being ordinarily with them of 12. hours) to retire themselves within their houses, and to do all their business in the night. The country in most places is destitute of trees that bear fruit: neither have the greatest part of the inhabitants any hair on their bodies, save only a thick tuft growing upon their heads: they sell their children unto strangers, supposing that their estate cannot possibly be impaired. Unto these natural miseries of the place, you may add the insupportable mischiefs which are here done by the locusts: for albeit these creatures do infinite harm likewise in all the inner parts of Africa; yet seemeth it that this country of Ghinea is their most proper habitation; whither they do often resort in such innumerable swarms, that like a mighty thick cloud they come raking along in the sky, and afterward falling down, they cover the face of the earth, devouring all things that they light upon. Their coming towards any place is known two or three days before by the yellowness of the sun. But in most places 〈◊〉. where they haunt, the poor people are revenged of them by killing and driving them in the air for their food: which custom is commonly used by the Arabians and Ethiopians; and the Portugals also have found vessels full of them upon the coast of Cambaia, where they do the like mischiefs. They which have eaten of them affirm that they are of a good taste, and that their flesh (so much as it is) is as white as that of a lobster. These may seem to be all one with those grasshoppers which God sent to plague Egypt; and the same kind of locusts, which the holy prophet john Baptist fed upon in the wilderness. Moreover along the coasts of Meleghete and Ghinea are divers small rivers and freshets, containing little water, and running a slow pace: which notwithstanding are the best and pleasantest things that are to be found in these forlorn countries. For wheresoever any little water springeth or runneth, thither do the people resort, partly for the watering of their scorched grounds, & partly to quench their own thirst. Also upon these coasts are divers and sundry headlands which stretch into the sea; as namely The fair cape, The three-pointed cape, The cape of Palmetrees, Cabo da Verga, & Sierra Sierra 〈◊〉. Leona. This cape last mentioned hath an exceeding high mountain thereupon, which causeth it to be seen a mighty distance off. It seemeth to be the same promontory which Hanno and Ptolemey call The chariot of the gods. It is called by the name of a lion in regard of the dreadful thunders and lightnings which are continually heard from the top thereof: howbeit near unto it are found apes, munkeys, and such other beasts as live in temperate places. Of Cabo verde, Sanega, and Gambra or Gambea. NOrthward of Sierra Leona lieth Cabo verde, or the green cape, called by Ptolemey Arsinarium, and being one of the most famous headlands in all Africa. It is environed with two rivers, namely the river of Gambra or Gambea on the south, and the river of Senaga on the north; which last river is esteemed to be an arm of Ghir or Niger. Gambea springeth out of the same fountains assigned by Ptolemey unto Niger (which by all the ancient writers is placed hereabout) and out of the lake of Libya. It is larger and deeper than that other of Senaga, and runneth a crooked course, receiving many lesser rivers thereinto. A factory of the Portugals. One hundred and eighty leagues within the mouth of this river the Portugals have a factory or place of traffic, called the factory of Cantor. Hither by exchange of sundry wares, they draw the gold of all those countries. In the mid way (as it were) unto the said factory, there The isle of elephants. is a place called the isle of Elephants in regard of the huge numbers of those creatures. The river of Senaga is thought to take his original out of the lakes called Chelonides. It containeth certain Isles, which in regard of their rough and ragged shape are good for nothing, but to breed adders and such like hurtful things, and these Isles in many places make the river utterly innavigable. About one hundred and fifty leagues from the mouth thereof, A mighty cataract or fall of Senaga. it falleth spouting-wise with such main force from certain high cliffs or rocks, that a man may walk dry under the stream thereof. The Negroes in their language call this place a Bow. It is reported that Nilus doth the like at his Cataracts or overfals. And Strabo writeth of certain rivers of Hyrcania, which from exceeding steep and craggy rocks gush with such violence into the Caspian sea, that whole 〈◊〉 may pass under them without danger of drowning. Into this river of Senaga, among many rivers unknown, falleth one, which passing through a red soil, is itself also died red: and whosoever drinketh of the waters first of the Red river, and after of Senaga, is constrained extremely to 〈◊〉. Along the banks of this mighty river inhabit the black and barbarous nations of the Gialofis, the Tucuroni, the Caraguloni, and the Bagani. Finally it voideth into the sea at two mouths, one of which mouths is a mile broad. And it is strange to consider, how upon the south side of this river the people are black and well proportioned, and the soil pleasant and fertile; whereas on the north side they are brown and of a small stature, and do inhabit a barren and miserable country. In both the said rivers of Gambra and Senaga do breed divers strange kinds offish, and other creatures of the water, as namely crocodiles, sea-horses, and winged serpents; and hither come to drink sundry sorts of wild beafts. The lands comprehended between them both, by reason of their yearly inundation (for from the xv. of june they increase forty days together, and are so long time decreasing, after the manner of Nilus) abound with all kinds of grain and pulse whereof the climate is capable, as namely with beans, 〈◊〉, millet, etc. but wheat, rye, barley, and grapes cannot there attain to ripeness and perfection, by reason of overmuch moisture: save only some small quantity of wheat near the deserts where the Caraguloni inhabit. But their chief sustenance is Zaburro, otherwise called Ghinie-wheate or Maiz, which they sow after the inundation of their rivers, casting some quantity of sand thereupon to defend it from the heat, which otherwise would scorch the ground too excessively. They drink the juice of the palm-tree, which they cut and lance for that purpose: and this juice not being tempered, is as strong and heady as any wine. Neither are they here destitute of mighty adders, of lions, leopards, and elephants: but beasts for labour they have none, save only a small kind of oxen, and goats. The horses which are brought thither by merchants, live but a short time. The air, by reason of abundance of lakes bred by the overflows of their rivers, is moist and gross. And here fall most unwholesome and palpable dews. It raineth in these countries from October till the end of july, every day about noon, with thunder and lightning. All the kingdoms and countries by us before described, from the cape of Buena esperança, to the river last mentioned, are inhabited by black people. The most northerly are the Gialofi, who spread themselves between the two foresaid rivers for the space of five hundred miles eastward: so that the river Senaga is the utmost northern bound of negroes, or nations extremely black; howbeit upon the banks thereof are found people of sundry colours, by reason of the variety of women. Between this river of Senaga and Cabo blanco, or the white cape, lieth a country called by some Anterote, being all over in a manner sandy, barren, low, and plain; neither is there in all this distance any place of account or reckoning, save only the isles of Arguin (where of we will entreat among the isles of Africa) and a territory or town six days journey within the main, called Hoden. This town is not walled, but lieth open, and 〈◊〉 vol. 1. fol. 99 consisteth of the wandering Arabians rude and homely habitations, being notwithstanding a place of Rendezvous or meeting for all such as travel in Carovans from Tombuto, and other places in the land of Negroes to Barbary. The principal food of the inhabitants here, are dates and barley, both which the soil yieldeth indeed, but not in so plentiful a manner: and they drink the milk of camels & of other beasts, for wine they have none at all. These people are Mahumetans, and most deadly enemies to Christians: neither abide they long in any place, but run roving and wandering up and down those deserts. They are themselves very populous, and have abundance of camels, upon whose backs they carry copper, silver, and other commodities from Barbary to Tombuto, and to the residue of the land of negroes. From Cabo blanco to the regions of Sus, and Hea (which are the first provinces described by john Leo) excepting a small portion only of Biledulgerid, you have nothing but part of the vast, fruitless, & uninhabitable desert of Libya, called by the Arabians Sarra, which stretcheth from the western Ocean as far as the frontiers of Egypt. Thus from the very bottom of the Red sea, having coasted along the eastern and western shores of the most southerly parts of Africa, and briefly described all the principal known empires, kingdoms, and regions within that main, which are left untouched by our author john Leo; let us now with like or more brevity prosecute the description of the islands which are by the hand of the omnipotent creator planted round about this ample and spacious continent. A brief enumeration and description of all the most famous and known Islands situate round about the coasts of Africa, which have been omitted by JOHN LEO: beginning first with the most northeasterly, and so by little and little bringing ourselves about the Cape of Buena Esperança nearer unto Europe. The Islands of the Red sea. BOth the shores of the Red sea, as well on the African as on the Arabian side, are every where beset with many small islets and rocks, which lie so thick together, that they make the navigation all along the said coasts to be most dangerous and difficult. 〈◊〉. The isles of the Red sea most worthy to be remembered, are these following. Babelmandel a little isle situate in the very mouth of the Red sea, in twelve degrees, containeth two leagues in compass, being from either of the firm lands three miles distant, and standing about twenty paces high out of the water. By Ptolemey it is called The isle of Diodorus. Upon this isle, or one of the continents adjoining, are to be hired the most experimented pilots for all that narrow sea, even as far as Suez. And from the eastern and western side of this islet, Strabo reporteth that the twofold entrance of the Arabian Gulf was barred with a double chain. More to the north standeth Camaran, being about eight leagues The isle of Camaran. from the Arabian coast in fifteen degrees of latitude. Upon this isle are to be seen great ruins of ancient buildings. It hath one indifferent good haven, and aboundeth with fresh water, (a thing most precious and acceptable in those parts) with salt, and with cattle. On the other side towards Africa, in fifteen degrees and an half, standeth the isle of Dalaqua of about Dalaqua. thirty miles in circuit, which space is almost contained in the length thereof, being a place very famous for the abundance of pearls which are there caught; wherewithal likewise the isle of Mua near unto it is richly Mua. 〈◊〉 end owed. Next followeth Mazua in form like to an half moon, and not above a bow-shoot distant from the African main: between which isle and the continent, there is an excellent haven which is now the only port that Prete janni hath in all his dominions; for which (as you may read before in the description of the said prince's empire) his lieutenant Barnagasso is constrained to pay a great yearly tribute to the Turk. Over against Mazua, upon the firm, standeth the town of Ercoco. Upon this little isle are divers houses of Arabians, built of lime and stone; and The isle, haven, and city of Suaquen. others of clay covered with thatch. North of Mazua standeth Suaquen in a certain lake made by the sea, which there insinuateth itself within the land, and frameth a most secure and commodious haven. On this small islet is built the fair and stately city of Suaquen, being almost as large as the isle itself; wherein resideth the Turks lieutenant or Bassa of Abassia. Of the Isle of Socotera and other isles lying without the narrow entrance of the Arabian gulf. WIthout the straight of Babelmandel there are no islands worthy of mention, save only Socotera; which (as john Barros supposeth) was of old called by Ptolemey Dioscoridis & lieth in sight of cape Guardafu, which the same author nameth Aromata Promontorium. Being about threescore miles long, and five and twenty miles broad, it is divided with a rough and exceeding high ridge of mountains, and is subject unto most terrible and boisterous winds, which do out of measure dry and parch the same. For which cause, and in regard of the slothful rudeness of the inhabitants, it is very scarce of victuals: for it yieldeth neither wheat, rice, wine, nor honey. In the valleys and places of shelter it affordeth some quantity of Millet, of dates, and of sundry kinds of fruits: neither is it altogether destitute of pasture for cattle. It is frequented by merchants for * Or vermilion. Cinabre, Sanguis Draconis, and the most excellent Aloës of the world. It hath no haven of importance. Two towns of the Portugals in Socotora. The Portugals are here possessed of two small towns, one called Coro, and the other Benin; and here in times past the king of Fartac [A country of Arabia Foelix,] had a castle & a garrison of soldiers upon this isle, which castle being taken by the Portugals, was afterward by them abandoned, because it quited not the cost. The inhabitants being of a brown colour, and of a good constitution; are in religion a kind of Christians. They hold an opinion that Saint Thomas suffered shipwreck upon this isle, and that of his ship was built a most ancient church, which as yet is to be seen walled round about, with three allies or partitions, and three doors. Furthermore they live for the most part in caves or in cabins made of boughs, very far from the sea. They go appareled in course cloth, or in the skins of beasts. In war their weapons are slings, and sword made of base iron: and the women are as good soldiers as the men. They are much addicted unto Magic and enchantments, and do bring to pass matters incredible. They have no use at all of navigation, nor of traffic, and yet forsooth they esteem themselves the most noble and worthy people under the heavens; as also they are utterly void of learning: which I do note, because that such as are learned make but small account of their wisdom. To the North of Socotera are two small Isles which are called the two The two sisters. sisters: the inhabitants whereof being of an olive-colour, live without law, and have no conversation with any other people. The commodities of these Islets are ivory, amber, Sanguis draconis, Aloës, and a kind of precious stones called Nizzolij. Likewise over against Socotera are two other Islets, one called the Isle of men, and the other the Isle of women, being distant thirty miles asunder, and five miles from Socotera. They are so termed, because that in the one dwell men only, and in the other women. Howbeit they visit one another at certain seasons: but they cannot stay one in the Isle of another above three months, in regard of a secret quality of the air which is contrary to either sex. A matter (if it be true) most strange and admirable. Of the Isles lying in the sea called Sinus Barbaricus, over against the Eastern and Southeasterne shore of Africa. ALl along from the cape of Guardafu to the cape of Buena Esperança are found sundry Islands, partly dispersed here and there in the sea, and partly adjoining upon the firm land. Such as are far into the sea, are the greatest part unhabited, as namely, the Isle of Don Garçia, The * three and The * seven brethren, As rocas partidas, the Isles of Sant Brandan, and Isles which are not inhabited. those of Mascarenha, of Sant Francis, of Santa Apollonia, of john de Lisboa, of Cosinoledo: and between the great Isle of Saint Laurence and the main, the Isles Do Natal or of the nativity, as likewise the three Isles of Comoro, with those of Alioa, of Spirito Santo, and of saint Christopher. But of those which the vicinity of the firm land hath made more noble Concerning the isles of Mombaça, Quiloa, & Moçambique read more at large in the discourse of Zanguebar before set down, whereas 〈◊〉 thought it 〈◊〉 to entreat of them, being (as it were) certain fragments of the main, & having large territories thereof subject unto them. and frequented, the first that offereth itself to our consideration, is the Isle of Mombaza in four degrees of southerly latitude, cut out by a certain channel or arm of the sea, which divideth the same from the main of Africa: in compass it containeth twelve miles; and at the entrance of the said channel, upon a down, standeth the city of Mombaça, built very handsomely after the Arabian fashion. Somewhat farther from the continent are situate the Isles of Pemba, Zanzibar, and Monfia inhabited by Negroes; the greatest of which is Zanzibar, the prince whereof is called by the name of a king; and it lieth under six degrees, of south latitude, being from the main ten leagues distant. But the sovereign of all these Isles was Quiloa, inhabited like the rest, with Mahumetans of little bodies and abject minds. It aboundeth with rice, millet, cattle, woods of palmtrees, lemons, oranges, & sugarcanes; where of notwithstanding they are ignorant how to make sugar. The city standeth upon the seashore over against the firm 〈◊〉: it is built of pure marble, and the streets are very narrow: a thing common among the Arabians, whereby they use to defend themselves, after the enemy hath once entered their towns. From this Isle to Moçambique are about an hundred leagues. Without the port lieth Misa, and three miles off Songo and Canga inhabited by Moors. Next follow As Ilhas do Açotatado, or The isles of the scourged, because here a certain pilot that was a Moor, who had determined to wrack the whole fleet of Vasco da Gama, received punishment. Concerning Moçambique called by Ptolemey and other ancient writer's Prassia, we have entreated before. Four miles from thence lie the desert isles of Saint George: and then the isles of Angoscia inhabited by Moors. These are stored with indifferent quantity of victuals: and here Plenty of Ambergrise. upon an east wind they gather plenty of Ambergrise. An hundred and fifty miles from Cabo does corrientes, lieth A Ilha das vacas, or The isle of Cows, with a castle thereupon, and store of good water. As Ilhas llanas, or The plain isles are not worth the speaking of. A Ilha da cruz, otherwise called Ilha das fontanhas, was the farthest limit of Bartholomew Diaz his navigation, who was the first Portugal that ever doubled the cape of Buena esprança, and having doubled it, returned back without discovering any farther. Of the Isle of Saint Laurence, otherwise called Madagascar. THis isle called by the Portugals The isle of Sant Laurence, by the natural inhabitans Madagascar, by Paulus Venetus Magastar, by Ptolemey Menuthias, and by Pliny Cerne, is accounted one of the greatest, noblest, and richest in the whole world. About the midst thereof it approacheth towards the main of Africa, in form of an elbow, being distant from thence an hundred threescore and ten miles. The extremes of this isle are very far separate from the said main, and especially that which stretcheth toward the north-east. The whole isle containeth in breadth four hundred and fourscore, in length one thousand two hundred, and in compass four thousand miles; so that in bigness it far exceedeth Italy, though it be not so well inhabited and manured. Situate it is beyond the Equator in seventeen degrees, and stretcheth from thence to six and twenty degrees and an half of southerly latitude. It is plentifully endowed with all things needful for man's use: for it yieldeth cotton, Millet, Rice, Potatoes, sweet oranges, sugarcanes, and sundry kinds of pulse: as likewise, amber, jest, silver, copper, red sanders, saffron, a spice somewhat like unto cloves, and some quantity of ginger. Moreover, here are lions, leopards, stags, roe-deere, goats, kine, sheep, and other beasts both tame and wild. here are likewise innumerable elephants, so that from hence is conveyed great quantity of ivory. They have also great store of camels, whose flesh the inhabitants eat for the holesomenes thereof. The people (except some few Moors upon the coast) are idolaters, of colourblack, with curled hair, very barbarous, and in fashions resembling much the Caffres. They go naked all save their privities, which they cover with cloth of cotton: and they use in the war certain crooked staves headed with bone. The jesuits in their letters report, that in one part of this island there are white people found; who (as they affirm) are descended from the people of China; whereby may be gathered the great length of the Chinians navigations, and the largeness of their empire. The Portugals sailing towards India in due time, do pass between this great isle and the firm land; but if the season groweth towards winter, they hold on their course (as themselves report) on the back side thereof. In these two courses of navigation they have found, and daily do discover sundry isles, but of small account, part whereof we have mentioned before. Amongst others, as it were over against Moçambique, lieth on a certain strand or should an isle called Langane of a reasonable bigness, with a great river therein, being inhabited by Moors. And the farthest toward the west are those isles which the Portugals call Os Romeros. On the north-east part of this isle is the Bay of Antogill, being one of the safest and most commodious harbours in the world. Of the Isles of the Ethiopian sea about the cape of Buena esperança. THis sea I take to be most exceeding deep, because it hath fewer Isles than the former, and those few which it hath are but little ones. The first that was discovered on this side the cape of Buena Esperança is that of Don Aluarez, situate in thirty degrees and an half. And to the northwest of that is the Isle of Tristan d' Acunna being distant 〈◊〉. miles from the cape, and beyond the Equinoctial eight and thirty degrees; which being of a round form, containeth in compass fifty leagues. It is full of birds, and especially of sea-crowes or cormorants, and round about it lie four other small islets. The mariners hold, that near unto this isle, as unto that of Bermuda, there are continual storms and tempests. Not far from the main are certain dry and rocky isles, and others of none account. The Isles of Santa Helena, and of the Ascension. NExt followeth in the height of sixteen degrees of southerly latitude the isle of Santa Helena, discovered by ivan da Nova, being so fitly and commodiously situate for such as return home from the east Indies into Europe, as it seemeth there of purpose to have been planted by God for the furtherance of this voyage, and for the refreshing and comfort of navigators. In compass it containeth nine miles, & hath a most perfect healthful 〈◊〉, and sundry freshets of excellent water. The soil is of a red colour, and like unto ashes; it giveth way to ones footing like sand, and a man may shake every tree upon the isle. here the kings of Portugal have enacted, that none may remain to inhabit, except it be sometime two or three 〈◊〉 persons for the recovery of their health; to the end that the fleets may here plentifully and of free cost furnish themselves with fresh victuals, fruits, and water. So that when they arrive, they usually plant or sow some one thing or other, which presently springeth and groweth to ripeness; and then the seed falling into the earth, it multiplieth of itself. here are woods of Ebàn and Cedar, with infinite store of 〈◊〉, oranges, and all sorts of fruits; as likewise hogs, geese, hens, partridges, feasants, Guiniecocks, and other like creatures brought thither by the Portugals out of Europe, or from other countries. In sailing from Portugal toward India it is not so easily found: but in their return home they do here in few days cure all their diseases, and relieve their wants: and here to their 〈◊〉 solace and recreation they hunt, foul, and fish, and provide themselves of water, wood, and all things necessary. To the west thereof appear in the sea the isles of Santa Maria, and of the Trinity, which serve for signs unto the mariners. To the northwest of this isle, towards the coast of Brasil, are the The isles of Ascension. isles of Ascension, so called, because they were first discovered by Tristan Acunna in his return from the Indies upon Ascension day in the year 1508. They are all unhabited and desert, and have upon them infinite swarms of a kind of fowls of the bigness of ducks. Of the Isles of Loanda, Nobon, and Saint Thomas. Heard upon the firm land of the south part of Congo, is situate the isle of * Concerning this isle read more at large in the description of Congo. Loanda before mentioned. And over against the cape of Lopo Gonsalues in a manner, lieth the small isle of Nobon, being a rocky and desolate place, but of great importance for fishing; for which cause it is frequented by the inhabitants of Saint Thomas isle. This isle of Saint Thomas being an hundred and fower-score miles distant from the main, is of a round form, containing threescore Italian miles from side to side, and an hundred and fower-score miles also in compass: of which isle (because it is situate just under the Equinoctial, so that the horizon thereof passeth by both the poles) it will not be from our purpose to entreat somewhat at large; to the end we may the better understand the quality and temperature of such places as are seated in that part of the world. This isle when it was first discovered was nothing else but a wood of unprofitable trees, with their boughs turning crookedly upward. The air is extremely hot: in the months of March and September, when the sun passeth perpendicularly over, it raineth here out of measure, and in other months here falleth only a moist dew which watereth the ground. In the very midst it hath a woody mountain, which is continually overshadowed with a thick cloud, which cloud so moisteneth the trees that grow in great abundance upon this mountain, that from hence droppeth water sufficient for the watering of all their fields of sugarcanes. By how much the sun is more perpendicular over this isle, by so much is the air more cloudy & dark; and chose, the farther it is distant from perpendicularitie, the clearer and brighter is the sky. In the months of December, januarie, and February, such as are borne in Europe, can very hardly walk or move themselves for faintness: and all the rest of the year, once in eight or ten days, they seem to be taken with an hot and a cold fit of an ague, which continueth upon them for tow hours together. They are thrice or oftener let blood every year: and few of them live above fifty years; but their Negroes remain more than an hundred years alive. They which newly arrive there, are commonly surprised with a most dangerous fever, which holdeth them for twenty days together. And these are let blood, without any reckoning of ounces. Heereblow no winds at all, but only from the southeast, south, and south-west, which winds stir not in the months of December, januarie, and February, and therefore these months are most extremely hot. But in june, july, and August, they blow a fresh gale. In this isle the French evil, and the scuruies are very rife. The soil is of a mean colour between red and yellow, being clammy like clay, and by reason of the continual nightly dews, as soft and pliable as wax, and of incredible fertility. Besides divers other good ports, it hath one principal among the rest, belonging to the chief town or city called * Or perhaps Povaçaon, which (as I conjecture) may be all one with Poblation in Spanish, which signifieth a Colony or town. Pavoasan, consisting of above seven hundred families, and inhabited by Portugals, and into the said port runneth a little river of excellent water. To every of the Ingenios' or sugar-houses (which in all may amount to the number of seventy) do belong Negro-slaves, for the planting of their seventy Ingenios' in San Tomés. canes and the dressing of their sugars, to some, two hundred, and to others, three hundred a piece, who live upon Maiz or Ghiny-wheat: the number of which slaves is so great, that oftentimes they rebel, to the great damage of the Portugals. They have good sustenance also by means of a root, called there Igname, but in the west Indies Batata. Wheat that is here sown, groweth not to any ripeness or grain, but is resolved altogether into grass. They make wine of the palm-tree. Vines prosper nothing kindly in this place, except it be here and there one, planted by an house-side, and attended with great diligence. They bring forth clusters at the same time, some ripe, some green, and some blossoms only; and they bear fruit twice in the year, as do the figtrees likewise. They have sugarcanes ripe all the year long: but melons only in june, july, and August. No tree that beareth fruit with a stone or kernel will fructify or prosper in this place. 〈◊〉 are found all over the Isle certain crabs or crevices like unto them of the sea; here be likewise grey parrots, and infinite other birds of divers sorts; and in the sea are mighty store of whales, especially toward the firm land. The principal riches of this isle consist in sugars, whereof there groweth great abundance. The sugarcanes are planted and cut every month, and in five months they grow to ripeness, but by reason of the moistness of the air, they neither prove hard nor white, but are of a reddish colour. The tenths which belong to the king amount to the number of 12. or 14. thousand Arrovas', every Arrova being one and thirty Italian pound-weight. In times passed there were forty ships yearly laden therewith; but now of late certain worms which eat the roots of the canes, or (as others think) white ants or mice, have so mightily impaired the growth of this commodity, that now there are not above six ships laden therewith. The sugarcanes, after they be once ground, they give unto their hogs, wherewith they prove fat, and their flesh is very savoury. For return of sugars, the merchants of Europe carry thither meal, wine, sword, oil, cheese, hides, drinking-glasses, and certain shells, which there and in the country's adjoining they use instead of money. Of the conjunction between the men of Europe and the Negro women are bred a generation of brown or tawny people. This Isle of Saint Thomas together with the principal town and castle, was in October 1599 taken by part of the same fleet of Hollanders, which not fully four months before had sacked the isles, castles and towns of Gran Canaria and Gomera. Of the Isle del principe, and that of Fernando Po THe Isle del principe or of the prince, situate in three degrees of Northerly latitude, and one hundred twenty miles on this side the isle of Sant Thomas, is little in quantity, but excellent in quality: for which cause it is thoroughly tilled and manured. The revenues thereof (which consist the greatest part in sugars) were in times past allowed unto the prince of Portugal; whereupon it was named The isle of the prince. This Isle was in the year 1598. taken by certain ships of war sent forth under the conduct of julianus Clerehagen at the charges of Balthasar Musheron of Camphor in Zealand merchant, who had the conquest thereof given him by patent from Prince Maurice, and the States general of the united provinces. That of Fernando Po hath no other matter of special note, save only a certain lake which is the original of sundry freshets of sweet and wholesome water, which make the island to be most pleasant. It seemed so beautiful to the first discoverer thereof, that he termed it Ilha fermosa, or The fair isle. To the west of these two isles are situate the isle of Sant Matthew, and that of Santa Cruz; and afterward having passed the Equinoctial, you come to the isle of Sant Paul, and the isle of conception, both which were discovered by Pedro Aluarez Cabral in the year 1501. Of the isles of Cabo verde. NExt unto Cape verde itself stand The Barbacene which are seven small isles replenished with green trees, and full of strange birds unknown to us; and yet are they utterly void of inhabitants. But those that are called the isles of Cape verde (which by ancient authors are thought to have been named Gorgones, or Gorgades, or Hesperides) are nine in number, and are fituate between Cabo verde and Cabo blanco. They were first discovered by Antonio di Nolli a Genua, and began in like sort to be peopled, in the year of our Lord 1440. Albeit there are none of them now inhabited, but only the isle of Sant jago, and Isla del fo go or The burning isle. The principal of them all is Saint Iago being seventy miles long, This town was taken by sir Francis Drake 1585. and by sir 〈◊〉 Shirley 1596. whereon the Portugals have a fair and strong town called Ribera grand, with a river running through it, and a commodious and secure haven: it is very strongly seated between two mountains, and consisteth of five hundred families at the least. The river (which springeth two leagues from the city) is beautified upon the banks thereof with Cedars, Orenge-trees, and divers other plants, amongst which the Palm tree of India that beareth nuts, prospereth exceeding well. The herbs of Europe grow here as naturally as in their original soil; howbeit the seeds thereof must every year be brought out of Spain. The isle is generally uneven and mountainous: but the valleys are passing fertile, and thoroughly inhabited: and here is sowed abundance of rice and Saburro, which groweth to ripeness in forty days. Howbeit the soil will bear no wheat. Here is store of cotton also, the cloth whereof is dispersed along the coast of Africa. The shee-gotes here, as likewise in all the isles adjacent, bring forth three and more kids at a birth, every four months. When the sun is in Cancer, it raineth here in a manner without ceasing. To the west of Sant jago stand the isles of Fogo and Brava being but of small importance (albeit that of Fogo is in some parts thereof inhabited) and to the North of the same is situate the isle of Maio, where there is a lake of two leagues long, which is full of salt; the which is a common thing in all these islands; but in one, more than in any of the other, in that it is full of such like salt pits, and is therefore called The island of salt, being destitute of all other living things, save only of wild goats. The isle of Buena vista hath a name contrary to the quality; for it is without all show of beauty. Of the others I have nothing worthy the observation. Of the Isles of Arguin. A Little to the south or on the backside of Cabo blanco, within a certain gulf or bay which entereth thirty miles into the main, lie the isles of Arguin, which were discovered in the year 1443. so called after the name of the principal of them, which hath great store of fresh water, whereof all the residue are destitute. here the king of Spain hath a fortress, for the traffic of gold and other rich commodities of those countries. These isles are six or seven in number, all little ones, being inhabited by the Azanaghi, who live of fish, whereof there is plenty in that bay. They go to sea in certain small boats which they call Almadies. The names of the other isles (as far as I conjecture) are The isle of Penguins, The isles of Nar, Tider, and Adeget. Of the Isles in the Atlantic Ocean, and first of the Canaries. FOr so the isles named of old Insulae fortunatae (which ever since the decay of the Roman empire, till within these two hundred years, lay undiscovered) are at this present called. They are in number twelve, (although the ancient writers make mention but of six) that is to say, Canaria, Lançarotta, 〈◊〉 ventura, Hierro, Palma, Gomera, Santa Clara, Isla de lobos, La Roca, Gratiosa, Alegrança, and Infierno. They 〈◊〉 abound with barley, sugar, honey, goats, cheese, hides, and Orchel, being herb commodious to die cloth withal, and whereof they make great merchandise. Amongst other beasts they have also camels. The natural inhabitants of the country are of a good disposition, and notable agility; but before they were discovered, they were so gross and rude, as they knew not the use of fire. They believed in one creator of the world, who punished the 〈◊〉, and rewarded the good; and in this point they all consented, but in other matters they were very different. They had no iron at all, but yet esteemed it much when any came to their hands, for the use thereof. They made no account of gold or silver, judging it a folly to esteem of that metal, which could not serve for mechanical instruments. Their weapons were stones and staves. They shaved their heads with certain sharp stones like to 〈◊〉. The women would not willingly nurse their own children, but caused them to be suckled by goats. They were and are at this day delighted with a kind of dance which they use also in Spain and in other places, and because it took original from thence, it is called The Canaries. From hence also they bring certain birds which sing at all times of the year. The greatest of all these isles is the * This isle with the principal town and castles was sacked by the Hollanders in 〈◊〉 Anno 1599 Gran Canaria, containing fower-score and ten miles in circuit, and it hath to the number of nine thousand inhabitants. Tenerif is not altogether so great. This is esteemed one of the highest islands in the world, by reason of a mountain therein of the form of a diamond, The Pike of Tenerif. being (as it is reported) fifteen leagues high, & it may be seen more than threescore leagues off. Hierro hath neither spring nor well, but is miraculously furnished with water by a cloud which overspreadeth a tree, from whence distilleth so much moisture, as sufficeth both for men and cattle. This cloud ariseth an hour or two before the sun, and is dissolved two hours after sun rising. The water falleth into a pond made at the foot of the tree. The isle of Palma is little, but beautiful, and abundant in sugar, wine, flesh, and cheese: wherefore such ships as go from Spain to Terra firma, and Brasil, do there ordinarily provide themselves of fresh victual. It is from Lisbon a thousand miles by sea, being much subject to tempests, and especially those which come from the northwest. Of these islands Lançarota, Hierro, and Gomera are in the hands of private men: the others belong to the crown. Of the Isles of Madera and Puerto santo. MAdera is the greatest and most principal of all the isles in the Atlantic Madera in Spanish signifieth wood or timber. Ocean. It standeth in two and thirty degrees and an half, forty miles to the south-west of Puerto santo. So it is called, because at the first discovery thereof it was all overgrown with mighty thick woods. Wherefore, to waste the said woods, and to make it fit to be manured, the first discoverers set them on fire, which continued burning (as some report) for the space of certain years together: whereupon it grew so exceeding fertile, that of corn it yieldeth sixty fold for one: and for a certain space the fift part of the sugars amounted yearly to threescore thousand Arrovas' (one of which Arrovas' containeth five and twenty pounds of sixteen ounces the pound) but now it cometh not to the one half of that reckoning. This isle containeth in compass an hundred & sixty miles. It is dided into four regions or quarters, that is to say Comerico, Santa Cruz, Funcial, and Camara de los Lobos. It aboundeth with water: and besides diviuers & sundry fountains, it hath eight small rivers which make it as fruitful and pleasant as a garden. It yieldeth every thing in such perfection, that Cadamosta (in regard of their excellency) affirmeth all commodities which are there gathered, to be gold. It produceth infinite store of fruits, excellent wines, and sugars which cannot be matched. here is likewise great abundance of cedars, whereof are made fine chests and other works of account: for which purpose there are divers sawing mills upon the foresaid rivers. This isle is very scarce of oil and of corn. The head or principal city hereof is Funciall, being the seat of an archbishop who hath 8000. ducats of revenue. Here are two fortresses built which command the haven. Forty miles to the north-east of Madera lieth the isle of Puerto santo, so Puerto santo, the principal 〈◊〉 whereof was taken by sir Amias Preston 1596. called because it was discovered upon the day of all saints, in the year 1428. It containeth in compass fifteen miles, and aboundeth with oxen, wild swine, and honey; and yieldeth wheat sufficient for the use of the inhabitants. here groweth a fruit in bigness and shape like unto a cherry, but of a yellow colour. The tree that 〈◊〉 this fruit being cut near the root with certain strokes of an hatcher, putteth forth the year following a kind of gum which is called Sanguis Draconis. The generation of one shee-cony big with young, brought hither out The 〈◊〉 increase of one she- 〈◊〉. of Portugal at the first inhabiting of this isle, did in short time so exceedingly increase, that the inhabitants were quite out of hope ever to repair the ruin and waste which they committed. At this present there is a small isle near unto Puerto santo which breedeth nothing but coneys. Unto all these might be added such isles as lie near the African coast within the straits of Gibraltar: the principal whereof (as namely Pennon or The little rock over against Velles de Gumera, with the isle of Gerbi, etc.) because they are largely described by john Leo, I hold it a matter merely vain and superfluous in this place to stand upon them. An approbation of the history ensuing, by me RICHARD HAKLVYT. BEing moved to publish mine opinion as touching this present History of john Leo; I do hold and affirm it to be the very best, the most particular, and methodical, that ever was written, or at least that hath come to light, concerning the countries, peoples, and affairs of Africa. For which cause, and knowing well the sufficiency of the translator, myself was the first and only man that persuaded him to take it in hand. Wherein how diligently and faithfully he hath done his part, and how he hath enlarged and graced this Geographical history out of others, the best ancient, and modern writers, by adding a description of all those African main lands and isles, and other matters very notable, which john Leo himself hath omitted: I refer to the consideration of all judicial and indifferent Readers. Richard Hakluyt. Unto this approbation of master Richard Hakluyt, I hold it not altogether amiss to adjoin the testimonies of certain modern writers, the most approved and famous for their skill in Geographie and history, which they have also purposely set down in commendation of this author of ours john Leo. First therefore master john Baptista Ramusius, Secretary to the State of Venice, and a man of singular judgement and diligence in these matters, in his epistle Dedicatory before the third edition of his first volume of voyages, speaking of the manifold difficulties which he underwent to bring the important discourses therein, to light, writeth unto learned Fracastorius in manner following. Oltra che gli essemplari che mi son venute all mani, etc. Moreover (saith he) those copies which have come to my hands, have been extremely fowl and uncorrect; a matter sufficient to discourage the mind of any man, though never so forward and resolute, were it not sustained by considering what unspeakable delight these discourses will breed unto all those that are studious in Geography; and most especially this of Africa written by john Leo. Concerning which part of the world, even till these our days, we have had no knowledge in a manner out of any other author, or at leastwise never any information so large, and of so undoubted truth. But what do I here speak of the delight which those that are learned and studious shall reap hereby? As though it were not a matter which will afford also very much satisfaction unto the greatest Lords and Princes? Whom it concerneth more than any other to know the secrets and particularities of this African part of the world, together with the situations of all the regions, provinces, and cities thereof, and the dependences, which the princes and people have one towards another. For albeit they may have some advertisements & instructions from others that have personally travailed these countries, & may think their writings & discourses to be very large; yet am I well assured, that having once read this book of john Leo, and thoroughly considered the matters therein contained and declared, they will esteem the relations of all others, in comparison of this, to be but brief, unperfect, and of little moment: so great will be the fruit which to their exceeding contentment, all readers shall reap hereby, etc. Thus far Ramusius. Abraham Ortelius before his general map of Africa hath these words. Ex recentioribus, etc. AMong the late writers (for your more perfect knowledge of Africa) you must read Aloisius Cadamosta, Vasco da Gama, and Francis Aluarez, who travailed Ethiopia; Sed omnium accuratissime etc. but of all others you have it most exactly described by john Leo. Also the same author before his map of Barbary and Biledulgerid. But (saith he) concerning these regions and people, you shall find a most exquisite description in the History of john Leo, etc. The opinion of JOHN BODIN in the fourth chapter of his method of reading Histories concerning this our author. Ita quoque Leo Afer, genere Maurus, etc. SO likewise Leo Afer by descent a More, borne in Spain, in religion a Mahometan, and afterward a Christian, having by continual journeys traveled almost over all Africa; as also over Asia minor, and a good part of Europe, was taken by certain pirates, and presented unto pope Leo the tenth: under whom he translated into Italian all those things which with incredible study and diligence he had written in the Arabic tongue, concerning Africa, the manners, laws, and customs of the African people, and the situation and true description of the whole country. Their military discipline he lightly passeth over: and briefly mentioneth the conflicts and victories of famous warrious, without any orations or ornaments of speech, rather like a Geographer then a Chronicler: and with a perpetual delight of new and strange things, he doth (as it were) perforce detain his Reader, etc. And a little after he addeth: Profecto unus est ex omnibus, etc. Certes of all others this is the only man, by whom Africa, which for a thousand years before had lain buried in the barbarous and gross ignorance of our people, is now plainly discovered and laid open to the view of all beholders. Antonius Possevinus de historicis sect. 7. cap. 2. Sed & perdigna est lectu, etc. ALso the History of Leo Afer the Geographer is most worthy to be read, because it containeth an exact description of all the regions and people of Africa; and it hath been published in Italian and French. JOHN LEO HIS FIRST BOOK OF the description of Africa, and of the memorable things contained therein. Why this part of the world was named Africa. AFRICA is called in the Arabian tongue 〈◊〉, of the word Faraca, which signifieth in the said language, to divide: but why it should be so called, there are two opinions; the first is this: namely, because this part of the world is divided from Europa by the Mediterran sea, and from Asia * Others divide it from Asia by the red sea. by the river of Nilus. Others are of opinion, that this name Africa was derived from one Ifricus the king of Arabia Foelix, who is said to have been the first that ever inhabited these parts. This Ifricus waging war against the king of Aslyria, and being at length by him driven out of his kingdom, passed with his whole army over Nilus, and so conducting his troops westward, made no delay till he was come unto the region lying about Carthage. Hence it is that the Arabians do imagine the country about Carthage only, and the regions lying westward thereof, to comprehend all Africa. The borders of Africa. AFRICA (if we may give credit unto the writers of that nation, being men of learning, and most skilful Cosmographers) beginneth southward at certain rivers issuing forth of a lake in the desert of Gaoga. Eastward it bordereth upon the river Nilus. It extendeth northward to that part of Egypt, where Nilus at seven mouths dischargeth his streams into the Mediterran sea: from whence it stretcheth westward as far as the streites of Gibraltar, and is bounded on that part with the utmost sea-town of all Libya, called * Non. Nun. Likewise the south part thereof abutteth upon the Ocean sea, which compasseth Africa almost as far as the deserts of Gaoga. The 〈◊〉 of Africa. OUR authors affirm, that Africa is 〈◊〉 into four parts, that is to say, Barbaria, Numidia, Libya, and the land of negroes. Barbaria taketh beginning from the hill called Meies', which is the extreme part of all the mountains of Atlas, being distant from Alexandria almost three hundred miles. It is bounded on the North side with the Mediterran sea, stretching thence to mount-Meies aforesaid, and from mount-Meies extending itself to the streites of Gibraltar. Westward it is limited with the said streites, from whence winding itself out of the Mediterran sea into the main Ocean, it is enclosed with the most westerly point of Atlas: namely, at that Western cape which is next unto the town called Messa. And southward it is bounded with that side of Atlas which lieth towards the Mediterran sea. This is the most noble and worthy region of all Africa, the inhabitants whereof are of a brown or tawny colour, being a civil people, and prescribe wholesome laws and constitutions unto themselves. The second part of Africa is called of the Latins Numidia, but of the Arabians Biledulgerid: this region bringeth forth dates in great abundance. It beginneth eastward at the city of Eloacat, which is an hundred miles distant from Egypt, & extendeth west as far as the town of * 〈◊〉. Nun, standing upon the Ocean sea. Northward it is enclosed with the south side of Atlas. And the south part thereof bordereth upon the sandy deserts of Libya. All the Arabians do usually call it The land of dates: because this only region of Africa beareth dates. The third part called of the Latins Libya, and of the Arabians Sarra (which word signifieth a desert) beginneth eastward at that part of Nilus which is next unto the city of Eloacat, and from thence runneth westward as far as the Ocean sea. Northward it is bounded with Numidia, southward it abutteth upon the land of Negroes, eastward it taketh beginning at the kingdom of Gaoga, and stretcheth westward even to the land of Gualata, which bordereth upon the Ocean sea. The fourth part of Africa which is called the land of Negroes, beginneth eastward at the kingdom of Gaoga, from whence it extendeth west as far as Gualata. The north part thereof is enclosed with the desert of Libya, and the south part, which is unknown unto us, with the Ocean sea: howbeit the merchants which daily come from thence to the kingdom of Tombuto, have sufficiently described the situation of that country unto us. This land of negroes hath a mighty river, which taking his The 〈◊〉 of Niger. name of the region, is called Niger: this river taketh his original from the east out of a certain desert called by the foresaid Negroes Seu. Others will have this river to spring out of a certain lake, and so to run westward till it exonerateth itself into the Ocean sea. Our Cosmographers affirm, that the said river of Niger is derived out of Nilus, which they imagine for some certain space to be swallowed up of the earth, and yet at last to burst forth into such a lake as is before mentioned. Some others are of opinion, that this river beginneth westward to spring out of a certain mountain, and so running east, to make at length a huge lake: which verily is not like to be true; for they usually sail westward from Tombuto to the kingdom of Ginea, yea and to the land of Melli also; both which in respect of Tombuto are situate to the west: neither hath the said land of Negroes any kingdoms comparable, for beautiful and pleasant soil, unto those which adjoin unto the banks of Niger. And here it is to be noted, that (according to the opinion of our Cosmographers) * Aethiopia. that land of Negroes by which Nilus is said to run (namely, that part of the world which stretcheth eastward even to the Indian sea, some northerly parcel whereof abutteth upon the red sea, to wit, the country which lieth without the gulf of Arabia) is not to be called any member or portion of Africa; and that for many reasons, which are to be found in the process of this history set down more at large: The said country is called by the Latines Aethiopia. From thence come certain religious Friars seared or branded on the face with an hot iron, who are to be seen almost over all Europe, and specially at Rome. These people have an Emperor, which they call Prete Gianni, the greater part of that land being inhabited with Christians. Howbeit, there is also a certain Mahometan among them, which is said to possess a great dominion. A division of the four forenamed parts of Africa. BArbarie is distinguished into four kingdoms: the first whereof is the kingdom of Maroco; which is likewise divided into seven regions or provinces; namely, Hea, Sus, Guzula, the territory of Maroco, Duccala, Hazcora, & Tedles. The second kingdom of Barbary called Fez, comprehendèth in like sort seven regions within the bounds thereof; to wit, Temesne, the territory of Fez, Azgara, * Habat. Elabat, Errif, Garet, and * Chauz. Elcauz. The third kingdom is called * Tremizen. Telensin, and hath three regions under it, namely, the mountains, Tenez, and Algezer. The fourth kingdom of Barbary is named Tunis; under which are comprised four regions, that is to say, Bugia, Constantina, Tripoli in Barbary, and Ezzaba, which is a good part of Numidia. Bugia hath always been turmoiled with continual wars; because sometimes it was subject unto the king of Tunis, and sometimes again unto the king of Tremizen. Certain it is that even until these our days, this Bugia was a kingdom of itself, and so continued, till the principal city of that region was at the commandment of Ferdinando the king of Castille, taken by one Peter of Navarre. The division of Numidia. THis is the basest part of all Africa; neither will our Cosmographers vouchsafe it the name of a kingdom, by reason that the inhabitants thereof are so far distant asunder; which you may easily conjecture by that which followeth. Tesset a city of Numidia containeth about four hundred families, and is in regard of the Libyan desert, severed from all places of habitation almost three hundred miles; wherefore this second part is thought by divers not to be worthy the name of a kingdom. Howbeit we will make some relation of the habitable parts of Numidia; some whereof may not unfitly be compared with other regions of Africa, as for example, that of Segelmess, which territory of Numidia lieth over against Barbary; likewise Zeb, which is situate against Bugia, and the signiory of Biledulgerid, which extendeth unto the kingdom of Tunis. Reserving therefore many particulars for the second part of this history, we will make our entry and beginning at those places, which lie upon the west of Numidia: the names whereof be these; Tesset, Guaden, Ifren, Hacca, Dare, Tebelbelt, Todga, Fercale, Segelmess, Benigumi, Fighig, Tegua, Tsabit, Tegorarin, Mesab, Tegort, and Guarghela. The region of Zeb containeth five towns, to wit, Pescara, Elborgh, Nesta, Taolac, and Deusin: so many cities likewise hath the territory of Biledulgerid; namely, Teozar, Caphesa, Nefreoa, Elchamid, and Chalbis: and from hence eastward are found the isles of Gerbe, Garion, Mesellata, Mestrata, Teoirraga, Gademis, Fizza, Augela, Birdeoa, and Eloacat. These are the names of the most famous places of all Numidia, being bounded (as is said before) westward upon the Ocean sea, and eastward with the river of Nilus. A description of the Libyan deserts, which lie between Numidia and the 〈◊〉 of negroes. THese deserts have not as yet any certain name amongst us, 〈◊〉 they be divided into five parts, and receive all their denomination from the inhabitants which dwell upon them, that is to say, from the Numidians, who are in like sort themselves divided into five parts also, to wit, the people or tribes called Zanega, Ganziga, Terga, Leuta, and Berdeoa. There be likewise certain places, which take some proper and particular name from the goodness and badness of the soil; as namely the desert of Azaohad, so called for the drought and unfruitfulness of that place: likewise Hair, albeit a desert, yet so called for the goodness and temperature of the air. A division of the land of Negroes into several kingdoms. Moreover, the land of negroes is divided into many kingdoms: whereof albeit a great part be unknown unto us, and removed far out of our trade; we will notwithstanding make relation of those places, where we ourselves have abode, and which by long experience are grown very familiar unto us: as likewise of some other places, from whence merchants used to travel unto the same cities wherein myself was then resident; from whom I learned right 〈◊〉 the state of their countries. I * john 〈◊〉 over 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of the 〈◊〉 of negroes. myself saw fifteen kingdoms of the Negroes: howbeit there are many more, which although I saw not with mine own eyes, yet are they by the Negroes sufficiently known and frequented. Their names therefore (beginning from the west, and so proceeding Eastward and Southward) are these following: Gualata, Ghinea, Melli, Tombuto, Gago, Guber, Agadez, Canon, Casena, Zegzeg, Zanfara, Guangara, Burno, Gaoga, Nube. These fifteen kingdoms are for the most part situate upon the river Niger, through the which merchants usually travel from Gualata to the city of * Cairo. Alcair in Egypt. The journey indeed is very long, but yet secure and void of danger. All the said kingdoms adjoin one upon another; ten whereof are separated either by the river Niger, or by some sandy desert: and in times past each one of the fifteen had a several king, but now * About the year 1526. at this present, they are all in a manner subject unto three kings only: namely, to the king of Tombuto who is Lord of the greatest part; to the king of Borno, who governeth the least part, and the residue is in subjection unto the king of Gaoga: howbeit he that possesseth the kingdom of Ducala hath a very small train attending upon him. Likewise these kingdoms have many other kingdoms bordering upon the South frontiers of them: to wit, Bito, Temiam, Dauma, Medra, and Gorhan; the governors and inhabitants whereof are most rich and industrious people, great lovers of justice and equity, albeit some lead a brutish kind of life. Of the habitations of Africa, and of the signification of this word Barbar. Our Cosmographers and historiographers affirm, that in times past Africa was altogether disinhabited, except that part which is now called the land of Negroes: and most certain it is, that Barbary and Numidia were for many ages destitute of inhabitants. The tawny people of the said region were called by the name of Barber, being derived of the verb Barbara, which in their tongue signifieth to murmur: because the African tongue soundeth in the ears of the Arabians, no otherwise than the voice of beasts, which utter their sounds without any accents. Others will have Barber to be one word twice repeated, forsomuch as Bar in the Arabian tongue signifieth a desert. For (say they) when king Iphricus being by the Assyrians or Aethiopians driven out of his own kingdom, traveled towards Egypt, and seeing himself so oppressed with his enemies, that he knew not what should become of him and his followers, he asked his people how or which way it was possible to escape, who answered him Barber, that is, to the desert, to the desert: giving him to understand by this speech, that he could have no safer refuge, then to cross over Nilus, and to flee unto the desert of Africa. And this reason seemeth to agree with them, which affirm the Africans to be descended from the people of Arabia foelix. The original of the people of Africa. ABout the original of the Africans, our historiographers do much disagree. For some will have them to be derived from the inhabitants of Palaestina; because (as they say) being expelled out of their own country by the Assyrians, they came at length into Africa, & seeing the fruitfulness of the soil, chose it to be their place of habitation. Others are of opinion, that they took their original from the Sabeans a people of Arabia foelix, and that, before such time as they were put to flight by the Assyrians or Aethiopians, as hath been aforesaid. Some others report, that the Africans descended from certain people of * Fortè Asia minor. Asia, who being chased thence by reason of wars which were waged against them, fled into Greece, which at the same time had no inhabitants at all. Howbeit the enemy still pursuing them, they were forced to cross the sea of Morea, and being arrived in Africa, to settle themselves there: but their enemies abode still in Greece. All which opinions and reports are to be understood only of the original of the tawny people, that is to say, of the Numidians and Barbarians. For all the Negroes or black Moors take their descent from Chus, the son of Cham, who was the son of Noë. But whatsoever difference there be between the Negroes and the tawny Moors, certain it is that they had all one beginning. For the Negroes are descended of the Philistims, and the Philistims of Mesraim the * Genesis the 10. v. the 6. Mezraim is accounted the 〈◊〉 of Chus. son of Chus: but the tawny Moors fetch their pedigree from the Sabeans, and it is evident that Saba was begotten of * Gen. 10. 7. Rama, which was the eldest son of Chus. divers other opinions there be as touching this matter: which because they seem not so necessary, we have purposely omitted. A division of the tawny Moors into sundry tribes or nations. THE tawny Moors are divided into five several people or tribes: to wit, the tribes called Zanhagis, Musmudi, Zeneti, Hacari, and Gumeri. The tribe of Musmudi inhabit the western part of mount Atlas, from the province of Hea to the river of * Guadalhabit. Seruan. Likewise they dwell upon the south part of the said mountain, and upon all the inward plains of that region. These Musmudae have four provinces under them: namely, Hea, Sus, Guzula, and the territory of Morocco. The tribe of Gumeri possess certain mountains of Barbary, dwelling on the sides of those mountains which lie over against the Mediterran sea: as likewise they are Lords of all the river called in their language Rif. This river Tremizen called by the ancient Cosmographers Caesaria or Mauritania Caesariensis. hath his fountain near unto the streites of Gibraltar, and thence runneth eastwards to the kingdom of Tremizen, called by the Latines Caesaria. These two tribes or people have several habitations by themselves: the other three are dispersed confusively over all Africa: howbeit they are, like strangers, discerned one from another by certain properties or tokens, maintaining continual war among themselves, especially they of Numidia. These (I say) are those very people (as some report) who had no other places than tents and wide fields to repose themselves in: and it is reported, that in times past they had great conflicts together, and that the vanquished were sent to inhabit towns and cities, but the conquerors held the champions and fields unto themselves, and there settled their abode. Neither is it altogether unlikely; because the inhabitants of cities have all one and the same language with the country people. For the Zenetis, whether they dwell in the city or in the country, speak all one kind of language: which is likewise to be understood of the rest. The tribes of Zeneti, Haoari, and Sanhagi; inhabit the country of Temesne: sometimes they live peaceably, and sometimes again, calling to mind their ancient quarrels, they break forth into cruel wars and manslaughters. Some of these people bear rule over all Africa, as namely the Zenetis, who in times past vanquished the family called Idris; from which some affirm the true and natural Dukes of Fez, and the founders of the same city to derive their pedigree: their progeny likewise was called Mecnasa. There came afterward out of Numidia, another family of the Zenetis called Magraoa: this Magraoa chased the family of Mecnasa with all their Dukes and chieftains out of their dominions. Not long after, the said tribe of Magraoa was expelled in like sort by certain others of the race of the Sanhagij, called by the name of Luntuna, which came also out of the desert of Numidia. By this family was the country of Temesna in process of time utterly spoiled and wasted, and all the inhabitants thereof slain, except those which were of their own tribe and kindred of Luntuna, unto whom was allotted the region of Ducala to inhabit, and by them was built the city commonly called Maroco. It fell out afterwards by the Who were the founders of Maroco. inconstancy of fortune, that one Elmahdi the principal 〈◊〉 preacher among them, conspiring with the Hargij (these Hargij were of the family of Musmuda) expelled the whole race of the Luntuna, and usurped that kingdom unto himself. After this man's decease, succeeded in his place one of his disciples called Habdul Mumen a Banigueriaghel of the kindred of the Sanhagij. The kingdom remained unto this family about an 120. years, whereunto all Africa in a manner was subject: At length being deposed by the Banimarini, a generation of the Zenetis, the said family was put to flight: which Banimarini are said to have reigned afterward for the space of 170. years. The Banimarini which descended of the Sanhagij and of Magroa, waged continual war against Banizeijan the king of Telensin: likewise the progeny of Hafasa, and of Musmuda are at variance and dissension with the king of Tunis. So that you see what stirs and tumults have at all times been occasioned in those regions by the foresaid five families. Certain it is, that neither the Gumeri, nor the Haoari have at this present any jurisdiction at all; albeit heretofore (as we read in their chronicles) they had some certain dominion, before such time as they were infected with the Mahometan law. Out of all which it is evident, that in times past all the foresaid people had their habitations and tents in the plain fields: every one of which favoured their own faction, and exercised all labours necessary for man's life, as common among them. The governors of the country attended their droves and flocks; and the citizens applied themselves unto some manual art, or to husbandry. The said people are divided into five hundred several families, as appeareth by the genealogies of the Africans, author whereof is one Ibnu Rachu, whom I have oftentimes read and perused. Some writers are of opinion, that the king of Tombuto, the king of Melli, and the king of Agadez fetch their original from the people of Zanaga, to wit, from them which inhabit the desert. The agreement or variety of the African language. THe foresaid five families or people, 〈◊〉 divided into hundreds of progenies, and having innumerable habitations, do notwithstanding use all one kind of language, called by them Aquel Amarig, that is, the noble tongue: the Arabians Aquel Amarig which inhabit Africa, call it a barbarous tongue; and this is the true and natural language of the Africans. Howbeit it is altogether different from other languages, although it hath divers words common with the Arabian tongue; whereupon some would infer, that the Africans (as is above said) came by lineal descent from the Sabeans, a people of Arabia foelix. Others say, that these words were even then invented when the Arabians came first into Africa, and began to take possession thereof: but these authors were so rude and grossewitted, that they left no writings behind them, which might be alleged either for, or against. Moreover they have among them another diversity, not only of 〈◊〉, but of significant words also: as namely, they which dwell near unto the Arabians, and exercise much traffic with them, do for the greater part use their language. Yea, all the Gumeri in a manner, and most of the Haoari speak Arabian, though corruptly; which (I suppose) came first hereupon to pass, for that the said people have had long acquaintance and conversation with the Arabians. The Negroes have divers languages among themselves, among which they call one Sungai, and the same is current in many regions; as namely, in Gualata, Tombuto, Ghinea, Melli, and Gago. Another language there is among the Negroes, which they call Guber; & this is rife among the people of Guber, of Canon, of Casena, of Perzegreg, & of Guangra. Likewise the kingdom of Borno hath a peculiar kind of speech, altogether like unto that, which is used in Gaoga. And the kingdom of Nube hath a language of great affinity with the Chaldean, Arabian, & Egyptian tongues. But all the sea-towns of Africa from the Mediterran sea to the mountains of Atlas, speak broken Arabian. Except the kingdom and town of Maroco, & the inland Numidians bordering upon Maroco, Fez, & Tremizen; all which, use the Barbarian tongue. Howbeit they which dwell over against Tunis & Tripoli, speak indeed the Arabian language; albeit most corruptly. Of the Arabians inhabiting the city of Africa. OF that army which was sent by Califa * 〈◊〉. Otmen the third, in the four hundred year of the Hegeira, there came into Africa fourscore thousand gentlemen and others, who having subdued sundry provinces, at length arrived in Africa: and there the General of the whole army called * 〈◊〉. Hucha 〈◊〉 Nafich remained. This man built that great city which is called of us * Cairaoan. Alcair. For he stood in fear of the people of Tunis, lest they should betray him, misdoubting also that they would procure aid out of Sicily, and so give him the encounter. Wherefore with all his treasure which he had got, he traveled to the desert & firm ground, distant from * Tunis. Carthage about one hundred and twenty miles, and there is he said to have built the city of * 〈◊〉. Alcair. The remnant of his soldiers he commanded to keep those places, which were most secure and fit for their defence, and willed them to build where no rock nor fortification was. Which being done, the Arabians began to inhabit Africa, and to disperse themselves among the Africans, who, because they had been for certain years subject unto the Romans or Italians, used to speak their language: and hence it is, that the natural and mothertoong of the Arabians, which hath great affinity with the African tongue, grew by little and little to be corrupted: and so they report that these two nations at length conjoined themselves in one. Howbeit the Arabians usually do blaze their pedigree in daily and trivial songs; which custom as yet is common both to * The Moors of Granada. us, and to the people of Barbary also. For no man there is, be he never so base, which will not to his own name, add the name of his nation; as for example, Arabian, Barbarian, or such like. Of the Arabians which dwell in tents. THE Mahometan priests always forbade the Arabians to pass over Nilus with their armies and tents. How beit in the four hundred year of the Hegeira we read, that they were permitted so to do by a certain factious and schismatical * A 〈◊〉 patriarch. Califa: because one of his nobles had rebelled against him, usurping the city of Cairaoan, and the greatest part of Barbary. After the death of which rebel, that kingdom remained for some years unto his posterity and family; whose jurisdiction (as the African chronicles report) grew so large and strong in the time of Elcain (the Mahometan Califa and patriarch of Arabia) that he sent unto them one Gehoar, whom of a slave he had made his counsellor, Gehoar a slave by condition, conquered all Barbary, Numidia, Egypt, and Syria. with an huge army. This Gehoar conducting his army westward, recovered all Numidia and Barbary. Insomuch that he pierced unto the region of Sus, and there claimed most ample tribute: all which being done, he returned back unto his Calipha, and most faithfully surrendered unto him whatsoever he had gained from the enemy. The Calipha seeing his prosperous success, began to aspire unto greater exploits. And Gehoar most firmly promised, that as he had recovered that western dominion unto his Lord, so would he likewise by force of war most certainly restore unto him the countries of the East, to wit, Egypt, Syria, and all Arabia; and protested moreover that with the greatest hazard of his life, he would be avenged of all the injuries offered by the family of Labhus unto his Lords predecessors, and would revest him in the royal seat of his most famous grandfathers, great-grandfathers, and progenitors. The Calipha liking well his audacious promise, caused an army of fower-score thousand soldiers, with an infinite sum of money and other things necessary for the wars, to be delivered unto him. And so this valiant and stout chieftain being provided for warfare, conducted his troops through the deserts of Egypt & Barbary; & having first 〈◊〉 to flight the vice-Califa of Egypt (who fled unto Eluir the Califa of Bagdet) in short time he subdued very easily all the provinces of Egypt and Syria. Howbeit he could not as yet hold himself secure; fearing lest the Califa of Bagdet would assail him with an army out of Asia, and lest the garrisons which he had left to keep Barbary, should be constrained to forsake those conquered provinces. Wherefore he built 〈◊〉, and caused it to be walled round about. In which city he left one of his most trusty captains, with a great part of the army: and this Gehoar the first 〈◊〉 of Cairo. city he called by the name of Alchair, which afterward by others was named Cairo. This Alchair is said daily so to have increased, that no city of the world for buildings and inhabitants was any way comparable thereunto. Now when Gehoar perceived that the Calipha of Bagdet made no preparation for war, he forthwith wrote unto his Lord, that all the conquered cities yielded due honour unto him, and that all things were in quiet and tranquility: and therefore, that himself (if he thought good) should come over into Egypt, and thereby with his only presence should prevail more to recover the remnant of his dominions, then with never so huge an army: for he was in good hope that the Calipha of Bagdet hearing of his expedition, would leave his kingdom and prelacy, and would betake himself to flight. This notable and joyful message no sooner came to the ears of Califa Elcain; but he being by his good fortune much more encouraged then before, and not forethinking himself, what mischief might ensue, levied a great army, appointing for viceroy of all Barbary one of the family of Sanagia aforesaid, finding him afterward not to be his trusty friend. Moreover Califa Elcain arriving at Alchair, and being most honourably entertained by his servant Gehoar, began to think upon great affairs, and having gathered an huge army, resolved to wage battle against the Califa of Bagdet. In the mean season he that was appointed viceroy of Barbary compacting with the Calipha of Bagdet, yielded himself and all Barbary into his hands. Which the Califa most kindly accepted, and ordained him king over all Africa. But Califa Elcain hearing this news at Alchair was wonderfully afflicted in mind; partly because he saw himself repelled from his own kingdom, and partly for that he had spent all his money which he brought with him: insomuch that he knew not what in the world to do, determining some severe punishment for Gehoar, by whose counsel he left his kingdom of Arabia. Howbeit there was one of his secret counsellors a very learned and witty man, who seeing his Lord so sad and pensive, and being desirous by some good advise to prevent the danger imminent, comforted him in this wise: Your highness knoweth (most invincible Califa) that fortune is most variable, and that the courage of your soldiers is no whit daunted by reason of these mishaps. For mine own part, as I have heretofore showed myself to be your trusty servant, so will I at this time give you such profitable counsel, whereby you may within short space recover all those dominions which have been so treacherously taken from you, and may without all peradventure most easily attain unto your own heart's desire. And this you may do without maintaining any army at all; yea, I assure you, if you please to take mine advise, that I will forthwith procure you such an army, as shall give you great store of money, and yet notwithstanding shall do you good service also. The Califa being somewhat 〈◊〉 these speeches, asked his counsellor how this might possibly be brought to effect: My Lord (saith his counsellor) certain it is, that the Arabians are now grown so populous and to so great a number, that all Arabia cannot contain them, scarcely will the yearly increase of the ground suffice to feed their droves, and you see with what great famine they are afflicted, and how they are destitute not only of habitations, but even of victuals and sustenance. Wherefore if you had heretofore given them leave, they would long ere this have invaded Africa. And if you will now licence them so to do, doubt you not, but that you shall receive of them an huge mass of gold. This counsel could not altogether satisfy the Califa his mind: for he knew right well that the Arabians would so waste all Africa, as it should neither be profitable for himself, nor for his enemies. Notwithstanding, seeing that his kingdom was altogether endangered, he thought it better to accept those sums of money which his counsellor promised, and so to be revenged of his enemy, then to lose both his kingdom and gold all at once. Wherefore he permitted all Arabians, which would pay him ducats apiece, freely to enter Africa; conditionally that they would show themselves most deadly enemies unto the treacherous king of Barbary. Which liberty Ten tribes of Arabians 〈◊〉 Africa. being granted unto them, it is reported that ten tribes or families of Arabians, being half the people of Arabia deserta, came immediately into Africa; unto whom certain inhabitants of Arabia foelix joined themselves, insomuch that there were found amongst them about fifty thousand persons able to bear arms: their women, children, and cattle were 〈◊〉 Rachu a 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. almost innumerable: the story whereof Ibnu Rachu, the most diligent chronicler of African affairs (whom we have before mentioned) setteth down at large. These Arabians having traversed the desert between Egypt and Barbary, first laid siege unto Tripoli a city of Barbary, which being overcome, they slew a great part of the citizens, the residue escaping by flight. Next of all they encountered the town of Capes, which was by them taken and vanquished. At length they besieged Cairaoan also; howbeit the citizens being sufficiently provided of victuals, are said to have endured the siege for eight months: which being expired, they were constrained to yield: at what time there was nothing in Cairaoan but woeful slaughters, hideous outcries, and present death. This land the Arabians divided among themselves, and began to people and inhabit the same; requiring in the mean space large tributes of the towns and provinces subject unto them. And so they possessed all Africa, until such time as one joseph the son of jeffin attained to the kingdom of Morocco. This joseph was the first king of Morocco, who endeavoured by all means to advance the friends and kindred of the late deceased king of Africa unto the kingdom; neither did he cease until he had expelled all the Arabians out of Cairaoan. Howbeit the Arabians possessed the regions thereabout, giving themselves wholly to spoils and robberies: and the friends of the said deceased king could bear rule but in certain places only. Afterward succeeded in the kingdom of Morocco one Mansor, who was the fourth king and prelate of that Mahometan sect which was called Muachedim. This man, albeit his grandfathers & great grandfathers had always favoured the posterity and friends of the foresaid deceased African king, and had restored them to their ancient dignity; devised altogether how to oppose himself against them, and to usurp all their authority. Wherefore making a feigned league with them, we read, that he provoked the Arabians against them, and so very easily overcame them. Afterward Mansor brought the greatest part of the Arabians into the western dominions of Africa; unto the better sort of whom he gave the habitation of Duccala & Azgara, and unto the base remnant he bequeathed the possession of Numidia. But in process of time he commanded the Numidian slaves to be set at liberty, and so in despite of the Arabians, he caused them to inhabit that part of Numidia which he had allotted unto them. But as for the Arabians of Azgara and of certain other places in Barbary, he brought them all under his subjection. For the Arabians out of deserts are like fishes without water: they had indeed often attempted to get into the deserts; but the mountains of Atlas, which were then possessed by the Barbarians, hindered their passage. Neither had they liberty to pass over the plains, for the residue of the Barbarians were there planted. Wherefore their pride being abated, they applied themselves unto husbandry, having no where to repose themselves, but only in villages, cottages, and tents. And their misery was so much the greater, in that they were constrained yearly to disburse unto the king of Morocco most ample tribute. Those which inhabited Duccala, because they were an huge multitude, easily freed themselves from all tribute, and imposition. A great part of the Arabians remained still at Tunis, for that Mansor had refused to carry them along with him: who, after the death of the said Mansor, grew to be Lords of Tunis, and so continued, till they resigned their government unto the people called Abu-Haf; upon condition that they should pay them half the revenues thereof: and this condition hath remained firm even until our days. Howbeit, because the Arabians are increased to such innumerable swarms, that the whole revenues are not sufficient for them, the king of Tunis most justly alloweth some of 1526. them their duties, to the end they may make secure passage for merchants, which indeed they perform without molestation or hurt of any. But the residue which are deprived of their pay, betake themselves wholly to robberies, thefts, slaughters, and such other monstrous outrages. For these, lurking always in the woods, no sooner see any merchant approaching, but suddenly they break forth, depriving him of his goods and life also: insomuch that now merchants dare not pass that way but with a garrison of safeconduct. And so they pass sometimes to their great inconvenience. For they are notwithstanding constrained to give unto the foresaid Arabians, which are in pay with the king of Tunis, great sums of money: and are likewise oftentimes so in danger of robbers, that they lose both their goods & lives. Adivision of the Arabians which inhabit Africa, and are called by the name of Barbarians, into divers progenies or kindreds. THE Arabians which inhabit Africa are divided into three parts: one part whereof are called Cachin, the second Hilell, and the third Machill. The Cachin are divided into three nations or tribes; to wit, the tribes of Etheg, Sumait, and Sahid. Moreover Etheg is divided into three families; that is to say, the family of Delleg, Elmuntefig, and Subair: and these are dispersed into many regions. Hilel are derived into four generations; to wit, the people of Benihemir, of Rieh, of Sufien, and of Chusain. The family of Benihemir is divided into the lineages of Huroam, Hucben, Habrum and Mussim. The tribe of Rieh are distributed into the kindreds called Deuvad, Suaid, Asgeg, Elcherith, Enedri, and Garfam; which kindreds possess many dominions. Machil have three tribes under them: to wit, Mastar, Hutmen, and Hassan. Mastar are divided into Ruchen, and Selim; Hutmen into Elhasi and Chinan; and Hassan into Devihessen, Devimansor, and Devihubaidulla. Devihessen is distinguished into the kindreds called Dulein, Berbun, Vodein, Racmen and Hamram; Devimansor into Hemrun, Menebbe, Husein, and Albuhusein; and lastly Devihubaidulla, into Garag, Hedeg, Teleb, and Geoan. All these do in a manner possess innumerable regions; insomuch that to reckon them up at large, were a matter not only difficult, but almost impossible. Of the habitations and number of the foresaid Arabians. THE most noble and famous Arabians were they of the family of Etheg, unto whom Almansor gave the regions of Duccala and of Tedles to inhabit. These Arabians even till our times have been put to great distress and hazard, partly by the Portugal king, and partly by the king of Fez. They have at all opportunities, if need should require, a hundred thousand soldiers fit to bear arms, a great part whereof are horsemen. The Arabians called Sumait enjoy that part of the Libyan desert which lieth over against the desert of Tripoli. These make often invasions into Barbary, for they have no places allotted them therein, but they and their camels do perpetually remain in the deserts. They are able to levy fourscore thousand soldiers, the greatest part being footmen. Likewise the tribe of Sahid do inhabit the desert of Libya: and these have had always great league and familiarity with the king of Guargala. They have such abundance of cattle, that they do plentifully supply all the cities of that region with flesh, and that especially in summer time, for all the winter they stir not out of the deserts. Their number is increased to about a hundred and fifty thousand, having not many horsemen among them. The tribe of Delleg possess divers habitations, howbeit * 〈◊〉. Caesaria containeth the greatest part of them. Some also inhabit upon the frontiers of the kingdom of Bugia; who are said to receive a yearly stipend from their next neighbours. But the least part of them dwell upon the field-countrey of Acdes, upon the borders of Mauritania, and upon some part of mount Atlas, being subject unto the king of Fez. The people of Elmuntefig are seated in the province of Azgar, and are called by the later writers Elcaluth. These also pay certain yearly tribute unto the King of Fez, being able to furnish about eight thousand horsemen to the wars. The kindred of Sobair do inhabit not far from the kingdom of Gezeir, being many of them under the pay of the king of Tremizen, and are said to enjoy a great part of Numidia. They have, more or less, three thousand most warlike horsemen. They possess likewise great abundance of camels; for which cause they abide all winter in the deserts. The remnant of them occupieth the plain which lieth between Sala and Mecnes. These have huge droves of cattle, and exercise themselves in husbandry, being constrained to pay some yearly tribute unto the king of Fez. They have horsemen, who, as a man may say, are naturally framed to the wars, about four thousand in number. Of the people of Hillel, and of their habitations. HIllel, which are also called Benihamir, dwell upon the frontiers of the kingdom of Tremizen and Oran. These range up and down the desert of Tegorarin, being in pay under the king of Tremizen, and of great riches and power; insomuch that they have at all times in a readiness for the 〈◊〉 six thousand horsemen. The tribe of Hurua possess only the borders of Mustuganim. These are savage people, giving themselves wholly to spoils and robberies, and alienating their minds from the wars. They never come forth of the deserts; for the people of Barbary will neither allow them any places of habitation, nor yet any stipend at all: horsemen they have to the number of two thousand. The kindred of Hucban are next neighbours unto the region of Melian, who receive certain pay from the king of Tunis. They are rude and wild people, and in very deed estranged from all humanity: they have (as it is reported) about fifteen hundred horsemen. The tribe of Habru inhabit the region lying between Oran and Mustuganim: these exercise husbandry, paying yearly tribute unto the king of Tremizen, and being scarce able to make one hundred horsemen. The people called Mussim possess those deserts of Masila which extend unto the kingdom of Bugia. These likewise are given only to theft and robbery; they take tribute both of their own people, and of other regions adjoining unto them. The tribe of Rieeh inhabit those deserts of Libya which border upon Constantina. These have most ample dominions in Numidia, being now divided into six parts. This right famous and warlike nation receiveth stipend from the king of Tunis, having five thousand horsemen at command. The people of Suaid enjoy that desert, which is extended unto the signiory of Tenez. These have very large possessions, receiving stipend from the king of Tremizen, being men of notable dexterity, as well in the wars as in all other conversation of life. The kindred of Azgeg dwell not all together in one place: for part of them inhabit the region of Garet among the people called Hemram: and the residue poslesse that part of Duccala which lieth near unto Azaphi. The tribe of Elcherit dwell upon that portion of Helin which is situate in the plain of Sahidim, having the people of Heah tributary unto them, and being a very uncivil and barbarous people. The people called Enedri are seated in the plain of Heah: but the whole region of Heah maintaineth almost four thousand horsemen; which notwithstanding are unfit for the wars. The people of Garfa have sundry mansions; neither have they any king or governor. They are dispersed among other generations, and especially among the kindreds of Manebbi and Hemram. These convey dates from Segelmessa to the kingdom of Fez, and carry back again from thence such things as are necessary for Segelmess. Of the tribe of Machil. THE people called Ruche, who are thought to be descended from Mastar, do possess that desert, which lieth next unto deeds and Farcala. They have very small dominions, for which cause they are accounted no whit rich; howbeit they are most valiant soldiers, and exceeding swift of foot; insomuch that they esteem it a great disgrace, if one of their footmen be vanquished by two horsemen. And you shall find scarce any one man among them, which will not outgo a very swift horse; be the journey never so long. They have about five hundred horsemen; but most warlike footmen, to the number of eight thousand. Selim inhabit upon the river of Dara; from whence they range up and down the deserts. They are endowed with great riches, carrying every year merchandise unto the kingdom of Tombuto, and are thought to be in high favour with the king himself. Traffic to Tombuto. A large jurisdiction they have in Darha and great plenty of camels: and for all opportunities of war they have ever in a readiness three thousand horsemen. The tribe of Elhasis dwelleth upon the sea-coast near unto Messa. They do arm about five hundred horsemen, and are a nation altogether rude and unacquainted in the wars. Some part of them inhabiteth Azgara. Those which dwell about Messa are free from the yoke of superiority, but the others which remain in Azgar are subject to the king of Fez. The kindred of Chinan are dispersed among them which before were called Elcaluth, and these also are subject unto the king of Fez. Very warlike people they are; and are able to set forth two thousand horsemen. The people of Devihessen are divided into the kindreds of Duleim, Burbun, Vode, Devimansor, and Devihubaidulla. Duleim are conversant in the deserts of Libya with the African people called Zanhaga. They have neither dominion nor yet any stipend; wherefore they are very poor and given to robbery: they travel unto Dara, and exchange cattle for dates with the inhabitants there. All bravery & comeliness of apparel they utterly neglect; and their number of fight menis ten thousand, four thousand being horsemen and the residue footmen. The people called Burbun possess, that part of the Libyan desert, which adjoineth unto Sus. They are a huge multitude, neither have they any riches beside camels. Unto them is subject the city of Tesset, which scarce sufficeth them for the maintenance of their horses, being but a few. The people of Vode enjoyeth that desert, which is situate between Guaden and Gualata. They bear rule over the Guadenites, and of the Duke of Gualata they receive yearly tribute, and their number is grown almost infinite For by report they are of ability to bring into the field almost threescore thousand most skilful soldiers; notwithstanding they have great want of horses. The tribe of Racmen occupy that desert which is next unto Hacha. They have very large possessions, and do in the spring-time usually travel unto Tesset: for then always they have somewhat to do with the inhabitants there. Their people fit for arms are to the number of twelve thousand; albeit they have very few horsemen. The nation of Hamrum inhabit the deserts of Tagavost, exacting some tribute of the inhabitants there, and with daily incursions likewise molesting the people of Nun. Their number of soldiers is almost eight thousand. The people descended of Devimansor. THE generation of Dehemrum, which are said to derive their pedigree from Devimansor, inhabit the desert over against Segellmess, who continually wander by the Libyan deserts as far as Ighid. They have tributary unto them the people of Segelmesse, of Todgatan, of Tebelbelt, and of Dara. Their soil yieldeth such abundance of dates, that the yearly increase thereof is sufficient to maintain them, although they had nothing else to live on. They are of great fame in other nations, being able to furnish for the wars about three thousand horsemen. There dwell likewise among these certain other Arabians of more base condition, called in their language Garfa Esgeh; which notwithstanding have great abundance of horses and of all other cattle. A certain part also of the people Hemrun obtaineth many and large possessions among the 〈◊〉, from whence they have a notable yearly revenue brought them in: this part of Hemrun maketh often excursions towards the deserts of Fighig. In summer they disperse themselves all over the province of Garet, possessing the east part of Mauritania. They are noble and honest persons, and endued with all kind of humanity and civility; insomuch that all the kings of Fez in a manner do usually choose them wives out of the same tribe; needs therefore must there be great friendship and familiarity among them. The people of Menebbe do almost inhabit the very same desert, having two provinces of Numidia under them; to wit, Matgara, and Retebbe. These also are a most valiant nation, being in pay under the province of Segelmess, and being able to make about two thousand horsemen. The kindred of Husein, which are thought to be descended of Devimansor, are seated upon the mountains of Atlas. They have in the said mountains a large jurisdiction, namely divers castles every where, and many most rich and flourishing cities, all which, they think, were given them in old time by the viceroys of the Marini: for so soon as they had won that kingdom, the kindred of Husein afforded them great aid and service. Their dominion is now subject unto the kings of Fez and of Segelmess. They have a captain, which for the most part resideth at the city commonly called Garseluin. Likewise they are always, in a manner, traversing of that desert which in their language is called Eddara. They are taken to be a most rich and honest people, being of ability to furnish for the wars about six thousand horsemen. Among these you shall oftentimes find many Arabians of another sort, whom they use only to be their servants. The tribe of Abulhusein do inhabit part of the foresaid desert of Eddara, howbeit a very small part: the greatest number of whom are brought unto such extreme misery, that they have not in those their wild tents sufficient sustenance to live upon. True it is, that they have built them certain habitations upon the Libyan deserts; but yet they are cruelly pinched with famine and with extreme penury of all things: and (that there might be no end of their misery) they are constrained to pay yearly tribute unto their kindred and parents. The offspring of Devihubaidulla. ONE generation of the people of Devihubaidulla are those which are named Gharrag: these enjoy the deserts of Benigomi and Fighig, having very large possessions in Numidia. They are stipendaries unto the king of Tremizen; who diligently endeavoureth to bring them to peace and tranquility of life; for they are wholly given to theft and robbery. In summer time they usually repair unto Tremizen, where they are thought for that season of the year to settle their abode: their horsemen are to the number of four thousand, all which are most noble warriors. The kindred of Hedeg possess a certain desert near unto Tremizen, called in their own language Hangad. These have no stipend from any prince, nor yet any jurisdiction at all, rapine and stealth is only delightful unto them, they provide only for their family and themselves, and are able to set forth about five hundred horsemen. The tribe of Theleb inhabit the plain of * Alger. Algezer: these have often vagaries over the deserts unto the province of Tedgear. Unto them were subject in times past the most famous cities of Algezer and Tedelles: howbeit in these our days they were recovered again from them by Barbarossa the Turk; which loss could not but greatly grieve and molest their king. It is reported moreover, that at the same time, the principal of the said people of Theleb were cut off. For strength and cunning in chivalry they were inferior to no other nation; their norsemen were about three thousand. The tribe of Gehoan inhabit not all in one place: for part of them you may find among the people of Guarag, and the residue amongst the people of Hedeg, and they are unto them no otherwise then their servants, which condition they notwithstanding most patiently and willingly submit themselves unto. And here one thing is to be noted by the way; to wit, that the two forenamed people called * The Arabians called 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 descended from Ishmael the base son of Abraham. Schachin and Hilel are originally Arabians of Arabia deserta, and think themselves to be descended from Ishmael the son of Abraham. And those which we called Machil, came first forth of Arabia foelix, and derive their pedigree from Saba. Before whom the mahometans prefer the former, which of Ishmael are called Ismaelites. And because The Arabians called 〈◊〉 descended of Saba. there hath always been great controverfie among them, which part should be of greater nobility, they have written on both sides many dialogues and epigrams, whereby each man is wont to blaze the renown, the virtuous manners, and laudable customs of his own nation. The ancient Arabians, which were before the times of the Ismaelites, were called by the African historiographers Arabi-Araba, as if a man should say, Arabians of Arabia. But those which came of Ishmael, they call Arabi Mus-Araba, as if they should say, Arabians engraffed into the land of Arabia, or Arabians accidentally, because they were not originally bred & borne in Arabia. And then which afterward came into Africa, they name in their language Mustehgeme, that is, barbarous Arabians; and that because they joined themselves unto strangers, insomuch that not only their speech, but their manners also are most corrupt and barbarous. These are (friendly reader) the particulars, which for these ten years my memory could reserve, as touching the originals and diversities of the Africans and Arabians; in all which time I remember not, that ever I read or saw any history of that nation. He that will know more, let him have recourse unto Hibnu Rachu the historiographer beforenamed. The manners and customs of the African people, which inhabit the deserts of Libya. THose five kinds of people before rehearsed, to wit, the people The people of Numidia. of Zenega, of Gansiga, of Terga, of Leuta, and of Bardeoa, are called of the Latins Numidae: and they live all after one manner, that is to say, without all law and civility. Their garment is a narrow and base piece of cloth, wherewith scarce half their body is covered. Some of them wrap their heads in a kind of black cloth, as it were with a scarf, such as the Turks use, which is commonly called a Turban. Such as will be discerned from the common sort, for gentlemen, wear a jacket made of blue cotton with wide sleeves. And cotton-cloth is brought unto them by certain merchants from the land of negroes. They have no beasts fit to ride upon except their camels; unto whom nature, between the bunch standing upon the hinder part of their backs and their necks, hath allotted a place, which may fitly serve to ride upon, in stead of a saddle. Their manner of riding is most ridiculous. For sometimes they lay their legs across upon the camels neck; and sometimes again (having no knowledge nor regard of stirrups) they rest their feet upon a rope, which is cast over his shoulders. In stead of spurs they use a truncheon of a cubits length, having at the one end thereof a goad, wherewith they prick only the shoulders of their camels. Those camels which they use to ride upon have a hole bored through the gristles of their nose, in the which a ring of leather is fastened, whereby as with a bit, they are more easily kerbed and mastered; after which manner I have seen buffles used in Italy. For beds; they lie upon mats made of sedge and bulrushes. Their tents are covered for the most part with course chamlet, or with a harsh kind of wool which commonly groweth upon the boughs of their date-trees. As for their manner Wool growing upon the Palm tree. of living, it would seem to any man incredible what hunger and scarcity this nation will endure. Bread they have none at all, neither use they any seething or roasting; their food is camels milk only, and they desire no other dainties. For their breakfast they drink off a great cup of camels milk: for supper they have certain dried flesh steeped in butter and milk; whereof each man taking his share, eateth it out of his fist. And that this their meat may not stay long undigested in their stomachs, they sup off the foresaid broth wherein their flesh was steeped: for which purpose they use the palms of their hands as a most fit instrument framed by nature to the same end. After that, each one drinks his cup of milk, & so their supper hath an end. These Numidians, while they have any store of milk, regard water nothing at all, which for the most part happeneth in the spring of the year, all which time you shall find some among them that will neither wash their hands nor their faces. Which seemeth not altogether to be unlikely; for (as we said before) while their milk lasteth, they frequent not those places where water is common: yea, and their camels, so long as they may feed upon grass, will drink no water at all. They spend their whole days in hunting and thieving: for all their endeavour and exercise is to drive away the camels of their enemies; neither will they remain above three days in one place, by reason that they have not pasture any longer for the sustenance of their camels. And albeit (as is aforesaid) they have no civility at all, nor any laws prescribed unto them; yet have they a certain governor or prince placed over them, unto whom they render obedience and due honour, as unto their king. They are not only ignorant of all good learning and liberal sciences; but are likewise altogether careless and destitute of virtue: insomuch that you shall find scarce one amongst them all which is a man of judgement or counsel. And if any injuried party will go to the law with his adversary, he must ride continually five or six days before he can come to the speech of any judge. This nation hath all learning and good disciplines in such contempt, that they will not once vouchsafe to go out of their deserts for the study and attaining thereof: neither, if any learned man shall chance to come among them, can they love his company and conversation, in regard of their most rude and detestable behaviour. Howbeit, if they can find any judge, which can frame himself to live and continue among them, to him they give most large yearly allowance. Some allow their judge a thousand ducats yearly, some more, and some less, according as themselves think good. They that will seem to be accounted of the better sort, cover their heads (as I said before) with a piece of black cloth, part whereof, like a vizard or mask, reacheth down over their faces, covering all their countenance except their eyes; and this is their daily kind of attire. And so often as they put meat into their mouths they remove the said mask, which being done, they forth with cover their mouths again; alleging this fond reason: for (say they) as it is unseemly for a man, after he hath received meat into his stomach, to vomit it out of his mouth again and to cast it upon the earth; even so it is an undecent part to eat meat with a man's mouth uncovered. The women of this nation be gross, corpulent, and of a swart complexion. They are fattest upon their breast and paps, but slender about the girdle- 〈◊〉. Very civil they are, after their manner, both in speech and gestures: sometimes they will accept of a kiss; but whoso tempteth them farther, putteth his own life in hazard. For by reason of jealousy you may see them daily one to be the death and destruction of another, and that in such savage and brutish manner, that in this case they will show no compassion at all. And they seem to be more wise in this behalf then divers of our people, for they will by no means match themselves unto an harlot. The liberality of this people hath at all times been exceeding great. And when any travelers may pass through their dry and desert territories, they will never repair unto their tents, neither will they themselves travel upon the common high way. And if any carovan or multitude of merchants will pass those deserts, they are bound to pay certain custom unto the prince of the said people, namely, for every camels load a piece of cloth worth a ducat. Upon a time I remember that traveling in the company of certain merchants over the desert called by them Araoan, it was our chance there to meet with the prince of Zanaga; who, after he had received his due custom, invited the said company of merchants, for their recreation, to go and abide with him in his tents four or five days. Howbeit, because his tents were too far out of our way, and for that we should have wandered farther than we thought good, esteeming it more convenient for us to hold on our direct course, we refused his gentle offer, and for his courtesy gave him great thanks. But not being satisfied therewith, he commanded that our camels should proceed on forward, but the merchants he carried along with him, and gave them very sumptuous entertainment at his place of abode. Where we were no sooner arrived, but this good prince caused camels of all kinds and ostriches, 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 used 〈◊〉 victuals. which he had hunted and taken by the way, to be killed for his household provision. Howbeit we requested him not to make such daily slaughters of his camels; affirming moreover, that we never used to eat the flesh of a gelt camel, but when all other victuals failed us. Whereunto he answered, that he should deal uncivilly, if he welcomed so worthy and so seldome-seene guests with the kill of small cattle only. Wherefore he wished us to fall to such provision as was set before us. Here might you have seen great plenty of roasted and sodden flesh: their roasted ostriches were brought to the table in wicker platters, being seasoned with sundry kinds of herbs and spices. Their bread made of Mill and panic was of a most savoury and pleasant taste: and always at the end of dinner or supper we had plenty of dates and great store of milk served in. Yea, this bountiful and noble prince, that he might sufficiently show how welcome we were unto him, would together with his nobility always bear us company: howbeit we ever dined and supped apart by ourselves. Moreover he caused certain religious and most learned men to come unto our banquet; who, all the time we remained with the said prince, used not to eat any bread at all, but fed only upon flesh and milk. Whereat we being somewhat amazed, the good prince gently told us, that they all were borne in such places whereas no kind of grain would grow: howbeit that himself, for the entertainment of strangers, had great plenty of corn laid up in store. Wherefore he bade us to be of good cheer, saying that 〈◊〉 would eat only of such things as his own native soil afforded: affirming moreover, that bread was yet in use among them at their feast of passover, and at other feasts also, whereupon they used to offer sacrifice. And thus we remained with him for the space of two days; all which time, what wonderful and magnificent cheer we had made us, would seem incredible to report. But the third day, being desirous to take our leave, the prince accompanied us to that place where we overtook our camels and company sent before. And this I dare most deeply take mine oath on, that we spent the said prince ten times more, than our custom which he received came to. We thought it not amiss here to set down this history, to declare in some sort the courtesy and liberality of the said nation. Neither could the prince aforesaid understand our language nor we his; but all our speech to and fro was made by an interpreter. And this which we have here recorded as touching this nation, is likewise to be understood of the other four nations above mentioned, which are dispersed over the residue of the Numidian deserts. The manners and customs of the Arabians which inhabit Africa. THE Arabians, as they have sundry mansions and places of abode, so do they live after a divers and sundry manner. Those which inhabit between Numidia and Libya lead a most miserable and distressed life, differing much in this regard from those Africans, whom we affirmed to dwell in Libya. Howbeit they are far more valiant than the said Africans; and use commonly to exchange camels in the land of Negroes: Where the Barbary horses are bred. they have likewise great store of horses, which in Europe they call horses of Barbary. They take wonderful delight in hunting and pursuing of dear, of wild asses, of ostriches, and such like. Neither is it here to be omitted, that the greater part of Arabians which inhabit Numidia, are very witty and conceited in penning of verses; wherein each man will decipher Arabian poems and verses. his love, his hunting, his combats, and other his worthy acts: and this is done for the most part in rhyme, after the Italians manner. And albe it they are most liberally minded, yet dare they not by bountiful giving make any show of wealth; for they are daily oppressed with manifold inconveniences. They are appareled after the Numidians fashion, saving that their women differ somewhat from the women of Numidia. Those deserts which they do now enjoy were wont to be possessed by Africans: but the Arabians with their army invading that part of Africa, drove out the natural Numidians, and reserved the deserts adjoining upon The land of dates, unto themselves: but the Numidians began to inhabit those deserts which border upon the land of negroes. The Arabians which dwell between mount Atlas and the Mediterran sea are far wealthier than these which we now speak of, both for costliness of apparel, for good horse-meat, and for the stateliness and beauty of their tents. Their horses also are of better shape and more corpulent, but not so swift as the horses of the Numidian desert. They exercise husbandry and have great increase of corn. Their droves and flocks of cattle be innumerable, insomuch that they cannot inhabit one by another for want of pasture. They are somewhat more vile and barbarous than those which inhabit the deserts, and yet they are not altogether destitute of liberality: part of them, which dwell in the territory of Fez are subject unto the king of Fez. Those which remain in Morocco and Duccala have continued this long time free from all exaction and tribute: but so soon as the king of Portugal began to bear rule over Azafi and Azamor, there began also among them strife and civil war. Wherefore being assailed by the king of Portugal on the one side, and by the king of Fez on the other, and being oppressed also with the extreme famine and scarcity of that year, they were brought unto such misery, that they freely offered themselves as The Arabians offer themselves slaves to any that would relieve their extreme hunger. slaves unto the Portugals, submitting themselves to any man, that was willing to relieve their intolerable hunger: and by this means scarce one of them was left in all Duccala. Moreover those which possess the deserts bordering upon the kingdoms of Tremizen and Tunis may all of them, in regard of the rest, be called noblemen and gentlemen. For their governors receiving every year great revenues from the king of Tunis, divide the same afterward among their people, to the end they may avoid all discord: and by this means all dissension is eschewed, and peace is kept firm and inviolable among them. They have notable dexterity and cunning, both in making of tents, and in bringing up and keeping of horses. In summer time they usually come near unto Tunis, to the end that each man may provide himself of bread, armour, and other necessaries: all which they carry with them into the deserts, remaining there the whole winter. In the spring of the year they apply themselves to hunting, insomuch that no beast can escape their pursuit. Myself, I remember, was once at their tents, to my no little danger and inconvenience; where I saw greater quantity of cloth, brass, iron, and copper, than a man shall oftentimes find in the most rich warehouses of some cities. Howbeit no trust is to be given unto them; for if occasion serve, they will play the thieves most slily and cunningly; notwithstanding they seem to carry some show of civility. They take great delight in poetry, and will pen most excellent verses, their language being very pure and elegant. If any worthy poet be found among them, he is accepted by their governors with great honour and liberality; neither would any man easily believe what wit and decency is in their verses. Their women (according to the guise of that country) go very gorgeously attired: they wear linen gowns died black, with exceeding wide sleeves, over which sometimes they cast a mantle of the same colour or of blue, the corners of which mantle are very artificially fastened about their shoulders with a fine silver clasp. Likewise they have rings hanging at their ears, which for the most part are made of silver: they wear many rings also upon their fingers. Moreover they usually wear about their thighs and ankles certain scarves and rings, after the fashion of the Africans. They cover their faces with certain masks having only two holes for their eyes to peep out at. If any man chance to meet with them, they presently hide their faces, passing by him with silence, except it be some of their allies or kinsfolks; for unto them they always discover their faces, neither is there any use of the said mask so long as they be in presence. These Arabians when they travel any journey (as they oftentimes do) they set their women upon certain saddles made handsomely of wicker for the same purpose, and fastened to their camels backs, neither be they any thing too wide, but fit only for a woman to sit in. When they go to the wars each man carries his wife with him, to the end that she may cheer up her good man, and give him encouragement. Their damsels which are unmarried do usually paint their faces, breasts, arms, hands, and fingers with a kind of counterfeit colour: which is accounted a most decent custom among them. But this fashion was first brought in by those Arabians, which before we called Africans, what time they began first of all to inhabit that region; for before then, they never used any false or glozing colours. The women of Barbary use not this fond kind of painting, but contenting themselves only with their natural hue, they regard not such feigned ornaments: howbeit sometimes they will temper a certain colour with hens-dung and safron, wherewithal they paint a little round spot on the balls of their cheeks, about the breadth of a French crown. Likewise between their kickshaws they make a triangle; and paint upon their chins a patch like unto an olive leaf. Some of them also do paint their kickshaws: and this custom is very highly esteemed of by the Arabian poets and by the gentlemen of that country. Howbeit they will not use these fantastical ornaments above two or three days together: all which time they will not be seen to any of their friends, except it be to their husbands and children: for these paintings seem to be great allurements unto lust, whereby the said women think themselves more trim and beautiful. How the Arabians in the deserts between Barbary and Egypt do lead their lives. THE life of these men is full of misery and calamity: for the places where they inhabit are barren and unpleasant. They have some store of camels and other cattle: howbeit their fodder is so scarce, that they cannot well sustain them. Neither shall you find over all the whole region any place fit to bear corn. And if in that desert there be any villages at all, which use to husband and manure their ground; yet reap they small commodity thereby, except it be for plentiful increase of dates. Their camels and other of their cattle they exchange for dates and corn; and so the poor husbandmen of the foresaid villages have some small recompense for their labours: notwithstanding, how can all this satisfy the hunger of such a multitude? For you shall daily see in Sicilia great numbers of The Arabians of Barca lay their sons to pawn unto the Sicilians for corn. their sons laid to pawn. Because when they have not wherewithal to pay for the corn which they there buy, they are constrained to leave their sons behind them, as pledges of future payment. But the Sicilians, if their money be not paid them at the time appointed, will challenge the Arabians sons to be their slaves. Which day being once past, if any father will redeem his child, he must disburse thrice or four times so much as the due debt amounteth unto: for which cause they are the most notable thieves in the whole world. If any stranger fall into their hands, depriving him of all that he hath, they presently carry him to Sicily, and there either sell or exchange him for come. And I think, that no merchant's 〈◊〉 at any time within these hundred years 〈◊〉 for traffics sake upon any part of their coast. For when they are to pass by with merchandise, or about any other weighty affairs, they eschew that region five hundred miles at the least. Once I remember, that I myself, for my better 〈◊〉, and to avoid the danger of those mischievous people, went in company with certain merchants, who in three ships sailed along their coast. We were no sooner espied of them; but forthwith they came running to the shore, making signs that they would traffic with us to our great advantage. Howbeit becaufe we durst not repose any trust in them, none of our company would depart the ship, before they had delivered certain pledges unto us. Which being done, we bought certain 〈◊〉 or gelded men, and good store of butter of them. And so immediately weighing our anchors we betook us to flight, fearing lest we should have been met withal by the Sicilian and Rhodian Pirates, and been spoilt not only of our goods, but of our liberties also. To be short, the said Arabians are very rude, forlorn, beggarly, lean, and hunger-starved people, having God (no doubt) 〈◊〉 displeased against them, by whose vengeance they daily sustain such 〈◊〉 calamities. Of the people called Soara, namely, which possess droves and flocks of cattle, and being Africans by birth, do notwithstanding imitate the manners of the Arabians. YOU shall find many among the Africans which live altogithera shepherds or drovers life, inhabiting upon the beginning of mount Atlas, and being dispersed here and there over the same mountain. They are constrained always to pay tribute either to the King of the same region where they dwell, or else to the Arabians, except those only which inhabit Temesna, who are free from all foreign superiority, and are of great power. They speak the same kind of language that other Africanes do, except some few of them which converse with the inhabitants of the city called Vrbs (which is near unto Tunis) who speak the Arabian tongue. Moreover there is a certain people inhabiting that region which divideth Numidia from Tunis. These oftentimes wage war against the King of Tunis himself, which they put in practise not many years since, when as the said King his son marching towards them from Constantina with an army, for the demanding of such tribute as was due unto him, fought a very unfortunate battle. For no sooner were they advertised of the King's son The 〈◊〉 and death of the Ring of Tunis his son. his approach, but forthwith they went to meet him with two thousand horsemen, and at length vanquished and slew him at unawares, carrying home with them all the furniture, bag, and baggage, which he had brought forth. And this was done in the year of Mahumets' Hegeira 915. From that time their fame hath been spread abroad in all places. Yea, many of the king of Tunis his subjects revolted from their King unto them; insomuch that the Prince of this people is grown so puissant, that scarcely is his equal to be found in all Africa. Of the faith and religion of the ancient Africans or Moors. THE ancient Africans were much addicted to idolatry, even as certain of the Persians are at this day, some of whom worship the sun, and others the fire, for their gods. For the said Africans had in times past magnificent and most stately temples built and dedicated, as well to the honour of the sun as of the fire. In these temples day and night they kept fire kindled, giving diligent heed that it might not at any time be extinguished, even as we read of the Roman Vestal virgins: All which you may read more fully and at large in the Persian and African Chronicles. Those Africans which inhabited Libya and Numidia, would each of them worship some certain planet, unto whom likewise they offered sacrifices and prayers. Some others of the land of negroes worship Guighimo, that is to say, The Lord of Heaven. And this sound point of religion was not delivered unto them by any Prophet or teacher, but was inspired, as it were, from God himself. After that, they embraced the jewish law, wherein they are said to have continued many years. Afterward they professed the Christian religion, and continued Christians, until such time as the Mahometan superstition prevailed; which came to pass in the year of the Hegeira 208. About which time certain of Mahomet's disciples so bewitched them with eloquent and deceivable speeches, that they alured their weak minds to consent unto their opinion; insomuch that all the kingdoms of the Negroes adjoining unto Libya received the Mahometan law. Neither is there any region in all the Negroes land, which hath in it at this day any Christians at all. At the same time such as were found to be jews, Christians, or of the African religion, were slain every man of them. Howbeit those which dwell near unto the Ocean sea, are all of them very gross idolaters. Between whom and the Portugals there hath been from time to time and even at this present is, great traffic and familiarity. The inhabitants of Barbary continued for many years idolaters; but before the coming of Mahomet above 250, years, they are said to have embraced the Christian faith: which some think came to pass upon this occasion; namely, because that of part Barbary which containeth the kingdom of Tripoli and Tunis, was in times past governed by Apulian & Sicilian Captains, and the countries of * Trenizen. Caesaria and of * Maroco and Fez. Mauritania are supposed to have been 〈◊〉 unto the Goths. At what time also many Christians fleeing from the fury and madness of the Goths left their sweet native soil of Italy, and at length arrived in Africa near unto Tunis: where having settled their abode for some certain space, they began at length to have the dominion over all that region. Howbeit the Christians which inhabited Barbaria, not respecting the rites and ceremonies of the Church of Rome, followed the Arrians 〈◊〉 and form of living: and one of the African Christians was that most godly and learned father Saint Augustine. When the Arabians therefore came to conquer that part of Africa they found Christians to be Lords over the regions adjacent; of whom, after sundry hot conflicts, the said Arabians got the victory. Whereupon the Arrians being deprived of all their dominions and goods went part of them into Italy and part into Spain. And so about two hundred years after the death of Mahumet, almost all Barbary was infected with his law. Howbeit afterward, civil dissensions arising among them, neglecting the law of Mahumet, they slew all the priests and governors of that region. Which tumult when it came to the ears of the Mahometan Caliphas, they sent an huge army against the said rebels of Barbary, to wit, those which were revolted from the Calipha of Bagdet, and severely punished their misdemeanour. And even at the same time was laid the most 〈◊〉 foundation of the Mahometan law; notwithstanding there have remained many heresies among them even until this very day. As touching the patrons of the Mahometan law, and likewise concerning the difference in religion between the mahometans A book written by john Leo concerning the Mahometan religion. of Africa, and them of Asia, we will (by God's grace) write more in another several volume; and in the mean season, let these particulars which we have noted suffice the Reader. Of the letters and characters of the Africans. THose writers which record the histories of the Arabians doings are all jointly of opinion, that the Africans were wont to use only the Latin letters. And they do most constantly affirm, The Africans used in times past none other kind of letters but the Roman letters. that the Arabians, when they first 〈◊〉 Africa and especially Barbary (which was the principal seat of the Africans) found no letters nor characters there, beside the Latin. Neither indeed do they deny that the Africans have a peculiar kind of language, but this they firmly avouch, that they have the very same letters which the 〈◊〉 or Florentinesa people of Italy have. The Arabians have no history * Perhaps he meaneth the histories of Sallust, 〈◊〉 Livius, and others. of African matters, which was not first written in Latin. They have certain ancient authors, who writ partly in the times of the Arrians and partly before their times, the names of all which are clean forgotten. Howbeit it is very likely that those Latin authors have written many volumes: for when their interpreters laboured to persuade something unto us, I remember they would say, it is contained in the seuentieth book. Neither did they in translating of the said volumes altogether follow the author's order; but taking the history of some one prince, they would conjoin his time and actions with the history of the Persian, Assyrian, and Chaldaean kings, or of the Israelites, which concerned the same times. But when as those which rebelled against the Calipha of Bagdet (as is aforesaid) got the upper hand in Africa, they burned all the Africans books. For they were of opinion, that the Africans, so long as they had any knowledge of natural philosophy or of other good arts and sciences, would every day more and more arrogantly contemn the law of Mahumet. chose, some historiographers there are which affirm, that the Africans had a kind of letters peculiar unto themselves; which notwithstanding, from the time wherein the Italians began first to inhabit Barbary, and wherein the Christians 〈◊〉 out of Italy from the Goths, began to subdue those provinces of Africa, were utterly abolished and taken away. For it is likely that a people vanquished should follow the customs and the letters also of their conquerors. And did not the same thing happen to the Persians, while the Arabians empire stood? For certain it is, that the Persians at the same time lost those letters which were peculiar unto their nation; and that all their books, by the commandment The Mahometan Calisas caused all the books of the Persians to be burned. of the Mahometan prelate's, were burnt, lest their knowledge in natural philosophy, or their idolatrous religion might move them to contemn the precepts of Mahumet. The like also (as we showed before) befell the Barbarians when as the Italians and the Goths usurped their dominions in Barbary; which may here (I hope) suffice the gentle reader. Howbeit this is out of doubt, that all the 〈◊〉- cities and inland-cities of Barbary do use Latin letters only, whensoever they will commit any epitaphs or any other verses or prose unto posterity. The consideration of all which former particulars hath made me to be of opinion, that the Africans in times past had their own proper and peculiar letters, wherein they described their doings and exploits. For it is likely that the Romans, when they first subdued those provinces (as conquerors usually do) utterly spoiled and took away all their letters and memory, and established their own letters in the stead thereof; to the end that the fame and honour of the Roman people might there only be continued. And who knoweth not that the very same attempt was practised by the Goths upon the stately buildings of the Romans, and by the Arabians against the monuments of the Persians. The very same thing likewise we daily see put in practice by the Turks, who when they have gotten any city or town from the Christians, do presently cast forth of the temples all the images and memorial of their saints. And to omit all the aforesaid, may we not in our time see the like daily practised in Rome; where sumptuous and stately buildings left unperfect by reason of the untimely death of one Pope, are for some novelty utterly ruined and destroyed by his next successor? Or else, doth not the new Pope cause his predecessors arms to be razed, and his own in stead thereof to be set up? Or at the least, if he will not seem so arrogant, letting his predecessors monuments stand still, doth he not erect others for himself far more sumptuous and stately? No marvel therefore, though so long success of times and so many alterations have quite bereaved the Africans of their letters. Concerning those nine hundred years wherein the Africans used the letters of the Arabians, Ibnu Rachich, a most diligent writer of Africa, doth in his Chronicle most largely dispute; whether the Africans ever had any peculiar kind of writing or no. And at last he concludeth the affirmative part; that they had: for (saith he) whosoever denieth this, may as well deny, that they had a language peculiar unto themselves. For it cannot be that any people should have a proper kind of speech, and yet should use letters borrowed from other nations, and being altogether unfit for their mother-language. Of the situation of Africa. AS there are four parts in Africa, so the situation thereof is not in all places alike. That part which lieth towards the Mediterran sea, that is to say, from the streites of Gibraltar to the frontiers of Egypt, is here and there full of mountains: Southward it is extended about a hundred miles, albeit in some places it be larger and in some other narrower. From the said mountains unto mount Atlas there is a very spacious plain & many little hillocks. fountains there are in this region great store, which meeting together at one head do send forth most beautiful rivers and crystal streams. Between the foresaid mountains and the plain country is situate the mountain of Atlas; which beginning westward upon the Ocean sea, stretcheth itself towards the east as far as the borders of Egypt. Over against Atlas lieth that region of Numidia which beareth dates, being every where almost sandy ground. Between Numidia and the land of negroes is the sandy desert of Libya situate, which containeth many mountains also; howbeit merchants travel not that way, when as they may go other ways with more ease and less danger. Beyond the Libyan desert beginneth the land of Negroes, all places whereof are barren and sandy except those which adjoin upon the river of Niger, or through the which any river or stream runneth. Of the unpleasant and snowy places in Africa. ALl the region of Barbary, and the mountains contained therein, are subject more to cold then to heat. For seldom cometh any gale of wind which bringeth not some snow therewith. In all the said mountains there grow abundance of fruits, but not so great plenty of corn. The inhabitants of these mountains live for the greatest part of the year upon barley bread. The springs & rivers issuing forth of the said mountains, representing the quality and taste of their native soil, are somewhat muddy and impure, especially upon the confines of Mauritania. These mountains likewise are replenished with woods and lofty 〈◊〉, and are greatly stored with beasts of all kinds. But the little hills and valleys lying between the foresaid mountains and mount Atlas are far more commodious, and abounding with corn. For ' they are moistened with rivers springing out of Atlas, and from thence holding on their course to the Mediterran sea. And albeit woods are somewhat more scarce upon these plains, yet are they much more fruitful, then be the plain countries situate between Atlas and the Ocean sea, as namely the regions of Maroco, of Duccala, of Tedles, of Temesna, of Azgara, and the country lying towards the straits of Gibraltar. The mountains The mountains of Atlas exceeding cold. of Atlas are exceeding cold and barren, and bring forth but small store of corn, being woody on all sides, and engendering almost all the rivers of Africa. The fountains of Atlas are even in the midst of summer extremely cold; so that if a man dippeth his hand therein for any long space, he is in great danger of losing the same. Howbeit the said mountains are not so cold in all places: for some parts thereof are of such mild temperature, that they may be right commodiously inhabited: yea and sundry places thereof are well stored with inhabitants; as in the second part of this present discourse we will declare more at large. Those places which are destitute of inhabitants be either extremely cold, as namely the same which lie over against Mauritania: or very rough and unpleasant, to wit, those which are directly opposite to the region of Temesna. Where notwithstanding in summer time they may feed their great and small cattle, but not in winter by any means. For then the North wind so furiously rageth, bringing with it such abundance of snow; that all the cattle which till then remain upon the said mountains, and a great part of the people also are forced to lose their lives in regard thereof: wherefore whosoever hath any occasion to travel that way in winter time, chooseth rather to take his journey between Mauritania and Numidia. Those merchants which bring dates out of Numidia for the use and service of other nations, set forth usually upon their journey about the end of October; and yet they are oftentimes so oppressed Most wonderful and terrible snows. and overtaken with a sudden fall of snow, that scarcely one man among them all escapeth the danger of the tempest. For when it beginneth to snow over night, before the next morning not only carts and men, but even the very trees are so drowned & overwhelmed therein, that it is not possible to find any mention of them. Howbeit the dead carcases are then found when the sun hath melted the snow. I myself also, by the goodness of The extreme danger of snow which john Leo himself escaped almighty God, twice escaped the most dreadful danger of the foresaid snow; whereof, if it may not be tedious to the reader, I will here in few words make relation. Upon a certain day of the foresaid month of October, traveling with a great company of Merchants towards Atlas, we were there about the sun going down weatherbeaten with a most cold and snowy kind of hail. Here we found eleven or twelve horsemen (Arabians to our thinking) who persuading us to leave our carts and to go with them, promised us a good and secure place to lodge in. For mine own part, that I might not seem altogether uncivil, I thought it not meet to refuse their good offer; albeit I stood in doubt lest they went about to practise some mischief. Wherefore I bethought myself to hide up a certain sum of gold which I had as then about me. But all being ready to ride, I had no leisure to hide away my coin from them; whereupon I feigned that I would go ease myself. And so departing a while their company, and getting me under a certain tree, whereof I took diligent notice, I buried my money between certain stones and the root of the said tree. And then we road on quietly till about midnight. What time one of them thinking that he had stayed long enough for his prey, began to utter that in words which secretly he had conceived in his mind. For he asked whether I had any money about me or no? To whom I answered, that I had left my money behind with one of them which attended the carts, and that I had then none at all about me. Howbeit they being no whit satisfied with this answer, commanded me, for all the cold weather, to strip myself out of mine apparel. At length when they could find no money at all, they said in jesting & scoffing wise, that they did this for no other purpose, but only to see how strong and hardy I was, and how I could endure the cold and tempestuous season. Well, on we road, seeking our way as well as we could that dark and dismal night; and anon we heard the bleating of sheep, conjecturing thereby, that we were not far distant from some habitation of people. Wherefore out of hand we directed our course thitherwards: being constrained to lead our horses through thick woods and over steep and craggy rocks, to the great hazard and peril of our lives. And at length after many labours, we found shepherds in a certain cave: who, having with much pains brought their cattle in there, had kindled a lusty fire for themselves, which they were constrained, by reason of the extreme cold, daily to sit by. Who understanding our company to be Arabians, feared at the first that we would do them some mischief: but afterward being persuaded that we were driven thither by extremity of cold, and being more secure of us, they gave us most friendly entertainment. For they set bread, flesh, and cheese before us, wherewith having ended our suppers, we laid us along each man to sleep before the fire. All of us were as yet exceeding cold, but especially myself, who before with great horror and trembling was stripped stark naked. And so we continued with the said shepherds for the space of two days: all which time we could not set forth, by reason of continual snow. But the third day, so soon as they saw it leave snowing, with great labour they began to remove that snow which lay before the door of their cave. Which done, they brought us to our horses, which we found well provided of hay in another cave. Being all mounted, the shepherds accompanied us some part of our way, showing us where the snow was of least depth, and yet even there it touched our horse bellies. This day was so clear, that the sun took away all the cold of the two days going before. At length entering into a certain village near unto Fez, we understood, that our carts which passed by, were overwhelmed with the snow. Then the Arabians seeing no hope of recompense for all the pains they had taken (for they had defended our carts from thieves) carried a certain jew of our company with them as their captive, (who had lost a great quantity of dates, by reason of the snow aforesaid) to the end that he might remain as their prisoner, till he had satisfied for all the residue. From myself they took my horse, and committed me unto the wide world and to fortune. From whence, riding upon a mule, within three days I arrived at Fez, where I heard doleful news of our merchants and wares, that they were cast away in the snow. Yea, they thought that I had been destrosed with the rest; but it seemed that God would have it otherwise. Now, having finished the history of mine own misfortunes, let us return unto that discourse where we left. Beyond Atlas there are certain hot & dry places moistened with very few rivers, but those which flow out of Atlas itself: some of which rivers running into the Libyan deserts are dried up with the sands, but others do engender lakes. Neither shall you find in these countries any places apt to bring forth corn, notwithstanding they have dates in abundance. There are also certain other trees bearing fruit, but in so small quantity, that no increase nor gain is to be reaped by them. You may see likewise in those parts of Numidia which border upon Libya certain barren hills destitute of trees, upon the lower parts whereof grow nothing but unprofitable thorns and shrubs. Amongst these mountains you shall find no rivers nor springs, nor yet any waters at all, except it be in certain pits and wells almost unknown unto the inhabitants of that region. Moreover in six or seven days journey they have not one drop of water, but such as is brought unto them by certain merchants upon camels backs. And that especially in those places which lie upon the main road from Fez to Tombuto, or from Tremizen to * Agadez. Agad. That journey likewise is very dangerous which is of late found out by the merchants of our days from Fez to Alcair over the deserts of Libya, were it not for an huge lake in the way, upon the banks whereof the Sinites and the Goranites do inhabit. But in the way which leadeth from Fez to Tombuto are certain pits environed either with the hides or bones of camels. Neither do the merchants in summer time pass that way without great danger of their lives: for oftentimes it falleth out, when the south wind bloweth, that all those pits are stopped up with sand. And so the merchants, when they can find neither those pits, nor any mention thereof, must needs perish for extreme thirst: whose carcases are afterward found lying scattered here and there, and scorched with the heat of the sun. One remedy they have A strange remedy used by the African merchants to quench their thirst. in this case, which is very strange: for when they are so grievously oppressed with thirst, they kill forthwith some one of their camels, out of whose bowels they wring and express some quantity of water, which water they they drink and carry about with them, till they have either found some pit of water, or till they pine away for thirst. In the desert which they call Azaoad there are as yet extant two monuments built of marble, upon which marble is an Epitaphe engraven, signifying that one of the said monuments represented a most rich merchant, and the other a carrier or transporter of wares. Which wealthy merchant bought of the carrier a cup of water for ten A merchant constrained by extreme thirst, gave ten thousand ducats for a cup of water. thousand ducats, and yet this precious water could suffice neither of them; for both were consumed with thirst. This desert likewise containeth sundry kinds of beasts, which in the fourth part of this discourse concerning Libya, and in our treatise of the beasts of Africa, we will discourse of more at large. I was determined to have written more concerning those things which happened unto myself & the rest of my company traveling through the Libyan deserts unto Gualata. For sometime being sore a thirst, we could not find one drop of water, partly because our guide strayed out of the direct course, and partly because our enemies had cut off the springs and channels of the foresaid pits and wells. Insomuch that the small quantity of water which we found, was sparingly to be kept; for that which would scarce suffice us for five days, we were constrained to keep for ten. But if I should commit to writing all things worthy of memory, a whole year were not sufficient for me. The land of negroes is extreme hot, having some store of moisture also, by reason of the river of Niger running through the midst thereof. All places adjoining upon Niger do mightily abound both with cattle & corn. No trees I saw there but only certain great ones, bearing a kind of bitter fruit like unto a chestnut, which in their language is called Goron. The fruit called Goron. Cocos. 〈◊〉. Onions. Likewise in the same regions grow Cocos, cucumbers, onions, and such kind of herbs and fruits in great abundance. There are no mountains at all either in Libya or in the land of Negroes: howbeit divers fens and lakes there are; which (as men report) the inundation of Niger hath left behind it. Neither are the woods of the said regions altogether destitute of Elephants and other strange beasts; whereof we will make relation in their due place. What natural impressions and motions the air of Africa is subject unto; and what effects ensue thereupon. THroughout the greatest part of Barbary stormy and cold weather begin commonly about the midst of October. But in December and januarie the cold groweth somewhat more sharp in all places: howbeit this happeneth in the morning only, but so gently and remissly, that no man careth greatly to warm himself by the fire. February somewhat mitigateth the cold of winter, but that so inconstantly, that the weather changeth sometime five and sometime six times in one day. In March the north and west winds usually blow, which cause the trees to be adorned with blossoms. In April all fruits attain to their proper form and shape, insomuch that cherries are commonly ripe about the end of April and the beginning of Mayin the midst of May they gather their figs: and in mid-Iune their grapes are ripe in many places. Likewise their pears, their sweet quinces and their damascens attain unto sufficient ripeness in the months of june and julie. Their figs of Autumn may be gathered in August; howbeit they never have so great plenty of figs and peaches, as in September. By the midst of August they usually begin to dry their grapes in the sun, where of they make reisins. Which if they cannot finish in September, by reason of unseasonable weather, of their grapes as then ungathered they use to make wine and must, especially in the province of Rifa, as we will in due place signify more at large. In the midst of October they take in their honey, and gather their pomegranates and quinces. In The olives of Africa. November they gather their olives, not climbing up with ladders nor plucking them with their hands, according to the custom of Europe; for the trees of Mauritania and Caesarea are so tall, that no ladder is long ynongh to reach unto the fruit. And therefore their olives being full ripe, they climb the trees, beating them off the boughs with certain long poles, albeit they know this kind of beating to be most hurtful unto the said trees. Sometimes they have great plenty of olives in Africa, and sometimes as great scarcity. Certain great olive-trees there are, the olives whereof are eaten ripe by the inhabitants, because they are not so fit for oil. No year falls out to be so unseasonable, but that they have three months in the spring always temperate. They begin their spring upon the fifteenth day of February, accounting the eighteenth of May for the end thereof: all which time they have most pleasant weather. But if from the five and twentieth of Raine signifying plenty or 〈◊〉. April, to the fifth of May they have no rain fall, they take it as a sign of ill luck. And the rainwater which falleth all the time aforesaid they call Naisan, that is, water blessed of God. Some store it up in vessels, most religiously keeping it, as an holy thing. Their summer lasteth till the sixteenth of August; all which time they have most hot and clear weather. Except perhaps some showers of rain fall in july and August, which do so infect the air, that great plague and most pestilent fevers ensue thereupon; with which plague whosoever is infected, most hardly escapeth death. Their Autumn they reckon from the 17. of August to the 16. of November; having commonly in the months of August and September not such extreme heat as before. Howbeit all the time between the 15. of August and the 15. of September is called by them the furnace of the whole year, for that it bringeth figs, quinces, and such kind of fruits to their full maturity. From the 15. of November they begin their winter-season, continuing the same till the 14. day of February. So soon as winter cometh, they begin to till their ground which lieth in the plains: but upon the mountains they go to plough in October. The Africans are most certainly persuaded that every year containeth forty extreme hot days, beginning upon the 12. of june; and again so many days extreme cold, beginning from the 12. of December. Their Aequinoctia are upon the 16. of March, and the 16. of September. For their Solstitia they account the 16. of june and the 16. of December. These rules they do most strictly observe, as well in husbandry and navigation, as in searching out the houses and true places of the planets: and these instructions, with other such like they teach their young children first of all. Many countrie-people and husbandmen there be in Africa, The peasants and unlearned people of Africa cunning in Astrology. who knowing (as they say) never a letter of the book, will notwithstanding most learnedly dispute of Astrology, & allege most profound reasons & arguments for themselves. But whatsoever skill they have in the art of Astrology, they first learned the same of the Latins: yea they give those very names unto their months which the Latins do. Moreover they have extant among them a certain great book divided into three volumes, which they call The treasury or storehouse of husbandry. This book was then translated out of Latin into their tongue, when Mansor was Lord of Granada. In the said Treasury are all things contained which may seem in any wise to concern husbandry; as namely, the changes and variety of times, the manner of sowing, with a number of such like particulars, which (I think) at this day the Latin tongue itself, whereout these things were first translated, doth not contain. Whatsoever either the Africans or the mahometans have, which seemeth to appertain in any wise to their law or religion, they make their computation thereof altogether according to the course of the moon. Their year is divided into 354. days: for unto six months they The year of the Arabians and Africans. allot 30. days, and unto the other six but 29; all which being added into one sum do produce the number aforesaid: wherefore their year differeth eleven days from the year of the Latins. They have at divers times festival days, and fasts. About the end of Autumn, for all winter, and a great part of the spring they are troubled with boisterous winds, with hail, with terrible thunder and lightning: yea than it snoweth much in some places of Barbary. The eastern, southern, and southeasterne winds blowing in May and june, do very much hurt there: for they spoil the corn, and hinder the fruit from coming to ripeness. Their corn likewise is greatly appaired by snow, especially such as falleth in the daytime, when it beginneth to flower. Upon the mountains of Atlas they divide the year into The year divided into two seasons onély, upon the mountains of Atlas. two parts only: for their winter continueth from October to April; and from April to October they account it summer: neither is there any day throughout the whole year, wherein the tops of those mountains are not covered with snow. In Numidia the year runneth away very swiftly: for they reap their corn in May, and in October they gather their dates: but from the midst of September they have winter till the beginning of 〈◊〉. But if September falleth out to be rainy, they are like to lose most part of their dates. All the fields of Numidia require watering from the rivers; but if the mountains of Atlas have no rain fall upon them, the Numidian rivers wax dry, and so the fields are destitute of watering. October being destitute of rain, the husbandman hath no hope to cast his seed into the ground; and he despaireth likewise, if it rain not in April. But their dates prosper more without rain, whereof the Numidians have greater plenty then of corn. For albeit they have some store of corn, yet can it scarcely suffice them for half the year. Howbeit, if they have good increase of dates, they cannot want abundance of corn, which is sold unto them by the Arabians for dates. If in the Libyan deserts there fall out change of weather about the midst of October; & if it continue raining there all December, januarie, and some part of February, it is wonderful what abundance of grass and milk it bringeth forth. Then may you find divers lakes in all places and many fens throughout Libya; wherefore this is the meetest time for the Barbarie-merchants to travel to the land of negroes. Here all kind of fruits grow sooner ripe, if they have moderate showers about the end of july. Moreover the land of negroes receiveth by rain neither any benefit, nor yet any damage at all. For the river Niger together with the water which falleth from certain mountains doth so moisten their grounds, that no places can be devised to be more fruitful: for that which Nilus is to Egypt, the same is Niger to the land of Negors: for it increaseth like Nilus The increase of the rivers of Niger & Nilu. from the fifteenth of june the space of forty days after, and for so many again it decreaseth. And so at the increase of Niger, when all places are overflown with water, a man may in a bark pass over all the land of Negroes, albeit not without great peril of drowning; as in the fifth part of this treatise we will declare more at large. Of the length and shortness of the Africans lives. ALl the people of Barbary by us before mentioned live unto 65. or 70. years of age, and few or none exceed that number. Howbeit in the foresaid mountains I saw some which had lived an hundred years, and others which affirmed themselves to be older; whose age was most healthful and lusty. Yea some you shall find here of fourscore years of age, who are sufficiently strong and able to exercise husbandry, to dress vines, and to serve in the wars; insomuch that young men are oftentimes inferior unto them. In Numidia, that is to say, in the land of dates, they live a long time: howbeit they lose their teeth very soon, and their eyes wax wonderfully dim. Which infirmities are likely to be incident unto them, first because they continually feed upon dates, the sweetness and natural quality whereof doth by little and little pull out their teeth: and secondly the dust and sand, which is tossed up and down the air with eastern winds entering into their eyes, doth at last miserably weaken and spoil their eyesight. The inhabitants of Libya are of a shorter life; but those which are most strong and healthful among them live oftentimes till they come to threescore years; albeit they are slender and lean of body. The Negroes commonly live the shortest time of all the rest: howbeit they are always strong & lusty, having their teeth sound even till their dying day: yet is there no nation under heaven more prone to venery; unto which vice also the Libyans and Numidians are to too much addicted. To be short, the Barbarians are the weakest people of them all. What kinds of diseases the Africans are subject unto. THE children, and sometimes the ancient women of this region are subject unto baldness or unnatural shedding of hair; which disease they can hardly be cured of. They are likewise oftentimes troubled with the headache, which usually afflicteth them without any ague joined therewith. Many of them are tormented with the toothache, which (as some think) they are the more subject unto, because immediately after hot pottage they drink cold water. They are oftentimes vexed with extreme pain of the stomach, which ignorantly they call, the pain of the hart. They are likewise daily molested with inward gripings and infirmities over their whole body, which is thought to proceed of continual drinking of water. Yea they are 〈◊〉 subject unto bone-aches and gouts, by reason that they sit commonly upon the bare ground, and never wear any shoes upon their feet. Their chief gentlemen and noblemen prove gouty oftentimes with immoderate drinking of wine and eating of dainty meats. Some with eating of olives, nuts, and such course fare, are for the most part infected with the scuruies. Those which are of a sanguine complexion are greatly troubled with the cough, because that in the spring-season they sit too much upon the ground. And upon fridays I had no small sport and recreation to go and see them. For upon this day the people flock to church in great numbers to hear their 〈◊〉 sermons. Now if any one in the sermon-tile falls a neezing, all the whole multitude will sneeze with him for company, and so they make such a noise, that they never leave, till the sermon be quite done; so that a man shall reap but little knowledge by any of their sermons. If any of Barbary be infected with the disease commonly called the French pox; they die thereof for the most part, and are seldom cured. This disease beginneth with a kind of anguish and swelling, and at The French disease. length breaketh out into sores. Over the mountains of Atlas, and throughout all Numidia and Libya they scarcely know this disease. Insomuch that oftentimes the parties infected travel forthwith into Numidia or the land of Negroes, in which places the air is so temperate, that only by remaining there they recover their perfect health, and 〈◊〉 home sound into their own country: which I saw many do with mine own eyes; who without the help of any physician or medicine, except the foresaid wholesome air, were restored to their former health. Not so much as the name of this malady was ever known unto the Africans, before 〈◊〉 the king of Castille expelled all jews out of Spain; after the return of which jews When and by what means the French 〈◊〉 was brought into Africa. into Africa, certain unhappy and lewd people lay with their wives; and so at length the disease spread from one to another, over the whole region: insomuch that scarce any one family was free from the same. Howbeit, this they were most certainly persuaded of, that the same disease came first from Spain; wherefore they (for want of a better name) do call it, The Spanish pox. Notwithstanding at Tunis and over all Italy it is called the French disease. It is so called likewise in Egypt and Syria: for there it is used as a common proverb of cursing; The French pox take you. Amongst the Hernia or the disease called 〈◊〉 or the rupture. Barbarians the disease called in Latin Hernia is not so common; but in Egypt the people are much troubled therewith. For some of the Egyptians have their cod oftentimes so swollen, as it is incredible to report. Which infirmity is thought to be so common among them, because they eat so much gum, and salt cheese. Some of their children are subject unto the falling sickness; but when they grow to any stature, they are free from that disease. This falling sickness likewise possesseth the women of Barbary, and of the land of Negroes; who, to excuse it, say that they are taken with a spirit. In Barbary the plague is rife every tenth, fifteenth, or twentieth year, whereby great numbers of people are consumed; for they have no cure for the same, but only to rub the plague-sore with certain ointments made of Armenian earth. In Numidia they are infected with the plague Earth of 〈◊〉. scarce once in an hundred years. And in the land of Negroes they know not the name of this disease: because they never were subject thereunto. The commendable actions and virtues of the Africans. THose Arabians which inhabit in Barbary or upon the coast of the Mediterran sea, are greatly addicted unto the study of good arts and sciences: and those things which concern their law and religion are esteemed by them in the first place. Moreover they have been heretofore most studious of the Mathematics, of Philosophy, and of Astrology: but these arts (as it is aforesaid) were four hundred years ago, utterly destroyed and taken away by the chief professors of their law. The inhabitants of cities do most religiously observe and 〈◊〉 those things which appertain unto their religion: yea they honour those doctors and priests, of whom they learn their law, as if they were petie-gods. Their Churches they frequent very diligently, to the end they may repeat certain prescript and formal prayers; most superstitiously persuading themselves that the same day wherein they make their prayers, it is not lawful for them to wash certain of their members, when as at other times they will wash their whole bodies. Whereof we will (by God's help) discourse more at large in the second Book of this present treatise, when we shall fall into the mentioning of Mahumet and of his religion. Moreover those which inhabit Barbary are of great cunning & dexterity for building & for mathematical inventions, which a man may easily conjecture by their artificial works. Most honest people they are, and destitute of all fraud and guile; not only embracing all simplicity and truth, but also practising the same throughout the whole course of their lives: albeit certain Latin authors, which have written of the same regions, are far otherwise of opinion. Likewise they are most strong and valiant people, especially those which dwell upon the mountains. The Moors are a people of great fidelity. They keep their covenant most faithfully; insomuch that they had rather die then break promise. No nation in the world is so subject unto jealousy; for they will rather lose their lives, than put up any disgrace in the behalf of their women. So desirous they are of riches and honour, that therein no other people can go beyond them. They travel in a manner over the whole world to exercise traffic. For they are continually to be seen in Egypt, in AEthiopia, in Arabia, Persia, India, and Turkey: and whithersoever they go, they are most honourably esteemed of: for none of them will profess any art, unless he hath attained unto great exactness and perfection therein. They have always been much delighted with all kind of civility and modest behaviour: and it is accounted heinous among them for any man to utter in company, any bawdy or unseemly word. They have always in mind this sentence of a grave author; Give place to thy superior. If any youth in presence of his father, his uncle, or any other of his kindred, doth sing or talk aught of love matters, he is deemed to be worthy of grievous punishment. Whatsoever lad or youth there lighteth by chance into any company which discourseth of love, no sooner heareth nor understandeth what their talk tendeth unto, but immediately he withdraweth himself from among them. These are the things which we thought most worthy of relation as concerning the civility, humanity, and upright dealing of the Barbarians: let us now proceed unto the residue. Those Arabians which dwell in tents, that is to say, which bring up cattle, are of a more liberal and civil disposition: to wit, they are in their kind as devout, valiant, patient, courteous, hospital, and as honest in life and conversation as any other people. They be most faithful observers of their word and promise: insomuch that the people, which before we said to dwell in the mountains, are greatly stirred up with emulation of their virtues. Howbeit the said mountainers, both for learning, for virtue, and for religion, are thought much inferior to the Numidians; albeit they have little or no knowledge at all in natural philosophy. They are reported likewise to be most 〈◊〉 warriors, to be valiant, and exceeding lovers and practisers of all humanity. Also, the Moors and Arabians inhabiting Libya are somewhat civil of behaviour, being plain dealers, void of dissimulation, favourable to strangers, and lovers of simplicity. Those which we before named white, or tawny Moors, are most steadfast in friendship: as likewise they indifferently and favourably esteem of other nations: and wholly endeavour themselves in this one thing, namely, that they may lead a most pleasant and jocund life. Moreover they maintain most learned professors of liberal arts, and such men as are most devout in their religion. Neither is there any people in all Africa that lead a more happy and honourable life. What vices the foresaid Africans are subject unto. Never was there any people or nation so perfectly endued with virtue, but that they had their contrary faults and blemishes: now therefore let us consider, whether the vices of the Africans do surpass their virtues & good parts. Those which we named the inhabitants of the cities of Barbary are somewhat needy and covetous, being also very proud and highminded, and wonderfully addicted unto wrath; insomuch that (according to the proverb) they will deeply engrave in marble any injury be it never so small, & will in no wise blot it out of their remembrance. So rustical they are & void of good manners, that scarcely can any stranger obtain their familiarity and friendship. Their wits are but mean; and they are so credulous, that they will believe matters impossible, which are told them. So ignorant are they of natural philosophy, that they imagine all the effects and operations of nature to be extraordinary and divine. They observe no certain order of living nor of laws. Abounding exceedingly with choler, they speak always with an angry and loud voice. Neither shall you walk in the daytime in any of their streets, but you shall see commonly two or three of them together by the ears. By nature they are a vile and base people, being no better accounted of by their governors then if they were dogs. They have neither judges nor lawyers, by whose wisdom and counsel they ought to be directed. They are utterly unskilful in trades of merchandise, being destitute of bankers and money-changers: wherefore a merchant can do nothing among them in his absence, but is himself constrained to go in person, whithersoever his wares are carried. No people under heaven are more addicted unto covetise then this nation: neither is there (I think) to be found among them one of an hundred, who for courtesy, humanity, or devotions sake, will vouchsafe any entertainment upon a stranger. Mindful they have always been of injuries, but most forgetful of benefits. Their minds are perpetually possessed with vexation and strife, so that they will seldom or never show themselves tractable to any man; the cause whereof is supposed to be; for that they are so greedily addicted unto their filthy lucre, that they never could attain unto any kind of civility or good behaviour. The shepherds of that region live a miserable, toilsome, wretched and beggarly life: they are a rude people, and (as a man may say) borne and bred to theft, deceit, and brutish manners. Their young men may go a wooing to divers maids, till such time as they have sped of a wife. Yea, the father of the maid most friendly welcommeth her suitor; so that I think scarce any noble or gentleman among them can choose a virgin for his spouse: albeit, so soon as any woman is married, she is quite forsaken of all her suitors; who then seek out other new paramours for their liking. Concerning their religion, the greater part of these people are neither mahometans, jews, nor Christians; and hardly shall you find so much as a spark of piety in any of them. They have no churches at all, nor any kind of prayers, but being utterly estranged from all godly devotion, they lead a savage and beastly life: and if any man chanceth to be of a better disposition (because they have no lawgivers nor teacher's among them) he is constrained to follow the example of other men's lives & manners. All the Numidians being most ignorant of natural, domestical, & commonwealth-matters, are principally addicted unto treason, treachery, murder, theft, and robbery. This nation, because it is most slavish, will right gladly accept of any service among the Barbarians, be it never so vile or contemptible. For some will take upon them to be dung-farmers, others to be scullions, some others to be ostlers, and such like servile occupations. Likewise the inhabitants of Libya live a brutish kind of life; who neglecting all kinds of good arts and sciences, do wholly apply their minds unto theft and violence. Never as yet had they any religion, any laws, or any good form of living; but always had, and ever will have a most miserable and distressed life. There cannot any treachery or villainy be invented so damnable, which for lucre's sake they dare not attempt. They spend all their days either in most lewd practices, or in hunting, or else in warfare; neither wear they any shoes nor garments. The Negroes likewise lead a beastly kind of life, being utterly destitute of the use of reason, of dexterity of wit, and of all arts. Yea they so behave themselves, as if they had continually lived in a forest among wild beasts. They have great swarms of harlots among them; whereupon a man may easily conjecture their manner of living; except 〈◊〉 conversation perhaps be somewhat more tolerable, who dwell in the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 and cities: for it is like that they are somewhat more addicted to 〈◊〉 Neither am I ignorant, how much mine own credit is 〈◊〉, when The author of this work his Apology for the former relation. I myself write so homely of Africa, unto which country 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 debted both for my birth, and also for the best part of my education: Howbeit in this regard I seek not to excuse myself, but only to appeal unto the duty of an historiographer, who is to set down the plain truth in all places, and is blame-woorthie for flattering or favouring of any person. And this is the cause that hath moved me to describe all things so plainly without glozing or dissimulation: wherefore here I am to request the gentle Reader friendly to accept of this my most true discourse, (albeit not adorned with fine words, and artificial eloquence) as of certain unknown strange matters. Wherein how indifferent and sincere I have showed myself, it may in few words appear by that which followeth. It is reported of a lewd countryman of ours, that being convicted of some heinous crime, he was adjudged to be severely beaten for it. Howbeit the day following, when the 〈◊〉 came to do his business, the malefactor remembered that certain years before, he had some acquaintance and familiarity with him: which made him to presume, that he should find more favour at his hands, than a mere stranger. But he was foully 〈◊〉; for the executioner used him no better, then if he had never known him. Wherefore this caitiff at the first exclaiming upon his executioner, oh (saith he) my goodfriend, what maketh you so stern, as not to acknowledge our old acquaintance? Hereupon the executioner beating him more cruelly than before: friend (quoth he) in such business as this I use to be mindful of my duty, and to show no favour at all: and so continually laying on, he ceased not, till the judicial sentence was fulfilled. It was (doubtless) a great argument of impartial dealing, when as respect of former friendship could take no place. Wherefore I thought good to record all the particulars aforesaid; lest that describing vices only I should seem to flatter them, with whom I am now presently conversant; or extolling only the virtues of the Africans, I might hereafter be said to sue for their favour (which I have of purpose eschewed) to the end that I might have more free access unto them. Moreover, may it please you for this purpose to hear another resemblance or similitude. There was upon a time a most wily bird, so endued by nature, that she could live as well with the fishes of the sea, as with the fowls of the air; wherefore she was rightly called Amphibia. This bird being summoned before the king of birds to pay her yearly tribute, determined forthwith to change her element, and to delude the king; and so flying out of the air, she drenched herself in the Ocean sea. Which strange accident the fishes wondering at, came flocking about Amphibia, saluting her, and ask her the cause of her coming. Good fishes (quoth the bird) know you not, that all things are turned so upside down, that we wot not how to live securely in the air? Our tyrannical king (what fury haunts him, I know not) commanded me to be 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 to death, whereas no silly bird respected ever his commodity as 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 one. Which most unjust edict I no sooner heard of, but presently (〈◊〉 fishes) I came to you for refuge. Wherefore vouchsafe me (I beseech 〈◊〉) some odd corner or other to hide my head in; and then I may justly say, that I have found more friendship among strangers, then ever I did in mine own native country. With this speech the fishes were so persuaded, that Amphibia stayed a whole year among them, not paying one penny or halfpenny. At the years end the king of fishes began to demand his tribute, insomuch that at last the bird was 〈◊〉 to pay. Great reason it is (saith the bird) that each man should have his due, and for my part I am contented to do the duty of a loyal subject. These words were no sooner spoken, but she suddenly spread her wings, and up she mounted into the air. And so this bird, to avoid yearly exactions and tributes, would eftsoons change her element. Out of this fable I will infer no other moral, but that all men do most affect that place, where they find least damage and inconvenience. For mine own part, when I hear the Africans evil spoken of, I will affirm myself to be one of Granada: and when I perceive the nation of Granada to be discommended, then will I profess myself to be an African. But herein the Africans shall be the more beholding unto me; for that I will only record their principal and notorious vices, omitting their smaller and more tolerable faults. JOHN LEO HIS SECOND BOOK OF the History of Africa, and of the memorable things contained therein. Having in my first book made mention of the cities, bounds, divisions, and some other notable and memorable things contained in Africa; we will in this second part more fully, particularly, largely, and distinctly describe sundry provinces, towns, mountains, situations of places, laws, rites, and customs of people. Insomuch that we will leave nothing untouched, which may any way serve to the illustrating and perfecting of this our present discourse. Beginning therefore at the west part of Africa, we will in this our geographical history proceed eastward, till we come to the borders of Egypt. And all this our narration following we will divide into seven books; whereunto (God willing) we purpose to annex the eighth, which shall entreat of rivers, of living creatures, of trees, of plants, of fruits, of shrubs, and of such other most delightful matters. Of the region of Hea lying upon the west part of Africa. HEa being one of the provinces of Maroco is bounded westward and northward with the main Ocean, southward with the mountains of Atlas, and eastward with the river which they call 〈◊〉. This river springeth out of the foresaid mountain, discharging itself at length into the river of Tensift, and dividing Hea from the province next adjacent. Of the situation and description of Hea. THis region of Hea is an uneeven and rough soil, full of rocky mountains, shady woods, and chrystall-streames in all places; being wonderfully rich, and well stored with inhabitants. They have in the said region great abundance of goats and asses, but not such plenty of sheep, oxen, and horses. All kind of fruits are very scarce among them, not, that the ground is uncapable of fruit, but because the people are so rude and ignorant in this behalf, that very few of them are skilful in planting, graffing, or pruning of trees. Whereof I was easily persuaded: for I remember that I found among some gardiner's of Hea great abundance of fruits. Of grain they have not much plenty, except it be of barley, mill, and panic. They have great abundance of honey, which they use in stead of ordinary food, but the wax they cast away, little regarding it, because they know not the value thereof. Likewise there are found in this region certain thorny trees bearing a gross kind of fruit, not unlike unto those olives which are brought unto us from Spain: the said fruit they call in their language Arga. Of this fruit they make a kind of oil, being The fruit 〈◊〉 Arga. of a fulsome and strong savour, which they use notwithstanding for sauce and for lamps. The manner of living, and the food of the people of 〈◊〉. THis people for the most part eateth barlie-bread unleavened, which is like rather unto a cake, then to a loaf: this bread is baked in a kind of earthen baking-pan, somewhat like unto that wherewith in Italy they use to cover iuncats and dainty dishes: neither shall you find many in Hea which eat oven-bread. They use also a certain unsavoury and base kind of meat, which in their language is called Elhasid, and is made in manner 〈◊〉. following: they cast barlie-meale into boiling water, continually tempering and stirring the same about with a stick, till they perceive it be sufficiently sodden. Then setting this pap or hastie-pudding upon the table, and pouring in some of their countrie-oile, all the whole family stand round about the platter, and eat the said pap not with spoons, but with their hands and fingers. Howbeit in the spring and summer season they temper the said meal with milk, and cast in butter in stead of oil: and this kind of meat is not usual among them, but only at supper. For in winter time they break their fast with bread and honey; and in summer with milk, butter, and bread. Moreover sometimes they use to eat sodden flesh, whereunto some add onions, other beans, and some other, a kind of seasoning or sauce called by them 〈◊〉. With them tables and tablecloths are quite out of use, in stead whereof they spread a certain round mat upon the ground, which serveth among this rude people both for table, cloth, and all. The apparel and customs of the foresaid people of Hea. THE greatest part of them are clad in a kind of cloath-garment made of wool after the manner of a coverlet, called in their language, Elchise, and not unlike unto those coverlets or blankets which the Italians lay upon their beds. In these kind of mantles they wrap themselves; and then are they girt with a woollen girdle, not about their waste, but about their hips. They have also a certain piece of cloth of ten handfuls in length and two in breadth, wherewith they use to adorn their heads: these kind of ornaments or head-tires they die with the juice of walnut-tree-rootes, being so put upon their heads, that their crowns are always bare. None of them wear any cap, except it be an old man, or a man of learning; albeit learned men are very rare among them: which caps of theirs are double and round, not much unlike to the caps of certain Physicians in Italy. You shall seldom find any linen shirts or smocks among this people; and that (as I suppose) either because their soil will yield no flax nor hemp, or else for that they have none skilful in the art of weaving. Their seats whereon they sit, are nought else but certain mats made of hair and rushes. For beds they use a certain kind of hairy flockbed or mattress; some of which beds are ten else in length, some more, and some less, yea some you shall find of twenty else long, but none longer: one part of these mattresses they lie upon instead of a couch, and with the residue they cover their bodies as it were with 〈◊〉 and coverlets. In the Springtime always they lay the hairy side next unto their bodies, because it is somewhat warmer; but in Sommer-time not regarding that side, they turn the smooth side upward, and thereon they rest themselves. Likewise of such base and harsh stuff they make their cushions: being much like unto the stuff which is brought hither out of Albania and Turkey, to serve for horse-cloathes: The women of Hea go commonly with their faces uncovered, using for their housewifery turned vessels and cups of wood: their platters, dishes, and other their kitchen-vessels be for the most part of earth. You may easily discern which of them is married, and who is not: for an unmarried man must always keep his beard shaven, which, after he be once married, he suffereth to grow at length. The said region bringeth forth no great plenty of horses, but those that it doth bring forth, are so nimble and full of metal, that they will climb like cats over the steep and craggy mountains. These horses are always unshod: and the people of this region use to till their ground with no other cattle, but only with horses and asses. You shall here find great store of dear, of wild goats, and of hares: Howbeit the people are no whit delighted in hunting. Which is the cause (as I think) why the said beasts do so multiply. And it is somewhat strange, that so many rivers running through the country, they should have such scarcity of watermils: but the reason is, because every household almost have a wooden mill of their own, whereat their women usually grind with their hands. No good learning nor liberal arts are here to be found; except it be a little skill in the laws, which some few challenge unto themselves; otherwise you shall find not so much as any shadow of virtue among them. They have neither Physician nor Surgeon of any learning or account But if a disease or infirmity befall any of them, they presently sear or cauterize Cauterizing. the sick party with red hot irons, even as the Italians use their horses. Howbeit some chirurgeons there are among them, whose duty and occupation consisteth only in circumcising of their male children. They make no soap in all the country, but instead thereof they use to wash with lee made of ashes. They are at continual war, but it is civil and among themselves, insomuch that they have no leisure to fight against other nations. Whosoever will travel into a 〈◊〉 country must take either a harlot, or a wife, or a religious man of the contrary part, to bear him company. They have no regard at all of justice, especially in those mountains which are destitute of governors or princes: yea even the principal men of this very region of Hea, which dwell within towns and cities, dare scarce prescribe any law or good order unto the people, so great is their insolency in all places. The cities of Hea are few in number, but they have great store of villages, towns, and most strong castles: whereof (God willing) we will hereafter speak more at large. Of Tednest one of the cities of Hea. THE ancient city of Tednest was built by the Africans upon a most beautiful and large plain, which they environed with a lofty wall built of brick and lime. Likewise a certain river running forth of the city serveth to fill up the wall ditch. In this city are certain merchants that sell cloth, wherein the people of the same place are clad. Here is likewise uttered a kind of cloth which is brought thither out of Portugal: howbeit they will admit no artificers, but tailors, butchers, carpenters, and a few goldsmiths' which are jews. In this city there are no inns, stoves, nor wine-taverns: so that whatsoever merchant goes thither, must seek out some of his acquaintance to remain withal: but if he hath no friends 〈◊〉 acquaintance in the town, than the principal inhabitants there cast lots who should entertain the strange merchant: insomuch that no stranger, be he never so mean, shall Their manner of entertaining strangers at Tednest. want friendly entertainment, but is always sumptuously and honourably accepted of. But whosoever is received as a guest, must at his departure bestow some gift upon his host in token of thankfulness, to the end he may be more welcome at his next return. Howbeit if the said stranger be no merchant, he may choose what great man's house he will to lodge in, being bound at his departure to no recompense nor gift. To be short, if any beggar or poor pilgrim passé the same way, he hath some 〈◊〉 provided for him in a certain hospital, which was founded only for the relief of poor people, and is maintained at the common charge of the city. In the midst of the city stands an ancient temple, being most sumptuously built and of an huge bigness, which was thought to be founded at the very same time when as the King of Maroco bare rule in those places. This temple hath a great cistern standing in the midst thereof, and it hath many priests and such kind of people which give attendance thereunto, and store it with things necessary. In this city likewise are divers other temples, which, 〈◊〉 they are but little, yet be they most cleanly and decently kept. There are in this city about an hundred families of jews, who pay no yearly tribute at all, but only bestow each of them some gratuity upon this or that nobleman, whom they think to favour them most, to the end they may enjoy their favour still: and the greatest part of the said city is inhabited with jews. These jews have certain minting-houses wherein they stamp silver coin, of which 170. Asper's (as they call them) do weigh one ounce, being like unto the common coin of Hungary, saving that this Asper is square, and the Hungarian coin is round. The inhabitants of Tednest are free from all tributes & yearly taxations: howbeit if any sum of money be wanting for the erection of a public building, or for any other common use, the people is forthwith assembled, and each man must give according to his ability. This city was left desolate in the year 918. of the Hegeira. At what time all the citizens Tednest left desolate. thereof fled unto the mountains, and from thence to Maroco. The reason they say was, because the inhabitants were informed that their next neighbours the Arabians joined in league with the Portugal Captains (who as then held the town of Azaphi) and promised to deliver Tednest into the hands of the Christians, which thing so daunted the citizens, that they presently sought to save themselves by flight. Myself (I remember) saw this city utterly ruined and defaced, the walls thereof being laid even with the ground, the houses being destitute of inhabitants, and nothing at that time to be there seen, but only the nests of ravens and of other birds. All this I saw in the 920. year of the Hegeira. Of Teculeth a town of Hea. Upon the foot of an hill eighteen miles Eastward from Tednest stands a town called by the Africans Teculeth, and containing about one thousand households. Hard by this town runneth a certain river, on both sides whereof are most pleasant gardens, and all kinds of trees. Within the walls of the said town are many pits or wells, whereout they draw most clear and pleasant water. Here also is to be seen a most stately and beautiful temple; as likewise four hospitals and a monastery of religious persons. The inhabitants of this town are far wealthier than they of Tednest; for they have a most famous port upon the Ocean sea, commonly called by merchants, Goz. They have likewise great abundance of corn and pulse, which grow in the fruitful fields adjacent. These also of Teculeth send wax into Portugal to be sold: and they are very curious in their apparel 〈◊〉. and about the furniture of their 〈◊〉. When I myself was at Teculeth, I found there a certain nobleman, who was the precedent or chief of their senate: this nobleman's duty was both to procure tribute which was yearly to be paid unto the Arabians, and also to make atonement and reconciliation between them, when they were at odds. This man had gathered great riches unto himself, which he employed rather to purchase friends, then to fill his coffers: most liberal he was unto the poor, most bountiful and favourable unto all his citizens; insomuch that all men did reverence and honour unto him, as unto their father and best protector. Of whose courtesy I myself also made trial: and being not meanly but very sumptuously entertained by him, I remained with him for a certain time, and read in his house divers histories of African matters. This good man together with his son was slain in a skirmish against the Portugals: which was done, according to our computation, in the year of the Hegeira 923. that is to say, in the year of our Lord 1514. After which misfortune Teculeth destroyed by the Portugals. we heard, that the city was razed, that the people were part of them put to flight, part lead captive, and the residue 〈◊〉 by the enemy: all which particulars we have declared more at large in that Book, which is now lately 1514. printed and published concerning African affairs. Of Hadecchis a town of Hea. THE city of Hadecchis being situate upon a plain, standeth eight miles Southward of Teculeth: it containeth seven hundred families: and the walls, churches, and houses throughout this whole city are all built of free stone. Through the midst of the town runneth a large and fair stream, having many vines & galleries on both sides thereof. There be many jews artificers in this city. The citizens here go somewhat decently appareled: their horses are good: most of them exercise merchandise: also they stamp a kind of coin; and they have certain yearly fairs or martes, whereunto the nations adjoining do usually resort. Here is to be sold great store of cattle, of butter, oil, iron, and cloth, and their said mart lasteth fifteen days. Their women are very beautiful, white of colour, fat, comely, and trim. But the men bear a most savage mind, being so extremely possessed with jealousy, that whomsoever they find but talking with their wives, they presently go about to murder them. They have no judges nor learned men among them, nor any which can assign unto the citizens any functions and magistracies according to their worthiness: so that he rules like a king that excelleth the residue in wealth. For matters of religion, they have certain Mahometan priests to administer them. Who neither pay tribute nor yearly custom, even as they whom we last before mentioned. here I was entertained by a certain courteous and liberal minded priest, who was exceedingly delighted with Arabian Poetry. Wherefore being so lovingly entertained, I read unto him a certain brief treatise as touching the same argument: which he accepted so kindly at my hands, that he would not suffer me to depart without great and bountiful rewards. From hence I traveled unto Maroco. And afterward I heard that this town also, in the year of the Hegeira Hadecchis sacked by the Portugals. 922. was sacked by the Portugals, and that the inhabitants were all fled into the next mountains, and the very same year I returned home to visit my 1513. native country, which was in the year of our Lord 1513. Of Ileusugaghen a town of Hea. THis town is situate upon the top of a certain high mountain which is distant eight miles to the South of Hadecchis: it consisteth of about two hundred families: and by the foot of the hill runneth a small river. here are no gardens at all, nor yet any trees which bear fruit: the reason whereof is (as I suppose) because the inhabitants are such slothful and gross people, that they regard nothing but their barley and their oil. They are at continual war with their next neighbours, which is performed with such monstrous bloodshed and manslaughter, that they deserve rather the name of beasts then of men. They have neither judges, priests, nor lawyers, to prescribe any form of living among them, or to govern their commonwealth: wherefore justice and honesty is quite banished out of their habitations. Those mountains are altogether destitute of fruits: howbe it they abound greatly with honey, which serveth the inhabitants both for food, and for merchandise to sell in the neighbour-countries. And because they know not what service to put their wax unto, they cast it forth, together with the other excrements of honey. The said town of Ileusugaghen hath a very small and narrow chapel, which will scarce contain a hundred persons, whither notwithstanding the people do so slowly resort, that they need not to have any greater; so much do they neglect religion and piety. Whensoever they go abroad, they carry a dagger or a javelin about with them: and you shall often hear of the slaughter of some one or other of their citizens. No people under heaven can be more wicked, treacherous, or lewdly addicted, than this people is. I remember that I myself went once thither with a Seriffo or Mahometan priest, (who made challenge unto the government of Hea) to the end that we might arbitrate certain strifes and contentions: for it were incredible to report, what cruel wars, partly for murders, and partly for robberies, were practised among them. But because the Seriffo had brought no lawyers with him, nor any judges to decide controversies, he would needs, that I should take that office upon me. Immediately the townsmen come flocking about us: one complains that his neighbour hath slain eight of his kindred and family; his neighbour on the contrary allegeth, that the former had slain ten of his family; wherefore, according to the ancient custom, he demandeth to have a sum of money given him. For (saith he) there is some recompense due unto me, sithence ten of my people have been slain, and but eight of this my neighbours. Whereunto the other replied that the said ten persons were justly slain, because they went about by violence to dispossess him of a certain piece of ground which his father had left him by inheritance; but, that his eight were murdered only for unjust revenge, against all equity and law. With these and such like frivolous allegations we spent that whole day, neither could we decide any one controversy. About midnight we saw a great throng of people meet in the marketplace, who made there such a bloody and horrible conflict, that the sight thereof would have affrighted any man, were he never so hard hearted. Wherefore the said Seriffo fearing lest those lewd varlets would make some treacherous conspiracy against him, and thinking it better to depart thence immediately, then to expect the conclusion of that fray, we took our journey from that place to a town called Aghilinghighil. Of the town of Teijeut in Hea. Moreover, the tower of Teijeut standing upon a plain ten miles Westward of Ileusugaghen, containeth about three hundred households. The houses and wall of this town are built of brick. The townsmen exercise husbandry; for their ground is most fertile for barley; albeit it will scarcely yield any other grain. They have pleasant and large gardens, stored with vines, figtrees, and peach-trees: also they have great abundance of goats. About this town are many lions, whereby the townsmen are not a little endamaged: for they pray continually upon their goats and upon other of their cattle. Certain of us upon time coming into these parts for want of a lodging were constrained to repair unto a little cottage which we escried, being so old, that it was in danger of falling: having provided our horses of provender, we stopped up all the doors and passages of the said cottage with thorns and wood, as circumspectly as possibly we could: these things happened in the month of April, at what time they have extreme heat in the same country. Wherefore we ourselves got up to the top of the house, to the end that in our sleep we might be near unto the open air. About midnight we espied two monstrous lions, who were drawn thither by the sent of our horses, and endeavoured to break down that fence of thorns which we had made. Whereupon the horses being put in fear, kept such a neighing, and such a stir, that we misdoubted least the rotten cottage would have fallen, and least ourselves should have become a prey unto the lions. But so soon as we perceived the day begin to break, we forthwith saddled our horses, and hied us unto that place, where we knew the Prince and his army lay. Not long after followed the destruction of this town. For the greater part of the townsmen being slain, the rest were taken by the Portugals, and were carried Teijeut destroyed by the Portugals. as captives into Portugal. This was done in the year of the Hegeira 920 and in the year of our Lord 1513. Of Tesegdelt a town of Hea. THe town of Tesegdelt being situate upon the top of a certain high mountain, and naturally environed with an high rock in stead of a wall, containeth more than eight hundredth families. It is distant from Teijeut southward about twelve miles, and it hath a river running by it, the name whereof I have forgotten. About this town of Tesegdelt are most pleasant gardens and orchards, replenished with all kind of trees, and especially with walnut-trees. The inhabitants are wealthy, having great abundance of horses, neither are they constrained to pay any tribute unto the Arabians. There are continual wars between the Arabians and them, and that with great bloodshed and manslaughter on both parts. The villages lying near unto Tesegdelt do usually carry all their grain thither, lest they should be deprived thereof by the enemy, who maketh daily inroads and invasions upon them. The inhabitants of the foresaid town are much The courtesy of the citizens of Tesegdelt towards strangers. 〈◊〉 unto courtesy and civility; and for liberality and bounty unto strangers, they will suffer themselves to be inferior to none other. At every gate of Tesegdelt stand certain watchmen or warders, which do most lovingly receive all incommers, inquiring of them, whether they have any friends and acquaintance in the town, or no? If they have none, then are they conducted to one of the best Inns of the town, and having had entertainment there, according to their degree and place, they are friendly dismissed: and whatsoever his expenses come to, the stranger pays nought at all, but his charges are defrayed out of the common purse. This people of Tesegdelt are subject also unto jealousy; howbeit they are most faithful keepers of their promise. In the very midst of the town stands a most beautiful and stately temple, whereunto belong a certain number of Mahometan priests. And to the end that justice may be most duly administered among them, they have a very learned judge, who decideth all matters in the common wealth, except criminal causes only. Their fields where they use to sow their corn, are, for the greater part upon the mountains. Unto this very town I traveled with the foresaid Seriffo in the 〈◊〉 of the Hegeira 919. that is to say, in the year of our Lord 1510. A description of the city of Tagtess. THE most ancient city of Tagtess is built round, and standeth upon the top of an hill: on the sides whereof are certain winding steps hewn out of the hard rock. It is about fourteen miles distant from Tesegdelt. By the foot of the said hill runs a river, whereout the women of Tagtess draw their water, neither have the citizens any other drink: and although this river be almost six miles from Tagtess, yet a man would think, looking down from the city upon it, that it were but half a mile distant. The way leading unto the said river being cut out of the rock, in form of a pair of stairs, is very narrow. The citizens of Tagtess are addicted unto theft and robbery, and are at continual war with their neighbours. They have no cornfields, nor any cattle, but only upon the said mountain: they have great store of bores; but such scarcity of horses, that there is not one almost to be found in the whole city. The way through their region is so difficult, that they will suffer none to pass by without a public testimonial. While I 〈◊〉 was in that country, there came such a swarm of Locusts, that they devoured the greatest part of their corns which were as then ripe: insomuch that all the upper part of the ground was covered with Locusts. Which was in the year of the Hegeira 919. that is, in the year of our Lord 1510. The town of Eitdevet. Fifteen miles Southward from Tagtess stands another town called Eitdevet, being built upon a plain, and yet upon the higher ground thereof. It containeth to the number of seven hundred families; and hath in the midst thereof most clear and cool fountains. This town is environed on all sides with rocks and mighty woods. In the said town are jews of all occupations: and so me there are which affirm, that the first inhabitants of this town came by natural descent from King David: but so soon as the Mahometan religion had. infected that place, their own law and religion ceased. here are great store of most cunning lawyers, which are perfectly well seen in the laws and constitutions of that nation: for I remember that I myself saw a very aged man, who could most readily repeat a whole volume written in their language, called by them Elmudevuana, that is to say, the body of the whole law. The said volume is divided into three tomes, wherein all difficult questions are dissolved: together with certain counsels or commentaries of a famous author, which they call 〈◊〉. They have a kind of tribunal or iudgement-hall, wherein all contentions happening between the citizens of this place, and their neighbour-cities, are presently decided and set through. Neither do the said lawyers deal only in commonwealth matters, but also in cases pertaining to religion: albeit in criminal cases the people do not so greatly credit them, for indeed their learning little serveth them for that purpose. Being amongst them, it was my hap to sojourn in the house of a certain lawyer, who was a man of great learning. This lawyer, to the end he might give me more solemn entertainment, would needs invite divers learned men of his own profession to bear us company at supper. After supper, we had many questions propounded: and amongst the residue this was one; namely, Whether any man might justly sell that person for a bondflave, who is nourished by any commodity of the people. There was in company at the same time a certain aged Sire, having a grave beard and a reverend countenance, unto whom each one of them ascribed much honour; him they called in their own language Hegazzare. Which name, when I had heard thrice or four times repeated, I demanded of some that were in presence, what was the true signification thereof. They told me that it signified a butcher: for (say they) as a butcher knoweth right well the true anatomy of every part of a beast; even so can this aged Sire most learnedly dissolve all difficult questions & doubts of law. This people leadeth a most miserable and distressed life: their food is barley bread, oil arganicke, and goates-flesh. They know no use of any other grain but barley. Their women are very beautiful and of a lovely hue: their men be strong and lusty, having hair growing upon their breasts, and being very liberal and exceeding jealous. Of Culeihat Elmuridin, that is to say, The rock of disciples; a castle of Hea. THis Culeihat Elmuridin is a castle built upon the top of a certain high mountain, having round about it divers other mountains of a like height, which are environed with craggy rocks and huge woods. There is no passage unto this castle, but only a certain narrow path upon one side of the mountain. By the one side thereof stands a rock, and upon the other side the mountain of Tesegdelt is within half a mile; and it is distant from Eitdevet almost eighteen miles. This castle was built even in our time by a certain apostata or renouncer of the Mahometan religion, called by them Homar Seijef; who being first a Mahometan preacher unto A pestiferous Mahometan preacher. the people, propounded unto a great number of disciples and sectaries, whom he had drawn to be of his opinion, certain new points of religion. This fellow seeing that he prevailed so with his disciples, that they esteemed him for some petie-god, became of a false preacher a most cruel tyrant, and his government lasted for twelve years. He was the chief cause of the destruction and ruin of the whole province. At length he was slain by his own wife, because he had unlawfully lain with her daughter which she had by her former husband. And then was his perverse and lewd dealing laid open unto all men; for he is reported to have been utterly ignorant of the laws, and of all good knowledge. Wherefore not long after his decease all the inhabitants of the region gathering their forces together, slew every one of his disciples and false sectaries. Howbeit the nephew of the said apostata was left alive; who afterward in the same castle endured a whole years siege of his adversaries, and repelled them, insomuch that they were constrained to depart. Yea even until this day he molesteth the people of Hea, and those which inhabit near unto him, with continual war, living upon robbery and spoil; for which purpose he hath certain horsemen, which are appointed to watch and to pursue travelers, sometimes taking cattle, and sometimes men captives. He hath likewise certain gunner's, who, although travelers be a good distance off (for the common high way standeth almost a mile from the castle) will put them in great fear. Howbeit all people do so deadly hate him, that they will not suffer him to till one foot of ground, or to bear any dominion without the said mountain. This man hath caused his grandfathers body to be honourably buried in his castle, suffering him to be adored of his people, as if he were a god. Passing by that way upon a A treatise written by 〈◊〉 Leo concerning the Mahometan religion. certain time, I escaped their very bullets narrowly. The life, religion & manners of the foresaid Homar Seijef I perfectly learned by a disciple of his, having at large declared the same in a certain brief treatise, which I have written concerning the Mahometan religion. Of Igilingigil a town of Hea. Moreover the Africans in old time built a certain town upon an hill, called by the inhabitants Igilingigil; being distant from Eitdevet about six miles southward, and containing almost four hundred families. In this town are sundry artificers, employing themselves only about things necessary, to the end they may make their best gain & advantage thereby. Their ground is most fertile for barley; as likewise they have great abundance of honey and of oil Arganicke. The passage or way unto this city is very narrow, lying only upon one side of the hill. And it is so hard and difficult, that horses cannot without great labour and peril go upon it. The inhabitants are most valiant people and well exercised in arms, maintaining continual war against the Arabians, and that for the most part with very prosperous success, by reason of the natural and strong situation of the 〈◊〉. A more liberal people than this, you shall hardly find. They generally exercise themselves in making of earthen pots and vessels, which (I think) none of their neighhours thereabout can do. Of Tefethne a port and most famous mart-towne of Hea. near unto the Ocean sea standeth a city, most strong both for situation and building, commonly called Tefethne, being westward of Ingilingigil about forty miles. They say that this town was built by certain Africans, and that it containeth more than six hundred households. Here ships of mean burden may safely harbour themselves; and hither the Portugal merchants resort to buy goats-skins and wax. cornfields they have none, but only certain hills, which yield great increase of barley. near unto this town runs a certain river, whereinto the ships put themselves in tempestuous weather. The town-wall is built of white hewn stone and of brick. They gather their yearly customs and subsidies; all the whole sum whereof is equally distributed among such citizens as are meet for the wars. In this town are great plenty of Mahometan priests and of judges; howbeit, for the inquiry of murder and such like crimes these judges have no authority. For if any kinsman of the slain or wounded party meeteth A punishment of murder. with him that did the fact, he is presently without any judgement to have Legem talionis, that is, like for like, inflicted upon him: but if he escape that, he is banished seven years out of the city: at the end of which seven years the malefactor having paid a certain sum of money to the friends of the wounded or slain party, is afterward received into favour, and accounted among the number of citizens. All the inhabitants of Tefethne are of a most white colour, being so addicted unto friendship and hospitality, that they favour strangers more than their own citizens. They have a most stately and rich hospital; howbeit those which are there placed may for the most part remain in citizens houses. Myself being in company with the Seriffo or Mahometan prelate, continued for the space of three days among this people; which three days seemed three years unto me, both for the incredible number of fleas, and also for the most loathsome and intolerable stench of piss, and of goats dung. For each citizen hath a flock of goats, which they drive in the daytime to pasture, and at night they house them at home in their own habitations, yea even before their chamber-doores. Of the people called Idevacal who inhabit the beginning of mount Atlas. Having hitherto made report of all the cities of Hea, which are worthy of memory, I thought good in this place (to the end that nothing should be wanting in this our discourse, which might delight the reader) to describe the inhabited mountains also. Wherefore the greatest part of the people of Headwelleth upon mountains, some where of being called Idevacal (for so are they named) inhabit upon that part of Atlas, which stretcheth itself from the Ocean sea eastward, as far as Igilingigil; and this ridge of mountains divideth Hea from Sus. The breadth of this mountain is three days journey. For Tefethne, whereat this mountain beginneth from the north, is distant from the town of Messa, where it endeth southward, as far as I could conveniently ride in three days. Whosoever knoweth this region as well as myself, can sufficiently bear me witness, how it is replenished with inhabitants and countrey-villages. Their ordinary food is barley, goates-flesh, and honey. Shirts they wear none at all, nor yet any other garments which are sown together; for there is no man among them which knoweth how to use the needle: but such apparel as they have, hangeth by a knot upon their shoulders. Their women wear silver rings upon their ears, some three, and some more. They have silver buttons of so great a scantling, that each one weigheth an ounce, wherewith they fasten their apparel upon their shoulders, to the end it may not fall off. The nobler and richer sort of people among them wear silver rings upon their fingers and legs, but such as are poor wear rings only of iron or of copper. There are likewise certain horses in this region, being so small of stature and so swift, as it is wonderful. here may you find great plenty of wild goats, hares, and dear, and yet none of the people are delighted in hunting. Many fountains are here to be found, and great abundance of trees, but especially of walnut-trees. The greater part of this people liveth after the Arabians manner, often changing their places of habitation. A kind of daggers they use which are broad and crooked like a woodknife; and their swords are as thick as scythes, wherewith they mow hay. When they go to the wars they carry three or four hunting toils with them. In all the said mountain are neither judges, priests, nor temples to be found. So ignorant they are of learning, that not one among them either loveth or embraceth the same. They are all most lewd and wicked people, and apply their minds unto all kind of villainy. It was told the Seriffo in my presence, that the foresaid mountain was able to afford twenty thousand soldiers for a need. Of the mountain called Demensera. THis mountain also is a part of Atlas, beginning from the mountain last before mentioned, and extending itself eastward for the space of about fifty miles, as far as the mountain of Nifif in the territory of Maroco. And it divideth a good part of Hea from the region of Sus before named. It aboundeth with inhabitants, which are of a most barbarous and savage disposition. Horses they have great plenty: they go to war oftentimes with the Arabians which border upon them: neither will they permit any of the said Arabians to come within their dominions. There are no towns nor castles upon all this mountain: howbeit they have certain villages and cottages, wherein the better sort do hide their heads. Great store of noble men or governors they have in all places, unto whom the residue are very obedient. Their ground yieldeth barley and mill in abundance. They have every where many fountains, which being dispersed over the whole province, do at length issue into that river, which is called in their language Siffaia. Their apparel is somewhat decent: also they possess 〈◊〉 of iron. great quantity of iron, which is from thence transported into other places; and these people are well given to thrift and good husbandry. Great numbers of jews remain in this region, which live as stipendary soldiers under divers princes, & are continually in arms; and they are reputed and called by other jews in Africa Carraum, that is to say, heretics. They have store of box, of mastic, and of high walnut trees. Unto their Argans (for so they call a kind of olives which they have) they put nuts; out of which two simples they express very bitter oil, using it for a sauce to some of their meats, and pouring it into their lamps. I heard divers of their principal men avouch, that they were able to bring into the field siue and twenty thousand most expert soldiers. In my return from Sus they did me exceeding honour, in regard of certain letters, which I delivered unto them from my Lord the Seriffo: and to manifest their good will towards the said Seriffo, they 〈◊〉 me with most ample gifts and gratuities. This was done in the 920. year of the Hegeira, that is to say, in the year of our Lord, 1520. Of the mountain of Iron, commonly called Gebelelhadih. THis mountain is not to be accounted any part of Atlas: for it beginneth northward from the Ocean; and southward it extendeth to the river of Tensift; and divideth Hea from Duccala and Maroco. The inhabitants are called Regraga. Upon this hill are waste deserts, clear fountains, and abundance of honey, and of oil Arganick, but of corn and pulse great scarcity, unless they make provision thereof out of Duccala. Few rich men are here to be found, but they are all most devout and religious after their manner. Upon the top of this mountain are many hermits, which live only upon the fruits of certain trees, and drink water. They are a most faithful and peaceable nation. Whosoever among them is apprehended for theft or any other crime, is forthwith banished the country for certain years. So great is their simplicity, that whatsoever they see the hermits do, they esteem it as a miracle. They are much oppressed with the often invasions of their neighbours the Arabians; wherefore this quiet nation choose rather to pay yearly tribute, then to maintain war. Against the said Arabians Mahumet the King of Fez directed his troops: insomuch that they were constrained to leave their own country and to flee into the mountains. But the people of the mountains being aided with Mahumet his forces, vanquished the Arabians; so that three thousand of them were slain, and fower-score of their horses were brought unto K. Mahumet. After which prosperous battle, the said mountainers remained free from all tribute. I myself, while these things were a doing, served the king. It was in the year of the Hegeira 921. that is to say, in the year of our Lord 1512. When this people undertake any war, they bring commonly into the field an army of twelve thousand men. Of the region of Sus. NOw comes the region of Sus to be considered of, being situate beyond Atlas, over against the territory of Hea, that is to say, in the extreme part of Africa. Westward it beginneth from the Ocean sea, and southward from the sandy deserts: on the north it is bounded with the utmost town of Hea; and on the east with that mighty river whereof the whole region is named. Wherefore beginning from the west, we will describe all those cities and places which shall seem to be worthy of memory. Of the town of Messa. THree small towns were built by the ancient Africans upon the sea shore (each being a mile distant from other) in that very place where Atlas takes his beginning: all which three are called by one only name, to wit, Messa, and are environed with a wall built of white stones. Through these three runneth a certain great river called Sus in their language: this river in summer is so destitute of water, that a man may easily without peril pass over it on foot; but it is not so in the winter time. They have then certain small barks, which are not meet to sail upon this river. The place where the foresaid three towns are situate, aboundeth greatly with palm trees, neither have they in a manner any other wealth; and yet their dates are but of small worth, because they will not last above Dates which will last but one year. one year. All the inhabitants exercise husbandry, especially in the months of September and April; what time their river increaseth. And in May their corn groweth to ripeness. But if in the two foresaid months the river increaseth not according to the wonted manner, their harvest is then nothing worth. cattle are very scarce among them. Not far from the sea side they have a temple, which they greatly esteem and honour. Out of which, Historiographers say, that the same prophet, of whom their great Mahumet foretold, should proceed. Yea, some there are which stick not to affirm, that the prophet jonas was cast forth by the whale upon the shore of Messa, when as he was sent to preach unto the Ninivites. The rafters Great store of whales. and beams of the said temple are of whales bone. And it is a usual thing amongst them, to see whales of an huge and monstrous bigness cast up dead upon their shore, which by reason of their hugeness and strange deformity, may terrify and astonish the beholders. The common people imagine, that, by reason of a certain secret power and virtue infused from heaven by God upon the said temple, each whale which would swim past it can by no means escape death. Which opinion had almost persuaded me; especially when at my being there, I myself saw a mighty whale cast up: unless a certain jew had told me, that it was no such strange matter: for (quoth he) there lie certain rocks two miles into the sea on either side; and as the sea moves, so the whales move also; and if they chance to light upon a rock, they are easily wounded to death, and so are cast upon the next shore. This reason more prevailed with me then the opinion of the people. Myself (I remember) being in this region at the same time when my Lord the Seriffo bore rule over it, was invited by a certain gentleman, and was by him conducted into a garden: where he showed me a whales rib of so great A whales rib of incredible greatness. a size, that lying upon the ground with the convexe or bowing side upward in manner of an arch, it resembled a gate, the hollow or inward part whereof aloft we could not touch with our heads, as we road upon our camels backs: this rib (he said) had lain there above an hundred years, and was kept as a miracle. Here may you find upon the seashore great store of amber, which the Portugal, & Fessan merchants fetch from thence for a very Amber. mean price: for they scarcely pay a ducat for a whole ounce of most choice and excellent amber. Amber (as some think) is made of whales dung, and (as others suppose) of their Sperma or seed, which being consolidate and hardened by the sea, is cast upon the next shore. Of Teijeut an ancient town of Sus. TEijeut being (as the report goeth) built by the ancient Africans in a most pleasant place, is divided into three parts, whereof each one is almost a mile distant from another, and they all make a triangle or threesquare. This Teijeut containeth four thousand families, and standeth not far from the river of Sus. The soil adjacent is most fruitful for grain, for barley, and for all kind of pulse. They have here likewise a good quantity of sugar Store of sugar. growing; howbeit, because they know not how to press, boil, and trim it, they cannot have it but black and unsavoury: wherefore so much as they can spare, they sell unto the merchants of Maroco, of Fez, and of the land of negroes. Of dates likewise they have plenty; neither use they any money besides the gold which is digged out of their own native soil. The women wear upon their heads a piece of cloth worth a ducat. Silver they have none, but such as their women adorn themselves with. The least iron-coine used amongst them, weigheth almost an ounce. No fruits take plentifully upon their soil, but only figs, grapes, peaches, and dates. Neither oil nor olives are here to be found, except such as are brought from certain mountains of Maroco. A measure of oil is sold at Sus for fifteen ducats; which measure containeth an hundred and fifty pounds Italian weight. Their pieces of gold (because they have no certain nor proportionable money) do weigh, seven of them & one third part, one ounce. Their ounce is all one with the Italian ounce: but their pound containeth eighteen ounces, and is called in their language Rethl, and an hundred Rethl make one such measure of oil as is aforesaid. For carrying of merchandise from place to place, their custom is to pay for a camels load, that is, for 700. pounds of Italiam weight; 3. pieces of gold, especially in the spring time: for in summer they pay sometimes 5. & sometimes 6. pieces of gold, as the time requireth. Here is that excellent leather dressed, which is called leather of Cordovan leather of Maroco. Maroco; twelve hides where of are here sold for six ducats, and at Fez for eight. That part of this region which lieth toward Atlas hath many villages, towns; and hamlets: but the south part thereof is utterly destitute of inhabitants, and subject to the Arabians which border upon it. In the midst of this city standeth a fair and stately temple, which they call The greatest, and the chiefest, through the very midst whereof they have caused a part of the foresaid river to run. The inhabitants are stern and uncivil, being so continually exercised in wars, that they have not one day of quiet. Each part of the city hath a several captain and governor, who all of them together do rule the commonwealth: but their authority continueth never above three months, which being expired, three other are chosen in their room. Their apparel is some what like unto that of the people of Hea: saving that some of them make their shirts, and other of their garments of a certain kind of white stuff. A Canna (which is a measure proper to this region, containing two else) of course cloth is sold for half a piece of Good sale for cloth. gold: but four and twenty else of Portugal or Neatherlandish cloth, if it be any thing fine, is usually sold there for four pieces of their gold. Likewise in this town are many judges and priests, which are conversant only in matters of religion: but in civil matters, he that hath most friends, obtaineth greatest favour. Whensoever any one is slain, all the friends of the slain party do forthwith conspire to kill the murderer. Which if they cannot bring to pass, then is the malefactor by open proclamation banished out of the city for seven years, unless he will in despite of all men continually defend himself by main force. They which return from exile before the time prefixed, are punished in such manner as we will hereafter declare in place convenient. But he that returns after the seven years are once expired, maketh a feast unto the Burghmasters, and so is restored again to his former liberty. In this city dwell many jews, and many notable artificers, who are not compelled to pay any yearly tribute or taxation at all: except it be some small gratuity unto the principal citizens. Of Tarodant a town of Sus. THE 〈◊〉 of Tarodant built by the ancient Africans, containeth about three thousand households. It is distant from Atlas' Southward about four miles, and five and thirty miles Eastward of Teijeut. For the fruitfulness of the soil and manners of the people, it is all one with Teijeut; saving that the town is somewhat lesser, and the people somewhat more civil. For when the family of Marin 〈◊〉 at Fez, part of them also inhabited Sus, and in those days Sus was the seat of the King of 〈◊〉 his. Viceroy. There is to be 〈◊〉 even at this present a certain rock lying upon the 〈◊〉, which was there placed by the foresaid king. But the said family of Marin decaying, the inhabitants recovered their former estate. Their garments are made partly of linen, and partly of woollen; and they have many artificers of all sorts. All authority is committed unto their noble or principal men; who govern four by four, six months only. They are wholly given to peace: neither do I read, that ever they endamaged any of their neighbours. Between this town and Atlas are many villages and hamlets: but to the south of this town lie the 〈◊〉 desert. The 〈◊〉 pay large yearly tribute, to the end that merchants may have safe and secure passage to and fro. This town in our time waged war against the Arabians: which, that they might the more prosperously bring to 〈◊〉, they yielded themselves unto 〈◊〉 Lord the Seriffo; in the year of the Hegeira 920. which was in the year of our Lord 1511. Of the castle of Gartguessem. THE castle of Gartguessem is built upon the top of Atlas in a most Gartguessem surprised by the Portugals. impregnable place, overagainst that part of the Ocean whereinto the river of Sus dischargeth his streams: the soil is most profitable and fruitful. This place about twenty years sithence the Portugals surprised; which caused the inhabitants of Hea and Sus forth with to arm themselves, to the end they might recover the castle by main force, which was by force taken from them. Wherefore levying a mighty army as well of home-bornes, as of strangers; they chose for their Captain a certain Mahometan 〈◊〉, being a man descended of the family of Mahumet; and so besieged the castle. But they had unhappy success in this their enterprise; for they which came to the siege, seeing that they could not prevail; and that so many of their company were slain, left the castle, and returned home. Except some few which remained with the Seriffo, to the end they might maintain war against the Christians, even till the last hour. The inhabitants of Sus not being desirous to live in warfare, allowed the Seriffo money for the maintenance of five hundred horses. Who having with his money hired a great number of soldiers, and growing famous over all the region, at last usurped the government thereof. This I know for a certainty, that the Seriffo, when I came from his court, had above three thousand horsemen; and such numbers of footmen and sums of money, as were almost innumerable. Of Tedsi a town of Sus. TEdsi being a very great town, and built many years ago in a most pleasant and fertile place by the Africans, containeth more than four thousand families: it is distant from Tarodant Eastward thirty miles, from the Ocean sea sixty miles, and from Atlas twenty. here groweth Store of sugar and of woad. great abundance of corn, of sugar, and of wild woad. You shall find in this city many merchants, which come out of the land of Negroes for trafiques sake. The citizens are great lovers of peace & of all civility: and they have a flourishing commonwealth. The whole city is governed by six Magistrates which are chosen by lots: howbeit their government lasteth for sixteen months only. The river of Sus is distant three miles from hence. Here dwell many jews, which are most cunning goldsmiths, carpenters, and such like artificers. They have a very stately temple and many priests and doctors of the law, which are maintained at the public charge. Every monday great numbers of Arabians both of the plains and of the mountains come hither to market. In the year of the Hegeira 920. this city of their own accord yielded themselves into the hands of the Seriffo: and here the common council of the whole region was established. Of the city of Tagavost. IN all Sus there is no city comparable unto that which is commonly called Tagavost: for it containeth above eight thousand households: the wall thereof is built of rough stones. From the Ocean it is distant about threescore miles, and about fifty miles southward of Atlas: and the report is, that the Africans built this city. About ten miles from this place lieth the river of Sus: here are great store of artificers and of shops: and the people of Tagavost are divided into three parts. They have continual civil wars among themselves, and one part have the Arabians always on their side; who for better pay will take part sometime with one side, and sometime with the contrary. Of corn and cattle here is great abundance; but their wool is exceeding course. In this city are made certain kinds of apparel, which are usually carried for merchandise once a year to Tombuto, to Gualata, and to other places in the land of negroes. Their market is twice every week: their attire is somewhat decent and comely: their women are beautiful; but their men are of a tawny and swart colour, by reason they are descended of black fathers and white mothers. In this city such carry the greatest authority and credit, as are accounted the richest and the mightiest. I myself remained here thirteen days with the Seriffo his 〈◊〉 chancellor, who went thither of purpose to buy certain 〈◊〉 for his Lord, in the year of the Hegeira 919. which was in the year of our Lord, 1510. Of the mountain of Hanchisa. THis mountain beginneth westward from Atlas, and from thence stretcheth almost forty miles eastward. At the foot of this mountain standeth Messa, with the residue of the region of Sus. The inhabitants of this mountain are such valiant footmen, that one of them will encounter two horsemen. The soil will yield no corn at all but barley; 〈◊〉 honey there is in great abundance. With snow they are almost at all times troubled: but how patiently and strongly they can endure the cold, a man may easily guess, for that the whole year throughout they wear one single garment only. This people my Lord the Seriffo attempted often to bring under his subjection: howbeit he hath not as yet prevailed against them. Of the mountain of Ilalem. THis mountain beginneth westward from the mountain aforesaid; on the east it abutteth upon the region of Guzula, and southward upon the plains of Sus. The inhabitants are valiant, having great store of horses. They are at continual war among themselves, for certain silver Mines of silver. mines: so that those which have the better hand dig as much silver as they can, and distribute to every man his portion, until such time as they be restrained from digging by others. The situation and estate of the region of Maroco. THis region beginneth westward from the mountain of Nefisa, stretching eastward to the mountain of Hadimei, and northward even to that place where the most famous rivers of Tensift and Asfinual meet together, that is to say, upon the east border of Hea. This region is in a manner three square, being a most pleasant country, and abounding with many droves and flocks of cattle: it is green every where, and most fertile of all things, which serve for food, or which delight the senses of smelling or seeing. It is altogether a plain country, not much unlike to Lombardie. The mountains in this region are most cold and barren, insomuch that they will bring forth nought but barley. Wherefore (according to our former order) beginning at the west part of this region, we will proceed in our description eastward. Of Elgihumuha a town of Maroco. Upon that plain which is about seven miles distant from Atlas, and not far from the river of Sesseva, standeth a town called by the inhabitants Elgihumuha, which was built, as they suppose, by the Africans. A while after it was brought under the subjection of certain Arabians, about that very time when the family of Muachidin aforesaid began to revolt from the kingdom. And at this day the ruins and relics of this town can scarce be seen. The Arabians which now dwell thereabout do sow so much ground only, as to supply their own necessities; and the residue they let lie untilled and fruitless. Howbeit when the country thereabout was in flourishing estate, the inhabitants paid yearly unto the Prince for tribute 100000. ducats: and then this town contained above six thousand families. traveling that way I was most friendly entertained by a certain Arabian, and had good experience of the people's liberality: saving that I heard of some, that they were most treacherous and deceitful. Of the castle of Imegiagen. THe castle of Imegiagen is built upon the top of a certain hill of Atlas, being so fortified by natural situation, that it neither hath nor needeth any wall. It standeth southward of Elgihumuha (as I take it) 25. miles. This castle was in times passed under the jurisdiction of the noble men of that region, until such time as it was taken by one Homar Essuef an apostata from the Mahometan religion, as we will afterward declare. The said Homar The 〈◊〉 of Homar Essuef. used such monstrous tyranny in that place, that neither children, nor women big with child could escape his cruelty; insomuch that he caused the unborn infants to be ripped out of their mother's wombs, and to be murdered. This was done in the year of the Hegeira 900, and so that place remained destitute of inhabitants In the year 920. of the Hegeira the said region began to be inhabited anew: howbeit now there can but one side of the mountain only be tilled, for the plain underneath is so dangerous, both by reason of the daily incursions of the Arabians, and also of the Portugals, that no man dare travel that way. Of the town of Tenessa. Upon a certain hill of Atlas named Ghedmin standeth a town, which was built (as some report) by the ancient Africans, and called by the name of Tenessa; being a most strong and defensible place, and being distant about eight miles eastward from the river of Asifinuall. At the foot of the said hill lieth a most excellent plain, which, were it not for the lewd 〈◊〉 Arabians, would yield an incomparable crop. And because the inhabitants of Tenessa are deprived of this 〈◊〉 commodity, they till only that ground which is upon the side of the mountain, and which lieth between the town and the river. Neither do they enjoy that gratis; for they yearly pay unto the Arabians for tribute the third part of their corn. Of the new town of Delgumuha. Upon the top of a certain high mountain was built in our time a most large and impregnable fort, being environed on all sides with divers other mountains, and called by the inhabitants New Delgumuha. Beneath the said mountain springeth Asifinuall, which word signifieth in the African tongue, the river of rumour, because that breaking forth by the side of the hill with a monstrous noise, it maketh a most deep gulf, much like unto that, which the Italians call Inferno di Tivoli. The said fort containeth almost a thousand families. It was sometime governed by a certain tyrant, which came thither out of the king of Maroco his court. Here may you find great store of soldiers both horsemen and fooremen. They gather yearly tribute of the people bordering upon Atlas, to the sum of a thousand crowns. They have always had great league and familiarity with the Arabians, each of whom have accustomed to salute and gratify the other with mutual gifts: for which cause they have oftentimes much provoked the kings of Maroco against them. They have always been great lovers of civility, and have worn neat and decent apparel; neither shall you find any corner in the whole town which is not well peopled. In this town are plenty of artificers, for it is but fifty miles from the city of Maroco. Upon the said mountain there are great store of gardens and orchards; which yield the inhabitants abundancè offruit yearly. They reap likewise barley, hemp, and cotton; and their goats are almost innumerable. Likewise they have many priests and judges: but as touching their minds, they are ignorant, froward, and exceedingly addicted to jealousy. In this town I abode certain days with a kinsman of mine, who while he dwelled at Fez being impoverished with extreme study of Alchemy, was constrained to flee unto this town, where in process of time he became Secretary unto the governor. Of the city of Imizmizi. Upon a certain part of Atlas standeth a city called Imizmizi. Westward it is distant from new Delgumuha about fourteen miles: and this city the Arabians are reported to have built. near unto this city lieth the common high way to Guzula over the mountains of Atlas, being commonly called Burris, that is, A way strewed with feathers: because snow falls often thereupon, which a man would think rather to be feathers then snow. Not far from this town likewise there is a very fair and large plain, which extendeth for the space of thirty miles, even to the territory of Maroco. This most fertile plain yieldeth such excellent corn, as (to my remembrance) I never saw the like. Saving that the Arabians and soldiers of Maroco do so much molest the said plain country, that the greater part thereof is destitute of inhabitants: yea, I have heard of many citizens that have forsaken the city itself; thinking it better to depart, then to be daily oppressed with so many inconveniences. They have very little money, but the scarcity thereof is recompensed by their abundance of good ground, and their plenty of corn. In the time of my abode with them I went unto a certain Hermit, which they called * Sidi signifieth a Saint in the Arabian tongue. Sidi Canon: which famous and worthy man gave me such friendly entertainment, as I cannot easily express. Of the three towns of Tumelgast. THese three towns called by the name of Tumelgast are situate upon a plain, about thirty miles from Maroco, and fourteen miles northward of Atlas, being replenished with palmtrees, vines, and all other trees that bear fruit. Their fields are very large and fertile, were they not continually wasted by the lewd Arabians. So few are the inhabitants of these three towns, that I think there are not in all above fifteen families, all which are joined in affinity and kindred unto the foresaid hermit: for which cause they are permitted to till some part of that plain, without paying of any tribute unto the Arabians. Save only, that they entertain the Arabians when they travel that way. Their lowly and base habitations a man would take rather to be hogs-cotes, then dwelling places for men: hence it is, that they are so continually vexed with fleas, gnats, and other such vermin. Their water is exceeding salt. This province also I perused in the company of my dear friend Sidi 〈◊〉, who went thither to gather up the tribute of the country on the behalf of the king of Portugal. This Sidi was appointed governor over all that circuit which is called by them Azafi. Of the town of Tesrast. THis town is situate upon the bank of the river Asifelmel. It standeth westward of Maroco fourteen miles, & about twenty miles from Atlas. Round about this town they have divers gardens & enclosures abounding with dates and corn; and the chief part of the inhabitants earn their living with gardening. Howbeit sometimes the increase of their river is so great, that it drowneth all their gardens and cornfields. And they are by so much the more miserable, in regard that the Arabians all summertime do possess the whole region, devouring all things which the poor husbandmen by their great care and industry had provided. With these people I made no longer tarrying but only till I could have well baited my horse: howbeit in that short time I hardly escaped with life and goods, from certain Arabian thieves. A most exact description of the great and famous city of Maroco. THis noble city of Maroco in Africa is accounted to be one of the greatest cities in the whole world. It is built upon a most large field, being about fourteen miles distant from Atlas. One joseph the son of The first founder of Maroco. Tesfin, and king of the tribe or people called Luntuna, is reported to have been the founder of this city, at that very time when he conducted his troops into the region of Maroco, and settled himself not far from the common high way, which stretcheth from Agmet over the mountains of Atlas, to those deserts where the foresaid tribe or people do usually inhabit. Here may you behold most stately and wonderful workmanship: for all their buildings are so cunningly and artificially contrived, that a man cannot easily describe the same. This huge and mighty city, at such time as it was governed by Hali the son of king joseph, contained more than 100000. families. Maroco in times past contained above 100000. families. It had four and twenty gates belonging thereto, and a wall of great strength and thickness, which was built of white stone and lime. From this city the river of Tensift lieth about six miles distant. Here may you behold great abundance of temples, of colleges, of bathstoves, and of inns, all framed after the fashion and custom of that region. Some were built by the king of the tribe of Luntuna, and others by Elmunchidin his successor: but the most curious and magnificent temple of all, is that in the midst of the city which was built by Hali the first king of Maroco, and the son of joseph aforesaid, being commonly called the temple of Hali been joseph. Howbeit one Abdul-Mumen which succeeded him, to the end he might utterly abolish the name of Hali, and might make himself only famous with posterity, caused this stately temple of Maroco to be razed, and to be re-edified somewhat more sumptuously than before. Howbeit he lost not only his expenses, but failed of his purpose also: for the common people even till this day do call the said Temple by the first and ancientest name. Likewise in this city not far from a certain rock was built a Temple by him that was the second usurper over the kingdom of Maroco: Mansor the king of Maroco. after whose death his nephew Mansor enlarged the said Temple fifty cubits on all sides, and adorned the same with many pillars, which he commanded to be brought out of Spain for that purpose. Under this temple he made a cistern or vault as big as the temple itself: the roof of the said temple he covered with lead: and at every corner he made leaden pipes to convey rain water into the cistern underneath the temple. The turret or steeple is built of most hard and well framed stone, like unto Vespasian his Amphitheatrum at Rome, containing in compass more than an hundredth else, and in height exceeding the steeple of Bononia. The stairs of the said turret or steeple are each of them nine handfuls in breadth, the utmost side of the wall is ten, and * Obscurum. the thickness of the turret is five. The said turret hath seven lofts, unto which the stairs ascending are very lightsome: for there are great store of windows, which to the end they may give more light, are made broader within than without. Upon the top of this turret is built a certain spire or pinnacle rising sharp in form of a sugarloaf, and containing five and twenty else in compass, but in height being not much more than two spears length: the said spire hath three lofts one above another, unto every of which they ascend with wooden ladders. Likewise on the top of this spire standeth a golden half moon, upon a bar of iron, with three spheres of gold under it; which golden spheres are so fastened unto the said iron bar, that the greatest is lowest, and the least highest. It would make a man giddy to look down from the top of the turret; for men walking on the ground, be they never so tall, seem no bigger than a child of one year old. From hence likewise may you plainly escry the promontory of Azaphi, which notwithstanding is an hundredth and thirty miles distant. But mountains (you will say) by reason of their huge bigness may easily be seen a far off: howbeit from this turret a man may in clear weather most easily see fifty miles into the plain countries. The inner part of the said temple is not very beautiful. But the roof is most cunningly and artificially vaulted, the timbers being framed and set together with singular workmanship, so that I have not seen many fairer temples in all Italy. And albeit you shall hardly find any temple in the whole world greater than this, yet is it very meanly frequented; for the people do never assemble there but only upon fridays. Yea a great part of this city, especially about the foresaid temple lieth so desolate and void of inhabitants, that a man cannot without great difficulty pass, by reason of the ruins of many houses lying in the way. Under the porch Great store of books in old time to be sold in Maroco. of this temple it is reported that in old time there were almost an hundredth shops of sale-bookes, and as many on the other side over against them: but at this time I think there is not one bookseller in all the whole city to be found. And scarcely is the third part of this city inhabited. Within the walls of Maroco are vines, palmtrees, great gardens, and most fruitful cornfields: for without their walls they can till no ground, by reason of the Arabians often inroads. Know ye this for a certainty, that the said city is grown to untimely decay and old age: for scarcely five hundredth & six years are past, since the first building thereof, forasmuch as the foundations thereof were laid in the time of joseph the son of Tesfin, that is to say, in the 424. year of the Hegeira. Which decay I can impute to none other cause, but to the injury of continual wars, and to the often alterations of magistrates and of the common wealth. After king joseph succeeded his son Hali, and the son of Hali was ordained governor after his father's decease. In whose time sprung up a factious crew, by the means of a certain Mahometan preacher named Elmaheli, being a man both borne & brought up in the mountains. The said Elmaheli having levied a great army, waged war against Abraham his sovereign Lord. Whereupon king Abraham conducting another army against him, had marvelous ill success: and after the battle ended, his passage into the city of Maroco was so stopped and restrained, that he was forced with a few soldiers, which remained yet alive, to flee eastward to the mountains of Atlas. But Elmaheli not being satisfied with expelling his true sovereign out of his own kingdom, commanded one of his captains called Abdul Mumen, with the one half of his army to pursue the distressed king, while himself with the other half laid siege to Maroco. The king with his followers came at length unto Oran, hoping there to have renewed his forces. But Abdul Mumen and his great army pursued the said king so narrowly, that the citizens of Oran told him in plain terms, that they would not hazard themselves for him. Wherefore this unhappy king being utterly driven to despair, set his Queen on horseback behind him, and so in the night time road forth of the city. But perceiving that he was descried and known by his enemies, he fled forthwith unto a certain rock standing upon the seashore: The miserable death of Abraham king of Maroco and of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. where, setting spurs to his horse-side, he cast himself, his most dear spouse, and his horse down headlong, and was within a while after found slain among the rocks and stones, by certain which dwelled near unto the place. Wherefore Abdul Mumen having gotten the victory, returned in triumphant manner toward Maroco, where the foresaid Elmaheli was deceased before his coming, in whose place Abdul was chosen King and Mahometan prelate over the forty disciples, and took ten persons to be of his privy council, which was a new invention in the law of Mahumet. This Abdul Mumen having besieged the city of Maroco for the space of an whole year, at last overcame it: and killing Isaac the only son of King Abraham with his own hand, he commanded all the soldiers, and a good part of the citizens to be slain. This man's posterity reigned from the five hundred sixteenth, to the six hundred sixty eight year of the Hegeira, and at length they were dispossessed of the kingdom by a certain king of the Tribe called Marin. Now, attend (I beseech you) and mark, what changes and alterations of estates befell afterwards. The family of Marin after the said king's decease bare rule till the year of the Hegeira 785. At length the kingdom of Maroco decreasing daily more and more, was governed by kings which came out of the next mountain. Howbeit, never had Maroco any governors which did so tyrannize over it, as they of the family called 〈◊〉. The principal court of this family was holden for the most part at Fez; but over Maroco were appointed Viceroys and deputies: insomuch that Fez was continually the head and Metropolitan city of all Mauritania, and of all the Western dominion: even as (God willing) we will declare more at large in our brief treatise concerning the law and religion of Mahumet. But now having made a sufficient digression, let us resume the matter subject where we left. In the said city of Maroco is a most impregnable castle, which, if you consider the bigness, the walls, the towers, and the gates built all of perfect marble, you may well think to be a city rather than a castle. Within this castle there is a stately temple, 〈◊〉 a most 〈◊〉 and high steeple, on the top where of standeth an half moon, 〈◊〉 under the half moon are three golden spheres one bigger than another, which all of them together weigh 130000. ducats. Some kings there Three golden spheres. were, who being alured with the value, went about to take down the said golden spheres: but they had always some great misfortune or other, which hindered their attempt: insomuch that the common people think it very dangerous, if a man doth but offer to touch the said spheres with his hand. Some affirm that they are there placed by so forcible an influence of the planets, that they cannot be removed from thence by any cunning or 〈◊〉. Some others report that a certain spirit is adjured by 〈◊〉- magic; to defend those spheres from all assaults and injuries whatsoever. In our time the king of Maroco neglecting the vulgar opinion, would have taken down the said spheres, to use them for treasure against the Portugals, who as then prepared themselves to battle against him. Howbeit his counsellors would not suffer him so to do, for that they esteemed them as the principal monuments of all Maroco. I remember that I read in a certain historiographer, that the wife of King Mansor, to the end she might be famous in time to come, caused those three spheres to be made of the princely and precious jewels which her husband Mansor bestowed upon her, and to be placed upon the temple which he built. Likewise the said castle containeth a most noble college, which hath thirty hals belonging thereunto. In the A great college. midst whereof is one hall of a marvelous greatness, wherein public 〈◊〉 were most solemnly read, while the study of learning flourished among them. Such as were admitted into this college had their victuals and 〈◊〉 freely given them. Of their professors some were yearly allowed an hundred, and some two hundred ducats, according to the quality of their profession: neither would they admit any to hear them read, but such as perfectly understood what belonged to those Arts which they professed. The walls of this 〈◊〉 hall are most stately adorned with painting and carving, especially of 〈◊〉 hall where lectures were wont publicly to be read. All their porches and vaulted roofs are made of painted and glittering stones, called in their language 〈◊〉, such as are yet used in Spain. In the midst of the said building is a most pleasant and clear fountain, the wall whereof is of white and polished 〈◊〉, albeit low-built, as in Africa for the most 〈◊〉 such walls are. I have heard that in old time here was great abundance of students, but at my being there I found but five in all: and they have now a most 〈◊〉 professor, and one that is quite void of all humanity. In the time of mine abode at Maroco I grew 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 acquaintance with a certain jew, who 〈◊〉 his skill in the law was but mean, was 〈◊〉 exceeding rich and well 〈◊〉 in histories. This jew in regard of many singular duties which he performed to his prince, found the king's bounty and liberality extended unto him. All others which bear any public office are (in mine opinion) men of no high reach. Moreover the foresaid castle (as I remember) hath twelve courts most curiously and artificially built by one Mansor. In the first lodged about five hundredth Christians, which carried crossbows before the king whither soever he went. Not far from thence is the lodging of the Lord Chancellor and of the kings privy counsel, which house is called by them, The house of affairs. The third is called The court of victory; wherein all the armour and munition of the city is laid up. The fourth belongeth to the great Master of the king's horse. Upon this court three stables adjoin, each one of which stables will contain two hundredth horses. Likewise there are two other 〈◊〉, whereof one is for mules, and the other for an hundredth of the king's horses only. Next unto the stables were two barns or garners adjoining, in two several places, in the lower of which barns was laid straw, and barley in the other. There is also another most large place to lay up corn in, every room whereof will contain more than three hundredth bushels. The cover of the said room hath a certain hole whereunto they ascend by stairs made of stone. Whither the beasts laden with corn being come, they power the said corn into the hole. And so when they would take any corn from thence, they do but open certain holes below, suffering so much corn to come forth as may serve their turns, and that without any labour at all. There is likewise a certain other hall, where the king's son, and the sons of noble men are instructed in learning. Then may you behold a certain fower-square building, containing divers galleries with fair glass windows, in which galleries are many histories most curiously painted: here likewise the glittering and gilt armour is to be seen. Next unto this building is another, wherein certain of the king's guard are lodged: then follows that wherein state-matters are discussed: whereunto adjoineth also another, which is appointed for ambassadors to confer with the kings privy counsel in. Likewise the king's concubines and other ladies of honour have a most convenient place assigned them: next unto which standeth the lodging of the king's sons. Not far from the castle wall, on that side which is next unto the fields, may you behold a most pleasant and large garden, containing almost all kind of trees that can be named. Moreover, there is a sumptuous and stately porch built of most excellent square marble: in the midst whereof standeth a pillar with a lion very artificially made of marble, out of the mouth of which lion issueth most clear and crystal water, falling into a cistern within the porch: at each corner of the said porch standeth the image of a leopard framed of Excellent spotted marble. white marble, which is naturally adorned with certain black spots: this kind of particoloured marble is no where to be found but only in a certain place of Atlas, which is about an hundredth & fifty miles distant from Maroco. Not far from the garden stands a certain wood or park walled round about: And here I think no kind of wild beasts are wanting: for here you may behold elephants, lions, stags, roes, and such like: howbeit the lions are separated in a certain place from other beasts, which place even to this day is called The lion's den. Wherefore such monuments of antiquity as are yet extant in Maroco, albeit they are but few, do not withstanding sufficiently argue, what a noble city it was in the time of Mansor. This king called Mansor was he unto whom Rasis that famous 〈◊〉 dedicated his Book. At this present all the courts and lodgings before described lie utterly void and desolate: except perhaps some of the king's ostlery which tend his mules and horses do lie in that court, which we said even now was to lodge archers and crossebowe-men: all the residue are left for the fowls of the air to nestle in. That garden which you might have named a paradise in old time, is now become a place where the filth and dung of the whole city is cast forth. Where the fair and stately library was of old, at this present there is nothing else to be found, but hens, dooves, and other such like fowls, which build their nests there. Certain it is, that the foresaid Mansor, whom we have so often mentioned, was a most puissant and mighty prince: for it is well known that his dominion stretched from the town of Messa to the kingdom of Tripoli in Barbary, which is the most excellent region of Africa, and so large, that a man can hardly travel the length The huge dominions of king Mansor. thereof in fourscore & ten days, or the breadth in fifteen. This Mansor likewise was in times past Lord of all the kingdom of Granada in Spain. Yea, his dominion in Spain extended from Tariffa to Arragon, & over a great part of Castilia and of Portugal. Neither did this jacob surnamed Mansor only possess the foresaid dominions, but also his grandfather Abdul Mumen, his father joseph, & his son Mahumet Enasir, who being vanquished in the kingdom of Valençia, lost 60000. soldiers horsemen & footmen: howbeit himself escaped & returned to Maroco. The Christians being encouraged The Christians happy 〈◊〉 against the Moors. with this victory, refrained not from war, till, within 30. years space, they had won all the towns following, to wit, Valençia, Denia, Alcauro, Murcia, Cartagena, Cordova, Sivillia, jaen, and Vbeda. After which unhappy war succeeded the decay of Maroco. The said Mahumet deceasing, left behind him ten sons of a full and perfect age, who contended much about the kingdom. Hereupon it came to pass, while the brethren were at discord, and assailed each other with mutual wars, that the people of Fez called Marini, and the inhabitants of other regions adjacent, began to usurp the government. The people called Habdulvad enjoyed Tremizen, expelling the king of Tunis, and ordaining some other, whom they pleased, in his stead. Now have you heard the end of Mansor his progeny and successors. The kingdom therefore was translated unto one jacob the son of Habdulach, who was the first king of the family called Marin. And at length the famous city of Maroco itself, by reason of the Arabians continual outrages, fell into most extreme calamity: so great is the inconstancy of all earthly things. That which we have here reported as touching Maroco, partly we saw with our own eyes, partly we read in the history of one Ibnu Ibnu Abdul. 〈◊〉 Malich, a most exact chronicler of the affairs of Maroco, and Abdul Malich. partly we borrowed out of that treatise, which ourselves have written concerning the law of Mahumet. Of the town of Agmet. THE town of Agmet built of old by the Africans upon the top of a certain hill which beginneth almost from Atlas, is distant from Maroco about four and twenty miles. In times past, when Muachidin was prince thereof, it contained more than six thousand families: at what time the people were very civil, and had such plenty and magnificence of all things, that many would not stick to compare this town with the city of Maroco. It had on all sides most 〈◊〉 gardens, and great store of vines, whereof 〈◊〉 grew upon the mountain itself, and others on the valley. By the foot of this hill runneth a fair river, which springing forth of Atlas, falleth at length into Tensift. The field which lieth near unto this river is said to be so fruitful, that it yieldeth every year fifty fold increase. The water of this river looketh always white; albeit if a man steadfastly behold the said river, it may seem unto him in colour to resemble the soil of Narnia, or the river Niger of Vmbria in Italy. And 〈◊〉 there are which Ariver running under the ground to Maroco. affirm, that the very same river runneth under ground to Maroco, and not to break forth of the earth, till it come to a certain place very near unto the said city. 〈◊〉 princes in times past, being desirous to know the hidden and intricate passages of the said river, sent certain persons into the hollow cave, who the better to discern the same, carried candles and torches with them. But having proceeded a little way under ground, there met them such a flaw of wind, that blew out their lights, and perforce drove them back to the great hazard of their lives, so that they said they never felt the like. They affirm likewise, that, the river being full of rocks, which the water driveth to and fro, and by reason of the manifold channels and streams, their passage was altogether hindered. Wherefore that secret remaineth unknown even till this day, neither is there any man so hardy as to attempt the same enterprise again. I remember that I read in some histories, that king joseph which built Maroco, being forewarned by the conjecture of a certain ginger, that the whole region should perpetually be vexed with war, provided by arte-magique, that the passage of this river should always be unknown: lest, if any enemy should afterward practise 〈◊〉, he might cut off the course thereof from the said city. near unto this river lies the common high way, which crosseth over mount Atlas to Guzula aregion The desolation of Agmet. of Maroco. Howbeit the city of Agmet, which I have now described unto you. hath at this day no other inhabitants but wolves, foxes, dear, and such other wild beasts. Except only at my being there I found a certain Hermit, who was attended upon by an hundred persons of his own sect: all of them were well-horsed, and did their best endeavour to become governors and commanders, but their forces were insufficient. With this Hermit I staid (as I remember) for the space of ten days, and found one amongst his followers, with whom I had old 〈◊〉, and familiarity: john Leo student at Fez. for we were certain years fellow-students together at Fez, where being of one standing and seniority, we heard that book of the Mahometan religion expounded, which is commonly called the epistle of Nensefi. Of the town of Hannimei. Upon that side of Atlas which lieth towards the plain country, standeth a certain town called by the inhabitants Hannimei, being about 40. miles eastward of Maroco: by which town, on the same side of Atlas, lieth the direct way to Fez. From the said town the river of Agmet is almost fifteen miles distant: and the field lying between the said river and town is a most fruitful soil, like unto the field adjoining upon the city of Agmet before mentioned. All the region between Maroco and the The 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉. foresaid river is in subjection unto the governor of Maroco, but from the river unto Hannimei the townsmen of Hannimei bear rule. This town had a famous young captain, who maintained continual war against the governor of Maroco, and sometimes against the Arabians also. He had likewise a most ample dominion upon the mountains of Atlas: by natural disposition he was right liberal & valiant, and having scarce attained to sixteen years of age, he slew his own uncle, and usurped his government. Whereof so soon as the Arabians had intelligence, joining three hundredth Christian horsemen, which came out of Portugal, unto their great forces, they marched on the sudden even to the very gates of the town. And the foresaid captain with his army containing scarce an hundredth horsemen, with a very few footmen met the Arabians, and gave them such a valiant onset, that the greater part of them was slain, and the Christians were so discomfited, that (as I suppose) not one of them returned home into Portugal: which (they say) came to pass, both by reason that the Christians were ignorant of the place, and unskilful of the Africans manner of warfare. These things were done in the 920. year of the Hegeira, and in the year of our Lord 1511. Afterward being wearied by the king of Fez his wars (which king demanded tribute of the towns men of Hannimei) he was slain with a bullet: whereupon the town remained tributary to the king of Fez. Yea, the deceased captains wife delivered as prisoners certain burgesses of the town unto the king himself. And the king so soon as he had placed a lieutenant over Hannimei, departed from the same town in the 921. year of the Hegeira, and in the year of our Lord 1512. Of the mountain of Nififa. Having before described all the cities and towns of Maroco, it now remaineth that we briefly declare the situation and quality of the mountains there. Wherefore we will begin with the mountain of Nififa, from whence the region of Maroco itself beginneth westward, and is thereby divided from the province of Hea. The said mountain hath great store of inhabitants: and albeit the tops thereof are continually covered with snow; yet doth it yearly afford marvelous increase and abundance of barley. The rude people there are so destitute of all humanity and civil behaviour, that they do admire not only all strangers, but also do even gaze and wonder at their apparel. I myself remained two days among them, in which space all the people of the town came flocking about me, greatly wondering at the white garment which I wore (being such as the learned men of our country are usually clad in) so that every one being desirous to handle and view this garment of mine, in two days it was turned from white to black, and became all greasy and filthy. Here one of the townsmen being alured with the strangeness and novelty of my sword, which I bought at Fez for half a ducat, would never leave entreating of me, till I had exchanged it with him for an horse, which cost (as himself affirmed) above ten ducats. The reason of which fond and childish behaviour I think to be, because they never travail unto Fez nor to any other cities. And were they never so desirous to travail, yet dare they not adventure upon the common high ways, in regard of the great number of robbers and thieves. Of honey, goats, and oil Arganick they have wonderful store: for in this mountain beginneth the said oil to be put in use. Of the mountain called seemed. AT the bounds of Nififa a certain other mountain called by the inhabitants seemed taketh his original: and these two mountains are separated by the river of Sefsava. seemed extendeth eastward almost 20. miles, the inhabitants whereof are most base & witless people. Great store of springs & fountains are here to be found; the snow is perpetual; all good laws, civility, and honesty are quite banished from hence, except perhaps the people be moved thereunto by the advise of some stranger, whom they find to be of a modest and sober disposition. Here being entertained by a certain religious man of the same place (who was had in great reputation by the people) I was constrained to eat of such gross meats as the said people are accustomed unto, to wit, of barley meal mingled with water, and of goats-flesh, which was extremely tough and hard by reason of the stalenes and long continuance. After supper we had no other bed but the bare ground to lie upon. The next morning being ready to take horse, and desirous to depart, fifty of the people came about me, laying open each man their causes and suits unto me, as our people use to do before a judge. Unto whom I answered, that I had never in all my life either known or heard of the manners and customs of that region. Forthwith comes one of the chief men amongst them, affirming that it was their custom never to dismiss any stranger, till he had both heard and thoroughly decided all the quarrels and controversies of the inhabitants. Which words he had no sooner john Leo constrained to play the judge. uttered, but immediately my horse was taken from me. Wherefore I was constrained for nine days, and so many nights, longer to abide the penury and misery of that region. Moreover my trouble was the greater, for that, in such abundance of suits and affairs, there was not one man present, which could set down so much as a word in writing: wherefore I myself was feign to play both the judge and the notary. Upon the eight day they all of them promised to bestow some great reward upon me. Wherefore the night following seemed unto me a year long: for I was in good hope the next morrow to have received a mass of gold from my clients. So soon as the next day began to dawn, they placed me in a certain church-porch: whither, after an usual and short prayer ended, each man full reverently presented his gift unto me. Here some offered me a cock, others brought me nuts and onions, and some others bestowed a handful of garlic upon me. The principal and headmen amongst them presented me with a goat; and so by reason that there was no money in all the said mountain, they proffered me not one farthing for my pains: wherefore all the said gifts I bequeathed unto mine host for his worthy entertaining of me. And this was all the notable reward which I reaped in regard of so great and intolerable pains. All things being thus dispatched, they sent fifty horsemen to accompany and guard me from thieves in that dangerous way. Of the mountain called Seusava. THis mountain of Seusava taketh his beginning where seemed endeth, out of which springeth a certain river, having one name with the said mountain from whence it proceedeth. Never were the tops of this mountain seen destitute of snow. The inhabitants lead a brutish and savage life, waging continual war with their next neighbours: for which purpose they use neither swords, javelins, nor any other warlike instruments, but only certain slings, out of which they discharge stones after a strange and wonderful manner. Their victuals consist of barley, honey, and goates-flesh. In the same mountain great multitudes of jews exercising handycraftes, do inhabit: likewise they make soap, yron-hookes, and horseshoes. divers masons are here to be found also. They build their walls of no other matter but only of rough stone and lime, and the roofs of their houses they use to cover with thatch: neither have they any other kind of lime or bricks. They have among them also abundance of learned men & of skilful lawyers, whose counsel they use at all times. Among whom I found some, who had heretofore been my fellow-students at Fez, and for our old acquaintance sake, gave me most courteous entertainment: and, to the end I might escape the danger of thieves, they conducted me a good part of my way. Of the mountain called Sesiva. Upon this most lofty and cold mountain there is nothing almost to be found, but continual snow and woods. The inhabitants wear white caps: and the region in all places is full of springs and fountains. Out of the said mountain springeth a river, which in the discourse before-going we called Asifinuall. All over this mountain are most deep and hollow caves, wherein every year, for the three cold months of November, januarie, and February they usually winter their cattle, laying up so much fodder, namely hay, and the leaves of certain trees, as they think will suffice them. Most of their victuals are brought unto them from the next mountains, because their own soil yieldeth no come at all: only in the spring time and in summer, they have good plenty of new cheese and butter. Their old age they bear most lustily and stoutly, sometime at ninety, and sometime at an hundred years. They give attendance to their cattle all their life long, neither do they at any time, or seldom, see any strangers. They wear no shoes at all, but certain sandals only, to defend the soles of their feet: and their legs they wrap in a certain piece of cloth or list instead of an hose, to keep themselves from the injury of the snow. Of the mountain called 〈◊〉. THis high and cold mountain hath very many inhabitants: upon the top whereof standeth a town which is called by the name of the mountain itself. In this town are great store of dwellers, and a most stately and beautiful temple. It hath likewise a most pleasant and 〈◊〉 river. This town is adorned with the monuments of * Or Elmaheli. Elmahdi (who was in times past a most learned Mahometan priest) and of Abdul Mumen his disciple. And albeit the inhabitants are accounted heretics by all other mahometans, yet is there no kind of learning which they will not arrogate unto themselves: because perhaps they are well read in the works of Elmahdi, who was notwithstanding the ringleader of all the said heretics: so that if any stranger come among them, they presently challenge him to dispute in matters of learning. In their apparel they go very ragged and beggarly, by reason that they have no tailors in the whole town. Their commonwealth is governed after a wild and savage manner, albeit they have a certain priest, which useth all the policy and means he can to bring it into good order. Their victuals are barley-bread and oil of olives: likewise they have great store of nuts, and of pine-trees. Of the mountain called Gedmeva. Gedmeva beginneth at the West frontier of the foresaid mountain of seemed, and stretcheth Eastward almost five and twenty miles, extending unto the border of Mizmizi. All the inhabitants are rude, miserable, and hunger-starved people, being subject to the Arabians, for that they border upon those fields which adjoin upon the mountain of Temnella. This hill of Gedmeva aboundeth with olives, barley, wood, and fountains. Of the mountain called Hanteta. Never did I see (to my remembrance) an higher mountain, then that which the Africans call Hanteta. Westward it beginneth from Gedmeva, and stretcheth five and forty miles Eastward, to the mountain of Adimmei beforenamed. The inhabitants are valiant and rich, having great store of horses. here likewise standeth a most strong and impregnable castle subject unto a certain nobleman, which is reported to be of alliance unto the prince of Maroco: howbeit they are at continual war for certain lands situate within their dominions. Many jews exercising divers handiecrafts do here inhabit, and do yearly pay unto the governor of this mountain great sums of money. As concerning religion, they follow them especially which are called Carrain. The top of this mountain is continually covered with snow. When I first beheld this mountain, I thought it had been clouds; so great is the height thereof. The sides of this mountain being altogether destitute of herbs and trees, are in many places stored with excellent white marble, which the people might dig, and make a good commodity thereof, were they not so sluggish and so ignorant in hewing and polishing of the fame. In this place are many pillars and arches which were most artificially and sumptuously built by those mighty princes whom we have often before made mention of: which pillars they would have used for the building of water-conduits, had they not been hindered by the violence of wars. To be brief, in the said mountain I saw many notable things, whereof I will here make no discourse at all, partly because they are out of my remembrance, and partly for avoiding tediousness to the reader; because I have determined to pass over these small matters, and to proceed unto greater. Of the mountain called Adimmei. FRom Hanteta beginneth another huge and high mountain called by the inhabitants Adimmei, extending eastward to the river of Teseut. Upon this mountain standeth that city, the prince whereof (as we said before) was slain in battle against the king of Fez. This mountain is well stored with inhabitants and aboundeth with woods which bring forth acorns, olives, and quinces. The people here inhabiting are most valiant, possessing beasts and cattle of all sorts, their air being very temperate, and their soil exceeding fruitful. Springs they have great plenty, and also two rivers issuing forth of the said mountain, whereof in due place we will discourse more at large. Wherefore having described all the cities and mountains of Maroco bordering southward upon Atlas, let us now pass over the said mountain of Atlas, and take a view of the region beyond it commonly called Guzzula. Of the region of Guzzula. THis region is exceeding populous: westward it abutteth upon Ilda a mountain of Sus; northward it joineth unto Atlas, and eastward it stretcheth unto the region of Hea. It is inhabited with savage and fierce people, being most needy of money, and yet abounding greatly in cattle. Great store of copper and iron is here digged out of mines, and here are brazen 〈◊〉 and copper 〈◊〉. vessels made, which are carried into other countries to be sold: and these vessels they exchange for linen and woollen cloth, for horses, and for other wares necessary for the said region. In all this whole region there is neither town nor castle environed with walls. Great villages they have, which contain, many of them, more than a thousand families a piece. They have neither king nor governor to prescribe any laws unto them: but every one is his own captain and commander; whereupon they are at continual wars among themselves, neither have they any truce at all, but three days 〈◊〉 wars 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. only every week; during which time every man may safely and freely bargain with his enemy, and may travel whither he listeth. But these days of truce being past, the wretched people of this region do continually commit most horrible slaughters. The foresaid days of truce a certain Hermit appointed unto them, whom they honoured and reverenced like a god. This Hermit with one eye I myself saw, and found him to be a trusty; sincere, courteous, and most liberal person. The common attire of the people of Guzzula is a woollen jacket straight to their bodies & without 〈◊〉. They wear crooked, broad, and two-edged daggers: and their swords are like unto the swords of Hea. Once every year they have a fair of two months long: all which time (though the number of merchants be never so great) they give Free entertainment for merchants. free entertainment unto all such as either bring wares with them, or come thither to fetch away their wares. When the time of their fair approacheth, they forthwith make truce, and each faction appointeth a captain over an hundred soldiers, to the end they may keep themselves in safety, and may defend their said fair from the invasion and injury of all lewd persons. If any offence be committed, the captains immediately give sentence upon the guilty person: and whosoever be convicted of theft, is forthwith slain like a brute beast, and his thieves carcase is thrown out to be devoured of dogs, wild beasts, and ravenous fowls. The said fair is kept in a certain plain or valley between two hills. All the wares are contained in tents and in certain cottages made of boughs, so that each particular kind of merchandise hath a several place to lie in by itself. They which sell droves of cattle are removed far from the tents. And every tent hath a cottage made of boughs belonging thereunto, for their principal and head men to repose themselves in. And in the said cottages or bowers are merchant strangers (as we noted before) freely entertained and bourded. Also they have certain Caters & purveyors among them, which make provision of victuals, and take upon them the friendly and well entertaining of strangers. And albeit an huge deal of money is spent for this behalf, yet make they a good gain thereof: for thither do resort all the merchants of that region for traffics sake, yea and a great number out of the land of Negroes, who bring with them marvelous plenty of all kinds of wares. And although they are men of a dull and gross capacity, yet are they very industrious in governing and maintaining the said fair: the beginning whereof is upon the birthday of that great deceiver Mahumet, that is, upon the twelfth day of their month called Rabih, which is the third Haraba of the year, according to their account. I myself was present at this fair in the company of my Lord the 〈◊〉 for the space of fifteen days, in the year of the Hegeira 920. which was in the year of our Lord 1511. Abriefe description of the region of Duccala. THis region beginneth westward from the river of Tensift; northward it is bounded with the Ocean sea; the south part thereof lieth upon the river of Habid; and the east part abutteth upon the river Ommirabih. It is three days journey long, and about two days journey broad. Very populous it is; the inhabitants being a rude people, and most ignorant of all civility and humanity. Walled cities it hath but a few, of all which we will in their due places particularly discourse, neither will we (by God's help) omit any thing which may seem worthy of memory. Of the town of Azaphi. IT was built by the Africans, and standeth upon the shore of the Ocean sea, containing four thousand families: inhabitants there are great store, being for the most part very uncivil and barbarous. In times passed there dwelled many jews in this town, which exercised divers handicrafts. Their soil is exceeding fertile; but so gross is their own unskilfulness and negligence, that they know neither how to till their ground, to sow their corn, or to plant vineyards: except perhaps some few of them (who would seem to be more provident than the residue) sow a quantity of potherbs in their small gardens. After the kings of Maroco gave over the government of the said region, the city of Azafi was usurped by certain which were said to fetch their original from Farchon. Howbeit in our days the said city was governed by a certain prince called Hebdurrahmam: this man for a greedy and ambitious desire of reigning murdered his own uncle: after whose death he governed the town for certain years. He had a daughter of most excellent beauty, who falling in love with a certain courtier (whose name was Hali, being son unto one Goesimen) by the help of her mother and her waiting maid enjoyed oftentimes the company of her paramour. Which when her father had intelligence of, he rebuked his wife, threatening death unto her, if she reform not the manners of her daughter: howbeit afterward he dissembled his fury. But the mother thoroughly knowing her husbands intent, told her daughter's paramour that the prince was not to be trusted, and therefore advised him to take heed unto himself. Whereupon Hali fearing lest some mischief might light upon him, began to determine with himself the prince's death, and for The occasion of the prince of Azafilin his death. his associate in this conspiracy he took a trusty friend of his who had been most familiar with him from his childhood, and was captain over a certain band of footmen. Wherefore both of them being alike mischievously bend against their prince, expected nothing else but a fit place and opportunity to put their bloody determination in practice. chose the king seeking by all means an occasion to effect his purpose, sent word unto Hali upon a certain festival day, that after their Mahometan devotions were finished he should come and walk with him; appointing a place, where he had laid a troop of men in ambush to kill Hali at his coming: which being done, he went to church. Hali suspecting no harm at all, told his associate, that now was the time wherein they might bring their purpose to effect. And this intent of theirs they forthwith declared unto ten other of their adherents: and to the end that the whole matter might go securely and certainly forward, they presently assembled a great multitude of footmen (which they feigned that they would send the next day unto Azamor) that, if they were constrained to fly, they might have aid and succour in a readiness. All their complices being armed, they came to church at the very same time when as the king with all his train was entering thereinto, and had placed himself next unto the Mahometan preacher. The church was full of auditors, and the king had his guard attending upon him, who because they knew the two foresaid young gentlemen to be very familiar with the king, suspected none evil, but suffered them to draw near unto his person. Wherefore one of the said young courtiers, as though he The prince of Azafi slain, as he was hearing of a Mahometan sermon. would have done obeizance unto the king, came before him, but Hali got in at his back and stabbed him through with a dagger: and at the very same instant the other thrust him in with his sword, and so this unhappy king, imbrued in his own blood, gave up the ghost. The king's guard went about to apprehend the authors of this fact; but being overmatched by the contrary part, and suspecting, lest the people were authors of this conspiracy, they sought to save themselves by flight. And after them followed all the rest of the assembly, till the authors of the said murder were left alone. They also immediately came forth, and persuaded the people with many words, that they had slain the king for none other cause, but only in regard that he had attempted the utter overthrow both of themselves and of the whole people. The citizens being to too credulous, advanced the two foresaid conspirators to the government of the kingdom: howbeit they agreed not long thereabout, but the commonwealth was diversly tossed hither and thither, sometime inclining to one, & sometime to another. Wherefore the Portugal merchants which usually frequented that city in great numbers, wrote unto their king to send forthwith an army of soldiers thither: for they were in good hope, that he should most easily and with small disadvantage win the said city. Howbeit the king being nothing moved with this message of theirs, would not send any forces at all, till he was more certainly informed by his said merchants touching the death of the king of Azaphi, & the dissension between the two new governors. As also, that they had made such a compact with a certain captain of the contrary faction, that it was the easiest matter in the world for him to conquer the town. For they had built them a very strong castle upon the seashore, wherein their merchandise might safely be bestowed. For the Portugals had persuaded the townsmen, that during the great tumult about the king's death, they were all of them in danger to lose both their lives and goods. Wherefore into this castle, among their vessels of oil and other wares, they cunningly conveyed guns and all other kind of warlike instruments: but the townsmen being ignorant here of, exacted nothing of the Portugals save only custom due for their wares. Now after the Portugals had sufficiently provided themselves of all kind of armour and warlike munitions, they sought by all means an occasion to fight with the citizens. At length it came to pass that a certain Portugal's servant buying meat in the city, did so provoke a butcher, that after much quarreling they fell to blows, whereupon the servant feeling himself hurt, thrust the butcher with his sword, and laid him along upon the cold earth, and then fled speedily to the castle, wherein he knew the merchants to be. The people immediately rose up in arms, and ran all of them with one consent unto the castle, to the end they might utterly destroy it, & cut the throats of all them which were therein. But the guns and crossbows which were there in a readiness made such havoc among the townsmen, that it cannot be, but they were greatly daunted. At this first encounter there were an hundredth and fifty citizens slain outright; howbeit the residue would not therefore give over, but gave the castle daily assaults. At length the king of Portugal sent aid unto his subjects, to wit five thousand footmen, two hundredth horsemen, with a great number of guns. Which forces when the citizens saw to approach, they presently betook themselves to their feet, and fled unto the mountain of Benimegher: neither durst any man stay in the town, but only he that was the author of building the castle. And so it 〈◊〉 won by the Portugals. came to pass that the Portugal forces won the town without any peril or labour. Soon after the general of the whole army sent the builder of the castle unto the king of Portugal. But the king sent him with a certain number of attendants back again to Azafi, and appointed him governor of all the region adjacent. For the Portugal king was not acquainted with their customs, neither did he sufficiently know how they governed their commonwealth. Soon after ensued the miserable desolation and ruin, not only of the city but of the whole region thereabouts. In this discourse we have been somewhat tedious, to the end we might show of how great evil a woman may be the instrument, and what intolerable mischiefs are bred by dissension. These things were a doing (as I remember) john Leo ten years old at the winning of 〈◊〉. when myself was but ten years old: and being fowerteene years of age, I had some conference with the Portugal captain aforesaid. This captain with an army of five hundredth Portugals, and more than twelve thousand Arabian horsemen giving battle to the king of Maroco, conquered all the foresaid province on the behalf of his master the Portugal king, in the year of the Hegeira 920. as in our brief treatise concerning the Mahometan religion we will declare more at large. Of Conta a town in Duccala. THis town is situate from Azafi about 20. miles, & is said to have been built by the Goths at the very same time when they possessed the whole region of Duccala: but now it is utterly laid waste: howbeit the field belonging thereto is in subjection unto certain Arabians which dwell in the said province of Duccala. Of Tit a city in Duccala. THis ancient city of Tit built of old by the Africans upon the Ocean sea-shoare, is about twenty miles distant from Azamur. It hath most large and fruitful fields belonging unto it. The inhabitants are men of a gross conceit, who regard neither husbandry nor civility. Their apparel indeed is somewhat decent, by reason that they continually have so great traffic with the Portugals. At the The city of Tit tributary unto the King of Portugal. same time when Azamur was subdued, this city also yielded itself unto the king's captain, and for certain years paid tribute unto the king. In our time the king of Fez attempted to set Duccala at liberty: howbeit not speeding of his purpose, he caused a certain Christian (which was his own treasurer) and a jew, to be hanged. And that company which remained with him, he brought unto Fez, giving them a certain portion of ground to dwell upon, which was destitute of inhabitants, being distant about twelve miles from Fez. Of the famous city of Elmedina in Duccala. ELmedina being in a manner the chief city of the whole region, is (according to the manner there) environed with walls of no great force. The inhabitants are homely as well in wit and behaviour, as in apparel: wearing such cloth as is woven in their own country. Their women wear certain silver ornaments: the men are valiant, and have great store of horses. They were all of them banished by the king of Fez out of his dominions, for that he suspected them to be friends to the Portugals. For he had heard that a certain governor of that region had counseled his subjects to pay tribute unto the Portugal king. This governor I saw barefoot led so miserably captive, that I could scarce refrain from tears; because he did not aught upon treachery, but being constrained. For, good man, he thought it much better to pay a little tribute unto the Portugals, then suddenly to lose both his life and his goods. For the restoring of whom unto his former liberty, divers noblemen greatly laboured: and so at length for a great sum of money he was released. But afterward the city remained void of Elmedina left desolate inhabitants, about the year of the Hegeira 921. Of the town of Duccala called Centumputei. THis town is built upon a rock of excellent marble: in the suburbs whereof are certain caves, wherein the inhabitants use to lay up their corn: which is there so wonderfully preserved, that it will continue an hundredth years without any ill savour or corruption. Of the number of Corn preserved 100 years. which caves resembling pits or wells, the town itself is called Centum putei. The inhabitants are of small reckoning or account, having no artificers dwelling among them but certain jews. When the king of Fez had forced the inhabitants of Elmadin to come into his dominions, he attempted also to bring thither the inhabitants of this town: but they refusing to go into a strange place, chose rather to inhabit near unto the town of Azafi, then to forsake their own native soil. Which when the king understood, he presently caused the town to be sacked; wherein nothing was found but corn, honey, and other things of small value. Of the town of Subeit in the same region. SVbeit is a small town built upon the south side of the river of Ommirabih. It is distant from Elmadin about forty miles, and is said to be subject unto certain Arabians dwelling in Duccala. Honey and corn they have great abundance: but such is their unskilfulness and ignorance, that they have neither gardens nor vineyards. At the same time when Bulahuan was won, the king of Fez brought all the people of Subeit into his dominion, and allotted unto them a certain piece of ground near unto Fez which was never before inhabited: so that Subeit remaineth waste and void of inhabitants even until this day. Of the town of Temeracost. ALso in Duccala near unto the river Ommirabih standeth a certain small town, which was built by the founder of Maroco, from whom the name thereof is thought to be derived. Inhabitants it hath great store, and containeth more than four hundredth families. It was subject in times passed unto the people of Azamur; but Azamur being spoiled by the Portugals, this town also came to nought, and the people hereof went to Elmadin. Of the town called Terga. THis town being distant about thirty miles from Azamur, is situate near unto the river Ommirabih: it is well peopled, and containeth about three hundredth families. In times past it was subject unto the inhabitants of Duccala; but after the sacking of Azafi, Hali which fought against the Portugals, for certain days lay with his army in this town. But afterward being repelled thence by the king of Fez, the town became so waste and desolate, that from thenceforth it was an habitation for owls & bats. Of the town of Bulahuan. THis town likewise standeth upon the bank of Ommirabih, & containeth about five hundredth families: in times past it had most noble and worthy inhabitants, especially in that street which lieth next unto the river, upon the high way to Maroco. In this town was a famous hospital built, which had many rooms and mansions: wherein all strangers travailing that way, were sumptuously and freely entertained at the common charge of the town. The inhabitants are most rich both in cattle & corn. Every cititizen almost hath an 100 yoke of oxen, and some of them yearly reap two thousand, some three thousand measures of corn: so that the Arabians do carry grain from thence sufficient to serve them all the year following. In the 919. year of the Hegeira, the king of Fez sent his brother to govern and defend the region of Duccala, who coming unto this town, was informed that the captain of Azemur approached thither with a great army, of purpose to destroy the town and to lead the people captive. Whereupon the king of Fez his brother sent immediately unto the said town two captains with two thousand horsemen, and eight hundredth archers. But the very same time when they entered the town, they met there the Portugal soldiers accompanied with two thousand Arabians: by whom, being fewer in number, they were so miserably slain, that scarcely twelve archers of all the eight hundredth could escape with the horsemen unto the next mountains. Howbeit afterward the Arabians renewed the skirmish, & 150. of the Portugal horsemen being slain, they put the enemy to flight. Whereupon the king of Fez his brother passed on to Duccala, requiring tribute of the people, and promising that as long as he lived he would stand between them and their enemies. Afterward being vanquished, he returned home to. Fez unto the king his brother. But the inhabitants seeing that the king's brother had received tribute of them and had stood them in no stead, they presently forsook the town, and fled unto the mountain of Tedles: for they feared least the Portugals army would come upon them, and exacting a greater sum, would lead them presently captive which could not disburse it. At all these accidents I myself was present, and saw the foresaid slaughter of the archers: for I stood about a mile distant from them, and was mounted upon a swift courser. At the same time I was traveling to Maroco, being sent by the king of Fez, to declare unto the king of Maroco, and unto the Seriffo, that the king of Fez his brother was presently to depart unto Duccala: for which cause they were requested to provide soldiers for the better resistance of the Portugals army. Of the city of Azamur. AZamur, a town of Duccala, was built by the Africans upon that part of the Ocean sea shore where the river of * Or 〈◊〉. Ommirabih disemboqueth; being distant from Elmadina southward about thirty miles. Very large it is, and well inhabited, and containeth to the number of five thousand families. Here do the Portugal merchants continually reside. The inhabitants are very civil, and decently appareled. And albeit they are divided into two parts, yet have they continual peace among themselves. Pulse and corn they have great plenty; though their gardens and orchards bring forth nought else but figs. They have such plenty of fishes, that they receive yearly for them sometime six thousand, and sometime seven thousand ducats. And their time of fishing dureth from October to the end of April. They use to fry fishes in a certain pan with oil, whereby they gather an incredible quantity of trane: neither use they any other oil to put into their lamps. Once a year the Portugals make a voyage hither, and do carry away so great abundance of fish, that they only do disburse the sum of ducats aforesaid. Hence it is, that the king of Portugal, being alured for gain, hath often sent most warlike fleets to surprise this town: the first whereof, in regard of the General's indiscretion, was the greatest part dispersed and sunk upon the sea. Afterward the king sent another navy of two hundred sail well furnished, at the very sight whereof the citizens were so discomfited, that they all betook themselves to flight; and the throng was so great at their entrance of the gates, that more than fourscore citizens were slain therein. Yea a certain prince which came to aid them, was, for his safety constrained to let himself down by a rope on the farther side of the city. The inhabitants were presently dispersed hither and thither; some fleeing on horseback, and others on foot. Neither could you (I know) have refrained from tears, had you seen the weak women, the silly old men, and the tender children run away barefooted and forlorn. But before the Christians gave any assault, the jews (which shortly after compounded with the Azamur won by the Portugals. king of Portugal, to yield the city to him, on condition that they should sustain no injury) with a general consent, opened the gates unto them: and so the Christians obtained the city, and the people went to dwell part of them to Sala, and part to Fez. Neither do I think that God for any other cause brought this calamity upon them, but only for the horrible vice of Sodomy, whereunto the greatest part of the citizens were so notoriously addicted, that they could scarce see any young stripling, who escaped their lust. Of the town called Meramei. THis town was built by the Goths upon a plain, almost fourteen miles distant from Azafi, and it containeth to the number of four hundred families: the soil thereabout aboundeth greatly with olives and corn. It was governed in times passed by the prince of Azafi; but afterward being surprised by the Portugals, and the inhabitants being all put to flight, it remained well nigh one whole year destitute of people. Howbeit soon after making a league with the Portugals, each man retired unto his own home. And now I think it not amiss to report as concerning the mountains of Duccala those things which may seem worthy of memory. Of the mountain called Benimegher. BEnimegher is distant from Azafi about twelve miles, containing divers artisans of all sorts, every one of which hath an house at Azafi. This mountain is so exceeding fruitful for oil and corn, that a man would scarce believe it. It was once in subjection unto the prince of Azafi, but the inhabitants of Azafi being put to flight, as hath been aforesaid, had no other place for their refuge, but only this mountain of Benimegher. Afterward they paid tribute for certain years unto the Portugals; but when the king of Fez came thither with his army, he carried with him part of them unto Fez, and the residue returned to Azafi: for they were determined rather to endure any injury, then to submit themselves to the Christians government. Of the green mountain. THis mountain is of an exceeding height, beginning eastward from the river of Ommirabih, and extending westward to the hills called in their language Hasara, and it divideth Duccala from some part of Tedles. Likewise this mountain is very rough and full of woods, affording great The fruit called by the Italians Frutto Africano. store of acorns and pineapples, and a certain kind of red fruit which the Italians commonly call Africano. Many hermits also do inhabit upon this mountain, living with no other kind of victuals, but such as the woods yield unto them. For they are above five and twenty 〈◊〉 distant from all towns and cities. Here are great store of fountains and of altars built after the Mahometan fashion, and many ancient houses also erected by the Africans. At the foot of this mountain there is a notable lake, very like unto the lake of Bolsena in the Roman territory. In which lake are found infinite numbers of fishes, as namely eels, pickerels, and of divers other sorts, which, to my remembrance, I never saw in Italy: but there is no man that goeth about to take any fish in this lake, no marvel therefore though the number be so great. Upon a certain time when Mahumet the king of Fez traveled Great plentic of fish. that way towards the kingdom of Maroco, he encamped his army eight days upon the side of this lake. Some of his company he licensed to fish the same, amongst whom I saw certain that took off their shirts and coats, sowing up their sleeves and collars, and putting certain hoops within them to keep them from closing together, and so used them in steed of nets, wherewith notwithstanding they caught many thousand fishes: but others which had nets indeed, got more than they. And all by reason that the fishes (as we will now declare) were perforce driven into the nets. For king Mahumet being there accompanied with fourteen thousand Arabian horsemen, which brought a great many more camels with them; and having five thousand horsemen under the conduct of his brother, with an huge army of fooremen, caused them all at once to enter the lake, insomuch that there was scarce water enough to satisfy the camels thirst: wherefore it was no marvel though the fishes came so fast into the nets. Upon the banks of this lake are many trees bearing leaves like unto pine-leaves, among the boughs whereof, such abundance of turtles do nestle, that the inhabitants reap wonderful commodity by them. Mahumet having refreshed himself eight days by the foresaid lake, was then desirous to view The green mountain aforesaid: myself with a great number of courtiers and learned men attending upon him. So often as he saw any altar, he would command his army there to make a stand, and lowly kneeling on his knees, would say these words following: Thou knowest (oh Lord my God) that I came hither for none other cause, but to release the people of Duccala from the Arabians and cruel Christians: which attempt of mine if thou thinkest to be unjust, let me only feel the punishment of this offence: for these my followers are guiltless. And thus we ranged up and down the green hill one whole day: but at night we returned unto our tents. The next day it was king Mahumets' pleasure to go on hunting and hawking, whereupon his hounds and hawks (which he had in great abundance) were brought forth: howbeit that sport yielded nought but wild geese, ducks, turtle-doves, and other fowls. But the day following the king called for his hounds, falcons, and eagles: their game were hares, dear, porcupikes, roe-deere, wolves, quails and starlings: and by reason that none had hunted or hawked there an hundred years before, they had very good pastime. And after we had here stayed certain days, the king with his army marching unto the said Elmadin a town of Duccala, willed all his learned men and priests which he had john Leo sent ambassador from the King of Fez unto Maroco. brought with him, to return unto Fez. But myself (as ambassador) and a certain number of soldiers he sent unto Maroco: this was done in the 922. year of the Hegeira, and in the year of our Lord 1512. A description of the region of Hascora. THis region is bounded northward with certain mountains which adjoin upon Duccala; westward with a river running by the foot of mount Hadimmei, which we called before Tensift; and eastward by the river Quadelhabid, that is, the river of servants, which river divideth Hascora from Tedles. And so likewise the hills of Duccala do separate Hascora from the Ocean sea. The inhabitants of this region are far more civil, than the people of Duccala. This province yieldeth great abundance of oil, of Marockin skins, and of goats, of whose hair they make cloth and saddles. And hither do all the bordering regions bring their goatskins, whereof the foresaid Marockin or Cordovan leather is made. This people hath great traffic with the Portugals, with whom they exchange the foresaid leather and saddles, for cloth. Their coin is all one with the coin of Duccala. Also the Arabians usually buy oil and other necessaries our of this region. Now let us in order describe all the towns and cities of the said region. Of Elmadin a town in Hascora. THis town of Hascora being called by the inhabitants Elmadin, is built upon the side of mount Atlas, and containeth 〈◊〉 then two thousand families. It standeth almost fourscore and ten miles eastward of Maroco, and about 60. miles from Duccala. here may you find many leatherdressers, and all other kind of artisans, with a great multitude of jewish merchants. This town is environed with a certain wood, which is full of olive, and walnut-trees. The inhabitants are continually, in a manner, oppressed with wars among themselves, and against a certain little town being four miles distant from thence. Neither dare any come upon the plain lying between these two towns, (save women only and slaves) except he be well and strongly guarded. So that 〈◊〉 man is feign to maintain an harquebusier or archer for his defence, whom he monethlyalloweth ten or twelve pieces of gold, which are worth sixteen ducats Italian. Likewise in Elmadin there are certain men of great and profound learning, which are appointed to be judges and notaries. Whatsoever tribute or custom strangers do pay, is delivered unto certain treasurers and customers of the town; which employ it afterward for the public benefit. They are likewise constrained to pay certain tribute unto the Arabians, for sundry possessions which they enjoy in the foresaid valley; but that money gaineth them at the Arabians hand ten times so much, or more. In my return from Maroco I thought good to travel by this town, where I was right sumptuously entertained by one of Granada my countryman, who was exceeding rich, having served as an archer in this region for fifteen years. And albeit the town of Elmadin had a stately hospital, wherein all merchants traveling that way, were entertained at the common charge; yet my countryman would not suffer us there to lodge, but for three days together most courteously welcomed myself, nine courtiers, and all the servants and retinue which we brought with us: unto which company of ours the townsmen presented, some of them calves, some lambs, and some other brought hens. Seeing upon a time so many goats in the town, I merrily demanded of my countryman, why he gave us no kids-flesh to eat: he answered that that was accounted among them of all others the most base and homely meat. Their fair and beautiful women are so fond of strangers that if secret occasion be offered they will not refuse their dishonest company. Of the city of Alemdin. near unto the foresaid town standeth another commonly called Alemdin, being situate four miles to the west thereof in a valley, amidst four most high hills, whereupon the place is exceeding cold. The inhabitants are merchants, artisans, and gentlemen, & families it containeth to the number of one thousand. This town hath been at continual war with the town last before mentioned: but in our time both of them were by the means of a certain merchant brought in subjection unto the King of Fez, as we will now declare. There was a merchant of Fez which had a paramour in this By what means the towns of Elmadin and 〈◊〉 became subject unto the King of Fez. town, whom he determined forthwith to marry; but when the marriage day was come, this merchant was beguiled of his love by the governor of the town himself, which disappointment grieved him full sore, albeit he dissembled the matter as well as he could. Returning home to the King of Fez, the said merchant presented unto him most rich and costly gifts, making humble suit unto his majesty that he would allow him an hundred principal archers, three hundred horsemen, and four hundred footmen; saying, that himself would maintain them all at his own costs and charges, and would win the said town of Alemdin for the King's behalf, and would assure the King seven thousand ducats for yearly tribute. This offer pleased the King right well, and that he might declare his princely liberality, he would not suffer the merchant to give wages unto any, but only to the archers. And so with all expedition he commanded his governor of Tedles to provide the said merchant so many horsemen and so many footmen, and two captains over the army. At length coming before Alemdin they besieged it six days: which being expired, the townsmen told their governor in plain terms, that they would not for his cause incur the king of Fez his displeasure, nor suffer any inconvenience. Whereupon he putting himself in a beggars weed, attempted to escape away: but being known and apprehended, he was brought before the merchant, who committed him to prison. And so the townsmen presently opening their gates received the merchant with all his troops, & yielded themselves to him & to the king of Fez. The parents of the foresaid maid protested unto the merchant', that the governor by main force had deprived them of his paramour. Howbeit she herself was big with child by the governor; but after the merchant knew that she was delivered of her child, he bore her affection again, and at length married her. And the wretched governor was the same day by the judges pronounced guilty of fornication, and was stoned to death. Well, the merchant remained governor and Lord of both towns, establishing most firm peace between them, & duly paying unto the king of Fez all the yearly tribute which he had promised. I myself afterward coming to the foresaid town grew familiarly acquainted with this famous merchant. The same year departing from Fez I took my journey towards Constantinople. Of Tagodast a town in Hascora. THis town is built upon the top of a certain high mountain, having four other high mountains round about it. Between which four mountains and the said town are divers most large and beautiful gardens replenished with all kind of fruits: quinces here are of an incredible bigness. Their vines dispersing themselves upon the boughs of trees do make most pleasant bowers and walks: the grapes whereof being red, are for their bigness, called in the language of that people, hens eggs. They have here Grapes of marvelous bigness. White honey. great 〈◊〉 of oil and most excellent honey: some of their honey being white, and some yellow. This town hath many fountains about it, which joining into one stream, do serve for many watermils thereabouts. Here are likewise great store of artisans, who exercise themselves only about things necessary. The inhabitants are somewhat civil, their women are most beautiful, being most gorgeously decked with silver jewels. Their oil they carry unto the next cities southward of them on this side Atlas: but they send their leather unto Fez and Mecnasa. Their plain is almost six miles long: the soil being most fruitful for corn: in regard whereof the townsmen pay certain yearly tribute unto the Arabiaus. This town hath judges, priests, and a great number of gentlemen. Upon a time as I traveled this way, it was my hap to meet with a certain ancient governor of the same place, who was grown blind with extreme age. This aged sire (as by some I understood) was in his youth a most valiant and stout person, insomuch that after many other noble exploits, he slew with his own hand four captains which were most deadly enemies unto the people of Tagodast. And afterward he handled the matter so wisely, that he joined those in perfect league which before time had waged continual war. Here no commonwealth-matter is concluded by the magistrates of the town without his special advise and 〈◊〉. By this worthy Senator myself with fourscore 〈◊〉 were honourably entertained, and had dainty meats every day set before us, of game which was newly hunted. He recounted most familiarly unto us all his labours which he had bestowed in concluding of the forefaid league: neither had this good man any so entire and hidden secrets, which he revealed not unto us, as to his loving friends. At my departure I offered him money for myself and my company: but he, like a liberal man, would by no means accept of it; saying, that albeit he ought the king of Fez much duty and good will, yet did he not bestow that liberality for his sake: but that whatsoever wealth he enjoyed, his parents bequeathed unto him upon this condition, that he should show himself kind and bountiful unto all his kindred, acquaintance, and strangers traveling that way: and although he were free from that condition, yet his love towards God, and the liberality which God had planted in him, could require no less at his hands. Yea, he said, that by God's good blessing and providence he had reaped the same year seven thousand bushels of corn: insomuch, that himself and all his neighbours were provided for in abundance. Moreover, that he possessed of sheep and goats more than an hundred thousand, the wool whereof only, and some small portion of butter, he reserved to himself, but as for the cheese and milk, he gave it all frankly unto his shepherds. In this town there is none that selleth either cheese, butter, milk, or any otber such commodity, though each one hath great abundance of cattle. Howbeit their hides, oil, and wool they utter in the provinces thereabout. The reverend sire added this moreover: If it shall please (saith he) the king of Fez to return home from Duccala through this my region, I will come forth to meet him, and will submit myself wholly unto him, as unto my most liege and sovereign prince. Thus myself a mere stranger being so honourably dismissed by this worthy Senator, could not sufficiently commend his courtesy and bounteous dealing towards strangers. Of the city of Elgiumuha. near unto the foresaid town, within five miles, standeth Elgiumuha. It was in our time built upon the top of an high mountain, and containeth to the number of five hundred families, besides so many families comprised in the villages of that mountain. Here are innumerable springs and fountains, and most pleasant and fruitful gardens in all places. Here are likewise walnut-trees huge and tall. The little hills environing this mountain do yield barley and olives in great abundance. In the said town are great numbers of artisans, as smiths, leatherdressers, and such like. And because they have here notable yron-mines, they make plenty of horseshoes. And whatsoever commodity proceedeth of their labour, they carry it to foreign regions where they think it is wanting: from whence they bring home slaves, woad, and the skins of certain beasts, whereof they make most defensive and warlike shields: these shields they transport unto Fez, exchanging them there for weapons, cloth, and other such things as they stand in need of. This town standeth so near unto the high way, that the boys will stand gazing and wondering at merchants as they come by, especially if they wear any strange attire. The residue of inhabitants upon this mountain are all commanded and governed by them of the town. They say that the people of Tagodast aforesaid were the first founders of this town: for so upon a time it befell, that whereas the principal men of Tagodast grew to dissension among themselves, the common sort favouring neither faction, built Elgiumuha, and left Tagodast to be inhabited by their governors: hence it is, that even at this day they are here only ignoble and base people, whereas there they are all gentlemen. Of Bzo a town in Hascora. THE ancient town of Bzo is built upon an high hill about twenty miles westward from the town last mentioned. Within three miles of Bzo runneth the foresaid river of Guadelhabid. The townsmen are honest people, exercising merchandise, and going decently appareled: To them which inhabit the deserts they carry cloth, oil, and leather. Their mountains abound with olives, corn, and all kind of fruits: and of their grapes they make every year most excellent and sweet raisins. Figs they have great plenty: and their walnut-trees are so high, that a puttock may securely build his nest upon the tops: for it is impossible for any man to climb up. On each side of the way which leadeth from hence to the river Guadelhabid there are most pleasant and beautiful gardens. Myself (I remember) was here present when their oranges, figs, and other fruits were grown to ripeness; and was entertained by a certain priest, who dwelled not far from a stately Mahometan temple, standing by that river which runneth through the marketplace of the town. Of the mountain called Tenueves. THis mountain is situate over against Hascora upon that part of Atlas which trendeth southward. It hath many most valiant and warlike inhabitants both horsemen and footmen; and a great number of horses of small stature. It yieldeth abundance of woad & barley: but other grain they have none at all, so that they have no other but barley bread to eat. At all times of the year you shall here see plenty of snow. Here are likewise sundry noblemen & gentlemen, all which are subject unto one prince. To this prince they pay great yearly tribute for the maintenance of his soldiers, for he wageth continual war with the inhabitants of mount Tensita. The said prince hath 〈◊〉 1000 most valiant horsemen always in a readiness: & so many likewise do the noblemen of this mountain continually keep at their own costs and charges. Moreover the prince hath an hundredth soldiers part of them bowmen, and part arquebusiers, to guard and attend upon his person in all places. Coming myself to see this mountain, it was my chance to find out the said prince, who was desirous exceedingly to be praised of all men: but for liberality, courtesy, and civility, his like I think was not to be found. Unto the Arabian tongue (albeit he were ignorant thereof) he bore a marvelous affection: and was greatly delighted to hear any man expound a sentence or verse, which was penned to his own commendation. The uncle of 〈◊〉 Leo sent ambassador to the king of Tombuto. At the very same time when mine uncle was sent ambassador from the king of Fez to the king of Tombuto, I myself also travailed in his company: we were no sooner entered the region of Dara (which is an hundredth miles distant from the said princes dominions) but he hearing of my uncles fame (who was an excellent Orator, and a most witty Poet) sent letters unto the prince of Dara, requesting him that he would persuade mine uncle to travail unto Tombuto by mount Tenueves: for he had a great desire to see him, & to speak with him. Howbeit my uncle answered, that it beseemed not a king's ambassador to visit any princes far out of his way, and so to defer his masters weighty affairs. But, to the end that he might in some sort satisfy the said prince, he promised to send me his nephew unto him, which might in his name salute him and do him due honour. Afterward he delivered me certain costly gifts to present the prince withal: as namely a curious pair of stirrups double gilt and finely wrought after the Morisco fashion, which cost (as I remember) five and twenty ducats; and a rich pair of spurs of fifteen ducats price. Moreover he sent two bands of silk artificially entwined with gold, one whereos was tawny, and the other blue. He sent also a most excellent book, containing the lives of certain famous and devout men of Africa, together with certain verses in the commendation of the prince himself. Thus being furnished with the things aforesaid, I set forth on my journey, taking two horsemen to accompany me unto the foresaid mountain: and so as I road, I invented verses in the prince's praise. At our first arrival there, the prince with a great train of his nobility was ridden forth on hunting. Who being informed of my coming, caused me forthwith to be sent for, and after salutations had, he asked me how my uncle did: I answered that he was in good health, and at his highness disposition. Then he commanded me to be carried unto a stately lodging, where, after my tedious journey, I might repose myself, till he were returned from hunting. And so within night returning from his game, he sent for me immediately to come into his chamber of presence: where, having first performed due obeisance unto him, I presented him with mine uncles gifts: which (as I suppose) were most acceptable unto him. At length I gave him the verses which mine uncle had indicted: which he presently commanded one of his secretaries to read. And as he was expounding each sentence and word unto the prince, it was a wonder to see, what exceeding alacrity and joy appeared in his countenance. The verses being read, he sat down to supper, willing me not only to be his guest, but also to sit next unto his person. His table was furnished with mutton, veal roasted and sodden, and with bread baked like a cake. divers other dishes likewise were served in, but I remember not all the particulars. Supper being ended, I greeted the prince in this wise: Your highness (my lord) hath received all those gifts, which your humble servant mine uncle (in token of his loyal disposition, and that he might be had of your highness in remembrance) hath sent you: Now I being both his sister's son and his scholar, have nought else but a few words to present your princeliness withal: may it please you therefore to accept of such homely The excellent wit & towardliness of john Leo at 16. years of age. stuff as my wit could suddenly afford in the time of my journey. These words ended, I began to read my verses unto him: and being as then but sixteen years of age, the prince gave right joyful and diligent ear unto me; and whatsoever he understood not sufficiently, he would cause it to be 〈◊〉. Now being weary with his hunting, and perceiving the night to be far spent, he wished all of us to go to bed. Early the next morning I was sent for, to a stately breakfast, after the conclusion whereof, he caused an hundredth ducats to be delivered me for a present unto my uncle, together with three slaves, which should attend upon him in his journey. But on me he bestowed fifty ducats and a good horse; and to each of my two servants he gave ten ducats: giving mine uncle to understand, that his mean gift which he bestowed, was sent not in regard of his worthy presents, but for a recompense of his excellent verses. For as touching mine uncles gifts, he said he would defer the requital thereof till his return from Tombuto, what time he would more fully manifest his good will towards him. Then commanding one of his secretaries to direct us on our way, & most courteously bidding us farewell; he told us that the same day he was going to make an assault upon his enemies. And so departing from him, I returned to mine uncle. Thus much I thought good to set down, for to show, that even Africa is not utterly destitute of courteous and bountiful persons. Of the mountain called Tensita. TEnsita is a part of Atlas, beginning westward from the mountain last before mentioned, eastward extending to mount deeds, and southward bordering upon the desert of Dara. This mountain is well stored with inhabitants, having more than fifty castles about it, the walls whereof are built of lime and rough stone: and by reason of the southerly situation it is ever almost destitute of rain. All the said castles stand not far from the river of Dara, some being three, and some four miles distant there from. The greatest prince in all this region hath under his command well nigh fifteen hundredth horsemen, and about so many footmen as the prince of Tenueves before named. And albeit these two princes are most nearly conjoined in blood, yet can neither of them refrain from most cruel wars against the other. It is a wonder to see, what plenty of dates this mountain affordeth: the inhabitants give themselves partly to husbandry, and partly to traffic. Barley they have in great abundance: but of other grain and of flesh their scarcity is incredible: for that region hath no flocks nor droves at all. The prince of this mountain commonly receiveth for yearly tribute twenty thousand pieces of gold: every of which pieces containeth not so much by one third part, as an Italian ducat. There hath always been so great amity between the king of Fez and this prince, that either often sendeth rich gifts unto other. Myself (I remember) once saw A most stately and rich present. a most magnificent gift presented to the said king in the name of this prince, to wit, fifty men slaves, and fifty women slaves brought out of the land of Negroes, ten eunuchs, twelve camels, one Giraffa, sixteen civet-cats, one pound of civet, a pound of amber, and almost six hundredth skins of a certain beast called by them Elamt, whereof they make shields, 〈◊〉 skin being worth at Fez, eight ducats; twenty of the men slaves cost twenty ducats a piece, and so did fifteen of the women slaves; every 〈◊〉 was valued at forty, every camel at fifty, and every civet-cat at two hundredth ducats: and a pound of civet and amber is sold at Fez for threescore 〈◊〉. Besides these were sent divers other particulars, which for brevities sake I omit. I myself was in presence when these gifts were offered to the king: the prince's ambassador was a Negro borne, being gross and of a 〈◊〉 stature, and for his speech and behaviour most barbarous: this fellow delivered a letter unto the king, which was most absurdly and rudely penned: but the Oration which he made in the behalf of his prince was well worse; so that at the pronouncing thereof the king and all that were in presence could hardly 〈◊〉 from laughter, but were feign to hold their hands and garments before their faces, lest they should have seemed too uncivil. Howbeit his oration being ended, the king caused him to be most honourably entertained by the priest of the chief temple; with whom himself and all his company having remained fourteen days, were at length by the king's liberality frankly and freely dismissed. Of the mountain called Gogideme. near unto the foresaid mountaives standeth another called Gogideme. This mountain is inhabited only upon the north part thereof: but the south side is utterly destitute of inhabitants: the reason whereof they affirm to be, because that when * Read of this Abraham before in the description of the city of Maroco. Abraham king of Maroco was vanquished and expelled out of his kingdom by his disciple Elmaheli, he fled unto this mountain. The inhabitants moved with the king's distress endeavoured (though to small purpose) all that they could, to succour him: whereof his disciple Elmaheli was no sooner informed; but coming with an huge army and with great fury upon them, he destroyed all their mansions and villages, and the inhabitants he partly put to flight, and partly to the sword. And those which now remain there are most base, beggarly and slavish people: Howbeit they sell some quantity of oil and barley: neither indeed will their soil afford any other commodities. They have plenty of goats and mules; but their mules and horses are but of mean stature. The situation and quality of this mountain will not suffer the inhabitants to be liberal. Of the two mountains called Tesevon. Tesevon consisteth of two mountains standing together, beginning westward from Gogideme, & ending at the mountain of Tagodast. The inhabitants are oppressed with extreme poverty: for their ground will yield nothing but barley and mill. Forth of this mountain springeth a certain river, which runneth through most pleasant fields. But because the mountainers never descend into the same fields, hence it is that the Arabians only enjoy that river. To have said thus much of these may suffice: now let us come unto the description of Tedles. A description of the region of Tedles. THE small region of Tedles beginneth westward at the river of Guadelhabid, and stretcheth to that part of the great river Ommirabih where Guadelhabid taketh his beginning; southward it bordereth upon Atlas, and northward it extendeth unto that place where Guadelhabid falleth into Ommirabih. This region is in a manner three square: for the said two rivers springing out of Atlas run northward, till approaching by little and little, they meet all in one. Of Tefza the principal town in Tedles TEfza the chief town of all Tedles, was built by the Africans upon the side of mount Atlas, some five miles from the plain. The town walls are built of most excellent marble, which is called in their language Tefza, and hereupon the town was so called likewise. here do reside most rich merchants of all sorts: of Iewes here are two hundred families, who exercise merchandise and divers other trades. And here you shall find many outlandish merchants which buy from hence certain black mantles with hoods, commonly called Ilbernus: of these there are great numbers both in Ilbernus. Italy and Spain. Neither are there in Fez any kind of wares, which are not here to be bought: if any merchant will exchange his wares for other, he may the sooner be dispatched: for the townsmen are furnished with divers kinds of merchandise, as namely with slaves, horses, woad, leather, and such like: whereas if the foreigners were desirous to sell their wares for ready money, they should never attain to the value of them. They have golden coin without any image or superscription: their apparel is decent: and their women are beautiful and of good behaviour. In this town are divers Mahometan temples, and many priests and judges. Their commonwealth was wont always to be most prosperous and well-governed; but degenerating from better to worse, they were afterward so turmoiled with dissensions and wars, that certain being expelled hence, came unto the king of Fez, humbly beseeching him that by force he would restore them to their native country, conditionally that all matters well succeeding on their side, they should deliver the town unto the king. This condition was accepted, and the king having a thousand brave horsemen ready to do the feat, joined five hundred horse, and two hundred gunner's on horseback unto them. Moreover he wrote unto certain Arabians (which are commonly called Zuair, and have almost four thousand horesemen at command) that, if need so required, they would come in, and aid his troops. Over the said army the king appointed as captain one Ezzeranghi, a most valiant and redoubted warrior. Who having pitched his tents near unto the town, began presently to give the townsmen an assault. But when he had done his best, the warlike citizens easily gave him the repulse. Moreover the Arabians called Benigeber were coming with five thousand horsemen to succour the town. Which so soon as Captain Ezzeranghi was advertised of, he raised his siege, and went suddenly to meet with the foresaid Arabians; whom after he had discomfited in three days, he then safely returned to lay new siege. The citizens seeing themselves cut off from all hope of the Arabians aid, began seriously to treat of peace with the enemy; which the easilier to obtain, they promised to defray all the kings charges laid out in this expedition, and to pay him for yearly tribute more than ten thousand ducats: howbeit with this proviso, that they for whose cause the king had sent the said army, if they entered the town, should be secluded from all Magistracy and government. But they hearing of these conditions, spoke unto the Captain in manner following: Sir, if it shall please you to restore us unto our former dignity and state, we will procure you above an hundredth thousand ducats. Neither is there cause why any man should fear any injury or violence; for we protest unto you that no man shall be a farthing endamaged by us: only we will exact at our adversaries hands the revenues of our possessions which they have these three years unjustly detained from us. The sum whereof will amount unto thirty thousand ducats, all which we are most willing to bestow upon you, in regard of those labours which you have undergone for our sakes. Moreover the revenues of the whole region shall be yours, which will come to twenty thousand ducats. And the jews tribute shall yield you ten thousand more. Upon these speeches the Captain returned answer unto the citizens, that his master the king of Fez had most faithfully promised those which moved him unto this war, that he would never forsake them till they had attained their heart's desire: for which cause he was more willing to have them govern, than the townsmen which were now in possession, and that for many reasons: wherefore (saith he) if you be determined to yield unto the king, assure yourselves, that no inconvenience shall light upon you: but if you will to the end remain perverse and obstinate, be ye assured also, that the king will deal most extremely with you. This message was no sooner known unto the people, but forthwith they began to be distracted into divers factions: some there were which stood for the king, and others chose rather manfully to fight it out, then that the king should be admitted: insomuch that the whole city resounded with brawlings, quarrels, and contentions. This tumult came at length by spies unto the captains ear, who presently caused half his forces to take arms; and by their means in three hours space he won the city with little slaughter on his part. For those townsmen that favoured the king, did what they could on the inside, to set open the gates, and so did the assailants on the outside, neither did any resist their attempts, by reason of the foresaid civil dissensions. Whereupon Captain Ezzeranghi entering the city, caused the king's colours to be advanced in the marketplace, and upon the walls, charging his horsemen to range about the city, that no citizens might escape by flight; and last of all made a proclamation unto all his soldiers, that they should not upon pain of death offer any injury unto the townsmen. Then he caused all the chieftains of the contrary faction to be brought prisoners unto him: to whom he threatened captivity and thraldom, till they should disburse so much as the king had spent in that expedition: the total sum was twelve thousand ducats, which the wives and kinsfolks of the captives presently paid. Neither could they yet obtain their liberty: for the exiles, for whose cause the king had sent that army, demanded restitution of all their goods, which the other had for certain years detained from them. The captives therefore were committed that night, & the next morning lawyers & attorneys came to plead on both sides before a judge & the captain. Howbeit after a great deal of tedious fending and proving, having concluded nothing at all, the captain was so weary, that he left them, and went to supper. Afterward he caused the captives to be brought forth, wishing them to pay the sums demanded; for (saith he) If you come before the king of Fez he will make you to disburse more than twice the value. At which words being terrified, they wrote unto their wives, if they would ever see them alive, to procure them money by some means. Eight days after, the women brought as many gold rings, bracelets, and other such jewels, as were valued at eight and twenty thousand ducats: for they had rather bestow these for the ransom of their husbands, then to reveal their great wealth; bringing forth all their costly ornaments, as if their money had been quite exhausted. When therefore the king and the exiles were fully satisfied, insomuch that nothing seemed now to let the said captives from liberty, the captain spoke unto them in this wise: Sirs, I have signified (though unwillingly) unto my master the king all matters which have here passed between us: for I dare by no means release you, till the king's letters authorise me so to do: Howbeit, I wish you to be of good cheer; for sithence you have honestly restored to every man his own, there is no doubt but yourselves shall shortly be set at liberty. The same night the captain A notable and effectual practice to wring more money out of the 〈◊〉 purses. called a friend of his, whose counsel he found oftentimes to take good effect, and asked him by what means he might without suspicion of guile or treachery, wring any more sums of money from them. Whereunto his friend replied: make them believe (quoth he) that you are willed by the king's letters to put them all to death: howbeit, that you will not, for pities sake, deal so extremely with innocent persons: but that you will send them to Fez to receive punishment or pardon at the king's pleasure. Hereupon the king's letters were counterfeited, which the day following the captain with a lamentable voice published unto his two & forty prisoners. My friends (quoth he) so it is, that the king having received some sinister and wrong information, that you should go about to make a conspiracy: most firmly enjoineth me by these his letters, to put each one of you to death: which, though it be full sore against my will, yet needs I must obey my prince, if I will not wittingly run upon mine own destruction. And then shedding some feigned tears: sithence (quoth he) we can upon the sudden devise no better course, I think it most convenient to send you with a troop of horsemen unto the king, whose wrath (perhaps) you may by some means pacify. Whereupon the captives growing far more pensive than before, recommended themselves unto God, and to the captains clemency, requesting his good will with many tears. And forthwith there comes one in among them, who advised them to make up some round sum of money, & therewithal to try if they could appease the king: and seemed likewise to entreat the captain, that he would by his letters stand their friend to the king. Hereunto the captives agreeing with one voice, promised that they would give the king a great sum of gold, and would most liberally reward the captain. The captain, as though forsooth this condition much disliked him, asked at length how much gold they meant to send the king: one said that he would disburse a thousand ducats, another, that he would give five hundredth, and the third, eight hundredth. But the captain making show, that this was too little, said that he was loath to make signification of so small a sum unto the king: howbeit, better it were for you (quoth the captain) to go yourselves unto the king, with whom perhaps you shall make a more reasonable end than you are aware of. But they fearing hard measure, if they should be carried unto the king, were far more importunate with the captain then before, that he would (to his power) be good unto them. Wherefore the captain (as though at length he had been moved with their vehement petitions) spoke unto them in this wise: here are of you (my masters) two and forty noble & rich persons; if you will promise two thousand ducats a man, I will signify on your behalf so much unto the king, and so I hope to persuade him: but if this condition will not please him, then must I needs send you to make answer for yourselves. This condition they all of them yielded unto; howbeit with this proviso, that every man should give proportionably to his wealth, and that they might have for the payment fifteen days of farther respite. The twelfth day following the captain feigned, that he had received letters from his king, signifying that the king, for his sake, would show the captives more favour. The fifteenth day he had paid unto him eighty four thousand ducats: neither could he sufficiently wonder, how in so small a town, among two and forty inhabitants only, such huge sums of money could so readily be found. Then wrote he unto his king how all matters had passed, demanding what should be done with the gold. And so the king forthwith sent two of his secretaries with an hundredth horsemen to fetch home the said gold unto Fez. The captives being restored to their liberty, presented the said captain with horses, slaves, civet, and such like gifts, to the value of two thousand ducats: giving him exceeding thanks for their liberty; and requesting him to take their presents in good worth: for, had not their treasure been quite consumed, they said, they would have bestowed far greater upon him. Wherefore, from thence forward, that region was subject unto the king of Fez, and to the foresaid captain Ezzeranghi, till he was treacherously slain by certain Arabians. Moreover the king receiveth from that city, even at this present twenty thousand ducats for yearly tribute. I have in this narration been indeed somewhat more large than need required; howbeit perhaps I did it, because I myself was present in all the expedition, and was an earnest mediator for the citizens release: neither saw I ever (to my remembrance) a greater mass of gold, than was by subtlety drawn from them. Yea the king himself never had so much gold in his coffers at one time: for albeit he receiveth yearly thirty thousand ducats, yet never could he store himself with so much at once, nor his father before him. These things were done in the year of the Hegeira 915. and in the year of our Lord 1506. And here I would have the reader to consider, what man's industry and wit may do in getting of money. The King marveled much at this sum of gold; but afterward he had greater cause to wonder at the wealth of a certain jew, who paid more out of his own purse, than all the forenamed captives. And his riches were the cause, why the King of Fez exacted fifty thousand ducats from the jews, for that they were said to favour his enemies. I myself bore him company, that went in the King's name to receive the said sum of the jews. Of Efza a town of Tedles. THis town standeth two miles from Tefza, and containeth almost six hundred families, being built upon a little hill at the foot of mount Atlas. In this town are many Moors and jews which make * Or 〈◊〉, being a kind of garment. Bernussi. The natural inhabitants are either artificers or husbandmen, being in subjection to the governors of Tefza. Their women are excellent spinsters, whereby they are said to gain more than the men of the town. Between this town and Tefza runneth a certain river called by the inhabitants Derne, which springing forth of Atlas, runneth through the plains of that region, till at length it falleth into Ommirabih. On both sides of this river are most beautiful and large gardens replenished with all kinds of fruits. The townsmen here are most liberal and courteous people, and will permit merchants traveling that way freely to come into their gardens, and to take thence as much fruit as they will. No people are slower than they for paying of debts: for albeit the merchants lay down ready money to receive Bernussi within three months, yet are they sometime feign to stay an whole year. Myself was in this town when the king's army lay in Tedles, and then they yielded themselves to the king. The second time that the kings general of his army came unto them, they presented him with fifteen horses, and as many slaves. Afterward they gave him fifteen kine, in token that they were the kings loyal subjects. Of Cithiteb. THis town was built by the Africans upon an high hill, almost ten miles westward of Efza. Well peopled it is with rich and noble inhabitants: and because Bernussi be here made, it is always frequented with * Ilbernus'. store of merchants. The top of the said high mountain is continually covered with snow. The fields adjoining to the town are full of vineyards and gardens, which bring forth fruits in such abundance, that they are nought worth to be sold in the markets. Their women are beautiful, fat, and comely, being adorned with much silver: their eyes and hair are of a brown colour. The inhabitants are so stout and sullen, that when the other cities of Tedles yielded to the king, they alone stood out: yea they assembled under a certain captain an army of a thousand horsemen, wherewith they so vexed the king's forces, that he was often in danger to have lost all that which he had got. Afterward the king sent his brother with a new supply of men to aid his lieutenant; but he also had hard success. At length having maintained war for three whole years, the king commanded a jew to poison their captain. And so at last the king won this city also, in the year of the Hegeira 921. Of the town of Eithiad. THis town being built by the Africans upon a certain hillock of Atlas, containeth to the number of three hundred families. It is walled only towards the mountain; for that side which respecteth the plain, is so fortified naturally with rocks, that it seemeth not to need any wall. From Cithiteb it is about twelve miles distant. The temple of this town is little, but most beautiful, round about which runneth a mote, in manner of a river. The inhabitants are wealthy and noble: they have great store of merchants, as well townsmen as foreigners. The jews here inhabiting are partly artificers and partly merchants. About this town are abundance of springs, which breaking through the rocks of the mountain, do fall into a certain river under the town. On both sides of this river are divers gardens wonderfully replenished with grapes, figs, and walnuts. Likewise the sides of the mountain itself abound greatly with olives. Their women are no less beautiful than civil, being adorned with much silver, and wearing fine rings upon their fingers and arms. Their valley is fruitful for all kind of grain, but their hill is meet only for barley, and for goates-pasture. In my time one Raoman Benguihazzan usurped this town, and enjoyed it to his dying day. Myself was once entertained by a priest of this place, in the year of the Hegeira 921. Of Seggheme a mountain of Tedles. ALbeit this mountain standeth much southerly, yet is it to be accounted one of the mountains of Tedles. Westward it beginneth from the mountain of Tesavon, extending itself eastward to mount Magran, from whence the famous river of Ommirabih is said to take his beginning. The south part bordreth upon mount deeds. The inhabitants are said originally to be descended from the people of Zanaga: they are personable, cheerful, valiant, and warlike people. Their weapons are darts, Turkish swords, and dagger's. They sling stones likewise with great dexterity and force. They are at continual war with the inhabitants of Tedles, insomuch that no merchants can pass that way without public safeconduct, and without great expense of money. Their houses are so homely built, that sometime three or four rooms are contained in one. Of goats they have great abundance, as likewise of mules scarcely so big as asses, which range so far into the forest to seek their food, that they are often devoured of lions. They would never submit themselves to any prince; for their mountain is so rough and steep, that it seemeth almost impregnable. In my time the same captain which had won the towns of Tedles went about to assail them in like manner. Which when the mountainers understood, assembling a great army, they shrouded themselves in a certain part of the mountain, near which they knew their enemies would pass. And so soon as they saw all the enemies horsemen ascended up the hill, suddenly rushing forth, they gave them the onset. The skirmish was not so long as bloody: for the captains army being too weak for the mountainers, could neither march on, nor retire: wherefore they were constrained to fight it out by handblowes: many of them with their horses being thrown headlong down the rocks, were miserably crushed in pieces: the residue were either taken or slain, so that I think scarce one man of them escaped. But of all others the captives were most miserable: for the mountainers themselves would not slay them, but delivered them over to their wives to be tormented, who, as if they had been she-tigres or lionesses, put them to a most horrible and vile death. From thenceforth they had no traffic nor familiarity with the people of Tedles, neither seemed they greatly to stand in need of their friendship (for they have great store of barley, of cattle, and of sweet fountains) unless it be for that they are excluded from all trade of merchandise. Of the mountain called Magran. Somewhat beyond the foresaid mountain of Seggheme standeth mount Magran. Southward it bordereth upon the region of Farcala, near unto the Lybian desert: westward it beginneth at Seggheme, and extendeth eastward to the foot of mount deeds. It is continually covered with snow. The inhabitants have such abundance of small and great cattle that they cannot long remain in one place together. They build their houses of the bark of certain trees, the roof whereof dependeth on slender sparres, fashioned like unto the hoops environing the lids of such chests or trunks, as the women of Italy, when they travel, carry upon their mules. So likewise these These people live like the Tartars. people transport their whole houses up and down by the strength of mules, till they have found a fit place of abode; where, so soon as they arrive, they plant their said houses, remaining there with their whole families, so long as they have grass sufficient to feed their cattle. Howbeit all the spring time they settle themselves in one place, making certain low stables or cottages, & 〈◊〉 them with the boughs of trees, which serve for their cattle to lie in a nights: and to the end that the cold may not pinch them overmuch, they kindle certain huge fires near unto their said stables, whereupon sometimes the wind so violently driveth the fire; that unless the cattle escape by flight, they are in great danger to be consumed: and as their houses are destitute of walls, so are their 〈◊〉. They are continually molested and haunted with lions and wolves. In their apparel and customs they wholly agree with the foresaid people of Seggheme, saving that these have houses of bark and wood, and the other of stone. I myself, in the 917. year of the Hegeira, was in this mountain, as I traveled from Dara to Fez. A description of mount deeds. THis high and cold mountain greatly aboundeth with fountains and woods. Westward it beginneth at mount Magran, extending thence almost as far as the mountain of Adesan; and southward it bordereth upon the plains of Todga. The length thereof is almost fourscore miles. Upon the very top of this mountain there was a city built in ancient time, whereof a few ruinous monuments are to be seen at this present; namely certain walls of white stone, wherein are divers letters and words graven, which the inhabitants themselves do not understand. Many are of opinion, that this city was built long ago by the Romans: howbeit I myself could never find so much affirmed by any African writer, nor yet the city itself mentioned. Saving that 〈◊〉 Essacalli in a certain story of his maketh mention of Tedsi, which he saith is near unto Segelmesse and Dara: but he declareth not whether it be built upon mount deeds or no. Howbeit for mine own part I think it to be the very same: for there is no other city in the whole region. The inhabitants of deeds are in very deed most base people; of whom the greater part dwell in caves under the ground: their food is barley and Elhasid, that is to say, barley meal sodden with water, and salt, which we mentioned before in our description of Hea: For here is nothing but barley to be had. Goats and asses they have in great abundance. The caves wherein their cattle lodge are exceedingly full of * Or saltpeter. Nitre: so that I verily think if this mountain were near unto Italy, the said Nitre would yearly be worth five and twenty thousand ducats. But such is their negligence and unskilfulness, that they are utterly ignorant to what purposes Nitre serveth. Their garments are so rude, that they scarce cover half their nakedness. Their houses are very loathsome, being annoyed with the stinking smell of their goats. In all this mountain you shall find neither castle nor walled town: when they build an house, they pile one stone upon another without any mortar at all, the roof whereof they make of certain rubbish, like as they do in some places of Sisa and Fabbriano: the residue (as we have said) do inhabit in caves, neither saw I ever, to my remembrance, greater swarms of fleas then among these people. Moreover they are treacherous and strong thieves, so given to stealing and quarreling, that for one unkind word they will not only contend, but seek also the destruction one of another. They have neither judge, priest, nor any honest governor among them. No merchants resort unto them: for being given to continual idleness, and not exercising any trades or handiecrafts, they have nothing meet for merchants to buy. If any merchant bring any wares into their region, unless he be safe conducted by their captain, he is in danger to be robbed of altogether. And if the wares serve not for their own necessary uses, they will exact one fourth part of them for custom. Their women are most forlorn and sluttish, going more beggarly appareled then the men. So continual and slavish are the toils of these women, that for misery, the life of asses is not comparable to theirs. And, to be brief, never was I so weary of any place in all Africa, as I was of this: howbeit in the year of the Hegeira 918. being commanded by one, to whom I was in duty bound, to travel unto Segelmesse, I could not choose but come this way. JOHN LEO HIS THIRD BOOK OF the History of Africa, and of the memorable things contained therein. A most exact description of the kingdom of Fez. THE kingdom of Fez beginneth westward at the famous river Ommirabih, and extendeth eastward to the river Muluia; northward it is enclosed partly with the Ocean, and partly with the Mediterran sea. The said kingdom of Fez is divided into seven provinces; to wit, Temesna, the territory of Fez, Azgar, * Habat. Elhabet, Errif, Garet, and * Chauz or Cheuz. Elchauz: every of which provinces had in old time a several governor: neither indeed hath the city of Fez always been the kings royal seat, but being built by a certain Mahometan apostata, was governed by his posterity almost an hundred and fifty years. After which time the family of Marin got the upper hand, who here settling their abode, were the first that ever called Fez by the name of a kingdom: the reasons why they did so, we will declare more at large in our small treatise concerning the Mahometan religion. But now let us as briefly as we may, describe the foresaid seven provinces. Of Temesna one of the provinces of Fez. WEstward it beginneth at the river Ommirabih, and stretcheth to the river Buragrag eastward; the south frontier thereof bordereth upon Atlas, and the north upon the Ocean sea. It is all over a plain country, containing in length from west to east almost fourscore miles, and in breadth from Atlas to the Ocean sea about threescore. This province hath ever almost been the principal of the seven before named: for it contained to the number of forty great towns, besides three hundred castles, all which were inhabited by Barbarian Africans. In the 323. year of the Hegeira this province was by a certain heretic against the Mahometan religion called Chemim the son of Mennal freed from paying of tribute. This bad fellow persuaded the people A dangerous seducer. of Fez to yield no tribute nor honour unto their prince, and himself he professed to be a prophet: but a while after he dealt not only in matters of religion, but in commonwealth-affaires also. At length waging war against the king of Fez (who was himself then warring with the people of Zenete) it so befell, that a league was concluded between them, conditionally that Chemim should enjoy Temesne, and that the king should contain himself within his signiory of Fez, so that from thenceforth neither should molest other. The said Chemim governed the province of Temesne about five and thirty years: and his successors enjoyed it almost an hundred years after his decease. But king joseph having built Maroco, went about to bring this province under his subjection. Whereupon he sent sundry Mahometan doctors, and priests to reclaim the governor thereof from his heresy, and to persuade him, if it were possible, to yield unto the king by fair means. Whereof the inhabitants being advertised, they consulted with a certain kinsman of the foresaid governor, in the city called Anfa, to murder the king of Maroco his ambassadors: and so they did. Soon after levying an army of fifty thousand men, he marched towards Maroco, intending to expel thence the family of Luntuna, and joseph their king. King joseph hearing of this news, was driven into wonderful perplexity of mind. Wherefore preparing an huge and mighty army, he stayed not the coming of his enemies: but on the sudden within three days, having conducted his forces over the river of Ommirabih, he entered Temesne, when as the foresaid fifty thousand men were so dismayed at the king's army, that they all passed the river Buragrag, and so fled into Fez. But the king so dispeopled and wasted Temesne, that without all remorse he put both man, woman, and child to the sword. This army remained in the region eight days, in which space they so razed and demolished all the towns The horrible desolation of Temesne. and cities thereof, that there scarce remain any fragments of them at this time. But the king of Fez on the other side hearing that the people of Temesne were come into his dominions, made a truce with the tribe of Zenete, and bend his great army against the said Temesnites. And at length having found them half famished near unto the river of Buragrag, he so stopped their passage on all sides, that they were constrained to run up the craggy mountains and thickets. At last being environed with the king's forces, some of them were drowned in the river, others were thrown down headlong from the rocks, and the residue were miserably slain by their enemies. And for the space of ten months there was such havoc made among the Temesnites, that a silly remnant of them was left alive. But king joseph prince of the Luntunes returned forthwith to Maroco for the repairing of his forces, to the end he might bid the king of Fez a battle. Howbeit Temesne being bereft of her people, was left to be inhabited of wild beasts. Neither had that province any new colony, or supply of inhabitants, till that about 150. years after, king Mansor returning from Tunis, brought thence certain Arabians with him, unto whom he gave the possession of Temesne. And these Arabians enjoyed the said province for fifty years, till such time as king Mansor himself was expelled out of his kingdom: and then were they also expolled by the 〈◊〉, and were brought unto extreme misery. Afterward the kings of the family of Marin bestowed the said province upon the people of Zenete and Haoara. Hence it came to pass that the said people of Zenete and Haoara were always great friends unto the Marin family, and were thought to have defended them from the fury of the king of Maroco. From which time they have peaceably enjoyed Maroco, & now they are grown in less than an hundred years so mighty, that they stand not in fear of the king of Fez. For they are able to bring threescore thousand horsemen to the field, and have two hundred castles at their command. Myself had great familiarity and acquaintance with them, and therefore I will not stick to record all memorable things which I saw among them. Of Anfa a town in Temesna. THis famous town was built by the Romans upon the Ocean sea shore, northward of Atlas sixty, eastward of Azamursixtie, and westward of Rebat forty miles. The citizens thereof were most civil and wealthy people: the fields thereto adjoining are exceeding fruitful for all kind of grain: neither do I think, that any town in all Africa is for pleasant situation comparable thereto. The plain round about it (except it be to the sea northward) is almost fourscore miles over. In old time it was fraught with stately temples, rich warehouses and shops, and beautiful palaces: which the monuments as yet remaining do sufficiently testify. They had also most large and fair gardens, out of which they gather great abundance of fruit, especially of melons, and pome-citrons even at this day: all which are perfectly ripe by mid-Aprill. So that the inhabitants usually carry their fruits unto Fez, by reason that the fruits of Fez are not so soon ripe. Their attire is trim and decent, and they have always had great traffic with the Portugals and the English. Likewise they have many learned men among English traffic. them. Howbeit two reasons are alleged of the destruction of this town: first, because they were too desirous of liberty; and secondly, for that they maintained certain galleys or foists, wherewith they daily molested the Island of Cadiz and the Portugals. Wherefore at length the king of Portugal sent a strong navy of fifty sails against them, the consideration whereof struck such terror into the inhabitants, that taking such goods as they could carry, foam fled to Rebat, and others to Sela, and so their town was Anfa destroyed by the Portugals. left naked to the spoil of the enemy. But the General of the king's fleet not knowing that they were fled, put all his forces into battell-array. Howbeit after a while being advertised how the matter stood, he conducted his soldiers into the city, which in one days space they so defaced, burning the houses, and laying the walls even with the ground, that until this day it hath remained void of inhabitants. Myself being in this place, I could scarce refrain from tears, when I seriously beheld the miserable ruin of so many fair buildings and temples, whereof some monuments are as yet extant. The gardens, albeit they bring forth some fruit, yet are they more like unto woods than gardens. And now by reason of the king of Fez his weakness and default, this place is fallen into so great desolation, as I utterly despair, that ever it will be inhabited again. Of the city of Mansora. THis town was built by Mansor the king and Mahometan patriarch of Maroco upon a most pleasant field, being two miles distant from the Ocean sea, five and twenty miles from Rebat, and five and twenty from Anfa: it contained in times passed almost four hundred families. By this town runneth a certain river called by the inhabitants Guir, on both sides whereof in times past were most beautiful gardens, but now there are no fruits at all to be found. For upon the surprise of Anfa the inhabitants of this town fled unto Rebat, fearing lest they also should have been assailed by the Portugals. Howbeit the wall of this town remained all whole, saving that the Arabians of Temesne broke it down in certain places. This town also I could not but with great sorrow behold; for easy it were to repair it, and to furnish it with new inhabitants, if but a few houses were saved from ruin: but such is the malice of the Arabians thereabout, that they will suffer no people to re-edify the same. Of the town of Nuchaila. THis little town called by the inhabitants Nuchaila, is built almost in the midst of Temesne. It was well peopled in times past, and then (so long as the foresaid Chemim and his successors bare rule) there were fairs yearly holden, whereunto all the inhabitants of Temesne usually resorted. The townsmen were exceeding wealthy; for the plains stretched almost forty miles right forth from each side of their town. I red (as I remember) in a certain story, that they had in times past such abundance of corn, as they would give a camels burden thereof for a pair of shoes. Howbeit when king joseph of Maroco destroyed all the region of Temesne, this town was laid waste, together with all the towns and cities of the same province: howbeit at this day certain fragments thereof are to be seen, namely some parts of the town-wall, and one high steeple Here also in the large and pleasant gardens you may see many vines and trees planted, which are so old and sear, that they yield no fruit at all. The husbandmen thereabout having finished their days work, do lay up their rakes and other such country tools in the said steeple: supposing that by virtue of a certain holy man which lieth there buried, no man dare remove them out of their place. I have often seen this town, as I traveled between Rebat and Maroco. Of the town of Adendum. THis town was situate among certain hills almost fifteen miles from mount Atlas, and five and twenty miles from the town last named. The soil near unto it is exceeding fruitful for corn. Not far from the walls thereof springeth a certain river; about which place are great store of palmtrees, being but low and fruitless. The said river runneth through certain valleys and rocks, where iron-mines are said to have been of old, Iron-mines. which may seem probable, for the earth resembleth iron in colour, and the water in taste. Here is nothing now to be seen but a few relics and ruins of houses and pillars overturned: for this town was destroyed at the same time, when the whole region (as is before declared) was laid waste. Of the town of Tegeget. THis town was built by the Africans upon the bank of Ommirabih near unto the high way leading from Tedles to Fez. It had in times past civil and wealthy inhabitants, for it stood not far from the way which passeth over Atlas into the deserts: hither were all the neighbour-people wont to resort for to buy corn. And albeit this town was razed with all the residue in the province, yet is it after long time replanted with inhabitants. Hither do all the Arabians of Temesne bring their corn, delivering it unto the townsmen, to be kept. Here are no shops nor artificers at all, but certain smiths only, which make tools of husbandry and horseshooes. The townsmen are straightly enjoined by the Arabians their governors courteously to entertain all strangers traveling that way. Merchants pay custom there for each pack of cloth to the value of a rial: but for their horses and camels they give no custom at all. Often traveling the same way, the town did not greatly please me, albeit the grounds about it do plentifully abound with cattle and corn. Of the town called Hain Elchallu. THis small town standeth on a certain plain not far from Mansora. About this town grow abundance of wild cherrie-trees, and of other thorny trees, bearing a round fruit not much unlike to a cherry, saving that it is yellow: it is somewhat bigger than an olive, and the utter part thereof is nothing pleasant in taste. The fens and marshes on all sides of the town are full of snails and toads: which toads (as the inhabitants told me) are no whit venomous. There is not any African historiographer which maketh description or mention of this town; because perhaps they thought it not worthy the name of a town, or for that it was long since destroyed. Neither was it (as I conjecture) built by the Africans, but either by the Romans or some other foreign people. A description of Rebat. THis great and famous town was built not many years ago by Mansor the king and Mahometan patriarch of Maroco, upon the Ocean sea shore. By the east part thereof runneth the river Buragrag beforenamed, and there dischargeth itself into the main sea. The rock whereon this town is founded, standeth near the mouth of the said river, having the river on the one side thereof, and the sea on the other. In building it much resembleth Maroco, which Mansor willed to be a pattern thereof: saving that it is a great deal less than Maroco. Some say that the reason why it was built Why king Mansor built the town of Rebat upon the seashore. in this place was, for that king Mansor possessing the kingdom of Granada and a great part of Spain beside, and considering that Maroco was so far distant, that if any wars should happen, he could not in due time send new forces against the Christians, determined to built some town upon the sea shore, where he and his army might remain all summer time. Some persuaded him to lie with his army at Ceuta a town upon the streites of Gibraltar: but Mansor seeing that by reason of the barrenness of the soil he could not maintain an army royal for three or four months in the town of Ceuta, he caused this town of Rebat in short space to be erected, and to be exceedingly beautified with temples, colleges, palaces, shops, stoves, hospitals, and other such buildings. Moreover on the south side without the walls he caused a certain high tower like the tower of Maroco to be built, saving that the winding stairs were somewhat larger, insomuch that three horse's abreast might well ascend up: from the top whereof they might escry ships an huge way into the sea. So exceeding is the height thereof, that I think there is no where the like building to be found. And to the end that greater store of artificers and merchants might hither from all places make resort, he appointed, that every man according to his trade and occupation should be allowed a yearly stipend: whereupon it came to pass that within few months, this town was better stored with all kind of artificers and merchants, than any town in all Africa beside, and that because they reaped a double gain. Here used Mansor with his troops to remain from the beginning of April, till the month of September. And whereas there was no water about the town meet to be drunk (for the sea runneth ten miles up into the river, and the wells likewise yield salt-water) Mansor caused fresh water to be conveyed to the town by certain pipes and channels, from a fountain twelve miles distant. And the conducts he made arch-wise, like unto the conducts of Italy in many places and specially at Rome. So soon as the said water-conduct was derived unto the town, he caused it to be divided and sent into sundry places, as namely some pipes thereof to the temples, some to the colleges, others to the king's palace, and the rest into the common cisterns, throughout all the city. Howbeit after king Mansors death this town grew into such decay, that scarce the tenth part thereof now remaineth. The said notable water-conduct was utterly fordone in the war between the marin-family and the successors of Mansor, and the famous town itself decayeth every day more than other: so that at this present a man shall hardly find throughout the whole town four hundred houses inhabited; the residue are changed into fields and vineyards. About the foresaid rock are two or three streets with a few shops in them, which notwithstanding are in continual danger, for they daily fear lest the Portugals should surprise them; because the Portugal king often determined their overthrow, thinking if he might but win Rebat, that the kingdom of Fez were easy to be conquered. Howbeit the king of Fez hath always endeavoured to defend the same, and strongly to fortify it against the enemy. But comparing their former felicity with the present alteration whereinto they are fallen, I cannot but greatly lament their miserable case. Of the town of Sella. THis town was built by the Romans upon the river of Buragrag, two miles from the Ocean sea, and a mile from Rebat: from whence, if a man will go to the sea, he must take Rebat in his way. This town also was destroyed when (as is aforesaid) king joseph spoiled all Temesne. Howbeit afterward king Mansor caused it to be walled round about, and built therein a fair hospital and a stately palace, into which his soldiers might at their pleasure retire themselves. Here likewise he erected a most beautiful temple, Where king Mansor was buried. wherein he caused a goodly hall or chapel to be set up, which was curiously carved, and had many fair windows about it: and in this hall (when he perceived death to seize upon him) he commanded his subjects to 〈◊〉 his corpses. Which being done, they laid one marblestone over his head and another over his feet, whereon sundry 〈◊〉 were engraven. After him likewise all the honourable personages of his family and blood, chose to be interred in the same hall. And so did the kings of the marin-family, so long as their commonwealth prospered. Myself on a time entering the same hall, beheld there thirty monuments of noble and great personages, and diligently wrote out all their epitaphs: this I did in the year of the Hegeira 915. Of the town called Mader Auuam. THis town was built in my time by a certain treasurer of the Mahometan prelate Abdulmumen, upon the bank of Buragrag. Some say it Iron-mines. was built only for yron-mines. From mount Atlas it is ten miles distant, and between it and Atlas are certain shady woods, full of terrible lions Lions, and leopards. and leopards. So long as the founder's posterity governed this town, it was well stored with people, with fair buildings, temples, inns, and hospitals: but, the marin-family prevailing daily more and more, it was at length by them utterly destroyed. Part of the inhabitants were slain, and part taken prisoners, and the residue by flight escaped to Sella. The king of Maroco sent forces to succour the town, but the citizens being vanquished before their coming, were constrained to forsake the same, and to yield it unto the Marin-soldiers. Howbeit the king of Maroco his captain coming upon the Marin-captaine with round forces, drove him and his forth of the town, and took possession thereof himself. At length the king of the said marin-family marching with an army against Maroco, took his journey by this town: whereat the governor being dismayed left the said town, and before the kings approach betook himself to flight. But the king putting all the inhabitants to the sword, left the town itself so defaced and desolate, that by report it hath lain dispeopled ever since. The towne-walles and certain steeples are as yet to be seen. Myself saw this town, when the king of Fez having concluded a league with his cousin, took his journey to Thagia, for to visit the sepulchre of one accounted in his life time an holy man, called * Or Sidi. Seudi Buhasa: which was in the year of the Hegeira 920. Anno Dom. 1511. Of Thagia a town in Temesne. THis little town was in ancient time built by the Africans among certain hills of mount Atlas. The air is extreme cold, and the soil dry and barren. It is environed with huge woods, which are full of lions and other cruel beasts. Their scarcity of corn is sufficiently countervailed with abundance of honey and goats. Civility they have none at all; and their houses are most rudely built; for they have no use of lime. In this town is visited the sepulchre of one accounted for a most holy man, who is reported in the time of Habdulmumen, to have wrought many miracles against the fury of lions: whereupon he was reputed by many as a great prophet. I remember that I read in a certain writer of that nation commonly called Etdedle, a whole catalogue of the said holy man's miracles: which whether he wrought by arte-magique, or by some wonderful secret of nature, it is altogether uncertain. Howbeit his great fame and honourable reputation is the cause why this town is so well fraught with inhabitants. The people of Fez having solemnised their passover, do yearly frequent this town to visit the said sepulchre, and that in such huge numbers, that you would esteem them to be an whole army; for every principal man carries his tent and other necessaries with him: and so you shall see sometime an hundred tents and sometimes more in that company. Fifteen days they are in performing of that pilgrimage; for Thagia standeth from Fez almost an hundred and twenty miles. Myself being a child, went thither on pilgrimage oftentimes with my father; as likewise being grown up to man's estate, I repaired thither as often, making supplication to be delivered from the danger of lions. Of the town of Zarfa. THis town the Africans built upon a certain large and beautiful plain, watered with pleasant rivers, and christall-fountaines. About the ancient bounds of this city you may behold many shrubs, together with figtrees and cherrie-trees, which bear such cherries, as at Rome are called Marene. Here are likewise certain thorny trees, the fruit whereof is by the Arabians called Rabich. Somewhat lesser it is then a cherry, resembling in taste the fruit called Ziziphum, or jujuba. Here also may you find great store of wild palmtrees, from which they gather a kind of fruit like unto Spanish olives, saving that the stone or 〈◊〉 is greater, and not so pleasant in taste: before they be ripe they taste somewhat like unto Seruice-apples. This town was destroyed when king joseph aforesaid spoiled Temesne. Now the Arabians of Temesne sow their 〈◊〉 where the town stood, with great increase and gain. Of the territory of Fez. WEstward it beginneth at the river of Buragrag, and stretcheth eastward to the river called Inaven: which two rivers are almost a hundred miles distant asunder. Northward it bordereth upon the river * Or 〈◊〉. Subu, and southward upon the foot of Atlas. The soil both for abundance of corn, fruits, and cattle seemeth to be inferior to none other. Within this province you shall see many exceeding great villages, which may for their bigness, not unfitly be called towns. The plains of this region have been so wasted with former wars, that very few inhabitants dwell upon them, except certain poor silly Arabians, some of whom have ground of their own, and some possess ground in common, either with the citizens of Fez, or with the king, or else with some 〈◊〉. But the fields of Sala and Mecnase are tilled by other Arabians of better account, and are for the most part subject to the king of Fez. And now those things which are worthy of memory in this region let us here make report of. Of the city or town of Sella. THis most ancient city was built by the Romans, and sacked by the Goths. And afterward when the mahometans army were entered into the same region, the Goths gave it to Tarick one of their captains. But ever since the time that Fez was built, Sela hath been subject unto the governors thereof. It is most pleasantly situate upon the Ocean seashore, within half a mile of Rebat; both which towns the river Buragrag separateth insunder. The buildings of this town carry a show of antiquity on them, being artificially carved and stately supported with marble pillars. Their temples are most beautiful, and their shops are built under large porches. And at the end of every row of shops is an arch, which (as they say) is to divide one occupation from another. And (to say all in a word) here is nothing wanting, which may be required either in a most honourable city, or in a flourishing commonwealth. Moreover hither resort all kind of merchants both Christians and others. Here the Genoese, Venetians, English traffic. English, and low Dutch used to traffic. In the 670. year of the Hegeira this town was surprised by a certain Castilian captain, the inhabitants Sela won by a captain of Castilia, and recovered forthwith by the king of Fez. being put to flight, and the Christians enjoying the city. And when they had kept it ten days, being on the sudden assailed by jacob the first king of the marin-family (who could not, they thought, surcease his war against Tremizen) they were put to the worst, the greater part being slain, and the residue put to flight. From thenceforth that prince favoured of all his subjects, enjoyed the kingdom, after whom lineally succeeded those of his own race and blood. And albeit this town was in so few days recovered from the enemy; yet a world it was to see, what a wonderful alteration both of the houses and of the state of government happened. Many houses of this town are left desolate, especially near the towne-walles: which, albeit they are most stately and curiously built, yet no man there is that will inhabit them. The grounds adjoining upon this town are sandy: neither are they fit for corn, but for cotton-wool in divers places very profitable. The inhabitants, divers of them, do weave most excellent cotton. Here likewise are made very fine combs, which are sold in all the kingdom of Fez, for the region thereabout yieldeth great plenty of box, and of other wood fit for the same purpose. Their government is very orderly and discreet even until this day: for they have most learned judges, umpires, and deciders of doubtful cases in law. This town is frequented by many rich merchants of Genoa, whom the king hath always had in great regard; because he gaineth much yearly by their traffic. The said merchants have their abode and diet, partly here at Sella, and partly at Fez: from both which towns they mutually help the traffic one of another. These Genoese I found in their affairs of merchandise to be exceeding liberal: for they will spend frankly to get a courtier's favour, not so much for their own private gain, as to be esteemed bountiful by strangers. In my time there was an honourable A merchant of Genoa. gentleman of Genoa in the king of Fez his court, called Messer Thomaso di Marino, a man both learned & wise, & highly reputed of by the king. This man having continued almost thirty years in the Fessan court, he there deceased, and requesting on his deathbed to have his corpses interred at Genoa, the king commanded the same to be transported thither. After his decease he left many sons in the Fessan kings court, who all of them proved rich, and were greatly favoured by the king. Of the town called Fanzara. THis town being not very large, was built by a certain king of the family called Muachidin, on a beautiful plain almost ten miles from Sella. The soil there about yieldeth corn in great plenty. Without the town walls are very many clear fountains ' and wells, which Albuchesen The occasion of the bloody wars moved by Sahid. the king of Fez caused there to be digged. In the time of Abusaid the last king of the marin-family, his cousin called Sahid was taken by Habdilla the king of Granada; whereupon by letters he requested his cousin the king of Fez to send him a certain sum of money required by the king of Granada for his ransom. Which when the 〈◊〉 king refused to yield unto, Habdilla restored his prisoner to liberty, and sent him towards Fez to destroy both the city and the king. Afterward Sahid, with the help of certain The city of Fez besieged for seven years together. wild Arabians besieged Fez for seven years together; in which space most of the towns, villages, and hamlets throughout the whole kingdom were destroyed. But at length such a pestilence invaded Sahids' forces, that himself, with a great part of his army, in the * This number (as I take it) should rather be 819. 918. year of the Hegeira, died thereof. Howbeit those desolate towns never received from thenceforth any new inhabitants, especially Fanzara, which was given to certain Arabian captains, that came to assist Sahid. Of the town of Mahmora. THis town was built upon the mouth of the great river Subu by a certain king of the Muachidin-familie, being almost half a mile distant from the sea, and about twelve miles from Sella. The places near unto it are sandy and barren. It was built (they say) of purpose to keep the enemies from entering the mouth of the said river. Not far from this town standeth a mighty wood; the trees whereof bear a kind of nuts or acorns about the bigness of Damascen-plums, being sweeter in taste then chestnuts. Of which nuts certain Arabians, dwelling near unto the place, convey Most cruel and 〈◊〉 lions. great plenty unto the city of Fez, and reap much gain thereby: howbeit in going to gather this fruit, unless they take good heed unto themselves, they are in great danger of the most cruel and devouring lions in all Africa, which there oftentimes do seize upon them. This town a hundred and twenty years ago was razed in the foresaid war of Sahid against the king of Fez, nothing but a few ruins thereof remaining, whereby it appeareth The Portugals attempting to build a fort within the mouth of the river Subu, defeated of their purpose, and slain. to have been of no great bigness. In the 921. year of the Hegeira the king of Portugal sent an army to build a fort in the foresaid rivers mouth; which they accordingly attempted to do. But having laid the foundations, and reared the walls a good height, the king of Fez his brother so defeated them of their purpose, that he slew of them in one night almost three thousand in manner following: on a certain morning before sunrise three thousand Portugals marching towards the king of Fez his camp, determined to bring thence all the ordinance and field-pieces unto their new-erected for't: howbeit most rashly and inconsiderately, themselves being but three thousand, and the king's army containing fifty thousand footmen, and four thousand horsemen. And yet the Portugals hoped so slily and closely to perform this attempt, that before the Moors were ready to pursue them, they should convey all their ordinance unto the fort which was two miles distant. The Moors which kept the ordinance being seven thousand men, were all asleep when the Portugals came: whereupon the Portugals had so good success, that they had carried the ordinance almost a mile, before the enemy was aware thereof. But at last, some rumour or alarm being given in the Moors camp, they all betook themselves to arms, and fiercely pursued the Portugals, who likewise arranged their whole company into battell-array. And albeit the enemy environed them on all sides; yet they made such stout and valiant resistance, that they had all escaped to their fort in safety, had not certain villains in the king of Fez his army cried out amain in the Portugal tongue: Hold your hands (fellow soldiers) and throw down your weapons, for the king's brother will make a truce. Which the Portugals no sooner yielded unto, but the savage and merciless Moors put them every one to the sword, saving three or four only, who were saved at the request of a captain in the Moors camp. The Portugals General being sore dismayed with this slaughter (for thereby he had lost all his principal soldiers) craved aid of a certain other captain, which by chance arrived there with a mighty fleet, being accompanied with a great number of noblemen and gentlemen. Howbeit, he was so hindered by the Moors (who daily did him all the villainy they could, and sunk divers of his ships) that he was not able to perform that which he desired. In the mean space news was published among the Portugals, of the king of Spain's death; whereupon divers ships were provided, and many Portugals were sent into Spain. Likewise the captain of the said new fort seeing himself destitute of all succour, leaving the fort, embarked himself in those ships, which then lay upon the river. But the greatest part of the fleet were cast away at their setting forth, and the residue, to escape the Moors shot, ran themselves aground on the flats and shalls of the river, and were there miserably slain by the Moors. Many of their ships were here burnt, and their ordinance sunk in the sea. So many Christians were then slain (some say A lamentable slaughter. to the number of ten thousand) that the sea-water in that place continued red with their blood for three days after. Soon after the Moors took up four hundred great pieces of brass out of the sea. This huge calamity befell the Portugals for two causes: first because they would with such a small number make so rash an assault upon the Moors, whom they knew to be so strong: and secondly, whereas the Portugall-king might at his own cost have sent another fleet for a new supply, he would by no means join his own people and Castilians together. For by reason of the diversity of counsels and of people, there is nothing more pernicious then for an army to consist of two nations: yea the Moors certainly expect the upper hand, when they are to fight with such an army. I myself was present in the foresaid john Leo his 〈◊〉 to 〈◊〉. war, and saw each particular accident, a little before my voyage to Constantinople. Of the town called Tefelfelt. THis town is situate upon a sandy plain, fifteen miles eastward of Mahmora, and almost twelve miles from the Ocean sea. Not far from this town runneth a certain river, on both sides whereof are thick woods haunted with more fierce and cruel lions, than the last before mentioned, Fierce lions. which greatly endanger those travelers that have occasion to lodge thereabout. Without this town, upon the high way to Fez, standeth an old cottage with a plancherd chamber therein: here the mulettiers and carriers are said to take up their lodging; but the door of the said cottage they stop as sure as they can with boughs and thorns. Some affirm, that this rotten cottage (while the town was inhabited) was a most stately inn. But it was defaced in the foresaid war of Sahid. A description of Mecnase. THis town was so called after the name of the Mecnasites who were the founders thereof. From Fez it is 36. miles, about fifty from Sella, and from Atlas almost 15. miles distant. It is exceeding rich, and containeth families to the number of six thousand. The inhabitants hereof while they dwelled in the fields lived a most peaceable life: howbeit at length they fell to dissension among themselves, and the weaker part having all their cattle taken from them, and having nothing in the fields to maintain their estaste, agreed among themselves to build this city of Mecnase in a most beautiful plain. near unto this town runneth a little river: and within three miles thereof are most pleasant gardens replenished with all manner of fruits. Quinces there are of great bigness, and of a most fragrant smell; and pomegranates likewise, which being very great and most pleasant in taste, have no stones within them, and yet they are sold exceeding cheap. Likewise here are plenty of damascens, of white plums, and of the fruit called jujuba, which being dried in the sun, they eat in the spring, and carry a great number of them to Fez. They have likewise great store of figs and grapes, which are not to be eaten but while they are green & new: for their figs being dried become so brittle, that they waste all to powder, and their grapes when they are made raisins, prove unsavoury. Peaches and oranges they have in so great quantity, that they make no store of them: but their lemons are waterish and unpleasant. olives are sold among them for a ducat and a half the Cantharo, which measure containeth a hundred pounds Italian. Moreover their fields yield them great plenty of hemp and flax, which they sell at Fez and Sela. In this town are most stately and beautiful temples, three colleges, and ten bathstoves. Every monday they have a great market without the towne-walles, whereunto the bordering Arabians do usually resort. Here are oxen, sheep, and other such beasts to be sold: butter and wool are here plentiful and at an easy rate. In my time the king bestowed this town upon a certain noble man of his, where as much fruits are reaped as in the third part of the whole kingdom of Fez. This town hath been so afflicted by wars, that the yearly tribute thereof hath been diminished sometime forty thousand, and fifty thousand ducats, and sometimes more: and I have red, that it hath been besieged for six or seven years together. In my time the governor thereof the king of Fez his cousin, relying upon the favour of the people, rebelled against his kinsman and sovereign. Whereupon the Fessan king with a great army besieged the town two months together, and, because it would not yield, so wasted and destroyed all the country thereabout, that the governor lost by that means five and twenty thousand ducats of yearly revenue. What then shall we think of the six and seven years siege before mentioned? At length those Mecnase reduced under 〈◊〉 by the king of Fez. citizens which favoured the king of Fez opened the gates, and stoutly resisting the contrary faction, gave the king and his soldiers entrance. Thus by their means the king won the city, carrying home to Fez the rebellious governor captive, who within few days escaped from him. This most strong and beautiful city hath many fair streets, whereinto by conducts from a fountain three miles distant, is conveyed most sweet and wholesome water, which serveth all the whole city. The mills are two miles distant from the town. The inhabitants are most valiant, warlike, liberal, and civil people, but their wits are not so refined as others: some of them are merchants, some artificers, and the residue gentlemen. They count it unseemly for any man to send an horselode of seed to his husbandman or farmer. They are at continual jar with the citizens of Fez; but whereupon this dissension of theirs should arise, I cannot well determine. Their gentlemen's wives never go forth of the doors but only in the night season, and then also they must be so veiled and muffled that no man may see them: so great is the jealousy of this people. This town is so dirty in the spring-time, that it would irk a man to walk the streets. Of a town called Gemiha Elchmen. THis ancient town standeth on a plain near unto certain baths, being distant southward of Mecnase fifteen miles, westard of Fez thirty, and from Atlas about ten miles. By this town lieth the common high way from Fez to Tedle. The field of this town was possessed by certain Arabians, and the town itself utterly destroyed in the war of Sahid. Howbeit in certain places the walls are yet remaining, and divers towers and temples standing without roofs. Of the town called Cannis Metgara. THis town was built by certain Africans in the field of Zuaga almost fifteen miles westward from Fez. Without this town for two miles together were most pleasant and fruitful gardens: but by the cruel war of Sahid all was laid waste; and the place itself remained void of inhabitauts an hundred and twenty years. Howbeit when part of the people of Granada came over into Africa, this region began to be inhabited anew. And whereas the Granatines are great merchants of silk, they caused, for the breeding of silkworms, great store of white mulberry trees to be brought hither. Here likewise they planted abundance of sugarcanes, which prosper not so well in this place as in the province of Andaluzia. In times past the inhabitants of this place were very civil people, but in our time they have not been so, by reason that all of them exercise husbandry. Of the town of Banibasil. THis town was built by the Africans upon a certain small river just in the mid way between Mecnase and Fez, being distant from Fez about eighteen miles westward. Out of their fields many rivers take their original, which fields are by the Arabians sown all over with barley and hemp: neither indeed will the soil yield any other commodity, both by reason of the barrenness, and also for that it is for the most part overflowed with water. Whatsoever commodity ariseth out of this place redoundeth to the priests of the principal Mahometan temple in Fez, and it amounteth almost yearly to twenty thousand ducats. Here also in times past were most large, pleasant, and fruitful gardens, as appeareth by the monuments and relics thereof, howbeit they were, like other places, laid waste by the war of Sahid. The town itself remained destitute of inhabitants an hundred and ten years; but as the king of Fez returned home from Duccala, he commanded part of his people to inhabit the same: albeit their incivility made them loath so to do. Of Fez the principal city of all Barbary, and of the founders thereof. FEz was built in the time of one Aron a Mahometan patriarch, in the year of the Hegeira 185. and in the year of our Lord 786. by a certain heretic against the religion of Mahumet. But why it should so be called some are of opinion, because when the first foundations thereof were digged, there was found some quantity of gold, which metal in the Arabian language is called Fez. Which etymology seemeth to me not improbable, albeit some would have it so called from a certain river of that name. But howsoever it be, we leave that to be discussed by others, affirming for an undoubted truth, that the founder of this city was one Idris, being the foresaid Aron his near kinsman. This Idris ought rather to have been Mahometan Idris the first founder of Fe patriarch, because he was nephew unto Hali the cousin-german of Mahumet, who married Falerna Mahumets' own daughter, so that Idris both by father and mother was of Mahumets' lineage: but Aron being nephew unto one Habbus the uncle of Mahumet, was of kindred only by the father's side Howbeit both of them were excluded from the said patriarkship for certain causes mentioned in the African chronicles, although Aron usurped the same by deceit. For Aaron's uncle being a most cunning and crafty man, and feigning himself to bear greatest favour unto the family of Hali, and to be most desirous, that the patriarkship should light thereon, sent his ambassadors almost throughout the whole world. Whereupon the dignity was translated from Vmeve to Habdulla Seffec the first patriarch. Which, Vmeve being informed of, waged war against the family of Hali, and so prevailed, that some of them he chased into Asia, and some into India. Howbeit an ancient religious man of the same family remained still alive at Elmadina, who being very old, no whit regarded the dignity. But this ancient sire left behind him two sons, who when they were come to man's estate, grew into so great favour with the people of Elmadin, that they were chased thence by their enemies; the one being taken & hanged; and the other (whose name was Idris) escaping into Mauritania. This Idris dwelling upon mount Zaron about thirty miles from Fez, governed not only the commonwealth, but matters of religion also: and all the region adjacent paid him tribute. At length Idris deceasing without lawful issue, left one of his maids big with child, which had been turned from the Goths religion to the Moors. Being delivered of her son, they called him after his father's name, Idris. This child the inhabitants choosing for their prince, caused him to be most carefully brought up: and as he grew in years, to the end they might train him up in feats of chivalry, they appointed one Rasid a most valiant and skilful captain to instruct him. Insomuch, that while he was but fifteen Idris his 〈◊〉 valour at fifteen years of age. years of age, he grew famous for his valiant acts and stratagems, and began wonderfully to enlarge his dominions. Wherefore his troops and family increasing every day more and more, he set his mind upon building of a city, and changing of his habitation. And so he sent for cunning builders into all nations, who having diligently perused all places in the region, at last made choice of that where the city of Fez now standeth. For here they found great store of fountains, and a fair river, which springing forth of a plain not far of, runneth pleasantly almost eight miles amidst the little hills, till at length it casteth itself upon another plain. Southward of the place they found a wood, which they knew would be right commodious for the town. Here therefore upon the east bank of the said river, they built a town containing three thousand families: neither omitted they ought at all which might be required in a flourishing commonwealth. After the decease of Idris, his son erected another town directly over against the foresaid, on the other side of the river. But in process of time either town so increased, that there was but a small distance between them: for the governors of each laboured might and main to augment their own jurisdictions. An hundred and fourscore years after, there fell out great dissension and civil war between these two cities, which by report continued an hundred years together. At length joseph king of Maroco of the Luntune-familie, conducting an huge army against both these princes, took them prisoners, carried them home unto his dominions, and put them to a most cruel death. And he so vanquished the citizens, that there were slain of them thirty thousand. Then determined king joseph to reduce those two towns into firm unity and concord: for which cause, making a bridge over the river, and beating down the walls of either town right against it, he united both into one, which afterward he divided into twelve regions or wards. Now let us make report of all such memorable things as are there to be seen * 1526. at this day. A most exact description of the city of Fez. A World it is to see, how large, how populous, how well-fortified and walled this city is. The most part thereof standeth upon great and little hills: neither is there any plain ground but only in the midst of the city. The river entereth the town in two places, for it is divided into a double branch, one whereof runneth by new Fez, that is, by the south side of the town, and another cometh in at the west side. And so almost infinitely dispersing itself into the city, it is derived by certain conducts and channels unto every temple, college, inn, hospital, and almost to every private house. Unto the temples are certain square conducts adjoined, having celles and receptacles round about them; each one of which hath a cock, whereby water is conveyed through the wall into a trough of marble. From whence flowing into the sinks and gutters, it carrieth away all the filth of the city into the river. In the midst of each square conduct standeth a low cistern, being three cubits in depth, four in breadth, and twelve in length: and the water is conveyed by certain pipes into the foresaid square conducts, which are almost an hundred and fifty in number. The most part of the houses are built of fine bricks and stones curiously painted. Likewise their bay-windowes and portals are made of particoloured brick, like unto the stones of Majorica. The roofs of their houses they adorn with gold, azure, and other excellent colours, which roofs are made of wood, and plain on the top, to the end that in summertime carpets may be spread upon them, for here they use to lodge by reason of the exceeding heat of that country. Some houses are of two and some of three stories high, whereunto they make fine stairs, by which they pass from one room to another under the same roof: for the middle part of the house is always open or uncovered, having some chambers built on the one side, and some on the other. The chamber-doores are very high and wide: which in rich men's houses are framed of excellent and carved wood. Each chamber hath a press curiously painted and varnished belonging thereunto, being as long as the chamber itself is broad: some will have it very high, and others but six handfuls in height, that they may set it on the tester of a bed. All the portals of their houses are supported with bricke-pillers finely plastered over, except some which stand upon pillars of marble. The beams and transoms upholding their chambers are most curiously painted and carved. To some houses likewise belong certain square cisterns, containing in breadth six or seven cubits, in length ten or twelve, and in height but six or seven handfuls, being all uncovered, and built of bricks trimly plastered over. Along the sides of these cisterns are certain cocks, which convey the water into marbletroughes, as I have seen in many places of Europe. When the foresaid conducts are full of water, that which floweth over, runneth by certain secret pipes and conveyances into the cisterns: and that which overfloweth the cisterns, is carried likewise by other passages into the common sinks and gutters, and so into the river. The said cisterns are always kept sweet and clean, neither are they 〈◊〉 but only in summer- 〈◊〉, when men, women, and children bathe themselves therein. Moreover on the tops of their houses they usually build a turret with many pleasant rooms therein, whither the women, for recreations sake, when they are weary of working, retire themselves; from whence they may see well-nigh all the city over. Of Mahometan temples and oratory's there are almost seven hundred in The number and 〈◊〉 of the Mahometan 〈◊〉 in Fez. this town, fifty whereof are most stately and sumptuously built, having their conducts made of marble and other excellent stones unknown to the Italians; and the chapters of their pillars be artificially adorned with painting and carving. The tops of these temples, after the fashion of Christian churches in Europe, are made of ioises and planks: but the pavement is covered with mats which are so cunningly sowed together, that a man cannot see the breadth of a finger uncovered. The walls likewise on the inner side are lined a man's height with such mats. Moreover, each temple hath a turret or steeple, from whence certain are appointed with a loud voice to call the people at their set-time of prayer. Every temple hath one only priest to say service therein; who hath the bestowing of all revenues belonging to his own temple, as occasion requireth: for thereby are maintained lamps to burn in the night, and porters to keep the doors are paid their wages out of it, and so likewise are they that call the people to ordinary prayers in the night season: for those which cry from the said towers in the daytime have no wages, but are only released from all tributes and exactions. The chief The principal temple of Fez 〈◊〉 Caruven. Mahometan temple in this town is called Caruven, being of so incredible a bigness, that the circuit thereof and of the buildings longing unto it, is a good mile and a half about. This temple hath one and thirty gates or portals of a wonderful greatness and height. The roof of this temple is in length 150. and in breadth about fourscore Florentine cubits. The turret or steeple, from whence they cry amain to assemble the people together, is exceedingly high; the breadth whereof is supported with twenty, and the length with thirty pillars. On the east, west, and north sides, it hath certain walks or galleries, forty cubits in length, and thirty in breadth. Under which galleries there is a cell or storehouse, wherein oil, candles, mats, and other such necessaries for the temple are laid up. Every night in this temple are burnt nine hundred lights; for every arch hath a several lamp, especially those which extend through the mid-quire. Some arches there are that have 120. candles apiece: there are likewise certain brasse-candlestickes so great and with so many sockets, as they will hold each one fifteen hundred candles: and these candlesticks are reported to have been made of bells, which the king of Fez in times past took from Christians. About the walls of the said temple are divers pulpits, out of which those that are learned in the Mahometan law instruct the people. Their winter-lectures begin presently after sunrise, and continue the space of an hour. But their summer-lectures hold on from the sun going down, till an hour and a half within night. And here they teach as well moral philosophy as the law of Mahumet. The summer-lectures are performed by certain private and obscure persons; but in winter such only are admitted to read, as be reputed their greatest clerks. All which readers and professors are yearly allowed most liberal stipends. The priest of this great temple is enjoined only to read prayers, and faithfully to distribute alms among the poor. Every festival day he bestoweth all such corn and money as he hath in his custody, to all poor people, according to their need. The treasurer or collector of the revenues of this church hath every day a ducat for his pay. Likewise he hath eight notaries or clerks under him; every one of which gaineth six ducats a month: and other six clerks who receive the rent of houses, shops, and other such places as belong to the temple, having for their wages the twentieth part of all such rents and duties as they gather. Moreover there belong to this temple twenty factors or bailiffs of husbandry, that without the citie-walles have an eye to the labourers, ploughmen, vine-planters, and gardeners, and that provide them things necessary: their gain is three ducats a month. Not far from the city are about twenty lime-kils, and as many bricke-kils, serving for the reparation of their temple, and of all houses thereto belonging. The revenues The revenues of the great temple, and how they are bestowed. of the said temple daily received, are two hundred ducats a day; the better half whereof is laid out upon the particulars aforesaid. Also if there be any temples in the city destitute of living, they must all be maintained at the charges of this great temple: and then that which remaineth after all expenses, is bestowed for the behoof of the commonwealth: for the people receive no revenues at all. In our time the king commanded the priest of the said temple to lend him an huge sum of money, which he never repaid again. Moreover in the city of Fez are two most stately colleges, of which divers rooms are adorned with curious painting; all their beams are carved, their walls consisting both of marble and freestone. Some colleges here are which contain an hundred studies, some more, and some fewer, all which were built by divers kings of the marin-family. One there is among the rest most beautiful and admirable to behold, which was erected by a certain king called Habu Henon. Here is to be seen an excellent fountain of marble, the cistern whereof containeth two pipes. Through this college runneth a little stream in a most clear and pleasant channel, the brims and edges whereof are workmanly framed of marble, and stones of Majorica. Likewise here are three cloisters to walk in, most curiously and artificially made, with certain eight-square pillars of divers colours to support them. And between pillar and pillar the arches are beautifully overcast with gold, azure, and divers other colours; and the roof is very artificially built of wood. The sides of these cloisters are so close, that they which are without cannot see such as walk within. The walls round about as high as a man can reach, are adorned with plaister-worke of Majorica. In many places you may find certain verses, which declare what year the college was built in, together with many epigrams in the founder's commendation. The letters of which verses are very great and black, so that they may be red a far off. This college-gates are of brass most curiously carved, and so are the doors artificially made of wood. In the chapel of this college standeth a certain pulpit mounted nine stairs high, which stairs are of ivory and eben. Some affirm, that the king having built this college, was desirous to know how much money he had spent in building it; but after he had perused a leaf or two of his account-booke, finding the sum of forty thousand ducats, he rend it asunder, and threw it into the foresaid little river, adding this sentence out of a certain Arabian writer: Each precious and amiable thing, though it costeth dear, yet if it be beautiful, it cannot choose but be good cheap: neither is any thing of too high a price, which pleaseth a man's affection. Howbeit a certain treasurer of the kings, making a particular account of all the said expenses, found that this excellent building stood his master in 480000. ducats. The other colleges of Fez are somewhat like unto this, having every one readers and professors, some of which read in the forenoon, and some in the afternoon. In times past the students of these colleges had their apparel and victuals allowed them for seven years, but now they have nothing gratìs but their chamber. For the war of Sahid destroyed many possessions, whereby learning was The 〈◊〉 of learning and learned men, a principal cause of disorderly & base government. maintained; so that now the greatest college of all hath yearly but two hundred, and the second but an hundred ducats for the maintenance of their professors. And this perhaps may be one reason, among many, why the government not only of Fez, but of all the cities in Africa, is so base. Now these colleges are furnished with no scholars but such as are strangers, and live of the citie-almes: and if any citizens dwell there, they are not above two or three at the most. The professor being ready for his lecture, some of his auditors readeth a text, whereupon the said professor dilateth, and explaineth obscure and difficult places. Sometimes also the scholars dispute before their professor. A description of the hospitals and baths in the city of Fez. MAny hospitals there are in Fez, no whit inferior, either for building or beauty, unto the foresaid colleges. For in them whatsoever strangers came to the city were entertained at the common charge for three days together. There are likewise as fair and as stately hospitals in the suburbs. In times past their wealth was marvelous great; but in the time of Sahids' war, the king standing in need of a great sum of money, was counseled by some of his greedy courtiers to sell the livings of the said hospitals. Which when the people would in no case yield unto, the king's orator or speaker, persuaded them that all those livings were given by his majesties predecessors, and therefore (because when the wars were ended, they should soon recover all again) that it were far better for them by that means to pleasure their sovereign, then to let his kingly estate fall into so great danger. Whereupon all the said livings being sold, the king was prevented by untimely and sudden death before he could bring his purpose to effect: and so these famous hospitals were deprived of all their maintenance. The poor indeed and impotent people of the city are at this day relieved; but no strangers are 〈◊〉, save only learned men or gentlemen. Howbeit there is another hospital for the relief of sick & diseased strangers, who have their diet only allowed them, but no physician or medicine: certain women there are which attend upon them, till they recover their former health, or die. In this hospital likewise there is a place for frantic or distraught persons, where they are bound in strong iron chains; whereof the part next unto their walks is strengthened with mighty beams of wood and iron. The governor of these distraught persons, when he bringeth them any sustenance, hath a whip of purpose to chastise those that offer to bite, strike, or play any mad part. Sometimes it falleth out that these frantic people will call unto them such as pass by; declaring how unjustly they are there detained, and how cruelly they are handled by the officers, when as notwithstanding they affirm themselves to be restored unto their right mind. And having thus persuaded the commers-by, approaching nearer and nearer unto them, at length they take hold with one hand on their garments, and (like villains) with the other hand they shamefully defile their faces and apparel with dung. And though all of them have their privies and close stools, yet would they be poisoned in their own filth, if the servants did not often wash their lodgings: so that their abominable and continual stink is the cause why citizens never visit them. Likewise this hospital hath many rooms for the purveyors, notaries, cooks, and other officers john Leo in his youth a notary of an hospital for two years together. belonging to the sick persons; who each of them have some small yearly stipend. Being a young man I myself was notary here for two years, which office is worth three ducats a month. In this city are more than an hundred bathstoves very artificially and stately built: which though they be not of equal bigness, yet are they all of one fashion. Each stove hath four halls, without which are certain galleries in an higher place, with five or six stairs to ascend unto them: here men put off their apparel, and hence they go naked into the bath. In the midst they always keep a cistern full of water. First therefore they that mean to bathe themselves must pass through a cold hall, where they use to temper hot water and cold together, than they go into a room somewhat hotter, where the servants cleanse and wash them; and last of all they proceed into a third hothouse, where they sweat as much as they think good. Of the said water they give unto every man two vessels only: but he that will have more and will be extraordinarily washed, must give to the servant one Liardo at the least, and to the master of the stove but two farthings. The fire that heateth their water is made of nought else but beasts dung: for which purpose many boys are set on work to run up and down to stables, and thence to carry all the dung, and to lay it on heaps without the towne-walles; which being parched in the sun for two or three months together, they use for fuel. Likewise the women have their stoves apart from the men. And yet some hothouses serve both for men and women, but at sundry times, namely for men from the third to the fourteenth hour of the day, and the residue for women. While women 〈◊〉 bathing themselves, they hang out a rope at the first entrance of the house, which is a sign for men, that they may then proceed no farther. Neither may husbands here be permitted to speak with their own wives; so great a regard they have of their honesty. Here men and women both, after they have done bathing, use to banquet and make merry with pleasant music and singing. Young striplings enter the bath stark naked without any shame, but men cover their privities with a linen cloth. The richer sort will not enter the common bath, but that which is adorned and finely set forth, and which serveth for noblemen and gentlemen. When any one is to be bathed, they lay him along upon the ground, anointing him with a certain ointment, and with certain instruments doing away his filth. The richer sort have a carpet to lie on, their head lying on a wooden cushion covered with the same carpet. Likewise here are many barbers and chirurgeons which attend to do their office. The most part of these baths pertain to the temples and colleges, yielding unto them a great sum of money for yearly rend; for some give an hundred, some an hundred and fifty ducats a year. Neither must I here omit the festival day which the servants and officers of the baths yearly celebrate. Who with trumpets and pipes calling their friends together, go forth of the town, and there gather a wild onion, putting it in a certain brazen vessel, and covering the same with a linen cloth wet in lee: afterward with a great noise of trumpets and pipes they solemnly bring the said onion unto the hothouse door, and there they hang it up in the little brazen vessel or laver, saying that this is a most happy boding or sign of good luck unto their stove. Howbeit I suppose it to be some such sacrifice, as the ancient Moors were wont in times past, when they were destitute of laws and civility, to offer, and that the same custom hath remained till this very day. The like is to be seen even among Christians, who celebrate many feasts whereof they can yield no reason. Likewise every African town had their peculiar feast, which, when the Christians once enjoyed Africa, were utterly abolished and done away. Of the Inns of Fez. IN this city are almost two hundred inns, the greatest whereof are in the principal part of the city near unto the chief temple. Every of these inns are three stories high, and contain an hundred and twenty or more chambers apiece. Likewise each one hath a fountain together with sinks and water-pipes, which make avoidance of all the filth. Never, to my remembrance, did I see greater buildings, except it were the Spanish college at Bologna, or the palace of the Cardinal di San Giorgio at Rome: of which inns all the chamber-doores have walks or galleries before them. And albeit the inns of this city are very fair and large, yet they afford most beggarly entertainment to strangers: for there are neither beds nor couches for a man to lie upon, unless it be a course blanket and a mat. And if you will have any victuals, you must go to the shambles yourself, and buy such meat for your host to dress, as your stomach stands-to. In these inns certain poor widows of Fez, which have neither wealth nor friends to succour them, are relieved: sometimes one, and sometimes two of them together are allowed a chamber; for which courtesy they play both the chamberlains and cooks of the inn. The innkeepers of Fez being all of one family called Elcheva, go appareled like women, and shave their beards, and are so delighted to imitate women, that they will not only counterfeit their speech, but will sometimes also sit down and spin. Each one of these hath his concubine, whom he accompanieth as if she were his own lawful wife; albeit the said concubines are not only ill-favoured in countenance, but notorious for their bad life and behaviour. They buy and sell wine so freely, that no man controls them for it. None resort hither but most lewd & wicked people, to the end they may more boldly commit villainy. The innkeepers have a consul over them, and they pay tribute unto the governor of the city. And when the king hath occasion to send forth an army, than they, as being most meet for the purpose, are constrained largely to victual the camp. Had not the straight law of history enforced me to make relation of the foresaid particulars as they stand, I would much rather have smothered such matters in silence, as tend so extremely to the disgrace of Fez; which being reform, there is not any city in all Africa, for the honesty and good demeanour of the citizens, comparable thereunto. For the very company of these innkeepers is so odious and detestable in the sight of all honest men, learned men, and merchants, that they will in no wise vouchsafe to speak unto them. And they are firmly enjoined not to enter into the temple, into the burse, nor into any bath. Neither yet are they permitted to resort unto those inns which are next unto the great temple, and wherein merchants are usually entertained. All men in a manner are in utter detestation of these wretches: but because the king's army hath some use of them (as is aforesaid) they are borne withal, whether the citizens will or no. Of the mills of Fez. IN this city are mills in four hundred places at least. And every of these places containeth five or six mills; so that there are some thousands of mills in the whole city. Every mill standeth in a large room * Like unto our horse-mils. upon some strong pillar or post; whereunto many countrie-people use to resort. Certain merchants there are in Fez, which hiring mills and shops, buy corn and sell it ready ground unto the citizens, whereby they reap exceeding gain: for the greatest part of the citizens being poor, and not able to lay up corn sufficient in store, are feign to buy meal of them. But the richer sort buy their own corn, and send it to some common mill, where they pay a shilling for the grinding of each measure. All the said mills pertain either to the temples or colleges: for he must be very rich that hath a mill of his own; for every mill gaineth the owner two ducats. A description of the occupations, the shops, and the market. EAch trade or occupation hath a peculiar place allotted thereto, the principal whereof are next unto the great temple: for there first you may behold to the number of fourscore notaries or scriveners shops, whereof some join upon the temple, and the residue stand over against them: every of which shops hath always two notaries. Then westward there are about thirty stationer's or booksellers. The shoo-merchants which buy shoes and buskins of the shoemakers, and sell them again to the citizens, inhabit on the south side of the temple: and next unto them, such as make shoes for children only, their shops being about fifty. On the east side dwell those that sell vessels and other commodities made of brass. Over against the great gate of the said temple stands the fruit-market, containing fifty shops, where no kind of fruit is wanting. Next unto them stand the waxe-merchants, very ingenious and cunning workmen, and much to be admired. Here are merchants factors likewise, though they be but few. Then follows the herbe-market, wherein the pome-citrons, and divers kinds of green boughs and herbs do represent the sweet and flourishing spring, and in this market are about twenty taverns: for they which drink wine, will shroud themselves under the shady and pleasant boughs. Next unto them stand the milke-sellers, who have great store of such 〈◊〉 vessels by them, as the Italians call Vasidi Maiolica: but their milk they cause to be brought thither in certain vessels of wood bound with iron-hoops, being narrow-mouthed and broad at the bottom. From these milke-sellers some there are which daily buy great store of milk to make butter thereof: and the residue of their milk they sell either crudded or sometimes sour unto the citizens: so that I think there passeth scarce one day over their heads, wherein they utter not five and twenty tons of milk. Next unto these are such as sell cotton, and they have about thirty shops: then follow those that sell hemp, ropes, halter's, and such other hempen commodities. Then come you to the girdlers, and such as make pantofles, and leather-bridles embroidered with silk: next, their shops adjoin that make sword-scabberds and comparisons for horses. Immediately after dwell those that sell salt and lime. And upon them border an hundred shops of potters, who frame all kind of earthen vessels adorned with divers colours. Then come you to the sadlers-shops: and next of all to the street of porters, who (as I suppose) are The porters of Fez. above three hundred: these porters have a consul or governor, who every week alotteth unto part of them some set business. The gain which redoundeth thereof they put into a coffer, dividing it at the weeks end among them, which have wrought the same week. Strange it is to consider how exceedingly these porters love one another; for when any of them deceaseth, the whole company maintaineth his widow and fatherless children at their common charge, till either she die, or marrieth a new husband. The children they carefully bring up, till they have attained to some good art or occupation. Whosoever of them marrieth and hath children by his wife, inviteth most part of his company unto a banquet: who being thus invited, present each of them some gift or other unto the good man, or his wife. No man can be admitted into their company, unless first he banqueteth the principal men thereof: otherwise he is to have but half a share of the common gain. Free they are from all tributes and exactions: yea their bread is baked of free cost. If any of them be taken in any heinous offence, he is not publicly but privately punished. While they are at work they all wear short garments of one colour: and at vacant times they are appareled as themselves think good: but howsoever it be, they are most honest and faire-conditioned people. Next unto the porters company dwell the chief cooks and victuallers. Here also stands a certain square house covered with reed, wherein pease and turnep-rootes are to be sold, which are so greatly esteemed of in Fez, that none may buy them of the countrie-people at the first hand, but such as are appointed, who are bound to pay toll & tribute unto the customers: & scarcely one day passeth, wherein more than 500 sacks of pease and turnips are not sold. And albeit (as we have said) they are so much esteemed of, yet are they sold at a most easy price: for a man may buy 30, or at least 20. pound weight for one * 〈◊〉 in his Italian 〈◊〉 calleth it Baioco. Liardo. Green beans likewise in time of year are sold good cheap. Not far from the place before mentioned are certain shops, wherein lumps or steaks of flesh beaten in a mortar, & then fried with oil, & seasoned with much spice, are to be bought, every one of the said lumps or steaks being about the bigness of a fig, & being made only of dried beef. On the north side of the temple is a place whither all kind of herbs are brought to make salads withal: for which purpose there are 40. shops appointed. Next whereunto is The place of smoke, so called by reason of continual smoke: here are certain fritters or cakes fried in oil, like unto such as are called at Rome Pan Melato. Of these fritters great store are daily uttered: for every day they use to break their fasts therewith, & especially upon festival days: unto which fritters they add for a conclusion either roast-meat or honey: sometimes they steep them in an homely kind of broth made of bruised meat, which being sodden, they bray the second time in a mortar, making pottage thereof, & colouring it with a kind of red earth. They roast their flesh not upon a spit, but in an oven: for making two ovens one over another for the same purpose, in the lower they kindle a fire, putting the flesh into the upper oven when it is well het. You would not believe how finely their meat is thus roasted, for it cannot be spoiled either by smoke, or too much heat: for they are all night roasting it by a gentle fire, and in the morning they set it to sale. The foresaid steaks & fritters they sell unto the citizens in so great abundance, that they daily take for them more than 200. ducats. For there are 15. shops which sell nothing else. Likewise here are sold certain fishes & flesh fried, & a kind of excellent savoury bread, tasting somewhat like a fritter: which being baked with butter, they never eat but with butter and honey Here also are the feet of certain beasts sodden; wherewith the husbandmen betimes in the morning break their fast, and then hie them to their labour. Next unto these are such as sell oil, salt, butter, cheese, olives, pome-citrons & capers: their shops are full of fine earthen vessels, which are of much greater value than the things contained in them. Their butter and honey they sell by certain criers, which are porters appointed for the same office. Neither do they admit every one to fill their vessels; but that work is reserved for certain porters appointed to do it, which also fill the measures of oil when merchants buy the same. The said vessels are sufficient to contain an hundred and fifty pounds of butter; for so much butter the countrie-people put into each vessel. Then follow the shambles, consisting of about forty shops, wherein the butchers cut their flesh a pieces, and sell it by weight. They kill no beasts within the shambles, for there is a place allotted for this purpose near unto the river, where having once dressed their flesh, they send it to the shambles by certain servants appointed for that end. But before any butcher dare sell his flesh unto the citizens, he must carry it to the governor of the shambles, who so soon as he seeth the The governor of the shambles in Fez. flesh, he sets down in a piece of paper the price thereof, which they show together with their meat unto the people; neither may they in any case exceed the said price. Next unto the shambles standeth the market where course clothes are sold, which containeth at least an hundred shops: the said cloth is delivered unto certain criers (which are about threescore in number) who carrying the cloth from shop to shop tell the price thereof, and for the selling of every duckats-woorth they have two * In the Italian copy they are called Baiochi. Liardos' allowed them. This traffic of cloth endureth from noon till night, to the merchants great advantage. Then follow their shops that scour and sell armour, sword, javelinings, and such like warlike instruments. Next unto them stand the fishmongers, who sell most excellent and great fish, taken both in the river of Fez and in other waters, exceeding cheap; for you may buy a pound of fish for two farthings only. There is great abundance of the fish called in Rome Laccia, and that especially from the beginning of October till the month of April, as we will declare more at large when we come to speak of the rivers. Next unto the fishmongers dwell such as make of a certain hard reed, coops and cages for fowls; their shops being about forty in number. For each of the citizens useth to bring up great store of hens and capons. And that their houses may not be defiled with hennes-dung, they keep them continually in coops and cages. Then follow their shops that sell liquid soap, but they be not many, for you shall find more of them in other parts of the city. Neither make they soap at Fez only, but also in the mountains thereabout, from whence it is brought unto the city upon mules backs. Next of all are certain of their shops that sell meal, albeit they are diversly dispersed throughout the whole city. Next unto them are such as sell seed-graine and seed-pulse: which you cannot buy of any citizen, because that every one had rather keep his corn in store: many there are likewise in the same place, that will carry pulse or corn to mules or horses, whithersoever you will have them. A mule useth to carry three measures of pulse upon his back (which the muliter is enjoined to measure) in three sacks lying one upon another. Then are there ten shops of them that sell straw. Next them is the market where thread and hemp is to be sold, and where hemp useth to be kempt: which place is built after the fashion of great houses, with four galleries or spare-roomes round about it: in the first whereof they sell linen-cloth, and weigh hemp: in two other sit a great many women having abundance of sale-threed, which is there sold by the criers, who carry the same up and down from noon till night. In the midst of this place grow divers mulberry trees, affoordiug pleasant shade and shelter unto the merchants: and hither such swarms of women resort, that a man shall hardly withdraw himself from among them: good sport it is sometime to see how they will barret and scold one at another: yea and oftentimes you shall see them fall together by the ears. Let us now come to the west part; which stretcheth from the temple to that gate that leadeth unto Mecnase. Next unto the smoky place before mentioned, their habitations directly stand, that make leather-tankards, to draw water out of wells; of whom there are some fourteen shops. Unto these adjoin such as make wicker-vessels and other, to lay up meal and corn in: and these enjoy about thirty shops. Next them are 150. shops of tailors. And next the tailors are those that make leather-shieldes, such as I have often seen brought into Europe. Then follow twenty shops of laundresses or washers, being people of a base condition; to whom the citizens that have not maids of their own, carry their shirts and other fowl linen, which after few days are restored unto them so clean and white as it is wonderful. These laundresses have divers shops adjoining together in the same place: but here and there throughout the city are above two hundred families of such persons. Next unto the laundresses are those that make trees for saddles; who dwell likewise in great numbers eastward right in the way to the college founded by king Abuhinan. Upon these adjoin about forty shops of such as work stirrups, spurs, and bridles, so artificially, as I think the like are not to be seen in Europe. Next standeth their street, that first rudely make the said stirrups, bridles, and spurs. From thence you may go into the street of saddlers, which cover the saddles before mentioned threefold with most excellent leather: the best leather they lay uppermost, and the worst beneath, and that with notable workmanship; as may be seen in most places of Italy. And of them there are more than an hundred shops. Then follow their long shops that make pikes and lances. Next standeth a rock or mount, having two walks thereupon; the one whereof leadeth to the east gate, and the other to one of the king's palaces, where the king's sisters, or some other of his kindred are usually kept. But this is by the way to be noted, that all the foresaid shops or market begin at the great temple: howbeit, that I might not invert my set-order, I have only described those places that are round about the said temple, minding last of all to speak of the merchant's station or burse. Of the station or burse of merchants in Fez. THis burse you may well call a city, which being walled round about hath twelve gates, & before every gate an iron chain, to keep horses & carts from coming in. The said burse is divided into 12. several wards or parts: two whereof are allotted unto such shoemakers as make shoes only for noblemen and gentlemen, and two also to silke-merchants or haberdashers, that sell ribbons, garters, scarves, and such other like ornaments; and of these there are about fifty shops. Others there are that sell silk only for the embrodering of shirts, cushions, and other such furniture made of cloth, possessing almost as many shops as the former. Then follow those that make women's girdles of course wool (which some make of silk) but very grossly, for I think they are 〈◊〉 then two fingers thick, so that they may serve almost for cables to a ship. Next unto these girdlers are such as sell woollen and linen clothe brought out of Europe: which have also silke-stuffes, caps, and other like commodities to sell. Having passed these, you come to them that sell mats, mattresses, cushions, and other things made of leather. Next adjoineth the customers office; for their cloth is sent about by certain criers to be sold, who before they can pass, must go to the customers to have the said cloth sealed, and to pay toll unto the customers. Criers here are, to the number of sixty, which for the crying of every cloth have one * Or 〈◊〉. Liardo allowed them. Next of all dwell the tailors, and that in three several streets. Then come you to the linendrapers, which sell smocks and other apparel for women: and these are accounted the richest merchants in all Fez, for their wares are the most gainful of all others. Next unto these are certain woollen garments to be sold, made of such cloth as is brought thither out of Europe. Every afternoon cloth is sold in this place by the criers, which is lawful for any man to do, when necessary occasion urgeth him. Last of all is that place where they use to sell wrought shirts, towels, and other embroidered works; as also where carpets, beds, and blankets are to be sold. The reason why this part of the city was called Caesaria. THe foresaid burse or station of merchants was in times past called Caesaria, according to the name of that renowned conqueror 〈◊〉 Caesar: the reason whereof some affirm to be; because all the cities of Barbary were in those days first subject to the Romans, and then to the Goths. And each city always had either Romans or Goths to receive and take charge of the tribute. Howbeit because the people often made civil A 〈◊〉 used in Africa how to keep the prince's tribute and merchants goods in security. wars and assaults upon them, their determination was in every city to build some strong walled place, where both the tribute and the principal goods of the citizens might remain in safety: hoping by this means that the citizens would be as careful of the prince's goods as of their own. Which course had the Italians imitated, they had never been spoiled so often of their goods. For in civil wars it many times befalleth, that the greedy soldiers not being satisfied with the enemies goods, will pray upon the wealth of their friends. Of the grocers, apothecary's, and other tradesmen, and 〈◊〉 of Fez. NExt unto the said burse, on the north side, in a straight lane, stand an hundred and fifty grocers and apothecary's shops, which are fortified on both sides with two strong gates. These shops are guarded in the night season by certain hired and armed watchmen, which keep their station with lanterns and mastiffs. The said apothecary's can make neither 〈◊〉, ointments, nor electuaries: but such things are made at home by the physicians, and are of them to be bought. The physicians houses adjoin for the most part unto the apothecary's: howbeitvery few of the people know either the physician or the use of his physic. The shops here are so artificially built and adorned, that the like (I think) are no where else to be found. john Leo was at Tauris in Persia. Being in Tauris a city of Persia, I remember that I saw divers stately shops curiously built 〈◊〉 certain galleries, but very dark, so that (in my judgement) they be far inferior unto the shops of Fez. Next the apothecary's are certain artificers that make combs of box and other wood. Eastward of the apothecary's dwell the needle-makers, possessing to the number of fifty shops. Then follow those that turn ivory, and such other matter, who (because their craft is practised by some other artisans) are but few in number. Unto the turners adjoin certain that sell meal, soap, & brooms: who dwelling next unto the threed-market beforementioned, are scarce twenty shops in all: for the residue are dispersed in other places of the city, as we will hereafter declare. Amongst the cotton-merchants are certain that sell ornaments for tents, and beds. Next of all stand the fowlers, who, though they be but few, yet are they stored with all kind of choice and dainty fowls: whereupon the place is called the fowler's market. Then come you to their shops that sell cords and ropes of hemp: and then to such as make high cork slippers for noblemen and gentlemen to walk the streets in, when it is fowl weather: these corke-slippers are finely trimmed with much silk, and most excellent upper leathers, so that the cheapest will cost a ducat, 〈◊〉 some there are of ten ducats, and some of five and twenty ducats price. Such slippers as are accounted most fine and costly are made of black and white mulberie-tree, of black walnut-tree, and of the jujubatree, albeit the corke-slippers are the most durable and strong. Unto these adjoin ten shops of Spanish Moors, which make crossbows: as also those that make brooms of a certain wild palm-tree, such as are daily brought out of 〈◊〉 to Rome. These brooms they cartie about the city in a great basket, either selling them, or exchanging them for bran, ashes, or old shoes: the bran they sell again to shepherds, the ashes to such as white thread, & the old shoes to cobblers. Next unto them are smiths that make nails; & coopers which make certain great vessels in form of a bucket, having corne-measures to sell also: which measures, when the officer, appointed for the same purpose, hath made trial of, he is to receive a farthing apiece for his fee. Then follow the wooll-chapmen, who having bought wool of the butchers, put it forth unto others to be scoured and washed: the sheepskins they themselves dress: but as for oxe-hides they belong to another occupation, and are tanned in another place. Unto these adjoin such as make certain langols' orwiths, which the Africans put upon their horses feet. Next of all are the braziers; then such as make weights and measures; and those likewise that make instruments to card wool or flax. At length you descend into a long street, where men of divers occupations dwell together, some of which do polish and enamel stirrups, spurs, and other such commodities, as they receive from the smiths roughly and rudely hammered. Next whom dwell certain cartwright's, plow-wrights, mill-wrights, and of other like occupations. Dyer's have their abode by the rivers side, and have each of them a most clear fountain or cistern, to wash their silke-stuffes in. Over against the dyer's dwell makers of bulwarks or trenches, in a very large place, which being planted with shady mulberietrees is exceeding pleasant in the summertime. Next them are a company offarriers, that shoe mules and horses: and then those that make the iron-work of crossbows. Then follow smiths that make horseshoes; and last of all those that white linen-cloth: and here the west part of the city endeth, which in times past (as is aforesaid) was a city by itself, and was built after the city on the east side of the river. A description of the second part of Fez. THe second part of Fez situate eastward, is beautified with most stately palaces, temples, houses, and colleges; albeit there are not so many trades and occupations as in the part before described. For here are neither merchants, tailors, shoemakers, etc. but of the meaner sort. Here are notwithstanding thirty shops of grocers. near unto the walls dwell certain bricke-burners and potters: and not far from thence is a great market of white earthen vessels, platters, cups, and dishes. Next of all stands the corne-market, wherein are divers granaries to lay up corn. Over against the great temple there is a broad street paved with brick, round about which divers handicrafts and occupations are exercised. There are likewise many other trades diversly dispersed over this east part of the city. The drapers and grocers have certain peculiar places allotted unto them. In this east part of Fez likewise there are five hundred and twenty weavers houses, very stately and sumptuously built: having in each of them many worke-houses and looms, which yield great rent unto the owners. 〈◊〉 there are (by report) in this city twenty thousand, and as many millers. Moreover in this part of Fez are an hundred shops for the whiting of thread; the principal whereof being situate upon the river, are exceedingly well furnished with kettles, cauldrons, and other such vessels: here are likewise many great houses to saw wood in, which work is performed by Christian captives, and whatsoever wages they earn, redoundeth unto their Lords and masters. These Christian captives are not suffered to rest from their labours, but only upon fridays, and upon eight several days of the year beside, whereon the Moors feasts are solemnised. Here also are the common stews for harlots, which are favoured by great men, and sometime by the chief governors of the city. Likewise there are certain vintners, who are freely permitted to keep harlots, and to take filthy hire for them. Here are also more than six hundred clear fountains walled round about and most charily kept, every one of which is severally conveyed by certain pipes unto each house, temple, college, and hospital: and this fountain-water is accounted the best: for that which cometh out of the river is in summer oftentimes dried up: as likewise when the conducts are to be cleansed, the course of the river must of necessity be turned out of the city. Wherefore every family useth to fetch water out of the said fountains, and albeit in summertime the chief gentlemen use river-water, yet they will often call for fountain-water, because it is more cool and pleasant in taste. But in the spring-time it is nothing so. These fountains have their original for the most part from the west and south, for the north part is all full of mountains and marble-rocks, containing certain caves or cells, wherein corn may be kept for many years; of which caves some are so large, that they will hold two hundred bushels of corn. The citizens dwelling near those caves, and such as possess them, do sufficiently maintain themselves in taking yearly every hundred bushel for rent. The south part of east Fez is almost half destitute of inhabitants: howbeit the gardens abound with fruits and flowers of all sorts. Every garden hath an house belonging thereunto, and a christall-fountaine environed with roses and other odoriferous flowers and herbs; so that in the spring-time a man may both satisfy his eyes, and solace his mind in visiting this part of the city: and well it may be called a Paradise, sithence the noblemen do here reside from the month of April till the end of September. Westward, that is, toward the king's palace, standeth a castle built by a king of the Luntune-familie, resembling in bigness an whole town: wherein the kings of Fez, before the said palace was built, kept their royal residence. But after new Fez began to be built by the Marinking, the said castle was left only to the governor of the city. Within this castle stands a stately temple built (as aforesaid) what time it was inhabited by princes and nobles, many places being afterward defaced and turned into gardens: howbeit certain houses were left unto the governor, partly to dwell in, and partly for the deciding of 〈◊〉. Here is likewise a certain prison for captives supported with many pillars, and being so large, that it will hold (as divers are of opinion) three thousand men. Neither are there any several rooms in this prison: for at Fez one prison serveth for all. By this castle runneth a certain river very commodious for the governor. Of the magistrates, the administration of justice; and of the apparel used in Fez. IN the city of Fez are certain particular judges and magistrates: and there is a governor that defineth civil controversies, and giveth sentence against malefactors. Likewise there is a judge of the canon law, who hath to do with all matters concerning the Mahometan religion. A third judge there is also that dealeth about marriages and divorcements, whose authority is to hear all witnesses, and to give sentence accordingly. Next unto them is the high advocate, unto whom they appeal from the sentence of the said judges, when as they do either mistake themselves, or do ground their sentence upon the authority of some inferior doctor. The governor gaineth a great sum of money by condemning of parties at several times. Their manner of proceeding against a malefactor is this: The punishment of malefactors in Fez. having given him an hundred or two hundred stripes before the governor, the executioner putteth an iron-chaine about his neck, and so leadeth him stark-naked (his privities only excepted) through all parts of the city: after the executioner follows a sergeant, declaring unto all the people what fact the guilty person hath committed, till at length having put on his apparel again, they carry him back to prison. Sometimes it falleth out that many offenders chained together are led about the city: and the governor for each malefactor thus punished, receiveth one ducat and one fourth part; and likewise at their first entrance into the jail, he demands of each one a certain duty, which is paid particularly unto him by divers merchants and artificers appointed of purpose. And amongst his other livings, he gathereth out of a certain mountain seven thousand ducats of yearly revenue: so that when occasion serveth, he is at his proper costs to find the king of Fez three hundred horses, and to give them their pay. Those which follow the canon-law have neither stipend nor reward allowed them: for it is forbidden by the law of Mahumet, that the judges of his religion should reap any commodity or fees by their office; but that they should live only by reading of lectures, and by their priesthood. In this faculty are many advocates and proctor's, which are extreme idiots, and utterly void of all good learning. There is a place also in Fez whereinto the judges useto cast the citizens, for debt, or for some light offence. In all this city are four officers or sergeants only; who from midnight till two a clock in the morning do walk about all parts of the city; neither have they any stipend, but a certain fee of such malefactors as they lead about in chains, according to the quality of every man's crime; moreover, they are freely permitted to sell wine, and to keep harlots. The said governor hath neither scribes nor notaries, but pronounceth all sentences by word of mouth. One only there is that gathereth customs and tributes over all the city, who daily payeth to the kings use thirty ducats. This man appointeth certain substitutes to watch at every gate, where nothing, be it of never so small value, can pass before some tribute be paid. Yea sometime they go forth of the city to meet with the carriers and muleteers upon the high ways, to the end they may not conceal nor closely convey any merchandise into the city. And if they be taken in any deceit, they pay double. The set order or proportion of their custom is this, namely to pay two ducats for the worth of an hundred: for Onix-stones, which are brought hither in great plenty, they pay one fourth part: but for wood, corn, oxen, and hens, they give nothing at all. Neither at the entering of the city do they pay any tribute for rams, but at the shambles they give two * Or Baiochi. Liardos' apiece, and to the governor of the shambles one. The said governor of the shambles hath always twelve men waiting upon him, and oftentimes he rideth about the city to examine the weight of bread, and finding any bread to fail of the due weight, he causeth the baker to be beaten with cudgels, and to be led in contempt up and down the city. The said office was wont to be allotted unto men of singular honesty; but now adays every ignorant and lewd person enjoyeth it. The citizens of Fez go very civilly and decently attired, in the spring-time wearing garments made of outlandish cloth: over these shirts they wear a jacket or cassock being narrow and halfe-sleeved, whereupon they wear a certain wide garment, close before on the breast. Their caps are thin and single, like unto the nightcaps used in Italy, saving that they cover not their ears: these caps are covered with a certain scarf, which being twice wreathed about their head and beard, hangeth by a knot. They wear neither hose nor breeches, but in the spring-time when they ride a journey they put on boots: mary the poorer sort have only their cassock, and a mantle over that called * Or 〈◊〉. Barnussi, and a most course cap. The doctors and ancient gentlemen wear a certain garment with wide sleeves, somewhat like to the gentlemen of Venice. The common sort of people are for the most part clad in a kind of course white cloth. The women are not altogether unseemly appareled, but in sommer-time they wear nothing save their smocks only. In winter they wear such a wide sleeved garment, being close at the breast, as that of the men before mentioned. When they go abroad, they put on certain long breeches, wherewith their legs are all covered, having also, after the fashion of Syria, a vail hanging down from their heads, which covereth their whole bodies. On their faces likewise they wear a mask with two little holes only for their eyes, to peep out at. Their ears they adorn with golden ear-rings & with most precious jewels: the meaner sort wear 〈◊〉 of silver and gilt only. Upon their arms the ladies and gentlewomen wear golden bracelets, and the residue silver, as likewise gold or siluer-rings upon their legs, according to each one's estate and ability. Of their manner of eating and drinking. LEt us now speak somewhat of their victuals and manner of eating. The common sort set on the pot with fresh meat twice every week: but the gentlemen and richer sort every day, and as often as they list. They take three meals a day: their breakfast consisteth of certain fruits and bread, or else of a kind of liquid pap made like unto frumenty: in winter they sup off the broth of shall flesh thickened with course meal. To dinner they have flesh, salads, cheese, and olives: but in summer they have greater cheer. Their supper is easy of digestion, consisting of bread, melons, grapes, or milk: but in winter they have sodden flesh, together with a kind of meat called Cuscusu, which being made of a lump of dough is set first upon the A kind of 〈◊〉 called Cuscusu. fire in certain vessels full of holes, and afterward is tempered with butter and pottage. Some also use often to have roast-meat. And thus you see after what sort both the gentlemen & common people lead their lives: albeit the 〈◊〉 fare somewhat more daintily: but if you compare them with the noblemen and gentlemen of Europe, they may seem to be miserable and base fellows; not for any want or scarcity of victuals, but for want of good manners and cleanliness. The table whereat they sit is low, uncovered, and filthy: seats they have none but the bare ground, neither knives or 〈◊〉 but only their ten talons. The said Cuscusu is set before them all in one only platter, whereout as well gentlemen as others take it not with spoons, but with their claws five. The meat & pottage is putal in one dish; out of which every one raketh with his greasy fists what he thinks good: you shall never see knife upon the table, but they tear and greedily devour their meat like hungry dogs. Neither doth any of them desire to drink before he hath well stuffed his paunch; and then will he sup off a cup of cold water as big as a milke-bowle. The doctors indeed are somewhat more orderly at meals: but, to tell you the very truth, in all Italy there is no gentleman so mean, which for fine diet and stately furniture excelleth not the greatest potentates and lords of all Africa. The manner of solemnising marriages. AS touching their marriages, they observe these courses following. So soon as the maids father hath espoused her unto her lover, they go forthwith like bride and bridegroom to church, accompanied with their parents and kinsfolks, and call likewise two notaries with them to make record before all that are present of the covenants and dowry. The meaner sort of people usually give for their daughter's dowry thirty ducats and a woman-slave of fifteen ducats price; as likewise a particoloured garment embroidered with silk, and certain other silk skarves or iags, to wear upon her head in stead of a hood or vail; then a pair of fine shoes, and two excellent pair of startups; and lastly many pretty knacks curiously made of silver and other metals, as namely combs, perfuming-pans, bellows, and such other trinkets as women have in estimation. Which being done, all the guests present are invited to a banquet, whereunto for great dainties is brought a kind of bread fried and tempered with honey, which we have before described; then they bring roast-meat to the board, all this being at the bridegrooms cost: afterward the bride's father maketh a banquet in like sort. Who if he bestow on his daughter some apparel besides her dowry, it is accounted a point of liberality. And albeit the father promiseth but thirty ducats only for a dowry, yet will he sometimes bestow, in apparel and other ornaments belonging to women, two hundred, yea sometimes three hundred ducats beside. But they seldom give an house, a vinyeard, or a field for a dowry. Moreover upon the bride they bestow three gowns made of costly cloth; and three others of silk chamlet, or of some other excellent stuff. They give her smocks likewise curiously wrought, with fine veils, and other embroidered vestures; as also pillows and cushions of the best sort. And besides all the former gifts, they bestow eight carpets or coverlets on the bride, four whereof are only for seemliness to spread upon their presses and cupboards: two of the courser they use for their beds; and the other two of leather, to lay upon the floor of their bedchambers. Also they have certain rugs of about twenty else compass or length; as likewise three quilts being made of linen and woollen on the one side, and stuffed with flocks on the other side, which they use in the night in manner following. With the one half they cover themselves, and the other half they lay under them: which they may easily do, when as they are both ways about ten else long. Unto the former they add as many coverlets of silk very curiously embroidered on the upperside, and beneath lined double with linen and cotton. They bestow likewise white coverlets to use in summertime only: and lastly they bestow a woollen hanging divided into many parts, and finely wrought, as namely with certain pieces of gilt leather; whereupon they sow iags of particoloured silk, and upon every iag a little ball or button of silk, whereby the said hangging may for ornaments sake be fastened unto a wall. Here you see what be the appurtenances of their dowries; wherein some do strive so much to excel others, that oftentimes many gentlemen have brought themselves unto poverty thereby. Some Italians think that the husband bestows a dowry upon his wife; but they altogether mistake the matter. The bridegroom being ready to carry home his bride, causeth her to be placed in a wooden cage or cabinet eight-square covered with silk, in which she is carried by porters, her parents and kinsfolks following, with a great noise of trumpets, pipes, and drums, and with a number of torches; the bridegrooms kinsmen go before with torches, and the bride's kinsfolks follow after: and so they go unto the great market place, and having passed by the temple, the bridegroom takes his leave of his father in law and the rest, hying him home with all speed, and in his chamber expecting the presence of his spouse. The father, brother, and uncle of the bride lead her unto the chamber-door, and there deliver her with one consent unto the mother of the bridegroom: who, as soon as she is entered, toucheth her foot with his, and forthwith they depart into a several room by themselves. In the mean season the banquet is coming forth: and a certain woman standeth before the 〈◊〉 door, expecting till the bridegroom having deflowered his bride reacheth her a napkin stained with blood, which napkin she carrieth incontinent and showeth to the guests, proclaiming with a loud voice, that the bride was ever till that time an unspotted and pure virgin. This woman together with other women her companions, first the parents of the bridegroom and then of the bride do honourably entertain. But if the bride be found not to be a virgin, the marriage is made frustrate, and she with great disgrace is turned home to her parents. At complete marriages they make for the most part three banquets: the first the same day when the bridegroom and bride are joined in wedlock; the second the day following for women only; and the third seven days after; whereat all the kinsfolks and friends of the bride are present; and this day the bride's father, according to his ability, sends great store of dainty dishes unto his son in law: but so soon as the new married man goeth forth of the house (which is for the most part on the seventh day after the marriage) he buyeth great plenty of fishes, which he causeth his mother or some other woman to cast upon his wives feet; and this they, from an ancient superstitious custom, take for a good boding. Likewise at the bridegrooms fathers they use to make two other feasts; the one upon the day before the bride is married; and so that night they spend in dancing and disport. The morrow after a company of women go to dress the bride, to comb her locks, and to paint her cheeks with vermilion; her hands and her feet they die black, but all this painting presently looseth the fresh hue; and this day they have another banquet. The bride they place in the highest room that she may be seen of all, and then those that dressed the bride are condignly entertained. Being come to the bridegrooms house, his parents salute the new bride with certain great cups full of new wine and cakes, with other iuncats, (which we will here pass over in silence) all which are bestowed upon the bridegrooms companions. The same night which we said was spent in dancing, there are present at the bridall-house certain minstrels and singers, which by turns sometimes use their instruments and sometimes voice-musicke: they dance always one by one, and at the end of each galliard they bestow a largesse upon the musicians. If any one will honour the dancer, he bids him kneel down before him, and having fastened pieces of money all over his face, the musicians presently take it off for their fee. The women dance alone without any men, at the noise of their own musicians. All these things use to be performed when the bride is a maid. But the marriages of The marriage of widows. widows are concluded with less ado. Their cheer is boiled beef and mutton, and stewed hens, with divers iuncating dishes among. In stead of trenchers, the guests being ten or twelve in number, have so many great round platters of wood set before them. And this is the common custom of gentlemen and merchants. The meaner sort present their guests with certain sops or bruesses of bread like unto a pan-cake, which being dipped in flesh-pottage, they eat out of a great platter not with spoons but with their fingers only: and round about each great platter stand to the number of ten or twelve persons. Likewise they make a solemn feast at the circumcision of their male children, which is upon the seventh day after their birth; The circumcision of their children. and at this feast the circumciser, together with all their friends and kinsfolks is present: which being done, each one, according to his ability, bestoweth a gift upon the circumciser in manner following. Every man lays his money upon a lads face which the circumciser brought with him. Whereupon the lad calling every one by his name, giveth them thanks in particular: and then the infant being circumcised, they spend that day with as great jollity as a day of marriage. But at the birth of a daughter they show not so much alacrity. Of their rites observed upon festival dates, and their manner of mourning for the dead. AMong the people of Fez there have remained certain relics 〈◊〉 Christian ceremonies 〈◊〉 among the 〈◊〉. of festival days instituted of old by the Christians; whereupon they use certain ceremonies which themselves understand not. Upon Christmas even they eat a salad made of divers herbs: they seeth likewise that night all kind of pulse, which they feed upon for great dainties. Upon Newyears day the children go with masks and vizards on their faces to the houses of gentlemen and merchants, and have fruits given them for singing certain carols or songs. When as the feast of Saint john Baptist is hallowed among Christians, you shall here see all about great store of fires made with straw. And when their children's teeth begin to grow, they make another feast called, according to the Latins, Dentilla. They have also many other rites and customs of divining or soothsaying, the like whereof I have seen at Rome and in other cities of Italy. As touching their feasts prescribed by the Mahometan law, they are at large set down in that brief treatise which we have written concerning the same law. The women having by death lost Their funerals. their husbands, fathers, or any other of their dear friends, assemble forthwith a great multitude of their own sex together, who stripping themselves out of their own attire, put on most vile sackcloth, and defile their faces with much dirt: then call they certain men clad in women's attire, bringing great fower-square drums with them, at the noise of which drum's the women-mourners sing a funeral song, tending as much as may be, to the commendation of the party deceased: and at the end of every verse, the said women utter most hideous shrieks & outcries, tearing their hair, & with much lamentation beating their cheeks & breasts, till they be all-imbrued with blood: and so these heathenish superstitions continue for seven whole days together. At which seven days end they surcease their mourning for the space of 40. days, & then they begin anew to torment themselves for three days together in manner aforesaid: howbeit these kinds of obsequies are observed only by the base people, but the gentlemen and better sort behave themselves more modestly. At this time all the widows friends come about her to comfort her, and send divers kinds of meats unto her: for in the mourning house they may dress no meat at all, till the dead corpses be carried forth. The woman herself that looseth her husband, father, or brother, never goeth forth with the funeral. But how they wash and bury the dead corpses, and what superstitions they use thereabout, you shall find recorded in my little treatise above mentioned. Of their dove-houses. divers there are in this city, that take much pleasure in keeping of doves, which are here in great plenty, of all colours. These doves they keep in certain cages or lockers on the tops of their houses, which lockers they set open twice a day, to wit, morning and evening, delighting greatly to see them fly, for those that out-flie the residue are accounted the best. Oftentimes it falleth out, that neighbour's doves will be mingled together, for which cause you shall see the owners go together by the ears. Some have a certain net bound unto two long canes, wherewith they use to take their neighbour's doves, as they come flying forth of their lovers. Amongst the colliers you shall find seven or eight shops only of those that sell doves. Their manner of gaming at Fez. THe citizens use most of all to play at chess, and that from ancient times. Other games there are also, but very rude, and used only by the common people. At certain times of the year the boys of one street will fight with clubs against the boys of another street, and that sometimes with so great fury, that they 〈◊〉 themselves to other weapons and slay one another, especially upon their festival days, what time they will challenge and provoke one another forth of the citie-walles. And having fought hard all the whole day, at night they fall to throwing of stones: till at length the citie-officers come upon them, taking some, and beating them publicly throughout the city. Sometimes it falleth 〈◊〉, that the young striplings arming themselves, and going by night out of the city, range up and down the fields and gardens: and if the contrary faction of yoonkers and they mere, it is wonderful what a bloody skirmish ensueth: howbeit they are often most severely punished for it. Of the African poets. IN Fez there are divers most excellent poets, which make verses in their own mother tongue. Most of their poems and songs entreat of love. Every year they pen certain verses in the commendation of Mahumet, especially upon his birthday: for then betimes in the morning they resort unto the palace of the chief judge or governor, ascending his tribunall-seate, and from thence reading their verses to a great audience of people: and he Rewards for poets in Fez. whose verses are most elegant and pithy, is that year proclaimed prince of the poets. But when as the kings of the marin-family prospered, they used to invite all the learned men of the city unto their palace; and honourably entertaining them, they commanded each man in their hearing to recite their verses to the commendation of Mahumet: and he that was in all men's opinions esteemed the best poet, was rewarded by the king with an hundred ducats, with an excellent horse, with a woman-slave, and with the kings own robes wherewith he was then appareled: all the rest had fifty ducats apiece given them, so that none departed without the king's liberality: but an hundred and thirty years are expired since this custom, together with the majesty of the Fessan kingdom, decayed. A description of the grammar-schooles in Fez. OF schools in Fez for the instructing of children, there are almost two hundred, every one of which is in fashion like a great hall. The schoolmasters teach their children to write and read not out of a book, but out of a certain great table. Every day they expound one sentence of the Alcoran: and having red quite through they begin it again, repeating it so often, till they have most firmly committed the same to memory: which they do right well in the space of 7. years. Then read they unto their scholars some part of orthography: howbeit both this and the other parts of Grammar are far more exactly taught in the colleges, then in these trivial schools. The said schoolmasters are allowed a very small stipend; but when their boys have learned some part of the Alcoran, they present certain gifts unto their master, according to each one's ability. Afterward so soon as any boy hath perfectly learned the whole Koran, his father inviteth all his sons schoolfellows unto a great banquet: and his son in costly apparel rides through the street upon a gallant horse, which horse and apparel the governor of the royal citadel is bound to lend him. The rest of his schoolfellows being mounted likewise on horseback accompany him to the banqueting house, singing divers songs to the praise of God and of Mahumet. Then are they brought to a most sumptuous banquet, whereat all the kinsfolks of the foresaid boys father are usually present: every one of whom bestoweth on the schoolmaster some small gift, and the boy's father gives him a new suit of apparel. The said scholars likewise use to celebrate a feast upon the birthday of Mahumet, and then their fathers are bound to send each man a torch unto the school: whereupon every boy carrieth a torch in his hand, some of which weigh thirty pound. These torches are most curiously made, being adorned round about with divers fruits of wax, which being lighted betimes in the morning do burn till sunrise, in the mean while certain singers resound the praises of Mahumet, and so soon as the sun is up, all their solemnity ceaseth: this day useth to be very gainful unto the schoolmasters, for they sell the remnant of the wax upon the torches for an hundred ducats, and sometimes for more. None of them pays any rent for his school: for all their schools were built many years ago, and were freely bestowed for the training up of youth. Whatsoever ornaments or toys are upon the 〈◊〉, the schoolmasters divide them among their scholars and among the singers. Both in these common schools and also in the colleges they have two days of recreation every week, wherein they neither teach nor study. Of the fortune-tellers and some other artisans in Fez. WE have said nothing as yet of the leatherdressers, who have divers mansions by the rivers side, paying for every skin an halfpenny custom, which amounteth yearly almost unto three hundred ducats. Here are likewise chirurgeons & barbers, whom, because they are so few, I thought not to have mentioned in this place. Now let us speak of the fortune-tellers and diviners, of whom there is a great number, and three kinds. For one Three sorts of diviners in Fez. sort useth certain Geomanticall figures. Others pouring a drop of oil into a vial or glass of water, make the said water to be transparent and bright, wherein, as it were in a mirror, they affirm that they see huge swarms of devils that resemble an whole army, some whereof are traveling, some are passing over a river, and others fight a land-battell, whom when the diviner seeth at quiet, he demandeth such questions of them as he is desirous to be resolved of: and the devils give them answer with beckoning, or with some gesture of their hands or eyes: so inconsiderate and damnable is their credulity in this behalf. The foresaid glasse-viall they will deliver into children's hands scarce of eight years old, of whom they will ask whether they see this or that devil. Many of the city are so besotted with these vanities, that they spend great sums upon them. The third kind of diviners are women-witches, which are affirmed to have familiarity with devils: some devils they call red, some white, and some black devils: and when they will tell any man's fortune, they perfume themselves with certain odours, saying, that then they possess themselves with that devil which they called for: afterward changing their voice, they feign the devil to speak within them: then they which come to inquire, ought with great fear & trembling ask these vile & abominable witches such questions as they mean to propound, and lastly offering some fee unto the devil, they depart. But the wiser and honester sort of people call these women Sahaoat, which in Latin signifieth Fricatrices, because they have a damnable custom to commit unlawful Venery among themselves, which I cannot express in any modester terms. If fair women come unto them at any time, these abominable witches will burn in lust towards them no otherwise then lusty yoonkers do towards young maids, and will in the devils behalf demand for a reward, that they may lie with them: and so by this means it often falleth out, that thinking thereby to fulfil the devils command they lie with the witches. Yea some there are, which being alured with the delight of this abominable vice, will desire the company of these witches, and feigning themselves to be sick, will either call one of the witches home to them, or will send their husbands for the same purpose: and so the witches perceiving how the matter stands, will say that the woman is possessed with a devil, and that she can no way be cured, unless she be admitted into their society. With these words her silly husband being persuaded, doth not only permit her so to do, but makes also a sumptuous banquet unto the damned crew of witches: which being done, they use to dance very strangely at the noise of drums: and so the poor man commits his false wife to their filthy disposition. Howbeit some there are that will soon conjure the devil with a good cudgel out of their wives: others feigning themselves to be possessed with a devil, will deceive the said witches, as their wives have been deceived by them. Of the conjurers, enchanters, and jugglers in Fez. IN Fez likewise there are a kind of jugglers or conjurers called Muhazzimin: who of all others are reported to be most speedy casters out of devils. And because their Necromancy sometimes taketh effect, it is a wonder to see into what reputation they grow thereby: but when they cannot cast forth a devil, they say it is an airy spirit. Their manner of adjuring devils is this: first they draw certain characters and circles upon an ash-heape or some other place; then describe they certain signs upon the hands and forehead of the party possessed, and perfume him after a strange kind of manner. Afterward they make their enchantment or conjuration; inquiring of the devil, which way or by what means he entered the party, as likewise what he is, and by what name he is called, and lastly charging him to come forth. Others there are that work by a certain Cabalistical rule called Zairagia: this rule is contained in many writings, for it is thought to be natural magic: neither are there any other Necromancers in all Fez, that will more certainly and truly resolve a doubtful question; howbeit their art is exceeding difficult: for the students thereof must have as great skill in Astrology, as in Cabala. Myself in times past having attained to some knowledge in this faculty, continued (I remember) an whole day in describing one figure only: which kind of figures are described in manner following. First they draw many circles within the compass of a great circle: in the first circle they make a cross, at the four extremities whereof they set down the four quarters of the world, to wit, East, West, North, and South: at each end of one of the said cross lines, they note either pole: likewise about the circumference of the first circle, they paint the four elements: then divide they the same circle and the circle following into four parts: and every fourth part they divide into other seven, each one being distinguished with certain great Arabian characters, so that every element containeth eight and twenty characters. In the third circle they set down the seven planets; in the fourth the twelve signs of the Zodiac; in the fifth the twelve Latin names of the months; in the sixth the eight and twenty houses of the moon; in the seventh the 365. days of the year, and about the convexity thereof, the four cardinal or principal winds. Then take they one only letter of the question propounded, multiplying the same by all the particulars aforenamed, & the product or sum total they divide after a certain manner, placing it in some room, according to the quality of the character, and as the element requireth wherein the said character is found without a figure. All which being done, they mark that figure which seemeth to agree with the foresaid number or sum produced, wherewith they proceed as they did with the former, till they have found eight and twenty characters, whereof they make one word, and of this word the speech is made that resolveth the question demanded: this speech is always turned into a verse of the first kind, which the Arabians call Ethavil, consisting of eight Stipites and twelve Chordi, according to the meeter of the Arabian tongue, whereof we have entreated in the last part of An Arabian grammar written by john Leo. our Arabian grammar. And the verse consisting of those characters, comprehendeth always a true and infallible answer unto the question propounded, resolving first that which is demanded, and then expounding the sense of the question itself. These practitioners are never found to err, which causeth their art of Cabala to be had in great admiration: which although it be accounted natural, yet never saw I any thing that hath more affinity with supernatural and divine knowledge. I remember that I saw in a certain open place of king Abulunan his college in Fez, upon a floor paved with excellent smooth marble, the description of a figure. Each side of this floor or court was fifty 〈◊〉 long, and yet two third parts thereof were occupied about the figure, and about the things pertaining thereto: three there were that made the description, every one attending his appointed place, and they were an whole day in setting it down. Another such figure I saw at Tunis, drawn by one that was marvelous cunning in the art, whose father had written two volumes of commentaries or expositions upon the precepts of the same art, wherein whosoever hath exact skill, is most highly esteemed of by all men. I myself never saw but three of this profession, namely one at Tunis, and two other at Fez: likewise I have seen two expositions upon the precepts of the said art, together with a commentary of one Margian father unto the foresaid Cabalist which I saw at Tunis: and another written by Ibnu Caldim the historiographer. And if any were desirous to see the precepts and commentaries of that art, he might do it with the expense of fifty ducats: for sailing to Tunis a town near unto Italy, he might have a sight of all the particulars aforesaid. I myself had fit opportunity Divination and soothsaying forbidden by the law of 〈◊〉. of time, and a teacher that offered to instruct me gratìs in the same art: howbeit I thought good not to accept his offer, because the said art is forbidden and accounted heretical by the law of Mahumet: for Mahumets' law affirmeth all kind of divinations to be vain, and that God only knoweth secrets and things to come: wherefore sometimes the said Cabalists are imprisoned by the Mahometan inquisitors, who cease not to persecute the professors of that art. Of certain rules and super stitions observed in the Mahumet an law. HEre also you may find certain learned men, which will have themselves called wizards and moral philosophers. They observe certain rules which Mahumet never prescribed. By some they are accounted catholic or true Mahumetans, and by others they are holden for heretics, howbeit the greatest part of the common people reverence them as if they were gods, notwithstanding they commit many things unlawful and forbidden divers Mahometan sects. by the Mahometan law, as namely; whereas the said law forbiddeth any love-matters to be expressed in any musical ditties or songs, these moralists affirm the contrary. In the foresaid Mahometan religion are a great number of rules or sects, every of which hath most learned patrons and protectors. The foresaid sect sprang up fourscore years after Mahumet, the first author thereof being called Elhesen Ibnu Abilhasen, and being borne in the town of Basora: this man taught his disciples & followers certain precepts, but writings he left none behind him. About an hundred years after there came another notable doctor of that sect from Bagaded, called Elharit Ibnu Esed, who left volumes of writings unto his disciples. Afterward those that were found to be his followers, were all condemned by the Mahometan patriarchs and lawyers. Howbeit 80. years after, that sect began to revive again under a certain famous professor, who drew after him many disciples, unto whom he published his doctrine. This man at length and all his followers were by the patriarch and lawyers condemned to die. Which he understanding, wrote forthwith unto the patriarch, requesting that he might be licensed to dispute with the lawyers as touching his doctrine, of whom if he were convinced, he would most willingly suffer death; otherwise that it would be against all equity, that so many innocents should perish upon an unjust accusation. The patriarch thinking his demand to be reasonable, condescended wholly thereunto. But when the matter came to disputation, the party condemned soon put all the lawyers to silence. Which when the patriarch perceived, he revoked the sentence as unjust, and caused many colleges and monasteries to be erected for the said party and his followers. After which time this sect continued about an hundred years, till the emperor Malicsach of the Turkish race came thither out of Asia the greater, and destroyed all the maintainers thereof. Whereupon some of them fled unto Cairo, and the rest into Arabia, being dispersed here and there for the space of twenty years, till in the reign of Caselsah nephew unto Malicsach, Nidam Elmule one of his counsellors, and a man of an high spirit, being addicted unto the said sect, so restored, erected, and confirmed the same, that by the help of one Elgazzuli a most learned man (who had written of the same argument a notable work divided into seven parts) he reconciled the lawyers with the disciples of this sect, conditionally, that the lawyers should be called conservers of the prophet Mahumet his laws, & the sectaries Reformers of the same. This concord lasted between them, till Bagaded was sacked by the Tartars; which befell in the year of the Hegeira 〈◊〉 sacked by the Tartars. 656. at what time those sectaries so increased, that they swarmed almost over all Africa and Asia. Neither would they admit any into their society, but such as were very learned, and trained up in all kind of liberal sciences; to the end they might the better defend their own opinions, and confute their adversaries: but now adays they admit all kind of rude and ignorant persons, affirming all sorts of learning to be needless; for the holy spirit (say they) revealeth the knowledge of the truth unto such as are of a clean hart; and they allege many reasons for the confirmation of this their opinion, though not very forcible. Wherefore despising their ancestors rites, and the strict observations of the law, they addict themselves to nought else but delights and pleasures, feasting often & singing lascivious songs. Sometimes they will rend their garments, either alluding thereby to the verses that they sing, or being moved thereunto by their corrupt and vile disposition; saying falsely that they are then ravished with a fit of divine love: but I rather impute it to their abundance of meat, and gluttony. For each one of them will devour as much meat, as may well suffice three. Or (which is more likely) they utter those passionate clamours and outcries, because they are inflamed with unlawful and filthy lust. For sometimes it happeneth that some one of the principal of them, with all his scholars and disciples, is 〈◊〉 to the marriage of some gentleman, and at the beginning of the banquet they will rehearse their devout orisons and songs, but so soon as they are risen from the table, the elder of the company being about to dance, tear their garments: and if any one in the midst of their dancing, that hath drunk immoderately, chanceth to fall down, he is taken up forthwith by one of the scholars, and to too lasciviously kissed. Whereupon this proverb grew among the people of Fez: The hermits banquet. Which they use in reproach of those masters, that make their scholars their minions. Of divers other rules and sects, and of the superstitious credulity of many. AMongst these sects there are some, that have not only a divers law, but also a different belief from the residue, whereupon by some others they are called heretics. Some there are also which hold, that a man by good works, by fasting and abstinence, may attain unto the nature of an angel, which good works, fastings, etc. do (say they) so purge and free the mind from all contagion of evil, that by no means it can sin any more, though it would never so feign. Howbeit they think themselves not capable of this felicity, before they have ascended thereunto by the degrees of fifty disciplines or sciences: and although they fall into sin before they be come to the fiftieth degree, yet they say that God will not impute that sin unto them. These fellows indeed in the beginning lead a most strict life, and do even macerate and consume themselves with fasting; but afterward they give themselves to all licentiousness and pleasure. They have also a most severe form of living set down in four books, by a certain learned man of their faction, called Essehravar de Sehravard, and borne in the city of Corasan. Likewise there was another author called Ibnul Farid, that described all their religion in witty verses, which being fraught with allegories seemed to entreat of nought but love: wherefore one Elfargani expounded the said verses with a commentary, and thereout gathered the canons and orders of the sect, and showed the degrees to the attainment of felicity. Moreover the said verses are so sweet and elegant, that the maintainers of this sect will sing and repeat none other in their banquets: for these three hundred years no author hath so adorned their language as the said Ibnul. These sectaries take the heavens, the elements, the planets, and the fixed stars to be one god, and that no law nor religion is erroneous: for every man (say they) may lawfully worship that which his mind is most addicted to worship. They think that all the knowledge of God was infused into one man, whom they call in their language Elcorb; this man, they say, was elect by god, and was made equal in knowledge to him. Forty there are among them called all by the name of Elauted, which signifieth in our language, a block, or stock of a tree: out of this number, when their Elcoth deceaseth, they create another in his room, namely seventy persons that have the authority of election committed unto them. There are likewise 765. others (whose names I do not well remember) who are chosen into the said electors rooms, when any of them decease. These 765. being bound thereunto by a certain canon or rule of their order, are constrained always to go unknown, and they range almost all the world over in a most vile and beggarly habit, so that a man would take them for mad men and estranged from all sense of humanity: for these lewd miscreants under pretence of their religion run like rogues naked and savage throughout all Africa, having so little regard of honesty or shame, that they will like brute beasts ravish women in public places; and yet forsooth the gross common people reverence them as men of wonderful holiness. Great swarms of these filthy vagabonds you may see in Tunis, but many more in Egypt, and especially at Alcair, whereas in the market called Bain Elcasrain I saw one of these villains with mine own eyes, in the presence of much people, deflower a most beautiful woman as she was coming forth of the bath: which being done, the fond people came flocking about the said woman, striving to touch her garment as a most holy thing: saying that the adulterer was a man of great sanctity, and that he did not commit the sin, but only seemed to commit it: which when the silly cuckold her husband understood, he showed himself thankful to his false god with a solemn banquet, and with liberal giving of alms. The magistrates of the city would have punished the adulterer, but they were in hazard to be slain of the people for their labours, who (as is before said) adore these varlets for saints and men of singular holiness. Other more villainous acts I saw committed by them, which I am ashamed to report. Of the Caballistes and certain other sects. LIkewise there is another sort of men, which we may fitly call cabalists. These fast most straightly, neither do they eat the flesh of any living creature, but have certain meats and garments allotted unto them: they rehearse likewise certain set-praiers appointed for every hour of the day and for the night, according to the variety of days and months, and they use to carry about certain square tables with characters and numbers engraven therein. They feign themselves to have daily conference with the angels, of whom they learn (they say) the knowledge of all things. They had once a famous doctor of their sect called 〈◊〉, who was author of their canons, prayers, and square tables. Which when I saw, me thought their profession had more affinity with magic then with Cabala. Their art was divided into eight parts; whereof the first was called Elumha Enormita, that is, the demonstration of light: the which contained prayers and fastings. The second called Semsul Meharif, that is, the sun of sciences, contained the foresaid square tables, together with their use and profit. The third part they call 〈◊〉 Lasmei Elchusne; this part contained a catalogue of those 99 virtues, which (they say) are contained in the names of God, which I remember I saw at Rome in the custody of a certain Venetian Iew. They have also a certain other rule called Suvach, that is, the rule of hermits, the professors and followers whereof inhabit woods and solitary places, neither have they any other food, but such as those wild deserts will afford: the conversation of these hermits no man is able exactly to describe, because they are estranged from all human society. But if I should take upon me to describe the variety of Mahometan sects, I should digress too far from my present purpose. He that desireth to know more of this matter, let him read over the book of Elefacni, who discourseth at large of the sects 72. principal sects in the religion of Mahumet. belonging to the Mahometan religion, the principal whereof are 72. every one of which defend their opinions to be true and good, and such as a man may attain salvation by. At this day you shall find but two principal sects only, the one of Leshari being dispersed over all Africa, Egypt, Syria, Arabia, and Turkey: the other of Imamia, which is authorized throughout the whole kingdom of Persia, and in certain towns of Corasan; and this sect the great Sophi of Persia maintaineth, insomuch that all Asia had like to been destroyed thereabout. For whereas before they followed the sect of Leshari, the great Sophi by force of arms established his own of Imamia: and yet one only sect stretcheth over all the mahometans dominions. Of such as search for treasures in Fez. Moreover in the city of Fez there are certain men called Elcanesin, who supposing to find treasure under the foundations of old houses, do perpetually search and delve. These gross fellows use to resort unto certain dens and caves without the citie-walles, certainly persuading themselves, that when the Romans were chased out of Africa, and driven into Baetica or Granada in Spain, they hid great abundance of treasure in the bowels of the earth, which they could not carry with them, and so enchanted the same by art-magique, that it can by no means be attained unto but by the same art; wherefore they seek unto enchanters to teach them the art of digging up the said treasures. Some of them there are that will steadfastly affirm, that they saw gold in this or that cave: others, that they saw silver, but could not dig it out, by reason that they were destitute of perfumes and enchantments fit for the purpose; so that being seduced with this vain opinion, and deeply delving into the earth, they turn upside down the foundations of houses and sepulchres, and sometimes they proceed in this manner ten or twelve days journey from Fez: yea so fond they are and so besotted, that they esteem those books that profess the art of digging gold, as divine oracles. Before my departure from Fez these fantastical people had chosen them a consul, and getting licence of certain owners to dig their grounds, when they had digged as much as they thought good, they paid the said owners for all damages committed. Of the Alchemissts of Fez. IN this city likewise there are great store of Alchemists which are mightily addicted to that vain practice: they are most base fellows, and contaminate themselves with the steam of Sulphur, and other stinking smells. In the evening they use to assemble themselves at the great temple, where they dispute of their false opinions. They have of their art of Alchemy many books written by learned men, amongst which one Geber is of principal account, who lived an hundred years after Mahumet, and being a Greek borne, is said to have renounced his own religion. This Geber his works and all his precepts are full of allegories or dark borrowed speeches. Likewise they have another author, that wrote an huge volume of the same art, entitled by the name of Attogrehi: this man was secretary unto the Sultan of Bagaded, of whom we have written in the lives of the Arabian philosophers. A book written by john 〈◊〉 of the lives of the Arabian philosophers. Also the songs or articles of the said science were written by one Mugairibi of Granada, whereupon a most learned Mamaluch of Damascus wrote a commentary; yet so, that a man may much more easily understand the text than the exposition thereof. Of Alchemissts here are two sorts; whereof the one seek for the Elissir, that is, the matter which coloureth brass and other metals; and the other are conversant about multiplication of the quantities of metals, whereby they may conveniently temper the same. But their chiefest drift is to coin counterfeit money: for which cause you shall see most of them in Fez with their hands cut off. Of charmers andinchanters of snakes. IN this city likewise there is a great swarm of base people, such as the Italians commonly call Ciurmatori: these sing foolish songs and rhymes in all the streets of the city, and broaching mere trifles with the music of drums, haps, and citterns, they sell unto the rude people certain scrolls or brief charms instead of preservatives. Unto these you may add another kind of refuse people of one family and disposition with the former, who carry dancing apes up and down, and have their necks and arms all entwined with 〈◊〉 snakes. These also profess Geomancy, and persuade women that they can foretell them their 〈◊〉. Likewise they carry stone-horses about with them, which for a certain fee, they will let others have to cover their mares. I could here reckon up more sorts of people; but let it suffice to have admonished in this place, that the greatest part of the forenamed are people of most base condition, and such as bear little good will to strangers, albeit there are but a few in this city, by reason it is distant more than an hundredth miles from the sea, the way thither also being rough and dangerous. Their gentle men are very stately and high minded, and will have little or no familiarity at all with the citizens: so likewise the doctors and judges of principal account will admit but few unto their acquaintance. This city itself is most beautiful and right commodiously situate; where albeit in winter time the streets are so miry, that you cannot walk in them without startups, yet they let pass such abundance of water out of their conducts, that all the filth is washed clean away. Where conducts are wanting, they carry all the dirt in carts unto the next part of the river. A description of the suburbs without the foresaid city of Fez. WIthout the walls of this city westward standeth a suburb containing almost five hundredth families, the houses whereof are but mean, and the inhabitants base, as namely drivers of camels, water-bearers, and cleavers of wood for the king's palace. Yet here you may find divers shops, and all kinds of artificers. Here likewise dwell all the charmers and roguish minstrels before named; as also great swarms of sluttish and filthy harlots. In the principal street of this suburb, you shall find certain caves most artificially hewn out of excellent marble, wherein the noble men of Fez were wont to lay up their corn: but after that by reason of the wars it was often taken from thence, they have since usually conveyed their corn into new Fez, and there stored it up: and from that time to this the marble-caves have remained desolate. It is a wonder to see how wide and large these caves are; for the least of them will contain more than a thousand measures of corn, there being above an hundredth and fifty of them in all, but now they lie waste and open, insomuch that divers fall into them at unawares, for which cause their brims are environed with walls. Here every one may play the vintner and the bawd; so that this suburb may justly be called the sink of Fez. From the twentieth hour you shall see none at all in their shops: for then every man runs to the tavern to disport, to spend riotously, and to be drunken. Another suburb there is allotted unto the lepers, of whom there are two hundredth families: these leprous persons The habitation of lepers in Fez and their governor. have a governor, which gathereth certain yearly revenues from the noblemen, and taketh such care of the said lepers, that they want no necessary thing. He is bound by his office to discharge the city of all leprous persons, and to compel all such as he understands to be infected with that disease, to depart into the foresaid suburbs. If any leper chanceth to die without issue, part of his goods are employed to the common benefit of the lepers, and part fall to the governors share: but if he hath any children, they enjoy his goods. Among the lepers also those are placed, which are infected with white botches, or with any other incurable malady. Next beyond standeth another suburb inhabited only with muleteers, plasterer, and woodmongers: which although it be but little, yet containeth it about an hundredth and fifty families. Moreover upon the way leading westward from the city there is another great suburb of more than four hundredth houses: howbeit they are low & base, and the inhabitants are beggarly, which neither can nor will dwell among any other people. By this suburb there is a certain broad plain which leadeth to the river two miles off, and extendeth westward almost three miles. Upon this plain every week there is an exceeding great market of cattle. Likewise the shopkeepers of the city resort hither and sell their wares in tents. Also a certain company of gentlemen use to come hither, and to divide a ram among themselves, leaving the head unto the butcher for his fee, but the feet and the skin they sell unto the wooll-chapmen. For those wares that are here sold they pay so little tribute to the king, that it is not worth the mentioning. But this one thing I must in no wise pass over in silence, namely, that I never saw neither in Asia, Africa, nor Italy, a market either more populous, or better furnished with wares. Not far from Fez stand certain high rocks environed with a ditch of two miles' compass, out of which rocks certain matter is hewed to make lime withal. near unto the said ditch are many furnaces, some whereof are so large, that they will contain more than six thousand measures of lime: and this lime is made at the costs of the richest citizens in Fez. Westward without the walls of Fez by the rivers side stand about an hundred cottages, which are only inhabited by them that white linen cloth. Hither in the spring and in summer use the citizens to bring their linen cloth, spreading it upon the meadows, and as often as they see it dry in the sun, casting water thereupon, which water they fetch either out of the river or out of some cistern in certain leather tankards made for the same purpose: but at night each one carrieth his cloth into the foresaid cottages. Neither are the meadows wherein they bleach their cloth ever destitute of grass. A most gallant prospect it is to behold a far off the white clothes dispersed over the green meadow, and the crystal streams of the river, which seem to be of an azure hue, running along: all which the Poets have celebrated in their verses. A description of the common place of burial without the city. MAny fields there are without the city, which have been given by certain noblemen for the burial of the dead. Upon their sepulchres for the most part they lay a long threesquare stone. When any noble man or any principal citizen deceaseth, they lay one stone over his head and another over his feet, whereon useth to be engraven some epitaph, with the day and year when the party deceased. I myself bestowed much labour in gathering of epitaphs, which I saw both about Fez and in other places of Barbary; all which being set down in a book I gave unto the king's brother. The matter of their epitaphs is divers, some tending to consolation, and others to sorrow. Of the sepulchers of the kings of Fez. NOrthward of the city upon a certain high hill stands a palace, wherein are the monuments of divers Marin kings, being most artificially hewn out of marble with epitaphs upon them, so that I cannot condignly express the majesty and beauty thereof. A description of their gardens. WIthout the north, east, and south parts of the city are great store of gardens, replenished with all kind of fruit and with stately trees. Through the midst of these gardenns, they derive some small vain of the river, some whereof are so full of trees, that you would take them for groves rather than for gardens. These gardens they manure not at all, but only water them continually in the month of May, whereupon they have great abundance of fruit. All their fruits, save their peaches only, are of a most delicate taste, whereof, so soon as they are ripe, above five hundredth cart-loades are daily carried into the market, besides grapes, which here I do not mention. But the said fruits are carried unto a certain place in Fez, where tribute being paid for them, they are sold by criers unto the fruiterer's there present. In the same place likewise after paying of tribute, they sell certain Negro-slaves. Towards the east of Fez lieth a plain fifteen miles broad, and thirty miles long: this plain is full of fountains and freshets, and is reserved for the use of the great temple. It is farmed out unto gardiner's, who sow thereupon such abundance of hemp, melons, turnips or navewe, radish, and other such like roots and herbs, that every summer there are said to be gathered thereof above fifteen thousand cartload, and as many in winter. Howbeit the air is very unwholesome thereabout, for the inhabitants are continually vexed with fevers, and are of a yellowish colour. Of that part of Fez which is called new Fez. NEW Fez being environed with an high and impregnable wall, and situate on a most beautiful plain not far from the rivers side, is almost a mile distant from old Fez, and that upon the east and south side thereof. Between the walls of either town, to the northward, entereth a certain arm of the river, where the foresaid mills do stand, and the other part of the river is severed into two branches, one whereof runneth between new Fez and old Fez, not far from the edge of the rock, and the other passing through certain valleys and gardens, trendeth at length southward. The other part of the river holdeth on his course by the rock, and so by the college of king * Or Aburinan. Abutiman. This city of new Fez jacob the son of Abdultach caused to 〈◊〉 built, who was the first king of the Marin family, and expelled the kings of Maroco, and usurped the kingdom unto himself: but The founder of new Fez. the king of Telensin, to the end he might make the people of Maroco beholding unto him, and might subvert the prosperous success of the Marin family, went about to hinder the king of Fez his attempts against Maroco: wherefore king jacob having finished the wars of Maroco, determined to revenge himself to the uttermost for the injuries offered by them of Telensin. But considering with himself, that the strong towns of his own kingdom were far distant from Telensin, he thought it a better course to build this city, whereunto the seat royal of all Maroco might be translated: which being erected, he called The white city, but it was afterward named by the inhabitants new Fez. This city king jacob the founder divided into three parts, whereof the first contained his royal palace, and divers noble men's houses, unto every one of which he allotted a most pleasant garden. Not far from his palace he built a most stately and sumptuous temple. In another part of this city he built a large and fair stable for the king's horses to stand in. Then also he caused other palaces to be erected for his captains and principal courtiers. From the west gate to the east he appointed the market place, the distance between which gates is a mile and an half, and on both sides he placed artificers and merchants shops. At the west gate he caused a fair portal to be set up, to harbour the watchmen and warders of the city. Not far from thence he erected two stables sufficient to contain three hundredth horses, which he might use for the protection of his own palace. The third part of the city was appointed for the kings guard and attendants, which were most of them borne eastward of Fez, neither had they any other weapons but hand-bowes (for crossbows were not then used in that kingdom) unto which attendants the king allowed a large stipend: but now the same place is full of beautiful temples and stoves. near unto the king's palace stands the mint, having in the midst a fower-square court with certain portals or cells round about it, wherein the money-minters dwell. Likewise there is another lodging in the midst of the same court, where the governor of the mint with his scribes and notaries have their abode. Here, as well as in any other places, whatsoever commodity is raised, redoundeth wholly to the king. near unto the mint stand the goldsmiths shops, whose Consul or governor keeps the seal and stamps of the coin. In Fez neither ring nor any other jewel or commodity can be made of silver or gold, before the metal be sealed, for the offenders are most severely punished. And, the metal being sealed, whatsoever is made thereof is weighed as if it were money. The greatest part of goldsmiths dwelling in new Fez are jews, who carry their vessels of gold and silver unto a certain place of old Fez, near unto the grocers shops, and there sell them. For in old Fez neither gold nor silver is coined, nor any mahometans are suffered to be goldsmiths, because they have usurers among them, which will sell any piece of wrought silver or gold dearer than the weight requireth; albeit the same privilege is by the governors of the city granted unto the jews. Some there are also that only make plate for the citizens, who are paid hire only for their work. That part of the city which the king's attendants or guard once possessed, is now inhabited by jews: for now a days the kings use no such guard. The jews indeed first dwelled in old Fez, but upon the death of a certain king they were all robbed by the Moors: whereupon king Abusabid caused them to remove into new Fez, and by that means doubled their yearly tribute. They therefore even till this day do occupy a long street in the said new city, wherein they have their shops and synagogues, and their number is marvelously increased ever since they were driven out of Spain. These jews are had in great contempt by all men, neither are any of them permitted to wear shoes, but they make them certain socks of sea-rushes. On their heads they wear a black * Orturbant. dulipan, and if any will go in a cap, he must fasten a red cloth thereunto. They pay unto the king of Fez monthly four hundred ducats. At length within the space of an hundred and forty years this new city was environed with most impregnable walls, and adorned with temples, colleges, palaces, and other such buildings as serve to beautify a city, so that I Engines for the conveyance of water. think there was more bestowed in garnishing of the city, then in building of the walls. Without the citie-walles are built many huge wheels or engines, for the conveying of river-water over the said walls into cisterns, from whence it is conveyed in certain channels and pipes unto the temples, gardens, & palaces. The said wheels were built not fully an hundred years past, before which time water was brought unto the city by a certain conduct, from a fountain ten miles distant. Of which artificial conduct a certain Genoveses, being then in great favour with the king, is reported to have been the author: but the wheels (they say) were invented by a Spaniard: and in them there is marvelous cunning workmanship: for to the conveyance of so huge a quantity of water, each wheel is turned about but four and twenty times only in a day and a night. To conclude, here are but few gentlemen in this city, except such as attend upon the court, for the residue are base and mechanical people: but such as carry any show of honesty, do so hate and disdain the king's courtiers and gentlemen, that they will by no means vouchsafe to marry their daughters unto them. Of the fashions and customs used in the king's court. AMongst all the princes of Africa, I never red of any that was created by the common suffrages and consent of the people unto his kingdom or princedom, or that was called from any strange province or city to bear rule. Also by the law of Mahumet no man may bear any secular authority, which may be called lawful, save only the Mahometan patriarchs and prelate's: howbeit the said patriarchs authority decreasing daily more and more, the ringleaders of such people as ranged up and down the deserts began to invade places inhabited & civilized, and by force of arms, against Mahumets' law, and maugre his prelate's, to ordain sundry princes: As for example in the East, whereas the Turks, Cordians, and Tartars, have usurped dominion over such as were not able to repel them. So likewise in the west parts first the families of Zeneta and Luntuna, than the seditious Mahometan preachers, and afterward the family of Marin got the upper hand. Howbeit the family of Luntuna is reported to have aided the western regions, & to have released them from the fury of the seditious heretics, wherein they showed themselves friends and not enemies: but afterward their tyranny began to show itself. And this is the reason why they do not now a days attain unto government by hereditary sućcession or by election of the people, or of the nobility. But the prince himself when he feels death seizing upon him, calleth about him all his peers and nobles, and bindeth them by oath, to establish his son, brother, or any other whom he most favoureth, in his kingdom. But they after the prince's decease neglecting their oath, will choose any other whom they list. And this is ordinarily the election of the king of Fez, who, so soon as he is proclaimed king, chooseth forthwith some one of his nobles to be his chief counsellor, and on him he bestoweth the third part of all his kingly revenues. The manner of choosing officers in the court of Fez. Then chooseth another to be his secretary, treasurer, and high steward of his household. Then is created the captain of the horsemen appointed for the king's guard, and these horsemen with their horses live most commonly in the fields. Lastly he appointeth a new governor over every city, unto whom all the tributes and revenues of the same place redound, with condition, that as often as any wars betid, he shall maintain a certain company of horses to the king's service. After a while also he placeth certain deputies and commissioners over his people inhabiting the mountains, and over the Arabians subject unto him. The governors of cities diversly administer justice, according to the custom of the place. Some there are also appointed by the king to collect all the tributes and revenues of his kingdom, and duly to pay the same unto him. Likewise there are others chosen, whom they call in their language keepers or guardians, and unto every one of these the king giveth some castle or village, whereby he may procure his own maintenance, and be able to serve the king in time of war. Moreover the king of Fez maintaineth a troop of light horsemen, who so long as they serve the king in his camp, have their diet allowed them out of the king's provision: but in time of peace, he findeth them corn, butter, and pouldered flesh for the whole year, but money they have very seldom. Once a year they are appareled at the king's cost; neither do they provide for their horses either within the city or without, for the king furnisheth them with all necessaries. Those that give attendance to their horses are Christian captives, which go shackled in great chains and fetters. But when the army removeth any whither, the said Christians are carried upon camels backs. Another officer there is that giveth attendance only to the camels, assigning certain pastures unto the herdsmen, and dividing fields among them, and making such provision for the king's camels, as himself shall think expedient. Each camel-driver hath two camels, which are laden with the king's furniture, according to the appointment of the governor. Likewise the king hath a certain purveyor or steward, whose office is to provide, keep, and distribute corn both to the king's household and to his army. This man in time of war hath ten or twelve tents to lay up corn in, and every day with change of camels he sendeth for new corn, lest the army should be unprovided of victuals: he hath also cooks at his command. Moreover there is a governor or mastergroome of the stables, who provideth for the king's horses, mules, and camels, and is furnished with all necessaries by the steward. There is another also appointed overseer of the corn, whose duty it is to provide barley and other provender for the beasts: and this man hath his scribes and notaries about him, who diligently set down all particular expenses, for they must give up a perfect account unto the chief steward. They have also a certain captain over fifty horsemen, which horsemen may well be called pursuivants, for they are sent by the secretary in the king's name to do his business. Likewise the Fezzan king hath another captain of great name, being as it were governor of his guard, who in the king's name, may compel the judges to do justice, and to put their sentences in execution. This man's authority is so great, that sometimes he may commit principal noblemen to ward, & may severely punish them, according to the king's commandment. Moreover the said king hath a most trusty chancellor, who keepeth the great seal, and writeth and signeth the king's letters. He hath also a great number of footmen, the governor of whom accepteth and dismisseth whom he thinks good, and giveth to every one wages according to his agility and desert. And whensoever the king cometh in place of judgement, the said governor always attendeth upon him, and is in a manner his high chamberlain. Also there is another that taketh charge of the carriages and baggage of the army, and causeth the tents of the light horsemen to be carried up and down on mules, and the tents of the other soldiers on camels. There are likewise a company of ensigne-bearers, who in marching on a journey carry their colours wrapped up: but he that goeth before the army hath his banner displayed, and of a great height. And every one of the said standard-bearers knoweth most exactly always, fords of rivers, and passages through woods, wherefore they are for the most part appointed to guide the army. The drummers (of whom there are great store in the king's host) play upon certain drums of brass as big as a great kettle, the lower part whereof is narrow, & the upper broad, being covered with a skin. These drummers ride on horseback, having always on the one side of their horses a great weight hanging down, to counterpoise the heaviness of their drums on the other side. They are allowed most swift horses, because the Moors account it a great disgrace to lose a drum. The said drums make such a loud and horrible noise, that they are not only heard a far off, but also strike exceeding terror both upon men and horses, and they are beaten only with a bulls pizzle. The musicians are not maintained at the king's charge, for the cities are bound at their costs to send a certain number of them to the wars, who, according to their demeanour in the wars, are admitted or not admitted unto the king's table. This king hath also a certain master of ceremonies, who sitteth at his feet in the senate-house, and commandeth each man to sit down, and to speak according to his dignity. All the maidservants in the king's family are Negro-slaves, which are partly chamberlains, and partly waiting-maids. And yet his Queen is always of a white skin. Likewise in the king of Fez his court are certain Christian captives, being partly Spanish, and partly Portugal women, who are most circumspectly kept by certain Eunuches, that are Negro-slaves. The king of Fez hath very large dominions, but his revenues are small, to wit, scare three hundredth thousand ducats, the fifth part whereof redoundeth not to the king: for the remainder is divided into sundry portions, as we have before signified. Yea, the greater part of the said revenues is paid in corn, cattle, oil, and butter, all which yield but small store of money. In some place they pay a ducat and one fourth part, tribute for every acre, but in other places a whole family payeth but so much. In some other regions each man above fifteen years of age payeth as much tribute also. Neither are the people of this great city more vexed with any thing then with paying of their tributes and impositions. here also is to be noted, that the Mahometan governors (the priests only excepted) may not exact greater revenues than those that Mahumet hath allotted unto them, namely of every of their subjects which possesseth 100 ducats in ready money, they are to have two ducats & an half for yearly tribute. Every husbandman likewise is bound to pay for tribute the tenth part of all his corn. And all the said tributes he appointed to be paid unto the patriarch, who should bestow that which was superfluous for the Prince to have, upon common uses; namely for the relieving of poor impotent people and widows, and for maintaining of wars against the enemy. But since the patriarchs began to decay, the Princes (as we have beforesaid) exercised tyranny. For it was not sufficient for them to exact all the forenamed tributes, and riotously to consume the same, but also to urge people unto greater contributions; so that all the inhabitants of Africa are so oppressed with daily exactions, that they have scarcely wherewithal to feed and apparel themselves: for which cause there is almost no man of learning or honesty, that will seek any acquaintance with courtiers, or will invite them to his table, or accept any gifts (be they never so precious) at their hands: thinking that whatsoever goods they have, are gotten by theft and bribery. The King of Fez continually maintaineth The king of Fez his guard. six thousand horsemen, five hundredth crossbows, and as many arquebusiers, being at all assays prepared for the wars, who in time of peace, when the king goeth on progress, lie within a mile of his person: for being at home in Fez, he needeth not so strong a guard. When he wageth How the king of Fez rideth on progress. war against the Arabians that be his enemies, because the forenamed garrison is not sufficient, he requireth aid of the Arabians his subjects, who at their own costs find him a great army of men better trained to the wars, than his own soldiers beforementioned. The pomp and ceremonies of this king are but mean, neither doth he willingly use them, but only upon festival days, and when mere necessity requireth. When the king is to ride forth, the master of ceremonies signifieth so much unto certain herbengers or posts, whereupon the herbengers give notice thereof unto the king's * Or kines folks. parents, unto his nobility, his senators, captains, guardians, and gentlemen, who presently arrange themselves before the palace gate. At the kings coming forth of the palace, the herbengers appoint unto each man his place and order of riding. First and foremost go the standard-bearers, next the drummers, then followeth the chief groom of the stable with his servants and family; after him comes the king's pensioners, his guard, his master of ceremonies, his secretaries, his treasurer, and last of all his chief judge and his captain general, at length comes the king accompanied with his principal counsellor, or with some other great peer. Before the king also ride certain officers belonging to his person, whereof one carries his sword-royall, another his shield, and the third his crossbow. On each side of him march his footmen, one carrying a payer of stirrups, another the king's partisan, the third a covering for his saddle, and the fourth a halter for his horse. And so soon as the king is dismounted, they forthwith cover his saddle, and put the foresaid halter upon his horsehead. Likewise there is another footman that carrieth the king's pantofles most artificially wrought. After the king followeth the captain of the footmen, than the eunuchs, the king's family, the light horsemen, and last of all the crossbows and arquebusiers. The apparel of the king is then very moderate and plain: insomuch that if a man knew him not, he would think him to be absent: for the attendants be far more sumptuously attired. Moreover no Mahometan king or prince may wear a crown, diadem, The king of Fez his 〈◊〉 of warfare. or any such like ornament upon his head, for that is forbidden by the law of Mahumet. When the king lieth with his army in the fields, first his own great tent is pitched in a four square form like unto a castle, each side of the said square being fifty else in length. At every of the four corners standeth a little sharp turret made of cloth, with a gallant sphere on the top which glistereth like gold. This royal pavilion hath four gates, every one of which is kept by eunuchs. Within the said pavilion are contained divers other tents, among which is the king's lodging, being framed in such wise, that it may easily be removed from place to place. Next unto it stand the tents of the noblemen, and of such as are most in the king's favour; then the lodgings of the principal guard being made of goates-skinnes, after the Arabian fashion; and in the midst of all stands the king's kitchen and his pantry. Not far from hence the light horsemen have their abode, who all of them are victualled out of the king's storehouse, notwithstanding their attire be very base. Next of all are the stables, wherein their horses are marvelous well tended. Without this circuit keep such as carry the tents and the king's furniture from place to place. Here are also butchers, victuallers, and such like. All merchants & artificers that resort hither, take up their abode next unto the tent-carriers: so that the king's pavilion is pitched like a strong city, for it is so environed with the lodgings of the guard, and with other tents adjoining, that there is very difficult passage to the king. Round about the said royal pavilion, there are certain appointed to watch and ward all night long, howbeit they are base and unarmed people. In like sort there is a watch kept about the stables, but sometimes so negligently, that not only some horses have been stolen, but there have been found enemies in the kings own pavilion, that came to murder him. The king liveth the greatest part of the year in the fields, both for the safeguard of his kingdom, and also that he may keep his Arabian subjects in obedience, and sometimes he recreateth himself with hunting, and sometime with playing at chess. I know right well how tedious I have been in the description of this city: but because it is the metropolitan not only of Barbary, but of all Africa, I thought good most particularly to decipher every parcel and member thereof. Of the town of Macarmeda. THis town standeth almost twenty miles eastward of Fez, and was built by the family of Zeneta, upon the bank of a most beautiful river. It had in times past a large territory, and great store of inhabitants. On both sides of the said river are many gardens and vineyards. The kings of Fez were wont to assign this town unto the governor of their camels; but in the war of Sahid it was so destroyed and wasted, that at this day scarce is there any mention of walls to be found. But the fields thereof are now in the possession of certain gentlemen of Fez, and of the peasants. Of the castle of Hubbed. THis castle standeth upon the side of an hill, about six miles from Fez, and from hence you may behold the city of Fez, and all the territory adjacent. It was founded by a certain hermit of Fez, being reputed for a man of singular holiness. The fields thereto belonging are not very large, because the houses being demolished, it is utterly destitute of inhabitants, the walls only and the temple as yet remaining. In this castle I lived four summers, because it standeth in a most pleasant air, being separate from concourse of people, and a solitary place fit for a man to study in: for my father had got a lease of the ground adjoining to this castle from the governor of the temple, for many years. Of the town of Zavia. THe town of Zavia was founded by joseph the second king of the Marin-family, and is distant from Fez about fowerteene miles. here king joseph built a stately hospital, and commanded that his corpse should be interred in this town. But it was not his fortune here to be buried, for he was slain in the wars against Tremizen. From thenceforth Zavia fell to decay and grew destitute of inhabitants, wherein at this present the hospital only remaineth. The revenues of this place were given unto the great temple of Fez, but the field thereof was tilled by certain Arabians dwelling in the region of Fez. Of the castle of Chaulan. THe ancient castle of Chaulan is built upon the river Sebu, eight miles A 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 southward of Fez. Not far from this castle there is a certain hot bath, whereunto Abulhezen the fourth king of the Marin-family added a fair building, unto this bath once a year in the month of April the gentlemen of Fez usually resort, remaining there four or five days together. There is no civility to be found in this castle: for the inhabitants are base people, and exceeding covetous. Of the mountain of Zelag. THis mountain beginneth eastward from the river of Sebu, extending thence almost fowerteene miles westward, and the highest part thereof to the north, is seven miles distant from Fez. The south part of this mountain is utterly destitute of inhabitants; but the north side is exceeding fertile, and planted with great store of castles and towns. Most of their fields are employed about vineyards, the grapes whereof are the sweetest that ever I tasted, and so likewise are their olives, and other fruits. The inhabitants being very rich, have most of them houses in the city of Fez. And so likewise most part of the gentlemen of Fez have vineyards upon the said mountain. At the north foot of this mountain the fields are replenished with all kind of grain and fruits. For all that plain is watered southward with the river Sebu: and here the gardiner's with certain artificial wheels and engines draw water out of the river to moisten their gardens. In this plain are well-nigh two hundredth acres of ground, the revenues whereof are given unto the king's master of ceremonies, howbeit he maketh thereof not above five hundredth ducats a year: the tenth part of all which revenues, amounting to three thousand bushels of corn, belongeth to the king's provision. Of mount Zarhon. THis mountain beginneth from the plain of Esais lying ten miles distant from the city of Fez; westward it extendeth thirty miles, and is almost ten miles broad. This mountain is all covered with waste and desert woods, being otherwise well stored with olives. In this mountain there are of sheepefoldes and castles to the number of fifty, and the inhabitants are very wealthy, for it standeth between two flourishing cities, that is to say, Fez on the east, and Mecnase on the west. The women weave woollen cloth, according to the custom of that place, and are adorned with many silver rings and bracelets. The men of this mountain are most valiant, and are much given to pursue and take lions, whereof they send great Hunting of lions used by the king of Fez. store unto the king of Fez. And the king hunteth the said lions in manner following: in a large field there are certain little cells made, being so high, that a man may stand upright in them: each one of these cells is shut fast with a little door; and contain within every of them an armed man, who opening the door presents himself to the view of the lion: then the lion 〈◊〉 the doors open, comes running toward them with great fury, but the doors being shut again, he waxeth more furious than before: then bring they forth a bull to combat with the lion, who enter a fierce and bloody conflict, wherein if the bull kill the lion, that days sport is at an end; but if the lion get the victory, than all the armed men, being ordinarily twelve, leap forth of their cells, and invade the lion: each one of them having a javelin with a pike of a cubit and an half long. And if these armed men seem to be too hard for the lion, the king causeth their number to be diminished: but perceiving them too weak, the king with his company from a certain high place, where he standeth to behold the sport, kill the lion with their crossbows. And oftentimes it falleth out, that before the lion be slain, some one of the men dies for it, the residue being sore wounded. The reward of those that encounter the lion is ten ducats apiece, and a new garment: neither are any admitted unto this combat but men of redoubted valour, and such as come from mount Zelagi: but those that take the lions first are inhabitants of mount Zarhon. Of Gualili a town of mount Zarhon. THis town was built by the Romans upon the top of the foresaid mountain, what time they were lords of Granada in south Spain. It is environed around with mighty thick walls made of smooth and hewn stones. The gates are large and high, and the fields are manured for the space of six miles about: howbeit this town was long sithence destroyed by the Africans. But afterward when the schismatic Idris came into this region, he began to repair this desolate town, and to replant it so with inhabitants, that within short time it grew very populous: howbeit after his decease it was neglected by his son, being wholly addicted (as is beforesaid) unto the building of Fez. And yet Idris lieth buried in this town, whose sepulchre is visited with great reverence almost by all the people of Barbary, for he is as highly esteemed as if he had been some patriarch, because he was of the lineage of Mahumet. At this present there are but two or three houses in all the town, which were there built for the honour and maintenance of the sepulchre. The fields adjacent are exceedingly well husbanded: and their gardens are most pleasant by reason of two sweet freshets running through them, the which diversly winding themselves about the little hills and valleys, do water all that plain. Of a certain town called the palace of Pharaoh. THis town was founded by the Romans upon the top of an hill, about eight miles distant from Gualili. The people of this said mountain, together with some historiographers are most certainly persuaded, that this town was built by Pharaoh king of Egypt in the time of Moses, and took the name from the first founder, which notwithstanding I think to be otherwise: for I can read in no approved author that either Pharaoh or any other Egyptians ever inhabited these regions. But I suppose that this fond opinion was taken out of that book which one Elcabi wrote concerning the words of Mahumet. For the said book affirmeth from the authority of Mahumet, that there were four kings only that governed the whole world, two whereof were faithful, and the other two ethnics: the faithful he 〈◊〉 were Alexander the great, and Solomon the son of David: and the ethnics were Nimrod and Pharaoh. But I am rather of opinion, by the Latin letters which are there engraven in the walls, that the Romans built this town. About this town run two small rivers on either side thereof. The little hills and valleys adjacent do greatly abound with olives. Not far from hence are certain wild deserts frequented with lions and leopards. Of the town called Pietra Rossa or The red rock. PIetra Rossa is a small town built by the Romans upon the side of the foresaid mountain, being so near the forest, that the lions will come Tame 〈◊〉. daily into the town and gather up bones in the streets, yea, they are so tame and familiar, that neither women nor children are afeard of them. The walls of this town are built very high and of great stones, but now they are ruined in many places, and the whole town is diminished into one street. Their fields being joined unto the plains of Azgara, abound with olives and all kind of pulse. Of the town of Maghilla. MAghilla is a little town founded of old by the Romans upon that side of the foresaid hill which looketh toward Fez. About this town are most fertile fields, and greatly enriched with olives: there is a plain likewise containing many fresh fountains, and well stored with hemp and flax. Of the castle of Shame. THis ancient castle is built at the foot of the said mountain near unto the high way from Fez to Mecnase: and it was called by this name, because the inhabitants are most shamefully addicted to covetise, like unto all the people thereabouts. In old time it is reported that a certain king passed by, whom the inhabitants of the castle invited to dinner, requesting him to change the ignominious name of the place: which when the king had condescended unto, they caused, according to their custom, a company of rams to be slain, and certain bladders and vessels to be filled with milk, to serve for the king's breakfast the morrow after. But because the said vessels were very large, 〈◊〉 consulted together to put in half milk and half water, hoping that 〈◊〉 king should never perceive it. The day following albeit the king was not very hasty of his breakfast, yet, his servants urging him thereunto, he perceived the milk to be half water; whereat smiling he said: Friends, that which nature hath given, no man can 〈◊〉 away. And with that saying he departed. Now this castle is razed to the ground & utterly destroyed, but the territory thereof is occupied by certain miserable Arabians. Of the region of Beni Guariten. THe region of Beni Guariten lieth eastward of 〈◊〉 about eighteen miles. It is altogether hilly and mountainous, abounding with all kind of pulse, and with store of good pasture and medow-ground, and containing almost two hundred villages. Their houses are in all places rudely built, and the inhabitants are base people, neither have they any vineyards or gardens, nor any tree that beareth fruit. This region the king of Fez usually divideth among his youngest brothers and sisters. The inhabitants have great store of corn and wool: and albeit they are passing rich, yet go they very meanly attired: they ride only upon asses, for which cause they are had in great derision by their neighbours. Of the region called Aseis. THis region is distant to the west of Fez almost twenty miles, and is by the inhabitants called Aseis; it consisteth of a perpetual plain, whereupon some conjecture, that it hath had in old time many villages and castles, whereof now there is no mention at all, nor so much as a sign of any building, only the names of places yet remain. This region extendeth westward eighteen, and southward almost twenty miles. The soil is most fertile, and bringeth forth black and small grains. Wells and fountains are here very rare. It was wont to be subject unto certain Arabian husbandmen, but now it is assigned by the king unto the governor of that city. Of mount Togat. THis mountain standeth almost seven miles westward of Fez, being very high, and but of small breadth. Eastward it extendeth to the river Bunafe being about five miles distant. All that side which looketh towards Fez, and the top thereof, and that part which lieth over against Essich are wonderfully replenished with vines, and with all kind of grain. Upon the top of this mountain are divers caves and hollow places, where the searchers of treasure suppose that the Romans hid up their wealth, as we have before signified. The said treasure-searchers, so soon as the vintage is past, use to take great pains in digging of the rock, and albeit they find nothing, yet will they not give over. All the fruits of this mountain are most unpleasant both to the 〈◊〉 and to the taste, and yet they are sooner ripe, than the fruits of other places thereabout. Of mount Guraigura. THis mountain being near unto Atlas is almost forty miles distant from Fez. From hence springeth a certain river, which running westward falleth into the river Bath. This mountain standeth between two most large and spacious plains, whereof the one to Fez ward is (as we have before said) called Aseis: and the other lying southward is named Adecsen. Which Adecsen is most fertile both for corn and pasture. And they are possessed by certain Arabians called Zuhair being vassals unto the king of Fez: but the king assigneth for the most part this plain unto his brother or some other of his kinsfolks, out of which they yearly gather ten thousand ducats. The foresaid Arabians are continually molested by certain other Arabians called Elhusein, which live in the deserts: for in summertime they usually invade the plains: wherefore the king of Fez for the defence of this region maintaineth a certain number of horsemen and of crossbows. This plain is watered with christall-fountaines and pleasant rivers. near unto the said plain are divers woods and forests, where lions keep Tame lions. which are so gentle and tame, that any man may drive them away with a staff, neither do they any harm at all. Now let us proceed unto the description of Azgara. A description of Azgara, one of the seven principal regions belonging to the kingdom of Fez. THis region bordereth northward upon the Ocean-sea; westward upon the river of Buragrag; eastward upon the mountains partly of Gumera, partly of Zarhon, and partly of Zalag; and southward it is enclosed with the river of Bunasar. This region consisteth altogether of plain ground being a most fertile soil, and in old time very populous, and adorned with many towns and castles, which are now so defaced and ruined by reason of wars, that small villages only are left for the inhabitants to hide their heads in. The length of this region is about fourscore, and the breadth almost three score miles. Through the midst thereof runneth the river of Subu. The Arabian inhabitants are called Elculoth, being descended from the family of Muntafic; they are subject to the king of Fez, and pay unto him large tributes: howbeit they are rich, and curious in their apparel, and are such valiant soldiers, that the king of Fez levieth his whole army of them only, when he hath any wars of great moment to achieve. This region abundantly furnisheth not only Fez, but all the mountains of Gumera with victuals, horses, and other cattle; and here the king of Fez usually remaineth all winter and the spring, by reason of the temperature and wholesomeness of the air. Here is great plenty of roes and hares, and yet very few woods. Of Giumha a town in Azgara. THis town the Africans built in our time by a rivers side upon that plain over which the way lieth from Fez to the city of Harais, and it is distant from Fez about thirty miles. It was in times passed very populous, but now it lieth so desolate by reason of the war of Sahid, that it serveth only for caves and receptacles for the Arabians to lay up their corn in, for the safeguard whereof they pitch certain tents near unto the place. Of the town of Harais. THis town was founded by the ancient Africans upon the Ocean sea shore, near unto the mouth of the river Luccus, one side thereof adjoining upon the said river, and the other side upon the main Ocean. When the Moors were lords of Arzilla and Tangia, this town was well inhabited: but those two towns being won by the Christians, Harais remained destitute of inhabitants, almost twenty years together: howbeit afterward the king of Fez his son, fearing the Portugals invasion, caused it strongly to be fortified and kept with a perpetual garrison. The passage unto this town by the rivers mouth is very dangerous and difficult. Likewise the king's son caused a castle to be built, wherein is maintained a garrison of two hundred crossbows, an hundred arquebusiers, & three hundred light horsemen. near unto the town are divers meadows and fens where the townsmen take great store of eels and of water-fowles. Upon this rivers side are huge and solitary woods haunted with lions and other wild beasts. The inhabitants of this town use to transport coals by sea to Arzilla and Tangia, whereupon the Moors use for a common proverb, A ship of Harais, which they allege when a man after great brags and promises performeth trifles; for these ships having sails of cotton, which make a gallant show, are laden with nought but base coals: for the territory of this city aboundeth greatly with cotton. Of the town called Caesar Elcabir, that is, The great palace. THis large town was built in the time of Mansor the king and patriarch of Maroco; of whom this notable history is reported, namely, that the said king, as he road on hunting, being separated from his company by tempestuous weather, came unto a certain unknown place, where if he continued all night, fearing lest he should die in the fens, he looked round about him, and at length espied a fisher getting of eels: can you, A pleasant discourse how king Mansor was entertained by a fisher. 〈◊〉 friend (quoth the king) conduct me to the court? The court (saith the fisher) is ten miles distant. Howbeit, the king entreating hard to be conducted; if king Mansor himself were present (quoth the fisher) I could not at this present conduct him, for fear lest he should be drowned in the fens. Then answered Mansor: what hast thou to do with the king's life or safety? Marry (quoth the fisher) I am bound to love the king as well as mine own life. Then have you obtained some singular benefit at his hands, said the king. What greater benefit (quoth the fisher) can be expected at the king's hand, than justice, love, and clemency, which he vouchsafeth unto his subjects; by whose favour and wisdom I silly fisher with my poor wife and children live a most quiet and contented life, so that I can even at midnight have free egress and regress unto this my cottage amidst these valleys and desert fens, no man lying in wait to do me injury? But (gentle Sir) whatsoever you be, if you please to be my guest for this night, you shall be right welcome, and to morrow morning betimes I will attend upon you at your pleasure. Then the king went unto the fisher's cottage, where after his horse was provided for, the fisher caused some eels to be roasted for his supper, while he sat drying of his garments by the fire: but the king not being contented with this fare, demanded if his host had any flesh in the house: Sir (quoth he) I have a she-goat and a kid, and they are all my substance of cattle: but because by your countenance you seem to be some honourable parsonage, I will adventure my kid for your sake; and so without any more words he caused his wife to kill it & roast it. Thus the king remained the fisher's guest all night: and the next morning about sunrise, being scarcely gone out of the doors with his liberal host, he espied a great company of his gentlemen and hunters whooping and hallowing for their king amidst the fens, but when they saw him, they all greatly rejoiced. Then Mansor turning him to the fisher, told him what he was, promising that his liberality should not be unrewarded. near unto the place were certain fair castles and palaces, which the king at his departure gave unto the fisher in token of thankfulness; and being by the fisher requested, for declaration of his farther love, to environ the said buildings with walls, he condescended thereunto. From thenceforth the fisher 〈◊〉 lord and governor of that new city, which in process of time grew so large, that within these few years it contained four hundred families. And because the soil 〈◊〉 unto it is so fertile, the king used to make his abode thereabout all summer time, which was a great benefit to the town. By the walls of this town runneth Read Osorius lib. 2. de rebus gestis Eman. 〈◊〉 this town. the river Luccus, which sometimes increaseth so, that it floweth to the citie-gates. In this town are practised divers manuary arts and trades of merchandise: also it hath many temples, one college of students, and a stately hospital. They have neither springs nor wells, but only cisterns in stead thereof. The inhabitants are liberal honest people, though not so 〈◊〉 as some others. Their apparel is but mean, being made of cotton-cloth, and wrapped often about their bodies. In the suburbs are great store of gardens replenished with all kind of fruits. Their grapes are unsavoury, because the soil is fitter for medow-ground. Every monday they have a market upon the next plain, whither their neighbours the Arabians usually resort. In the month of May they go forth of their town a fowling, and take great store of turtles. Their ground is exceeding fruitful, and yieldeth thirty fold increase: but it cannot be tilled for six miles about, because the Portugals garrison at Arzilla which is but eighteen miles distant, doth so molest and endamage them: whom likewise the governor of this town with three hundred horsemen continually encountereth, and sometime proceedeth even to the gates of Arzilla. Of the region of Habat. THis region beginneth southward from the river of Guarga, and bordereth northward upon the Ocean, westward it adjoineth unto the fens of Argar, and eastward it abutteth upon those mountains which are next unto the streites of Gibraltar. In breadth it stretcheth four score, and in length almost an hundredth miles. The fruitfulness of the soil, and the abundance of corn cannot easily be described: it is almost a perpetual plain, watered with many rivers: howbeit heretofore it hath been more noble and famous, by reason of the ancient cities built partly by the Romans & partly by the Goths: and I think it to be the same region which Ptolemey calleth Mauritania; but since Fez was first built, it hath fallen into wonderful decay. Moreover Idris the founder of Fez leaving ten sons behind him, bestowed this region upon the eldest: afterward ensued a rebellion of divers Mahometan heretics and lords, one faction of whom suing for aid at the governor of Granada, and others seeking aid from certain governors of Cairaoan, they were all vanquished and put to flight by the Mahometan patriarch of Cairaoan: who having thus subdued the region, left it under garrison and returned home. Afterward the great chancellor of Cordova levying an huge army, conquered all this country even to the borders of the region of Zab. Fifty years after king joseph of the Luntune family, chase out the people of Granada, obtained the said province by force: and last of all the king of Fez enjoyed it. Of Ezaggen a town of Habat. THis town was built by the ancient Africans upon the side of a mountain, almost ten miles distant from Guarga: all which distance being plain ground, serveth for cornfields and gardens: howbeit the hills are far more fruitful. This town is distant from Fez almost threescore and ten miles, and containeth to the number of five hundred families, out of the territory whereof there is the sum of ten thousand ducats yearly gathered for tribute, with which tribute the governor of the same town is bound to maintain on the king's behalf four hundred horsemen, for the defence of the whole region. For they are often molested with invasions of the Portugals, who proceed wasting and spoiling the country, sometimes forty, and sometimes fifty miles. Here is but little civility to be found, neither are the people but homely appareled, though they be very rich. They have a privilege granted them by the ancient kings of Fez to drink wine, which is otherwise forbidden by the law of Mahumet, and yet none of them all will abstain from drinking it. Of the town called Bani Teude. THis ancient town was built also by the Africans on a large plain by the river of Guarga, five and forty miles from the city of Fez. In the prosperity thereof it contained to the number of eight thousand families, but afterward it was so destroyed by the wars of the 〈◊〉 of Cairaoan, that now the town wall is only remaining. At my being there I saw divers monuments and sepulchers of noblemen, and certain conducts curiously built of excellent marble. From this town mount Gumera is almost fowerteene miles distant: the fields adjacent being good arable, and very fruitful. Of the town of Mergo. MErgo standing upon the top of a mountain is from Bani Teude about ten miles distant. Some think that the Romans were founders of this town, because there are found upon the ancient ruins certain Latin letters engraven. But now it is quite destitute of inhabitants, howbeit upon the side of the same mountain standeth another small town inhabited with weavers of course cloth; from whence you may behold the river Subu to the south, and the river Guarga to the north, from which rivers the said town is five miles distant. The inhabitants love to be accounted gentlemen, albeit they are covetous, ignorant, and destitute of all goodness. Of the town of Tansor. TAnsor standeth upon a little hill, almost ten miles from Mergo, and containeth three hundredth families, but very few artificers. The inhabitants are rude and barbarous people, having neither vineyards nor gardens, but only exercising husbandry, and possessing abundance of cattle. This town standeth in the mid way between Fez and mount Gumera, which (I think) is the occasion, that the inhabitants are so covetous and void of humanity. Of the town of Agla. THis ancient town was built by the Africans upon the bank of the river Guarga. The fruitful fields thereof are manured by the Arabians: but the town itself hath been so wasted with war, that now there is nothing to be seen but in a few places the ruins of houses & walls, & certain pits. In the suburbs there is every week a great market, whereunto the next Arabians usually resort; and so do some merchants of Fez likewise, to buy oxe-hides, wool, and wax, which are the principal commodities of that place. Hereabouts keep great store of lions, but they are by nature so fearful, that they will flee at the voice of a child: hence cometh the proverb so rife in Fez; A lion of Agla; which they apply unto The 〈◊〉 of a proverb. such a one as maketh great brags, and is but a mere dastard. Of the castle of Narangia. THe castle of Narangia built by the Africans upon a little hill not far from the river Luccus, is almost ten miles distant from Ezaggen. It hath most fruitful cornfields, but no plains belonging unto it. Along the rivers side are huge deserts, wherein grow great store of wild fruits, especially cherries, such as the Italians call Ciriegie marine. This castle was surprised and sacked by the Portugals in the year of the Hegeira 895. which was in the year of our Lord, 1486. Of the Isle of Gesira. THe Isle of Gesira lying not far from the mouth of the river Luccus, is distant from the sea about ten, and from Fez about an hundredth miles. There was in times past a little ancient town upon this Island, which was abandoned when the Portugals first made wars upon Barbary. About the said river are many deserts, but An attempt and defeat of the Portugals. very few cornfields. In the year of the Hegeira 894. the king of Portugal sent hither a great army, which being landed on the Isle, the general of the field built a strong fort thereupon, by means whereof he hoped to be free from the enemies invasion, and to enjoy the fields adjacent. But the king of Fez, namely his father that * 1562. now reigneth, foreseeing the damage that he should sustain, if he permitted the said fort to be finished, levied a mighty army to withstand the Portugal's proceedings. Howbeit, so great was the force of their ordinance, that the Moors durst not approach within two miles of the Portugal camp. Wherefore the Fessan king being almost out of hope, was persuaded by some that were about him to stop up the river with posts and raftes two miles from the Island: by which means the Moors being defended, and having cut down all the woods adjoining, the Portugals perceived the passage of the river in short time to be choked and stopped up with great trees, and that there was no possibility for them to depart. Then the king hoping easily to overcome the Portugals, determined to assail their fort: but considering he could not do it without great slaughter of his people, he covenanted with the Portugal general, that besides a great sum of money paid unto him, the said general should obtain of the Portugal king to have certain daughters of the king of Fez his governor (which were at that time prisoners in Portugal) to be restored, and that then he would freely dismiss him and his company: which being done, the Portugal army returned home. Of the town of Basra. THis town containing almost two thousand families, was built by Mahumet the son of Idris, which was the founder of Fez, upon a certain plain between two mountains, being distant from Fez about fourscore, and from Caesar southward almost twenty miles. And it was named Basra for the memory of a city in Arabia Foelix called by that name, where Hali the fourth Mahometan patriarch after Mahumet, and great grandfather unto Idris was slain. It was in times past environed with most high and impregnable walls: and so long as it was governed by the posterity of Idris, the people were very civil; for Idris his successors used always to remain there in summer time, by reason of the pleasant situation of the place, the hills and valleys being beautified with sweet gardens, and yielding corn in abundance: and that both by reason of the vicinity of the town, and of the neighbourhood of the river Luccus. Moreover, in old time this town was very populous, being adorned with many fair temples, and inhabited with most civil people: but the family of Idris decaying, it became a prey unto the enemy. At this present the ruins of the walls are only to be seen, and certain forlorn gardens, which, because the ground is not manured, bring forth nought, but wild fruits. Of the town called Homar. THis town was built by one Hali a disciple of the foresaid Mahumet upon a little hill, and by a rivers side, being situate about fourteen miles to the north of Caesar, and sixteen miles to the south of Arzilla: which although it be but a small town, yet is it well fortified and fairly built, and environed with fruitful fields, vineyards, and gardens replenished with wonderful variety of fruits. The inhabitants being most of them linnen-weavers', gather and provide great store of flax. But ever since the Portugals won Arzilla, this town hath remained desolate. A description of the 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉. THe great city of Arzilla called by the Africans Azella, was built by the Romans upon the Ocean sea shore, about seventy miles from the straits of Gibraltar, and an hundred and forty miles from Fez. It was in times past subject unto the prince of Septa or Ceuta, who was tributary to the Romans, and was afterward taken by the Goths, who established the said prince in his former government: but the mahometans won it in the year of the Hegeira 94. and held the same for two hundred and twenty years, till such time as the English at the persuasion of the Goths besieged it with an huge army; and albeit the Goths were enemies to the English, because themselves were Christians, and the English worshippers of idols, yet the Goths 〈◊〉 them to this attempt, hoping by that means to The taking of Arzilla by the English. draw the mahometans out of Europe. The English having good success took the city, and so wasted it with fire and sword, that scarce one citizen escaped, so that it remained almost thirty years void of inhabitants. But afterward when the Mahometan patriarchs of Cordova were lords of Mauritania, it was again re-edified, and by all means augmented, enriched and fortified. The inhabitants were rich, learned, and valiant. The fields adjacent yield grain and pulse of all sorts in great abundance, but because the town standeth almost ten miles from the mountains, it sustaineth great want of wood; howbeit they have coals brought them from Harais, as is aforesaid. In the year of the Hegeira 882. this city was suddenly surprised and taken by the Portugals, and all the inhabitants carried prisoners into Arzilla taken by the Portugals. Portugal, amongst whom was Mahumet the king of Fez that now is, who together with his sister being both children of seven years old, were taken and led captive. For the father of this Mahumet seeing the province of Habatrevolt from him, went and dwelled at Arzilla, the very same time, Habdulac the last king of the Marin family. when Esserif a great citizen of Fez, having slain Habdulac the last king of the marin-family, was by the favour of the people advanced unto the Fessan kingdom. Afterward one Saic Abra being pricked forward with ambition, went about to conquer the city of Fez, and to make himself king; howbeit Esserif by the advise of a certain counsellor of his, being couzin unto Saic, vanquished and put to flight the said Saic to his great disgrace. Moreover while Esserif had sent his said counsellor to Temesna, to pacify the people of that province being about to rebel, Saic returned, and having for one whole year besieged new Fez with eight thousand men, at length by treason of the townsmen he easily won it, and compelled Esserif with all his family, to flee unto the kingdom of Tunis. The same time therefore that Saic besieged Fez, the king of Portugal (as is aforesaid) sending a fleet into Africa, took Arzilla, and then was the king of Fez that now is with his young sister carried captive into Portugal, where he remained seven years, in which space he learned the Portugall-language most exactly. At length with a great sum of money his father ransomed him out of Portugal, who afterward being advanced to the kingdom, was by reason of his long continuance in Portugal called king Mahumet the Portugal. This king afterward attempted very often to be avenged of the Portugals, and to recover Arzilla. Wherefore suddenly encountering the said city he beat down a Read Osorius lib. 5. de rebus gestis Eman. great part of the wall, and entering the breach, set all the captive-moores at liberty. The Christians retired into the castle, promising within two days to yield unto the king. But Pedro Navarro coming in the mean season with a great fleet, they compelled the king with continual discharging of their ordinance, not only to relinquish the city, but also to depart quite away with his whole army: afterward it was so fortified on all sides by the Portugals, john Leo served the king of Fez in his wars against Arzilla. that the said king attempting often the recovery thereof, had always the repulse. I myself serving the king in the foresaid expedition could find but five hundred of our company slain. But the war against Arzilla continued from the year of the Hegeira 914. to the year 921. Of the city of Tangia. THe great and ancient city of Tangia called by the Portugals Tangiara, according to the fond opinion of some historiographers, was founded by one Sedded the son of Haddit, who (as they say) was emperor over the whole world. This man (say they) determined to build a city, which for beauty might match the earthly paradise. Wherefore he compassed the same with walls of brass, and the roofs of the houses he covered with gold and silver, for the building whereof he exacted great tributes of all the cities in the world. But the classical and approved authors affirm that it was built by the Romans upon the Ocean sea shore, at the same time when they subdued the kingdom of * Or Boetica. Granada. From the streites of Gibraltar it is distant almost thirty, and from Fez an hundred and fifty miles. And from the time that the Goths were first lords of Granada, this city was subject unto Septa or Ceuta, until it and Arzilla were won by the mahometans. It hath always been a civil, famous, and well-peopled town, and very stately and sumptuously built. The field thereto belonging is not very fertile, nor apt for tilth: howbeit not far off are certain valleys continually watered with fountains, which furnish the said city with all kind of fruits in abundance. Without the city also grow certain vines, albeit upon a sandy soil. It was well stored with inhabitants, till such time as Arzilla was surprised by the Portugals: for then the inhabitants being dismayed with rumours of wars, took up their bag and baggage and fled unto Fez. Whereupon the king of Portugal his deputy at Arzilla sent one of his captains thither, who kept it so long under the obedience of the king, till the king of Fez sent one of his kinsmen also to defend a region of great importance near unto the mountains of Gumera, being enemy to the Christians. Twenty five years before the Portugal king won this city, he sent forth an armada against it, hoping that the city being destitute of aid, 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 king of Fez was in wars against the rebels of Mecnase, would soon yield itself. But contrary to the Portugals expectation the Fessan king concluding a sudden truce with them of Mecnase, sent his counsellor with an army, who encountering the Portugals, made a great slaughter of them, and amongst the rest slew their general, whom he caused to be carried in a case or sack unto new Fez, and there to be set upon an high place where all men might behold him. Afterward the king of Portugal sent a new supply, who suddenly assailing the city in the night, were most of them slain, and the residue enforced to flee. But that which the Portugall-king could not bring to pass with those two Armadas, he achieved at length (as is aforesaid) with small forces and little disadvantage. In my time 〈◊〉 king of Fez left no means unattempted for the recovery of this city, but so great always was the valour of the Portugals, that he had ever ill success. These things were done in the year of the Hegeira 917, which was in the year of our Lord 1508. Of the town called Caesar Ezzaghir, that is, the little palace. THis town was built by Mansor the king and Patriarch of Maroco upon the Ocean sea shore, about twelve miles from Tangia, and from Septa eighteen miles. It was built (they say) by Mansor, because every year when he passed into the Province of Granada, he was constrained with his whole army to march over the rough and ragged mountains of Septa, before he could come unto the sea shore. It standeth in an open and pleasant place over against the coast of Granada. It was well peopled in times past, part of the inhabitants being weavers and merchants, and the rest mariners, that used to transport the Caesar Ezzaghir taken by the king of Portugal. wares of 〈◊〉 into Europe. This town the king of Portugal took by a sudden surprise. And the Fessan king hath laboured by all means to recover it, but ever with ill success. These things were done in the year of the Hegeira 863. Of the great city of Septa. SEpta, called by the Latins, Civitas, and by the Portugals, Seupta, was (according to our most approved Authors) built by the Romans upon the straits of Gibraltar, being in old time the head city of all Mauritania; wherefore the Romans made great account thereof, insomuch that it became very civil, and was thoroughly inhabited. Afterward it was won by the Goths, who appointed a governor there; and it continued in their possession, 〈◊〉 the mahometans invading Mauritania surprised it also. The occasion whereof was one julian Earl of Septa; who being greatly injuried by Roderigo king of the Goths and of Spain, joined with the infidels, conducted The entrance of the Moors into Granada. them into Granada, and caused Roderigo to lose both his life and his kingdom. The mahometans therefore having taken Septa, kept possession thereof on the behalf of one Elgualid, son of Habdulmalic their Patriarch, who then was resident at Damascus, in the year of the Hegeira 92. From thenceforth till within these few years, this city grew so civil and so well stored with inhabitants, that it proved the most worthy and famous city of all Mauritania. It contained many temples and colleges of students, with great numbers of artisans, and men of learning and of high spirit. Their artisans excelled especially in works of brass, as namely in making of candlesticks, basons, standishes, and such like commodities, which were as pleasant to the eye, as if they had been made of silver or gold. The Italians have great cunning in making of the like, but their workmanship is nothing comparable to theirs of * Or çeuta. Septa. Without the city are divers fair villages and granges, especially in that place which for the abundance of vines is called The vineyards: howbeit the fields are very barren and fruitless, for which cause their corn is exceeding dear. Both without and within the city there is a pleasant and beautiful prospect to the shore of Granada upon the straits of Gibraltar, from whence you may discern living creatures, The straits of Gibraltar from Septa but 12. miles broad. the distance being but 12. miles. Howbeit this famous city not many years since was greatly afflicted by Habdulmumen the king and patriarch: who having surprised it, razed the buildings, and banished the principal inhabitants thereof. And not long after it sustained as great damage by the king of Granada, who (besides the foresaid harms) carried the nobles and chief citizens captives into Granada. And lastly in the year of Mahumet his Hegeira Septa taken by the Portugals. 818. being taken by a Portugall-armada, all the citizens did abandon it. Abu Sahid being then king of Fez., and a man of no valour, neglected the Abu Sahid king of Fez and his six sons slain all in one night. recovery thereof: but in the midst of his dancing and disport being advertised that it was lost, he would not so much as interrupt his vain pastime: wherefore by gods just judgement, both himself and his six sons were all slain in one night by his Secretary, in whom he reposed singular trust, because he would have deflowered the said Secretaries wife. These things came to pass in the year of the Hegeira 824. Afterward, the kingdom of Fez being eight years destitute of a king, a son of the murdered king whom he begot of a Christian woman, and who the same night that his father was slain fled unto Tunis, succeeded in the government: this was Habdulac the last king of the Marin family, who likewise (as is aforesaid) was slain by the people. Of the town of Tetteguin, now called Tetuan. THis town being built by the ancient Africans eighteen miles from the straits of Gibraltar, and six miles from the main Ocean, was taken by the mahometans at the same time when they won Septa from the Goths. It is reported that the Goths bestowed the government of this town upon a woman with one eye, who weekly repairing thither to receive tribute, the inhabitants named the town 〈◊〉, which signifieth in their language an eye. Afterward being often assailed and encountered by the Portugals, the inhabitants forsook it, and it remained fourscore and fifteen years desolate: which time being expired, it was re-edified and replanted a new with inhabitants by a certain captain of Granada, who together with his king being expelled thence by Ferdinando king of Castille, departed unto Fez. This famous captain that showed himself so valiant in the wars of Granada was called by the Portugals Almandali. Who having obtained the government of this town, and gotten licence to repair it, environed the same with new walls, and built an impregnable castle therein compassed with a deep ditch. Afterward making continual war against the Portugals, he extremely molested and endamaged their towns of Septa, Caesar, and Tangia: for with three hundred valiant horsemen of Granada he made daily incursions and inroads upon the Christians, and those that he took, he put to continual labour and toil about the building of his forts. Upon a time I myself traveling this way saw three thousand Christian captives, who being clad in course sackcloth, were constrained in the night to lie fettered in deep dungeons. This captain was exceeding liberal unto all African and Mahometan strangers that passed by: howbeit within these few years one of his eyes being thrust out with a dagger, and the other waxing dim with age, he deceased; leaving the town after his death unto his nephew, who was a most valiant man. Of the mountains of Habat. A 'mongst the mountains of Habat there be eight more famous than the rest, all which are inhabited by the people of Gumera, who use one general form and custom of living: for all of them maintain Mahumets' religion, albeit they drink wine contrary to his precept. They are proper men of parsonage and much addicted to industry & labour, but for the wars they are very unfit. Subject they are unto the king of Fez, who imposeth such heavy tribute upon them, so that besides a few (of whom we will speak hereafter) the residue are scarce able to find themselves apparel. Of mount Rahona. THis mountain being near unto Ezaggen, containeth in length thirty miles, and in breadth twelve miles. It aboundeth with oil, honey, and vines. The inhabitants are principally employed about making of soap and trying of wax. Wines they have great store both brown and white. They pay unto the king of Fez for yearly tribute three thousand ducats, which being allowed unto the governor of Ezaggen, he maintaineth four hundred horsemen in the king's service. Of the mountain called Beni-Fenescare. THis mountain of Fenescare adjoining unto mount Rahon, is about five and twenty miles long, and eight miles broad. It is better peopled than Rahon, having many leatherdressers, and weavers of course cloth, and yielding great abundance of wax. Every saturday they have a great market, where you may find all kind of chapmen and of wares; insomuch that the Genoveses come hither to buy oxe-hides and wax, which they convey into Portugal and Italy. Out of this mountain is yearly collected for tribute the sum of six thousand ducats, three thousand whereof are allowed unto the governor of Ezaggen, the residue being paid into the king's exchequer. Of the mountain called Beni-Haros. THis mountain standing near unto Caesar extendeth northward eight, and westward 20 miles. It containeth but six miles only in breadth. It was wont to be well peopled and inhabited with gentlemen, who, when the Portugals won Arzilla, cruelly usurping over the people, compelled them to flee and leave the mountain desolate. There are at this present certain cottages upon the mountain; but all the residue lieth waste. While this mountain continued in good estate, it allowed yearly unto the governor of Caesar three thousand ducats. Of mount Chebib. Upon this mountain are six or seven castles inhabited with civil and honest people: for when the Portugals won Tangia, the citizens fled unto this mountain being but twenty miles distant. The inhabitants are perpetually molested with the Portugals invasions: the tributes of this mountain being half diminished since the loss of Tangia, wax every day worse and worse, because the garrison is thirty miles distant, and cannot come to succour them so often as the Portugals come to waste and spoil their territories. Of the mountain called Beni Chessen. THis mountain is of an exceeding height, and very hard to be encountered: for besides the natural fortification thereof, it is inhabited with most valiant people. These inhabitants being oppressed with the tyranny of their governors, rose up at length in arms against them, & brought them to great misery and distress. Whereupon a young gentleman, one of their said governors, disdaining to submit himself unto the yoke of his inferiors, went to serve in the king of Granada his wars, where being trained up a long time in martial discipline against the Christians, he proved an expert warrior: and so at length returning unto one of his native mountains, he gathered a certain troop of horsemen, and valiantly defended the said mountain from the Portugals invasions: whereof the king of Fez being advertised, sent him an hundred and fifty crossbows: which he employed to the subduing of that mountain, and to the conquest of the mountains of his enemies. But after he began to usurp the king's tribute in the same mountain, the king waxing wroth sent forth an huge army against him. Howbeit upon his repentant submission, the king pardoned him, and ordained him governor of Seusavon, and of all the region adjacent. After him succeeded in the same government one of the lineage of Mahumet, and of Idris the founder of Fez. This man became very famous among the Portugals, and by reason of his nobility (for he was of the family called Helibenres) he grew unto great renown. Of mount Angera. IT standeth southward of Caesar the less almost eight miles, being ten miles long and three miles broad. The soil thereof is exceeding fruitful, and in times passed greatly abounded with woods, which being cut down by the inhabitants, were sent to Caesar for the building of ships: which at that time had a great fleet belonging thereunto. This mountain likewise yielded abundance of flax; and the inhabitants were partly weavers and partly mariners. Howbeit when the foresaid town of Caesar was won by the Portugals, this mountain also was forsaken by the inhabitants: and yet at this day all the houses stand still, as if the inhabitants had not forsaken it at all. Of mount Quadres. THis high mountain standing in the midst between Septa and Tetteguin, is inhabited with most valiant and warlike people, whose valour sufficiently appeared in the wars between the king of Granada, and the Spaniards; where the inhabitants only of this mountain prevailed more than all the armed moors beside. Upon the said mountain was borne one called by them Hellul: this Hellul achieved many worthy exploits against the Spaniards; the history whereof is set down partly in verse and partly in prose, and is as rife in Africa and Granada, as is the story of Orlando in Italy. But at length in the Spanish war (wherein joseph Enesir king and patriarch of Maroco was vanquished) this Hellul was slain in a castle of Catalonia, called by the Moors, The castle of the eagle. In the same battle were slain threescore thousand Moors, so that none of them escaped save the Threescore thousand Moors slain. king and a few of his nobles. This was done in the year of the Hegeira 609, which was in the year of our Lord 1160. From thenceforth the Spaniards had always good success in their wars, so that they recovered all those cities which the Moors had before taken from them. And from that time till the year wherein king Ferdinando conquered Granada, there passed (according to the Arabians account) 285. years. Of the mountain called Beni Guedarfeth. THis mountain standing not far from Tetteguin (although it be not very large) is well fraught with inhabitants. The people are very warlike, being in pay under the governor of Tetteguin, whom they greatly honour and attend upon him in all his attempts against the Christians: for which cause they pay no tribute unto the king of Fez, unless it be for their fields, which is very little. They reap much commodity out of those mountains, for there groweth great abundance of box, whereof the Fessan combs are made. A description of Errif one of the seven regions of Fez. WEstward this region beginneth near unto the streites of 〈◊〉, and extendeth eastward to the river of Nocor, which distance containeth about an hundred and forty miles. Northward it bordereth upon the Mediterran sea, and stretcheth forty miles southward unto those mountains which lie over against the river Guarga and the territory of Fez. This region is very uneeven, being full of exceeding cold mountains and waste deserts, which are replenished with most beautiful and strait trees: Here is no corn growing, they have great store of vines, figs, olives, & almonds. The inhabitants of this region are valiant people, but so excessively given to drinking, that they scarcely reserve wherewithal to apparel themselves. Head-cattells they have but few: howbeit upon their mountains they have great plenty of goats, asses, and apes. Their towns are but few: and their castles and villages are very homely built without any plancher or stories, much like to the stables of Europe, and are covered with thatch or with the bark of trees. All the inhabitants of this region have the balls of their throat-pipes very great, and are uncivil and rude people. Of the town of Terga. THis small town (as some think) built by the Goths upon the shore of the Mediterran sea, is distant from the streites of Gibraltar about fourscore miles, and containeth to the number of five hundred families. The town wall is of no force. The inhabitants are most part of them fishers; who getting great abundance of fish, salted them, and carry them to sell almost an hundred miles southward. This town was in times passed well stored with people, but since the Portugals entered the same region, it hath fallen greatly to decay. Not far from this town groweth abundance of 〈◊〉 upon the ragged and cold mountains. And albeit the inhabitants are valiant, yet are they rustical and void of all humanity. Of Bedis, otherwise called Velles de 〈◊〉. THis ancient town built upon the Mediterran sea shore, & 〈◊〉 by the Spaniards Velles de Gumera, containeth about six hundred families. Some writers there are that affirm it to be built by the Africans, and others by the Goths; so that it remaineth as yet uncertain who were the true founders thereof. It standeth between two high mountains: and not far from it there is a fair and large valley, from whence cometh a little river or stream to the town, always when it raineth. In the midst of the town standeth the market place, which containeth great store of shops. Here is also a very stately temple to be seen. Water for drink is exceeding scarce among them, for they are all constrained to resort unto one pit or well, being in the suburbs, near unto the sepulchre of a certain man, that was in times passed very famous among them. Howbeit in the night it is dangerous to fetch water from thence, because it is so full of bloodsuckers or horseleeches. The townsmen are of two sorts: for some be fishers, and the residue are pirates, which daily do great harm unto the Christians. Upon the mountains grow great store of wood, very commodious for the building of ships and of galleys. The inhabitants of which mountains are almost wholly employed about carrying of the said wood from place to place. They have very little corn growing, for which cause most of them eat barley bread. Their principal food are certain fishes (which the Italians call Sardelli) together with other like fishes. They have such abundance of fish, that one man alone is not able to draw up a net; wherefore whosoever will assist the fishermen in that business, are rewarded with good store of fishes for their labour: yea sometimes they will freely bestow fishes upon such as pass by. They salted the foresaid Sardelli, and send them to the mountains to be sold. In this town there is a long street inhabited with jews, wherein dwell sundry vintners that sell excellent wines. So that in calm evenings the citizens use to carry wine aboard their barks in the sea, and to spend their time in drinking and singing. In this town standeth a fair castle, but not strong, wherein the governor hath his abode. And near unto this castle the said governor hath a palace, whereunto belongeth a most pleasant garden. Upon the shore the governor buildeth galleys and other ships wherewith they greatly molest the Christians. Whereupon Ferdinando king of Spain taking a certain Island within a mile of the town, built a fort thereon, and so planted it with ordinance and soldiers, that neither their temples nor themselves walking in the streets were free therefrom, but were daily slain. Wherefore the governor of the town was constrained to crave aid from the king of Fez, who sent out a great 〈◊〉 against the Christians; but they were partly taken, and partly slain, so that very few escaped back unto Fez. The Christians kept this isle almost two years: and then it was betrayed by a false treacherous Spaniard (who slew the governor of the isle, because he had taken his wife from him) into the Moors possession, and all the Christians were slain: not a man of them escaped, save only the Spanish traitor, who in regard of his treason was greatly rewarded, both by the governor of Bedis, and also by the king of Fez. Being at Naples I heard the whole relation of this matter from a certain man that was present at all the former exploits, who said that they were done about the year of our Lord 1520. But now the said island is most diligently kept by a garrison of soldiers sent from Fez: for Bedis is the nearest haven-towne unto Fez upon the Mediterran sea shore, although it be an hundred and twenty miles distant. Every year or every second year the Venetian galleys use to resort unto this isle, and to exchange wares for wares with the inhabitants, or sometimes to buy for ready money: which wares the Venetians transport unto Tunis, Venice, Alexandria, and sometime to Barutto. Of the town of jelles. THis town being built upon the Mediterran sea shore is almost six miles distant from Bedis: the haven thereof is very commodious and much frequented by ships in fowl and tempestuous weather. Not far from this town are divers mountains and waste deserts growing full of pine trees. In my time it remained void of inhabitants, by reason of certain Spanish pirates which haunted the same; and now there are but a few poor cottages of fishers, who standing in daily dread of the Spaniards, keep continual and circumspect watch to see if they can escry any ships making towards them, which if they do, they flee forthwith unto the next mountains, bringing from 〈◊〉 a sufficient number of armed men to withstand the attempts of the Spaniards or Portugals. Of the 〈◊〉 of Tegassa. THis town though it be but little is well stored with inhabitants, and standeth upon a rivers side, about two miles from the Mediterran sea. Families it containeth to the number of five hundredth, the buildings thereof being very rude and homely: all the inhabitants are fishers and seafaring men, who from thence carry victuals unto other cities; for their own town being 〈◊〉 with mountains and woods, they have no corn at all. Howbeit certain vines there are, and very fruitful trees, without which the whole region were in a miserable case. Besides barley-bread the inhabitants have nought to live on, saving a few little fishes and onions. I myself could hardly for one day endure the extreme stinking smell of their fishes, which stinch miserably infecteth the whole province. Of the town of Gebha. GEbha is a little town walled round about, and built by the Africans upon the Mediterran sea shore. From Bedis it is above four and twenty miles distant. Sometimes it hath inhabitants and sometimes none, according to the custom of that region. All the fields adjacent are unfit for corn, being full of fountains and woods. Here also are certain vines and other fruits, but no buildings of any account. Of the town of Mezemme. IT is a very large sea-town standing upon a certain hill which bordereth upon the province of Garet. near unto this town lieth a very large plain, the length whereof stretching southward is eight and twenty, and the breadth almost ten miles, and through the midst of it runneth the river called Nocore, which divideth the region of Errif from that of Garet. This plain is occupied by certain Arabian husbandmen, who reap such plenty of corn there, that they are constrained to pay about five thousand bushels a year unto the governor of Bedis. This city was wont in times past to be well peopled, and was the metropolitan of the whole region, although it were continually molested with inconveniences. For first it was almost utterly destroyed by the patriarch of Cairaoan: who, because the townsmen refused to pay him his wonted tribute, burned it down, and beheaded the governor thereof: whose head was carried to Cairaoan upon the pike of a iaveline. This was done in the year of the Hegeira 318. From thenceforth for fifteen years after it remained destitute of inhabitants: and then under the same patriarch the foresaid town was by certain noblemen inhabited a new. Lastly it was taken by a certain great man of Cordova. He seeing this city stand within fower-score miles of his confines (for so broad is the sea between Malaga in Granada, and this part of Barbary) began to demand tribute of the citizens: which when they refused to pay, he took their town with a small number of men: for the patriarch could not in so short space succour it, by reason that Cairaoan is distant from thence above * Here seemeth to be an error in the original. three and twenty hundredth miles. Wherefore this town being taken and utterly razed, the governor thereof was sent captive unto Cordova, where he spent the residue of his days in prison. And now the walls of this town are only to be seen. This was done in the year of the Hegeira 892. Now let us speak somewhat of the mountains of Errif. Of mount Benigarir. THis mountain is inhabited by certain people which came first from the mountains of Gumera. It standeth near unto Terga, and is ten miles long, and almost four miles broad. Upon this mountain are great stóre of woods, as likewise abundance of vines and olives. The inhabitants are miserable and poor people. cattle are very scarce among them: they use to make much wine and sodden must. Neither have they any store of barley growing upon this mountain. Of mount Beni Mansor. THis mountain containeth in length fifteen, and in breadth almost five miles. Upon this mountain are great store of woods and fountains: All the inhabitants are most valiant, and yet poor and miserable people, for the whole mountain yieldeth nothing but vines: they have indeed some small number of goats. Every week they have a market, whereunto is brought nothing but garlic, onions, raisins, salt fishes called before Sardelli, together with some 〈◊〉 and panic, whereof they make bread. This hill is subject to the governor of Bedis. Of mount Bucchuia. THis mountain is fowerteene miles long, and almost eight miles broad. The inhabitants are richer and somewhat better appareled than they of other mountains, & possess great store of horses. Corn it yieldeth in abundance: neither are the people constrained to pay any great tribute, by reason of a certain holy man buried at Bedis, and borne upon this mountain. Of mount Beni Chelid. BY this mountain lieth the high way from Bedis to Fez. It is a very cold place, and containeth great store of wood and fountains. It yieldeth no corn, but vines only. The inhabitants being subject to the governor of Bedis, are by reason of continual exactions so impoverished, that they are feign to rob and steal for their living. Of mount Beni Mansor. THis mountain extendeth eight miles, standing an equal distance from the sea with the mountains 〈◊〉. The inhabitants are valiant and stout people, but too much addicted to drunkenness. Wine they have great store, and but little corn. Their women keep goats and spin upon the distaff both at one time: the greater part of whom will not refuse the dishonest company of any man. Of mount Beni joseph. THE length of this mountain is twelve miles, and the breadth about eight miles. The inhabitants are poor, and basely appareled: neither have they any corn but panic, whereof they make black and most unsavoury bread. They live also upon onions, and garlic. Their fountains are very muddy. They have great store of goats, the milk whereof they keep as a most precious thing. Of mount Beni Zaruol. Upon this mountain 〈◊〉 great store of vines, olives, and other fruits. The inhabitants are poor miserable people, being subject to the governor of Seusaoen, who exacteth so great tribute at their hands, that all which they can scrape and get out of the mountain will hardly maintain them. Every week they have a market, wherein nothing is to be sold, but only dried figs, raisins, and oil. Likewise they use to kill their he and she goats, whose flesh is so unsavoury, that it cannot be eaten, unless it be fried. Of mount Beni Razin. THis mountain bordereth upon the Mediterran sea, not far from Terga. The inhabitants live a secure and pleasant life; for the mountain is impregnable, and aboundeth with all kind of grain, neither are they constrained to pay any tribute at all. They have likewise good plenty of olives and wine; and their ground is exceeding fruitful, especially upon the side of the mountain. Their women partly keep goats, and partly till the ground. Of mount Seusaoen. THere is no mountain in all Africa for pleasant situation comparable to this: hereon standeth a town inhabited with all kind of artificers and merchants. Upon this mountain dwelleth one called Sidi Heli Berrased, being lord over many mountains. This Sidi Heli brought some civility into this mountain, rebelled against the king of Fez, and maintained continual war against the Portugals. The inhabitants of the villages of this and the foresaid mountains, are free from all taxation and tribute, because 〈◊〉 serve under their captain as well for horsemen as for 〈◊〉. Come here groweth small store, but great plenty of flax. There are 〈◊〉 woods, and many fountains upon this hill: and the inhabitants go all 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. Of mount Beni Gebara. THis mountain is very steep, and of a wonderful height, out of the foot whereof spring certain rivers. Vines and figs here are great store, but no corn at all: and the inhabitants wear most base attire. They have abundance of goats, & oxen of so little a stature, that a man would take them to be calves of half a year old. Every week they have a market, being furnished with very few commodities. Hither do the merchants of Fez resort, and the muletters or carriers, which convey fruits out of this mountain unto Fez. In times past it was subject unto a certain prince of the king of Fez his kindred: and there were collected out of this mountain almost two thousand ducats of yearly tribute. Of mount Beni jerso. THis mountain in times past was exceedingly well peopled. here was likewise a fair college built, wherein the Mahometan law was publicly taught, for which cause the inhabitants were freed from all tributes and exactions. Afterward a certain tyrant being assisted by the king of Fez, made this mountain to become tributary unto him; but first he put the inhabitants to flight, and then destroyed the college, wherein were found books worth more than four thousand ducats, and the learned and famous men he cruelly put to the sword. This was done in the 918. year of the Hegeira, which was in the year of our Lord 1509. Of mount Tezarin. THis mountain called by the inhabitants Tezarin, standeth near unto the foresaid Beni jerso, & aboundeth greatly with fountains, deserts, & vineyards. Upon the top thereof stand divers ancient buildings, which (so far forth as I can conjecture) were erected by the Romans. And here (as is before signified) certain fond people continually search in caves and holes of the earth for the Romans treasure. All the inhabitants of this mountain are most ignorant people, and greatly oppressed with exactions. Of mount Beni Busibet. THis is a most cold mountain, and therefore it yieldeth neither corn nor cattle, both by reason of the extreme coldness, and the barrenness thereof. Moreover the leaves of the trees are not fit for goats to feed upon. They have so great plenty of nuts, that they abundantly furnish the city of Fez, and all other neighbour cities and towns therewith. All their grapes are black, whereof they make a certain pleasant meat called Zibibbo. They make likewise great store of must and wine. They are clad Zibibbo. in certain woollen cloaks or mantles, such as are used in Italy: these mantles have certain hoods, which cover their heads and visages so, that you can scarce discern them to be men: and they are particoloured with black and white spots. In winter the merchants that resort unto this mountain to carry away nuts and raisins unto Fez, can scarce find any meat to eat, for there is neither corn nor flesh, but only onions and certain salt fishes, which are extreme dear. They use likewise to eat sodden must and beans dressed after their manner, and this is the daintiest fare that this mountain can afford; and their sodden must they eat with much bread. Of mount Beni Gualid. IT is an exceeding high and steep hill, and the inhabitants are very rich, for of their black grapes they make the foresaid meat called Zibibbo. Almonds, figs, and olives they have in great abundance: neither pay they any tribute unto the king of Fez, but only each family one fourth part of a ducat, to the end they may have free liberty to buy and sell in Fez market. And if any citizen of Fez doth them any wrong, when they take him or any of his kindred in their mountain, they will not suffer him to return home to Fez, till sufficient recompense be made. These people go decently appareled, and they have a privilege granted, that whatsoever persons are banished out of Fez, may freely remain in their mountain; yea, they will bestow their living gratìs upon such banished persons, so long as they continue amongst them. And doubtless if this mountain were subject unto the king of Fez, it would afford him yearly for tribute six thousand ducats: for it containeth more than six hundredth rich families. Of mount Merniza. THis mountain standèth just by the former, the inhabitants being endued with the same nobility, liberty, and wealth, that the people of the former are endued with. The women of this mountain for any light injury offered by their husbands, leaving forthwith their said husbands and children, will depart unto some other mountain, and seek them new paramours fit for their humour. For which cause they are at continual war one with another: neither will they be reconciled till he that is last possessed of the woman pay her former husband all such money as he spent in the solemnising of her marriage: and for this purpose they have certain judges, that make their poor clients spend almost all their whole substance. Of mount Haugustian. IT is an exceeding high and a cold mountain, containing great store of springs, and abundance of vines bearing black grapes, together with plenty of figs, of honey, and of quinces: howbeit the sweetest and fairest quinces grow upon a plain at the foot of the hill. Likewise they are well stored with oil, and are free from all tribute, and yet there is not one of them, but in token of a thankful mind will send great gifts unto the king of Fez: hence it is that they may freely and securely traffic with the people of Fez, of whom they buy great store of corn, wool, and cloth. They are most civilly and decently appareled, especially such as dwell upon the principal part of this mountain, who are most of them either merchants or artificers, and a great many of them gentlemen. Of Mount Beni jedir. THis is a great and well peopled mountain, but it yieldeth nought but grapes, whereof they use to make the foresaid Zibibbo and wines. The inhabitants were in times past free from all tribute; howbeit in regard of their daily robberies and outrages committed against other people, the governor of Bedis being aided with some soldiers of Fez, subdued them all, and deprived them of their liberty: in this mountain there are about fifty farms or granges, which scarcely pay four hundred ducats for tribute. Of Mount Lucai. THis mountain is of a wonderful height, and very difficult to ascend. The inhabitants are exceeding rich, having great abundance of raisins, figs, almonds, oil, quinces, and pome-citrons: and dwelling but five and thirty miles distant from Fez, they carry all their fruits and commodities thither. They are almost all gentlemen, and very proud and high minded, so that they would never pay any tribute at all: for they know that their mountain is so fortified by nature, that it cannot easily be subdued: here likewise all such as are banished out of Fez, except only adulterers, are friendly entertained: for the inhabitants are so jealous, that they will admit no adulterers into their society. The king of Fez granteth them many privileges and favours, in regard of the great commodities which he reapeth out of their mountain. Of mount Beni Guazevall. THis mountain is almost thirty miles long, and about fifteen miles broad: it is divided into three parts, and between this and the mountains aforesaid run certain little rivers. The inhabitants are most valiant & warlike people, but extremely oppressed and burdened with exactions by the governor of Fez, who every year demandeth of this mountain for tribute eighteen thousand ducats: the mountain indeed aboundeth with grapes, olives, figs, and flax, whereby great sums of money are raised; howbeit whatsoever they can gather goeth presently to the governor of Fez, who hath his officers and receivers in the mountain, which do miserably oppress and bribe the inhabitants: in this mountain are a great number of villages and hamlets, that contain some an hundred, and some two hundred families and above: of most expert & trained soldiers they have above five & twenty thousand, & are at continual war with those that border upon them. But the king of Fez for those that are slain on both parts requireth great sums of money, so that he gaineth much by their dissensions. In this mountain there is a certain town indifferently well peopled, and furnished with all kind of artificers; whereunto the fields belonging marvelously abound with grapes, quinces, and pome-citrons, all which are sold at Fez: here are likewise great store of linen weavers, and many judges and lawyers. They have also a good market, whereunto the inhabitants of the neighbour mountains resort. Upon the top of this mountain there is a certain cave A cave or hole that perpetually casteth up fire. or hole that perpetually casteth up fire. Some wondering greatly at the matter, have cast in wood, which was suddenly consumed to ashes: I myself never saw the like miracle in any other place, so that a great many think it to be hell-mouth. Of mount Benigueriaghell. IT standeth near unto the mountain last mentioned, and yet the inhabitants of these mountains are at continnal war and discord. At the foot of this mountain there is a large plain which extendeth to the territory of Fez, and through the same runneth that river which the inhabitants call Guarga. This mountain greatly aboundeth with oil, corn, and flax, for which cause here are great store of linnen-weavers'. The greatest part of all their commodities is gathered for the king's use, so that they which otherwise would prove exceeding rich, become by this means stark beggars, and that especially by reason of the courtiers continual extortions. They are people of an ingenuous and valiant disposition. Soldiers they have almost twelve thousand, and to the number of threescore villages. Of mount Beni Achmed. THis mountain is eighteen miles long and seven miles broad. It is very steep and containeth many waste deserts, and yieldeth likewise great store of grapes, olives, & figs: howbeit the soil is not so apt for corn. All the inhabitants are continually oppressed with the exactions of the Fessan king. At the foot of this mountain are divers springs and small streams, the water whereof is muddy and unpleasant in taste, for in regard of the nature of the sand or earth it tasteth of chalk. There are many in this place, the balls of whose throte-pipes are very great and stick far out, like unto those abovementioned. All of them drink pure wine, which Wine that will last fifteen years. being boiled will last fifteen years, howbeit they boil not all their wine, but some they keep unboyled, and they yearly make great quantity of boiled wine, which they use to put in vessels, that are narrow at the bottom, and broad at the top. They have every week a great market, where wine, oil, and raisins are to be sold. The people of this mountain likewise are extreme poor and beggarly, as a man may conjecture by their apparel. They have had continual and ancient quarrels among themselves, which make them oftentimes fall together by the ears. Of mount Beni jeginesen. THis mountain bordereth upon Beni Achmed, & stretcheth in length almost ten miles. And between it and mount Beni Achmed runneth a certain small river. The inhabitants are too much addicted to drunkenness, by reason that their wines are so excellent. No fruits grow upon this mountain but only great abundance of grapes. Goats they have which live continually in the woods, neither have they any other flesh to eat but goates-flesh. I myself had great acquaintance with the inhabitants, by reason that my father had some possessions upon the mountain: but he hardly got any rents or money at their hands: for they are the worst paymasters that ever I knew. Of mount Beni Mesgalda. THis mountain bordereth upon the mountain last mentioned, and upon the river of Guarga. The inhabitants make great store of liquid soap, for they know not how to make hard soap. At the foot of this mountain there is a large plain possessed by certain Arabians, who have often combats with them of the mountain. They pay yearly to the K. of Fez an huge sum of money, and it is a wonder to see with what new exactions they are daily burdened. In this mountain are many Doctors of the Mahometan law, and divers inferior students: who put the inhabitants to great damage. Themselves forsooth will drink wine, and yet they persuade the people that it is 〈◊〉 for them to drink it, albeit some do give them little credit. The inhabitants of this mountain pay in respect of others no great tribute, and that perhaps, because they maintain the foresaid Doctors and students. Of mount Beni Guamud. THis mountain standeth so near unto the territory of Fez, that they are divided only by a river. All the inhabitants make soap, out of which commodity the king of Fez reapeth six thousand ducats of yearly tribute. The villages of this mountain are about five and twenty in number. All the sides thereof bring forth corn and cattle in great abundance, saving that they are sometimes destitute of water. The inhabitants are very rich and carry all kind of wares to Fez, where they gain exceedingly by them. This mountain yieldeth nothing, but is commodious for man's use. From Fez it is almost ten miles distant. Of Garet, one of the seven Provinces of the Fessan kingdom. Having described all the chief towns and mountains of the province of Errife, it now remaineth that we say somewhat of Garet, which is the sixth Province of Fez. This Province beginneth westward from the river Melulo, and bordereth eastward upon the river Muluia; southward it is enclosed with the mountains next unto the Numidian desert, and northward it extendeth to the Mediterran sea. The breadth of this region along the sea shore stretcheth from the river Nocor to the foresaid river of Muluia: the southern breadth is bounded with the river Melulo, & westward with the mountains of Chauz. The length of this Province is fifty, and the breadth forty miles. The soil is rough, untilled, and barren, not much unlike to the deserts of Numidia. The greater part hath been destitute of inhabitants, especially ever since the Spaniards took two of the principal towns in all the Province, as we will in due place record. Of the town of Melela in Garet. THis great and ancient town built by the Africans upon a certain bay or haven of the Mediterran sea, containeth almost two thousand families. It was in times passed well stored with inhabitants, as being the head-city of the whole province. It had a great jurisdiction or territory belonging thereto, and collected great abundance of iron and honey, whereupon the town itself was called Mellela, which word in their language signifieth honey. In the haven of this town they fish for pearls, and get great store of oysters wherein pearls do breed. This town was once subject unto the Goths, but fell afterward into the mahometans possession. The Goths being chased thence, fled over to Granada, which city is almost an hundred miles distant, to wit, so far as the breadth of the sea is over. In my time the king of Spain sent a great army against this town: before the arrival whereof, the townsmen sent unto the king of Fez for aid, who making war as then against the people of Temesna, could send but small forces to succour them. Which the townsmen being advertised of, and fearing lest their small forces would prove too weak for the Spaniards great armada, they took all the bag and baggage that they could carry, and fled unto the mountains of Buthoia. Howbeit the captain of the Fessan soldiers, both to be revenged upon the townsmen's cowardice, and also to leave nothing for the Spaniards to enjoy, burnt down all the houses, temples, and 〈◊〉. This was done in the year of the Hegeira 896, which was in the year of our Lord 1487. But the Spaniards, for all 〈◊〉 enjoyed and re-edified by the Spaniards. they found the city so wasted, would not depart thereupon, but first built a strong castle, and afterward by little and little repaired the towne-walles, and by that means have kept possession thereof even till this day. Of the town of Chasasa. THis town is from Mellela above twenty miles distant. It hath been a famous town and strongly walled, with a royal haven belonging thereunto, which was yearly frequented by Venetian ships. The townsmen have always had great traffic with the people of Fez, to the exceeding commodity of them both. At length, while the king of Fez was seriously employed in the wars, Don Ferdinando king of Spain came with great Chasasa taken by the Spaniards. forces against it, and won it very easily; for the inhabitants being advertised of the Spaniards approach, betook themselves wholly to flight. Of the town of 〈◊〉. IT standeth upon an high gravelly hill almost fifteen miles from Chasasa, and hath but a narrow passage to ascend up unto it. Within the town they have no water but only out of one cistern. The founders hereof are reported to have been some of the family of Beni Marin, before they attained unto great dominions, and in this town they laid up their corn and other of their commodities. At that time were all the deserts of the region adjacent void of danger, for the Arabians were not as yet possessed of Garet: 〈◊〉 after the family of Beni-Marin began to flourish, they left this town and all the region of Garet unto their neighbours, and went to inhabit better provinces. Howbeit in the mean season joseph the son of king jacob of the marin-family (I know not upon what occasion) in a manner utterly destroyed Tezzota: but after the Christians were 〈◊〉 of Chasasa, one of the king of Fez his captains being a valiant man and borne in Granada, got licence of his prince to re-edify it again. The inhabitants of this re-edified town are Moors, and are at continual war with the Christians of Chasasan. Of the town of Meggeo. THis little town standeth upon the top of an exceeding high mountain, being westward from Tezzota ten miles, & almost 6. miles southward of the Mediterran sea. Founded it was by the Africans, and is inhabited with people of a noble and liberal disposition. At the foot of this mountain there are most fruitful cornfields. Likewise great store of iron is digged Yron-mines. out of the mountains adjoining. The government of this town was committed unto one of the blood-royal, namely of the family of 〈◊〉, whose father was not very rich, but being a weaver, he taught his son the same occupation. Afterward the valiant young man being advertised of the estate and nobility of his ancestors, left his loom, and went to serve the king at Bedis, where he continued an horseman for a certain time: but because he was an excellent physician, the king loved him most entirely for his skill in music. A while after, the governor of Tezzota requiring the king's aid against the Christians, this worthy young gentleman with three hundred horsemen was sent to succour him, who as he had valiantly behaved himself oftentimes before, so now also he appeared to be a most resolute commander. Howbeit the king regarded not his valour so much as his excellent skill in music: which the young gallant disdaining, went at length to Garet unto certain gentlemen of his acquaintance there, who joining fifty horsemen unto him, appointed him governor of the castle of Meggeo: and afterward he was so well beloved by all the inhabitants of the next mountains, that each man according to his ability pleasured and gratified him. At length the governor of Bedis having assembled an army of three hundred horsemen and a thousand footmen, went about to expel the foresaid young governor out of Meggeo; who presently with that small troop which he had, so valiantly encountered his enemies, that he put them to flight, and so growing famous in regard of his manifold victories, the king of Fez bestowed very large revenues upon him (which he had given beforetime unto the governors of Bedis) to the end he might wholly endeavour himself to expel the Spaniards out of that region. And of this noble governor the Moors learned great skill in warlike affairs. The king of Fez hath now doubled his yearly allowance, so that at this present he hath two hundred horsemen at command, who are of greater force, then two thousand soldiers of any other captains there about. Of mount Echebdevon. THis mountain extendeth from Chasasa eastward as far as the river Muluia; and from the Mediterran sea southward it stretcheth unto the desert of Garet. The inhabitants are exceeding rich and valiant; and the mountain itself aboundeth with honey, barley, and all kind of cattle. Here are likewise great store of pleasant and green pastures. But since that Chasasa was taken by the Spaniards, the people of this mountain seeing that for want of soldiers they were not able to withstand the violence of their enemies, abandoned their own mountain, burnt their houses, and fled unto the mountains next adjoining. Of mount Beni Sahid. WEstward this mountain extendeth almost to the river Nocor, for the space of four and twenty miles. The inhabitants are rich, valiant, and liberal, and entertain all strangers with great courtesy and bounty. They have abundance of iron and of barley; and their pastures are very commodious, abounding with store of cattle; and yet in those pastures are their iron-mines, where they sometime lack water; neither pay they any tribute at all. Their houses that dig the iron are not far distant from the iron-mines. This iron the merchants sell at Fez in rude lumps, because they use not to frame it into bars, neither indeed have they the cunning so to frame it. Also they make culters, spades, and such like tools of husbandry, and yet their iron hath no steel at all in it. Of mount Azgangan. THis mountain beginning southward from Chasasa is inhabited with most rich and valiant people: for besides the great plenty of all things in the mountain itself, it hath the desert of Garet adjoining upon it. The inhabitants of which desert have great familiarity and traffic with the people of the said mountain: howbeit this mountain also hath remained void of inhabitants, ever since the taking of Chasasa. Of mount Beni Teuzin. THe south part of this mountain bordereth upon the mountain last mentioned, the length whereof from the desert of Garet to the river Nocor is almost ten miles; and on the one side thereof lie most beautiful & pleasant plains. The inhabitants are all free, paying no tribute at all, and that perhaps, because they have more soldiers, than Tezzota, Meggeo, and Bedis can afford. Moreover they are thought in times passed so to have assisted the governor of Meggeo, that by their aid he attained unto that government. They have always been great friends with the people of Fez, by reason of that ancient familiarity which they had, before Fez was governed by a king. Afterward a certain lawyer dwelling at Fez, who was borne in this mountain, so represented unto the king the said ancient familiarity, that he obtained freedom for his countrymen. At length also they were greatly beloved by the marin-family, perhaps because the mother of 〈◊〉 sahid the third king of the said family was borne of noble parentage in the foresaid mountain. Of mount Guardan. THe north part of this mountain joineth unto the former; and it stretcheth in length toward the Mediterran sea twelve miles, and in breadth to the river of Nocor, almost eight miles. The inhabitants are valiant & rich. Every saturday they have a great market upon the bank of a certain river: and hither resort many people from the mountains of Garet, and divers merchants of Fez, who exchange iron and bridles for oil, for in these mountains grow great plenty of olives. They have little or no wine at all, notwithstanding they are so near unto mount Arif, where the people carouse wine in abundance. They were for a certain time tributary to the governor of Bedis, but afterward by the means of a learned Mahometan preacher, the king granted them favour, to pay each man so much tribute as themselves pleased. So that sending yearly to the king some certain sum of money, with certain horses and slaves, they are put to no further charge. Of the extreme part of the desert of Garet. THe province of Garet is divided into three parts: the first whereof containeth the cities and towns, the second the foresaid mountains, (the inhabitants whereof are called Bottoia) and the third comprehendeth the deserts, which beginning northward at the Mediterran sea, and extending south to the desert of Chauz, are bounded westward with the foresaid mountains, and eastward with the river of Muluia. The length of these deserts is 60. miles, and the breadth thirty. They are unpleasant and dry, having no water but that of the river Muluia. There are many kinds of beasts in this desert, such as are in the Lybian desert next unto Numidia. In summer time many Arabians take up their abode near unto the river Muluia; and so do another kind of fierce people called Batalisa, who possess great abundance of horses, camels, and other cattle, and maintain continual war against the Arabians that border upon them. A description of Chauz, the seventh province of the kingdom of Fez. THis province is thought to comprehend the third part of the kingdom of Fez. It beginneth at the river Zha from the east, & extendeth westward to the river Guruigara: so that the length thereof is an hundred fourscore and ten, and the breadth an hundred threescore and ten miles: for all that part of mount Atlas which lieth over against Mauritania, joineth upon the breadth of this region. Likewise it containeth a good part of the plains and mountains bordering upon Lybia. At the same time when Habdulach the first king of the Marin-family began to bear rule over Mauritania and those other regions, his kindred began also to inhabit this region. This king left four sons behind him, whereof the first was called Abubdar, the second Abuichia, the third Abusahid, and the fourth jacob: this jacob was afterward chosen king, because he had vanquished Muachidin the king of Maroco, & had conquered the city of Maroco itself: the other three brethren died in their nonage: howbeit before jacob had won Maroco, the old king assigned unto each of them three, one region a piece. The other three parts were divided into seven, which were distributed among the four kindreds of the Marin-family, and two other tribes or families that were grown in great league with the same family: insomuch that this region was accounted for three regions. They which possessed the kingdom were ten in number, and the regions only seven. The foresaid king Habdulach was author of the said partition, who left the region of Chauz after his decease in such estate, as we will forthwith orderly describe. Of the town of Teurerto. THis ancient town was built upon a mountain by the Africans not far from the river Zha. The fields hereof not being very large, but exceeding fruitful, adjoin upon a certain dry and barren desert. The north part of the same bordereth upon the desert of Garet, and the south upon the desert of Adurha: eastward thereof lieth the desert of Anghad, which is near unto the kingdom of * Or Tremisen. Telensin, and westward it is enclosed with the desert of Tafrata, which bordereth likewise upon the town of Tezza. This Teurerto was in times past a most populous and rich town, and contained about three thousand families: here also are stately palaces, temples, and other such buildings to be seen. The town wall is built of most excellent marble. Ever since the marin-family enjoyed the western kingdom of Fez, this town was an occasion of great wars: for the Marin-family would have it belong to the crown of Fez: but the king of Telensin challenged it as his own. Of the town of Haddagia. THis town was built by the Africans in manner of an Isle, for it is environed with the river Mululo, which not far from hence falleth into the river Muluia. It was in times past a most populous & flourishing town: but after the Arabians became lords of the west, it fell by little and little to decay: for it bordereth upon the desert of Dahra, which is inhabited with most lewd and mischievous Arabians. At the same time when Teurerto was sacked, this town was utterly destroyed also, whereof nothing remaineth at this day but the town walls only. Of the castle of Garsis. IT standeth upon a rock by the river Muluia, fifteen miles distant from Teurerto. Here, as in a most impregnable place, the family of Beni Marin laid their provision of corn; when as they inhabited the deserts. Afterward it became subject unto Abuhenan the fifth king of the marin-family. It hath no great quantity of arable or pasture ground belonging thereto: but it hath a most pleasant garden replenished with grapes, peaches, and figs, and environed on all sides with most thick and shady woods, so that it is a paradise in respect of other places thereabout. The inhabitants are rude and uncivil people, neither do they ought, but keep such corn as the Arabians commit unto their custody. If a man behold the castle a far off, he would think it rather to be a cottage then a castle: for the wall being in many places ruined, maketh show of great antiquity, and the roof is covered with certain black stones or slates. Of the town of Dubdu. THis ancient town was built by the Africans upon an exceeding high and impregnable mountain, and is inhabited by certain people of the family of Zeneta. From the top of this mountain divers springs come running into the town. From this town the next plains are distant almost five miles, and yet they seem to be but a mile and an half off; for the way is very crooked and winding. All the jurisdiction longing to this town is only upon the top of the mountain, for the plain underneath is unpleasant and barren; except certain gardens on either side of a little river running by the foot of the hill: neither have the townsmen corn growing upon the same hill sufficient for their provision, unless they were supplied with great store of corn from Tezza: so that this town was built for a fortress only by the family of Marin, what time they were dispossessed of the western kingdom. Afterward it was inhabited by a certain family called Beni Guertaggen, who are lords of the said town even till this day. But when the Marin-family were expelled out of the kingdom of Fez, the next Arabians endeavoured to win the town: howbeit by the aid of one Mose Ibnu Chamu, who was one of the said family, the Arabians were so valiantly resisted, that they concluded a truce with the people of Marin: and so Mose Ibnu remained governor of the town; after whose death his son Acmed succeeded him, who treading just in his father's virtuous steps, kept the said town in great tranquility even till his dying day. After him succeeded one Mahumet, a man highly 〈◊〉 for his noble valour and great skill in martial affairs. This Mahumet had before time conquered many cities and castles upon the foot of the mount Atlas, southward whereof bordereth the land of Numidia. But having gotten this town in possession, he beautified it exceedingly with store of fair houses and buildings: likewise he greatly altered and reform the government of The great courtesy of Mahumet toward strangers. this town; and showed such extraordinary courtesy unto all strangers, that he grew very famous. Moreover the said Mahumet consulted how to get Tezza from the king of Fez, & offered great matters to the performance of his intent: and that he might the easilier attain his purpose, he determined to go to the market of Tezza in a simple habit, and so to make an assault upon the captain of the town: for he hoped that a great part of the townsmen, whom he knew to be his friends, would assist him in that enterprise. Howbeit this practice was at length discovered unto the king of Fez (which king was called Saich, and was the first of the family of Quattas, and father unto the king that * 1526. now reigneth) who presently assembled an huge army, and marched of purpose against Dubdu, utterly to destroy it: and so coming unto the foot of the mountain he there encamped. The people of the mountain having gathered an army of six thousand men, hid themselves craftily behind the rocks, suffering their enemies to ascend by certain difficult & straight passages, from whence they were sure they could hardly escape, & so at length they broke forth on the sudden & encountered their said enemies being weary of ascending; and because the way was very troublesome and narrow, the king of Fez his soldiers could not endure their assaults, but being constrained to give back, were more than a thousand of them thrown down headlong and slain. In this skirmish were slain in all to the number of three thousand Fessan soldiers: and yet the king not being dismayed with so great an overthrow, prepared forthwith a band of five hundred crossbows, and three hundred Harquebuziers, and determined to make a new assault upon the town. But Mahumet seeing that he could no longer withstand the king, resolved to go himself unto him, that he might, if it were possible, obtain peace, and to release his country from the fury of the enemy. Wherefore putting on the habit of an ambassador, he went and delivered a letter with his own hand unto the king. Which the king having perused, asked him what he thought concerning the governor of Dubdu? Mary I think (quoth Mahumet) he is not well in his wits, in that he goeth about to resist your Majesty. Then said the king, if I had conquered him (as I hope to do within these few days) I would cause him to be dismembered and torn in pieces. But what if he should come hither (saith Mahumet) to submit himself, and to acknowledge his offence; might it then please the king to admit him into favour? Then the king answered: I swear unto thee by this my head, that if he will come and acknowledge his fault in manner as thou hast said, I will not only receive him into favour, but will espouse my daughters unto his sons, and will bestow most ample and princely dowries upon them. But I am sure, being distraught of his wits (as thou hast said) that he will by no means come and submit himself. Then said Mahumet: he would soon come (I assure you) if it pleased the king to protest this for a certainty unto his nobles. I think (said the king) it hath been sufficiently protested and affirmed, sithence I have bound it with a solemn oath in the presence of these four; for here stand my chief secretary, the general of my forces, my father in law, and the chief judge and patriarch of Fez; the testimony of which four may well satisfy you. Whereupon Mahumet humbly falling at the king's feet: 〈◊〉 here the man (quoth he) that submissly acknowledgeth his fault, and craveth the king's gracious pardon. With that the king himself lifted him from the ground, embraced him, and saluted him with friendly speeches. Then caused he both his daughters to be called, which he bestowed upon Mahumets' sons: all which being done, he removed his army from that mountain, and returned conqueror unto Fez. This was done in the year of the Hegeira 904. which was in the year of our Lord 1495. And in the year of the Hegeira 921. I myself was at the city of Dubdu, where I was most courteously entertained by the foresaid Mahumet, in regard of certain letters of commendation which I brought from the king of Fez and his brother. Neither would he cease inquiring how all things passed at the king of Fez his court. Of the city of Teza or Tezza. THis great, noble, and rich city of Tezza was built by the Africans, five miles from mount Atlas, being distant from Fez fifty, from the Ocean an hundred and thirty, and from the Mediterran sea seven miles, and standing in the way from Garet to Chasasan. It contained in times passed about five thousand families: the buildings of this town are not very stately, except noblemen's palaces, colleges, and temples, which are somewhat beautiful. Out of Atlas springeth a little river which runneth through the chief temple of this city: and sometimes it falleth out, that certain people bordering upon the city, upon some quarrel with the citizens will cut off this river from the city, and turn the course thereof some other way, which breedeth great inconveniences unto the citizens: for than they can neither build houses, nor get any water to drink, but only corrupt water which they take out of certain cisterns, for which cause they are often constrained to make a league with those borderers. This city both for wealth, civility, and abundance of people is the third city of all the kingdom, and hath a greater temple then that at Fez: here are likewise three colleges, with divers bathstoves, and a great number of hospitals. Each trade and occupation hath a several place in this city, like as they have in Fez: the inhabitants are of a more valiant and liberal disposition, than they of Fez: here are also great store of learned and rich men: and the fields adjacent are exceeding fruitful. Without the city walls are very large plains, and many pleasant streams, that serve to water their gardens which are replenished with all kind of fruits: here are abundance of vines also yielding very sweet grapes, whereof the jews (being five hundredth families) make excellent wine, such as I think all Africa scarce affordeth better. In this town standeth a fair castle, where the governor hath his abode. The king of Fez assigned the government of this town unto his second son, being rather a meet place for the kings own residence, in regard of the wholefome air both in summer and winter: here were the nobles of the Marin-family wont to remain all summer, both in respect of the holesomenes of the place, and also that they might defend those regions from the Arabians dwelling in the deserts: which Arabians resorted yearly to Tezza, to the end they might there furnish themselves with victuals and other necessaries, and brought dates thither from Segelmese to exchange for come: the citizens also received of the Arabians for corn great sums of money, whereupon all of them in a manner grow exceeding rich, neither are they annoyed so much with any inconvenience, as with dirty streets in winter. I myself was acquainted in this city with a certain aged sire, whom the townsmen adored as if he had been a god: he was marvelous rich both in fruits, grounds, and other commodities, which the people bestowed upon him in great abundance. The citizens of Fez used to come fifty miles (for so far is Fez distant) only to visit the said old man. Myself conceived some great opinion of this aged sire: but after I had seen him, I could find no such superexcellency in him, save only that he deluded the fond people with strange devices. The jurisdiction of this city is very large, containing divers mountains under it, as we will forthwith declare in order. Of mount Matgara. THis mountain is very high & difficult to ascend, both by reason of the vast deserts & the narrow passages, and it is distant from Teza almost five miles: the top of this hill is most fruitful ground, and full of clear fountains: the inhabitants being burdened with no exactions, gather yearly great store of corn, flax, and oil: they have likewise abundance of cattle, and especially of goats: neither do they any whit regard princes. Having upon a day vanquished the king of Fez in battle, they carried a certain captain of Fez taken prisoner unto the top of the hill, where in the kings own presence they put him to a most cruel, and miserable death: whereupon the said inhabitants have been at continual discord with the people of Fez: they have almost a thousand soldiers, and their mountain containeth about fifty villages and hamlets. Of mount Gavata. THis mountain being as difficult to ascend as the former, standeth westward of Fez, almost fifteen miles: both the sides and top of this mountain are very fruitful for barley and flax: it is extended in length from east to west eight miles, and in breadth about five miles: many deserts here are, haunted with apes and leopards. The greater part of the inhabitants are linnen-weavers'; people they are of a frank disposition, neither can they till the fields adjoining to their mountain, by reason of their continual dissension with the king of Fez, unto whom they will pay no tribute nor custom at all, perhaps because of the strong situation of their mountain, & for that it aboundeth with all things necessary for man's sustenance: so that albeit this mountain were besieged ten years together, yet could it by no means be won; neither is it ever destitute of water, for thereupon are two huge fountains, which running down into the plain, become the heads of two rivers. Of mount Megesa. THis mountain also is somewhat difficult to ascend: it is rough and full of woods, and yieldeth little corn, but great plenty of olives. The inhabitants being most part weavers (for their soil yieldeth good store of flax) are in the wars right valiant both on foot and horseback. Their faces are white, and that perhaps for the coldness of the mountain: neither do these pay any tribute at all. Here also the exiles of Fez and Teza have safe abode, and albeit they have great store of gardens and vineyards, yet are they no wine-drinkers. Soldiers they have to the number of seven thousand, and almost forty villages. Of mount Baronis. THis mountain standeth fifteen miles northward of Teza. The inhabitants are rich and mighty, and possess great store of horses: neither do they pay any tribute at all. This hill aboundeth with plenty of corn, fruits, and grapes, and yet they make no wine at all. Their women are white and fat, and adorn themselves with much silver. In this place also they entertain exiles, but if any of them offer to have familiarity with their wives, they punish him most severely; for of all injuries they cannot endure this. Of the mountain called Beni Guertenage. THis is an exceeding high and impregnable mountain, both in regard of the ragged rocks, and of the vast deserts, being distant from Teza about thirty miles. This mountain affordeth great store of corn, flax, olives, pome-citrons, and excellent quinces. They have likewise all sorts of cattle in great abundance, except horses and oxen. The inhabitants are valiant and liberal, and as decently appareled as any citizens. The villages and hamlets of this mountain are about thirty five, and the soldiers almost three thousand. Of mount Gueblen. THis high, cold, and large mountain containeth in length about thirty, and in breadth about fifteen miles. Eastward it bordereth upon the 〈◊〉 of Dubdu, and westward upon mount Beni-Iazga, and it is distant from Teza almost fifty miles southward. At all times of the year the top of this mountain is covered with snow. The inhabitants in times past were most rich and valiant people, and lived in great liberty: but afterward when they began to play the tyrants, the people of all the mountains adjoining having gathered great forces, invaded this mountain, slew them every one, and so burned and wasted their towns and villages, that unto this day it hath remained void of inhabitants: except only a few, which detesting the cruel tyranny of their parents, conveyed themselves and all their goods unto the top of the mountain, where they lived an abstinent and virtuous life; wherefore these were spared, and their posterity remaineth in the mountain till this present: they are all learned and of honest conversation, and well esteemed of by the king of Fez: one of them in my time being a very learned and famous old man was used by the king of Fez, both about treaties of peace, and in other serious affairs: and in this man the king reposed all his confidence, as if he had been some petie-god: for which cause all the courtiers had him in great detestation. Of mount Beni jesseten. THis mountain is subject unto the governor of Dubdu, being inhabited with most base and beggarly people. Their houses are made of sea-rushes, and so likewise are their shoes made of such rushes when they travel any journey, whereby a man may conjecture the miserable estate of this people. The mountain yieldeth nought but panic, whereof they make bread and other victuals: but at the foot thereof are certain gardens replenished with grapes, dates, and peaches. Their peaches they cut into four quarters, and casting away the nuts or stones, they dry them in the sun, and keep them an whole year, which they esteem for great dainties. Upon this mountain are many iron-mines: and they frame their iron Iron-mines. in manner of horseshoes, which serveth themsometimes in stead of money, whereof they have great want in this mountain, unless the smiths by their art keep this money in store: who, besides horseshoes, make certain daggers with blunt points. Their women wear iron-rings upon their fingers and ears for a great bravery, but they are more basely appareled then the men, and remain continually in the woods, both to keep goats, and to gather fuel. They have neither civility nor learning, but live after a brutish manner without all discretion and humanity. Of mount Selelgo. THis woody mountain is full of pine-trees and fountains. Their houses are not made of stone, but of sea-rushes, so that they may easily be removed from place to place, which is very commodious to the inhabitants, for every spring they leave the mountain and descend into the valleys, from whence about the end of May they are expelled by the Arabians which inhabit the deserts: who by reason of their abundance of goats and other cattle, forsaking the said deserts, seek unto the fountains and moist places: but in winter, because their camels are so impatient of cold, they resort unto the woods, and warm regions. In this mountain are great store of lions, leopards, and apes. And from the said mountain runneth Lions, leopards, and apes. a certain stream of water with such violence, that I have seen a stone of an hundred pound weight carried with the force thereof: and here Subu taketh his beginning, which is the greatest river of all Mauritania. Of mount Beni jasga. THe inhabitants of this mountain are rich, and civil people: it standeth so near the mountain last mentioned, that they are only separated with the foresaid river: and to the end they may the easilier pass from one mountain to another, they have made a certain strange bridge in the midst, A wonderful bridge. and that in manner following: on either side stand certain posts, through the which runneth a rope upon a truckle or pulley, unto which rope is fastened a great basket, that will contain ten persons, and that in such sort, that so often as they will pass over to the opposite mountain, they enter into the basket, and drawing the rope whereon it hangeth, they are easily carried aloft in the air over the river by the help of the foresaid pulleys, but sometimes with great hazard of their lives, especially if the basket or the rope be worn in any place: yea and the distance of place is often an occasion of great terror. In this mountain there is great store of cattle, but little wood. It aboundeth likewise with most excellent fine wool, whereof their women make cloth comparable unto silk, which is sold at Fez for a great price. Here also is great plenty of oil. The king of Fez is lord of this mountain, the yearly tribute whereof amounting well nigh to eight thousand ducats, is paid to the governor of old Fez. Of mount Azgan. THis mountain bordering eastward upon Selelgo, westward upon mount Sofroi, southward upon the mountains by the river Maluia, and northward upon the territory of Fez, containeth in length forty, and in breadth about fifteen miles. It is of an exceeding height, and so intolerably cold, that only that side thereof is habitable which looketh towards Fez. It aboundeth greatly with olives and other fruits: and from thence also run great store of fountains into the plains and fields adjacent, which are most fruitful for barley, flax, and hemp. In my time there were abundance of mulberietrees planted upon this plain, which bear white berries, and bring forth silkworms. The inhabitants in winter dwell in most base cottages. Their water is most extremely cold: insomuch that I myself knew one, who with drinking only a cup thereof, suffered most intolerable gripings and tortures in his bowels for three months after. Of the town of Sofroi. THis town being situate at the foot of mount Atlas, and standing about fifteen miles southward of Fez, almost in the way to Numidia, was built by the Africans between two rivers, on either sides whereof grow great abundance of grapes and all kind of fruits. The town for five miles' compass is environed with olive-trees: but the fields are apt only for hemp and barley. The inhabitants are very rich, notwithstanding they go in mean apparel, and greasy with oil, the occasion whereof is in that they carry oil unto Fez to sell. There is no memorable thing in all their town, save only a certain temple, through the midst whereof runneth a large river; and at the doors standeth a fountain of most pure water. Howbeit the greatest part of this town is fallen to decay by the negligence of one of the king's brothers that now reigneth, & is ruined in many places. Of the town of Mezdaga. THis town being situate likewise at the foot of Atlas; and standing about eight miles westward of Sofroi, is compassed with a fair wall, and albeit the houses thereof are but mean, yet every one hath a fountain of clear water belonging unto it. Most of the inhabitants are potters, because Porcellan. they have such abundance of porcelaine earth, whereof they make great store of earthen vessels, and send them to be sold at Fez, from whence they are but twelve miles distant southward. Their fields are most fruitful for barley, flax, and hemp: and they gather yearly great abundance of figs, and of other fruits. In the forests about this town, as also about the former, are marvelous store of lions, being not very hurtful, for any man may drive them away with a little stick. Of the town of Beni Bahlul. THis 〈◊〉 town standing upon the side of Atlas towards Fez, is distant from Fez about twelve miles, not far from the high way leading to Numidia. Through the midst of this town run certain little rivers from the next mountain, neither doth it differ much in situation from Mezdaga, saving that the south frontier thereof is full of woods, whereout the inhabitants get timber and fuel, and carry it unto Fez to be sold. They are oppressed with continual exactions of courtiers and others, neither have they any civility at all among them. Of the town called Ham Lisnan. THis town built by the Africans upon a certain plain environed with mountains, in the way from Sofroi to Numidia, borrowed the name thereof from the fountain of an idol, upon the occasion following. At the same time while the Africans were as yet idolaters, they had a temple standing near unto this town, whither at certain times of the year resorted in the night great multitudes of people both men and women: where having ended their sacrifices, they used to put out their lights, and every man to commit adultery with that woman which he first touched. But the women which were present at this abominable sport, were forbidden to lie with any man for a year after: and the children begotten in the said adultery, were kept and brought up by the priest of the temple, as being dedicated to sacred uses. In the same temple there was a fountain which is to be seen at this day: but neither the temple itself, nor any monument or mention of the town is remaining, because they were utterly demolished by the mahometans. Of the town of Mahdia. THis town being situate upon a plain, between mount Atlas, and certain woods and rivers, is about ten miles distant from the former. The founder thereof was a certain Mahometan preacher of that nation, which was borne in the next mountain: and it began to be built at the same time when the family of Zeneta were lords of the Fessan kingdom. But when king joseph of the Luntune family got possession of the said kingdom, this town was so wasted and destroyed, that the beautiful temple with some part of the town wall only was left standing, and the inhabitants became tributary to the king of Fez: this was done in the year of the Hegeira 515. Of Sahblel Marga, that is, The plain of the valiant man. THis plain containeth in longth forty, and in breadth almost thirty miles, near unto it are certain mountains which border upon mount Atlas: and in these mountains are waste deserts full of goodly timber: here are likewise a great number of cottages inhabited with colliers for the most part, who carry abundance of coals from the said mountains to 〈◊〉. The lions that are here do so haunt the poor colliers, that sometimes they devour them. From hence likewise are carried to Fez store of excellent and great beams of timber. All the plain is so barren and dry, that it will scarce bring forth any good thing at all. Of the plain called Azgari Camaren. THis plain also is environed around with woody mountains, being a kind of medowe-ground, for it is covered all over with most pleasant herbs and grass: wherefore in the summer time they use to keep their cattle here, and to defend them with high and strong hedges from the fury of the lions. Of mount Centopozzi. Upon this high mountain are great store of most ancient buildings, near unto the which there is a hole or dry pit of so great a depth, that the bottom thereof can in no wise be seen. Into this pit some mad fellows will have themselves let down by ropes, carrying a candle or torch in their hands: and beneath they say it is divided into many rooms, and as it were, chambers; and last of all they come to a most large place hewn out of the rock with instruments, and compassed about as it were with a wall, in which wall are four doors which lead to other more narrow places, where they say that fountains of springing water are. And sometimes it falleth out that some miserably end their lives here: for if their lights chance to be blown out with any sudden blast of wind, they can by no means find the place where the rope hangeth, but are there constrained to die for extreme famine. It was told me by a certain nobleman of Fez, that there were ten persons, who being desirous to see the wonders of this pit, and being prepared for the same purpose, went first three of them down, who when they were come to the foresaid four doors, two of them went one way, and the third went alone another way. And being thus divided, after they had proceeded almost a quarter of a mile, there came great swarms, of bats flying about their lights, insomuch that one light was put out; at length being come to the springing fountains, they found there certain white bones of men, and five or six candles, whereof some were new, and others were old and worn with long lying there: but having found nothing but water in the said fountains, they returned back again the same way that they came: and they had scarce gone half way, but their other light also was blown out with a sudden blast. Afterward seeking earnestly up and down, and being weary of many falls that they caught among the rocks, they found that there was no hope of return: wherefore in this desperate case committing themselves with tears into the hands of God, they vowed, if they 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 this danger, never to adventure any more. They that stood at the 〈◊〉 mouth being ignorant of their companions mishap expected their 〈◊〉, and having staid over long, at length they let down themselves by the rope, and began with lights to seek their fellows, making a great noise, and at length found them heavy and sad. But the third who was wandering up and down those dark places, they could by no means find, wherefore leaving him, they returned forth of the cave. And he that was left behind heard at length a noise like the barking of little dogs, and shaping his course toward them, he found immediately four strange, and (as it should seem) new-born beasts, after which followed the * The beast called Dabah. dam being not much unlike to a shee-woolfe, saving that she was bigger: wherefore he began exceedingly to fear; howbeit there was no danger, for being about to flee, the beast came towards him, fawning gently upon him with her tail. And so at length, after long seeking, he found the holes mouth with great joy, and escaped the danger. For within a while he said that he began to see some glimmering of light, as they do which have long been in the dark. But after a certain time this cave was filled with water up to the top. Of the mountain of ravens, called Cunaigel Gherben. THis mountain standeth very near the former, and is full of woods and lions. Here is no city, nor any other place of habitation, perhaps by reason of the extreme coldness of the place. From this mountain runneth a certain little river: and here is a rock of an exceeding height, whereupon keep infinite swarms of crows and ravens, which some think to have been the occasion of the name of this mountain. Sometime the terrible northerly winds bring such abundance of snow upon this mountain, that such as travel from Numidia towards Fez lose their lives thereby, as hath been signified in the first book. Every summer the Arabians next inhabiting, being called Beni Essen, usually resort unto this mountain, in regard of the cool water and pleasant shadows, notwithstanding they know it to be haunted with great store of lions and leopards. Of the town of Tezerghe. THis little town was by the Africans built in manner of a fort upon the side of a small river which runneth by the foot of the foresaid mountain: both the inhabitants and their houses are most base and destitute of all civility. Their fields being environed with the mountains adjoining, bring forth some small quantity of barley and peaches. The inhabitants are all subject unto certain Arabians called Devil Chusein. Of the town called Vmen Giunaibe. THis ancient town being destroyed by the Arabians was situate about twelve miles from Tezerghe upon the south side of Atlas. It is so dangerous a place by reason of the often invasions of certain Arabians, that none almost dare travel that way. There lieth a way near this town, which a man may not pass without dancing and leaping, unless he will fall into an ague: the certainty where of I have heard many avouch. Of mount Beni Merasen. THe inhabitants of this exceeding high and cold mountain have great plenty of horses and asses: here are store of mules likewise, which carry wares up and down without either bridle or saddle. Their houses are built not with walls of stone, but of rushes. The people are very rich, and pay no tribute to the king, perhaps in regard of the strong situation of their mountain. Of mount Mesettaza. THis mountain extendeth in length from east to west almost thirty miles, and twelve miles in breadth. The west part thereof adjoineth upon the plain of Edecsen, which bordereth upon Temesna. It is like unto the foresaid mountain, both in regard of the inhabitants, and also for plenty of horses and mules. At Fez there are great store of learned men which were borne in this mountain: they pay no tribute at all, but only send the king such gifts as themselves please. Of the mountains of Ziz. THese mountains are thought to have borrowed their name from a certain river springing out of them. Eastward they begin at Mesettaza, and extend westward to the mountains of Tedla and Dedis, southward they border upon that part of Numidia which is called Segelmesse, and northward upon the plains of 〈◊〉 and Guregra: in length they contain an hundred, and in breadth almost forty miles: in number they are fifteen, being extremely cold and difficult to ascend, and sending forth many streams of water. The inhabitants are called Sanaga, and are men most patient of all boisterous and cold weather. They wear but one coat at all seasons of the year, over which they cast a kind of cloak or mantle: their legs and 〈◊〉 they wrap in certain clothes as it were in swathing bands, and they go at all times bareheaded. In this mountain are great store of mules, asses, and other cattle, but very few deserts. The inhabitants are a most lewd and villainous generation, being wholly addicted to theft and robbery. They are at continual dissension with the Arabians, and practise daily mischiefs and inconveniences against them, and to the end they may provoke them to greater fury, they will sometimes throw their camels down headlong from the top of some high mountain. In these mountains there happeneth a certain strange and incredible matter, for there are serpents so familiar with men, that at dinnertime they will come like dogs & 〈◊〉 and tame serpents. cats, and gather up the crumbs under the table, neither will they hurt any body, unless they be offered some injury. The walls of their houses are made of chalk, and the roofs are covered with thatch. There are also another kind of inhabitants in these mountains, who possess more droves of cattle than the former, and dwell for the most part in cottages made of rushes. And these carry unto Segelmese butter and wool to be sold, but at that time only when the Arabians inhabit the deserts, for it often falleth out that they are encountered by them, & spoiled of their goods. These people are most valiant warriors, for they will fight even to the last gasp, rather than be taken of their enemies: they carry four or five javelins about with them, wherewith they know right well how to defend themselves from the enemy. They fight always on foot, neither can they be vanquished but with a great number of horsemen, and they use to carry swords and daggers with them also. In my time they obtained safe conduct of the Arabians, and the Arabians of them likewise, which was a cause, that the merchants of both parts traveled more securely. Of the town of Gerseluin. THis ancient town was built by the Africans at the foot of one of the foresaid mountains, not far from the river of Ziz. It is environed with an impregnable and stately wall, the founder whereof was a certain king of the marin-family. In regard of the walls and bulwarks it is a most beautiful town. But being once entered thereinto, you shall see most base and beggarly houses, and scarce any inhabitants dwelling in them, and that by the injury of certain Arabians, who when they revolted from the marin-family, took this town and grievously oppressed the citizens. Their dry and barren fields lie open to the north. Upon the river are divers mills, and by the side thereof are many gardens replenished with grapes and peaches, which they use to dry in the sun, and to keep an whole year. They have great scarcity of cattle, which causeth them to live a most 〈◊〉 life. This town was built by the family of Zeneta in stead of a fort, to the end it might be a place of refuge only in their journey to Numidia, but afterward it was surprised and utterly destroyed by the family of Luntuna. Here also are great store of such domestical serpents, as we reported to be in the mountains of Ziz. Here endeth the third book. JOHN LEO HIS FOURTH BOOK OF the History of Africa, and of the memorable things contained therein. A description of the kingdom of * Or Tremizen. Telensin. THis kingdom beginneth westward from the rivers of Zha & Muluia, eastward it bordereth upon The great river, southward upon the desert of Numidia, and northward upon the Mediterran sea. This region was called by the Romans Caesaria, and was by them inhabited: howbeit after the Romans were expelled, it was fully possessed by the ancient governors thereof called Beni Habdulguad, and being a generation of the family of Magrava. And it remained unto them and their successors three hundred years, until such time as a certain mighty man called Ghamrazen the son of Zeijen took possession thereof. His posterity changing at length their ancient name were called Beni Zeijen, that is, the sons of Zeijen: and they enjoyed this kingdom for the space almost of 380. years. At length the kings of Fez of the marin-family greatly molested them, so that those ten kings which succeeded Zeijen were some of them unfortunate in battle, some slain, some taken captive, and others expelled their kingdom, and chased to the next mountains. Neither were they free from vexation of the kings of Tunis: howbeit the kingdom of Telensin remained still to this family, and they continued in peace for almost an hundred and twenty years, being endamaged by no foreign power; saving that one Abu Feris king of Tunis, and his son Hutmen made them to pay tribute for certain years unto Tunis, till the decease of the said Hutmen. This kingdom stretcheth in length from east to west 380. miles, but in breadth from north to south, that is, from the Mediterran sea to the deserts of Numidia not above five and twenty miles: which is the occasion that it is so often oppressed by the Arabians inhabiting the Numidian deserts. The kings of Telensin have always endeavoured by great gifts to gain the good will and friendship of the Numidians, but they could never satisfy their insatiable covetise. A man shall seldom travel safely through this kingdom: howbeit here are great store of merchants, perhaps either because it adjoineth to Numidia, or else for that the way to the land of negroes lieth through it. It hath two most famous & frequented haven-townes, the one called * Or Oran. Horam, and the other * Or Mersalcabir. Marsa Elcabir, whither use to resort great store of Genoveses, and Venetians. But afterward both these towns were taken by Don Ferdinando the Catholic king, to the great inconvenience of all this kingdom: for which cause the king then reigning called Abuchemmeu, was expelled his kingdom and put to flight by his own subjects: afterward Abuzeijen was restored to the kingdom, who had for certain years been imprisoned by his nephew Abuchemmeu: howbeit he enjoyed the kingdom but a very short space. For he was at length miserably slain by Barbarossa the Turk, who conquered the kingdom of Tremizen 〈◊〉 king of Tremizen restored to his kingdom by the emperor Charles the fifth. by force of war. Whereof Abuchemmeu, that was expelled by his own subjects, having intelligence, sent to crave aid of the emperor Charles the fifth, whereby he hoped to recover his kingdom. Which request being granted, he levied a puissant army, and made war against Barbarossa, and having driven him out, he recovered his kingdom, and severely punished them that had conspired his banishment. And then he gave the Spanish soldiers their pay, sent the captains home with great rewards, and allowed Charles the emperor a large yearly revenue so long as he lived. After his decease succeeded his brother Habdulla, who neglecting the league made before between the emperor and his brother, and relying upon Soliman the great Turk, refused to pay any more tribute unto the emperor Charles, and hath kept possession of the kingdom, till * 1526 this present. The greater part of this region is untilled, dry, and barren, especially towards the south. Howbeit the sea coast is somewhat more fertile. The territory adjacent to the city of Telensin is full of woods, saving that the western part towards the sea is mountainous. Likewise the regions of Tenez and Alger contain mountains abounding with all kind of commodities. In this part ate but few cities and castles, howbeit it is a most fruitful and blessed place, as we will hereafter declare in particular. Of the desert of Angad. THis barren, dry, and untilled desert being utterly destitute of water and wood, is situate upon the western frontier of the kingdom of Telensin; and extendeth in length fourscore, and in breadth almost fifty Great store of ostriches. miles. Here are great store of roes, dear, and ostriches. Such merchants as travel from Fez to Telensin pass over this desert not without great danger, by reason of certain Arabians which live only upon theft and robbery, especially in winter, when as the soldiers appointed to defend the said desert from those lewd vagabonds, do usually retire themselves into Numidia. Many shepherds there are in this desert, who are daily vexed with multitudes of fierce lions, which sometime seize not only upon cartel, but also upon men. Of the castle of Temzegzet. THis castle standing in the same place, where the foresaid desert adjoineth unto the territory of Telensin, and built by the Africans upon a rock, was in times passed very strong, and often annoyed by the people ofFez; for it standeth in the high way from Fez to Telensin. Through the fields adjacent runneth a certain river called in their language Tefme. The said fields adjacent sufficiently abound with all things necessary for the sustenance of the inhabitants. Heretofore being subject unto the kings of Telensin it well deserved the name of a city, but since the Arabians got possession thereof, it hath proved more like to a stable: for here they keep their corn only, and the natural inhabitants are quite expelled by reason of their bad demeanour. Of the castle of Izli. THis ancient castle of Izli built by the Africans upon a certain plain bordering upon the foresaid desert, hath some fields adjoining unto it, apt only for barley and punic. It was in times passed well stored with inhabitants, and environed with stately walls: but afterward by the injury of war it was razed to the ground, and the inhabitants expelled. Howbeit a few years after it began to be inhabited anew by certain religious persons had in great reverence both by the kings of Telensin and by all the Arabians. These religious persons with great courtesy and liberality give entertainment for three days unto all strangers that pass by, and then dismiss them without paying of aught. All their houses are very base and low built, their walls being of clay, and the roofs of straw. Not far from this castle runneth a river; out of which they water all their fields: for this region is so hot and dry, that unless the fields were continually watered, they would yield no fruit at all. Of the town of Guagida. THis ancient town built by the Africans upon a large plain, standeth southward of the Mediterran sea forty miles, and about the same distance from the city of Telensin. The south-west part of the said plain bordereth upon the desert of Angad, and it containeth most fruitful fields and pleasant gardens, exceedingly replenished with figs and grapes. Through the midst of this town runneth a certain river, which affordeth good water to drink and to seethe meat withal. In times past the towne-walles and all the buildings were most sumptuous and stately, and the inhabitants exceeding rich, civil, and valiant: but afterward by reason of certain wars waged by the king of Fez against the king of Telensin, this town was left desolate, and the inhabitants all put to flight: but the said wars being ended, new inhabitants re-edified it and dwelled therein: howbeit they could not reduce it to the former state, neither doth it now contain above fifteen hundred families. The townsmen lead now a miserable life, being constrained to pay tribute both to the king of Telensin and also to the Arabians of Angad, and wearing most base apparel: asses and mules they have great store, whereof they make round sums of money. They speak after the ancient manner of the Arabians, neither is their language so corrupt as the language of the people round about them. Of the city called Ned Roma. THis ancient town built by the Romans, while they were lords of Africa, standeth upon a large plain, almost two miles from a certain mountain, and about twelve miles from the Mediterran sea, and near unto it runneth a little river. The historiographers of those times report, that this town was in all respects built after the fashion of Rome, whereupon they say it borrowed the name. For Ned in the Arabian tongue signifieth like. The wall of this town is as yet to be seen: but all the ancient buildings of the Romans are so destroyed, that now there scarcely remain any ruins thereof. It began in some places to be repaired and re-edified anew, but nothing comparable to the former buildings. The fields adjacent are exceeding fruitful, and contain many gardens replenished with such trees as bear Carobs (being a fruit like unto Cassia fistula) which in the suburbs they use for food. This town is indifferently well inhabited, especially with weavers, who make great store of cotton-cloth, and are free from all tribute. The governors of the town are chosen only at their assignment: and that they may have more free traffic with the people of Telensin, they send many gifts unto the king. Of the town of Tebecrit. THis little town built by the Africans upon a certain rock near unto the Mediterran sea, is almost twelve miles distant from the former. All the next mountains are exceeding high and barren, and yet well stored with inhabitants. In this town dwell great store of weavers; and here they have abundance of Carobs and honey. Being in continual fear of the Christians, they keep every night most diligent watch and ward: for they are not of sufficient ability to maintain a garrison of soldiers. Their fields are no less barren than untilled; and yield only very small quantity of barley and panic. The townsmen are most basely appareled, and utterly destitute of humanity. Of the town of Hunain. THis town being founded by the Africans, and being famous both for stately building and civil inhabitants, hath a little haven belonging thereunto well fortified with two turrets standing one on the one side, and another on the other side. The town-wall also is very high and beautiful, especially on that side which standeth next unto the sea. Hither do the Venetians yearly bring great store of merchandise, and do traffic with the merchants of Telensin; for the city of Telensin is but fourteen miles from hence. Since the time that Oran was surprised by the Christians, the Venetians would no longer frequent Oran, searing lest the Spaniards having it in possession should work them some mischief: wherefore then they began to repair unto this port. The townsmen in times past were most civil people, the greatest part being weavers of cotton and of linen. Their houses are most stately built, and have every one fountains belonging unto them: likewise here are many vines running pleasantly upon bowers or arbours. Their houses are paved with mats of divers colours, and their chambers and vaults are curiously painted and carved. Howbeit, so soon as the inhabitants were advertised of the loss of Oran, they fled from Hunain and left it void of inhabitants: saving that the king of Telensin maintaineth here a garrison of footmen, who give notice when any merchants ships approach. Their fields abound with cherries, peaches, figs, olives, and other fruits: howbeit they reap but little commodity thereby. I myself passing this way could not but bewail the extreme calamity whereinto the inhabitants of this town were fallen: at the same time there arrived a certain ship of A ship of great 〈◊〉. Genoa, which one ship brought commodities sufficient to serve Telensin for five years: the tenth part whereof amounting to fifteen thousand ducats, was paid for tribute to the king. Of the town of Haresgol. THe great and ancient town of Haresgol was built upon a rock environed on all sides with the Mediterran sea, saving on the south, where lieth a way from the firm land to the town. It standeth northward of Telensin fourteen miles; and was in times passed well stored with inhabitants. The governor thereof was one Idris, uncle unto that Idris that was the founder of Fez; the posterity of whom enjoyed the same government for the space of an hundred years. At length there came a certain king and patriarch of Cairaoan who utterly destroyed this town, so that it remained void of inhabitants almost an hundred years: after which time it was reinhabited by certain people of Granada, which came thither with Mansor; which Mansor repaired the town, to the end it might always be a place of refuge for his soldiers. After whose decease, and the death of his son Mudaffir, all the soldiers were expelled by the tribes or people of Zanhagia and Magraoa: and this second desolation of that town happened in the year of the Hegeira 410. Of the great city of Telensin, other wise called Tremizen. TElensin is a great city and the royal seat of the king; but who were the first founders thereof it is uncertain: howbeit most certain it is, that this city was very small at the beginning, and began greatly to be augmented at the same time when Haresgol was laid waste. For then, a certain family called Abdulguad bearing rule, it increased so exceedingly, that in the reign of king Abu Tesfin it contained sixteen thousand families. And then it was an honourable and well-governed city: howbeit joseph king of Fez continually molested it, and with an huge army besieged it for seven years together. This joseph having built a fort upon the east side of the town, put the besieged citizens to such distress, that they could no longer endure the extreme famine: wherefore with one accord they all went unto their king, beseeching him to have compassion upon their want. The king, to make them acquainted with his dainty fare, which he had to supper, showed them a dish of sodden horseflesh and barley. And then they well perceived how little the king's estate was better than the estate of the meanest citizen of them all. Soon after the king having procured an assembly, persuaded his people that it was much more honourable to die in battle for the defence of their country, then to live so miserable a life. Which words of the king so inflamed all their minds to the battle, that the day following they resolved to encounter the enemy, and valiantly to fight it out. But it fell out far better for them then they expected; for the same night king joseph was slain by one of his own people: which news being brought unto the citizens, with 〈◊〉 courage they marched all out of the town, easily vanquishing and killing the confused multitude of their enemies; after which unexpected victory they found victuals sufficient in the enemy's camp to relieve their long and tedious famine. About forty years after, the fourth king of Fez of the marin-family called Abulhesen, built a town within two miles westward of the city of Telensin. Then he besieged Telensin for thirty months together, making daily and fierce assaults against it, and every night erecting some new fort, so that at length the Fessan forces next unto Telensin easily entered the city, and having conquered it, carried home the king thereof The king of Telensin taken prisoner and beheaded. captive unto Fez, where he was by the king of Fez beheaded, and his carcase was cast forth among the filth of the city: and this was the second and the greater damage that Telensin sustained. After the decay of the marin-family 〈◊〉 began in many places to be repaired, and replenished with new inhabitants, insomuch that it increased to twelve thousand families. Here each trade and occupation hath a peculiar place, after the manner of Fez, saving that the buildings of Fez are somewhat more stately. Here are also many and beautiful temples, having their Mahometan priests and preachers. Likewise here are five colleges most sumptuously built, some by the king of Telensin, and some by the king of Fez. Here also are store of goodly baths and hothouses, albeit they have not such plenty of water as is at Fez. Also here are very many inns built after the manner of Africa: unto two of which inns the merchants of Genoa and Venice do usually resort. A great part of this city is inhabited with jews, who were in times past all of them exceeding rich: upon their heads they wear a * Or Turban. Dulipan to distinguish them from other citizens: but in the year of the Hegeira 923, upon the death of king Abuhabdilla, they were all so robbed and spoiled, that they are now brought almost unto beggary. Moreover in this city there are many conducts, the fountains whereof are not far from the citie-walles, so that they may easily be stopped by any foreign enemy. The citie-wall is very high and impregnable, having five great gates upon it, at every one of which there is placed a guard of soldiers, and certain receivers of the king's custom. On the south side of the city standeth the king's palace, environed with most high walls, and containing many other palaces within it, which are none of them destitute of their fountains and pleasant gardens: this royal palace hath two gates, one leading into the fields, and the other into the city, and at this gate standeth the captain of the guard. The territory of Telensin containeth most pleasant habitations, whither the citizens in summertime use to retire themselves: for besides the beautiful pastures and clear fountains, there is such abundance of all kind of fruits to delight both the eyes and the taste, that to my remembrance I never saw a more pleasant place: their figs they use to dry in the sun and to keep until winter: and as for almonds, peaches, melons, and pome-citrons, they grow here in great plenty. Three miles eastward of this city are divers mills upon the river of Sefsif; and some other there are also not far from the city upon the mountain of Elcalha. The south part of the city is inhabited by jews, lawyers, and notaries: here are also very many students, and professors of divers arts, which have maintenance allowed them out of the five forenamed colleges. The citizens are of four sorts, to wit, some artificers, some merchants, others scholars and doctors, and all the residue soldiers. The merchants are men most just, trusty, liberal, and most zealous of the common good; who for the most part exercise traffic with the Negroes. The artificers live a secure, quiet, and merry life. The king's soldiers being all of a comely parsonage and of great valour, receive very large and liberal pay, for they are monthly allowed three pieces of the gold-coine of Telensin, which are worth three Italian ducats and one second part. All students before they attain to the degree of a doctor live a bare and miserable life, but having attained thereunto, they are made either professors or notaries, or priests. The citizens and merchants of this city are so neat and curious in their apparel, that sometimes they excel the citizens of Fez in bravery. The artificers wear short garments carrying seldom a Dulipan upon their heads, and contenting themselves with plain caps: their shoes reach up to their leg. Of all others the soldiers go worst appareled, for wearing a shirt or jacket with wide sleeves, they cast over it a large mantle made of cotton, and thus they are clad both summer and winter: saving that in winter they have certain jackets of leather with hoods upon them, such as travelers use in Italy, and by this means their heads are defended from rain and from snow. The scholars and students are diversly appareled, according to their ability, and according to the fashion of their native country: the doctors, judges, and priests go in more sumptuous and costly attire. The customs and rites observed in the King of Telensin his court. A Wonder it is to see how stately and magnificently the King of Telensin behaveth himself, for no man may see him nor be admitted to parley with him, but only the principal nobles of his court, each one of whom are assigned to bear offices according to their place and dignity. In this court are sundry offices and dignities, and the King's lieutenant being principal officer, alotteth unto each one such places of dignity, as may be correspondent to their honour: and this lieutenant levieth the king's armies, and sometime conducteth them against the enemy. The second officer is the King's chief Secretary, who writeth and recordeth all things pertaining to the King. The third is the high treasurer, who is bound by 〈◊〉 office to receive tributes and customs. The fourth is the kings dispensator or almoner, who bestoweth such liberality as the king vouchsafeth. The fifth is the captain of the king's guard, who so often as any nobles are admitted to the king's presence, conducteth the guard unto the palace-gate. Then are there other meaner officers, as namely, the master of the king's stable, the overseer of his saddles & stirrups, and his chief chamberlain, who giveth attendance only at such times as any courtiers are admitted unto the king's audience. For at other times the king's wives, with certain Christian captives, and eunuchs do perform that duty. The king sometimes in sumptuous and costly apparellrideth upon a stately stead richly trapped and furnished. In riding he observeth not much pomp nor many ceremonies; neither indeed doth he carry so great a train; for you shall scarcely see a thousand horsemen in his company, except perhaps in time of war, when as the Arabians and other people give attendance. When the king goeth forth with an army, there are not many carriages transported therein, neither can you then discern the king by his apparel from any mean captain: and though he conducteth never so great a guard of soldiers, yet a man would not think how sparing he is of his coin. Gold-money he coineth of base gold, then that whereof the Italian money called Bislacchi is coined, but it is of a greater size, for one piece thereof weigheth an Italian A passage from Europe to Acthiopia through the kingdom of Tremizen. ducat and one fourth part. He stampeth likewise coin of silver & of brass. His dominions are but slenderly inhabited: howbeit because the way from Europe to Aethiopia lieth through his kingdom, he reapeth much benefit by the wares that pass by, especially since the time that Oran was surprised by the Christians. At the same time Telensin itself was made tributary, which was ever before a free city: whereupon the king that was the author thereof, was extremely hated of his subjects till his dying day. Afterward his son that succeeded him, demanded customs and tributes likewise: for which cause being expelled out of his kingdom by the people, he was enforced to crave aid of the emperor Charles the fifth, by whose means (as is beforesaid) he was restored unto his said kingdom. When Oran was subject unto the king of Telensin, the region thereabout paid unto the king for yearly tribute sometime three thousand, and sometime four thousand ducats, the greatest part whereof was allowed unto the king's guard, and to the Arabian soldiers. I myself continuing certain months in this king's court, had good experience of his liberality. I have indeed omitted many particulars in the description of this court of Telensin: but because they agreed for the most part with those things which we reported of Fez, I have here passed them over, lest I should seem too tedious unto the reader. Of the town of Hubbed. THis town being built in manner of a castle standeth about a mile and an half southward of Telensin. It containeth store of inhabitants, who are for the most part dyers of cloth. In this town was buried one Sadi Bu Median being reputed a man of singular holiness, whom they adore like a god, ascending up to his monument by certain steps. Here is likewise a stately college, and a fair hospital to entertain strangers in; both which were built by a king of Fez of the marin-family, as I find recorded upon a certain marble stone. Of the town of Tefesra. TThis town standing upon a plain fifteen miles from Telensin hath great store of smiths therein, by reason of the iron-mines which are Mines of 〈◊〉. there. The fields adjacent are exceeding fruitful for corn: and the inhabitants being for the most part blackesmithes are destitute of all civility. Of the town of Tessela. THis ancient town was built by the Africans upon a certain plain, extending almost twenty miles in length. Here groweth such abundance of excellent corn, as is almost sufficient for the whole kingdom of Telensin. The inhabitants live in tents, for all the buildings of this town are destroyed, though the name remaineth still. These also in times past paid a great yearly tribute unto the king of Telensin. Of the province called Beni Rasid. THis region extendeth in length from east to west fifty, and in breadth almost five and twenty miles. The southern part thereof is plain ground, but toward the north it is full of fruitful mountains. The inhabitants are of two sorts: for some of them dwell upon the mountains in houses of indifferent good building: and these employ themselves in husbandry and other necessary affairs. Others being of a more noble condition live only upon the plains in tents, and there keep their camels, horses, and other cattle. They are molested with daily inconveniences, and pay yearly tribute unto the king of Telensin. Upon the foresaid mountains are sundry villages, among which there are two principal, whereof the one called Chalath Haoara, and built in manner of a castle upon the side of a certain hill, containeth to the number of forty merchants and artificers houses: the other called Elmo Hascar is the seat of the king's lieutenant over those regions; and in this village every thursday there is a great market, where abundance of cattle, corn, raisins, figs, and honey is to be sold: here are likewise cloth-merchants and divers other chapmen, which for brevities sake I pass over in silence. I myself continuing for some time among them, found to my hindrance what cunning thieves they were. The king of Telensin collecteth yearly out of this province the sum of five and twenty thousand ducats; and it containeth so many most expert soldiers. Of the town of Batha. THis great, rich, and populous town was built in my time upon a most beautiful and large plain, which yieldeth great abundance of corn. The tribute which the king of Telensin hath here, amounteth to the sum of twenty thousand ducats. Howbeit this town was afterward destroyed in that war which happened between the king and certain of his kinsmen. For they growing mighty by the king of Fez his aid, won many towns in the kingdom of Telensin: and whatsoever town they thought themselves not able to keep by force of arms, they burned it quite down: and thus they served Batha, whereof now there remain but very few ruins. Not far from this town runneth a little river, on both sides whereof there are many gardens and fields replenished with all kind of fruits. Moreover the foresaid plain was utterly destitute of inhabitants, till a certain eremite A 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. with his followers; whom they reverenced as a man of singular holiness, repaired thither. This eremite in short time grew so rich in oxen, horses, and other cattle, that no man almost throughout the whole region was comparable unto him. Neither he nor his followers pay any tribute at all, when as notwithstanding (as I heard of his disciples) he reapeth yearly eight thousand bushels of corn, and at this time possesseth five hundred horses, ten thousand small cattle, and two thousand oxen; and besides all the former hath yearly sent unto him from divers parts of the world four or five thousand ducats: so greatly hath the fame of his false holiness spread over all Africa and Asia. Disciples he hath to the number of five hundred, whom he maintaineth at his own cost: neither emploieth he them to aught else, but daily to read a few prayers: for which cause many resort unto him, desiring to be of the number of his disciples, whom after he hath instructed in certain ceremonies, he sendeth them thither from whence they first came. He hath about an hundred tents pitched, whereof some are for strangers, others for shepherds, and the residue for his own family. This holy eremite hath four wives, and a great many women-slaves wearing most sumptuous apparel. His sons likewise have their wives and families: insomuch that the whole family of this eremite and of his sons containeth five hundred persons. He is greatly honoured by all the Arabians, and by the king of Telensin himself. Myself was once desirous to try what manner of man this eremite was: and for three days I was entertained by him in the most secret places of his habitation, where amongst other things he showed me certain books entreating of art-Magique and of 〈◊〉: and he endeavoured by all means to persuade me, that Magic was a most true and undoubted art, whereby I perceived that himself was a magician, albeit he never used nor regarded the art, except it were in invocating of God by certain names. Of the town of Oran. THis great and populous town containing about six thousand families, and built many years ago by the Africans upon the Mediterran sea shore, is distant from Telensin an hundredth and forty miles. here may you see great store of stately buildings, as namely of temples, colleges, hospitals, bathstoves, and inns. The town is compassed with most high and impregnable walls, having on the one side a fair plain, and on the other side divers mountains. The greatest part of the inhabitants were weavers, and the residue lived of their yearly revenues. The territory of this town yieldeth but small store of corn, so that the townsmen make all their bread of barley: howbeit they are most courteous and friendly to all strangers. This town was greatly frequented with merchants of Catalonia, and of Genoa: and one street thereof is at this present called the street of the Genoveses. They were at perpetual enmity with the king of Telensin, neither would they ever accept of any governor, but one which received the king's tribute. But the townsmen chose one of their chief Burgo-masters to judge of cases civil and criminal. The merchants of this town maintained at their own costs certain foists and brigandines of war, which committed many piracies upon the coast of Catalonia, Gevisa, Maiorica, and Minorica, insomuch that Oran was full of Christian captives. Afterward Don Ferdinando king of Spain encountering Oran with a great Armada, determined to release the said Christians out of captivity: but he had very hard success. Howbeit within a few months after being Oran taken by the Spaniards. aided by the Biscayne's and the Cardinal of Spain, he took Oran. For the Moors issuing forth with great fury upon the Christians army, left the town utterly destitute of soldiers, which the Spaniards perceiving, began to assail the town on the other side; where being resisted by none but by women, they had easy entrance. Whereupon the Moors seeing the christians banners advanced upon their walls, they returned back into the town, and were there put to so great a slaughter, that few of them escaped. Thus was Oran taken by the Spaniards in the year of Mahomet his Hegeira 916. Of the town Mersalcabir. THis town was built in my time by the king of Telensin upon the Mediterran sea, not far from Oran. And Mersalcabir in the Moors language signifieth a great or large haven: for I think there is not the like haven to be found in the whole world beside: so that here infinite numbers of ships and galleys may find most safe harbour in any tempestuous Mersalcabir surprised by the Spaniards. weather. Hither the Venetians ships made often resort, when they perceived any tempest to approach: and from hence they would cause all their wares to be transported to Oran in other vessels. This town also was at length taken by the Spaniards as well as Oran. Of the town of Mezzagran. THis town also was built by the Africans upon the Mediterran sea, near unto the place where the river Selef disemboqueth. It is well peopled and much molested by the Arabians. The governor thereof hath little authority within the town, and less without. Of the town of Mustuganin. MVstuganin being founded by the Africans upon the Mediterran sea, standeth almost three miles from Mezzagran, on the other side of the river Selef. It was in times passed very populous; but since the kingdom of Telensin began to decay, this town hath been so vexed by the Arabians, that at this present the third part thereof scarce remaineth. Families it containeth to the number of fifteen hundred; and it hath a most beautiful and stately temple. In this town are great store of weavers: and the houses are most sumptuously built, having clear fountains belonging unto them. Through the midst of the town runneth a river, on each side whereof stand divers mills. Not far from the town there are most pleasant gardens; but they lie now untilled and desolate. Their fields are exceeding fruitful. There belongeth au haven unto this town, whereunto many merchants of Europe use to resort, albeit they find not much traffic here, because the 〈◊〉 are so destitute of money. Of the town of Bresch. THis ancient town built by the Romans upon the Mediterran sea, standeth many miles distant from Mustuganin. It containeth great store of inhabitants, which are many of them weavers. The people of this town use to paint a black cross upon their cheek, and two other black crosses upon the palms of their hands: and the like custom is observed by all the inhabitants of the mountains of Alger, and Bugia: the occasion whereof is thought to be this, namely that the Goths when they first began to invade these regions, released all those from paying of tribute (as our African historiographers affirm) that would embrace the Christian religion. But so often as any tribute was demanded, every man to eschew the payment thereof, would not stick to profess himself a Christian: wherefore it was then determined, that such as were Christians indeed should be distinguished from others by the foresaid crosses. At length the Goths being expelled, they all revolted unto the Mahometan religion; howbeit this custom of painting crosses remained still amongthem, neither do they know the reason thereof. Likewise the meaner sort of people in Mauritania use to make such crosses upon their faces, as we see used by some people of Europe. This town aboundeth greatly with figs, and the fields thereof are exceeding fruitful for flax and barley. The townsmen have continued in firm league and friendship with the people of the mountains adjoining; by whose favour they lived an hundred years together without paying of any tribute at all: but Barbarossa the Turk having won the kingdom of Telensin put them to great distress. From hence they use to transport by sea great store of figs and flax unto Alger, Tunis, and Bugia, whereby they gain great store of money. Here also you may as yet behold divers monuments of the Romans ancient buildings. Of the town of Sersell. THis great and ancient town built by the Romans upon the Mediterran sea, was afterward taken by the Goths and last by the mahometans. The wall of this town is exceeding high, strong, and stately built, and containeth about eight miles in circuit. In that part of the town next unto the Mediterran sea standeth a most beautiful and magnificent temple built by the Romans, the inward part whereof consisteth of marble. They had also in times past an impregnable for't standing upon a rock by the Mediterran sea. Their fields are most fruitful: and albe it this town was much oppressed by the Goths, yet the mahometans enjoyed a great part thereof for the space almost of five hundred years. And then after the war of Telensin it remained void of inhabitants almost three hundred years. At length when Granada was won by the Christians, divers Moors of Granada fled hither, which repaired the houses and a good part of the castle: afterward they began to build ships, wherewith they transported their merchantable commodities into other regions: and they increased so by little and little, that now they are grown to twelve hundred families. They were subject not long since unto Barbarossa the Turk, unto whom they paid but three hundred ducats for yearly tribute. Of the city of Meliana. THis great and ancient city, commonly called now by the corrupt name of Magnana, and built by the Romans upon the top of a certain hill, is distant from the Mediterran sea almost forty miles. Upon this mountain are many springs, and woods abounding with walnuts. The city itself is environed with most ancient and high walls. One side thereof is fortified with impregnable rocks, and the other side dependeth so upon the mountain as Narma doth, which is a city near Rome: it containeth very stately houses, every one of which houses hath a fountain. The inhabitants are almost all weavers: and there are divers turners also which make fine cups, dishes, and such like vessels. Many of them likewise are husbandmen. They continued many years free from all tribute and exaction, till they were at length made tributary by Barbarossa. Of the town of Tenez. THis ancient town built by the Africans upon the side of an hill not far from the Mediterran sea, is environed with fair walls, and inhabited with many people. The inhabitants are exceeding rustical and uncivil; and have always been subject to the king of Telensin. King Mahumet that was grandfather unto the king which now reigneth, left three sons behind him; the eldest being called Abuabdilla, the second Abuzeven, and the third jahia. Abuabdilla succeeded his father, whom his brethren being aided by the citizens went about to murder. But afterward, the treason being discovered, Abuzeven was apprehended and put in prison. Howbeit, king * Perhaps 〈◊〉. Abuchemmeu being after that expelled out of his kingdom by the people, Abuzeven was not only restored to his former liberty, but was also chosen king, and enjoyed the kingdom so long, till (as is beforementioned) he was slain by Barbarossa. jahia fled unto the king of Fez, who being at length proclaimed king by the people of Tenez, reigned for certain years. And his young son that he left behind him being vanquished by Barbarossa, fled unto Charles who was then only king of Spain. But when as the aid promised by Charles the Emperor stayed long, and the Prince of Tenez was too long absent, a rumour was spread abroad, that he and his brother were turned Christians: whereupon the government of Tenez fell immedially to the brother of Barbarossa. Their fields indeed yield abundance of corn; but of other commodities they have great want. Of the town of Mazuna. THis town (as some report) was built by the Romans, and standeth about forty miles from the Mediterran sea. It hath fruitful fields, strong walls, but most base and deformed houses. Their temple indeed is somewhat beautiful: for it was in times past a most stately town, but being often sacked, sometime by the king of Telensin, and sometime by his rebels; and at length falling into the hands of the Arabians, it was brought unto extreme misery, so that at this present there are but few inhabitants remaining, all being either weavers or husbandmen, and most grievously oppressed by the Arabians. Their fields abound plentifully with all kind of corn. near unto this town there have been in times past many houses, streets, and villages, which may probably be conjectured by the letters engraven upon marble stones. The names of which villages are not to be found in any of our histories or Chronicles. Of Gezeir, otherwise called Alger. GEzeir in the Moors language signifieth an island, which name is thought to have been given unto this city, because it lieth near unto the isles of Maiorica, Minorica, and jeviza: howbeit the Spaniards call it Alger. It was founded by the Africans of the family of Mesgana, wherefore in old time it was called by the name of Mesgana. It is a large town, containing families to the number of four thousand, and is environed with most stately and impregnable walls. The buildings thereof are very artificial and sumptuous: and every trade and occupation hath here a several place. Inns, bathstoves, and temples here are very beautiful; but the stateliest temple of all standeth upon the seashore. Next unto the sea there is a most pleasant walk upon that part of the 〈◊〉 wall, which the waves of the sea beat upon. In the suburbs are many gardens replenished with all kind of fruits. On the east side of the town runneth a certain river having many mills thereupon: and out of this river they draw water fit for drink, and for the services of the kitchen. It hath most beautiful plains adjoining upon it, and especially one called Metteggia, which extendeth forty five miles in length, and almost thirty miles in breadth, and aboundeth mightily with all kinds of grain. This town for many years was subject unto the kingdom of Telensin: but hearing that Bugia was also governed by a king, and being nearer thereunto, they submitted themselves unto the king of Bugia. For they saw that the king of Telensin could not sufficiently defend them against their enemies, and also that the king of Bugia might do them great damage, wherefore they offered unto him a yearly tribute of their own accord, and yet remained almost free from all exaction. But certain years after, the inhabitants of this city building for themselves galleys, began to play the pirates, and greatly to molest the foresaid islands. Whereupon king Ferdinando provided a mighty armada, hoping thereby to become lord of the city. Likewise upon a certain high rock standing opposite against the town, he caused a strong fort to be built, and that within gunshot of the Alger become tributary to the king of Spain. city, albeit the city walls could not be endamaged thereby. Wherefore the citizens immediately sent ambassadors into Spain, to crave a league for ten years, upon condition that they should pay certain yearly tribute; which request was granted by king Ferdinando. And so they remained for certain months free from the danger of war: but at length Barbarossa hastening to the siege of Bugia, and having won one fort built by the Spaniards, determined to encounter another, hoping if he could obtain that also, that he should soon conquer the whole kingdom of Bugia. Howbeit all matters fell not out according to his expectation: for a great part of his soldiers being husbandmen, when they perceived the time of sowing corn to approach, without any leave or licence they forsook their general, and returned home to the plough-taile. And many Turks also did the like, so that Barbarossa failing of his purpose, was constrained to break up the 〈◊〉. Howbeit before his departure, he set on fire with his own hands twelve galleys, which lay in a river but three miles from Bugia. And then with forty of his soldiers he retired himself to the castle of Gegel being from Bugia about sixty miles distant, where he remained for certain days. In the mean while, king Ferdinando deceasing, the people of Alger released themselves from paying any more tribute: for seeing Barbarossa to be a most valiant warrior, and a deadly enemy unto Christians, they sent for him, and chose him captain over all their forces; who presently encountered the fort, but to little effect. Afterward this Barbarossa secretly murdered the governor of the city in a certain bath. The said governor was prince of the Arabians dwelling on the plains of Mettegia, his name was Selim Etteumi, descended of the family of Telaliba, and created governor of Alger at the same time when Bugia was taken by the Spaniards: this man was slain by Barbarossa, after he had governed many years. And then Barbarossa usurped the whole government of the city unto himself, and coined money, and this was the first entrance into his great and princely estate. At all the foresaid accidents I myself was present, as I traveled from Fez to Tunis, and was entertained by one that was sent ambassador from the people of Alger into Spain, from whence he brought three thousand books written in the Arabian tongue. Then I passed on to Bugia, where I found Barbarossa besieging A voyage performed by john 〈◊〉. the foresaid fort: afterward I proceeded to Constantina, and next to Tunis. In the mean while I heard that Barbarossa was slain at Tremizen, and that his brother called Cairadin succeeded in the government of Alger. Then we heard also that the emperor Charles the fifth had sent two armies to surprise Alger; the first whereof was destroyed upon the plain of Alger, and the second having assailed the town three days together, was partly slain and partly taken by Barbarossa, insomuch that very few escaped back into Spain. This was done in the year of the Hegeira nine hundred twenty two. Of the town of Tegdemt. THis ancient town was built (as some think) by the Romans; and Tegdemt signifieth in the Arabian language Ancient. The wall of this town (as a man may conjecture by the foundations thereof) was ten miles in circuit. There are yet remaining two temples of an exceeding height, but they are very ruinous, and in many places fallen to the ground. This town when it was possessed by the mahometans, was marvelous rich, and abounded with men of learning and poets. It is reported that Idris uncle to the same Idris that founded Fez, was once governor of this town, and that the government thereof remained to his posterity almost an hundred and fifty years. Afterward it was destroyed in the wars between the schismatical patriarchs of Cairaoan, in the year of the Hegeira 365: but now there are a few ruins only of this town to be seen. Of the town of Medua. THis town standing not far from the borders of Numidia, is distant from the Mediterran sea almost an hundred and fourscore miles; and it is situate on a most pleasant and fruitful plain, and is environed with sweet rivers and beautiful gardens. The inhabitants are exceeding rich, exercising traffic most of all with the Numidians; and they are very curious both in their apparel and in the furniture of their houses. They are continually molested with the invasions of the Arabians; but because they are almost two hundred miles distant from Telensin, they can have no aid sent them by the king. This town was once subject unto the governor of Tenez, afterward unto Barbarossa, and lastly unto his brother. Never was I so sumptuously entertained as in this place: for the inhabitants being themselves 〈◊〉, so often as any learned man comes amongst them, they entertain him with great honour, and cause him to decide all their controversies. For the space of two months while I remained with them, I gained above two hundred ducats, and was so alured with the pleasantness of the place, that had not my duty enforced me to depart, I had remained there all the residue of my life. Of the town of Temendfust. THis town also was built by the Romans upon the Mediterran sea, and is about twelve miles distant from Alger. Unto this town belongeth a fair haven, where the ships of Alger are safely harboured, for they have no other haven so commodious. This town was at length destroyed by the Goths, and the greatest part of the wall of Alger was built with the stones which came from the wall of this town. Of the town of Teddeles'. THis town built by the Africans upon the Mediterran sea, and being thirty miles distant from Alger, is environed with most ancient and strong walls. The greatest part of the inhabitants are dyers of cloth, and that by reason of the many rivers and streams running through the midst of the same. They are of a liberal and ingenuous disposition, and can play most of them upon the cittern and lute. Their fields are fertile, and abounding with corn. Their apparel is very decent: the greatest part of them are delighted in fishing, and they take such abundance of fishes, that they freely give them to every body, which is the cause that there is no fishmarket in this town. Of the mountains contained in the kingdom of Telensin. Of the mountain of Beni jezneten. THis mountain standeth westward of Telensin almost fifty miles, one side thereof bordering upon the desert of Garet, and the other side upon the desert of Angad. In length it extendeth five and twenty, and in breadth almost fifteen miles, and it is exceeding high and difficult to ascend. It hath divers woods growing upon it, wherein grow great store of Carobs, which the inhabitants use for an ordinary kind of food: for they have great want of barley. Here are divers cottages inhabited with valiant and stout men. Upon the top of this mountain standeth a strong castle, wherein all the principal men of the mountain dwell, amongst whom there are often dissensions, for there is none of them all but would be sole governor of the mountain. I myself had conversation with some of them, whom I knew in the king of Fez his court, for which cause I was honourably entertained by them. The soldiers of this mountain are almost ten thousand. Of mount Matgara. THis exceeding high and cold mountain hath great store of inhabitants, and is almost six miles distant from Ned Roma. The inhabitants are valiant, but not very rich: for this mountain yieldeth nought but barley and Carobs. They speak all one language with the people of Ned Roma, and are joined in such league with them, that they will often aid one another against the king of Telensin. Of mount Gualhasa. THis high mountain standeth nigh unto the town of Hunain. The inhabitants are savage, rude, and uncivil people, and are at continual war with the people of Hunain, so that oftentimes they have almost utterly destroyed the town. This mountain yieldeth great store of Carobs, and but little corn. Of mount Agbal. THis mountain is inhabited with people of base condition, and subject to the town of Oran. They all exercise husbandry, and carry wood unto Oran. While the Moors enjoyed Oran, their state was somewhat better: but since the Christians got possession thereof they have been driven to extreme misery. Of mount Beni Guerened. THis mountain being three miles distant from Tremisen, is well peopled, and aboundeth with all kind of fruits, especially with figs and cherries. The inhabitants are some of them colliers, some woodmongers, and the residue husbandmen. And out of this only mountain (as I was informed by the king of Telensin his Secretary) there is yearly collected for tribute, the sum of twelve thousand ducats. Of mount Magrava. THis mountain extending itself forty miles in length towards the Mediterran sea is near unto the town of Mustuganin before described. The soil is fertile, and the inhabitants are valiant and warlike people, and of a liberal and humane disposition. Of mount Beni Abusaid. THis mountain standing not far from Tenez, is inhabited with great multitudes of people, which lead a savage life, and are notwithstanding most valiant warriors. They have abundance of honey, barley, and goats. Their wax and hides they carry unto Tenez, and there sell the same to the merchants of Europe. When as the king of Tremizen his kinsmen were lords of this mountain, the people paid for tribute certain thousands of ducats. Of mount Guanseris. THis exceeding high mountain is inhabited with valiant people, who being aided by the king of Fez, maintained war against the kingdom of Telensin, for above threescore years. Fruitful fields they have, and great store of fountains. Their soldiers are almost twenty thousand in number, whereof 2500. are horsemen. By their aid jahia attained to the government of Tenez: but after Tenez began to decay, they gave themselves wholly to robbery and theft. Of the mountains belonging to the state of Alger. near unto Alger on the east side and on the west are divers mountains well stored with inhabitants. Free they are from all tribute, and rich, and exceeding valiant. Their corn fields are very fruitful, and they have great abundance of cattle. They are oftentimes at deadly war together, so that it is dangerous travailing that way, unless it be in a religious man's company. Markets they have and fairs upon these mountains, where nought is to be sold but cattle, corn, and wool, unless some of the neighbour cities supply them with merchandise now and then. Here endeth the fourth book. JOHN LEO HIS FIFTH BOOK OF the History of Africa, and of the memorable things contained therein. A description of the kingdoms of Bugia and Tunis. WHen as in the former part of this my history I divided Barbaria into certain parts, I determined to write of Bugia as of a kingdom by itself: and I found indeed that not many years ago it was a kingdom. For Bugia was subject to the king of Tunis, and albeit for certain years the king of Telensin was Lord thereof, yet was it at length recovered again by the king of Tunis, who committed the government of the city unto one of his sons, both for the tranquility of Bugia, and also that no discord might happen among his sons after his decease. He left behind him three sons, the eldest whereof was called Habdulhaziz, and unto him he bequeathed the kingdom of Bugia, as is aforesaid: unto the second, whose name was Hutmen, he left the kingdom of Tunis: and the third called Hammare, he made governor of the region of dates. This Hammare began forthwith to wage war against his brother Hutmen, by whom being at length taken in the town of Asfacoes, & deprived of both his eyes, he was carried captive unto Tunis, where he lived many years blind: but his brother Hutmen governed the kingdom of Tunis full forty years. The prince of Bugia being most loving and dutiful to his brother, reigned for many years with great tianquilitie, till at length he was by king Ferdinand of Spain, and by the means of one Pedro de Navarra, cast out of his kingdom. A description of the great city of Bugia. THis ancient city of Bugia built (as some think) by the Romans, upon the side of an high mountain, near unto the Mediterran sea, is environed with walls of great height, and most stately in regard of their antiquity. The part thereof now peopled containeth above eight thousand families: but if it were all replenished with buildings, it were capable of more than four and twenty thousand households, for it is of a great length. The houses, temples, and colleges of this city are most sumptuously built. Professors of liberal sciences here are great store, whereof some teach matters pertaining to the law, and others profess natural Philosophy. Neither Monasteries, Inns, nor Hospitals erected after their manner are here wanting: and their market place is very large and fair: their streets either descend or ascend, which is very troublesome to them that have any business in the town. In that part of the city next unto the top of the mountain standeth a strong castle, most sumptuously and beautifully walled: and there are such notable letters and pictures most artificially carved upon the plaister-worke and timber, that they are thought to have cost much more than the building of the wall itself. The citizens were exceeding rich, and used with their warlike galleys continually to molest the coasts of Spain; which was the occasion of the utter overthrow of their city. For Pedro de Navarra was sent against them with a fleet of fowerteene sails only. The citizens being addicted wholly The city of Bugia taken by Pedro de Navarra. to pleasure and ease, and being terrified with the rumour of war, because they were never exercised therein, were no sooner advertised of Pedro de Navarra his approach, but all of them together with their king betook themselves to flight, and left their city abounding with all kind of riches and wealth, to be spoiled by the Spaniards, so that it was easily taken, in the year of Mahomet his Hegeira nine hundred and seventeen. Soon after Pedro de Navarra having sacked the city, built a strong fort upon the sea shore, and repaired an other which had lain a long time waste, furnishing them both with soldiers and munition. And six years after, Barbarossa the Turk being desirous to win this city from the Christians, and having levied only a thousand soldiers, took the old fort, because he was favoured by the inhabitants of all the mountains adjacent: wherein having placed a garrison, he attempted to win the other fort also: but at his first encounter he lost an hundred of his principal Turks, & four hundred of the mountainers that came to aid him; insomuch that Barbarossa was enforced to fly unto the castle of Gegel, as is aforesaid. Of the castle of Gegel. THis ancient castle built by the Africans, upon an high rock by the Mediterran sea, is distant about threescore miles from Bugia. Families it containeth to the number of five hundred; and the buildings thereof are very base. The inhabitants are of a trusty and ingenuous disposition, and do most of them exercise husbandry: howbeit their fields are but barren, and apt only for barley, flax, and hemp. They have great store of figs and nuts, which they use to carry in certain barks unto Tunis. They have in despite of the kings of Bugia and Tunis continued always free from tribute: for that impregnable mountain can be surprised by no siege nor encounter of the enemy. At length they yielded themselves unto Barbarossa, who demanded none other tribute of them, but only the 〈◊〉 of certain fruits and corn. Of the town of Mesila. MEsila founded by the Romans not far from the Numidian desert, and being distant from Bugia almost an hundred miles, hath stately walls about it, but base houses within. The inhabitants being partly artificers and partly husbandmen, go very homely appareled, and are most grievously oppressed with the continual exactions of the Arabians, and with the daily molestations of the king of Bugia. Myself upon a time traveling this way, could not find so much fodder as was sufficient for twelve horses only. Of the town of Stefe. THis town also built by the Romans, sixty miles southward of Bugia, upon a certain beautiful plain, is environed with strong and stately walls. It was in times passed exceedingly well stored with inhabitants: but since the mahometans were Lords thereof, it hath so decayed by the injuries of the Arabians, who razed to the ground a great part of the wall, that within the whole circuit of this great and ancient town, there are but an hundred houses at this present remaining. Of the town of Necaus. THis town built by the Romans near unto Numidia, and being distant from the Mediterran sea an hundred and eighty, and from the town last mentioned eighty miles, is compassed with a strong and ancient wall. By this town runneth a certain river, on both sides whereof grow the best wal-nuts and figs that are to be found in the whole kingdom of Tunis, being usually carried to Constantina to be sold, which city is thence distant an hundred and eighty miles. The fields of this town are exceeding fruitful, and the inhabitants are very rich, liberal, and curious in their apparel. Here is an hospital maintained at the common charges of the town, to entertain strangers that pass by. Here is a college also, the students whereof are allowed their diet and apparel. Neither is this town destitute of a most stately and well-furnished temple. Their women are white, having black hairs and a most delicate skin, because they frequent the bathstoves so often. Most of their houses are but of one story high, yet are they very decent, and have each one a garden thereto belonging, replenished with damaske-roses, myrtles, camomile, and other herbs and flowers, and being watered with most pleasant fountains. In these gardens likewise there are most stately arbours and bowers, the cool shadow whereof in summertime is most acceptable. And (to be brief) all things here are so delightful to the senses, and so alluring, that any man would be loath to depart from hence. Of the town of Chollo. THe great town of Chollo founded by the Romans, upon the Mediterran sea, at the foot of a certain high mountain, is environed with no walls at all: for the walls were razed to the ground by the Goths: neither did the mahometans, when they had got possession, build them up again. Howbeit this town is notably well governed, and well stored with inhabitants, which are all men of a liberal and tractable disposition. They have continually great traffic with the merchants of Genoa, and do gather abundance of wax and hides. Their fields upon the mountain are exceeding fruitful, and they have always so defended themselves against the princes of Tunis and Constantina, that until this present they remain free from tribute. From the injury of Constantina they are easily defended, both in regard of the difficult mountains lying in the midway, and also in respect of the great distance; for Constantina standeth almost an hundred and twenty miles off. Neither is there any city throughout the whole kingdom of Tunis, either for wealth, or strong situation, any way comparable unto this. Of the town of Sucaicada. THis ancient city built by the Romans also upon the Mediterran sea, and standing about thirty five miles from Constantina, was wasted and almost utterly destroyed by the Goths: howbeit by reason of the haven, being so famous and so frequented by the merchants of Genoa, the prince of Constantina caused certain fair houses to be built thereabouts, for the said merchants of Genoa, to repose themselves and their goods therein: and upon a mountain not far off he built a strong 〈◊〉, for the security and defence of the said merchants from all enemies whatsoever. From the said haven to Constantina the high way is paved with certain black stones, such as are to be seen in some places of Italy, being there called Le strade Roman, which is a manifest argument, that Sucaicada was built by the Romans. Of the city of Constantina. NO man can deny the Romans to have been founders of this city, that shall consider the great strength, height, and antiquity of the walls, and how curiously they are beset and adorned with black stones. This city standeth upon the south side of an exceeding high mountain, and is environed with steep rocks, under which rocks and within the compass whereof runneth the river called Sufegmare, so that the said deep river with the rocks on either side, serveth in stead of a towne-ditch to Constantina. The north part is compassed with a wall of great thickness: and there are two extreme narrow passages only, to enter into the city, one on the east part, and another on the west. The citie-gates are very large and stately. The city itself containeth above eight thousand families. Buildings it hath very sumptuous, as namely, the chief temple, two colleges, three or four monasteries, and other such like. Here every trade and occupation hath a several place assigned: and the inhabitants are right honest and valiant people. Here is likewise a great company of merchants, whereof some cell cloth and wool, others send oil and silk into Numidia, and the residue exchange linen-cloth and other wares for slaves and dates. Neither are dates so cheap in any region of all Barbary beside. The kings of Tunis usually commit the government of Constantina unto their eldest sons: The hard success of the king of Tunis his three sons. and so he that is now king of Tunis bestowed Constantina upon his eldest son in like sort: who waging war against the Arabians was slain in the first battle. Then fell the government of Constantina unto his second son, whose intemperate life was the cause of his sudden and untimely death. After him succeeded the third and youngest son, who in regard of his insolent and shameless behaviour, was so hated of all the citizens, that some had determined to kill him: whereof his father having intelligence, sent for him, and kept him for certain years prisoner at Tunis. Afterward he committed the government of Constantina to a certain Renegado that of a Christian became a Mahometan: this Renegado he trusted as his own brother, for he had made former trial of him: who for many years governed the place with great tranquility. Upon the north part of the city standeth a certain strong castle built at the same time when the city itself was built: which castle was more strongly fortified then before, by one Elcaied Nabil the king's lieutenant: and this castle greatly bridled both the citizens, and all the bordering Arabians, whose great captain it held as prisoner, and released him not, till he had left his three sons for hostages. At length the said Elcaied grew so haughty, that he coined money, to the great contempt of his king and sovereign, whom notwithstanding he endeavoured by many gifts and presents to appease. But when men perceived Elcaied to degenerate from his first form of government, they that before loved him, and had him in high regard, were presently of another mind, and utterly forsook him. So that laying siege unto a certain city of Numidia called Pescara, he perceived some treason to be attempted against him: and thereupon returning forthwith to Constantina, he found the citie-gates shut against him: from whence he presently took his journey to the king of Tunis, and was by him cast into prison, and not restored to liberty, till he had paid an hundred thousand ducats. Afterward by the king's aid he was restored to his former government: but when he began to tyrannize over some of the chief citizens, he again provoked the whole city unto arms, who besieged forthwith the castle whereunto he fled, which was such a corrosive unto Elcaied his mind, that within few days he died for sorrow. And so the people after they were reconciled to their king, would fromthencefoorth never admit any foreign governor: wherefore the king of Tunis was (as is aforesaid) again constrained to send his own sons thither. The fields belonging to this city are exceeding fertile. And on either side the river which runneth through the plains, there are most commodious gardens, if they were well husbanded. Also without the city stand many fair and ancient buildings. About a mile and a half from the city standeth a certain triumphal arch, like unto the triumphal arches at Rome, which the gross common people think to have been a castle where innumerable devils remained, which (they say) were expelled by the mahometans, when they came first to inhabit Constantina. From the city to the river they descend by certain stairs hewn out of the rock: and near unto the river standeth a little house so artificially cut out of the main rock, that the roof, pillars, and walls are all of one continued substance, and here the women of Constantina wash their linen. near unto the city likewise there is a certain Hot baths. bath of hot water dispersing itself among the rocks: in this bath are great store of snails, which the fond women of the city call Devils: and when any one falleth into a fever or any other disease, they suppose the snails to be the authors thereof. And the only remedy that they can apply upon A fond and senseless 〈◊〉. such an occasion is this: first they kill a white hen, putting her into a platter with her feathers on, and then very solemnly with waxe-candles they carry her to the bathe, and there leave her: and many good fellows there are, which so soon as the silly women have set down their hens at the bath, will come secretly thither, and convey away the hens to their own kitchens. Somewhat farther from the city eastward there is a fountain of extreme cold water, and near unto it standeth a certain building of marble adorned with sundry hieroglyphical pictures or emblems, such as I have seen at Rome, and at many other places of Europe. But the common people imagine that it was in times past a Grammar-schoole, & because both the masters and scholars thereof were most vicious, they were transformed (say they) into marble. The inhabitants twice every year send great store of wares into Numidia: and because as they travel, they are in danger of the Arabian thieves, they hire certain Turkish arquebusiers for great wages to guard them. The merchants of Constantina traveling to Tunis pay no tribute at all, but only at their departure forth of Constantina for the worth of every 100 ducats in merchandise, they allow two ducats and a half. Of the town of Mela. THis town built by the Romans within twelve miles of Constantina, and environed with most strong walls, containeth almost three thousand families: but at this present there are but few buildings by reason of the wars that have happened. Here are greatstore of artisans: the most whereof are such weavers as make coverlets. In the market place there is a most clear fountain. The citizens are valiant, though they be of rude behaviour. Here is abundance, not only offruits (whereupon some think the name of the town to be derived) but also of cattle and corn. Unto this town the governonr of Constantina sendeth every year a certain judge, to decide the townsmen's controversies, and to receive the yearly tribute: howbeit oftentimes the said judge is slain by the people. Of the ancient town of Bona. THis town built by the Romans upon the Mediterran sea, almost 120. miles more to the west was in ancient times called Hippo, where S. Augustine in times past bishop of Hippo. the reverend father Saint Augustine was once Bishop. It was in process of time subdued by the Goths, and was afterward surprised and burnt to ashes by Hutmen the third patriarch after Mahumet. And many years after they built a new town within two miles of the stones that were brought from the ruins of Bona: which new town they called Beld Elhuneb, that is, the city of the fruit called Ziziphus or juiuba, by reason of the great abundance of that fruit: the which they use to dry in the sun, and to keep till winter. It containeth almost three hundred families, and all the houses and buildings thereof are very base, save one only temple which standeth next the sea. The inhabitants are all of an ingenuous disposition, some of them being merchants, and the residue artisans. Here is great store of linencloth woven, the greatest part whereof is carried to Numidia. The inhabitants of this town having upon a time slain their governors, were so bold as to threaten the king of Tunis: and they had without all doubt betrayed the town unto the Christians, had not the king of Tunis taken special heed thereunto. In this town are certain lewd people and most beggarly appareled, which notwithstanding are highly reverenced by the citizens. Here are no fountains, nor yet any water at all, but rainewater only which is kept in cisterns. On the east side of the town standeth a strong castle built by the king of Tunis, where the governor of the town appointed by the king hath his abode. Unto this town adjoineth a most large plain, containing in length forty, and in breadth five and twenty miles: very commodious it is for corn, and is inhabited by certain Arabians called Merdez: these Arabians have great store of cattle and but little money; and they bring good store of butter daily unto Bona. Unto this town the people of Tunis, of the isle of Gerbi, and of Genoa use yearly to resort, and to buy great abundance of corn and butter. Every friday they have near unto the town walls a market, which is well frequented even till night. Not Great store of coral. far from hence there is a certain place in the sea, abounding with great store of coral: and because the townsmen know not how to fish for the same, the king of Tunis licensed certain merchants of Genoa to fish for it: who in regard of the continual assaults of pirates, because they could not speed of their purpose, they obtained leave also of the king to build a castle near unto the place: but that the townsmen would in no case permit, saying that the Genoveses in times past took their town by such a wile, and that it was afterward recovered again by the king of Tunis. Of the town of Tefas. THE town of Tefas founded by the Africans upon the side of a mountain, and standing almost an hundred and fifty miles southward of Bona, was in times past 〈◊〉 populous, and full of brave buildings, but it hath been since destroyed by the Arabians. Afterward being replanted with new inhabitants, and remaining free from war for certain months, it was the second time destroyed by the Arabians. Last of all (because it was a place commodious for corn) it was inhabited the third time by certain Africans called Haoara, and that by the aid of a certain prince brother unto him, which had slain Enasir the king of Tunis his son: but now all that remained of this town was utterly razed by the king of Tunis. Of the city of Tebessa. THis great and strong city built by the Romans near unto Numidia, and being distant two hundred miles southward from the Mediterran sea, is compassed with an high wall made of such stones, as are to be seen upon the Colosso at Rome: neither saw I, to my remembrance, any such walls in all Africa or Europe; and yet the houses and other buildings are very base. Through part of this city runneth a great river: and in the market, and divers other places stand certain marble pillars, having Epigrams and sentences with Latin letters engraven upon them: there are also other square pillars of marble covered with roofs. The plains adjacent albeit very dry, yet are they most fruitful for corn. Five miles from hence grow such abundance of wall-nut-trees, as you would take them to be some thick forest. near unto this town standeth a certain hill full of mighty caves, wherein the common people say, that giants inhabited of old: but it is most evident, that those caves were digged by the Romans at the same time, when they built the city: for certain it is that the stones whereof the citie-walles consist, were taken out of those rocks. The inhabitants are people of a covetous, inhuman, and beastly disposition; neither will they vouchsafe to look upon a stranger: insomuch that Eldabag a famous Poet of the city of Malaga in Granada, having in his travel this way received some discourtesy, wrote in disgrace of Tebessa certain satirical verses, which myself likewise have thought good here to set down in the dispraise thereof. Within this place here's nought of any worth, Save worthless nuts, which Tebessa affords. Soft, I mistake, the marble walls are worth Your earnest view, so are the Christall-fourds: But hence are banished virtues all divine, The place is hell, the people worse than swine. This Eldabag was a most learned and elegant Poet in the Arabian tongue, and out of measure satirical, and bitter in his invectives. But to return to our former purpose, these Tebessians have always rebelled against the king of Tunis, and have slain all the governors that he hath sent. Wherefore the king that now is, traveling upon a time towards Numidia, sent certain ambassadors into the city, to know how the citizens stood affected towards him: unto whom they (instead of God save the King) made answer: God save our Citie-walles. Whereat the king waxing wroth, sacked the city forthwith, beheaded and hanged divers of the inhabitants, and made such havoc, that ever since it hath remained desolate. This was done in the year of the Hegeira 915. Of the town called Vrbs. BY the name of this town it sufficiently appeareth, that the Romans were the first founders thereof. Situate it is upon the most beautiful plain of all Africa, which by reason of the abundance of fountains is so well stored with corn, that from thence to Tunis (which standeth 190. miles northward of this place) and to other regions adjoining, great plenty of corn is transported. In this town are to be seen sundry monuments of the Romans, as namely images of marble, and every where upon the walls are sentences in Latin letters engraven: the towne-walles are most artificially and sumptuously built. This town the Goths, being assisted by the Moors, surprised, when as it contained the chief treasure and wealth that the Romans enjoyed in all Africa. Afterward it remained for certain years desolate, being at length notwithstanding inhabited a new, yet so, that it deserveth rather the name of a village then of a town. Not far from this town runneth a certain river, upon the which are divers water-mills; and this river taketh his beginning from a little hill but half a mile distant from the town. All the inhabitants are either weavers or husbandmen, and are continually molested by the king of Tunis. Howbeit if the fertility of the soil, the pleasantness of the place, and the wholesome disposition of the air, were as well known to the king, as they are to myself, I think verily that he would leave Tunis, and go and dwell in this region. The Arabians are well acquainted with the place, for from hence they yearly transport great store of corn unto their deserts. Of the town of Beggia. THis town built by the Romans upon a mountain almost twenty miles distant from the Mediterran sea, and about eighty miles westward of Tunis, standeth right in the way from Tunis to Constantina. But because the name of this town is no Arabian name, it seemeth, that the first name hath been oftentimes corrupted and changed. The ancient walls of this town are as yet standing, and it is a most defensible place, and well furnished with all kind of necessaries. It is inhabited with great store of weavers and husbandmen, and the fields thereof are so large and fruitful for all kinds of grain, that the people of the same region could not sufficiently manure them, unless they were assisted by certain bordering Arabians: and yet a great part of their fields lieth untilled: howbeit they send continually great store of corn unto Tunis. The king of Tunis surchargeth them with continual and grievous exactions, which is the cause why their estate so mightily decayeth. Of the town called Hain Sammit. THis town was in my time founded by the king of Tunis, being distant almost thirty miles from Beggia. It was built (they say) of purpose, that none of the fields thereabout might lie untilled. But it hath since been destroyed by the Arabians, at the commandment of the king of Tunis: and now there remaineth a tower and certain other buildings only, whereof some have roofs upon them and others none. Of the town of Casba. THis town built by the Romans upon a large plain of twelve miles' compass, is four and twenty miles distant from Tunis. The town-wall remaineth strong as yet; but the town itself is destroyed by the Arabians, and the fields lie untilled, and all by the negligence of the king of Tunis, and of the inhabitants of the same region. Of the castle of Choros. THis castle founded not many years passed by the Africans upon the river of Magrida, and being about ten miles distant from Tunis, is environed with most fruitful fields. near unto this town groweth a certain wood greatly abounding with olives. At length it was destroyed by certain Arabians called Beni Heli, which make perpetual war against the king of Tunis, and live only upon theft and robbery. Of the town of Biserta. THe ancient town of Biserta otherwise called Bensart, founded by the Africans upon the Mediterran sea, thirty five miles from Tunis, is but of a small bigness, and is inhabited with most miserable people. near unto this town entereth a certain creak or arm of the sea, which at the first being very narrow, increaseth by little and little into a marvelous breadth. On either side there of dwell great store of fishers, and husbandmen: and westward of the said creak lieth a most large and fruitful plain called Mater, which is grievously molested by the king of Tunis, and by the Arabians. In The fish called 〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉. this creak are taken abundance of fishes: and after the month of October they catch a certain fish called by the Africans Giarrafa, which I take to be the same that is at Rome called Laccia: for then by reason of the abundance of rain that falleth, the salt water of the bay becometh somewhat fresh, wherewith those fishes (they say) are much delighted. Very deep it is, and affordeth good fishing till the end of May: but then the fishes begin to decrease, and to be much drier in taste then before, like unto the fishes taken in the river of Fez. Of the great city of Carthage. THis famous and ancient city was built at the first by a certain people that came out of Syria. But others say that it was founded by a queen. The African chronicler Ibnu Rachich is of opinion, that it was built by a certain people that came from Barca, being expelled thence by the king of Egypt: wherefore I cannot in this place affirm any certainty as touching the founders thereof: for besides that the African historiographers disagree about this matter, there is none that hath left any writing thereof ancienter than the decay of the Roman empire: when as all the Romans that were found in Africa were expelled by the Goths. But afterward Tripoli of Barbaria and Capis being taken by the mahometans, the inhabitants of them both went unto Carthage, whither the principal Romans and Goths had retired themselves, who endeavoured by all means to withstand the mahometans: and after many skirmishes the Romans fled to Bona, and the Goths left Carthage for a pray unto the mahometans; so that it remained desolate many years after, till a certain Mahometan patriarch called Elmahdi brought in new colonies: howbeit he could scarce furnish the twentieth part with inhabitants. There are to be seen at this day certain ruins of the citie-walles, till you come to a deep and large cistern. And there remaineth as yet also a certain conduct which conveyeth water to the city from a mountain thirty miles distant, being like unto the conduct of the great palace at Rome. near unto Carthage likewise are certain great and ancient buildings, the description whereof is out of my remembrance. On the west and south part of this city are divers gardens replenished with all kind of fruits, which are carried from thence to Tunis in great abundance. The plains adjoining to this city are exceeding fruitful, though not very large: for upon the north part thereof lieth a mountain, the sea, and the gulf of Tunis: on the 〈◊〉 and south parts it joineth to the plains of Bensart. But * 1526 now this city is fallen into extreme decay & misery: merchants shops there are not above twenty or five and twenty at the most: and all the houses of the town being scarce five hundred, are most base and beggarly. In my time here was a stately 〈◊〉 and a fair college also, but no students were therein. The townsmen, though very miserable, yet are they exceeding proud withal, and seem to pretend a great show of religion. And the greater part of them are either gardiner's or husbandmen, and are grievously oppressed with the kings daily exactions. A description of the mighty city of Tunis. THis city is called by the Latines Tunetum, and by the Arabians Tunus, which name they think to be corrupt, because it signifieth nought in their language: but in old time it was called Tarsis, after the name of a city in Asia. At the first it was a small town built by the Africans upon a certain lake, about twelve miles distant from the Mediterran sea. And upon the decay of Carthage Tunis began to increase both in buildings and inhabitants. For the inhabitants of Carthage were loath to remain any longer in their own town, fearing lest some army would have been sent out of Europe: wherefore they repaired unto Tunis, and greatly enlarged the buildings thereof. Afterward came thither one Hucba Vtmen the fourth Mahometan patriarch, who persuaded the citizens, that no army or garrison ought to The building of Cairaoan. remain in any sea-townes; wherefore he built another city called Cairaoan, being distant from the Mediterran sea thirty, and from Tunis almost an hundred miles: unto which city the army marched from Tunis, and in the room thereof other people were sent to inhabit. About an hundred and fifty years after, Cairaoan being sacked by the Arabians, the prince thereof was expelled, and became governor of the kingdom of Bugia: howbeit he left certain kinsmen of his at Tunis, who governed that city. And ten years after, Bugia was taken by joseph the son of Tesfin, who seeing the humanity of the foresaid prince, would not expel him out of his kingdom: but so long as it remained to the said prince and his posterity, joseph caused it to be free from all molestation. Afterward Abdul Mumen king of Maroco having recovered Mahdia from the Christians, marched toward Tunis, and got possession thereof also. And so Tunis remained peaceably under the Tunis subject unto Abdul-Mumen and other kings of Maroco. dominion of the kings of Maroco, so long as the kingdom was governed by the said Abdul, and his son joseph, and their successors jacob and Mansor. But after the decease of Mansor, his son Mahumet Ennasir made war against the king of Spain, by whom being vanquished, he fled to Maroco, and there within few years ended his life. After him succeeded his brother joseph, who was slain by certain soldiers of the king of Telensin. And so upon the death of Mahumet, and of his brother joseph, the Arabians began to inhabit the territory of Tunis, and to make often sieges and assaults against the city itself: whereupon the governor of Tunis advertised the king of Maroco, that unless present aid were sent, he must be coustrained to yield Tunis unto the Arabians. The king therefore sent a certain valiant captain, called Habduluahidi, and borne in Seville a city of * Or perhaps Andaluzia. Granada, with a fleet of twenty sails unto Tunis, which he found half destroyed by the Arabians: but so great was his eloquence and wisdom, that he restored all things to their former estate, and received the yearly tribute. After Habduluahidi succeeded his son Abu 〈◊〉, who in learning and dexterity of wit, excelled his father. This Abu built a castle upon a certain high place of the west part of Tunis, which he adorned with fair buildings and with a most beautiful temple. Afterward taking his journey unto the kingdom of Tripoli, and returning home by the southern regions, he gathered tribute in all those places: so that after his decease he left great treasure unto his son. And after Abu succeeded his son, who grew so insolent, that he would not be subject to the king of Maroco, because he perceived his kingdom to decay: at the same time also had the marin-family gotten possession of the kingdom of Fez, and so was the family of Beni Zeijen possessed of the kingdoms of Telensin and Granada. And so while all those regions were at mutual dissension, the dominions of Tunis began mightily to increase. Insomuch that the king of Tunis marched unto Telensin, and demanded tribute of the inhabitants. Wherefore the king of Fez, who as then laid siege against Maroco, craved by his ambassadors the king of Tunis his friendship, and with great gifts obtained the same. Then the king of Tunis returning home conqueror from Telensin, was received with great triumph, and was saluted king of all Africa, because indeed there was no prince of Africa at the same time comparable unto him. Wherefore he began to ordain a royal court, and to choose Secretaries, counsellors, captains, and other officers appertaining to a king; after the very same manner that was used in the court of Maroco. And from the time of this king even till our times, the kingdom of Tunis hath so prospered, that now it is accounted the richest kingdom in all Africa. The said king's son reigning after his father's death, enlarged the suburbs of Tunis with most stately buildings. Without the gate called Bed Suvaica he built a street containing to the number of three hundred families: and he built another street at the gate called Bed el Manera consisting of more than a thousand families. In both of these streets dwell great store of artificers, & in the street last mentioned all the Christians of Tunis, which are of the king's guard, have their abode. Likewise there is a third street built at the gate next unto the sea, called Beb el Bahar, and being but half a mile distant from the gulf of Tunis. Hither do the Genoveses, Venetians, and all other Christian merchants resort, and here they repose themselves out of the tumult and concourse of the Moors: and this street is of so great bigness, that it containeth three hundred families of Christians and Moors, but the houses are very low, and of small receipt. The families of the city, together with them of the suburbs, amount almost to the number of ten thousand. ' This stately and populous city hath a peculiar place assigned for each trade and occupation. here dwell great store of linnen-weavers', and the linen that they weave is exceeding fine, & sold at a great price over all Africa. The women of this town use A strange kind of spinning. a strange kind of spinning: for 〈◊〉 upon an high place or on the upper part of the house, they let down their spindle's at a window, or through a hole of the plancher into a lower room, so that the weight of the spindle makes the thread very equal and even. And here the linendrapers have many shops, and are accounted the wealthiest citizens in all Tunis: here are also great store of grocers, apothecary's, tailors, and of all other trades and occupations: butchers here are very many which sell mutton for the most part, especially in the spring, and in summer: also here are abundance of all kind of artificers, every of which to describe would prove tedious: the apparel of their merchants, priests, and doctors is very decent. Upon their heads they wear a Dulipan, which is covered with a great linen-cloth: the courtiers likewise and the soldiers wear all of them Dulipans, but not covered with linen. Rich men here are but few, by reason of the exceeding scarcity of all kind of grain: for a man cannot till a piece of ground, be it never so near the city, in regard of the manifold invasions of the Arabians. Corn is brought unto them from other regions and cities, as namely from Vrbs, from Beggia, and from Bona. Some of the citizens of Tunis have certain fields in the suburbs walled round about, where they sow some quantity of barley and of other corn: howbeit the soil is marueluellous dry, and standeth in need of much watering: for which purpose every man hath a pit, whereout with a certain wheel turned about by a mule or a camel, and through certain conveyances and passages made for the nonce, they water all the upper part of their ground: now consider (I pray you) what great crop of corn can be reaped out of so little a field, walled round about and watered by such cunning and industry. Bread they make very excellent, albeit they leave the bran still among the flower, & they bake their loaves in certain mortars, such as the Egyptians use to beat flax in. The merchants and most part of the citizens use for food a kind of homely pulse or pap called by them Besis, being made of barley meal in form of a dumpling, whereupon they power oil or the broth of Pome-citrons. And there is a certain place in the city where nothing but barley prepared in a readiness to make the said pulse, is to be sold. They use also another kind of food almost as homely as the former: for seething a quantity of meal thoroughly in water, and afterward braying it in another vessel with a pestle, they power oil or flesh-pottage thereunto, and so eat it: and this meat they call Bezin: but the richer sort feed themselves with more dainty meats. All their mills (except such as stand upon a river not far from the city) are turned about either by the strength of mules, or asses. In this city they have no fountains, rivers, nor wells of fresh water: but they all use rainwater taken out of cisterns, saving that there is a fountain in the suburbs, from whence certain porters bring salt-water into the city to sell, which they think to be more wholesome and fit for drink then rainwater. Other wells there are that afford most excellent water, which is reserved only for the king & his courtiers. In this city there is one most stately temple, furnished with sufficient number of priests, and with rich revenues. Other temples there be also, but not endowed with so ample revenues: here are colleges likewise and monasteries built after their manner, all which are maintained upon the common benevolence of the city. There are certain people in this city whom a man would take to be distraught, which go bareheaded and barefooted, carrying stones about with them, and these are reverenced by the common people, for men of singular holiness. Moreover on the behalf of one of these mad fellows, called Sidi el Dahi; and for the residue of his fond society, the king of Tunis built one of the foresaid monasteries, & endowed the same with most ample revenues. All the houses of this city are indifferently beautiful, being built of excellent stones, and adorned with much painting and carving. They have very artificial pargetting or plaister-works, which they beautify with orient colours: for wood to carve upon is very scarce at Tunis. The floors of their chambers are paved with certain shining and fair stones: and most of their houses are but of one story high: and almost every house hath two gates or entrances; one towards the street, and another towards the kitchen and other backe-roumes: between which gates they have a fair court, where they may walk and confer with their friends. The bathstoves here are far more commodious than those at Fez, though not so large and sumptuous. In the suburbs are many pleasant gardens which yield fruit, albeit not in great abundance, yet very excellent: pome-citrons, roses, and other flowers here are great store, especially in that place which they call Bardo, where the king hath built a palace amidst those beautiful and sweet gardens. On all sides of the city within four or five miles, there grow such plenty of olives, that the oil thereof sufficeth not only the city, but is carried also in great quantity into Egypt. The wood of the olive-trees which they cut down they use to burn and to make charcoals thereof: neither do I think any place to be more destitute of wood than this. Povertie constraineth some of their women to lead an unchaste life: they are decently appareled, and going forth of the house, they wear veils or masks before their faces, like unto the women of Fez: for with one linencloth they cover their foreheads, and join thereto another which they call Setfari: but about their heads they lap such fardels of linen, as they seem comparable to the heads of Giants. Most part of their substance and labour they bestow upon perfumes and other such vanities. They have here a compound called Lhasis, whereof whosoever eateth but one ounce falleth a laughing, disporting, and dallying, as if he were half drunken; and is by the said confection marvelously provoked unto lust. Of the king of Tunis his court, and of the rites and ceremonies there used. SO soon as the king of Tunis hath by inheritance attained to his kingdom, all his nobles, doctor's, priests, and judges, bind themselves by solemn oath unto him. Immediately after any king's death, his son and heir apparent succeed in the kingdom: then the chief officer of the court (called the Munafid, because he is the king's viceroy or high deputy) presenteth himself forthwith unto the new king, and giveth up an account of all things which he did while the old king lived: and then at the king's appointment every of the nobles receive offices from the Munafid according to their several places of dignity. Another principal officer there is, called the Mesuare, that is, the great commander and governor of the warlike forces: who hath authority to increase or diminish the number of soldiers, to give them their pay, to levy armies, and to conduct the same whither he thinketh good. The third officer in dignity is the Castellan, who with his soldiers taketh charge of the castle, and looketh to the safeguard of the kings own person: and he alotteth punishments unto such prisoners as are brought into the said castle, as if he were the king himself. The fourth officer is the governor of the city, whose duty is to administer justice in the common wealth, and to punish malefactors. The fifth officer is the king's secretary, who hath authority to write, and to give answer in the king's name: he may open also and read any letters whatsoever, except such as are sent unto the Castellan and governor of the city. The sixth is the kings chief chamberlain, who is to furnish the walls with hangings, to appoint unto every man his place, and by a messenger to assemble the king's counsellors, and this man hath great familiarity with the king, and hath access to speak with him, as often as he pleaseth. The seventh in dignity is the king's treasurer, who receiveth all customs, tributes, and yearly revenues, and payeth them, with the king's consent, unto the Munafid. The eight officer is he that receiveth tribute for merchandise that are brought by land, who taketh custom also of foreign merchants, which are constrained for the value of every hundred ducats to pay two ducats and a half: this customer hath many spies and officers, who having intelligence of any merchant's arrival, they bring him forthwith before their master, in whose absence they keep him so long in their custody, till their said master be present, and till the merchant hath delivered all such custom as is due, and then being bound with many oaths, he is dismissed. The ninth officer receiveth tribute only of such wares as are brought by sea, and dwelleth in a house by the havens side. The tenth is the steward of the king's household, who is to provide bread, meat, and other necessary victuals, and to apparel all the king's wives, eunuchs, and the Negro-slaves that attend upon him. He also taketh charge of the king's sons and of their nurses, and alotteth business unto the Christian captives. These are the chief officers under the king of Tunis: the residue (lest I should seem tedious to the reader) I have of purpose omitted to entreat of. The king of Tunis hath fifteen hundred most choice soldiers, the greatest part of whom are Renegadoes or backsliders from the Christian faith: and these have liberal pay allowed them. They have a captain over them also, who may increase or diminish their number as he pleaseth. Also there are an hundred and fifty soldiers being moors, who have authority to remove the tents of the king's army from place to place. There are likewise a certain number of crossbows, which attend upon the king whithersoever he rideth: but next of all to the king's person is his guard of Christians, which (as we signified before) dwell in the suburbs. Before the king marcheth a guard of footmen, being all of them Turkish archers, and gunner's. Immediately before the king go his lackeys or footmen. One there is that rideth on the one side of the king, carrying his partisan, another on the other side beareth his target, and the third coming 〈◊〉 him carrieth his crossbow. Others there are also that attend upon the king, whom (for brevities sake) we omit here to speak of. These are the principal rites and ceremonies of the ancient kings of Tunis, being much different from them which are used by the king that now is. I could here make a large discourse of the king's vices that now reigneth (at whose hands I confess myself to have received great benefits) but that is not my purpose at this present: this one thing I can affirm, that he is marvelous cunning to procure money out of his subjects purses. But he himself liveth sometimes in his palace, and sometimes in gardens, in the company of his concubines, musicians, stageplayers, and such like. When he calleth for any musician, he is brought in blindfold or hoodwinked in manner of a hawk. The golden coin of Tunis containeth four and twenty charats apiece, that is to say, a ducat and one third part of the coin of Europe: there is a kind of siluermoney coined also being four square in form, which weigheth six charats apiece: and thirty or two and thirty of these pieces are equal in value to one piece of their gold coin, and they are called Nasari: the Italians call the gold-coine of Tunis Doble. And thus much concerning the king of Doble. Tunis, and the customs of his court. Of the town of Neapolis. THis ancient town built by the Romans upon the Mediterran sea almost twelve miles eastward of Tunis is inhabited by certain Moors called Nabell. It was in times passed very populous, but now there dwell but a few peasants therein, which exercise themselves only about sowing and reaping of 〈◊〉. Of the town of Cammar. THis town is very ancient also and near unto Carthage, standing eight miles northward of Tunis. The inhabitants being many in number are all of them gardiner's, and use to bring their herbs and fruits to Tunis to be sold. Here also grow great store of sugarcanes, which are brought likewise unto Tunis: but because they have not the art of getting Sugarcanes. out the sugar, they use only after meals to suck the sweet juice out of the said canes. Of the town of Marsa. THis ancient town standing upon the Mediterran sea near the same place where the haven of Carthage was of old, remained certain years desolate, but now it is inhabited by certain fishers and husbandmen: and here they use to white linen-cloth. Not far from hence are certain castles and palaces, where the king of Tunis ordinarily remaineth in summertime. Of the town of Ariana. Moreover this ancient town was built by the Goths almost eight miles northward of Tunis. It is environed with most pleasant and fruitful gardens, and it hath a strong wall, and containeth many husbandmen. Certain other little towns there are not far distant from Carthage, some inhabited, and the residue desolate, the names whereof I have quite forgotten. Of the town of Hammamet. THis town built by the mahometans of late years, and environed with a wall of great strength, is distant from Tunis almost fifty miles. The inhabitants are miserable people, and oppressed with continual exactions, being the greatest part of them either fishers or colliers. Of the town of Heraclia. THis little and ancient town was founded by the Romans upon a certain mountain, and was afterward destroyed by the Arabians. Of the town of Susa. THis exceeding great and ancient town was built by the Romans upon the Mediterran sea, being distant from Tunis about an hundred miles. The plains adjoining abound with olives and figs: their fields are most fruitful for barley, if they could be tilled, but the Arabians often incursions are the cause why they lie waste. The inhabitants being most liberal and courteous people, and great friends unto strangers, make voyages most of them unto the eastern regions and unto Turkey; and some also frequent the next towns of Sicilia and Italy. The residue of the inhabitants are either weavers, or graziers of cattle, or such as turn wooden vessels, wherewith they furnish the whole kingdom of Tunis. When the mahometans first won that province, this town was the seat of the viceroy, whose palace is as yet remaining. A most stately town it is, environed with strong walls, and situate upon a most beautiful plain. It was in times passed well stored with inhabitants, and with fair buildings, whereof some, together with a goodly temple, are as yet extant. But now it containeth very few people, and but five shops in all, by reason of the kings continual exactions. I myself was constrained to stay in this town for four days, in regard of the danger of the time. Of the town of Monaster. THe ancient town of Monaster built by the Romans upon the Mediterran sea, and distant almost twelve miles from Susa, is environed with most impregnable and stately walls, and containeth very fair buildings: but the inhabitants are most miserable and beggarly people, and wear shoes made of sea-rushes: most of them are either weavers or fishers: their fare is barley bread, and a kind of food mingled with oil, which we called before Bezzin, which is used in all the towns thereabout: the soil will yield no other corn but barley. The territory adjacent aboundeth with oranges, pears, figs, pomegranates, and olives, saving that it is continually wasted by the invasion of the enemy. Of the town of Tobulba. THis town built also by the romans upon the Mediterran sea, standeth about twelve miles eastward of Monaster. For certain years it was very populous, and greatly abounded with olives: but afterward it was so wasted by the Arabians, that now there are but few houses remaining, which are inhabited by certain religious men: these religious men maintain a fair hospital for strangers traveling that way, where they courteously entertain even the Arabians themselves. Of the town of El Mahdia, otherwise called Africa. EL Mahdia founded in our time by Mahdi the first patriarch of Cairaoan upon the Mediterran sea, and fortified with strong walls, towers, and gates, hath a most noble haven belonging thereto. Mahdi when he first entered into this region, feigned himself in an unknown habit to be 〈◊〉 of the lineage of 〈◊〉, whereby growing into great favour of the people, he was by their assistance made prince of Cairaoan, and was called El Mahdi Califa: afterward traveling forty days journey westward into Numidia to receive tribute due unto him, he was taken by the prince of Segelmesse, and put in prison, howbeit the said prince of Segelmese being presently moved with compassion toward him, restored him to his former liberty, and was for his good will not long after slain by him: afterward tyrannising over the people, and perceiving some to conspire against him, he erected this town of Mahdia, to the end he might there find safe refuge when need required. At length one Beiezid a Mahometan prelate (whom they called the cavallier or knight of the ass, because that riding continually upon an ass he conducted an army of forty thousand men) came unto Cairaoan: but Mahdi fled unto his new town, where with thirty sail of ships sent him by a Mahometan prince of Cordova, he so valiantly encountered the enemy, that Beiezid and his son were both slain in that battle: afterward returning to Cairaoan, he grew in league and amity with the citizens, and so the government remained unto his posterity for many years. But an hundred and thirty years past this * El Mahdia. town was taken by the Christians, and was after recovered by a certain Mahometan patriarch of Maroco called Abdul Mumen, but now it is subject unto the king of Tunis, by whom it is continually oppressed with most grievous exactions. The inhabitants exercise traffic with foreign nations: and they are at so great dissension with the Arabians, that they are scarce permitted to till their grounds. Not many years ago Pedro de Navarra assailing this town only with nine ships, was defeated of his purpose, and constrained to return with great loss of his men. This happened in the year of our Lord 1519. Of the town of Asfachus. THis town was built by the Africans upon the Mediterran sea, at such time as they waged war against the romans. It is compassed with most high and strong walls, and was in times passed very populous, but now it containeth but three or four hundredth families at the most, and but a few shops. Oppressed it is both by the Arabians, and by the king of Tunis. All the inhabitants are either weavers, mariners, or fishermen. They take great store of fishes called by them Spares, which word signifieth nought in the Arabian and Barbarian, much less in the Latin tongue. This people live also upon barley bread and Bezin: their apparel is base, and some of them traffic in Egypt and Turkey. Of the great city of Cairaoan. THE famous city of Cairaoan otherwise called Caroen, was founded by Hucba, who was sent general of an army out of Arabia deserta, by Hutmen the third Mahometan Califa. From the Mediterran sea this city is distant six and thirty, and from Tunis almost an hundred miles; neither was it built (they say) for any other purpose, but only that the Arabian army might securely rest therein with all such spoils as they won from the Barbarians, and the Numidians. He environed it with most impregnable walls, and built therein a sumptuous temple, supported with stately pillars. The said Hucba after the death of Hutmen was ordained prince of Muchavia, and governed the same till the time of Qualid Califa the son of Habdul Malic, who as then reigned in Damascus: this Qualid sent a certain captain called Muse the son of Nosair, with an huge army unto Cairaoan: who having stayed a few days with his army not far from Cairaoan, marched westward, sacking and spoiling towns and cities, till he came to the Ocean sea shore, and then he returned towards Cairaoan again. From whence he sent as his deputy a certain captain into Mauritania, who there also conquered many regions and cities. Insomuch that Muse being moved with a jealous emulation, commanded him to stay till himself came. His said Deputy therefore called Tarich encamped himself not far from Andaluzia, whither Muse within 4. months came unto him with an huge army. From whence both of them with their armies crossing the seas, arrived in Granada, and so marched by land against the Goths. Against whom Theodoricus the king of Goths opposing himself in battle, was miserably vanquished. Then the foresaid two captains with all good success proceeded even to Castilia, and sacked the city of Toledo, where amongst much other treasure, they found many relics of the saints, and the very same table whereat Christ sat with his blessed Apostles, which being covered with pure gold and adorned with great store of precious stones, was esteemed to be worth half a million of ducats, and this table Muse carrying with him as if it had been all the treasure in Spain, returned with his army over the sea, and bend his course toward Cairaoan. And being in the mean space sent for by the letters of Qualid Califa, he sailed into Egypt: but arriving at Alexandria, it was told him by one Hescian, brother unto the said Califa, that the Califa his brother was fallen into a most dangerous disease: wherefore he wished him not to go presently unto Damascus, for fear lest if the Califa died in the mean season, those rich and sumptuous spoils should be wasted and dispersed to no end. But Muse little regarding this counsel, proceeded on to Damascus, and presented all his spoils to the Califa, who within five days after deceased. After whom his brother succeeding Califa, deprived Muse of his dignity, and substituted one jezul into his room, whose son, brother, and nephews succeeding, governed the city of Cairaoan, till such time as the family of Qualid was deprived of that dignity, and one Elagleb was appointed lieutenant, who governed not the town as a Califa: from that time the Mahometan Califas leaving Damascus, removed unto Bagaded, as we find recorded in a certain Chronicle. After the decease of Elagleb, succeeded his son, and the government remained unto his posterity for an hundred threescore and ten years, till such time as they were deprived thereof by one Mahdi Califa. But at the same time when Elagleb was governor, the city of Cairaoan was so increased both with inhabitants, and buildings, that a town called Recheda was built next unto it, where the prince with his nobles used to remain. In his time also the Isle of Sicilia was won: for Elagleb The isle of Sicily subdued by the governor 〈◊〉. sent thither a certain captain called Halcama, who built upon the said Island a town in stead of a fort, call it according to his own name Halcama, which name is used by the Sicilians even till this present. Afterward this new town was besieged by certain people that came to aid the Sicilians. Whereupon one Ased was sent with an army, & so the Moors forces being augmented, they conquered the residue of Sicilia, by which means the dominions of Cairaoan began wonderfully to increase. The city of Cairaoan standeth upon a sandy and desert plain, which beareth no trees, nor yet any corn at all. Corn is brought thither from Susa, from Monaster, and from Mahdia, all which towns are within the space of forty miles. About twelve miles from Cairaoan standeth a certain mountain called Gueslet, where some of the romans buildings are as yet extant: this mountain aboundeth with springs of water and carobs, which springs run down to Cairaoan, where otherwise they should have no water but such as is kept in cisterns. Without the walls of this city rain water is to be found in certain cisterns only till the beginning of june. In summer time the Arabians use to resort unto the plains adjoining upon this town, who bring great dearth of corn and water, but exceeding plenty of dates and flesh with them, and that out of Numidia, which region is almost an hundred threescore and ten miles distant. In this city for certain years the study of the Mahometan law mightily flourished, so that here were the most famous lawyers in all Africa. It was at length destroyed, and replanted again with new inhabitants, but it could never attain unto the former estate. At this present it is inhabited by none but leatherdressers, who send their leather unto the cities of Numidia, and exchange it also for cloth of Europe. Howbeit they are so continually oppressed by the king of Tunis, that now they are brought unto extreme misery. Of the city of Capes. THis ancient city built by the romans upon the Mediterran sea, was fortified with most high and stately walls, and with a strong castle. Just by it runneth a certain river of hot and salted water. It hath continually been so molested by the Arabians, that the inhabitants abandoning their city, resorted unto certain plains replenished with great abundance of dates, which by a certain art are preserved all the year long. here is also digged out of the ground a kind of fruit about the bigness of a bean, and in taste resembling an almond. This fruit being ordinary The fruit called Habhaziz. over all the kingdom of Tunis, is called by the Arabians Habhaziz. The inhabitants of the foresaid plain are black people, being all of them either fishers, or husbandmen. Of the town called El Hamma. THis most ancient town founded also by the Romans, and being distant from Capes almost fifteen miles, is environed with most stately and strong walls: and upon certain marble stones therein are engraven divers monuments of antiquity. The streets and buildings of this town are very base, and the inhabitants miserable, and addicted to robbery. Their fields are barren and unprofitable, and will bring forth nought but certain unsavoury dates. A mile and a half to the south of this town A river 〈◊〉 hot water. beginneth a certain river of hot water to spring, which being brought through the midst of the city by certain channels is so deep, that it will reach up to a man's navel: howbeit by reason of the extreme heat of the water, there are but few that will enter thereinto. And yet the inhabitants use it for drink, having set it a cooling almost an whole day. At length this river not far from the town maketh a certain lake, which is called the lake of lepers: The lake of lepers. for it is of wonderful force to heal the disease of leprosy, and to cure leprous sores: wherefore near unto it are divers cottages of lepers, some of whom are restored to their health. The said water tasteth in a manner like brimstone, so that it will nothing at all quench a man's thirst, whereof I myself have had often trial. Of the castle of Machres. THe castle of Machres was built by the Africans in my time upon the entrance of the gulf of Capes, to defend the same region from the invasion of the enemy. It is almost five hundred miles distant from the isle of Gerbi. All the inhabitants are either weavers, shipwrights, or fishermen, and have traffic & recourse over all the foresaid isle. They have all the same language that the people of the isle of Gerbi use: but because they want grounds and possessions, all of them, save the weavers, live only upon theft & robbery. Of the isle of Gerbior Zerbi, where john Leo the Author of this History was taken by Italian pirates, and carried thence to Rome. THis isle being near unto the firm land of Africa, and consisting of a plain and sandy ground, aboundeth exceedingly with dates, vines, olives, and other fruits, and containeth about eighteen miles in compass. It hath also certain farms and granges, which are so far distant asunder, that you shall scarce find two or three in one village. Their ground is dry and barren, which though it be never so well tilled, will yield but a little barley. And here corn and flesh is always at an 〈◊〉 rate. At the sea shore standeth a strong castle, wherein the governor of the whole Island and his retinue have their abode. Not far from hence there is a certain village, where the Christian, Mauritanian, and Turkish merchants have their place of residence; in which place there is a great market or fair weekly kept, whither all the merchants of the Island and many Arabians from the main land with great store of cattle and wool do resort. The inhabitants of the Isle bring cloth thither to sell, which they themselves make, and this cloth together with great store of raisins they usually transport unto Tunis, and Alexandria to be sold. Scarce fifty years since this Isle was invaded and conquered by Christians: but it was immediately recovered by the king of Tunis. And presently after (new colonies being here planted) the foresaid castle was re-edified; which the kings of Tunis afterward enjoyed. But after the death of king Hutmen the Islanders returned to their former liberty, and presently broke the bridge from the Island to the main land, fearing lest they should be invaded by some land-army. Not long after the said Islanders slaying the king of Tunis his governors of the Isle, have themselves continued governors thereof till this present. Out of this Island is gathered the sum of fourscore thousand Dobles (every Doble containing an Italian ducat, and one third part) for yearly tribute, by reason of the great concourse and resort of the merchants of Alexandria, Turkey, and Tunis. But now because they are at continual dissension and controversy, their estate is much impaired. In my time Don Ferdinando king The army of don Ferdinando defeated. of Spain, sent a great armada against this Island, under the conduct of the duke of Alva, who not knowing the nature of the same, commanded his soldiers to land a good distance from thence: but the Moors so valiantly defended their Island, that the Spaniards were constrained to give back: and so much the greater was their distress, in that they could not find water sufficient to quench their extreme thirst. Moreover at the Spaniards arrival it was a full tide, but when they would have returned on board, it was so great an ebb, that their ships were constrained to put to sea, lest they should have been cast upon the sholdes. The shore was dry for almost four miles together, so that the Spanish soldiers were put unto great toil, before they could come to the waters side. And the Moors pursued them so eagerly, that they slew and took prisoners the greatest part of them, and the residue escaped by shipping into Sicilia. afterward the Emperor Gerbi made tributary unto Charles the fifth by means of a knight of the Rhodes. Charles the fifth sent a mighty fleet thither under the conduct of a Rhodian knight of the order of Saint john de Messina, who so discreetly behaved himself in that action, that the Moors compounded to pay five thousand Dobles for yearly tribute, upon condition of the emperors league and good will, which yearly tribute is paid until this present. Of the town of Zoara. THis town built by the Africans upon the Mediterran sea, standeth eastward from the Isle of Gerbi almost fifty miles. The town wall is weak, and the inhabitants are poor people, being occupied about nothing but making of lime and plaistring, which they sell in the kingdom of Tripoli. Their fields are most barren: and the inhabitants have continually been molested by the invasions of the Christians, especially since the time that they won Tripoli. Of the town of Lepide. THis ancient town founded by the Romans, and environed with most high and strong walls, hath twice been sacked by the mahometans, and of the stones and ruins thereof was Tripoli afterward built. Of the old city of Tripoli. Old Tripoli built also by the Romans, was after won by the Goths, and lastly by the mahometans, in the time of Califa Homar the second. Which Mahumetans having besieged the governor of Tripoli six months together, compelled him at length to flee unto Carthage. The citizens were partly slain, and partly carried captive into Egypt and Arabia, as the most famous African Historiographer Ibnu 〈◊〉 reporteth. Of the new city of Tripoli in Barbary. AFfter the destruction of old Tripoli, there was built another city of that name: which city being environed with most high and beautiful walls, but not very strong, is situate upon a sandy plain, which yieldeth great store of Dates. The houses Plenty of dates. of this city are most stately in respect of the houses of Tunis; and here also every trade and occupation hath a several place. weavers here are many. They have no wells nor fountains; but all their water is taken out of cisterns. Corn in this city is at an exceeding rate; for all the fields of Tripoli are as sandy and barren as the fields of Numidia. The reason whereof is, for that the principal and fattest grounds of this region are overflowed with the sea. The inhabitants of this region affirm, that the greatest part of their fields northward are swallowed up by the Mediterran sea, the like whereof is to be seen in the territories of Monaster, Mahdia, Asfacoes, Capes, the Isle of Gerbi, and other places more eastward, where the sea for the space of a mile is so shallow, that it will scarce reach unto a man's navel. Yea, some are of opinion, that the city of Tripoli itself was situate in times past more to the north, but by reason of the continual inundations of the sea, it was built and removed by little and little southward; for proof whereof there stand as yet ruins of houses drowned in certain places of the sea. In this city were many fair temples and colleges built, and an hospital also for the maintenance of their own poor people, and for the entertainment of strangers. Their fare is very base and homely, being only the forenamed Besis made of barley meal: for that region affordeth so small quantity even of barley, that he is accounted a wealthy man that hath a bushel or two of corn in store. The citizens are most of them merchants; for Tripoli standeth near unto Numidia and Tunis, neither is there any city or town of account between it and Alexandria: neither is it far distant from the Isles of Sicilia and Malta: and unto the port of Tripoli Venetian ships yearly resort, and bring thither great store of merchandise. This city hath always been subject unto the king of Tunis: but when Abulhasen the king of Fez besieged Tunis, the king of Tunis was constrained with his Arabians to flee into the deserts. Howbeit when Abulhasen was conquered, the king of Tunis returned to his kingdom: but his subjects began to oppose themselves against him: and so that commonwealth was afterward grievously turmoiled with civil dissensions and wars. Whereof the king of Fez having intelligence, marched the fifth year of the said civil war with an army against the city of Tunis, and having vanquished the king thereof, and constrained him to flee unto Constantina, he so straightly besieged him, that the citizens of Constantina seeing themselves not able to withstand the king of Fez, opened their city gates to him and to all his army. Whereupon the king of Tunis was carried captive unto Fez, and was afterward kept a while prisoner in the castle of Septa. In the mean season Tripoli was by a Genovese fleet 〈◊〉 taken by a fleet of 〈◊〉. of twenty sails surprised and sacked, and the inhabitants carried away captive. Whereof the king of Fez being advertised, gave the Genoveses fifty thousand ducats, upon condition, that he mightenjoy the town in peace. But the Genoveses having surrendered the town, perceived after their departure, that most part of their ducats were counterfeit. Afterward the king of Tunis being restored unto his former liberty by Abuselim king of Fez, returned home unto his kingdom, and so the government thereof remained unto him and his posterity, till Abubar the son of Hutmen together with his young son was slain in the castle of Tripoli by a nephew of his, who afterward usurped the kingdom: but he was slain in a battle which he fought against Habdul Mumen, who presently thereupon became Lord of Tripoli. After him succeeded his son Zacharias, who within a few months died of the pestilence. After Zacharias, Mucamen the son of Hesen and cousin to Zacharias was chosen king; who beginning to tyrannize over the citizens was by them expelled out of his kingdom: and afterward a certain citizen was advanced unto the royal throne, who governed very modestly. But the king which was before expelled sent an army of soldiers against Tripoli, who losing the field, were all of them put to flight. Afterward the king that began to reign so modestly, proved a very tyrant, and being murdered by his kinsman, the people made choice of a certain nobleman, leading as then an hermits life, and in a manner against his will appointed him their governor: and so the government of the city of Tripoli remained unto him and his posterity, till such time as king Ferdinando sent Don Pedro de Navarra against it: who Tripoli surprised by Pedro de Navarra. on the sudden encountering this city, carried away many captives with him. The governor of Tripoli and his son in law were sent prisoners unto Messina. Where, after certain years imprisonment, they were restored by the Emperor Charles the fifth unto their former liberty, and returned unto Tripoli, which town was afterward destroyed by the Christians. The castle of Tripoli being environed with most strong walls, begin (as I understand) to be replanted with new inhabitants. And thus much as concerning the cities of the kingdom of Tunis. Of the mountains belonging to the state of Bugia. THe territory of Bugia is full of ragged, high, and woody mountains: the inhabitants being a noble, rich, and liberal people, and possessing great store of goats, oxen and horses, have always continued in liberty, since the time that Bugia was surprised by the Christians. The people of these mountains use to have a black cross upon one of their cheeks, according to the ancient custom before mentioned. Their bread is made of barley, and they have abundance of nuts and figs upon those mountains, especially which are near unto Zoaoa: in some places of these mountains are certain mines of iron, whereof they make a kind of coin of half a Iron-mines. pound weight. They have also another sort of silver coin weighing four grains a piece: these mountains yield abundance of wine and hemp; but their linencloth that they weave is exceeding course. And these mountains of Bugia extend in length upon the coast of the Mediterran sea almost a hundred and fifty, and in breadth forty miles: each mountain containeth inhabitants of a divers kindred and generation from others, whom because they live all after one manner, we will pass over in silence. Of mount Auraz. THis exceeding high and populous mountain is inhabited with most barbarous people, that are wholly addicted unto robbery and spoil. From Bugia it is distant fourscore, and from Constantina almost threescore miles. Also being separated from other mountains it extendeth about threescore miles in length. Southward it bordereth upon the Numidian deserts, and northward upon the regions of Mesila, Stefe, Nicaus, and Constantina. From the very top of this mountain issue divers streams of water, which running down into the next plains, increase at length into a lake, the water whereof in summer time is salt. The passage unto this mountain is very difficult, in regard of certain cruel Arabians. Of the mountain of Constantina. ALl the north and west part of the territory belonging to the city of Constantina is full of high mountains, which beginning at the borders of Bugia, extend themselves to the Mediterran sea, even as far as Bona, that is to say, almost an hundred and thirty miles. Their fields upon the plains are replenished with olives, figs, and all other kinds of fruits, which are carried in great quantity unto the next towns and cities: all the inhabitants for civil demeanour excel the citizens of Bugia, and do exercise divers manuary arts, and weave great store of linen cloth. They are at continual dissension among themselves, by reason that their women will so often change husbands. They are exceeding rich, and free from all tribute: and yet dare they not till their plains, both for fear of the Arabians, and also of the governors of the next cities. Every week upon sundry days here is a market, greatly frequented with merchants of Constantina, & of other places: and whatsoever merchant hath no friend nor acquaintance dwelling upon the mountains, is in great hazard to be notably cozened. Upon these mountains they have neither judges, priests, nor yet any learned men: so that when any of the inhabitants would write a letter unto his friend, he must trudge up and down sometime twelve, and sometime fifteen miles to seek a scribe. Footmen for the wars they have almost forty thousand, and about four thousand horsemen. The inhabitants are men of such valour, that if they agreed among themselves, they would soon be able to conquer all Africa. Of the mountains of Bona. THe city of Bona hath on the north part the Mediterran sea, on the south and west parts certain mountains adjoining almost unto the mountains of Constantina, and on the east side it hath most fruitful fields and large plains, whereupon in times past were divers towns and castles, built by the Romans; the ruins whereof are now only remaining, and the names quite forgotten. All these regions by reason of the Arabians cruelty are so desolate, that they are inhabited but in very few places; and there they are constrained to keep out the Arabians by force of arms. The mountains of Bona extend in length from east to west almost fourscore miles, and in breadth about thirty miles. here are great store of fountains, from whence certain rivers issue, running through the plains into the Mediterran sea. Of the mountains standing near unto 〈◊〉. THe city of Tunis standing upon a plain hath no mountains nigh unto it, but only on the west side towards the Meditterran sea, where it hath a mountain like unto that which environeth Carthage. near unto Tunis standeth another high and cold mountain called Zagoan: inhabitants here are none at all but a few that tend the Bee-hives, and gather some quantity of barley. Upon the top of this mountain the romans built certain forts, the ruins whereof are yet to be seen, having 〈◊〉 engraven upon them in Latin letters. From this mountain unto Carthage, water is conveyed by certain passages under the ground. Of the mountains of Beni Tefren and Nufusa. THese high and cold mountains are distant from the desert, from Gerbi, and from Asfacus almost thirty miles, and yield very small store of barley. The inhabitants being valiant, and renouncing the law of Mahumet, do follow the doctrine of the patriarch of Cairaoan in most points, neither is there any other nation among the Arabians that observe the same doctrine. In Tunis and other cities these people earn their living by most base occupations, neither dare they openly profess their religion. Of mount Garian. THis high and cold mountain containing in length forty & in breadth fifteen miles, and being separated from other mountains by a sandy desert, is distant from Tripoli almost fifty miles. It yieldeth great plenty of barley and of dates, which unless they be spent while they are new, will soon prove rotten. here are likewise abundance of olives: Wherefore from this mountain unto Alexandria and other cities there is much oil conveyed. There is not better saffron to be found in any part of the Most 〈◊〉 saffron. world beside, which in regard of the goodness is sold very dear. For yearly tribute there is gathered out of this mountain threescore thousand ducats, and as much saffron as fifteen mules can carry. They are continually oppressed with the exactions of the Arabians, and of the king of Tunis. They have certain base villages upon this mountain. Of mount Beni Guarid. THis mountain being almost an hundred miles distant from Tripoli, is inhabited with most valiant & stout people, which live at their own liberty, and are at continual war with the people of the next mountains, & of the Numidian desert. Of the castle called Casr Acmed. THis castle built upon the Mediterran sea by a captain which came with an army into Africa, standeth not far from Tripoli, and was at the last laid waste by the Arabians. Of the castle of 〈◊〉. THe castle of Subeica erected about the same time when the mahometans came into Africa, was in times passed well furnished with inhabitants, being afterward destroyed by the Arabians, and now it 〈◊〉 a few fishers only. Of the Castle called Casr Hessin. THis castle was founded by the mahometans upon the Mediterran sea, and was afterward destroyed by the Arabians. Here endeth the fifth book. JOHN LEO HIS six BOOK OF the History of Africa, and of the memorable things contained therein. Of the village called Gar. Having hitherto entreated of the mountains, it now remaineth that we say somewhat as touching 〈◊〉 villages, hamlets, and territories: and afterward we will describe in order the cities of Numidia. And first the village of Gar, situate upon the Mediterran sea, and abounding with dates, offereth itself: the fields thereto belonging are dry and barren, and yet bring they forth some quantity of barley for the sustenance of the inhabitants. Of Garell Gare. IT is a certain little territory or Grange, containing caves of a marvelous depth, whence (they say) the stones were taken wherewith old Tripoli was built, because it is not far distant from that city. Of the village of Sarman. THis large village standing not far from old Tripoli, aboundeth with dates, but no corn will grow there. Of the village called Zaviat Ben jarbuh. THis village being situate near unto the Mediterran sea, yieldeth great plenty of dates, but no corn at all, and is inhabited by certain religious persons. Of the village of Zanzor. THis village also standing near unto the Mediterran sea, within twelve miles of Tripoli, is inhabited by sundry artificers, and aboundeth with great store of dates, pomegranates, and peaches. The inhabitants have been very miserable ever since Tripoli was taken by the Christians; and yet they traffic with the citizens of Tripoli, and carry dates thither to sell. Of the village of Hamrozo. IT standeth six miles from Tripoli, and the gardens there of bring forth great plenty of dates, and of all other kind of fruits. Of the plain of Taiora. THis plain standing two miles eastward of Tripoli, containeth many granges exceedingly replenished with dates and other fruits. The surprise of Tripoli was very profitable for this place, for then many principal citizens fled hither for refuge. The inhabitants being ignorant and rude people, and altogether addicted to theft and robbery, build their cottages with the boughs of palmtrees. Their food is barley bread, and Bezin before described: all round about are subject unto the king of Tunis and the Arabians, save those only that inhabit upon this plain. Of the Province of Mesellata. THis Province standing upon the Mediterran sea about five and thirty miles from Tripoli, and being fraught with rich villages, castles, and inhabitants, aboundeth also with great plenty of olives and dates. The inhabitants being free from all foreign authority, have a Captain among themselves, which governeth their commonwealth, and fighteth their battles against the Arabians: and the soldiers of this Province are about 5000. Of the Province of Mesrata. THis Province being situate also upon the Mediterran sea, about an hundredth miles from Tripoli, hath many villages both upon the plains and mountains. The inhabitants are rich and pay no tribute at all, and exercise traffic with the Venetians resorting to this Province with their galleys, carrying the Venetian wares to Numidia, and there exchanging the same for slaves, musk, and civet, which is brought thither out of Ethiopia. Of the desert of Barca. THis desert beginning at the utmost frontier of Mesrata, and extending eastward as far as the confines of Alexandria, containeth in length a thousand and three hundredth, and in breadth about 200. miles. It is a rough and unpleasant place, being almost utterly destitute of water and corn. Before the Arabians invaded Africa, this region was void of inhabitants: but now certain Arabians lead here a miserable and hungry life, being a great way distant from all places of habitation: neither have they any corn growing at all. But corn and other necessaries are brought unto them by sea from Sicilia, which that every of them may purchase, they are constrained to lay their sons to gage, and then go rob and rifle travelers to redeem them again. Never did you hear of more cruel and bloody The Arabians of Barca most cruel and bloody thieves. thieves; for after they have robbed merchants of all their goods and apparel, they power warm milk down their throats, hanging them up by the heels upon some tree, and forcing them to cast their gorge, wherein the lewd varlets search diligently for gold, suspecting that the merchants swallowed up all their crowns before they entered that dangerous desert. Of the city of Tesset in Numidia. IN the first Book of this present discourse we said that Numidia was accounted by the African Cosmographers the basest part of all Africa, and there we alleged certain reasons for the same purpose: we signified also in the second Book, writing of the Province of Hea, that certain cities of Numidia stood near unto mount Atlas. Howbeit * Error. Sus, Guzula, Helchemma, and Capes, are within the kingdom of Tunis, albeit some would have them situate in Numidia. But myself following the opinion of Ptolemey, suppose Tunis to be a part of Barbary. Being therefore about to describe all the cities and towns of Numidia, I will first begin with Tesset: which ancient town built by the Numidians near unto the Libyan deserts, and environed with walls of sunne-dried brick, deserveth scarcely the name of a town; and yet containeth four hundred families. It is compassed round about with sandy plains, saving that near unto the town grow some store of dates, of mill-seed, and of barley, which the miserable townsmen use for food. They are constrained also to pay large tribute unto the 〈◊〉 inhabiting the next deserts. They exercise traffic in the land of Negroes and in Guzula, insomuch that they spend most of their time in foreign regions. They are of a black colour, and destitute of all learning. The women indeed teach their young children the first rudiments of learning, but before they can attain to any perfection, they are put to labour, and to the ploughtail. The said women are somewhat whiter than other women: some of them get their living by spinning and carding of wool, and the residue spend their time in idleness. Such as are accounted richest in this region, possess but very few cattle. They till their ground with an horse and a camel, which kind of ploughing is observed throughout all Numidia. Of the village of 〈◊〉. THis village situate upon the Numidian desert near unto Libya, is inhabited by most miserable and gross people. Here groweth nothing but dates: and the inhabitants are at such enmity with their neighbours, that it is dangerous for them to go abroad. Howbeit they give themselves The beast called 〈◊〉. to hunting, and take certain wild beasts called Elamth, and ostriches, neither do they eat any other flesh. All their goats they reserve for milk. And these people also are black of colour. Of the castles of Ifran. Four castles there are called by this name, built by the Numidians three miles each from other upon a certain river, which in the heat of summer is destitute of water. near unto these castles are certain fields greatly abounding with dates. The inhabitants are very rich, for they have traffic with the Portugals at the port of Gart Guessem, whose wares The port of Gart 〈◊〉. they 〈◊〉 to Gualata and Tombuto. These castles contain great store of inhabitants, which make certain brazen vessels to be sold in the land of Negroes: for they have coppermines in sundry places thereabout. Every Coppermines. castle hath a weekly market; but corn and flesh are at an extreme rate there. They go decently appareled, and have a fair temple to resort unto, and a judge also that decideth none but civil controversies: for criminal matters they use to punish with banishment only. Of the castles of Accha. THree castles of this name built upon the Numidian deserts not far from Lybia were in times passed well stored with inhabitants, but at length by civil wars they were utterly dispeopled. Afterward (all matters being pacified) there were, by the means of a certain religious man, who governed the same people, certain new colonies planted. Neither have the poor inhabitants any thing to do, but only to gather dates. Of the Province of Dara. THis Province beginning at mount Atlas extendeth itself southward by the deserts of Lybia almost two hundred and fifty miles, and the breadth thereof is very narrow. All the inhabitants dwell upon a certain river which is called by the name of the Province. This river sometime so overfloweth, that a man would think it to be a sea, but in summer it so diminisheth, that any one may pass over it on foot. If so be it overfloweth about the beginning of April, it bringeth great plenty unto the whole region: if not, there followeth great scarcity of corn. Upon the bank of this river there are sundry villages and hamlets, and divers castles also, which are environed with walls made of sunne-dried brick and mortar. All their beams and planchers consist of date-trees, being notwithstanding unfit for the purpose; for the wood of date-trees is not solid, but flexible and spongy. On either side of the said river for the space of five or six miles, the fields abound exceedingly with dates, which with good keeping will last many years: and as here are divers kinds of dates, so they are sold at sundry prices: for a bushel of some is worth a ducat, but others wherewith they feed their horses and camels, are scarce of a quarter so much value. Of The strange property of the palm or date-tree. date-trees some are male and some are female: the male bring forth flowers only, and the female fruit: but the flowers of the female will not open, unless the boughs and flowers of the male be joined unto them: And if they be not joined, the dates will prove stark nought and contain great stones. The inhabitants of Dara live upon barley and other gross meat: neither may they eat any bread but only upon festival days. Their castles are inhabited by goldsmiths and other artificers, and so are all the regions lying in the way from Tombuto to Fez: in this province also there are three or four proper towns, frequented by merchants and strangers, and containing many shops and temples. But the principal town called Beni Sabih, and inhabited with most valiant and liberal people, is divided into two parts, either part having a several captain or governor: which governors are oftentimes at great dissension, and especially when they moisten their arable grounds, by reason that they are so scanted of water. A merchant they will most courteously entertain a whole year together, and then friendly dismissing him, they will require nought at his hands, but will accept such liberality as he thinks good to bestow upon them. The said governors so often as they fall a skirmishing, hire the next Arabians to aid them, allowing them daily half a ducat for their pay and sometimes more, and giving them their allowance every day. In time of peace they trim their harquebusses, handguns, & other weapons: neither saw I ever (to my remembrance) more cunning harquebuziers then at this place. In this province groweth great store of Indigo being an herb like unto wild woad, and this Indigo. herb they exchange with the merchants of Fez and Tremisen for other wares. Corn is very scarce among them, and is brought thither from Fez and other regions, neither have they any great store of goats or horses, unto whom in stead of provender they give dates, and a kind of herb also which groweth in the kingdom of Naples, and is called by the Neapolitans Farfa. They feed their goats with the nuts or stones of their dates beaten to powder, whereby they grow exceeding fat, & yield great quantity of milk. Their own food is the flesh of camels and goats, being unsanorie and displeasant in taste. Likewise they kill and eat ostriches, the flesh whereof The flesh of the Ostrich. tasteth not much unlike to the flesh of a dunghill-cocke, saving that it is more tough and of a stronger smell, especially the ostriches leg, which consisteth of slimy flesh. Their women are fair, fat, and courteous: and they keep divers slaves which are brought out of the land of negroes. Of the province of Segelmesse. THis province called Segelmesse, according to the name of the principal city therein contained, beginneth not far from the town of Gherseluin, and stretcheth southward by the river of Ziz an hundred and twenty miles, even to the confines of the Libyan deserts. The said province is inhabited by certain barbarous people of the families of Zeneta, Zanhagia, and Haoara, and was in times past subject unto a certain prince, which bare rule over the same province only. Afterward it fell into the possession of king joseph of the Luntune-family, and then into the hands of one Muahidin, and not long after it was enjoyed by the king of Fez his son. But since that time, the prince of this region was slain in a rebellion, and the city of Segelmesse was destroyed, and till this day remaineth desolate. Afterward the inhabitants built certain castles, whereof some are at liberty, and others are subject to the Arabians. Of the province of Cheneg. THis region extending itself by the river of Ziz unto mount Atlas, containeth many castles, and bringeth forth great abundance of dates, which dates are but of small value. Their fields are barren and of little circuit, save only between the river Ziz and the foot of mount Atlas, where some store of barley useth to grow. The inhabitants are some of them subject to the Arabians, others to the city of Gherseluin, and the residue live at their own liberty. And unto these the high way leading from Segelmesse to Fez is subject, and they exact great tribute of the merchants traveling the same way. near unto the said high way stand three castles, the first whereof being situate upon an exceeding high rock, seemeth to touch the clouds. Under this castle there is a certain house where a guard of soldiers continually stand, who for the load of every camel that passeth by, demand one fourth part of a ducat. The second castle being fifteen miles distant from the first, standeth not upon an hill but on a plain, and is far more stately and rich then the former. The third castle called Tammaracrost is situate upon the common high way about twenty miles southward of the second. There are certain villages also, and other castles of meaner account. Corn is marvelous scarce among them: but they have goats great plenty, which in winter they keep in certain large caves, as in places of greatest safety, whereinto they enter by a most narrow passage. Likewise the entrance into this region for the space of forty miles is so narrow, that two or three armed men only may withstand mighty forces. Of the region of Matgara. THis region beginning southward from the region last described, containeth many castles built upon the river of Ziz, the principal whereof is called Helel, wherein remaineth the governor of the whole region being an Arabian by birth. The soldiers of this Arabian governor dwell in tents upon the plains: and he hath other soldiers attending upon his own person also, who will suffer no man to pass but under safe conduct, without depriving him of all his goods. Here are likewise divers other villages and castles, which not being worthy the naming I have of purpose omitted. Of the territory of Retel. REtel bordering upon the region last described, extendeth also fifty miles southward along the river of Ziz, even to the confines of Segelmesse. It containeth many castles, and yieldeth plenty of dates. The inhabitants are subject unto the Arabians, being extremely covetous, and so faint hearted, that an hundred of them dare scarce oppose themselves against ten Arabians: they till the Arabians ground also as if they were their slaves. The east part of Retel bordereth upon a certain desolate mountain, and the west part upon a desert and sandy plain, whereunto the Arabians returning home from the wilderness, do resort. Of the territory of Segelmesse. THis territory extending itself along the river of Ziz from north to south almost twenty miles, containeth about three hundred and fifty castles, besides villages and hamlets: three of which castles are more principal than the rest. The first called Tenegent, and consisting of a thousand and more families, standeth near unto the city of Segelmesse, and is inhabited with great store of artificers. The second called Tebuhasan, standeth about eight miles to the south of Tenegent, being furnished also with greater numbers of inhabitants, and so frequented with merchants, that there is not in that respect the like place to be found in all the whole region beside. The third called 〈◊〉 is resorted unto by sundry merchants, both jews and Moors. These three castles have three several governors, who are at great dissension among themselves. They will oftentimes destroy one another's channels, whereby their fields are watered, which cannot without great cost be repaired again. They will stow the palmtrees also to the very stocks: and unto them a company of lewd Arabians associate themselves. They coin both silver and gold-money: but their gold is not very special. Their silver coin weigheth four grains 〈◊〉, eighty of which pieces are esteemed to be worth one piece of their gold-coine. The jews and Arabians pay excessive tribute here. Some of their principal men are exceeding rich, and use great traffic unto the land of Negroes: whither they transport wares of Barbary, exchanging the same for gold and slaves. The greatest part of them live upon dates, except it be in certain places where Infinite numbers of Scorpions. some corn grow. Here are infinite numbers of scorpions, but no flies at all. In summertime this region is extremely hot, and then are the rivers so destitute of water, that the people are constrained to draw salt water out of certain pits. The said territory containeth in circuit about eighty miles, all which, after the destruction of Segelmesse, the inhabitants with small cost walled round about, to the end they might not be molested by continual inroads of horsemen. While they lived all at unity and concord, they retained their liberty: but since they fell to mutual debate, their wall was razed, and each faction invited the Arabians to help them, under whom by little and little they were brought in subjection. Of the town or city of Segelmesse. SOme are of opinion that this town was built by a certain Roman captain, who having conducted his troops forth of Mauritania, conquered all Numidia, and marching westward, built a town, and called it 〈◊〉, because it stood upon the borders of Messa, and was as it were the seal of all his victories, and afterward by a corrupt word it began to be called Segelmesse. The common people together with one of our African Cosmographers, called Bicri, suppose that this town was built by Alexander the great, for the relief of his sick and wounded soldiers. Which opinion seemeth not probable to me: for I could never read that Alexander the great came into any part of these regions. This town was situate upon a plain near unto the river of Ziz, and was environed with most stately and high walls, even as in many places it is to be seen at this present. When the mahometans came first into Africa, the inhabitants of this town were subject unto the family of Zeneta; which family was at length dispossessed of that 〈◊〉 by king joseph the son of Tesfin, of the family of Luntuna. The town itself was very gallantly built, and the inhabitants were rich, and had great traffic unto the land of negroes. here stood stately temples and colleges also, and great store of conducts, the water whereof was drawn out of the river by wheels. The air in this place is most temperate and wholesome, saving that in winter it aboundeth with overmuch moisture, which breedeth some diseases. But now since the town was destroyed, the inhabitants began to plant themselves in the next castles and villages, as we have before signified. I myself abode in this region almost seven months at the foresaid castle of Meniun. Of the castle of 〈◊〉. THis castle was built by the Arabians in a certain desert place, twelve miles southward of the town last described; and here they keep their wares free from the danger of their enemies. near unto this castle there is neither garden nor field, nor any other commodity, but only certain black stones and sand. Of the castle of Humeledegi. THis castle was built also by the Arabians upon a desert eighteen miles from Segelmesse, like as was the former. near unto it lieth a certain dry plain, so replenished with sundry fruits, that in beholding it a far off a man would think the ground were strewed with pome-citrons. Of the castle of Vmmelhefen. IT is a forlorn and base castle, founded by the Arabians also five and twenty miles from Segelmesse upon a desert, directly in the way from Segelmesse to Dara. It is environed with black walls, and continually guarded by the Arabians. All merchants that passeby, pay one fourth part of a ducat for every camels load. Myself traveling this way upon a time in the company of fourteen jews, and being demanded how many there were of us, we said thirteen, but after I began particularly to reckon, I found the fowerteenth and the fifteenth man amongst us, whom the Arabians would have kept prisoners, had we not affirmed them to be Mahumetans: howbeit not crediting our words, they examined them in the law of Mahumet, which when they perceived them indeed to understand, they permitted them to depart. Of the village of Tebelbelt. THis village standing in the Numidian desert, two hundred miles from Atlas, and an hundred southward of Segelmesse, is situate near unto three castles, well stored with inhabitants, and abounding with dates. Water and flesh is very scarce amongst them. They use to hunt and take Ostriches, and to eat the flesh of them: and albeit they have a trade unto the land of Negroes, yet are they most miserable and beggarly people, and subject to the Arabians. Of the province of Todga. THis little province standing upon a river of the same name, hath great plenty of dates, peaches, grapes, and figs. It containeth four castles and ten villages, the inhabitants being either husbandmen or lether-dressers. And it standeth westward of Segelmesse about forty miles. Of the region of Farcala. IT standeth also upon a river, and aboundeth with dates and other fruits, but corn is greatly wanting here. here are in this region three castles, and five villages. It standeth southward of mount Atlas an hundred, and of Segelmesse almost threescore miles. The poor inhabitants are subject to the Arabians. Of the region of Teserin. THis beautiful region situate upon a river, is distant from Farcala thirty, and from mount Atlas about threescore miles. Dates it yieldeth in abundance, and containeth villages to the number of fifteen, and six castles, together with the ruins of two towns, the names whereof I could by no means inquire. And the word Teserin in the African language signifieth a town. Of the region called Beni Gumi. THis region adjoining upon the river of Ghir, aboundeth greatly with dates. The inhabitants are poor and miserable, and buy horses at Fez, which they sell afterward unto merchants that travel to the land of negroes. It containeth eight castles, and fifteen villages, and standeth southeast of Segelmesse about an hundred and fifty miles. Of the castles of Mazalig and Abuhinan. THey are situate in the Numidian desert upon the river of Ghir, almost fifty miles from Segelmesse. Inhabited they are by certain beggarly Arabians: neither doth the soil adjacent yield any corn at all, and but very few dates. Of the town of Chasair. THis town standing upon the desert of Numidia twenty miles from Atlas, hath mines of lead and antimony near unto it, whereby the inhabitants Mines of lead and antimony. get their living; for this place yieldeth none other commodity. Of the region of Beni Besseri. THis little region situate at the foot of mount Atlas, and abounding with all kind of fruits save dates, will bear no corn at all. It containeth three castles and a certain iron-mine, which serveth all the province An iron-mine. of Segelmesse with iron. Villages here are but few, which are subject partly to the prince of Dubdu, and partly to the Arabians; and all the inhabitants employ themselves about working in the foresaid iron-mine. Of the region of 〈◊〉. THis region standing seventy miles southward of Segelmesse hath three castles and sundry villages situate upon the river of Ghir. Dates it yieldeth great plenty, and but very little corn. The inhabitants exercise traffic in the land of Negroes; and are all subject, and pay tribute to the Arabians. Of the castles of Fighig. THe three castles of Fighig stand upon a certain desert marvelously abounding with dates. The women of this place weave a kind of cloth in form of a carpet, which is so fine, that a man would take it to be silk, and this cloth they sell at an excessive rate at Fez, Telensin, and other places of Barbary. The inhabitants being men of an excellent wit, do part of them use traffic to the land of Negroes, and the residue become students at Fez: and so soon as they have attained to the degree of a doctor, they return to Numidia, where they are made either priests or senators, and prove most of them men of great wealth and reputation. From Segelmesse the said castles are distant almost an hundred and fifty miles eastward. Of the region of Tesebit. THe region of Tesebit being situate upon the Numidian desert, two hundred and fifty miles eastward of Segelmesse, and an hundred miles from mount Atlas, hath four castles within the precincts thereof, and many villages also, which stand upon the confines of Lybia, near unto the high way that leadeth from Fez and Telensin to the kingdom of Agadez and to the land of negroes. The inhabitants are not very rich, for all their wealth consisteth in dates, and some small quantity of corn. The men of this place are black, but the women are somewhat fairer, and yet they are of a swart and brown hue. Of the region of Tegorarin. THis great and large region of the Numidian desert standing about an hundred and twenty miles eastward of Tesebit, containeth fifty castles, and above an hundred villages, and yieldeth great plenty of dates. The inhabitants are rich, and have ordinary traffic to the land of negroes. Their fields are very apt for corn, and yet by reason of their extreme drought, they stand in need of continual watering and dunging. They allow unto stranger's houses to dwell in, requiring no money for rend but only their dung, which they keep most charily: yea they take it in ill part if any stranger easeth himself without the doors. Flesh is very scarce among them: for their soil is so dry, that it will scarce nourish any cattle at all: they keep a few goats indeed for their milks sake: but the flesh that they eat is of camels, which the Arabians bring unto their markets to sell: they mingle their meat with salt tallow, which is brought into this region from Fez & Tremizen. There were in times past many rich jews in this region, who by the means of a certain Mahometan preacher, were at length expelled, and a great part of them slain by the seditious people; and that in the very same year when the jews were expelled out of Spain and Sicily. The inhabitants of this region having one only governor of their own nation, are notwithstanding often subject to civil contentions, and yet they do not molest other nations: howbeit they pay certain tribute unto the next Arabians. Of the region of Meszab. THis region being situate upon the Numidian desert, 300. miles eastward from Tegorarin, and 300. miles also from the Mediterran sea, containeth six castles, and many villages, the inhabitants being rich, and using traffic to the land of negroes. Likewise the Negro-merchants, together with them of Bugia and Ghir make resort unto this region. Subject they are and pay tribute unto the Arabians. Of the town of Techort. THe ancient town of Techort was built by the Numidians upon a certain hill, by the foot whereof runneth a river, upon which river standeth a drawbridge. The wall of this town was made of free stone and lime, but that part which is next unto the mountain 〈◊〉 instead of a wall an impregnable rock opposite against it: this town is distant 〈◊〉 hundred miles southward from the Mediterran sea, and 〈◊〉 300. miles from 〈◊〉. Families it containeth to the number of five and twenty hundred: all the houses are built of sunne-dried bricks, except their temple which is somewhat more stately. here dwell great store both of gentlemen and artificers: and because they have great abundance of dates, and are destitute of corn, the merchants of Constantina exchange corn with them for their dates. All strangers they favour exceedingly, and friendly dismiss them without paying of aught. They had rather match their daughters unto strangers, then to their own citizens: and for a dowry they give some certain portion of land, as it is accustomed in some places of Europe. So great and surpassing is their liberality, that they will heap many gifts upon strangers, albeit they are sure never to see them again. At the first they were subject to the king of Maroco, afterward to the king of Telensin, and now to the king of Tunis, unto whom they pay fifty thousand ducats for yearly tribute, upon condition that the king himself come personally to receive it. The king of Tunis that now is, demanded a second tribute of them. Many castles, and villages, and some territories there be also, which are all subject unto the prince of this town: who collecteth an hundred and thirty thousand ducats of yearly revenues, and hath always a mighty garrison of soldiers attending upon him, unto whom he alloweth very large pay. The governor at this present called Habdulla, is a valiant and liberal young prince, and most courteous unto strangers, whereof I myself conversing with him for certain days, had good experience. Of the city of Guargala. THis ancient city founded by the Numidians, and environed with strong walls upon the Numidian desert, is built very sumptuously, and aboundeth exceedingly with dates. It hath some castles and a great number of villages belonging thereunto. The inhabitants are rich, because they are near unto the kingdom of Agadez. here are divers merchants of Tunis and Constantina, which transport wares of Barbary unto the land of negroes. And because flesh and corn is very scarce among them, they live upon the flesh of Ostriches and camels. They are all of a black colour, and have black slaves, and are people of a courteous and liberal disposition, and most friendly and bountiful unto strangers. A governor they have whom they reverence as if he were a king: which governor hath about two thousand horsemen always attending upon him, and collecteth almost fifteen thousand ducats for yearly revenue. Of the province of Zeb. ZEb a province situate also upon the Numidian desert, beginneth westward from Mesila, northward from the mountains of Bugia, eastward from the region of dates over against Tunis, and southward it bordereth upon a certain desert, over which they travail from Guargala to Techort. This region is extremely hot, sandy, and destitute both of water and corn: which wants are partly supplied by their abundance of dates. It containeth to the number of five towns and many villages, all which we purpose in order to describe. Of the town of Pescara. THis ancient town built by the Romans while they were lords of Mauritania, and afterward destroyed by the mahometans at their first entrance into Africa; is now re-edified, stored with new inhabitants, and environed with fair and stately walls. And albeit the townsmen are not rich, yet are they lovers of civility. Their soil yieldeth nought but dates. They have been governed by divers princes; for they were a while subject unto the kings of Tunis, and that to the death of king Hutmen, after whom succeeded a Mahometan priest: neither could the kings of Tunis ever since that time recover the dominion of Pescara. Here are great abundance of Deadly scorpions. scorpions, and it is present death to be stung by them: wherefore all the townsmen in a manner depart into the country in summer time, where they remain till the month of November. Of the city of Borgi. ANother town there is also called Borgi, which standeth about fowerteene miles eastward of Pescara. here are a great many of artificers, but more husbandmen. And because water is very scarce in this region, and yet their fields stand in need of continual watering, every man may convey water into his field by a certain sluice, for the space of an hour or two, according to the breadth or length of his ground; and after one hath done watering his ground, his next neighbour beginneth, which oftentimes breedeth great contention and bloodshed. Of the town of Nefta. NEfta is the name of the town itself, and also of the territory adjacent; which territory containeth three castles, the greatest whereof seemeth by the manner of building to have been founded by the Romans. Inhabitants here are great store, being very rustical and uncivil people. In times past they were exceeding rich, for they dwell near unto Lybia, in the very way to the land of Negroes: howbeit by reason of their perpetual hostility with the kings of Tunis, the king of Tunis that now is destroyed their town; and themselves he partly slew, and partly put to flight. Likewise he so defaced the walls and other buildings, that now a man would esteem it to be but a base village. Not far from hence runneth a certain river of hot water, which serveth them both to drink, and to water their fields withal. Of the town of Teolacha. IT was built by the Numidians, and compassed with slender walls, and hath a river of hot water also running thereby. The fields adjacent yield plenty of dates, but great scarcity of corn. The miserable inhabitants are oppressed with continual exactions, both by the Arabians, and also by the king of Tunis. Yet are they extremely covetous and proud, and disdainful unto strangers. Of the town of Deusen. DEusen a very ancient town, founded by the Romans in the same place where the kingdom of Bugia joineth to Numidia, was destroyed by the mahometans at their first entrance into Africa, because of a certain Roman captain, which endured the Saracens siege for a whole year together: the town being at length taken, this captain and all the men of the town were put to the sword, but the women and children were carried away captive. Howbeit after the town was sacked, the wall thereof remained entire, by reason it was built of most hard stone, and that a wonderful thickness, though in some places it seemeth to be ruined, which (I think) might be caused by an earthquake. Not far from this town are divers monuments of antiquity like unto sepulchres, wherein are found sundry pieces of silver coin, adorned with certain letters and hieroglyphical figures, the interpretation whereof I could never find out. Of the province of Biledulgerio. FRom the territory of Pescara this province extendeth itself unto the Isle of Gerbi, and one part thereof, in which Cafsa and Teusar are situate, is almost three hundred miles distant from the Mediterran sea. It is an extreme hot and dry place, bringing forth no corn at all, but great plenty of dates, which because they are special good, are transported unto the kingdom of Tunis. Here are divers towns and cities, which we will describe in their due place. Of the town of Teusar. THis ancient town built by the Romans upon the Numidian desert, near unto a certain river springing forth of the southern mountains, was environed with most stately & impregnable walls, and had an ample territory thereunto belonging; but it was since so destroyed by the mahometans, that now instead of the wonted sumptuous palaces thereof it containeth nought but base cottages. The inhabitants are exceeding rich both in wares and money, for they have many fairs every year; whereunto resort great numbers of merchants from Numidia and Barbary. The foresaid river divideth the town into two parts, one whereof being inhabited by the principal gentlemen and burgo-masters, is called Fatnasa: and in the other called Merdes dwell certain Arabians, which have remained there ever since the town was destroyed by the mahometans. They are at continual civil wars among themselves, and will perform but little obedience to the king of Tunis: for which cause he dealeth always most rigorously with him. Of the town of Caphsa. THE ancient town of Caphsa built also by the Romans, had for certain years a governor of their own: but afterward being sacked by one Hucba a Captain of Hutmen Califa, the walls thereof were razed to the ground; but the castle as yet remaineth, and is of great force; for the wall thereof being five and twenty cubits high, and five cubits thick, is made of excellent stones, like unto the stones of Vespasians Amphitheatre at Rome. Afterward the towne-walles were re-edified, and were destroyed again by Mansor, who having slain the Governor of the town and all the inhabitants, appointed a new Governor over the same place. Now this town is very populous, all the houses thereof, except the temple and a few other buildings, being very deformed and base, and the streets are paved with black stones, like unto the streets of Naples and Florence. The poor inhabitants are continually oppressed with the exactions of the king of Tunis. In the midst of the town are certain square, large, and deep fountains walled round about, the water whereof is hot and unfit to be drunk, unless it be set an hour or two a cooling. The air of this place is very unwholesome, insomuch that the greatest part of the inhabitants are continually sick of fevers. People they are of a rude and illiberal disposition, and unkind unto strangers: wherefore they are had in great contempt by all other Africans. Not far from this town are fields abounding with dates, olives, and pome-citrons: and the dates and olives there are the best in all the whole province: here is likewise most excellent oil. The inhabitants make themselves shoes of bucks leather. Of the castles of Nefzaoa. THree castles there are of this name being well stored with inhabitants, but very homely built, and oppressed with the king of Tunis his continual exactions. And they are distant from the Mediterran sea, about fifty miles. Of the region of Teorregu. THis little territory belonging to the kingdom of Tripoli, & bordering upon the desert of Barca, containeth three castles of the same name, which abound greatly with dates, but have no corn at all. The inhabitants being far distant from other towns and cities, lead a most miserable life. Of the territory of jasliten. IT lieth upon the Mediterran sea, and containeth many villages abounding with dates. The inhabitants because they dwell so near the sea, have great traffic with the people of Sicily and Egypt. Of the region of Gademes. THis large region having many castles & villages therein, standeth southward of the Mediterran sea almost three hundred miles. The inhabitants being rich in dates and all other kind of merchandise, and trafficking into the land of Negroes, pay tribute unto the Arabians; albeit for a certain time they were subject unto the king of Tunis, and the Prince of Tripoli. Corn and flesh are marvelous scarce here. Of the region of Fezzen. THis ample region containing great store of castles and villages, and being inhabited with rich people, and bordering upon the kingdom of Agadez, the Libyan desert, and the land of Egypt, is distant from Cairo almost threescore days journey: neither is there any village in all that desert besides Augela, which standeth in the bounds of Libya. This region of Fezzen hath a peculiar governor within itself, who bestoweth the revenues of the whole region according to his own discretion, and payeth some tribute unto the next Arabians. Of corn and flesh here is great scarcity, so that they are constrained to eat camels flesh only. A description of the deserts of Libya, and first of Zanhaga. Having hitherto described all the regions of Numidia, letus now proceed unto the descriprion of Libya; which is divided into five parts, as we signified in the beginning of this our discourse. We will therefore begin at the dry and forlorn desert of Zanhaga, which bordereth westward upon the Ocean sea, and extendeth eastward to the salt-pits of Tegaza, northward it abutteth upon Sus, Haccha, and Dara, regions of Numidia; and southward it stretcheth to the land of Negroes, adjoining itself unto the kingdoms of Gualata and Tombuto. Water is here to be found scarce in an hundred miles' travel, being salt and unsavoury, and drawn out of deep wells, especially in the way from Segelmesse to Tombuto. Here are great store of wild beasts and creeping things, whereof we will make mention in place convenient. In this region there is a barren desert called Azaoad, wherein neither water nor any habitations are to be found in the space of an hundred miles; beginning from the well of Azaoad to the well of Araoan, which is distant from Tombuto about 150. miles. Here both for lack of water and extremity of heat, great numbers of men and beasts daily perish. Of the desert inhabited by the people called Zuenziga. THis desert beginneth westward from Tegaza, extending eastward to the desert of Hair which is inhabited by the people called Targa: northward it bordereth upon the deserts of Segelmesse, Tebelbelt, and Benigorai; and southward upon the desert of Ghir, which joineth unto the kingdom of Guber. It is a most barren and comfortless place: and yet merchants travel that way from Telensin to Tombuto: howbeit many are found lying dead upon the same way in regard of extreme thirst. Within this desert there is included another desert called Gogdem, where for the space of nine days journey not one drop of water is to be found, unless perhaps some rain falleth: wherefore the merchants use to carry their water upon camels backs. Of the desert inhabited by the people called Targa. THis desert beginneth westward upon the confines of Hair, and extendeth eastward to the desert of Ighidi; northward it bordereth upon the deserts of Tuath, Tegorarin, and Mezab, and is enclosed southward with a certain wilderness near unto the kingdom of Agadez. It is a place much more comfortable and pleasant than the two deserts last described; and hath great plenty of water also near unto Hair. The air is marvelous wholesome, and the soil aboundeth with all kind of herbs. Not far from Agadez there is Great store of Manna. found great store of Manna, which the inhabitants gather in certain little vessels, carrying it while it is new unto the market of Agadez: and this Manna being mingled with water they esteem very dainty and precious drink. They put it also into their pottage, and being so taken, it hath a marvelous force of refrigerating or cooling, which is the cause that here are so few diseases, albeit the air of Tombuto and Agadez be most unwholesome and corrupt. This desert stretcheth from north to south almost 300. miles. Of the desert inhabited by the people of Lemta. THE fourth desert beginning at the territory of Ighidi and extending to another which is inhabited by the people called Berdoa, bordereth northward upon the deserts of Techort, Guarghala, and Gademis, and southward upon the kingdom of Canon in the land of negroes. It is exceeding dry, and very dangerous for merchants traveling to Constantina. For the inhabitants challenge unto themselves the signiory of Guargala: wherefore making continual war against the prince of Guargala, they oftentimes spoil the merchants of all their goods; and as many of the people of Guargala as they can catch, they kill without all pity and compassion. Of the desert inhabited by the people called Berdoa. THE fifth desert beginning westward from the desert last mentioned, and stretching eastward to the desert of Augela, adjoineth northward upon the deserts of Fezzen and Barca, and trendeth southward to the desert 〈◊〉 Borno. This place is extremely dry also, neither have any but the Gademites, which are in league with the people of Berdoa, safe passage through it: for the merchants of Fezzen, so often as they fall into their enemies hands, are deprived of all their goods. The residue of the Libyan desert, that is to say, from Augela to the river of Nilus is inhabited by certain Arabians and Africans commonly called Levata: and this is the extreme easterly part of the deserts of Libya. Of the region of Nun. THis region bordering upon the Ocean sea, containeth many villages and hamlets, and is inhabited with most beggarly people. It standeth between Numidia and Libya, but somewhat nearer unto Libya. Here groweth neither barley nor any other corn. Some dates here are, but very unsavoury. The inhabitants are continually molested by the Arabians invasions: and some of them traffic in the kingdom of Gualata. Of the region of Tegaza. IN this region is great store of salt digged, being whiter than any marble. 〈◊〉- mines. This salt is taken out of certain caves or pits, at the entrance whereof stand their cottages that work in the salt-mines. And these workmen are all strangers, who sell the salt which they dig, unto certain merchants that carry the same upon camels to the kingdom of Tombuto, where there would otherwise be extreme scarcity of salt. Neither have the said diggers of salt any victuals but such as the merchants bring unto them: for they are distant from all inhabited places, almost twenty days journey, insomuch that oftentimes they perish for lack of food, when as the merchants come not in due time unto them: Moreover the southeast wind doth so often blind them, that they cannot live here without great peril. I myself continued three days amongst them, all which time I was constrained to drink salt-water drawn out of certain wells not far from the salt-pits. Of the region of 〈◊〉. AVgela being a region of the Libyan desert, and distant four hundred and fifty miles from Nilus, containeth three castles, and certain villages. Dates here are great plenty, but extreme scarcity of corn, unless it be brought hither by merchants out of Egypt. Through this region lieth the way by the Libyan desert from Mauritania to Egypt. Of the town of Serte. SErte an ancient town built (according to the opinion of some) by the Egyptians; of others, by the Romans; and (as some others suppose) by the Africans, was at length destroyed by the mahometans, albeit Ibnu Rachich affirmeth the Romans to have sacked it. But now there is nought remaining but only a few ruins of the wall. Of the region of Berdeoa. BErdeoa a region situate in the midst of the Libyan desert, and standing almost five hundred miles from Nilus, containeth three castles & five or six villages, abounding with most excellent dates. And the said three castles were discovered eighteen years ago by one Hamar in manner following: the carovan of merchants wandering out of the direct way, had a certain blind man in their company which was acquainted with all those regions: this blind guide riding foremost upon his camel, commanded A whole carovan conducted by a blind guide who lead them by sent only; as at 〈◊〉 present the Carovans of Maroco are conducted over the Libyan deserts to Tombuto. some sand to be given him at every miles end, by the smell whereof he declared the situation of the place: but when they were come within forty miles of this region, the blind man smelling of the sand, affirmed that they 〈◊〉 not far from some places inhabited; which some believed not, for they knew that they were distant from Egypt four hundred and eighty miles, so that they took themselves to be nearer unto Augela. Howbeit within three days they found the said three castles, the inhabitants whereof wondering at the approach of strangers, and being greatly astonished, presently shut all their gates, and would give the merchants no water to quench their extreme thirst. But the merchants by main force entered, and having gotten water sufficient, betook themselves again to their journey. Of the region of 〈◊〉. ALguechet also being a region of the Lybian desert, is from Egypt an hundred and twenty miles distant. Here are three castles and many villages abounding with dates. The inhabitants are black, vile, and covetous people, and yet exceeding rich: for they dwell in the mid way between Egypt and Gaoga. They have a governor of their own, notwithstanding they pay tribute unto the next Arabians. Here endeth the sixth book. JOHN LEO HIS SEVENTH BOOK OF the History of Africa, and of the memorable things contained therein. Wherein he entreateth of the land of Negroes, and of the confines of Egypt. Our ancient Chroniclers of Africa, to wit, Bichri and Meshudi knew nothing in the land of Negroes but only the regions of Guechet and Canon: for in their time all other places of the land of Negroes were undiscovered. But in the year of the Hegeira 380, by the means of a certain Mahometan which came into Barbary, the residue of the said land was found out, being as then inhabited by great numbers of people, which lived a brutish and savage life, without any king, governor, common wealth, or knowledge of husbandry. Clad they were in skins of beasts, neither had they any peculiar wives: in the day time they kept their cattle; and when night came they resorted ten or twelve both men and women into one cottage together, using hairy skins in stead of beds, and each man choosing his leman which he had most fancy unto. War they wage against no other nation, ne yet are desirous to travel out of their own country. Some of them perform great adoration unto the sun rising: others, namely the people of Gualata, worship the fire: and some others, to wit, the inhabitants of Gaoga, approach (after the Egyptians manner) nearer unto the Christian faith. These Negroes were The Negroes subject unto joseph king of Maroco. first subject unto king joseph the founder of Maroco, and afterward unto the five nations of Libya; of whom they learned the Mahometan law, and divers needful handicrafts: a while after when the merchants of Barbary began to resort unto them with merchandise, they learned the Barbarian language also. But the foresaid five people or nations of Libya divided this land so among themselves, that every third part of each nation possessed one region. Howbeit the king of Tombuto that now reigneth, called Abuacre Abuacre Izchia. Izchia, is a Negro by birth: this Abuacre after the decease of the former king, who was a Libyan borne, slew all his sons, and so usurped the kingdom. And having by wars for the space of fifteen years conquered many large dominions, he then concluded a league with all nations, and went on pilgrimage to Mecca, in which journey he so consumed his treasure, that he was constrained to borrow great sums of money of other princes. Moreover the fifteen kingdoms of the land of Negroes known to us, are all situate upon the river of Niger, and upon other rivers which fall thereinto. And all the land of negroes standeth between two vast deserts, for on the one side lieth the main desert between Numidia and it, which extendeth itself unto this very land: and the south side thereof adjoineth upon another desert, which stretcheth from thence to the main Ocean: in which desert are infinite nations unknown to us, both by reason of the huge distance of place, and also in regard of the diversity of languages and religions. They have no traffic at all with our people, but we have heard oftentimes of their traffic with the inhabitants of the Ocean sea shore. A description of the kingdom of Gualata. THis region in regard of others is very small: for it containeth only three great villages, with certain granges and fields of dates. From Nun it is distant southward about three hundred, from Tombuto northward five hundred, and from the Ocean sea about two hundred miles. In this region the people of Libya, while they were lords of the land of Negroes, ordained their chief princely seat: and then great store of Barbarie-merchants frequented Gualata: but afterward in the reign of the mighty and rich prince Heli, the said merchants leaving Gualata, began to resort unto Tombuto and Gago, which was the occasion that the region of Gualata grew extreme beggarly. The language of this region is called Sungai, and the inhabitants are black people, and most friendly unto strangers. In my time this region was conquered by the king of Tombuto, and the prince thereof fled into the deserts, whereof the king of Tombuto having intelligence, and fearing least the prince would return with all the people of the deserts, granted him peace, conditionally that he should pay a great yearly tribute unto him, and so the said prince hath remained tributary to the king of Tombuto until this present. The people agree in manners and fashions with the inhabitants of the next desert. Here groweth some quantity of Mil-seed, and great store This round and white pulse is called Maiz in the west Indies. of a round & white kind of pulse, the like whereof I never saw in Europe; but flesh is extreme scarce among them. Both the men & the women do so cover their heads, that all their countenance is almost hidden. Here is no form of a common wealth, nor yet any governors or judges, but the people lead a most miserable life. A description of the kingdom of Ghinea. THis kingdom called by the merchants of our nation Gheneoa, by the natural inhabitants thereof Genni, and by the Portugals and other people of Europe Ghinea, standeth in the midst between Gualata on the north, Tombuto on the east, and the kingdom of Melli on the south. In length it containeth almost five hundred miles, and extendeth two hundred The natural commodities of Ghinea. and fifty miles along the river of Niger, and bordereth upon the Ocean sea in the same place, where Niger falleth into the said sea. This place exceedingly aboundeth with barley, rice, cattle, fishes, and cotton: and their cotton they sell unto the merchants of Barbary, for cloth of Europe, for brazen vessels, for armour, and other such commodities. Their coin is of gold without any stamp or inscription at all: they have certain iron-money also, which they use about matters of small value, some pieces whereof weigh a pound, some half a pound, and some one quarter of a pound. In all this kingdome-there is no fruit to be found but only dates, which are brought hither either out of Gualata or Numidia. here is neither town nor castle, but a certain great village only, wherein the prince of Ghinea, together with his priests, doctors, merchants, and all the principal men of the region inhabit. The walls of their houses are built of chalk, and the roofs are covered with straw: the inhabitants are clad in black or blue cotton, wherewith they cover their heads also: but the priests and doctors of their law go appareled in white cotton. This region during the three months of julie, August, and September, is yearly environed with the overflowings of Niger in manner of an Island; all which time the merchants of Tombuto convey their merchandise hither in certain Canoas' or narrow boats made of one tree, which they row all the day long, but at night they bind them to the shore, and lodge themselves upon the land. This kingdom was subject in times passed unto a certain people of Libya, and became afterward tributary unto king Soni Heli, after The Prince of Ghinea kept prisoner by Izchia. whom succeeded Soni Heli Izchia, who kept the prince of this region prisoner at Gago, where together with a certain nobleman, he miserably died. Of the kingdom of Melli. THis region extending itself almost three hundred miles along the side of a river which falls into Niger, bordereth northward upon the region last described, southward upon certain deserts and dry mountains, westward upon huge woods and forests stretching to the Ocean sea shore, and eastward upon the territory of Gago. In this kingdom there is a large and ample village containing to the number of six thousand or more families, and called Melli, whereof the whole kingdom is so named. And here the king hath his place of residence. The region itself yieldeth great abundance of corn, flesh, and cotton. here are many artificers and merchants in all places: and yet the king honourably entertaineth all strangers. The inhabitants are rich, and have plenty of wares. here are great store of temples, priests, and professors, which professors read their lectures only in the temples, because they have no colleges at all. The people of this region excel all other Negroes in wit, civility, and industry; and were the first that embraced the law of Mahumet, at the same time when the uncle of joseph the king of Maroco was their prince, and the government The prince of M●lli subdued by Izchia. remained for a while unto his posterity: at length Izchia subdued the prince of this region, and made him his tributary, and so oppressed him with grievous exactions, that he was scarce able to maintain his family. Of the kingdom of Tombuto. THis name was in our times (as some think) imposed upon this kingdom Tombuto was conquered by the king of Maroco 1589. from whenc● he hath for yearly tribute mighty sums of gold. from the name of a certain town so called, which (they say) king Mensae Suleiman founded in the year of the Hegeira 610. and it is situate within twelve miles of a certain branch of Niger, all the houses whereof are now changed into cottages built of chalk, and covered with thatch. Howbeit there is a most stately temple to be seen, the walls whereof are made of stone and lime; and a princely palace also built by a most excellent workman of Granada. Here are many shops of artificers, and merchants, and especially of such as weave linen and cotton cloth. And hither do the Barbarie-merchants bring cloth of Europe. All the women of this region except maidservants go with their faces covered, and sell all necessary victuals. The inhabitants, & especially strangers there residing, are exceeding The king of Tombuto his daughters married unto two rich merchants. rich, insomuch, that the king that * 1526. now is, married both his daughters unto two rich merchants. Here are many wells, containing most sweet water; and so often as the river Niger overfloweth, they convey the water thereof by certain sluices into the town. Corn, cattle, milk, and butter Great scarcity of salt in Tombuto, which commodity might be supplied by our English merchants to their unspeakable gain. this region yieldeth in great abundance: but salt is very scarce here; for it is brought hither by land from Tegaza, which is five hundred miles distant. When I myself was here, I saw one camels load of salt sold for 80. ducats. The rich king of Tombuto hath many plates and sceptres of gold, some whereof weigh 1300. pounds: and he keeps a magnificent and well furnished court. When he traveleth any whither he rideth upon a camel, which is lead by some of his noblemen; and so he doth likewise when he Reverence used before the king of Tombuto. goeth to warfare, and all his soldiers ride upon horses. Whosoever will speak unto this king must first fall down before his feet, & then taking up earth must sprinkle it upon his own head & shoulders: which custom is ordinarily observed by them that never saluted the king before, or come as ambassadors from other princes. He hath always three thousand horsemen, Poisoned arrows. and a great number of footmen that shoot poisoned arrows, attending upon him. They have often skirmishes with those that refuse to pay tribute, and so many as they take, they sell unto the merchants of Tombuto. Here are very few horses bred, and the merchants and courtiers keep certain little nags which they use to travel upon: but their best horses are brought out of Barbary. And the king so soon as he heareth that any merchants are come to town with horses, he commandeth a certain number to be brought before him, and choosing the best horse for himself, he payeth a most liberal price for him. He so deadly hateth all jews, that he will not admit any into his city: and whatsoever Barbary merchants he understandeth to have any dealings with the jews, he presently causeth their goods to be confiscate. Here are great store of doctors, judges, priests, and other learned men, that are bountifully maintained at the king's cost and charges. And hither are brought divers manuscripts or written books out of Barbary, which are sold for more money than any other merchandise. The coin of Tombuto is of gold without any stamp or superscription: but in Shells used for coin like as in the kingdom of Congo. matters of small value they use certain shells brought hither out of the kingdom of Persia, four hundred of which shells are worth a ducat: and six pieces of their golden coin with two third parts weigh an ounce. The inhabitants are people of a gentle and cheerful disposition, and spend a great part of the night in singing and dancing through all the streets of the city: they keep great store of men and women slaves, and their town is much in danger of fire: at my second being there half the town almost was burnt in five hours space. Without the suburbs there are no gardens nor orchards at all. Of the town of Cabra. THis large town built without walls in manner of a village, standeth about twelve miles from Tombuto upon the river Niger: and here such merchants as travel unto the kingdoms of Ghinea and Melli 〈◊〉 themselves. Neither are the people or buildings of this town any 〈◊〉 inferior to the people and buildings of Tombuto: and hither the Negroes resort in great numbers by water. In this town the king of Tombuto appointeth a judge to decide all controverfies: for it were tedious to go 〈◊〉 so oft as need should require. I myself am acquainted with Abu Bacr, surnamed Pargama, the king's brother, who is black in colour, but most beautiful in mind and conditions. Here breed many diseases which exceedingly diminish the people; and that by reason of the fond and loathsome mixture of their meats; for they mingle fish, milk, butter, and flesh altogether. And this is the ordinary food also in Tombuto. Of the town and kingdom of Gago. THE great town of Gago being unwalled also, is distant southward of Tombuto almost four hundred miles, and inclineth somewhat to the southeast. The houses thereof are but mean, except those wherein the king and his courtiers remain. Here are exceeding rich merchants: and hither continually resort great store of Negroes which buy cloth here brought out of Barbary and Europe. This town aboundeth with corn and flesh, but is much destitute of wine, trees, and fruits. Howbeit here is plenty of melons, citrons, and rice: here are many wells also containing most sweet and wholesome water. Here is likewise a certain place where slaves are to be sold, especially upon such days as the merchants use to assemble; and a young slave of fifteen years age is sold for six ducats, and so are children sold also. The king of this region hath a certain private palace wherein he maintaineth a great number of concubines and slaves, which are kept by eunuchs: and for the guard of his own person he keepeth a sufficient troop of horsemen and footmen. Between the first gate of the palace and the inner part thereof, there is a place walled round about, wherein the king himself decideth all his subjects controversies: and albeit the king be in this function most diligent, and performeth all things thereto appertaining, yet hath he about him his counsellors & other officers, as namely his secretaries, treasurers, factors, and auditors. It is a wonder to see what plenty of Merchandise is daily brought hither, and how costly and sumptuous all things be. Horses bought in Europe for ten ducats, are here sold again for forty and sometimes for fifty ducats a piece. There is not any cloth of Europe so course, which will not here be sold for Rich sale for cloth. four ducats an elle, and if it be any thing fine they will give fifteen ducats for an ell: and an ell of the scarlet of Venice or of Turkie-cloath is here worth thirty ducats. A sword is here valued at three or four crowns, and so likewise are spurs, bridles, with other like commodities, and spices also are sold at an high rate: but of all other commodities salt is most extremely dear. The residue of this kingdom containeth nought but villages and hamlets inhabited by husbandmen and shepherds, who in winter cover their bodies with beasts skins; but in summer they go all naked save their privy members: and sometimes they wear upon their feet certain shoes made of camels leather. They are ignorant and rude people, and you shall scarce find one learned man in the space of an hundred miles. They are continually burdened with grievous exactions, so that they have scarce any thing remaining to live upon. Of the kingdom of Guber. IT standeth eastward of the kingdom of Gago almost three hundred miles; between which two kingdoms lieth a vast desert being much destitute of water, for it is about forty miles distant from Niger. The kingdom of Guber is environed withhigh mountains, and containeth many villages inhabited by shepherds, and other herdsmen. Abundance of cattle here are both great and small: but of a lower stature than the cattle in other places. here are also great store of artificers and linen weavers: and here are such shoes made as the ancient Romans were wont to wear, the greatest part whereof be carried to Tombuto and Gago. Likewise here is abundance of rice, and of certain other grain and pulse, the like whereof I never saw in Italy. But I think it groweth in some places of Spain. At the inundation Their manner of sowing 〈◊〉 at the 〈◊〉 of Niger. of Niger all the fields of this region are overflowed, and then the inhabitants cast their seed into the water only. In this region there is a certain great village containing almost six thousand families, being inhabited with all kind of merchants, and here was in times past the court of a certain king, who in my time was slain by Izchia the king of Tombuto, The 〈◊〉 of Guber slain by Izchia. and his sons were gelt, and accounted among the number of the king's eunuchs. Afterward he sent governors hither who mightily oppressed and impoverished the people that were before rich: and most part of the inhabitants were carried captive and kept for slaves by the said Izchia. Of the city and kingdom of Agadez. THe city of Agadez standing near unto Lybia was not long since walled round about by a certain king. The inhabitants are all whiter than other Negroes: and their houses are stately built after the fashion of Barbary. The greatest part of the citizens are foreign merchants, and the residue be either artificers, or stipendaries to the king. Every merchant hath a great many of servants and slaves, who attend upon them as they travel from Canon to Borno: for in that journey they are exceedingly molested by certain thieves called Zingani, insomuch that they dare not travel the Zingani. same way unless they be well appointed: in my time they used crossbows for their defence: when the said merchants be arrived at any town, they presently employ all their slaves about some business, to the end they may not live in idleness: ten or twelve they keep to attend upon themselves and their wares. The king of this city hath always a notable guard about him, and continueth for the most part at a certain palace in the midst of the city. He hath greatest regard unto his subjects that inhabit in the deserts and fields: for they will sometime expel their king and choose another: so that he which pleaseth the inhabitants of the desert best is sure to be king of Agadez. The residue of this kingdom lying southward is inhabited by shepherds and herdsmen, who dwell in certain cottages made of boughs, which cottages they carry about upon oxen from place to place. They erect their cottages always in the same field where they determine to feed their cattle; like as the Arabians also do. Such as bring merchandise out of Agadez tributary to the king of Tombuto. other places pay large custom to the king: and the king of Tombuto receiveth for yearly tribute out of this kingdom almost an hundred and fifty thousand ducats. Of the province of Cano. THe great province of Canon standeth eastward of the river Niger almost five hundred miles. The greatest part of the inhabitants dwelling in villages are some of them herdsmen and others husbandmen. here groweth abundance of corn, of rice, and of cotton. Also here are many deserts and wild woody mountains containing many springs of water. In these woods grow plenty of wild citrons and lemons, which differ not much in taste from the best of all. In the midst of this province standeth a town called by the same name, the walls and houses whereof are built for the most part of a kind of chalk. The inhabitants are rich merchants and most civil people. Their king was in times passed of great puissance, and had mighty troops of horsemen at his command; but he hath since been constrained The kings of Zegzeg, of Casena, and of Canon subdued by Izchia the king of Tombuto. to pay tribute unto the kings of Zegzeg and Casena. afterward Ischia the king of Tombuto feigning friendship unto the two foresaid kings treacherously slew them both. And then he waged war against the king of Canon, whom after a long siege he took, and compelled him to marry one of his daughters, restoring him again to his kingdom, 〈◊〉 that he should pay unto him the third part of all his tribute: and the said king of Tombuto hath some of his courtiers perpetually residing at Canon for the receipt thereof. Of the kingdom of Casena. CAsena bordering eastward upon the kingdom last described, is full of mountains, and dry fields, which yield notwithstanding great store of barley and mill-seed. The inhabitants are all extremely black, having great noses and blabber lips. They dwell in most forlorn and base cottages: neither shall you find any of their villages containing above three hundred families. And besides their base estate they are mightily oppressed with famine: a king they had in times past whom the foresaid Ischia Izchia. slew, since whose death they have all been tributary unto Ischia. Of the kingdom of Zegzeg. THe southeast part thereof bordereth upon Canon, and it is distant from Casena almost an hundred and fifty miles. The inhabitants are rich and have great traffic unto other nations. Some part of this kingdom is plain, and the residue mountainous, but the mountains are extremely cold, and the plains intolerably hot. And because they can hardly endure the sharpness of winter, they kindle great fires in the midst of their houses, laying the coals thereof under their high bedsteads, and 〈◊〉 betaking themselves to sleep. Their fields abounding with water, are exceeding fruitful, & their houses are built like the houses of the kingdom of Casena. They had a king of their own in times past, who being slain by Ischia (as is aforesaid) Izchia. they have ever since been subject unto the said Ischia. Of the region of Zanfara. THe region of Zanfara bordering eastward upon Zegzeg is inhabited by most base and rustical people. Their fields abound with rice, mill, The king of Zanfara slain by Izchia, and the people made tributary. and cotton. The inhabitants are tall in stature and extremely black, their visages are broad, and their dispositions most savage and brutish. Their king also was slain by Ischia, and themselves made tributary. Of the town and kingdom of Guangara. THis kingdom adjoineth southeasterly upon Zanfara, being very populous, and having a king reigning over it, which maintaineth a garrison of seven thousand archers, and five hundred horsemen, and receiveth yearly great tributes. In all this kingdom there are none but base villages, one only excepted, which exceedeth the rest both in largeness and fair building. The inhabitants are very rich, and have continual traffic with the nations adjoining. Southward thereof lieth a region greatly abounding with gold. But now they can have no traffic with foreign nations, for they Gold. are molested on both sides with most cruel enemies. For westward they are oppressed by Ischia, and eastward by the king of Borno. When I myself Izchia. was in Borno, king Abraham having levied an huge army, determined to expel the prince of Guangara out of his kingdom, had he not been hindered by Homar the prince of Gaoga, which began to assail the kingdom of Borno. Wherefore the king of Borno being drawn home into his own country, was enforced to give over the conquest of Guangara. So often as the merchants of Guangara travel unto the foresaid region abounding with gold, because the ways are so rough and difficult that their camels cannot go upon them, they carry their wares upon slaves backs; who being laden with great burdens do usually travel ten or twelve miles a day. Yea some I saw that made two of those journeys in one day: a wonder it is to see what heavy burdens these poor slaves are charged withal; for besides the merchandise they carry victuals also for their masters, and for the soldiers that go to guard them. Of the kingdom of Borno. THe large province of Borno bordering westward upon the province of Guangara, and from thence extending eastward five hundred miles, is distant from the fountain of Niger almost an hundred and fifty miles, the south part thereof adjoining unto the desert of Set, and the north part unto that desert which lieth towards Barca. The situation of this kingdom is very uneeven, some part thereof being mountainous, and the residue plain. Upon the plains are sundry villages inhabited by rich merchants, and abounding with corn. The king of this region and all his followers dwell in a certain large village. The mountains being inhabited by herdesmen and shepherds do bring forth mill and other grain altogether unknown to us. The inhabitants in summer go all naked save their privy members which they cover with a piece of leather: but all winter they are clad in skins, and have beds of skins also. They embrace no religion at all, being neither Christians, mahometans, nor jews, nor of any other profession, but living after a brutish manner, and having wives and children in common: and (as I understood of a certain merchant that abode a long time among them) they have no proper names at all, but every one is nicknamed according to his length, his fatness, or some other quality. They have a most puissant prince, being lineally descended from the Libyan people called Bardoa. Horsemen he hath in a continual readiness to the number of three thousand, & an huge number of footmen; for all his subjects are so serviceable and obedient unto him, that whensoever he commandeth them, they will arm themselves and follow him whither he pleaseth to conduct them. They pay unto him none other tribute but the tithes of all their corn: neither hath this king any revenues to maintain his estate, but only such spoils as he getteth from his next enemies by often invasions and assaults. He is at perpetual enmity with a certain people inhabiting The desert of Seu. beyond the desert of Seu; who in times past marching with an huge army of footmen over the said desert, wasted a great part of the kingdom of Borno. Whereupon the king of Borno sent for the merchants of Barbary, and willed them to bring him great store of horses: for in this country they use to exchange horses for slaves, and to give fifteen, and sometime twenty Fifteen or twenty 〈◊〉 exchanged for one horse. slaves for one horse. And by this means there were abundance of horses brought: howbeit the merchants were constrained to stay for their slaves till the king returned home conqueror with a great number of captives, and satisfied his creditors for their horses. And oftentimes it falleth out that the merchants must stay three months together, before the king returneth from the wars, but they are all that while maintained at the king's charges. Sometimes he bringeth not home slaves enough to satisfy the merchants: and otherwhiles they are constrained to await there a whole year together; for the king maketh invasions but every year once, & that at one set and appointed time of the year. Yea I myself met with sundry merchants here, who despairing of the king's payment, because they had trusted him an whole year, determined never to come thither with horses again. And yet the king seemeth to be marvelous rich; for his spurs, his bridles, platters, dishes, pots, and other vessels wherein his meat and drink are brought to the table, are all of pure gold: yea, and the chains of his dogs and hounds are of gold also. Howbeit this king is extremely covetous, for he had much rather pay his debts in slaves then in gold. In this kingdom are great multitudes of Negroes and of other people, the names of whom (because I tarried here but one month) I could not well note. Of the kingdom of Gaoga. GAoga bordering westward upon the kingdom of Borno, and extending eastward to the confines of Nubia, adjoineth southward unto a certain desert situate upon a crooked and winding part of Nilus, and is enclosed northward with the frontiers of Egypt. It stretcheth from east to west in length five hundred miles, and as much in breadth. They have neither humanity nor learning among them, but are most rustical and savage people, and especially those that inhabit the mountains, who go all naked save their privities: their houses are made of boughs & rafts, and are much subject to burning, and they have great abundance of cattle, whereunto they give diligent attendance. For many years they remained in liberty, of which A Negro-slave who having slain his Lord grew to great might and authority. liberty they were deprived by a certain Negro slave of the same region. This slave lying upon a certain night with his master that was a wealthy merchant, & considering that he was not far from his native country, slew his said master, possessed his goods, and returned home: where having bought a certain number of horses, he began to invade the people next adjoining, and obtained for the most part the victory: for he conducted a troop of most valiant & warlike horsemen against his enemies that were but slenderly appointed. And by this means he took great numbers of captives, whom he exchanged for horses that were brought out of Egypt: insomuch that at length (the number of his soldiers increasing) he was accounted of by all men as sovereigning K. of Gaoga. After him succeeded his son, being no whit inferior in valour & high courage unto his father; who reigned for the space of forty years. Next him succeeded his brother Moses, & after Moses his nephew Homara, who beareth rule at this present. This Homara hath greatly enlarged his dominions, and hath entered league with the Sultan of Cairo, by whom he is often presented with magnificent gifts, which he most bountifully requiteth: also divers merchants of Egypt, and divers inhabitants of Cairo present most precious and rare things unto him, and highly commend his surpassing liberality. This prince greatly honoureth all learned men, and especially such as are of the lineage of Mahumet. I myself being in his court, a certain noble man of Damiata brought him very rich and royal gifts, as namely, a gallant horse, a Turkish sword, and a kingly rob, with certain other particulars that cost about an hundred and fifty ducats at Cairo: in recompense whereof the king gave him five slaves, five camels, five hundred ducats of that region, and an hundred elephants teeth of wonderful bigness. Of the kingdom of 〈◊〉. NVbia bordering westward upon the kingdom last described, and stretching from thence unto Nilus, is enclosed on the southside with the desert of Goran, and on the north side with the confines of Egypt. Howbeit they cannot pass by water from this kingdom into The river of Nilus not naevigable between Nubia and Egypt. Egypt: for the river of Nilus is in some places no deeper than a man may wade over on foot. The principal town of this kingdom called Dangala is exceeding populous, and containeth to the number of ten thousand families. The walls of their houses consist of a kind of chalk, and the roofs are covered with straw. The townsmen are exceeding rich and civil people, and have great traffic with the merchants of Cairo & of Egypt: in other parts of this kingdom you shall find none but villages and hamlets situate upon the river of Nilus, all the inhabitants whereof are husbandmen. The kingdom of Nubia is most rich in corn and sugar, which notwithstanding The rich commodities of Nubia. they know not how to use. Also in the city of Dangala there is great plenty of civet and Sandall-wood. This region aboundeth with ivory likewise, because here are so many elephants taken. here is also a most Most strong poison. strong and deadly poison, one grain whereof being divided amongst ten persons, will kill them all within less than a quarter of an hour: but if one man taketh a grain, he dieth there of out of hand. An ounce of this poison is sold for an hundred ducats; neither may it be sold to any but to foreign merchants, & whosoever buyeth it is bound by an oath not to use it in the kingdom of Nubia. All such as buy of this poison are constrained to pay as much unto the king, as to the merchant: but if any man selleth poison without the prince's knowledge, he is presently put to death. The king of Nubia maintaineth continual war, partly against the people of Goran (who being descended of the people called Zingani, inhabit the deserts, Zingani. and speak a kind of language that no other nation understandeth) and partly against certain other people also dwelling upon the desert which lieth eastward of Nilus, and 〈◊〉 towards the red sea, being not far from the borders of Suachen. Their language (as I take it) is mixed, for it hath great affinity with the Chaldean tongue, with the language of Suachen, and with the language of Ethiopia the higher, where Prete Gianni is said to Prete 〈◊〉. bear rule: the people themselves are called Bugiha, and are most base and Bugiha. miserable, and live only upon milk, camels-flesh, and the flesh of such beasts as are taken in those deserts. Sometimes they receive tribute of the governor of Suachen, and sometimes of the governors of Dangala. They had once a rich town situate upon the red sea called Zibid, whereunto belonged a commodious haven, being opposite unto the haven of Zidem, which is forty miles distant from Mecca. But an hundred years since it was destroyed by the Sultan, because the inhabitants received certain wares which should have been carried to Mecca, and at the same time the famous port of Zibid was destroyed, from whence notwithstanding was gathered a great yearly tribute. The inhabitants being chased from thence fled unto Dangala and Suachin, and at length being overcome in battle by the governor of Suachin, there were in one day slain of them above four thousand, and a thousand were carried captive unto Suachin, who were massacred by the women and children of the city. And thus much (friendly reader) as concerning the land of Negroes: the fifteen kingdoms whereof agreeing much in rites and customs, are subject unto four princes only. Let us now proceed unto the description of Egypt. Here endeth the seventh book. JOHN LEO HIS EIGHT BOOK OF the History of Africa, and of the memorable things contained therein. Of Egypt. THe most noble and famous province of Egypt bordering westward upon the deserts of Barca, Numidia, and Libya; eastward upon the deserts lying between Egypt itself and the red sea; and northward upon the Mediterran sea; is enclosed southward with the land of the foresaid people called Bugiha, and with the river of Nilus. It stretcheth in length from the 〈◊〉 sea to the land of the people called Bugiha about four hundred and 〈◊〉 450. miles long. fifty miles: but in breadth it is very narrow; so that it containeth nought but a small distance between both the banks of Nilus and the barren mountains bordering upon the foresaid deserts, being inhabited only in that place where Nilus is separate from the said mountains: albeit towards the Mediterran sea it extendeth itself somewhat broader. For Nilus about fower-score miles from the great city of Cairo is divided into two branches, one whereof 〈◊〉 in his channel westward, returneth at length into the main stream from whence he took his original, and having passed about threescore miles beyond Cairo, it divideth itself into two other branches, whereof the one runneth to Damiata, and the other to Rosetto. And 〈◊〉 of that which trendeth to Damiata issueth another branch, which discharging itself into a lake passeth through a certain gullet or straight into the Mediterran sea, upon the bank whereof standeth the most ancient city of Tenesse: and this division of Nilus into so many streams and branches causeth Egypt (as I have beforesaid) to be so narrow. All this province is plain, and is most fruitful for all kind of grain and pulse. There are most pleasant and green meadows, and great store of geese and other fowls. The country people are of a swart and brown colour: but the citizens are white. Garments they wear which are straight down to their wastes, and broad beneath, and the sleeves likewise are straight. They cover their heads with a round and high habit called by the Italians a Dulipan. Their shoes are made according to the ancient fashion. In summer they wear garments of particoloured cotton: but in winter they use a certain garment lined with cotton, which they call Chebre: but the chief citizens and merchants are appareled in cloth of Europe. The inhabitants are of an honest, cheerful, and liberal disposition. For their victuals they use a kind of new and extreme salt cheeses, and sour milk also artificially congealed: which fare albeit they account very dainty, yet cannot strangers digest it, and into every dish almost they put sour milk. A division of Egypt. SInce the mahometans were Lords of Egypt, it hath been divided into three parts. For the region from Cairo to Rosetto is called the shore of Errif: and from Cairo to the land of Bugiha it is called Sahid, that is to say, The firm land: but the region adjoining upon that branch of Nilus which runneth towards Damiata and Tenesse, they call by the name of Bechria or Maremma. All Egypt is exceeding fertile: but the province of Sahid excelleth the two other parts for abundance of corn, cattle, fowls, and flax: and Maremma aboundeth with cotton and sugar. Howbeit the inhabitants of Marremma and Errif are far more civil than the people of Sahid: because those two provinces lie nearer unto the sea, and are more frequented by European, Barbarian, and Assyrian merchants: but the people of Sahid have no conversation with strangers, except it be with a few Ethiopians. Of the ancient pedigree and original of the Egyptians. THe Egyptians (as Moses writeth) fetch their original from Gen. 10. 6. * Mesraim is recorded to be the brother of Chus, and the son of Cham. Chibith. Mesraim the son of Chus, the son of Cham, the son of Noah; and the Hebrews call both the country and the inhabitants of Egypt by the name of Mesraim. The Arabians call Egypt itself Mesre, but the inhabitants Chibith. And Chibith (they say) was the man, that first took upon him the government of this region, and began first to build houses thereon. Also the inhabitants call themselves by the same name: neither are there left any true Egyptians, besides a few Christians, which are at this present remaining. The residue embracing the Mahometan religion have mingled themselves amongst the Arabians & the Moors. This kingdom was governed many years by the Egyptians themselves, as namely by the kings that were called Pharaoh, (who by their monuments and admirable buildings, seem to have been mighty princes) and also by the kings called Ptolomaei. Afterward being subdued unto the Roman Empire, this kingdom since the coming of Christ was converted unto the Christian religion, under the said Roman government: since the decay of which Empire, it fell into the possession of the Emperors of Constantinople; who being very careful to maintain this kingdom, were at length deprived thereof by the mahometans, under the conduct of Hamrus the son of Hasi, being appointed captain general over the Arabian army of Homar the second Califa or Mahometan patriarch of that name: who permitting all men to have their own religion required nought but tribute at their hands. The said captain built upon the bank of Nilus a certain town called by the Arabians Fustato, which word signifieth in their language a tabernacle: for when he first undertook this expedition, he marched through wild and desert places void of inhabitants, so that his army was constrained to lie in tents. The common people call this town Mesre Hatichi, that is to say, the ancient city; which notwithstanding in comparison of Cairo may not unfitly be called the New city. And as concerning the situation of this town many excellent men both Christians, jews, and mahometans have in these our times been deceived. For they think Mesre to be situate in the same place where king Pharaoh in the time of Moses, and king Pharaoh in the time of joseph had their abode: because they suppose the town of Pharaoh to have stood in that part of Africa where Nilus stretcheth out one of his arms westward towards Africa, and where the Pyramids are as yet to be seen: which the holy Scripture also seemeth to avouch in the book of Genesis, where it is said, that the jews in Moses time were employed about the building The town of Pharaoh. of the town of Aphthun, which was founded by Pharaoh: namely in that place where Nilus trendeth towards Africa, being about fifty miles southward of Cairo, and near unto the most westerly arm or branch of Nilus. They allege also another probability, that the town of Pharaoh was built in the same place, because that at the very head or confluence of the branches of Nilus there standeth a building of marvelous antiquity, called the sepulchre of joseph, wherein the dead body of joseph lay, till it was The 〈◊〉 of joseph. by the jews transported unto the sepulchre of their fathers. To be brief, neither Cairo nor any place near unto it, can by any likelihood challenge that they were at any time inhabited by the ancient Pharaos'. But here it is to be noted, that the nobility of the ancient Egyptians dwelled in times passed in the region of Sahid beyond Cairo, in the cities of Fium, of Manfichmin, and in other such famous cities. Howbeit after Egypt was conquered by the Romans, the Egyptian nobility planted themselves in the region of Errif, upon the sea shore thereof, namely about the cities of Alexandria, Rosetto, and other famous towns retaining as yet the Latin names. Also when the Roman Empire was translated into Greece, the said nobility still inhabited upon the seashore, the Emperor's lieutenant residing at Alexandria: but after the mahometans got the dominion of Egypt, the foresaid nobility retired themselves into the inland, hoping thereby to reap a double commodity: namely first in that they might be a means to pacify the kingdom on both sides of them, and secondly that they might be free from the invasions of the Christians, whereof they should have been in danger, had they remained any longer upon the sea coast. Of the quality and temperature of the air in Egypt. THE air of this country is hot and unwholesome: and it raineth here very seldom or never. And rain is the cause of many diseases in Egypt: for in rainy weather some of the Egyptians are subject unto dangerous rheums and fevers; and others unto a strange kind of swelling in their privy members: which swelling the Physicians impute unto salt-cheese and beef, which are the common diet of the Egyptians. In summer time this country is most extremely hot, for a remedy of which heat they build in every town certain high towers, having one door aloft, and another beneath, right over against the houses, through the tops whereof the wind passing downard, doth somewhat cool and refresh the air: otherwise in regard of the intolerable heat of the sun it were impossible for any man to live there. Sometime the pestilence is so Extreme pestilence. hot among them, especially at Cairo, that almost every day there die twelve thousand persons thereof. But with the French pox I think that no The French malady most rife in Egypt. other country under heaven is so molested, nor that containeth so many people infected therewith. About the beginning of April they reap their corn, and having reaped it, they presently thrash the same; neither shall you see one ear of their corn standing till the twentieth of May. The inundation The increase of Nilus. or overflow of Nilus beginneth about the midst of june, increasing afterward for the space of forty days, and for the space of other forty days also decreasing: during which time all the cities and towns of Egypt are like unto islands, which none can come unto but by boats and barges. At this time also Nilus is very fit to be sailed upon with vessels of burden; some whereof are so big that they will contain six thousand bushels of corn, and an hundredth head-cattells: and in these vessels they sail only down the stream: for against the stream it were impossible for them to pass empty. The Egyptians according to the increase of Nilus do foresee the plenty or dearth of the year following: as we will more at large declare, when we come to speak of the island of Nilus over against the old city, where the inundation of Nilus is measured. Neither is it our purpose in this place particularly to describe all the cities of Egypt, because our African writers are of divers opinions thereabout; for some would have Egypt to be a part of Africa, but others are of a contrary mind. divers there are that affirm that part of Egypt adjoining upon the deserts of Barbary, Numidia, and Libya, to belong unto Africa. Some others ascribe unto Africa all those places that border upon the principal and main channel of Nilus: but as for other places, as namely Manf, Fium, Semenud, Damanhore, Berelles, Tenesse, and Damiata, they think them not to be situate in Africa: which opinion I myself also upon many and great reasons take to be true. Wherefore my purpose is to describe none other cities but such as stand near the main and principal channel of Nilus. Of the city of Bosiri. THe ancient city of Bosiri built by the Egyptians upon the Mediterran sea, and standing twenty miles westward from Alexandria, was in times past environed with most strong walls, and adorned with most beautiful and stately buildings. At this present it is compassed with many possessions or grounds bearing dates, whereof no man taketh charge nor reapeth any commodity: for when Alexandria was won by the Christians, the inhabitants abandoned this city, and fled towards the lake called Buchaira. Of the great city of Alexandria in Egypt. THe great city of Alexandria in Egypt founded by Alexander the great, not without the advise of most famous and skilful architects, upon a beautiful point of land stretching into the Mediterran sea, and being distant 40. miles westward of Nilus, was in times past, till it grew subject unto the mahometans, most sumptuously and strongly built, as divers and sundry authors bear record. Afterward this city decaying many years together, was deprived of the ancient renown and honour, and rémained in manner desolate, because no merchants of Greece, nor of any other part of Europe exercised any longer traffic therein. Howbeit a certain crafty Mahometan patriarch made the rude people 〈◊〉, that by the prophecy of Mahumet most ample indulgences were granted unto all such as would inhabit the city or guard it for certain days, and would bestow some alms for a public benefit: by which wily stratagem the city was in short time 〈◊〉 with foreign people, which from all places resorted thereunto: by whom were built many houses near unto the citie-walles, and many colleges of students, and divers monasteries for the relief of pilgrims. The city itself is four square, and hath four gates to enter in at: one standing on the east side towards Nilus, another on the south side towards the lake of Buchaira, the third westward towards the desert of Barca, and the fourth towards the Mediterran sea, and the haven; whereat stand the searchers and customers, which ransack strangers even to their very shirts: for they demand custom not only for wares and merchandise, but also some allowance in the hundred for all kind of money. near unto the citie-walles there are two other gates also, being divided asunder by a fair walk, and a most impregnable castle, which standeth upon the strand or wharf of the port commonly called Marsa el Bargi, that is to say, the port of the castle: in which port ride the principal and best ships, namely such as come from Venice, Genoa, Ragusa, with other ships of Europe. For hither resort the English, the low Dutch, the Biscayne's, the Ancient traffic of the 〈◊〉 unto Alexandria. Portugals, and men of all other nations in Europe for traffics sake. Howbeit this port is most usually frequented by the 〈◊〉 of Appulia, Sicilia, and of Greece, which are Turkish ships; all which resort into this harbour to save themselves from pirates, and from tempestuous weather. Another port there is also called Marsa Essil Sela, that is to say, the port of the chain, wherein the ships of Barbary, namely those of Tunis & of the isle of Gerbi harbour themselves. The Christians are constrained to pay about the 10. part for all wares that they bring in & carry out, but the mahometans pay but the 20. part: and whatsoever wares are carried by land to Cairo pay no custom at all. And at this present that part of the city which is next unto Cairo is the most famous and best furnished with merchandise brought by merchants from all places of the world. The other parts of this city are destitute both of civility & inhabitants: for except one long street, and that part of the city next the haven which is full of merchants shops, & inhabited by christians, the residue is void and desolate. Which desolation happened at that time, Alexandria surprised and sacked by the king of Cyprus. when Lewis the fourth king of France being restored to liberty by the Sultan, the king of Cyprus with a fleet partly of Venetians & partly of Frenchmen suddenly assailed Alexandria, and with great slaughter surprised and 〈◊〉 the same. But the Sultan coming with an huge army to rescue Alexandria, so discouraged the Cyprians, that they burned down the houses 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 themselves to flight. Whereupon the Sultan repairing the 〈◊〉, and building a castle near unto the haven, the city grew by 〈◊〉 and little into that estate, wherein it standeth at this present. In the city of Alexandria there is a certain high mount fashioned like unto the place called Testaccio at Rome, whereon, although it hath no natural situation, are found divers earthen vessels of great antiquity. Upon the top of the said mount standeth a turret, where a certain officer is appointed to watch for such ships as direct their course towards the city, who for every ship that he giveth notice of unto the customers, receiveth a certain fee: but if he chanceth to fall asleep, or to be out of the way at the arrival of any ship, whereof he certifieth not the customers, he payeth double for his negligence into the Sultan's exchequer. Under each house of this city there is a great vaulted The water of Nilus brought by a sluice into Alexandria. cistern built upon mighty pillars and arches: whereinto the water of Nilus at every inundation is conveyed under the walls of the city, by a certain wonderful and most artificial sluice standing without the city itself. But these cisterns growing sometime corrupt and fowl, are often in summer the occasion of many diseases and infirmities. This city standeth in the midst of a sandy desert, and is destitute of gardens and vines, neither is the soil round about it apt to bear corn; so that their corn is brought them from places forty miles distant. Howbeit near the foresaid sluice, whereby the water of Nilus is conveyed into the city, are certain little gardens, the fruits whereof being grown to ripeness are so unwholesome, that they breed fevers and other noisome diseases among the citizens. Six miles westward of Alexandria, among certain ancient buildings, standeth a pillar of a wonderful height and thickness, which the Arabians call Hemadussaoar, that is to say, the pillar of trees. Of this pillar there is a fable reported, that Ptolemey one of the kings of Alexandria built it upon an extreme point of land stretching from the haven, whereby to the end he might defend the city from the invasion of foreign enemies, and make it invincible, he placed a certain steele-glasse upon the top thereof, by the hidden virtue of which glass as many ships as passed by while the glass was uncovered should immediately be set on fire: but the said glass being broken by the mahometans, the secret virtue thereof vanished, and the great pillar whereon it stood was removed out of the place. But this is a most ridiculous narration, and fit for babes to give credit unto. At this present there are amongst the ancient inhabitants of Alexandria many Christians called jacobites, being all Certain Christians called jacobites. of them artisans & merchants: these jacobites have a church of their own to resort unto, wherein the body of S. Mark the Evangelist lay in times past interred, which hath since been privily stolen by the Venetians, & carried unto Venice. And the said jacobites pay tribute unto the governor of Cairo. Neither is it to be passed over in silence, that in the midst of the ruinous monuments of Alexandria there remaineth as yet a certain little house built in form of a chapel, and containing a sepulchre much honoured by the mahometans, wherein they affirm out of the authority of their Koran, that the body of the high prophet and king (as they term him) Alexander the great lieth buried. And thither resort yearly great multitudes of pilgrims from foreign nations, to adore and reverence the said sepulchre, and oftentimes to bestow large alms thereupon. Other things worthy the noting I purposely pass over, lest I should seem too tedious unto the reader. Of the city of Bochin. THis ancient and small city situate in times passed upon the Mediterran sea shore eight miles eastward of Alexandria, lieth at this time utterly desolate, nought remaining thereof, but certain ruins of the walls. It is now planted with date-trees, wherewith the poor inhabitants dwelling in base and solitary cottages sustain themselves. near unto this city standeth a tower upon a certain dangerous rock, against which many ships of Syria being driven in the night, do suffer shipwreck, because they cannot in the dark find the right course to the port of Alexandria. Round about this city there are no fields but sandy deserts even to the river of Nilus. Of the city of Rasid called by the Italians Rosetto. THe city of Rosetto was built by a slave of a certain Mahometan patriarch and governor of Egypt, upon the eastern bank of Nilus three miles from the Mediterran sea, not far from the place where Nilus dischargeth his streams into the said sea. It containeth most beautiful houses and palaces built upon the shore of Nilus, and a fair marketplace, environed on all sides with shops of merchants and artisans, with a stately and sumptuous temple also, having some gates towards the marketplace, and others toward Nilus, and certain commodious stairs to descend into the same river. near unto the temple there is a certain harbour for the safety of ships and barks of burden that carry wares unto Cairo: for the city being unwalled resembleth a village rather than a city. About this city stand divers cottages, wherein they use to thrash rice with certain wooden instruments, & to make ready each month three thousand bushels thereof. A little farther from this city there is a place like unto a village, wherein great store of hackney-mules, and asses are kept for travelers to ride upon unto Alexandria: neither need the travelers to guide the said hackneys, but to let them run their ordinary course, for they will go directly to the same house or inn where they ought to be left: and their pace is so good, that they will from sun-rising to sunset carry a man forty miles: they travel always so near the seashore, that sometimes the waves thereof beat upon the hackneys feet. near unto this city are many fields of dates, and grounds which yield abundance of rice. The inhabitants are of a cheerful disposition and courteous to strangers, especially to such as love to spend their time in jollity and disport. Here is a stately bathstove also, having fountains both of cold and hot water belonging thereunto, the john Leo was at Rasid the same time 〈◊〉 Selim the great Turk passed that way. like whereof for stately and commodious building is not to be found in all Egypt beside. I myself was in this city when Selim the great Turk returned this way from Alexandria, who with his private and familiar friends beholding the said bathstove, seemed to take great delight and contentment therein. Of the city called Anthius. THis city was built upon the eastern bank of Nilus by the Romans, as many Latin inscriptions engraven in marble, and remaining till this present do bear sufficient record. It is a beautiful and well-governed city, and is furnished with men of all kind of trades and occupations. The fields adjacent abound with great plenty of rice, corn, and dates. The inhabitants are of a cheerful and gentle disposition, and gain much by rice which they transport unto Cairo. Of the city of Barnabal. THis city was founded at the same time when the Christian religion began to take place in Egypt, upon the eastern bank of Nilus, in a most pleasant and fruitful place. Here is such abundance of rice, that in the city there are more than four hundred houses for the thrashing and trimming thereof. But they that impose this task upon the inhabitants, are men of foreign countries, and especially of Barbary, which are so lasciviously and riotously given, that almost all the harlots of Egypt resort hither unto them, who shave off their hairs to the very bones without any cizzers or razors. Of the city of Thebes. BY whom this ancient city of Thebes standing upon the western bank of Nilus should be built, our African chroniclers are of sundry opinions. Some affirm it to be built by the Egyptians, some by the Romans, and others by the Grecians, because there are as yet to be seen most ancient monuments, partly in Latin, partly in Greek, and partly in Egyptian characters. Howbeit at this present it containeth but three hundred families in all, being most of them very stately and sumptuously built. It aboundeth with corn, rice, and sugar, and with certain fruits of a most excellent The fruits called Mose. taste called Muse. It is also furnished with great store of merchants and artificers: but the most part of the inhabitants are husbandmen: and if a man walk the streets in the daytime he shall see none but trim and beautiful women. The territory adjacent aboundeth with date-trees which grow so thick, that a man cannot see the city, till he approacheth nigh unto the walls. Here grow likewise store of grapes, figs, and peaches, which are carried in great plenty unto Cairo. Without the city there are many ancient monuments, as namely pillars, inscriptions, and walls of a great thickness built of excellent stone, and such a number of ruinous places, that this city seemeth in times past to have been very large. Of the city of Fuoa. THis city being distant about 45. miles southward from Rosetto, was built by the Egyptians on the side of Nilus next unto Asia. The streets there of are narrow, being otherwise a well governed and populous city, and abounding with all necessary commodities. here are likewise very fair shops of merchants and artificers, albeit the inhabitants are much addicted unto their ease and pleasure. The women of this town live in so great liberty, that they may go whither they will all the daytime, returning home at night without any controlment of their husbands. The fields adjacent abound greatly with dates, and near unto them there is a certain plain which is very, apt for sugar and corn: howbeit the sugar Sugar. canes there bring not forth perfect sugar, but in steed thereof a certain kind of honey like soap, which they use throughout all Egypt, because there is but little other honey in the whole country. Of Gezirat Eddeheb, that is to say, the golden Isle. OVer against the foresaid city the river of Nilus maketh an Isle, which being situate on an high place, bringeth forth all kind of fruitful trees except Olives. Upon this Island are many palaces and beautiful buildings, which cannot be seen through the thick and shady woods. The soil of this Island being apt for sugar and rice, is manured by most of the inhabitants, but the residue are employed about carrying of their merchandise unto Cairo. Of the city of Mechella. THis city built by the mahometans in my time upon the eastern shore of Nilus, and environed with a low wall, containeth great store of inhabitants, the most part of whom being either weavers or husbandmen, are void of all courtesy and civility. They bring up great store of geese which they sell at Cairo; and their fields bring forth plenty of corn and flax. Of the city of Derotte. WHen Egypt was subject to the Roman empire, this town was built also upon the eastern bank of Nilus: which as it is very populous, so is it adorned with stately buildings and large streets, having merchants shops on either side of them. They have a most beautiful temple, and the citizens are exceeding rich: for their ground yieldeth such abundance Great abundance of Sugar. of sugar, that they pay yearly unto the Sultan an hundred thousand pieces of gold, called in their language Saraffi, for their liberty of making and refining thereof. In this city standeth a certain great house like 〈◊〉 a castle, wherein are their presses and cauldrons, for the boiling and preparing of their sugar. Neither did I ever in all my life see so many workmen employed about that business, whose daily wages (as I understood by a certain public officer) amounted to two hundred Saraffis. Of the city called Mechellat Chais. THe mahometans having conquered Egypt, built this city upon an high hill standing by the western bank of Nilus. The fields of this city being high ground, are apt for to plant vines upon, because the waters of Nilus cannot overflow them. This town affordeth new grapes unto Cairo, almost for half the year long: but the inhabitants are 〈◊〉 people, being most of them watermen and bargemen. A description of the huge and admirable city of Cairo. CAiro is commonly reputed to be one of the greatest and most famous cities in all the whole world. But leaving the common reports & opinions thereof, I will exactly describe the form and estate wherein it * 1526. now standeth. And that I may begin with the Etymology or derivation of the name, Cairo is an Arabian word, corruptly pronounced by the people of Europe: for the true Arabian word is El Chahira, which signifieth an enforcing or imperious mistress. This city built in ancient times by one Gehoar Chetib a Dalmatian slave (as I have before signified in the beginning of my discourse) containeth within the walls not above eight thousand families, being inhabited by noblemen, gentlemen, and merchants that sell wares brought from all other places. The famous temple of Cairo commonly called Gemih Hashare, that is to say, the glorious temple, was built also by the foresaid slave, whom we affirmed to be the founder of the city, and whose surname was Hashare, that is to say, famous, being given him by the Mahometan patriarch that was his prince. This city standeth upon a most beautiful plain, near unto a certain mountain called Mucatun, about two miles distant from Nilus, and is environed with stately walls, and fortified with iron gates: the principal of which gates is called Babe Nansre, that is, the gate of victory, which standeth eastward towards the desert of the red sea; and the gate called Beb Zuaila being next unto the old city and to Nilus; and also Bebel Futuh, that is to say, the gate of triumph, standing towards the lake and the fields. And albeit Cairo aboundeth every where with all kind of merchants and artificers, yet that is the principal street of the whole city which stretcheth from the gate of Nansre to the gate of Zuaila; for in it are built most stately and admirable palaces and colleges, and most sumptuous temples, among which is the temple of Gemith Elhechim the third schismatical Califa of Cairo. Other temples there are of a marvelous bigness, which to describe in particular, I think it superfluous. here are many bathstoves also very artificially built. Next of all is the street called Beinel Casrain, containing to the number of threescore cooks or victuallers shops, furnished with vessels of tin: there are 〈◊〉 other shops also, wherein are to be sold delicate waters or drinks made of Delicate drinks made of all kind of fruits. all kinds of fruits, being for noblemen to drink of, and these waters they keep most charily in fine vessels, partly of glass, and partly of tin: next unto these are shops where divers confections of honey & sugar, unlike unto the confections of Europe, are to be sold: then follow the fruiterer's shops, who bring outlandish fruits out of Syria, to wit, quinces, pomegranates, and other fruits which grow not in Egypt: next unto them are the shops of such as sell eggs, cheese, and pancakes fried with oil. And next of all there is a street of the principal artificers shops. Beyond which street standeth a college built by the Sultan called Ghauri, who was slain in a battle against 〈◊〉 Ghauri. Selim the great Turk. And next unto the college are divers ranks of drapers shops. In the first rank there is most excellent outlandish linen cloth to be sold, as namely fine cloth of cotton brought from Balabach, and cloth called Mosall brought from Ninou of a marvelous breadth and fineness, whereof noblemen and others of account have shirts made them, & scarves to wear upon their Dulipans. Besides these there are certain mercers shops where the rich stuffs of Italy, namely silk, damask, velvet, cloth of gold, and such like are to be bought, unto which stuffs I never saw any comparable (to my remembrance) in Italy, where they use to be made. Next unto the mercers are the woollen drapers which bring cloth out of Europe, as namely from Florence, Venice, Flanders, and other places. Next of all there are chamblets to be sold: and from thence the way lieth to the gate of Zuaila, at which gate dwell great store of artificers. near unto the said way standeth the famous Burse called Canel Halili, wherein the Persian merchants dwell. It is built very stately in manner of a king's palace, and is of three stories high: beneath it are certain convenient rooms whither merchants for the exchange of rich and costly wares do resort: for here do the principal and most wealthy merchants abide; whose wares are spices, precious stones, cloth of India, and such like. Next unto the Burse standeth a street of shops where all kind of perfumes, namely civet, musk, amber, and such like are to be sold: which commodities are here in so great plenty, that if you ask for twenty pounds of musk they will presently show you an hundred. Next followeth the street of the paper-merchants where you may buy most excellent and smooth paper: here also are to be sold jewels and precious stones of great value, which the brokers carry from one shop to another. Then come you to the goldsmith's street being inhabited for the most part by jews, who deal for riches of great importance. And next unto the goldsmiths are certain streets of upholsters or brokers, who sell the apparel and rich furniture of noblemen and other citizens at the second hand; which are not cloaks, coats, nappery, or such like, but things of exceeding price and value: amongst which I myself once saw a beautiful pavilion embroidered with needlework, and beset with pearls that weighed forty pounds, which pearls being taken out of it were sold for ten thousand Saraffis. In this city also there is a most stately hospital built A stately 〈◊〉. by Piperis the first Sultan of the Mamalucks race: the yearly revenues whereof amount unto two hundred thousand Saraffis. Hither may any impotent or diseased persons resort, and be well provided of physicians, and of all things necessary for those that are sick, who if they chance to die here, all their goods are due unto the hospital. Of the suburb called Beb Zuaila. THis great suburb belonging unto Cairo, and containing about twelve thousand families, beginneth at the gate of Zuaila, and extendeth westward almost a mile & a half; southward it bordereth upon the palace of the Sultan, & stretcheth northward for the space of a mile unto the suburb called Beb Elloch. here dwell as many noble men and gentlemen almost, as within the city itself: and the citizens have shops both here and in the city, as likewise many inhabitants of this suburb maintain families in the city also. Amongst all the buildings of this suburb the principal is that stately college built by Sultan Hesen, being of such a wonderful height and great strength, that oftentimes the colleges have presumed to rebel against the Sultan, and therein to fortify themselves against the whole city, and to discharge ordinance against the Sultan's castle, which is but half a crossbow shot distant. Of the suburb called Gemeh Tailon. THis huge suburb confining eastward upon the foresaid suburb of Beb Zuaila extendeth westward to certain ruinous places near unto the old city. Before the foundation of Cairo this suburb was erected by one Tailon, who was subject unto the Califa of Bagdet, and governor of Egypt, and was a most famous and prudent man. This Tailon leaving the old city, inhabited this suburb, and adorned the same with a most admirable palace, and sumptuous temple. here dwell also great store of merchants, and artificers, especially such as are Moors of Barbary. Of the suburb called Beb Elloch. THis large suburb being distant from the walls of Cairo about the space of a mile, and containing almost three thousand families, is inhabited by merchants, and artisans of divers sorts as well as the former. Upon a certain large place of this suburb standeth a great palace and a stately college built by a certain Mammaluck called 〈◊〉, being counsellor unto the Sultan of those times; and the place itself is called after his name jazbachia. Hither after Mahometan sermons and devotions, the common people of Cairo, together with the bawds and harlots, do usually resort; and many stage players also, and such as teach camels, asses, and dogs, to dance: which dancing is a thing very delightful to behold, and especially that of the ass: who having frisked and danced a while, his master comes unto him and tells him with a loud voice, that the Sultan being about to build some great palace, must use all the asses of Cairo to carry mortar, stones, and other necessary provision. Then the ass falling presently These asses are somewhat like to Banks his curtal, that played his prizes all England over. to the ground, and lying with his heels upward, maketh his belly to swell, and closeth his eyes as if he were stark dead. In the mean while his master lamenting the misfortune of the ass unto the standers by, earnestly craveth their friendly assistance and liberality to buy him a new ass. And having gathered of each one as much money as he can get; you are much deceived my masters (quoth he) that think mine ass to be dead: for the hungry jade knowing his master's necessity hath wrought this sleight, to the end he might get some money to buy him provender. Then turning about to the ass, he commandeth him with all speed to arise: but the ass lieth stark still, though he command and beat him never so much: whereupon turning again to the people, Be it known (quoth he) unto you all, that the Sultan hath published an edict or proclamation, that to morrow next all the people shall go forth of the city to behold a triumph; and that all the honourable and beautiful ladies and gentlewomen shall ride upon the most comely asses, and shall give them oats to eat, and the crystal water of Nilus to drink. Which words being scarce ended, the ass suddenly starteth from the ground, prancing & leaping for joy: then his master prosecuting still his narration; but (saith he) the warden of our street hath borrowed this goodly ass of mine for his deformed and old wife to ride upon. At these words the ass, as though he were endued with humane reason, coucheth his ears, and limpeth with one of his legs, as if it were quite out of joint. Then saith his master; What, sir jade, are you so in love with fair women? The ass nodding his head seemeth to say, yea. Come on therefore sirrah (quoth his master) and let us see among all these pretty damosels, which pleaseth your fancy best. Whereupon the ass going about the company, and espying some woman more comely and beautiful than the rest, walketh directly unto her and toucheth her with his head: and then the beholders laugh and cry out amain: Lo, the asses paramour, the paramour of the ass. Whereupon the fellow that showed all this sport leaping upon the back of his ass rideth to some other place. There is also another kind of charmers or jugglers, which keep certain little birds in Soothsaying birds. cages made after the fashion of cupboards, which birds will reach unto any man with their beaks certain skroules containing either his good or evil success in time to come. And whosoever desireth to know his fortune must give the bird an halfpenny: which she taking in her bill carrieth into a little box, and then coming forth again bringeth the said skroule in her beak. I myself had once a skroule of ill fortune given me, which although I little regarded, yet had I more unfortunate success than was contained therein. Also there are masters of defence playing at all kind of weapons, and others that sing songs of the battles fought between the Arabians and Egyptians, when as the Arabians conquered Egypt, with divers others that sing such toys and ballads unto the people. Of the suburb called Eulach THis large and ancient suburb of Cairo standing two miles distant from the walls of the city upon the bank of Nilus, containeth four thousand families. Upon the way lying between the suburb and this city, stand divers houses, and mills turned about by the strength of beasts. In this suburb dwell many artificers and merchants, especially such as sell corn, oil, and sugar. Moreover it is full of stately temples, palaces, and colleges: but the fairest buildings thereof stand along the river of Nilus, for from thence there is a most beautiful prospect upon the river, and thither do the vessels and barks of Nilus' resort unto the common stathe of Cairo being situate in this suburb: at which place you shall see at some times, and especially in the time of harvest, above 1000 barks. And here the officers appointed to receive custom for wares brought from Alexandria and Damiata have their abode: albeit but little tribute be demanded for the said wares, because it was paid before at the port of their arrival: but those wares that come out of the firm land of Egypt allow entire custom. Of the suburb called Charafa. THE suburb of Carafa built in manner of a town, and standing from mount Muccatim a stones cast, and from the walls of the city about two miles, containeth almost two thousand households. But at this day the greatest part thereof lieth waste and destroyed. Here are many sepulchers built with high and stately vaults and arches, and adorned on the inner side with divers emblems and colours, which the fond people adore as the sacred shrines & monuments of saints, spreading the pavement with sumptuous and rich carpets. Hither every friday morning resort out of the city itself and the suburbs, great multitudes of people for devotions sake, who bestow liberal and large alms. Of the old city called 〈◊〉. THis city being the first that was built in Egypt in the time of the mahometans, was founded by Hamre captain general over the forces of Homar the second Mahometan patriarch upon the bank of Nilus, 〈◊〉 a suburb because it is unwalled, and containing to the number of 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉. It is adorned, especially by the river Nilus, with 〈◊〉 palaces and houses of noblemen, and also with the famous temple of 〈◊〉 being of an huge bigness, and most stately built. It is also 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of trades men and 〈◊〉. And here standeth the famous sepulchre of a woman reputed most holy by the 〈◊〉, and called by them Saint Nafissa, which was the daughter of one called 〈◊〉 being Saint 〈◊〉. the son of Husein; the son of 〈◊〉, who was cozen german unto 〈◊〉. The said 〈◊〉 seeing all of her family to be deprived of the 〈◊〉 〈◊〉, left Cufa a city of Arabia Felix, and came and dwelled in this city; unto whom, partly because she was of the lineage of 〈◊〉, and partly for that she lived an innocent and blameless life, the people after her death ascribed divine honours, canonizing her for a Saint. Wherefore the schismatical 〈◊〉 of her kindred having got the upper hand in Egypt, began to build for Nafissa a most beautiful shrine or 〈◊〉, which they adorned also with siluer-lamps, with carpets of 〈◊〉, and such like precious ornaments. So great is the renown of this 〈◊〉, that there cometh no Mahometan either by sea or land unto Cairo, but he adoreth this sepulchre, and bringeth his offering thereunto, as likewise do all the 〈◊〉 inhabiting there about: 〈◊〉 that the yearly oblations and alms offered at this sepulchre, partly for the 〈◊〉 of the poor kinsfolks of Mahumet, and partly for the maintenance of the priests which keep the said sepulchre, amount unto 100000. 〈◊〉 which priests by feigned and 〈◊〉 miracles do daily delude the minds of the simple, to the end they may the more 〈◊〉 their blind devotion, and may stir them to greater liberality. When 〈◊〉 the great Turk won the city of Cairo, his janissaries rifling this sepulchre, found there the sum of 500000. 〈◊〉 in ready money, besides the silver lamps, the chains, and carpets: but 〈◊〉 took away a great part of that treasure from them. Such as write the lives of the Mahometan saints, making very honourable mention of this Nafissa, say that she was 〈◊〉 of the noble family of Heli, and that she was most famous for her virtuous and chaste life: but the fond people and the 〈◊〉 of that execrable sepulchre have devised many feigned and superstitious 〈◊〉. In this suburb also here unto the river of Nilus is the customers office for such wares as are brought out of the Province of Sahid. Without the walled city stand the 〈◊〉 and 〈◊〉 sepulchers of the Sultan's, built with admirable and huge arches. But in my time a certain Sultan caused a walk to be built between two high walls from the gate of the city to the place of the aforesaid sepulchers, and at the ends of both walls caused two turrets of an exceeding height to be erected, for 〈◊〉 and directions 〈◊〉 such merchants as came thither from the port of mount 〈◊〉. About a 〈◊〉 and an half from the said sepulchers in a certain 〈◊〉 called 〈◊〉 there is a garden containing the only balm- 〈◊〉, The place where balm groweth. (for in the whole world beside there is not any other tree that beareth true balm) which balme-tree growing in the midst of a large fountain, and having a short stock or body, beareth leaves like unto vineleaves, but that they are not so long: and this tree (they say) would utterly wither and decay, if the water of the fountain should chance to be diminished. The garden is environed with a strong wall, where into no man may enter without the special favour and licence of the governor. In the midst of Nilus, over against the old city, standeth the isle called Michias, that is to say, The isle of measure, in which isle (according to the inundation of Nilus) they have a kind of devise invented by the ancient Egyptians, whereby they most certainly foresee the plenty or scarcity of the year following throughout all the land of Egypt. This island is well inhabited and containeth about 1500. families; upon the extreme point or end where of standeth a most beautiful palace built in my remembrance by a Sultan, and a large temple also, which is very pleasant in regard of the cool streams of Nilus. The manner of measuring the increase of Nilus. Upon another side of the Island standeth an house alone by itself, in the midst whereof there is a foursquare cistern or channel of eighteen cubits deep, whereinto the water of Nilus is conveyed by a certain sluice under This pillar is called by Pliny Niloscopium. the ground. And in the midst of the cistern there is erected a certain pillar, which is marked and divided into so many cubits as the cistern itself containeth in depth. And upon the seventeenth of june when Nilus beginneth to overflow, the water thereof conveyed by the said sluice into the channel, increaseth daily, sometimes two, and sometimes three fingers, and sometimes half a cubit in height. Unto this place there daily resort certain officers appointed by the Senate, who viewing and observing the increase of Nilus, declare unto certain children how much it hath increased, which children wearing yellow scarves upon their heads, do publish the said increase of Nilus in every street of the city and the suburbs, and receive gifts every day of the merchants, artificers, and women so long as Nilus increaseth. The foresaid devise or experiment of the increase of Nilus is this that followeth. If the water reacheth only to the fifteenth cubit of the foresaid pillar, they hope for a fruitful year following: but if it stayeth between the twelfth cubit and the fifteenth, than the increase of the year will prove but mean: if it resteth between the tenth and twelfth cubits, then is it a sign that corn will be sold ten ducats the bushel. But if it ariseth to the eighteenth cubit, there is like to follow great scarcity in regard of too much moisture: and if the eighteenth cubit be surmounted, all Egypt is in danger to be swallowed up by the inundation of Nilus. The officers therefore declare unto the children the height of the river, and the children publish the same in all streets of the city, charging the people to fear God, and telling them how high Nilus is increased. And the people being astonished at the wonderful increase of Nilus, wholly exercise themselves in prayers, and giving of alms. And thus Nilus continueth forty days increasing and forty days decreasing; all which time corn is sold very dear, because while the inundation lasteth, every man may sell at his own pleasure: but when the eightith day is once past, the clerk of the market appointeth the price of all victuals, and especially of corn, according as he knoweth by the foresaid experiment, that the high and low grounds of Egypt have received either too little, or too much, or convenient moisture: all which customs and ceremonies being duly performed, there followeth so great a solemnity, and such a thundering noise of drums and trumpets throughout all Cairo, that a man would suppose the whole city to be turned upside down. And then every family hath a barge adorned with rich coverings and carpets, and with torchlight, and furnished with most dainty meats and confections, wherewith they solace themselves. The Sultan also with all his nobles and courtiers resorteth unto that sluice or conduct, which is called the great conduct, and is compassed round about with a wall, who taking an axe in his hand breaketh the said wall, and so do his nobles and courtiers likewise: insomuch that the same part of the wall being cast down, which stopped the passage of the water, the river of Nilus is so swiftly and forcibly carried through that conduct and through all other conducts and sluices in the city and the suburbs, that Cairo at that time seemeth to be another Venice; and then may you row over all places of the land of Egypt. Seven days and seven nights together the foresaid festival solemnity continueth in Cairo; during which space the merchants and artificers of the city may (according to the custom of the ancient Egyptians) consume & spend in torches, perfumes, confections, music, & such like jollities, all their gains that they have gotten the whole year past. Without the city of Cairo, near unto the suburb of Beb Zuaila, standeth the castle of the Sultan upon the side of the mountain called Mochattan. This castle is environed with high and impregnable walls, and containeth such stately and beautiful palaces, that they can hardly be described. Paved they are with excellent marble, and on the roofs they are gilded and curiously painted, their windows are adorned with divers colours, like to the windows in some places of Europe; and their gates be artificially carved and beautified with gold and azure. Some of these palaces are for the Sultan and his family; others for the family of his wife, and the residue for his concubines, his eunuchs, and his guard. Likewise the Sultan had one palace to keep public feasts in; and another wherein to give audience unto foreign ambassadors, and to exalt himself with great pomp and ceremonies: and another also for the governors and officials of his court. But all these are at this present abolished by Selim the great Turk. Of the customs, rites, and fashions of the citizens of Cairo. THe inhabitants of Cairo are people of a merry, jocund, and cheerful disposition, such as will promise much, but perform little. They exercise merchandise and mechanical arts, and yet travel they not out of their own native soil. Many students there are of the laws, but very few of other liberal arts and sciences. And albeit their colleges are continually full of students, yet few of them attain unto perfection. The citizens in winter are clad in garments of cloth lined with cotton: in summer they wear fine shirts; over which shirts some put on linen garments curiously wrought with silk, and others wear garments of chamblet, and upon their heads they carry great turbans covered with cloth of India. The women go The attire of the women of Cairo. costly attired, adorning their foreheads and necks with frontlets and chains of pearl, and on their heads they wear a sharp and slender bonnet of a span high, being very precious and rich. Gowns they wear of woollen cloth with straight sleeves, being curiously embroidered with needlework, over which they cast certain veils of most excellent fine cloth of India. They cover their heads and faces with a kind of black scarf, through which beholding others, they cannot be seen themselves. Upon their feet they wear fine shoes and pantofles, somewhat after the Turkish fashion. These women are so ambitious & proud, that all of them disdain either to spin or to play the cooks: wherefore their husbands are constrained to buy victuals ready dressed at the cook's shops: for very few, except such as have a great family, use to prepare and dress their victuals in their own houses. Also The liberty of the women of Cairo. they vouchsafe great liberty unto their wives: for the good man being gone to the tavern or victualling-house, his wife tricking up herself in costly apparel, and being perfumed with sweet and precious odours, walketh about the city to solace herself, and parley with her kinsfolks and friends. They use to ride upon asses more than horses, which are broken to such a gentle pace, that they go easier than any ambling horse. These asses they cover with most costly furniture, and let them out unto women to ride upon, together with a boy to lead the ass, and certain footmen to run by. In this city, like as in divers others, great store of people carry about sundry kinds of victuals to be sold. Many there are also that sell water, which they carry up and down in certain leather bags upon the backs of camels: for the city (as I said before) is two miles distant from Nilus. Others carry about a more fine and handsome vessel with a cock or spout of brass upon it, having a cup of Myrrh or crystal in their hands, and these sell water for men to drink, and for every draft they take a farthing. Others sell young chickens Birds hatched after a strange manner in Egypt. and other fowls by measure, which they hatch after a wonderful and strange manner. They put great numbers of eggs into certain ovens built upon sundry lofts, which ovens being moderately het, will within seven days convert all the said eggs into chickens. Their measures are bottomless, which being put into the basket of the buyer, and filled full of chickens, they lift it up, and so let the chickens fall into the basket. Likewise such as buy those chickens having kept them a few days, carry them about to sell again. The cook's shops stand open very late: but the shops of other artificers are shut up before ten of the clock, who then walk abroad for their solace and recreation from one suburb to another. The citizens in their common talk use ribald and filthy speeches: and (that I may pass over the rest in silence) it falleth out often times that the wife will complain of her husband unto the judge, that he doth not his duty nor contenteth her sufficiently in the night season, whereupon (as it is permitted by the Mahometan law) the women are divorced and married unto other husbands. Among the artisans whosoever is the first inventor of any new and ingenious devise is The reward of new and ingenious devices. clad in a garment of cloth of gold, and carried with a noise of musicans after him, as it were in triumph from shop to shop, having some money given him at every place. I myself once saw one carried about with solemn music and with great pomp and triumph, because he had bound a flea in a chain, which lay before him on a piece of paper for all men to behold. And if any of them chance to fall out in the streets, they presently go to buffets, and then a great number of people come flocking about them to see the conflict, who will not depart thence, till they have reconciled them. Their most usual food is buffles flesh and great store of pulse: when they go to dinner or supper, if their family be little, they lay a short and round tablecloth: but if their household be great, they spread a large cloth, such as is used in the halls of princes. Amongst the sundry sects of religion in this city, there is one sect of the Moors called Chenesia: and this sect liveth upon horseflesh, so that their butchers when they can hear of any halting or lame jade, buy him forthwith, and set him up a fatting, and having killed him, the said sect of Chenefia come and buy up his flesh hand-smoothe. This sect is rife also among the Turks, the Mamaluks, and the people of Asia; and albeit the Turks might freely use the food beforementioned, yet do they not enure themselves thereunto. In Egypt and Four sever all sects of the Mahometan religion permitted in the city of Cairo. in the city of Cairo there are permitted four several sects, differing each from other both in canon and civil laws: all which sects have their original from the religion of Mahumet. For there were in times past four men of singular learning, who by subtlety and sharpness of wit, found out a way to make particular deductions out of Mahumets' general precepts. So that each of them would interpret the opinions of Mahumet according to their own fancy, and would every man apply them to his own proper sense; and therefore they must needs disagree much between themselves: howbeit growing famous among the common people in regard of their divers canons & precepts, they were the first authors and founders of the said four sects: any one of which whatsoever Mahometan professeth, cannot renounce the same at his pleasure and embrace another sect, unless he be a man of deep learning, and knoweth the reasons and allegations of both parts. Also there are in the city of Cairo four principal judges, who give sentence only upon matters of great importance: under which four are substituted other inferior judges, in evestreete of the city, which decide petty contentions and brabbles. And if the parties which are at controversy chance to be of divers sects, the plaintiff may summon and convent the defendant before the judge of his street: howbeit the defendant may, if he will, appeal from him unto the highest judge of all, being placed over the four principal judges aforesaid, and being governor of the sect called Essafichia; and this high judge hath authority to dispense withal or to disannul the decrees of the four principal, and of all the other inferior judges, according as he shall see cause. Whosoever attempteth aught against the canons and precepts of his own religion, is severely punished by the judge of the same religion. Moreover, albeit the priests of the foresaid sects differ very much, both in their forms of Liturgy or prayer, and also in many other respects, yet do they not for that diversity of ceremonies hate one another, neither yet do the common people of sundry sects fall to mutiny & debate: but men indeed of singular learning & much reading confer oftentimes together, & as in private each man affirmeth his own sect to be the best, so likewise do they confirm their opinions by subtle arguments, neither may any man under pain of grievous punishment reproach any of the said four ancient doctors. And in very deed they all of them follow one and the same religion, to wit, that which is prescribed in the canons of Hashari the principal doctor of the mahometans, which canons go for currant over all Africa, and most part of Asia, except in the dominions of the great Sophi of Persia; who because he rejecteth the said canons, is accounted by other mahometans an heretic, and a schismatic. But how such variety of opinions proceeded from the four doctors aforesaid, it were tedious and troublesome to rehearse: he that is desirous to know more of this matter, let him read my Commentaries which I have written concerning the law and religion of Mahumet, according to the doctrine of Malich, who was a man of profound learning, and was borne at Medina Talnabi, where the body of Mahumet lieth buried: which doctrine of Malich is embraced throughout all Syria, Egypt, and Arabia: wherewith if any man be delighted, let him peruse my foresaid Commentaries, and they will satisfy him to the full. Upon malefactors they inflict most grievous and horrible punishment, especially upon such as have committed any heinous crime in the court. thieves they condemn to the halter. A murder committed treacherously they punish in manner following: the executioners assistants take the malefactor one by the head, and another by the feet, and then comes the chief executioner with a twohand sword, and cutteth his body in twain, the one part whereof adjoining to the head is put into a fire full of vnslaked lime: and it is a An horrible kind of execution. most strange and dreadful thing to consider, how the same dismembered and half body will remain alive in the fire for the space of a quarter of an hour, speaking and making answer unto the standers by. But rebels or seditious persons they flay alive, stuffing their skins with bran till they resemble man's shape, which being done, they carry the said stuffed skins upon camels backs through every street of the city, and there publish the crime of the party 〈◊〉: than which punishment I never saw a more dreadful, by reason that the condemned party liveth so long in torment: but if the tormenter once toucheth his navel with the knife, he presently yieldeth The navel being cut is present death. up the ghost: which he may not do until he be commanded by the magistrate standing by. If any be 〈◊〉 for debt, not having wherewithal to satisfy the same, the governor of the prison payeth their creditors, and sendeth them, poor 〈◊〉, bound in chains, & accompanied with certain keepers, daily to beg alms from street to street, all which alms redoundeth to the governor, and he alloweth the said prisoners very bare maintenance to live upon. Moreover there go crying up and down this Women 〈◊〉. city certain aged women, who (though that which they say in the streets cannot be understood) are notwithstanding enjoined by their office to circumcise women according to the prescript of Mahumet: which ceremony is observed in Egypt and Syria. Of the manner of creating the Sultan, and of the orders, degrees, and offices in his court. THe dignity and power of the Sultan was in times past exceeding great; but Selim the great Turk in the year of Christ (if I be not deceived) 1517. utterly abolished the said dignity, and changed all the customs and laws of the Sultan. And because it hath been my hap john Leo was thrice in Egypt thrice to travel into Egypt since the said wonderful alteration befell, I suppose it will not be much beside my purpose, if I set down in this place such particulars as I know to be most certain true concerning the court of the Sultan. Unto this high dignity was wont to be chosen some one of The 〈◊〉. the most noble Mamaluks. These Mamaluks being all Christians at the first, and stolen in their childhood by the Tartars out of the province of Circassia which bordereth upon the Euxin sea, and being sold at Caffa a town of Taurica Chersonesus, were brought from thence by certain merchants unto the city of Cairo, and were there bought by the Sultan; who constraining them forthwith to abjure and renounce their baptism, caused them to be instructed in the Arabian and Turkish languages, and to be trained up in military discipline, to the end they might ascend from one degree of honour to another, till at last they were advanced unto the high dignity of the Sultan. But this custom whereby it was enacted, that the Sultan should be chosen out of the number of such as were Mamaluks and slaves by their condition, began about 250. years sithence, whenas the family of the valiant Saladin (whose name was so terrible unto Christians) being supported but by a few of the kindred, fell to utter decay and ruin. At the same time when the last king of jerusalem was determined to sack the city of Cairo, which also in regard of the sloth and cowardice of the Mahometan Califa then reigning over it, intended to make itself tributary unto the same king, the judges and lawyers of the city with the consent of the Califa, sent for a certain prince of Asia called Azedudin, of the nation of Curdu, (the people whereof live in tents like the Arabians) which Azedudin together with his son Saladin, came with an army of fifty thousand horsemen. And albeit Saladin was inferior in age unto his father, yet in regard of his redoubted valour, and singular knowledge in military affairs, they created him general of the field, and gave him free liberty to bestow all the tributes and revenues of Egypt, as himself should think expedient. And so marching at length against the Christians, he got the victory of them without any bloodshed, and drove them out of jerusalem and out of all Syria. Then Saladin returning back with triumph unto Cairo, had an intent to usurp the government thereof: where upon having slain the Califa his guard (who bore principal sway over the Egyptians) he procured the death also of the Califa himself, being thus bereft of his guard, with a poisoned cup, and then forthwith submitted himself unto the patronage of the Califa of Bagdet, who was the true & lawful Mahometan prelate of Cairo. Thus the jurisdiction of the Califas of Cairo (who had continued lords of that city by perpetual succession for the space of two hundred and thirty years) surceased, and returned again unto the Califa of Bagdet, who was the true & lawful governor thereof. And so the schismatical Califas and patriarchs being suppressed, there grew a contention between Saladin and the Sultan of Bagdet, & Saladin made himself a sovereign of Cairo, because the said Sultan of Bagdet being in times past prince of the provinces of Mazandran and Euarizin situate upon the river of Ganges, and being borne in a certain country of Asia, laid claim notwithstanding unto the dominion of Cairo, and intending to wage war against Saladine, he was restrained by the Tartars of Corasan, who made invasions and inroads upon him. Saladin on the other side fearing least the Christians in revenge of the foresaid injury would make an expedition into Syria, and considering that his forces were partly slain in the former wars, and partly consumed by pestilence, except a few which remained for the defence and safeguard of his kingdom, began to employ himself 〈◊〉 buying of slaves that came The original of the Mamaluks. from Circassia, whom the king of Armenia by those days took and sent unto Cairo to be sold: which slaves he caused to abjure the Christian faith and to be trained up in feats of war and in the Turkish language, as being the proper language of Saladin himself: and so the said slaves within a while increased so exceedingly both in valour and number, that they became not only valiant soldiers and skilful commanders, but also governors of the whole kingdom. After the decease of Saladin, the dominion remained unto his family 150. years, and all his successors observed the custom of buying slaves of Circassia: but the family of Saladin growing at length to decay, the slaves by a general consent elected one Piperis a valiant Mamaluk of their own company to be their sovereign Lord and Sultan: which custom they afterward so inviolably kept, that not the Sultan's own son nor any other Mamaluk could attain unto that high dignity, unless first he had been a Christian, and had abjured his faith, and had learned also exactly to speak the Circassian and Turkish languages. Insomuch that many Sultan's scent their sons in their childhood into Circassia, that by learning the language and fashions of the country they might prove in process of time fit to bear sovereign authority; but by the dissension of the Mamalukes they were always defeated of their purpose. And thus much briefly concerning the government of the Mamalukes, and of their Princes, called even till this present by a word of their own mother- 〈◊〉 by the names of Sultan's: let us now speak of the honourable degrees and dignities inferior to the Soldanship. Of the principal Peer next under the Sultan called Eddaguadare. THis man being in dignity second unto the Sultan, and being, as it were, his viceroy or lieutenant, had authority to place or displace any magistrates or officers; and maintained a family almost as great as the family of the Sultan himself. Of the Sultan's officer called Amir Cabir. THis man having the third place of honour was Lord general over the Sultan's military forces; who was by office bound to levy armies against the foreign enemy, especially against the next Arabians, and to furnish the castles & cities with 〈◊〉 garrisons: and also had authority to dispend the Sultan's treasure upon such necessary affairs as he thought good. Of Nai Bessan. THE fourth in dignity after the Sultan called Nai Bessan, being the Sultan his lieutenant in Syria, and gathering up all the tributes of Assiria, bestowed them at his own discretion, & yet the Sultan himself was to place garrisons in the castles and forts of those provinces. This Nai Bessan was bound yearly to pay certain thousands of Saraffis unto the Sultan. Of the Ostadar. THE fifth magistrate called the Ostadar, was the great master or steward of the palace; whose duty was to provide apparel for the Sultan, with victuals and other necessaries for his whole family. And unto this dignity the Sultan used to advance some one of his most ancient, honourable, and virtuous nobles, under whose tuition himself had in times past been trained up. Of the Amiri Anchor. THE sixth called the Amiri Anchor, was master of the horse and camels; and distributed them unto each man in court, according to his degree. Of the Amiralf. THE seventh office was performed by certain principal Mamalukes, being like unto the Colonels of Europe: every of whom was captain of a thousand inferior Mamaluks; and their office was to conduct the Sultan's forces against the enemy, & to take charge of his armour. Of the Amirmia. THE eight degree of honour was allotted unto certain centurions over the Mamalukes; who were continually to attend upon the Sultan, either when he road any whither, or when he exercised himself in arms. Of the Chazendare. THE ninth person was the treasurer, who made an account unto the Sultan of all the tributes and customs of his kingdom, disbursing money for the daily and necessary expenses of the Sultan's household, and laying up the rest in the Sultan's castle. Of the Amirsileh. THE tenth called the Amirsileh had the armour of the Sultan committed to his charge, which being contained in a great armory was to be scoured, furbushed, and renewed at his direction, for which purpose he had sundry Mamaluks placed under him. Of the Testecana. THe eleventh called the Testecana was master of the Sultan's wardrobe, and took charge of all such robes and apparel as were delivered unto him by the Ostadar or high steward of the household; which robes he distributed according to the appointment of the Sultan; for whomsoever the Sultan promoted unto any dignity, him he appareled also. All the said garments were of cloth of gold, of velvet, or of silk: and whither soever the Testecana went, he was attended upon by a great number of Mamalukes. Certain other officers there were also: as namely the Serbedare, whose duty was to provide delicate drink for the Sultan, and to have always in a readiness most excellent compound waters tempered both with sugar and with spices. Moreover there were other officers called * There is such an officer in the court of England called, The Master of the Revels. Farrasin, that is, divers chamberlains, who furnished the place of the Sultan with rich hangings and carpets, and made provision also of torches and tapers of wax mixed with amber, which served both to show light, and to yield most fragrant and odoriferous smells. Others there were also called Sebabathia, to wit, the footmen of the Sultan: and certain others called Taburchania, which were the Sultan's Halberdiers, who attended upon his person when he road forth, or fate in public audience. Adavia were those that took charge of the Sultan's carriages whithersoever he traveled: out of which number there was a master-hangman or executioner chosen; and so often as any malefactors were to be punished, all his companions stood by him to learn his bloody occupation, namely of flaying and skinning men alive, and of putting them to the torture, to make them confess their crimes. And Esuha were the Sultan's foote-postes that carried letters from Cairo into Syria, and traveled on foot threescore miles a day, because that between Egypt and Syria there is neither mountainous nor miry way, but a continual sandy plain: howbeit such as carried letters of serious & weighty matters road upon camels. Of the Sultan's military forces. OF soldier's or martial men the Sultan had four degrees. The first called Caschia were certain horsemen, & were most valiant and expert warriors: out of which number the Sultan chose governors over his cities and castles. Some of these were allowed their stipend in ready money out of the Sultan's treasury, and others out of the tributes of towns and castles. The second called Eseifia were a company of footmen, bearing no arms but swords only, who likewise had their pay allowed them out of the Sultan's treasury. The third called Charanisa being voluntaries or such as served gratìs, had no other pay but only their victuals allowed them: but when any Mamaluke deceased that was well provided for, some one of them supplied his room. The fourth and last of all called Galeb, were the young and newcome Mamaluks, being as yet ignorant of the Turkish and Egyptian languages, and such as had showed no experiment of their valour. Of certain other great officers and magistrates in the Sultan's commonwealth. Of the magistrate called the Nadheasse. HE was as it were the Sultan's chief receiver; for all the tributes and customs of the whole kingdom came through his hands, and were paid from him unto the treasurer. Also he was customer of Cairo, by which office he gained infinite sums of money: neither could any man attain unto this office, unless he first paid unto the Sultan an hundred thousand Saraffis, which he recovered again within six months following. Of the Chetebeessere. THis man being the Sultan's secretary, and writing letters, and making answer on the Sultan's behalf, did (besides his secretariship) take notice and account of all the land-tributes in Egypt, and received the particular sums from the collectors thereof. Of the Muachih. THis was a secretary also, but inferior to the former, and yet more trusty unto the Sultan. His office was to review the letters and briefs penned by the former, and to examine whether they were agreeable unto the Sultan's mind, and also in the name of the Sultan to subscribe unto them. But the other hath so many cunning and expert scribes about him, that the Muachih seldom cancelleth any of his writings. Of the Mutesib. THis man's office was to set a price upon corn and all other victuals; which price partly according to the increase of Nilus, and partly also according to the resort of ships and other vessels out of the provinces of Errif and Sahid he either diminished or enhanced, and upon the offenders imposed such penalties as the Sultan thought good to appoint. Being at Cairo, I understood that the said Mutesib got daily by his office about a thousand Saraffis; having his ministers and substitutes not only in Cairo, but in all other cities and places of Egypt. Of the Amir el Cheggi. THe office of the Amir el Cheggi being of no less charge, than dignity, was imposed by the Sultan upon one of his most sufficient and wealthy Mamaluks: unto whom was committed the conduct of the carovan, which went every year from Cairo to 〈◊〉. Which duty he could not perform without great expenses of his own purse, for being guarded with a company of Mamalukes, he must travel with majestical pomp and costly diet, expecting no recompense for his exceeding charges either at the hands of the Sultan, or of the passengers which he conducted. Other offices and dignities there are, which I think needless to rehearse. Of the city of Geza. THe city of Geza being situate upon the bank of Nilus, over against the old city before mentioned, and being separated therefrom by the foresaid Island of Nilus, is a very populus and civil place, and is adorned with many sumptuous palaces built by the Mamaluks, whither they use to retire themselves out of the throng and multitude of Cairo. Here are likewise great store of artificers and merchants, especially such as buy cattle brought from the mountains of Barca, the drovers of which cattle being Arabians, do sell their ware in this city unto the merchants and butchers of Cairo, to the end they may avoid the trouble of passing over the river. The temple and other principal buildings of this city stand upon the shore of Nilus. On all sides of the city there are gardens and grounds of dates. Such as come hither in the morning 〈◊〉 Cairo to buy 〈◊〉 sell, use not to return home again till the evening. This way they travel The 〈◊〉 The city of 〈◊〉. over a sandy desert unto the Pyramids, and sepulchres of the ancient Egyptian kings, in which place they affirm the stately city of Memphis to have stood in times past. And albeit the way thither be very troublesome in regard of the manifold lakes and pits made by the inundation of Nilus, yet by the direction of a trusty and expert guide it may easily be travailed. Of the town of Muhallaca. THis little town built upon the bank of Nilus, by the ancient Egyptians, and standing three miles from the old city, hath a most beautiful temple situate upon the shore of Nilus, and divers other stately buildings therein. It aboundeth with dates and with certain fruits called Egyptian 〈◊〉. Egyptian figs; and the inhabitants use the very same rites and customs that are observed by the citizens of Cairo. Of the city of Chanca. THe great city of Chanca situate about six miles from Cairo, at the very entrance of the desert lying in the way to mount Sinai, is replenished with most stately houses, temples, and colleges. All the fields between Cairo and this city abound with great plenty of dates: but from Chanca to mount Sinai, which is an hundred and forty miles, there are no places of habitation at all. The inhabitants are but of mean wealth: for when any carovan is to pass into Syria, hither resort a company of people from Cairo, to provide things necessary for their journey, because the villages adjoining yield 〈◊〉 but dates. Through this city lie two main road- 〈◊〉, the one leading to 〈◊〉, and the other to Arabia. This city hath 〈◊〉 other water but such as remaineth in certain channels after the inundation of Nilus; which channels being broken, the water runneth forth into the plains, and there maketh a number of small lakes, from whence it is conveyed back by certain sluices into the cisterns of the city. Of the city of Muhaisira. THis little city built upon the river of Nilus, miles eastward of Cairo, aboundeth greatly with the grain or seed called Sesame, and containeth Store of the grain called Sesame. sundry mills to grind oil out of the same seed. The inhabitants are most of them husbandmen, except a few that exercise trade of merchandise. Of the town of Benisuaif. THis town being situate on the west side of Nilus, is distant from Cairo 120. miles. The plains adjacent abound exceedingly with flax and hemp, which is so excellent, that it is carried from Most excellent hemp. thence as far as Tunis in Barbary. And this town furnisheth all Egypt with flax, whereof they make very fine and strong cloth. The fields of the same are continually worn & diminished, and especially at this present, by the inundation of Nilus, for now their date-groundes are half consumed. The inhabitants for the most part are employed about their flax. And beyond Crocodiles. this town there are found Crocodiles that will eat man's flesh, as we will declare in our history of living creatures. Of the city of Munia. Upon the same side of Nilus standeth the fair city of Munia, which was built in the time of the mahometans by one Chasib a lieutenant and courtier of the Califa of Bagdet, upon an high place. Here are most excellent grapes, and abundance of all kind of fruit, which albeit they are carried to Cairo, yet can they not come thither fresh and new, by reason that this city is distant from Cairo an hundred and fower-score miles. It is adorned with most stately temples and other buildings: and here are to be seen at this present sundry ruins of the ancient Egyptian buildings. The inhabitants are rich, for they travail for their gain as far as Gaoga, a kingdom of the land of negroes. Of the city of El Fium. THis ancient city was founded by one of the Pharaos' upon a little branch of Nilus, and on a high ground, at the same time when the Israelites departed out of Egypt, whom the said Pharaoh greatly oppressed with making of brick, and with other servile occupations. In this city The place where joseph was buried. they say that joseph the son of jacob was buried, and that his bones were digged up by Moses and the Israelites when they departed. Fruits here grow great plenty, and especially olives, which are good to eat, but unprofitable to make oil of. It is a well governed and populous city, and containeth many artificers especially weavers. Of the city of Manf Loth. THis great and ancient city was built by the Egyptians, destroyed by the Romans, and re-edified by the mahometans, but not in so stately manner as it was first built. At this present there are found certain huge and high pillars and porches, whereon are verses engraven in the Egyptian tongue. near unto Nilus stand the ruins of a stately building, which seemeth to have been a temple in times past, among which ruins the citizens find sometimes coin of silver, sometimes of gold, and sometimes of lead, having on the one side highly graphick notes, and on the other side the pictures of ancient kings. The fields adjacent being very fruitful, are extremely scorched by the heat of the sun, and much haunted with Crocodiles, which was the occasion (as some think) why the romans abandoned this city. The inhabitants are men of indifferent wealth, for they exercise traffic in the land of negroes. Of the city of Azioth. THis ancient city founded by the Egyptians upon the bank of Nilus two hundred and fifty miles from Cairo, is most admirable in regard of the hugeness, and of the variety of old buildings and of epitaphs engraven in Egyptian letters; although at this present the greatest part thereof lieth desolate. When the mahometans were first Lords of this city it was inhabited by honourable personages, and continueth as yet famous in regard of the nobility and great wealth of the citizens. There are in this city almost an hundred families of christians, & three or four churches still remaining: and without the city standeth a monastery containing more than an hundred monks, who eat neither flesh nor fish, but only herbs, bread, and olives. And yet have they dainty cates without any fat among them. This monastery is very rich, and giveth three days entertainment to all strangers that resort thither, for the welcoming of whom they bring up great store of doves, of chickens, and of such like commodities. Of the city of Ichmin. IChmin being the most ancient city in all Egypt, was built by Ichmin the son of * It is otherwise read in the x. chap. of Genesis, verse 6. Misraim, the son of Chus, which was the son of * Dubium. Hen, upon the bank of Nilus next unto Asia, and three hundred miles eastward from Cairo. This city the mahometans, when they first began to usurp over Egypt, so wasted and destroyed, for certain causes mentioned in histories, that besides the foundations and rubbish they left nought remaining: for, transporting the pillars and principal stones unto the other side of Nilus, they built thereof the city called Munsia, even as we will now declare. Of the city of Munsia. MVnsia therefore, founded on the otherside of Nilus by the lieutenant of a certain Califa, hath no show of comeliness or beauty, by reason that all the streets are so narrow. And in sommer-time there riseth so much dust from the ground, that a man can hardly walk the streets. It aboundeth notwithstanding with corn and cattle. It was once subject unto a certain African prince of Barbary, whose name was Haoara, and whose predecessors were princes and governors of Haoara. Which city (they say) was given him in regard of a singular benefit which he did unto the foresaid Dalmatian slave that founded Cairo: howbeit I cannot be persuaded that the government remained so long a time unto that family. But in our time Soliman the ninth Turkish emperor deprived them of the same government. Of the monastery called Georgia. THis was in times past a famous monastery of Christians, called after the name of Saint George, and being six miles distant from Munsia. It was inhabited by more than two hundred monks, who enjoying large territories, possessions and revenues, showed themselves courteous and beneficial unto strangers; and the overplus of their yearly revenues was sent unto the patriarch of Cairo, who caused the same to be distributed amongst poor Christians: but about an hundred years ago, all the monks of this monastery died of a pestilence, which spread itself over all the land of Egypt. Whereupon the prince of Munsia compassed the said monastery with a wall, and erected divers houses for artificers and merchants to dwell in. And being alured by the pleasant gardens situate amidst the beautiful hills, he himself went thither to inhabit: but the patriarch of the jacobites making his moan unto the Sultan, the Sultan caused another monastery to be built in the same place, where in times past the old city stood; & assigned so much allowance thereunto, as might maintain thirty monks. Of the city of Chian. THis little city of Chian was built in times past near unto Nilus by the mahometans, which notwithstanding is not now inhabited by them but by the christians called jacobites, who employ themselves either in husbandry, or in bringing up of chickens, geese, and doves. There remain as yet certain monasteries of Christians, that give entertainment to strangers. But Mahumetans (besides the governor and his family) there are none at all. Of the city of Barbanda. BArbanda founded by the Egyptians upon Nilus, about fowerhundred miles from Cairo, was laid so waste by the romans, that nothing but the ruins thereof remained, most of which ruins were carried unto Asna, whereof we will forthwith entreat. Amongst the said ruins are to be found many pieces of gold and silver coin, and sundry fragments of Smaragds or emeralds. Emeralds. Of the city of Cana. THe ancient city of Cana built by the Egyptians upon the bank of Antonio Galuano maketh large mention of this city. Nilus over against Barbanda, and environed with walls of sunne-dried brick, is inhabited with people of base condition, applying themselves unto husbandry, by which means the city aboundeth with corn. Hither are the merchandise brought against the stream of Nilus, which are sent from Cairo to Mecca: for the distance from hence over the wilderness unto the Red sea, is at least 120. miles, all which way there is no water at all to befounde. And at the haven of Chossir upon the shore of the red sea are The haven of Chossir. divers cottages whereinto the said merchandises are unladen. And over against Chossir on the side of Asia lieth jambuh another haven of the red sea, whereat travailers going on pilgrimage to see the tomb of Mahumet at Medina, must make their rendezvous or general meeting. Morecuer Chana furnisheth Medina and Mecca with corn, in which places they suffer great and continual scarcity. Of the city of Asna. ASna in times past was called Siene: which name was afterward changed by the Arabians, in whose language the word Siene signifieth a filthy or unclean thing. Wherefore they called it Asna, that is to say, fair and beautiful, because it standeth in a pleasant situation upon the western bank of Nilus: which city though it was brought almost to desolation by the romans, yet was it so repaired again in the mahometans time, that the inhabitants grew exceeding rich, both in corn, cattle, and money: for they transport their commodities partly up the stream of Nilus, and partly over the deserts, into the kingdom of Nubia. Round about this city there are to be seen divers huge buildings, and admirable sepulchers, together with sundry epitaphs engraven both in Egyptian and Latin Letters. Of the city of Assuan. THe great, ancient, and populous city of Assuan was built by the Egyptians upon the river of Nilus, about fower-score miles eastward from Asna. The soil adjacent is most apt and fruitful for corn. And the citizens are exceedingly addicted unto the trade of merchandise, because they dwell so near unto the kingdom of Nubia, upon the confines whereof standeth their city: beyond which city Nilus dispersing himself over the plains through many small lakes becometh innavigable. Also the said city standeth near unto that desert over which they travel unto the port of Suachen upon the red sea, and it adjoineth likewise upon the frontiers of Suachen. Ethiopia. And here in summer time the inhabitants are extremely scorched with the heat of the sun, being of a swart or brown colour, and being mingled with the people of Nubia and Ethiopia. here are to be seen also many buildings of the ancient Egyptians, and most high towers, which they call in the language of that country Barba. Beyond this place there is neither city nor habitation of any account, besides a few villages of black people, whose speech is compounded of the Arabian, Egyptian, and Ethiopian languages. These being subject unto the people called * Bugiha are those which in 〈◊〉 time were called Troglodytae. Bugiha, live in the fields after the Arabian manner, being free from the Sultan's jurisdiction, for there his dominions are limited. And thus much concerning the principal cities standing along the main channel of Nilus: Some whereof I saw, others I entered into, and passed by the residue: but I had most certain intelligence of them all, either by the inhabitants themselves, or by the mariners which carried me by water from Cairo to Assuan, with whom returning back unto Chana, I traveled thence over the desert unto the red sea, over which sea I crossed unto jambuth, and Ziddem two haven-townes of Arabia deserta, of which two towns, because they belong unto Asia, I will not here discourse, lest I should seem to transgress the limits of Africa. But if it shall please god to The great travels of john Leo. vouchsafe me longer life, I purpose to describe all the regions of Asia which I have traveled; to wit Arabia deserta, Arabia felix, Arabia Petrea, the Asian part of Egypt, Armenia, and some part of Tartary; all which countries I saw and passed through in the time of my youth. Likewise I will set down my last voyages from Fez to Constantinople, from Constantinople to Egypt, and from thence into Italy, in which journey I saw divers and sundry Islands. All which my travels I mean (by gods assistance) being returned forth of Europe into mine own country, particularly to describe; deciphering first the regions of Europe and Asia which I have seen, and thereunto annexing this my discourse of Africa; to the end that I may promote the endeavours of such as are desirous to know the state of foreign countries. JOHN LEO HIS NINTH BOOK OF the History of Africa, and of the memorable things therein contained. Wherein he entreateth of the principal rivers, and of the strange living creatures, plants, and minerals of the same country. Of the river of Tinsist. THe river of * Or 〈◊〉. Tinsist (that we may begin in Barbary from the western part of Africa) springing forth of the mountains of Atlas which are next unto the city of Hanimmei, to wit, about the east part of the territory of Maroco, and continuing his course northward over the plains, receiveth many other rivers thereinto, and at Azafi a town of Duccala dischargeth his streams into the main Ocean. Into this mighty river of Tinsist fall two other great rivers, called Siffelmel and Niffis; the one whereof springeth out of Hanteta a mountain of Maroco; and the other issuing forth of mount Atlas near unto Maroco, and winding itself along the plains of that region, disemboqueth at last into the said mighty river. And albeit the river Tensist be for the most part of an exceeding depth, yet may it in divers places be waded over, where the water reacheth unto the stirrups of an horseman: but a footman must strip himself naked to pass over the same. near unto Maroco there is a bridge of fifteen arches built by king Mansor upon this river: which bridge is accounted one of the most curious buildings in all Africa. Three of the said arches were demolished by Abu Dubus the last king and patriarch of Maroco, to the end he might hinder the passage of jacob the first Fezsan king of the Marin family: but this attempt of his was to none effect, as it sufficiently appeared by the success thereof. Of the two rivers called Teseuhin. THe two rivers called by this one name, springing each of them, three miles asunder, out of mount Gugideme, and running through the plains of Hascora, exonerate themselves into the river called Lebich. These two rivers (as I have said) have one only name, being either of them (according to the African language) called Teseut in the singular number, and in the plural Teseuhin, which signifieth lists or borders. Of Quadelhabid, that is to say, the river of servants. QVadelhabid taking his original among the high and i'll mountains of Atlas, and runniug through certain narrow and uneeven valleys, holdeth on his course by the confines of Hascora and Tedle, and then stretching northward over a certain plain, falleth at length into the river of Ommirabih. In May when the snow melteth, this river increaseth to some bigness. Of the river of Ommirabih. THe mighty river of Ommirabih issuing also forth of the lofty mountains of Atlas where the province of Tedle bordereth upon the kingdom of Fez, passeth through certain plains called Adachsun, and being afterward straightened among the narrow valleys, it runneth under a stately bridge built by Ibulhasen the fourth king of the Marin family: from thence trending southward it watereth the plains situate between the regions of Duccala and Temesne, and lastly disburdeneth itself under the walls of Azamor into the main Ocean. About the end of may they take great store of fishes in this river called by the Italians Lasche, wherewith all Azamur being sufficiently stored, they salted the said fishes and send many ships full of them into Portugal. Of the river of Buregrag. BVregrag arising out of one of the mountains of Atlas, and continuing his course by sundry valleys, woods, and hills, proceedeth on over a certain plain, and near unto the towns of Sala and Rabat, being the utmost frontiers of the Fezsan kingdom, it falleth into the Ocean sea. Neither have the two foresaid towns any other port or harbour, but within the mouth of the said river only, which is so difficult to enter, that unless the pilot be thoroughly acquainted with the place, he is in great hazard of running his ship upon the shouldst: which shouldst serve instead of bulwarks to defend either town from the fleets of the Christians. Of the river of Baht. THis river issuing forth of mount Atlas, stretcheth northward by the woods and mountains, and running among certain little hills, disperseth itself upon the plains of the province of Azgar, and from thence it falleth into certain fens, lakes, and moist valleys, where they take great store of eels, and of the foresaid fishes called Lasche. The inhabitants live upon cattle, and fishing, and by reason of the plenty of milk, fish, and butter which they eat, they are much subject unto the disease called in Italian Morphia. This river may continually be waded over, except it be much increased by abundance of rain and melted snow. Of the river of Subu. THe river of 〈◊〉 beginneth upon mount Selilgo, standing in Cheuz, a province of the Fezsan kingdom. And it springeth out of a great fountain in the midst of a vast and solitary wood, and runneth by divers mountains and hills: from whence extending upon the plains, it approacheth within six miles of Fez, divideth in sunder the regions of Habat and Azgar, and at length about Mahmora, a place not far from Sala, exonerateth itself into the Ocean sea. Into this river fall divers others, two of which, namely Guarga and Aodor, spring out of the mountanes of Gumera, and the residue from the mountains of the territory of Teza. And although Subu be a large river, yet may it in sundry places be waded over, except in winter and the spring, when as it cannot be crossed but in certain dangerous and small boats. The same river also which runneth through the city of Fez called in the language of that country, The river of pearls, entereth into the foresaid river of Subu. This river of Subu aboundeth exceedingly with fish, and especially with the foresaid fishes called Lasche, which are there of no reckoning. The mouth thereof near unto the Ocean sea, being very deep and broad, is navigable for ships of great burden, as the Portugals and Spaniards have found by often experience: and were not the inhabitants so slothful, it might usually and commodiously be sailed upon: yea, if the corn which is carried by the merchants of Fez over land through the region of Azgar, were conveyed by water up this river, it might be sold at Fez for half the price. Of the river of Luccus. LVccus issuing forth of the mountains of Gumera, and stretching westward over the plains of Habat and Azgar, passeth by the city of Caesar Elcabir, and near unto Harais a city of Azgar upon the borders of Habat, dischargeth itself into the main-Ocean: in the mouth of this river lieth the haven of the foresaid city, being very difficult to enter. Of the river of Mulullo. MVlullo arising out of mount Atlas between the cities of Teza, and Dubdu, runneth through the desert and barren plains of Terrest and Tafrata, and at length exonerateth itself into the river Muluia. Of the river of Mulwa. THe famous river of * Or Muluia. Mulwa taking his original from that part of Atlas which is situate in the region of Cheuz, about five and twenty miles from the city of Gherseluin, and passing over dishabited and drieplaines, as also amidst the deserts of Angad and of Garet, and by the foot of mount Beni jeznaten, falleth not far from the town of Chasasa into the Mediterran sea. This river a man may wade over always in summer, in the mouth whereof are caught most excellent fishes. Of the river of Za. THis river springing out of mount Atlas runneth through a certain plain of the desert of Angad, whereas the kingdoms of Fez and of Telensin confine one upon an other: which though it be exceeding deep, yet never did I see the water thereof thick or muddy. It aboundeth with fishes, but the inhabitants being destitute of fit instruments, can not take them, neither indeed be the waters convenient to fish upon, because they are so clear. Of the river of Tefne. THe small river of Tefne issuing forth of the mountains bordering upon Numidia, and continuing a northerly course over the desert of Angad, falleth into the Mediterran sea, about fifteen miles from Telensin, and it affourdeth nought but a few small fishes. Of the river Mina. THis river flowing out of certain mountains near unto Tegdent, passeth through the fields of the city of Batha, and thence runneth northerly into the Mediterran sea. Of the river Selef. THis great river falling from the mountains of Guanseris, and descending through barren plains to the confines of the kingdoms of Telensin and Tenez, separateth Mezagran from Mustuganin, and then entereth into the Mediterran sea: in the mouth of which river are caught very excellent fishes of divers kinds. Of the river Sefsaia. THis small river beginning from mount Atlas, passeth over the plain of Mettegia near unto Alger, and not far from the ancient town of Temendefust dischargeth itself into the Mediterran sea. Of that which is called The great river. THis river ariseth out of the mountains adjoining upon the region of Zeb, from whence running along, it disemboqueth into the Mediterran sea about three miles from Bugia. It overfloweth not but in rainy and snowy weather: neither use the people of Bugia to fish therein, having the sea so near them. Of the river called Sufgmare. IT springeth out of the mountains bordering upon mount Auras, and passeth on through the barren fields unto the territory of the city Constantina, and gliding along by the borders thereof, it receiveth a small river; and so holding a Northerly course it falleth into the Mediterran sea about the same place where it separateth the fields of Chollo from the fields of the castle called jegel. Of the river jadog. THis small river issuing forth of the mountains near Constantina, and stretching by the same mountains towards the east, disburdeneth itself into the sea not far from the city of Bona. Of the river called Guadilbarbar. IT proceedeth out of certain mountains adjoining upon the fields of the city called Vrbs, and gliding by the hills and mountains, it runneth in such a crooked channel, that such as travel from Bona to Tunis, must cross over it without either boats or bridges above twenty times. And so at length it falleth into the sea not far from the forsaken port of Tabraca, and about fifteen miles from the city of Bege. Of the river of Megerada. THe mighty river of Megerada springing forth of the mountains near unto the city Tebessa, upon the borders of the province of Zeb, continueth a northerly course, until at a place called Gharel Meleh, forty miles distant from Tunis it exonerateth itself into the Mediterran sea. In rainy weather it so increaseth, that travelers, because there are neither boats nor bridges, are constrained to stay two or three days by the rivers side till it be decreased, especially within six miles of Tunis. And hereby you may see how the Africans of these times degenerate both in wit and courage from the ancient Africans, who made the people of Rome to tremble so often at their valour. Of the river of Capis. IT proceedeth from a certain southern desert, and passing through sandy plains, falleth into the sea by a town of that very name. The water thereof is salt, and so hot, that whosoever listeth to drink of it, must set A river of hot and salted water. it a cooling for the space of an hour. Thus much concerning the principal rivers of Barbary: let us now proceed on to describe the Numidian rivers. Of the rivers of Numidia; and first of the river called Sus. THe great river of Sus flowing out of the mountains of Atlas, that separate the two provinces of Hea and Sus in sunder, runneth southward among the said mountains, stretching into the fields of the foresaid region, and from thence trending westward unto a place called * Or Guartguessen Gurtuessen, where it dischargeth itself into the main Ocean. In winter time it mightily overfloweth, but in summer it is very shallow. Of the river of Darha. THis river taking his original from mount Atlas about the confines of Hascora, passeth southward to the province called Darha: from whence proceeding through the deserts, it is dispersed among certain fields and pastures, where because of the abundance of grass, the Arabians feed their camels. In summer it is so dried up, that a man shall not wet his shoes in going over it: but it so increaseth in winter, that it cannot be passed over in boats. And by extreme heat of the sun the waters thereof prove bitter. Of the river of Ziz. THis river springing out of the mountains of Atlas inhabited by the people called Zanaga, and running along by many other mountains and by the city of Gherseluin, holdeth on his course through the fields of Cheneg, Metgara, and Reteb, and entereth the territory of the city Segelmesse: from whence it proceedeth by the desert castle of Sugaihila, and beyond the said castle falleth into a lake amidst the sandy deserts, where no inhabitants are to be found, whither notwithstanding the Arabian hunters usually resort, for that they find great store of game there. Of the river of Ghir. THe river of Ghir issuing also forth of mount Atlas, stretcheth southward by certain deserts, and then passing through the region of Benigumi, transformeth itself likewise into a lake in the very midst of the deserts. Whereas in the beginning of this my discourse, entreating of the division of Africa, I described the river called by Ptolemey Niger, it would here be superfluous to make any repetition thereof: wherefore let us now proceed unto the description of Nilus. Of the mighty river of Nilus. THE course of this river is in very deed most admirable, and the creatures therein contained are exceeding strange, as namely sea-horses, sea-oxens, crocodiles, and other such monstrous and cruel beasts, (as we will afterward declare) which were not so hurtful either in the ancient times of the Egyptians or of the romans, as they are at this present: but they became more dangerous ever since the mahometans were lords of Egypt. Meshudi in his treatise of the memorable things of his time, reporteth that when Humeth the son of Thaulon was lieutenant of Egypt under Gihsare Mutavichil the Califa of Bagdet, namely in the year of the Hegeira 270. there was a certain leaden image about the bigness of a crocodile found among the ruins of an old Egyptian temple, which in regard of the Hieroglyphic characters & constellations engraven thereon, served instead of an enchantment against all crocodiles; but so soon as the said lieutenant caused it to be broken in pieces, the crocodiles began then to invade men, and to do much mischief. Howbeit what the reason should be, why the crocodiles between Cairo and the Mediterran sea are harmless, and those above Cairo towards the main land, should devour and kill so many persons, it goeth beyond my skill to determine. But, to return unto the description of Nilus, it increaseth (as we have said) for the space of forty days, beginning from the seventeenth of june; and it continueth just so long time in decreasing. For whereas in the higher Ethiopia it raineth most abundantly about the beginning of May, the course and inundation of the water is hindered all the month of May, & some part of june, before it can attain unto the plain country of Egypt. Concerning the original fountain of this river, there Sundry opinions concerning 〈◊〉. are manifold opinions, and all of them uncertain. Some there are which affirm the same to spring out of the mountains, called by themselves, The mountains of the moon; and others say that it beginneth upon certain plains situate beneath the foot of the said mountains, and issueth out of sundry fountains, being a great way distant one from another. Howbeit the former of these two avouch, that Nilus with great violence falleth down from the said mountains into certain deep caves under the ground, and cometh forth again at the foresaid fountains. Both of which opinions are false: for never did any man as yet see where Nilus taketh his original. The Ethiopian merchants which resort for traffic unto the city of Dancala, affirm that Nilus towards the south is enlarged into such a mighty lake, that no man can perceive which way the course thereof trendeth: and that afterward being divided into manifold branches running in several channels, and stretching themselves east and west, it hindereth the passage of traveilers, so that they cannot compass those intricate windings and turnings. Likewise divers Ethiopians inhabiting upon the plains in manner of the Arabians, say that many of them traveling five hundred miles southward to seek their camels which were strayed away in the heat of their lust, found Nilus to be in all places alike, that is to say, dispersed into manifold arms and lakes, and that they discovered sundry desert and barren mountains, where the foresaid Meshudi affirmeth emeralds to be found: which seemeth more probable than that which the same author affirmeth concerning savage men, which wander up and down like wild goats, and feed upon the grass of the deserts in manner of beasts. But if I recorded all the fables which our writers report concerning Nilus, I should seem over tedious unto the Reader. Of the strange beasts and other living creatures of Africa. MY purpose is not in this discourse to make a complete history of all the living creatures in Africa, but only of such as are either not to be found in Europe, or such as differ in any respect from those that are found: And here I intent to describe in order certain beasts, fishes, and fowls, omitting many things reported by Pliny, who was doubtless a man of rare and singular learning, notwithstanding by the default and negligence of certain authors which wrote before him, he erred a little in some small matters concerning Africa: howbeit a little blemish ought not quite to disgrace all the beauty of a fair and amiable body. Of the Elephant. THis witty beast keepeth in the woods, & is found in great numbers in the forests of the land of negroes. They use to go many in one company; and if they chance to meet with any man, they either shun him, or give place unto him. But if the Elephant intendeth to hurt any man, he casteth him on the ground with his long snout or trunk, & never ceaseth trampling upon him till he be dead. And although it be a mighty and fierce beast, yet are there great store of them caught by the Ethiopian hunters in manner following. These hunters being acquainted with the woods and The manner of taking elephants in 〈◊〉. thickets where they keep, use to make among the trees a round hedge of strong boughs and raftes, leaving a space open on the one side thereof, and likewise a door standing upon the plain ground which may be lift up with ropes, wherewith they can easily stop the said open place or passage. The elephant therefore coming to take his rest under the shady boughs, entereth the hedge or enclosure, where the hunters by drawing the said rope and fastening the door having imprisoned him, descend down from the trees, and kill him with their arrows, to the end they may get his teeth and make sale of them. But if the elephant chanceth to break through the hedge, he murdereth as many men as he can find. In Ethiopia the higher, and India, they have other devices to take the elephant, which lest I should seem over-tedious, I pass over in silence. Of the beast called Giraffa. THis beast is so savage and wild, that it is a very rare matter to see any of them: for they hide themselves among the deserts and woods, where no other beasts use to come; and so soon as one of them espieth a man, it flieth forthwith, though not very swiftly. It is headed like a camel, eared like an ox, and footed like a * Here is a word wanting in the original. : neither are any taken by hunters, but while they are very young. Of the Camel. Camel's are gentle and domestical beasts, and are found in Africa in great numbers, especially in the deserts of Libya, Numidia, and Barbaria. And these the Arabians esteem to be their principal possessions and riches: so that speaking of the wealth of any of their princes or governors, he hath (say they) so many thousand camels, and not so many thousand ducats. Moreover the Arabians that possess camels, live like lords and potentates in great liberty, because they can remain with their camels in barren deserts, whither no kings nor princes can bring armies to subdue them. These kinds of beasts are to be seen in * In all parts of the world which the author at that 〈◊〉 knew. all parts of the world, to wit, in Asia, Africa, and Europe. And they are used in Asia by the Tartars, the Curdians, the Dalemians, and the Turcomans. In Europe the Turks use them to carry burdens upon, as likewise do all the Arabians in Africa, and the inhabitants of the Lybian deserts; yea kings in their armies use camels also, to convey their victuals and carriages: howbeit the African camels far excel them of Asia; for travailing forty or fifty days together, without any provender at all, they are unladen in the evening, and The African 〈◊〉 are the best. turned loose into the next fields, where they feed upon grass, brambles, and the boughs of trees; which hardness the camels of Asia cannot endure but when they set forth any journey, they must be well pampered and full of flesh. Experience hath taught, that our camels having travailed laden fifty days together without any provender; have so wasted, first the flesh of their bunches, secondly of their bellies, and lastly of their hips, that they have scarce been able to carry the weight of 100 pounds. But the merchants of Asia give their camels provender, half of them being laden with wares, and the other half with provender, and so their whole carovan of camels goeth forth and returneth home laden: by which means they keep them in good plight, and reap double gains by their labour. chose the African merchants travailing with merchandise into Ethiopia, because they return empty, and bring back with them things of no great weight, so soon as they arrive with their lean and galled camels in Ethiopia, they sell them half for nought unto the inhabitants of the deserts. And they that return into Barbary or Numidia, need very few camels; namely for themselves to ride upon, for to carry their victuals, their money, and other light commodities. Of camels there are three kinds; whereof the first being called Hugiun are gross, and of a tall stature, and most fit to carry Three kinds of camels. burdens, but ere four years end they grow unprofitable: after which time every camel but of mean stature will carry a thousand pounds of Italian weight. When any of the said camels is to be laden, being beaten upon his knees and neck with a wand, he kneeleth down, and when he feeleth his load sufficient, he riseth up again. And the Africans use to geld their camels which they keep for the burden, putting but one male camel among ten females. The second kind of camels called Becheti, and having a double bunch, are fit both to carry burdens, and to ride upon: and these are bred only in Asia. The third kind called Raguahill, are camels of a slender and low stature, which albeit they are unfit to carry burdens, yet Camels of a wonderful swiftness, otherwise called Dromedaries. do they so excel the two other kinds in swiftness, that in the space of one day they will travel an hundred miles, and will so continue over the deserts for eight or ten days together with very little provender: and these do the principal Arabians of Numidia and the Moors of Libya usually ride upon. When the king of Tombuto is desirous to send any message of importance unto the Numidian merchants with great celerity, his post or messenger riding upon one of these camels, will run from Tombuto to Darha or Segelmesse, being nine hundred miles distant, in the space of eight days at the farthest: but such as travel must be expert in the way through the deserts, neither will they demand less than five hundred ducats for every journey. The said camels about the beginning of the spring inclining to their lust and venery, do not only hurt one another, but also will deadly wound such persons as have done them any injury in times past, not forgetting light and easy stripes: and whomsoever they lay hold on with their teeth, they lift him up on high, and cast him down again, trampling upon him with their feet, and in this mad mood they continue forty days together. Neither are they so patient of hunger as of thirst; for they will abstain from drink, without any inconvenience, for fifteen days together: The camels great abstinence from drink. and if their guides water them once in three days, they do them great hurt, for they are not usually watered but once in five or nine days, or at an urgent necessity, once in fifteen days. Moreover the said camels are of a gentle disposition, and are endued as it were with a kind of humane reason: for when as between Ethiopia and Barbary they have a days journey to travel more than their wont, their masters cannot drive them on, being so tired, with whips, but are feign to sing certain songs unto them; wherewith being exceedingly delighted, they perform their journey with such swiftness, that their said masters are scarce able to follow them. At my being in Cairo I saw a camel dance; which art of dancing how he How the Camels of 〈◊〉 learn to dance. learned of his master I will here in few words report. They take a young camel, and put him for half an hour together into a place like a bathstove prepared for the same purpose, the floor whereof is het with fire: then play they without upon a drum, whereat the camel not so much in regard of the noise, as of the hot pavement which offendeth his feet, lifteth up one leg after another in manner of a dance, and having been accustomed unto this exercise for the space of a year or ten months, they then present him unto the public view of the people, when as hearing the noise of a drum, and remembering the time when he trod upon the hot floor, he presently falleth a dancing and leaping: and so, use being turned into a kind of nature, he perpetually observeth the same custom. I could here report other matters concerning the same beast, which for brevities sake I omit. Of the horse of Barbary. THis name is given unto the Barbary horses throughout Italy and all Europe, because they come forth of Barbary, and are a kind of horses that are bred in those regions; but they which so think are deceived: for the horses of Barbary differ not in any respect from other horses: but horses of the same swiftness & agility are in the Arabian tongue called throughout all Egypt, Syria, Asia, Arabia Felix, and Deserta, by the name of Arabian horses: and the Historiographers affirm, that this kind of wild horses ranging up and down the Arabian deserts, and being broken and managed by the Arabians ever since the time of Ishmael, have so exceedingly multiplied and increased, that they have replenished the most part of Africa: which opinion savoureth of truth; for even at this present there are great store of wild horses found both in the African and Arabian deserts. And I myself saw in the Numidian desert a wild colt of a white colour, and 〈◊〉 a curled main. The most certain trial of these horses is when they can overtake the beast called Lant or the Ostrich in a race: which if they be able to perform, they are esteemed worth a thousand ducats or an hundred camels. Howbeit very few of these horses are brought up in Barbary, but the Arabians that inhabit the deserts, and the people of Libya bring up great numbers of them, using them not for travel or warfare, but only for hunting, neither do they give them any other meat but the milk of Morses fed with camels milk. camels, and that twice every day and night, to the end they may keep them nimble, lively, and of spare flesh; and in the time of grass they suffer them to feed in pastures, but then they ride not upon them. But those that the princes of Barbary bring up, are not of such swiftness, but being fed with provender, are more beautiful and comely to the eye; and these they use upon an urgent necessity, when they would escape the danger of their enemies. Of the wild horse. THe wild horse is one of those beasts that come seldom in sight. The Arabians of the deserts take the wild horse and eat him, saying that the younger the horse be, the sweeter is his flesh: but he will hardly be taken either with horses or dogs. In the waters where this beast keepeth they lay certain snares, covering them over with sand, wherein his foot being caught he is entangled and slain. Of the beast called Lant or Dant. THis beast in shape resembleth an ox, saving that he hath smaller legs and comelier horns. His hair is white, and his hoofs are as black as 〈◊〉, and he is so exceeding swift, that no beast can overtake him, but only the Barbary horse, as is beforesaid. He is easilier caught in summer then in winter, because that in regard of the extreme fretting heat of the sand his hoofs are then strained and set awry, by which means his swiftness is abated, like as the 〈◊〉 of stags & roe-deer. Of the hide of this beast Targets made of a skin. are made shields and targets of great defence, which will not be pierced but only with the forcible shot of a bullet; but they are sold at an extreme price. Of the wild ox. IT resembleth the tame ox, save that it is less in stature, being of a grey or ashe-colour, and of great swiftness. It haunteth either the deserts, or the confines of the deserts. And the flesh thereof (they say) is very savoury. Of the wild ass. THis beast also being found either in the deserts or upon the borders thereof, is of an ash-colour. In swiftness they are surpassed only by the Barbary horses, and when they see a man, they bray out a loud kicking and wincing with their heels, and standing stone-still, till one approacheth so near them, that he may touch them with his hand, & then they betake themselves to flight. By the Arabians of the deserts they are caught with snares, and other engines. They go in companies either when they feed or water themselves. Their flesh is hot and unsavoury, and hath a wild taste: but being set a cooling two days after it is sodden, it becometh very savoury and pleasant. Of the oxen upon the mountains of Africa. ALl the oxen upon the mountains of Africa being tame cattle are of so mean a stature, that in comparison of other oxen they seem to be but heifers of two years old: but the mountainers, using them to the plough, say that they are strong and will endure much labour. Of the beast called Adimmain. IT is a tame beast, being shaped like a ram, and of the stature of an ass, and having long and dangle ears. The Libyans use these beasts instead of kine, and make of their milk great store of cheese and butter. They have some wool, though it be but short. I myself upon a time being merrily disposed, road a quarter of a mile upon the back of one of these beasts. Very many of them there are in the deserts of Libya, and but few in other places: and it is a rare matter to see one of them in the Numidian fields. Of the African Ram. THere is no difference between these rams of Africa and others, save only in their tails, which are of a great thickness, being by so much the grosser, by how much they are more fat, so that some of their tails weigh ten, and other twenty pounds a piece, and they become fat of their own natural inclination: but in Egypt there are divers that feed them fat with bran and barley, until their tails grow so big that they cannot remove themselves from place to place: insomuch that those which take charge of them are feign to bind little carts under their tails, to the end they may have strength to walk. I myself saw at a city in Egypt called Asiot, and standing upon Nilus, about an hundred and fifty miles from Cairo, one of the said rams tails that weighed fower-score pounds, and others affirmed that they had seen one of those tails of an hundred and fifty pounds' weight. All the fat therefore of this beast consisteth in his tail; neither is there any of them to be found but only in Tunis and in Egypt. Of the Lyon. THe 〈◊〉 is a most fierce and cruel beast, being hurtful unto all other beasts, and excelling them both in strength, courage, and cruelty, neither is he only a devourer of beasts, but of men also. In some places one Lion will boldly encounter two hundred horsemen. They range without all fear among the flocks and droves of cattle, and whatsoever beast they can lay hold on, they carry it into the next wood unto their whelps: yea some Lions there are (as I have before said) that will vanquish and kill five or six horsemen in one company. Howbeit such Lions as live upon the cold mountains are not so outrageous and cruel: but the hotter the places be where they keep, the more ravenous and bold are they, as namely upon the frontiers of Temesna, and of the kingdom of Fez, in the desert of Angad near Telensin, and between the city of Bona and Tunis, all which are accounted the most famous and fierce Lions in all Africa. In the spring, while they are given to lust and venery, they have most fierce and bloody conflicts one with an other, eight or twelve Lions following after one Lioness. I have heard many both men and women report, that if a woman chanceth to meet with a Lion, and showeth him her privy parts, he will with crying and roaring, cast his eyes upon the ground and so depart. Believe it they that list. But this I am well assured of, that whatsoever a Lion getteth in his paws, though it be a camel, he will carry it away. I myself was twice in great hazard to have been devoured of Lions, but by the goodness of God I escaped them. Of the Leopard. THese beasts living in the woods of Barbary, will not for all their great strength and cruelty hurt any man, unless it be very seldom, when as they meet with a man in a narrow passage, and cannot shun him, or when they are checked and provoked unto fury: for than they will fly upon a man, laying hold upon his visage with their talents, and plucking off so much flesh as they can catch, insomuch that sometimes they will crush his brains in pieces. They invade not any flocks or droves of tame cattle, but are at deadly feud with dogs, whom they will kill and devour. The mountainers of the region of Constatina hunt them on horseback, stopping all passages, where they might escape. The Leopard ranging up and down, and finding every place so beset with horsemen that he cannot get away, windeth and turneth himself on all sides, and so becometh a fit mark for the hunters to discharge their darts and arrows upon. But if the Leopard chanceth to escape, that man that lets him pass, is bound by an usual custom to invite the residue of the hunters unto a banquet. Of the beast called Dabuh. THis beast called by the Arabians Dabuh, and by the Africans jesef, in bigness and shape resembleth a wolf, saving that his legs and feet are like to the legs and feet of a man. It is not hurtful unto any other beast, but will rake the carcases of men out of their graves, and will devour them, being otherwise an abject and silly creature. The hunters being acquainted with his den, come before it singing and playing upon a drum, by which melody being alured forth, his legs are entrapped in a strong rope, and so he is drawn out and slain. Of the 〈◊〉- Cat. THese Cats are naturally wild, and are found in the woods of Ethiopia. The merchants taking their young whelps or kittes, feed them The manner of gathering civet. with milk, bran, and flesh, and keep them in cages or grates. But their odoriferous excrement (which is nought else but their sweat) they gather twice or thrice every day in manner following: first they drive them up and down the grate with a wand, till they sweat, and then they take the said sweat from under their flanks, their shoulders, their necks, and their tails: which excrement of sweat is commonly called civet. Of the Ape. OF Apes there are divers and sundry kinds, those which have tails, being called in the African tongue Monne, and those which have none, Babuini. They are found in the woods of Mauritania, and upon the mountains of Bugia and Constantina. They represent the shape of man, not only in their feet and hands, but also in their visages, and are naturally endued with wonderful wit and subtlety. They live upon grass and corn, and go in great companies to feed in the corn fields, and one of their company which standeth sentinel or keepeth watch and ward upon the borders, when he espieth the husbandman coming, he crieth out and giveth as it were an alarm to his fellows, who every one of them flee immediately into the next woods, and betake themselves to the trees. The she apes carry their whelps upon their shoulders, and will leap with them in that sort from one tree to another. Such of them as are taught, will do wonderful feats, but they are angry and cursed, notwithstanding they will soon be appeased. Of the Coneys of Africa. THere are great store of wild Coneys in Mauritania, and upon the mountains of Gumera; which albeit they are accounted wild, yet in my opinion they seem tame, for their flesh differeth neither in taste nor colour from the flesh of tame coneys. Of the strange fishes of Africa and first of the fish called 〈◊〉. THe fish called Ambara, being of a monstrous shape and bigness, is never seen but when it is cast up dead upon the seashore: and some of these fishes there are which contain twenty five cubits in length. The head of this fish is as hard as a stone. The inhabitants of the Ocean sea coast affirm that this fish casteth forth Amber; but whether the said Amber Amber. be the sperma or the excrement thereof, they cannot well determine. Howsoever it be, the fish may in regard of the hugeness be called a whale. Of the sea-horse. THis creature is commonly found in the rivers of Niger and Nilus. In shape it resembleth an horse, and in stature an ass, but it is altogether destitute of hair. It liveth both in the water and upon the land, and swimmeth to the shore in the night season. Barks and boats laden with wares and sailing down the river of Niger are greatly endangered by this sea-horse, for oftentimes he overwhelmeth and sinketh them. Of the sea-oxe. THe sea-oxe being covered with an exceeding hard skin is shaped in all respects like unto the land-oxe; save that in bigness it exceedeth not a calf of six months old. It is found in both the rivers of Niger and of Nilus, and being taken by fishers, is kept a long time alive out of the water. I myself saw one at Cairo led up and down by the neck in a chain, which (they say) was taken at the city of Asna standing upon the bank of Nilus, about four hundred miles from Cairo. Of the Tortoise. THis might benumbred among the land-creatures, because it liveth for the most part in the deserts. In the Libyan deserts are found 〈◊〉 many as big as a tun. And Bicri the Cosmographer in his book of the regions and journeys of Africa reporteth, that a certain man being weary of traveling, ascended to his thinking, upon an high stone lying in the desert, to the end he might free himself from the danger of serpents and venomous beasts; who having slept sound thereupon all night found himself in the morning removed three miles from the place where he first lay down, and thereby understood that it was not a stone but a tortoise whereon he reposed himself, which lying still all the day long creepeth for food in the night-season, but so slowly, that her pace can hardly be perceived. I myself have seen some of these tortoises, as big as a barrel, but never any so huge as the last before mentioned. The flesh of a tortoise not above seven A medicine for the leprosy. years old being eaten seven days together is said to be a perfect medicine against the leprosy. Of the Crocodile. THis cruel and noisome beast commonly frequenteth the rivers of Niger and Nilus, and containeth in length twelve cubits and above, the tail thereof being as long as the whole body beside, albeit there are The craft of the Crocodile in taking both men and beasts. but few of so huge a bigness. It goeth upon four feet like a Lizard, neither is it above a cubit and an half high. The tail of this beast is full of knots, and the skin thereof is so exceeding hard, that no crossbow will enter it. Some pray upon fishes only, but others upon beasts and men. Which lurking about the banks of the river, do craftily lay wait for men and beasts that come the same way, about whom suddenly winding their tails, they draw them into the water, and there devour them. Howbeit some of them are not so cruel by nature: for if they were, no inhabitants could live near unto the rivers of Nilus and Niger. In eating they move the upper jaw only, their neither jaw being joined unto their breastbone. Not many years sithence, passing up the river of Nilus towards the city of Cana, standing in the upper part of Egypt, four hundred miles from Cairo, on a certain night whilst we were in the midst of our journey, the moon being overshadowed with clouds, the mariners and passengers all fast a sleep, and the bark under sails, I myself studying by candlelight in my cabin, was called upon by a devout old man in the bark, who bestowed the same night in watching and prayer, and said unto me, call (I pray you) some of your company, who may help me to draw up this piece of wood floating upon the water, which will serve to morrow for the dressing of our dinner. Myself sir (quoth I) will come and help you, rather than wake any of our company in the dead of the night. Nay (quoth the old man) I will try whether I be able to draw it up alone or no. And so when the bark was near unto the wood, as he supposed, holding a rope in his hand to cast into the water; he was suddenly entangled with a crocodiles long tail, and was in a moment drawn under the water. Whereupon I making a shout, all the people in the bark arose, and striking sails we staid for the space of an hour, divers in the mean time leaping into the water to seek the man, but altogether in vain: and therefore all of them affirmed that he was caught by a crocodile. As we sailed farther we saw great numbers of crocodiles upon the banks of Islands in the midst of Nilus lie beaking them in the sun with their jaws wide open, whereinto certain little birds about the bigness of a thrush entering, came flying forth again presently after. The occasion whereof was told me to be this: The crocodiles Little birds flying into the crocodiles mouth to pick worms from between their teeth. by reason of their continual devouring of beasts and fishes, have certain pieces of flesh sticking fast between their 〈◊〉 teeth, which flesh being 〈◊〉, breedeth a kind of 〈◊〉 wherewith they are cruelly tormented. Wherefore the said birds flying about, and seeing the worms, enter into the crocodiles jaws, to satisfy their hunger therewith. But the crocodile perceiving himself freed from the worms of his teeth, offereth to shut his mouth, and to devour the little bird that did him so good a turn, but being hindered from his ungrateful attempt by a prick which groweth upon the birds head, he is constrained to open his jaws and to let her depart. The she crocodile laying eggs upon the shore, covereth them with sand; and so soon as the young crocodiles are hatched, they crawl into the river. Those crocodiles that forsake the river and haunt the deserts become venomous; but such as continue in Nilus, are destitute of poison. In Egypt there are many that eat the flesh of the crocodile, and affirm it to be of an excellent taste. His lard or grease is sold very dear at Cairo, The manner of taking the crocodile. and is said to be very medicinable for old and cankered wounds. They take the crocodile in manner following; The fishers binding a strong and large rope unto some tree or post standing for the nonce upon the bank of Nilus, fasten unto the end thereof an iron hook of a cubit long, and about the thickness of a man's finger, and upon the hook they hang a ram or a goat, by the bleating noise whereof the crocodile being alured, cometh forth of the water, and swalloweth up both the bait and the hook, wherewithal feeling himself inwardly wounded, he struggleth mightily, & beateth the ground, the fishers in the mean time pulling and slacking the rope, till the crocodile falleth down vanquished & dead: then they thrusthim in with certain darts and javelins under the shoulders and flanks where his skin is most tender, and so make a quick dispatch of him. His back is so hard and thick, that an arquebus or caliver will scarce pierce it. Of these beasts I saw above three hundred heads placed upon the walls of Cana, with their jaws wide open, being of so monstrous and incredible a bigness, that they were sufficient to have swallowed up a whole cow at once, and their teeth were great and sharp. The Egyptian fishers use to cut off the heads, of crocodiles, and to set them upon the walls of their cities, and so do hunters use the heads of wild beasts. Of the dragon. IN the caves of Atlas are found many huge and monstrous dragons, which are heavy, and of a slow motion, because the midst of their body is gross, but their necks and tails are slender. They are most venomous creatures, insomuch that whosoever is bitten or touched by them, his flesh presently waxeth soft & weak, neither can he by any means escape death. Of the Hydra. THis serpent being short in proportion of body, and having a slender tail and neck, liveth in the Libyan deserts. The poison thereof is most deadly, so that if a man be bitten by this beast, he hath none other remedy, but to cut off the wounded part, before the poison disperseth itself into the other members. Of the creature called Dub. THis creature living also in the deserts, resembleth in shape a Lizzard, saving that it is somewhat bigger, and containeth in length a cubit, and in breadth four fingers. It drinketh no water at all, and if a man pour any water into the mouth thereof, it presently dieth. It layeth eggs in manner of a tortoise, and is destitute of poison. The Arabians take it in the deserts: and I myself cut the throat of one which I took, but it bled a very little. Being flaied and roasted, it tasteth somewhat like a frog. In swiftness it is comparable to a Lizzard, and being hunted, if it chanceth to thrust the head into an hole, it can by no force be drawn out, except the hole be digged wider by the hunters. Having been slain three days together, and then being put to the fire, it stirreth itself as if it were newly dead. Of the Guaral. THis beast is like unto the former, saving that it is somewhat bigger, and hath poison both in the head and tail, which two parts being cut off, the Arabians will eat it, notwithstanding it be of a deformed shape and ugly colour, in which respects I loathed always to eat the flesh thereof. Of the Chameleon. THe chameleon being of the shape and bigness of a lizzard, is a deformed, crooked, and lean creature, having a long and slender tail like a mouse, and being of a slow pace. It is nourished by the element of air, and the sunbeams, at the rising whereof it gapeth, and turneth itself up and down. It changeth the colour according to the variety of places where it cometh, being sometimes black and sometimes green, as I myself have seen it. It is at great enmity with venomous serpents, for when it How the chameleon killeth the serpent. seeth any lie sleeping under a tree, it presently climbeth up the same tree, and looking down upon the serpent's head, it voideth out of the mouth as it were, a long thread of spittle, with a round drop like a pearl hanging at the end, which drop falling wrong, the chameleon changeth his place, till it may light directly upon the serpent's head, by the virtue wherofhe presently dieth. Our African writers have reported many things concerning the properties and secret qualities of this beast, which at this present I do not well remember. Of the Ostrich. SOmewhat we will here say concerning the strange birds and fowls of Africa, and first of the ostrich, which in shape resembleth a goose, but that the neck and legs are somewhat longer, so that some of them exceed the length of two cubits. The body of this bird is large, and the wings thereof are full of great feathers both white and black, which wings and feathers being unfit to fly withal, do help the ostrich, with the motion of her train, to run a swift pace. This fowl liveth in dry deserts, and layeth to the number of ten or twelve eggs in the sands, which being about the bigness of great bullets, weigh fifteen pounds a piece; but the ostrich is of so weak a memory, that she presently forgetteth the place where her eggs were laid. And afterward the same, or some other ostrichehenne finding the said eggs by chance, hatcheth and fosterech them as if they were certainly her own: the chickens are no sooner crept out of the shell, but they prowl up and down the deserts for their food: and before their feathers be grown, they are so swift, that a man shall hardly overtake them. The ostrich is a silly and deaf creature, feeding upon any thing which it findeth, be it as hard and undigestable as iron. The flesh especially of their legs, is of a slimy and strong taste: and yet the Numidians use it for food, for they take young ostriches and set them up a fatting. The ostriches wander up and down the deserts in orderly troops, so that a far off a man would take them to be so many horsemen, which illusion hath often dismayed whole carovans. Being in Numidia I myself 〈◊〉 of the ostriches flesh, which seemed to have not 〈◊〉 an unsavoury taste. Of the Eagle. OF eagles there are divers kinds, according to their natural properties, the proportion of their bodies, or the diversity of their colours: and the greatest kind of eagles are called in the Arabian tongue Nesir. The Africans teach their eagles to pray upon foxes and wolves; which in their encounter 〈◊〉 upon the heads of the said beasts with their bills, and upon the backs with their talents, to avoid the danger of biting. But if the beast turn his belly upward; the eagle will not forsake him, till she hath either A strange narration. pecked out his eyes, or slain him. Many of our African writers affirm, that the male eagle oftentimes engendering with a 〈◊〉 woof, begetteth a dragon, having the beak and wings of a bird, a serpent's tail, the feet of a wolf, and a skin speckled and party coloured like the skin of a serpent. Neither can it open the eyelids, and it liveth in caves. This monster albeit myself have not seen, yet the common report over all Africa affirmeth that there is such an one. Of the foul called Nesir. THis is the greatest foul in all Africa, and exceedeth a crane in bigness, though the bill, neck, and legs are somewhat shorter. In flying this bird mounteth up so high into the air, that it cannot be 〈◊〉; but at the sight of a dead carcase it will immediately descend. This bird liveth a long time, and I myself have seen many of them unfeathered by reason of extreme old age: wherefore having cast all their feathers, they return unto their nest, as if they were newly hatched, and are there nourished by the younger birds of the same kind. The Italians call it by the name of a Vulture, but I think it to be of another kind. They nestle upon high rocks, and upon the tops of wild and desert mountains, especially upon mount Atlas: and they are taken by such as are acquainted with those places. Of the bird called Bezi, or the hawk. THis bird called in Latin Accipiter, is very common in Africa. But the best African hawks are white, being taken upon certain mountains of the Numidian deserts, and with these hawks they pursue the crane. Of these hawks there are divers kinds; some being used to fly at partridges and quails, and others at the hare. Of the Bat. THese ugly nightbirds are rife all the world over: but in certain caves of Atlas there are many of them found as big and bigger than doves, especially in their wings: which albeit myself never saw, yet have I heard of them by divers persons. Of the parrot or poppiniay. THese parrots are commonly found in the woods of Ethiopia: but the better sort of them, and such as will imitate man's voice more perfectly, are the green ones. Parrot's there are as big as a dove, of divers colours, some red, some black, and some ashcoloured, which albeit they cannot so fitly express man's speech, yet have they most sweet and shrill voices. Of the locusts. OF locusts there are sometimes seen such monstrous swarms in Africa, that in flying they intercept the sunbeams like a thick cloud. They devour trees, leaves, fruits, and all green things growing out of the earth. At their departure they leave eggs behind them, whereof other young locusts breed, which in the places where they are left, will eat and consume all things even to the very bark of trees, procuring thereby extreme dearth of corn, especially in Mauritania. Howbeit the inhabitants of Arabia deserta, and of Libya, esteem the coming of these locusts as a fortunate boding: for, seething or drying them in the sun, they bruise them to powder, and so eat them. And now let thus much suffice to have spoken of the African beasts, fowls, fishes, serpents, etc. which are either not to be found in Europe, or such as differ from creatures of the same kind there. Wherefore having once briefly entreated in the chapters following of certain minerals, trees, and fruits of Africa, I purpose then to conclude this my present discourse. Whereas mine author john Leo entreateth but briefly of these locusts, which God ufeth as a most sharp scourge between times to discple all the nations of Africa; I thought it not unmeet to add two other relations or testimonies of the same argument: the one being reverend in regard of the author's antiquity; and the other credible and to be accepted, for that the reporter himself was a most diligent and faithful eyewitness of the same. The first testimony, taken out of the 11. chap. of the fifth book of Paulus Orosius contra Paganos. Of an huge and pernicious company of Locusts in Africa, which after they had wasted the country, being drowned in the sea, and cast up dead on the shore, bred a most wonderful pestilence both of man and beast. IN the consulship of Marcus Plautius Hypsaeus, and Marcus Fuluius Flaccus, Africa scarce breathing from bloody wars, an horrible and extraordinary destruction ensued. For whereas now throughout all Africa, infinite multitudes of locusts were gathered together, & had not only quite devoured the corn on the ground, and consumed the herbs with part of their roots, and the leaves and tender boughs of the trees, but had gnawn also the bitter bark, and dry wood; being with a violent and sudden wind hoist aloft in mighty swarms, and carried a long time in the air, they were at length drowned in the African sea. Whose loathsome and putrefied carcases being by the waves of the sea cast up in huge heaps far and wide along the shore, bred an incredible stinking & infectious smell: whereupon followed so general a pestilence of all living creatures, that the corrupt dead bodies of fowls, cattle, and wild beasts dissolved by the contagion of the air, augmented the fury of the plague. But how great and extraordinary a death of men there was, I cannot but tremble to report: for in Numidia, where Micipsa was then king, died fourscore thousand persons; and upon the sea-coast next adjoiningto Carthage and Utica, above two hundred thousand are said to have perished. Yea in the city of Utica itself were by this means swept from the face of the earth thirty thousand brave soldiers, which were appointed to be the garrison for all Africa. And the destruction was so sudden and violent, as they report, that out of one gate of Utica, in one and the same day, were carried above fifteen hundred dead corpses of those lusty young gallants. So that by the grace and favour of almighty God (through whose mercy, and in confidence of whom, I do speak these things) I may boldly affirm; that albeit sometime in our days the locusts in divers parts, and usually, do some damage which is tolerable: yet never befell there in the time of the Christians so insupportable a mischief, as that this scourge of locusts, which being alive are by no means 〈◊〉, should after their death prove far more pernicious: and which also living, the fruits of the earth would have been quite devoured; it had been much better they had never died, to the plague and destruction of all earthly creatures. Hitherto Paulus Orosius. The second testimony taken out of the 32. and 33. chapters of the Ethiopian history of Francis Aluarez, which for the satisfaction of every Reader, I have put down with all particularities and circumstances. Of the great multitude of Locusts, and the infinite damage that they procure in the dominions of Prete janni, Chap. 32. IN this quarter and throughout all the dominion of Prete janni, there is an horrible and great plague, to wit an innumerable company of Locusts, which eat and consume the corn, and trees of fruit; and so great is the number of these creatures, as it is not credible, for with the multitude of them the earth is covered, and the air so overspread, as one may hardly discern the sun: and further I affirm, that it is a thing most strange to him who 〈◊〉 not seen it; and if the damage they perform were general through all the provinces and kingdoms of Prete janni, his people would die with famine, neither could men possibly there inhabit: But one year they destroy one province, and the next year another 〈◊〉: as if for example, they waste the kingdom of Portugal or Castille this 〈◊〉, an other year they are in the quarters of Lenteio, an other in Estremadura, an other in Beira, or between the river Dorus and Minius, an other on the mountains, an other in old Castilia, Arragon or Andaluzia, and otherwhiles in two or three of these provinces at once; and wheresoever they come, the earth is more wasted and destroyed by them, then if it had been all over consumed with a fire. These locusts are as big as the greatest grasshoppers having yellow wings. Their coming into the country is known a day before: not for that we can see them, but we know it by the sun, who is yellow of colour, this being a sign that they draw near to the country, as also the earth looketh yellow, by reason of the light which reflecteth from their wings: whereupon the people in a manner become presently half dead, saying, we are undone, for the Ambati, that is to say, the locusts are come. And I can not forbear to set down that which I saw three sundry times, and first in Barua, where we had now been for the space of three years, and here we often heard it said, that such a country and such a realm was destroyed by the Locusts: and being in this province we saw the sun and the upper part of the earth look all yellow, the people being in a manner half dead for sorrow: But the day following it was an incredible thing to see the number of these creatures that came, which to our judgement covered four and twenty miles of land, as afterward we were informed. When this scourge and plague was come, the priests of that place came and sought me out, requesting me to give them some remedy for the driving of them away, and I answered, that I could tell them nothing, but only that they should devoutly pray unto God, that he would drive them out of the country. And so I went to the Ambassador, and told him, that it would be very good to go on procession, beseeching God that he would deliver the country, who peradventure in his great mercy might hear us. This liked the Ambassador very well: and the day following we gathered together the people of the land, with all the priests, and taking the consecrated stone, and the cross, according to their custom, all we Portugal's sung the Litany, and appointed those of the land, that they should lift up their voices aloud as we did, saying in their language Zio marina Christos, which is as much to say, as Lord God have mercy upon us: and with this manner of invocation we went over a piece of ground, where there were fields of wheat, for the space of a mile, even to a little hill: and here I A strange 〈◊〉. caused many of these locusts to be taken, pronouncing over them a certain conjuration, which I had about me in writing, having made it that night, requesting, admonishing, and excommunicating them, enjoining them within the space of three hours to depart towards the sea, or the land of the Moors, or the desert mountains, and to let the Christians alone: and they not performing this, I summoned and charged the birds of heaven, the beasts of the earth, and all sorts of tempests, to scatter, destroy, and eat up their bodies: and to this effect I took a quantity of locusts, making this admonition to them present, in the behalf likewise of them absent, and so giving them liberty, I suffered them to depart. It pleased God to hear us sinners, for in our return home, they came so thick upon our backs, as it seemed that they would have broken our heads, or shoulders, so hard they struck against us, as if we had been beaten with stones and cudgels, and in this sort they went towards the sea: The men, women, and children remaining at home, were gotten upon the tops, or terraces of their houses, giving God thanks that the locusts were going away, some afore, and others followed. In the mean while towards the sea, there arose a great cloud with thunder, which met them full in the teeth, and continued for the space of three hours with much rain, and tempest, that filled all the rivers, and when the rain ceased, it was a fearful thing to behold the dead Locusts, which were more than two * Or fathoms. yards in height upon the banks of the rivers, and in some rivers there were mighty heaps of them, so that the morning following there was not one of them found alive upon the earth. The people of the places adjoining hearing this, came in great numbers to inquire how this matter was effected; many of the inhabitants said, these Portugals be holy men, and by the power of their God, they have killed and driven away the locusts: others said, especially the priests and friars of those places near about, that we were witches, and by power of enchantments had driven away the said creatures, and that for this cause we feared neither lions, nor any other wild beast: Three days after this effect, there came unto us a Xuum, that is, a captain of a place called Coiberia, with men, priests, and friars, to request us, that we would for the love of God help them, saying that they were in a manner destroyed by the locusts; and that place was a days journey off towards the sea. They came to us about evening, and at the same instant, I and four other Portugals departed away with them, we went all night, and came thither an hour within day, where we found, that all those of the country, with many of the other places adjoining were assembled together, for they were also molested by the locusts. And assoon as we were come, we went our procession round about the land, which was seated upon an high hill, from whence we might discern many countries and places all yellow by reason of the multitude of locusts. Such invocatious and ceremonies being ended, as we performed in the other place, we went to dinner, & the men that were borderers, requested us to go with them, promising us great rewards: It pleased god, that as soon as we had dined, we saw all the earth so cleared that there was not so much as one locust to be seen: The people seeing this and not being satisfied with the favour and grace received, they requested us to go and bless their possessions, for they were yet afraid lest the locusts would return; and so we departed. Of the damage we saw done in another province by the Locusts, in two sundry places. Chap. 33. AN other time also we saw the Locusts, being in a town called Abuguna: Prete janni sent us to this town which is in the kingdom of Angote, and distant from Barua, where we continued, thirty days journey, to the end that there we might be furnished with victuals: Being come 〈◊〉, I went with the ambassador Zagazabo, who came into Portugal, and five Genoveses, towards a certain town & a mountain called Aguoan, & we travailed five days through places all desert & destroyed, which places were sown with Maiz, having stalks as great as those props which we use about our vines, and we might see them all broken and trodden underfoot, as if there had been a tempest, and this had the locusts done. Their wheat, barley, and Taffo da guza were so eaten, as it seemed they never had been either tilled or sown. The trees were without leaves, and their barks all gnawn & eaten, and there was not so much as a spire of grass, for they had devoured every thing; and if we had not been advised, and foreseen the same (for when we departed, we laded our mules with victuals) we and our beasts had died together for hunger. The country was covered all over with winglesse locusts; and they said, that those were the seed of them, which had devoured all, and that when they had gotten wings, they would go seek out the rest, the number of these was so great, as I am loath to report, because I should not perhaps be credited: but this I may well affirm, that I saw men, women, and children, sit as it were amazed amongst these locusts, and I said unto them, why sit you thus half dead, and do not kill these creatures, and so revenge yourselves of the wrong, that their fathers and mothers have done you, or at least that those which you kill may be able to do you no more harm? They answered, that they had not the hart, to withstand the scourge of God which he had sent upon them for their sins: And all the people of this place departed hence, so that we found the ways full of men and women on foot, with their children in their arms, and upon their heads, going into other countries, where they might find victual, and it was great pity to behold them. We being in the said province of Abuguna, in a place called Aquate, there came such swarms of locusts as were innumerable: which one day began to fall upon the ground about nine of the clock in the morning, and ceased not while night; where they lighted, there they staid, and then the next day in the morning went away: so that at three of the clock in the afternoon there was not one of them to be seen, and in this short time they left the trees utterly destitute of leaves. On the same day and hour there came an other squadron, and these left neither tree nor bough ungnawen and eaten, and thus did they for five days one after an other: they said that those were young ones which went to seek their fathers, and they did the like, as those we saw without wings: the space that these locusts took up, was nine miles, for which circuit there remained neither bark nor leaves upon the trees, & the country looked not as though it had been burnt, but as though it had snowed thereupon, and this was by reason of the whiteness of the trees which were peeled bare by the Locusts, and the earth was all swept clean: It was God's will that the harvest was already in: we could not understand which way they afterwards went, because they came from the sea ward, out of the kingdom of 〈◊〉, which belongeth to the Moors, who are continually in war, as also we could by no means know the end of their journey or course. Thus much out of Francis 〈◊〉. Of the minerals: And first of miner all salt. THe greater part of Africa hath none other salt but such as is digged out of quarries & mines, after the manner of marble or free stone, being of a white, red, and grey colour. Barbary aboundeth with salt, and Numidia is indifferently furnished therewith: but the land of Negroes, and especially the inner part of Ethiopia, is so destitute thereof, that a pound of salt is there sold for half a ducat. And the people of the said regions use not to 〈◊〉 salt upon their tables; but holding a crumb of salt in hands, they lick the same at every morsel of meat which they put in their mouths. In certain lakes of Barbary all the summer time there is fair and white salt congealed or kerned, as namely in divers places near unto the city of Fez. Of the mineral called Antimony. THis mineral growing in many places of Africa in the lead-mines is separated from the lead by the help of brimstone. Great plenty of this mineral is digged out of the bottom of mount Atlas, especially where Numidia bordereth upon the kingdom of Fez. Brimstone likewise is digged in great abundance out of other places of Africa. Of 〈◊〉. EVphorbium is the juice or gum of a certain herb growing like the head of a wild thistle, between the branches whereof grow certain fruits as big in compass as a green cucumber; after which shape or likeness it beareth certain 〈◊〉 grains or 〈◊〉; and some of the said fruits are an elle long, and some are longer. They grow not out of the branches of the herb but spring out of the firm ground, and out of one flag you shall see sometimes 20. and sometimes 30. of them issue forth. The people of the same region, when the said fruits are once ripe, do prick them with their knives, and out of the holes proceedeth a liquor or juice much like unto milk, which by little and little, groweth thick and slimy. And so being grown thick, they take it off with their knives, putting it in bladders & drying it. And the plant or herb itself is full of sharp prickles. Of pitch. OF pitch there are two kinds, the one being natural, and taken out of certain stones, which are in fountains; the water whereof retaineth the 〈◊〉 smell and 〈◊〉 of the same; and the other being artificial, and proceeding out of the juniper or pinetree: and this artificial pitch I saw made upon mount Atlas in manner following. They make a deep and round furnace with an hole in the bottom, through which hole the pitch may fall down into an hollow place within the ground being made in form of a little vessel: and putting into the said furnace the boughs of the foresaid trees broken into small pieces, they close up the mouth of the furnace, and make a fire under it; by the heat whereof the pitch distilleth forth of the wood through the bottom of the furnace into the foresaid hollow place: and so it is taken up and put in bladders or bags. Of the fruit called Maus or Musa. THis fruit growing upon a small tree which beareth large and broad leaves of a cubit long, hath a most excellent and delicate taste, and springeth forth about the bigness of a small cucumber. The Mahometan doctors affirm, that this was the fruit which God forbade our first parents to eat in Paradise, which when they had eaten they covered their nakedness with leaves of the same fruit, as being of all other leaves most meet for that purpose. They grow in great abundance at Sela a town of the kingdom of Fez; but in far greater plenty in the land of Egypt, and especially at Damiara. Of Cassia. THe trees bearing Cassia are of great thickness, having leaves like unto the mulberie-tree. They bear a broad and white blossom, and are so laden with fruits, that they are constrained to gather great store before they be ripe, lest the tree should break with overmuch weight. And this kind of tree groweth only in Egypt. Of the fruit called Terfez. TErfez is to be called rather by the name of a root then of a fruit, and is like unto a mushroom or toadstool, but that it is somewhat bigger. It is enclosed with a white rind and groweth in hot and sandy places. Where it lieth, it may 〈◊〉 be perceived by the swelling and opening of the ground. Some of them are as big as a walnut, and others as a 〈◊〉. The physicians, which call it Camha, affirm it to be a refrigerative or cooling fruit. It groweth in great plenty upon the Numidian deserts, and the Arabians take as great delight in eating of the same as in eating of sugar. This fruit being stewed upon the coals, and afterward made clean, and sodden in fat broth they esteem for great dainties. Also the Arabians seethe it in water and milk, and so eat it. It groweth likewise plentifully in the sands near unto the town of Sela. Of the date or palm-tree, because we have 〈◊〉 spoken in our description of Segelmesse in Numidia, we will here in this place say nothing at all. Of the Egyptian fig called by the Egyptians themselves Giumeiz. THe tree of this fig resembleth other figtrees both in outward form and in leaves, but it is of an exceeding height: neither doth the fruit grow among the leaves, or upon the ends of the twigs, but out of the very body of the tree, where no leaves at all grow. These figs taste like unto other figes, but they have a thicker skin and are of a tawny colour. Of the tree called Ettalche. IT is an high and a thorny tree, having such leaves as the juniper hath, and bearing a gum like unto mastic, wherewith the African apothecary's use to mingle and adulterate their mastic, because it hath the same colour and yieldeth some smell also. There are found likewise such trees in 〈◊〉 Numidian and Lybian deserts and in the land of Negroes: but the trees of Numidia being cut in the midst, consist of white wood like unto the trees beforenamed, and the Lybian trees of a brown or tawny wood, but the trees of the land of Negroes are extreme black within. And that black pith or hart of this tree, whereof musical instruments are made, is called by the Italians Sangu. That wood which is of the brown or tawny colour is used by the African physicians for the curing of the French pox, whereupon it is commonly called by the name of pock-wood. Of the root called Tauzarghente. THis root growing in the western part of Africa upon the Ocean sea shore, yieldeth a fragrant and odoriferous smell. And the merchants of Mauritania carry the same into the land of Negroes, where the people use it for a most excellent perfume, and yet they neither burn it nor put any-fire at all thereto: for being kept only in an house, it yieldeth a natural sent of itself. In Mauritania they sell a bunch of these roots for half a ducat, which being carried to the land of negroes is sold again for eighty or one hundred ducats and sometimes for more. Of the root called Addad. THe herb thereof is bitter, and the root itself is so venomous, that one drop of the water distilled thereout, will kill a man within the space of an hour, which is commonly known even to the women of Africa. Of the root called Surnag. THis root growing also upon the western part of mount Atlas, is said to be very comfortable and preservative unto the privy parts of man, & being drunk in an electuary, to stir up venereal lust, etc. Neither must I here omit that which the inhabitants of mount Atlas do commonly report, that many of those damosels which keep cattle upon the said mountains have lost their virginity by none other occasion, but by making water upon the said root: unto whom I would in merriment answer, that I belceved all which experience had taught concerning the secret virtue of the same root. Yea they affirmed moreover, that some of their maidens were so infected with this root, that they were not only deflowered of their virginity, but had also their whole bodies puffed up and swollen. THese are the things memorable and worthy of knowledge, seen and observed by me john Leo, throughout all Africa, which country I have in * That is, in Barbary, Numidia, Libya, the land of Negroes, and Egypt. all places travailed quite over: wherein whatsoever I saw worthy the observation, I presently committed to writing: and those things which I saw not, I procured to be at large declared unto me by most credible and substantial persons, which were themselves eie-witnesses of the same: and so having gotten a fit opportunity, I thought good to reduce these my travels and studies into this one volume. Written at Rome in the year of Christ 1526. and upon the tenth of March. here endeth the description of Africa written by john Leo, borne in Granada, and brought up in Barbary. A brief relation concerning the dominions, revenues, forces, and manner of government of sundry the greatest princes either inhabiting within the bounds of Africa, or at least possessing some parts thereof, translated, for the most part, out of Italian. AFricke hath ever been the least known and haunted part in the world, chiefly by reason of the situation thereof under the torrid Zone; which the ancients thought to be unhabitable. Whose opinion, although in very deed it is not true, because we know that between the two tropics there are most fruitful countries, as namely Abassia, and the kingdoms of Angola, & Congo, with all India, new Spain, and Brasile; yet neither is it altogether false: For no part of the world hath greater deserts, nor vaster wilderness, than this of Africa. These deserts, which extend themselves from the Atlantic Ocean even unto the borders of Egypt, for more than a thousand miles, and run out sometimes two hundred, and otherwhiles 300. miles in breadth, divide Africa into two parts: whereof the southerly part was never thoroughly known to the people of Europe, as also Atlas, which divideth Numidia from Africa the less, is some impediment to the same: And towards the east it seemeth that nature also meant to conceal the same, by those deserts that lie betwixt the Red sea and the land of Egypt. In the first times after the flood we find mention very often made of the kingdoms of Egypt, and Ethopia: and as for Ethiopia the notice we had thereof, was but obscure and confused: But Egypt, by reason of the commodious situation thereof between the Mediterran, and the Red seas, hath always been renowned and famous: yea king Sesostris that Egyptian monarch enlarged his empire from the Atlantic Ocean, even to the Euxine sea: Afterwards the kings of Numidia, & Mauritania, & the Carthaginians flourished in those provinces which are bounded by the Meditterran sea. In our times, wherein all Africa hath been and is daily environed, there is sufficient knowledge had of the Marine parts thereof, but for the inland provinces there is not so much known as might be, rather through want of writers then for default of discovery & trade. Now therefore leaving those parts of Africa which are possessed by the Turk and the king of Spain, to a brief narration in the last place, we have reduced all the residue of our relations to three princes: that is, to Prete janni, the Monomotapa, and the Xeriffo, who is king of Maroco and Fez; for the rest referring you to john Leo, and the discourse prefixed before him: the Xeriffo reigneth between Atlas and the Atlantic Ocean; Prete janni about the centre of Africa: and the Monomotapa hath his Empire towards the Sinus Barbaricus, or the Barbarian gulf. The Empire of Prete janni. THe Empire of Prete janni answereth not certainly in effect, (although it be very large) unto the fame and opinion which the common sort, and most writers have of it: For lateliest of any other Hor atio Malugucci in a certain discourse of his, touching the greatness of states at this day, would needs have his dominion to be greater than any other princes, but the king of Spain. I confess indeed, that in times past his state had most ample and large confines, as may be judged by the multitude of kingdoms, with which he adorneth and setteth forth his style; for he entitleth himself king of Goiame, a kingdom seated beyond Nilus, and of Vangue, and Damut situate beyond Zaire; and yet it is at this day evidently known, that his Empire scarcely reacheth unto Nilus: yea and john Barros writeth, that the Abassins have little notice of that river, by reason of the mountains lying between them and it. The hart or centre of his state, is the lake Barcena: for on the east it extendeth from Suaquen, as far as the entrance of the Red sea, for the space of an hundred and two and twenty leagues: howbeit betwixt the Red sea and it, there thwarteth a long rank of mountains, inhabited by the Moors, who also command the sea-coast. On the west it hath another ridge of mountains along the channel of Nilus, inhabited by the Gentiles, who pay tribute unto the Prete. On the north it consineth with an imaginary line drawn from Suaquen to the furthest part of the isle of Meroe, which is an hundred and five and twenty leagues long: From hence it maketh as it were a bow, but not very crooked, towards the south, even to the kingdom of Adel (from the mountains whereof springeth that river which Ptolemey calleth Raptus, and placeth to the south of Melinde) for the space of two hundred and thirty leagues; all which distance is bordered upon by the Gentiles: from whence it turneth and endeth eastward at the kingdom of Adel, whose head city is Arar, in the northerly latitude of nine degrees: So that this whole empire, little more or less, amounteth to six hundred threescore and twelve leagues in circuit: The country (which is distinguished with ample plains, pleasant hills, and high mountains, most of them manurable, and well inhabited) bringeth forth barley and mill (for it aboundeth not greatly with other sorts of grain) and likewise Taffo damn guza, another good and durable seed: But there is mill, and Zaburro (which we call the grain of India, or Guinea wheat) great plenty, with all sorts of our pulse, and some also unknown to us. Some of them wear clothes of cotton: but the greater part are clad in sheep's skins, and those which are more honourable, in the skins of Lions, Tigers, and Ounces. They have all kinds of our domestical creatures, as hens, geese, and such like, as also abundance of kine, and wild swine, hearts, goats, hares, but no coneys, besides panthers, lions, Ounces, and elephants. To conclude, there cannot be a country more apt than this, for the generation and increase of all plants and creatures. True it is, that it hath little help or furtherance by the industry of the inhabitants, because they are of a slothful dull nature, and capacity. They have flax, and yet can make no cloth, sugar canes, and know not the art of getting the sugar thereout; iron, and have no use thereof, but take all smiths to be necromancers: They have rivers, and waters, and know not how to better their possessions by them. They conceive not greatly of hunting or fishing: whereupon the fields are full of birds and wild beasts, and the rivers and lakes, of fish. another reason of their slackness and negligence, is the evil entreaty of the commonalty by those of the mightier sort: for the poor seeing every thing taken from them that they have, sow no more, then very necessity urgeth them unto. Their speech also is without any rule or prescription, and to write a letter, requireth a great assembly of men, and many days to deliberate thereon. The nobles, citizens, and peasants live distinctly and apart, and any of these may purchase nobility by some famous, or worthy act. The first borne inherit all things. There is not in all the country a castle, or fortified place, for they think, as the Spartans did, that a country should be maintained and defended by force of arms, and not with rampires of earth or stone. They dwell for the most part dispersed in towns and villages. Their trade of merchandise is performed by exchanging one thing for an other, supplying the overplus of their prizes with wheat or salt: pepper, incense, myrrh, & salt, they sell for the weight in gold. In their bargains they use gold also, but by weight, silver is not ordinary among them. Their greatest city is the Prince's court, which is never firm and resident in one place, but removeth here & there, and remaineth in the open fields under tents. This court comprehendeth ten, or more miles in compass. His Government. PRete janni his government is very absolute, for he holdeth his subjects in most base servitude, and no less the noble and great, than those of meaner quality and condition, entreating them rather like slaves, than subjects: and the better to do this, he maintaineth himself amongst them in the reputation of a sacred and divine person. All men bow at the name of the Prince, and touch the earth with their hand: they reverence the tent wherein he lieth, and that when he is absent also. The Pretes in times past were wont to be seen of the people but only once in three years space, and afterwards they showed themselves thrice in a year, that is on Christmas, and Easter day, as also on holy Rood day in September. Panufius who now reigneth, albeit he is grown more familiar than his predecessors, yet when any commission cometh from him, the party to whom it is directed heareth the words thereof naked, from the girdle upward, neither putteth he on his apparel, but when the king permitteth him. The people thought they bind it with an oath, yet do they seldom speak truth, but when they swear by the kings life, who giveth and taketh away, what great signiory soever it pleaseth him, neither may he, from whom it is taken, so much as show himself aggrieved therewith. Except the giving of holy orders and the administration of the sacraments, he disposeth as well of the religious as of the lay sort, and of their goods. On the way he rideth, environed with high and long red curtains, which compass him on every side. He weareth usually upon his head, a crown half gold, half silver, and a cross of silver in his hand: his face is covered with a piece of blue taffeta, which he lifteth up, or letteth down, more or less, according as he favoureth them that he treateth withal: and sometimes he only showeth the end of his foot, which he putteth forth from under the said curtains. They that carry and return ambassages, come not to his curtain, but with long time, divers ceremonies, and sundry observations. None hath slaves but himself, to whom every year his subjects come to do homage. This prince (as the Abassins report) descendeth from a son of Solomon, & the Queen of Saba, called Meilech: they received the faith under Queen Candaces, in whose time the family of Gaspar began to reign and flourish in Ethiopia, and from him after thirteen generations came john called the holy. This man about the time of Constantinus the Emperor, because he had no children, leaving the kingdom to his brother Caius eldest son, invested balthasar, and Melchior, younger brothers, one in the kingdom of Fatigar, and the other in Giomedi: whereupon the royal blood grew to be divided into three families, namely that of Baltafar, that of Gaspar, and the third of Melchior, ordaining that the Empire above all others should be given by election to some one of the foresaid families, so it were not to the eldest borne. For these first borne there were particular kingdoms appointed. And to avoid scandal and tumult, he decreed that the emperors brothers with his nearest kindred should be enclosed as in a strong castle, within * Of this mountain read in the discourse before the beginning of Leo. mount Amara; where he would also have the emperors sons to be put, who cannot succeed in the Empire, nor have any State at all, for which cause the Emperor ordinarily marrieth not. His forces both in revenues and people. HE hath two kinds of revenues, for one consisteth in the fruits of his possessions, which he causeth to be manured by his slaves, and oxen. These slaves multiply continually, for they marry among themselves and their sons remain in the condition of their progenitors. another great revenue cometh of his tributes, which are brought unto him, from all those that hold dominion under him. And of these, some give horses, some oxen, some gold, some cotton, and others other things. It is thought he hath great treasure as well of clothes and jewels, as of gold, and also that he hath treasuries and large magazines of the same riches, so that writing once to the king of Portugal, he offered to give for the maintenance of war against the Infidels, an hundred thousand drams of gold, with infinite store of men and victual. They say, that he putteth ordinarily every year into the castle of Amara, the value of three millions of ducats. It is true, that before the days of King Alexander they laid not up so much gold, because they knew not how to purify it: but rather jewels and wedges of gold. Also his commings-in may be said to be of three sorts: for some he raiseth as it were, out of his crowne-landes: another part he levieth of the people, that pay him so much for an house, and the tenth of all those mines that are digged by others then by himself: and a third revenue he draweth from his tributary princes and governors: and these give him the entire revenues of one of their cities, so as he choose not that city wherein they make their residence. But though his wealth and revenues be great, yet are his people of little worth, as well because he holdeth them in the estimation of slaves, by means whereof they want that generosity of mind, which maketh men ready to take up arms, & to be courageous in dangers: as also it seemeth they have ever their hands bound with that awful reverence which they bear towards their Prince, and the fear they have of him: and further, in that they have no arms of defence but bad headpieces, half skulls, and coats of mail, carried thither by the Portugals. Hereunto may be added his want of fortresses: for neither having strong places whither to retire, nor arms to defend themselves; they and their towns remain as a pray to the enemy; their offensive arms being unfeathered arrows, and some darts. They have a lent of fifty days continuance, which through the great abstinence, wherein they pass all that time, doth so weaken and afflict them, that neither for those days, nor many other following, they have the strength to stir abroad: whereupon the Moors attend this opportunity, and assail them with great advantage. Francis Aluares writeth, that Prete janni can bring into the field, an hundred thousand men: nevertheless in time of need it hath been seen, that he could make nothing so many. He hath a military religion, or order of knighthood, under the protection of Saint 〈◊〉, whereunto every noble man must ordain one of every three male children, but not the eldest. And out of these are constituted twelve thousand knights or gentlemen for the king's guard. The end of this order is, to defend the confines of the empire, and to make head against the enemies of the faith. Prince's confining upon the Prete janni. THis Prince, as far as we can certainly understand, confineth especially with three other mighty princes: one is the king of Borno; another the great Turk; and the third the king of Adel. The king of Buruo ruleth over that country which extendeth from Guangara towards the east, about five hundred miles, between the deserts of Seu, and Barca, being of an uneeven situation, because it is partly mountainous, and partly plain. In the plains there dwelleth a very civil people in populous and much frequented villages, by reason of the abundance of grain, as also there is some concourse of merchants thither. On the mountains, shepherds of great and small beasts do inhabit, and their chief sustenance is mill: They lead a brutish life, without religion, with their wives and children in common: They use no other proper names, but those which are taken from the quality or form of men's persons: the lame, the squint eyed, the long, the stuttering. This king of Borno is most mighty in men, upon whom he layeth no other imposition but the tenth of their fruits; their profession is to rob and steal from their neighbours, and to make them slaves: in exchange of whom, they have of the merchants of Barbary, horses. He hath under him many kingdoms, and people, partly white, and partly black. He molesteth the Abassines exceedingly with thefts, leadeth away their cattle, robbeth their mines, & maketh their men slaves. They fight on 〈◊〉- back after the Gynnet fashion, they use lances with two heads, & darts & arrows: they assail a country sometimes in one part, and otherwhiles in another, suddenly: but these may rather be termed thieves and robbers then right enemies. The Turk confineth with Abassia on the east; as likewise the king of Adel, who hemmeth it in between the east and the south. They disturb the Prete exceedingly, restraining the limits of his Empire, and bringing his country into great misery: For the Turks besides the putting of a great part of Barnagasso, to sack and spoil; (upon which they entered the year of our Lord, 1558.) although they were driven out again, have further taken all that from the Prete which he possessed on the sea coast: especially the ports and towns of Suaquen and Ercoco: In which two places, the mountains lying betwixt Abassia and the red sea, do open, and make a passage, for conveyance of victual, and traffic, between the Abassins, and the Arabians: And it is not long, since the Lord Barnagasso was constrained to accord with the Turk, and to buy the peace of his country with the tribute of a thousand ounces of gold by the year. Also the King of Adel procureth him no less molestation: This man confineth with the kingdom of Fatigar, and extendeth his dominion even to the Red sea, where he hath Assum, Salir, Meth, Barbora, Pidar, and Zeila. At Barbora many ships of Aden, and Cambaia arrive with their merchandise for exchange; from whence they receive much flesh, honey, wax, and victuals for Aden; and gold, ivory, and other things for Cambaia. A greater quantity of victual is carried from Zeila, because there is abundance of wax, and honey, with corn and divers fruits, which are laden for Aden, and for Arabia, and beasts also, as namely sheep, with tails weighing more than five and twenty pounds, with their heads and necks all black, but the rest of them is white: as also certain other all white with tails a fathom long, and writhe like a vine branch, having thropples under their throats like bulls. There be also certain kine with branched horns like to wild hearts, being black in colour and sorne others red, with one only horn upon their foreheads of an handful and an half long, turning backward. The chief city of this kingdom is Arar eight and thirty leagues from Zeila towards the South east. This king being a Mahometan by a perpetual profession of making war against the christians of Abassia, who are the subjects of the Prete, hath obtained of those Barbarians the surname of Holy: He stayeth his óportunitie while the Abassins be weakened, and brought down with that long and hard fast of fifty days, when they can scarcely go about their domestical affairs; and then he entereth into the country, sacketh the towns, leadeth the people away into servitude, and doth a thousand injuries unto them. The Abassin slaves are of great value out of their own country: whereupon the bordering, and other Princes both far and near esteem them much, and many of them by means of their industry in service, of slaves have become captains and great Commanders, in Arabia, Cambaia, Bengala, and Sumatra: Because the Mahometan princes of the east, being all tyrants over kingdoms usurped from the Gentiles, for security of their state, put no trust in their own subjects: but arm themselves with a multitude of strange slaves, to whom they commit their persons, and the government of their kingdom. And among all other slaves the Abassines bear away the bell, aswell for fidelity, as for sound and good complexion. And because the king of Adel, with the multitude of these Abassin slaves, which he taketh in the towns and territories of Prete janni, filleth all Egypt, and Arabia (in exchange of whom he hath armour, munition, and soldiers, both from the Turk, and the Arabian Princes) in the year of our Lord 1550. Claudius' king of Abassia, being after this sort sorely oppressed by Gradaamed king of Adel, who now for the space of fowerteene years had with continual incursions grievously molested, and disturbed him, enforcing him to leave his confines, and to retire into the hart of his empire, demanded aid of Stephano Gama, the Indian Viceroy of john the third king of Portugal, who was then with a good fleet upon The red sea. Whereupon he sent him four hundred Portugals, with a good quantity of arms, and small shot, under the government of Christopher da Gama his brother. With these men by the benefit of shot, he overthrew the enemy in two battles; but in the third, the king of Adel having received a thousand Turkish harquebuziers from the governor of Zebit, with ten pieces of artillery, the Abassins were put to 〈◊〉, and discomfited, and their captain taken prisoner, and put 〈◊〉 death. But the king of Adel afterwards sending back the said Turks, he and his people were suddenly, assailed, near the river of Zeila, and mount Saval, by king Claudius with threescore thousand foot, and five hundred Abassin horse, together with those Portugals, who remained of the former overthrow, one of whom wounded Gradamed dangerously. But in the month of March, the year of our Lord 1559. king Claudius being set upon again by the Malacai Mores, he was slain in the battle: and the enimie-king acknowledging so great a victory from the hands of God, triumphed upon an ass. Adamas brother unto king Claudius succeeded him, against whom (for he was half a Mahometan) the best part of the Abassine nobility rebelled, and he was defeated by the Barnagasso in the year 1562. who having thus for a while disturbed the affairs of Ethiopia, it seemed that they were at length assuaged, & re-established under Alexander, by the aid of the Portugals, who have carried thither arms as well of offence, as defence, and stirred up the minds and courages of the Abassines, by their example, to war; For all those that remained of the discomfiture given to Christopher Gama, and divers others which came thither afterwards, and do daily there arrive and stay, do marry wives, and have children; and Alexander permitted them to elect a judge, who might execute justice among them: So that they have, and do daily bring into Abassia, the manner of warfare in Europe, with our use of arms, and the manner of fortifying passages and places of importance. Afterwards certain Florentines went into those countries, partly upon pleasure, and partly for affairs of merchandise. For Francisco di Medici great Duke of Florence, had some commerce with the Abassines. The Prete therefore gives entertainment, and maketh much of the Frankes, (for so do they call the people of Europe) and hardly giveth them licence to depart out of his kingdom. Besides these the Prete janni hath divers other enemies, amongst whom is the king of Dancali, to whom the town and port of Vela upon the red sea pertaineth; he confineth with Balgada. The Moors also vex him greatly, which inhabit the province, called Dobas, divided into fowerteene Signiories; for though they be within the confines of Prete janni his empire, yet notwithstanding for the most part they rebel from him: they have a law, that none of them may marry, before he first give testimonial that he hath slain twelve Christians. Of the Emperor of Monomotapa. COncerning the state of this mighty Emperor, and of his neighbour of Mohenemugi, and of the limits of both their dominions, as likewise of the Amazons and Giacchi the chief strength of their military forces, and other memorable matters; to avoid tedious repetitions, I refer the reader to the discourse going before the book: save only that I will here annex a brief testimony out of Osorius lib 4 de reb gest. Eman. which may add some small light unto the treatise before mentioned. But (saith he) in this part of Ethiopia lying beyond the cape of good hope which is bounded by the south Ocean, there is a most ample kingdom called Benomotapa, whereunto before such time as the Portugals discovered those parts, all the kings upon that coast were most obediently subject. It aboundeth with gold beyond all credit: which is taken even out 〈◊〉 most 〈◊〉 in gold. of their rivers and lakes. Yea many kings there are which pay yearly tribute of gold unto this king of Benomotapa. The people worship no Idols, but acknowledge one God the creator of heaven and earth. In habit and apparel they are not much unlike to other Ethiopians. They worship their king with wonderful superstition. This king in his scutcheon or coat of The king's arms. arms hath two signs of majesty. One is a certain little spade with a handle of ivory. The other are two small darts. By the spade he 〈◊〉 his subjects to husbandry, that they may not through sloth and negligence let the earth lie untilled, and so for want be constrained to play the thieves. The one of his darts betokeneth, that he will be a severe punisher of malefactors; & the other, that he will by valour & force of arms resist all foreign invasions. The sons of his tributary kings are trained up in his court; A 〈◊〉 course. both to the end that by this education they may learn loyalty and love towards him their sovereign, and also that they may remain as pledges to keep their fathers in awe and due obedience. He is continually guarded with a mighty army; notwithstanding he be conjoined in most firm league with all his neighbour-princes. For by this means he supposeth that war cannot procure him any danger at all, knowing right well that oftentimes in the midst of peace it is ready to disturb the security of Princes. Every year this king sendeth certain of his courtiers and servants to bestow A recrely 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉 fire from the 〈◊〉 to his 〈◊〉 princes. in his name new fire upon all the princes and kings within his dominions, that from them it may be distributed unto others also. Which is done in manner following. The messenger being come to the house of any prince, his fire is immediately quenched. Then is there a new fire kindled by the messenger: and forthwith all the neighbours resort thither to fetch of the said new fire for their houses. Which whosoever refuseth to perform, is held as a traitorous rebel, and receiveth such punishment as is liable to high treason; yea if need be, an army is levied to apprehend 〈◊〉, to the end that being taken, he may be put to such torments as are correspondent to his disloyalty. Hitherto Osorius. The Xeriffo, commonly called The king of Maroco 〈◊〉, and Fez. AMong all the princes of Africa, I suppose that there is not any one, who in richness of state, or greatness of power, may be preferred before the Xeriffo: In that his dominion, which comprehendeth all that part of Mauritania, called by the romans Tingitana, extendeth itself north & south from Capo Boiador, even to Tanger, and east and west from the Atlantic Ocean, as far as the river Muluia, and somewhat further also, in which space is comprehended the fairest, fruitfullest, best inhabited, and most civil part of all Africa, and among other the states, the most famous kingdoms of Maroco and Fez. With the particular description whereof, and of all the provinces, cities, towns, rivers, mountains, etc. therein contained, the Reader may satisfy himself to the full in the second and third books of the history of john Leo before set down. These kingdoms besides their natural fertility, are very traffickable; for though the king of Fez hath no haven of importance upon the Mediterranean sea, nevertheless the English, French, and other nations traffic much to his ports upon the Ocean, especially to * Described by Leo in his fifth book under the name of Lharais. Larache, Santa Cruz, Cabo de Guer, and in other places pertaining partly to the kingdom of Fez, and partly to Maroco; and they bring thither copper, and brass, with arms and divers commodities of Europe, for which among other things they return sugar. But because these kingdoms of Maroco and Fez, and divers other Signiories, and Principalities, at first separate and divided, were united not long sithence under one Prince, who is called * Or Miramonin. the Xeriffo, it will not be much from our purpose (because among the accidents of our times, I think there is not any one, more notable or wonderful than this) to set down here how the matter passed. About the year of our Lord 1508 a certain Alchaide borne in Tigumedet The manner how the Xeriffos aspired to the kingdoms of Maroco, Sus, and Fez. a town of Dara, whose name was Mahumet Benametto, and who caused himself to be called Xeriffo, being a subtle man, and of a mind no less ambitious, then learned in those sciences, whereunto the mahometans are most addicted, began to grow famous in the towns of Numidia. This man vaunting himself to be descended of Mahumets' progeny, was possessed with an imagination (trusting in the division of the States of Africa, wherein then the Portugals bore great sway) of taking into his own hands all * Or the kingdoms of Maroco, and Fez. Mauritania Tingitana. For performance of this, he first sent his three 〈◊〉, Abdel, Abnet, and Mahumet, in pilgrimage to Mecca and Medina, there to visit & do reverence to the sepulchre of their Seductor Mahumet. The young men performed this voyage with so great fame and reputation of sanctity and religion (if these words may be used, in declaring of such an impiety) that in their return, the people came out to meet them, kissed their garments, and reverenced them as saints. They feigning themselves to be ravished into deep contemplation, went up and down the streets sighing, and crying out in words interrupted with lamentation & yearning: Alá, Alá; and they lived of nothing but alms. Their father having taken them home with great mirth and joy: but yet not minding to suffer this sudden applause & credit, which they had obtained by such a pilgrimage, to freeze and wax cold; he sent two of them which were * Or Abnet. Amet and Mahumet to Fez; where being courteously received by the king, one of them became a Reader in the Amodoraccia, a most famous college of that city, and the the youngest was made tutor to the same kings young sons. These two seeing themselves so entirely beloved of the king, and in so great favour with the people, being advised by their father, and taking occasion upon the damage which the Arabians & Moors did to those of their own law & sect, under the ensigns of the Portugals, in whose pay they served. They demanded leave of the king to display a 〈◊〉 against the Christians, putting him in hope, (as indeed it fell out) that they would easily draw those Moors unto him, who were followers of the crown of Portugal, and by this means secure the provinces of Sus, Hea, Ducala, Maroco, with others molested, & evilly entreated by the Portugals. This request was contradicted by Mullei Nazer, brother to the king: for (said he) if these men, under pretence of holiness, and defence of their law, shall have some prosperous proceedings with arms in hand, it will not afterwards be in thy power (O king) to bridle or bring them down: for arms make men courageous, & by victories they prove insolent, & the rout of ambitious people are always desirous of innovation. But the king who had a great opinion of their sanctity, making small account of the reasons his brother alleged unto him, gave them a banner, and drumslade, and twenty horse to accompany them, with letters of recommendation to the Arabians, the princes, and the cities of Barbary. With these beginnings many people running headlong after their fame, they overcame Ducala, and the country of * Or Azaphi. Saphia, and went forward even as far as Cabo de Guer, (which places then were subject to the Portugals) and finding themselves strong, both in retinue and credit, they demanded of the people (who at that time lived for the most part freely, and came in to none, but such as they liked of themselves) that seeing they now took up arms, for the Mahumetane law against the Christians, they should aid them with their tenths due unto God: the which were presently yielded unto them by the people of Dara, and so they seized by little and little upon Tarodant (where their father was made governor) and likewise of Sus, Hea, Ducala, and other places adjoining. They first planted themselves in Tednest, and then in Tesarote, and in a conflict 〈◊〉 Lopes Barriga, a famous captain amongst the Portugals: but so they lost their own elder brother therein. And afterwards by fair words entering into the 〈◊〉 of Maroco, they poisoned the king, and in his stead made Amet Xeriffo to be proclaimed king of Maroco. In the mean while the Arabians of Ducala, & Xarquia came to hand blows with those of Garbia, each party holding themselves in the Xeriffoes favour; but the Xeriffos perceiving the skirmish to grow hot, and that many both of the one and of the other party went to wrack, turned their arms against them both, and enriched themselves with their spoils. In former times they used to send unto the king of Fez the fifth of all those booties which they got; but after this victory, making no reckoning of their said custom, they presented him only with six horses, and six camels, & those but silly ones: whereat being moved, he sent to demand of them the fifth part of their spoils, and the tribute that the king of Maroco paid him, threatening otherwise war upon them. But in the mean while, this man dying, Amet his son, who was scholar to the younger Xeriffo, was not only content, but further confirmed Amet in the Signiory of Maroco, so that in some small matter he would acknowledge the kings of Fez for sovereign Princes over that city. But on the other side the Xeriffis, whose reputation and power daily increased, when the time of paying tribute came, sent to certify this young king, that being lawful successors to Mahumet, they were not bound to pay tribute to any, and that they had more right to Africa than he: so that if he would have them his friends, so it were; otherwise if he meant to divert them from this their war against the Christians, they should not want courage nor power to defend themselves. Wherewith the Fessan king being offended, proclaimed war against them, and went himself in person to the siege of Maroco: but at the very first he was driven to dislodge: and afterwards returning with eighteen thousand horse, amongst whom were two thousand harquebuziers, or bowmen, he was vanquished by the Xeriffis, who had no more but seven thousand horse, and twelve hundred harquebuziers which were placed on the way at the passage of a river. By means of this victory the Xeriffi shook off the tribute of that country, and passing over Atlas, they took Tafilete, an important city: and partly by fair means, partly by force, they brought diuérs people of Numidia to their obedience, as also those of the mountains. In the year of our Lord 1536. the younger Xeriffo who was now called king of Sus, having gathered together a mighty army, and much artillery, taken in part from the king of Fez, and partly Artillery cast by French Renegadoes. cast by the French Renegadoes, he went to the enterprise of Cabo de Guer, a very important fortification, held then by the Portugals, which was built and fortified sirst at the charge of Lopes Sequeira: and afterward, knowing their opportunity from the king Don Emanuel, there was fought on both sides a most terrible battle. In the end, fire taking hold on the munition, and upon this the soldiers being daunted that defended the fortress, the Xeriffo entered thereinto, took the town, and made the greatest part of the garrison his prisoners. By this victory the Xeriffis brought in a manner all Atlas and the kingdom of Maroco to their obedience, & those Arabians who served the crown of Portugal. Whereupon king john the third, seeing that his expenses far exceeded the revenues which came in, of his own accord gave over Safia, Azamor, Arzilla, and Alcazar, holds which he had on the coast of Mauritania. This 〈◊〉 was an occasion of grievous discord betwixt the Brothers: the issue whereof was, that the younger having in two battles subdued the elder (whereof the second was in the year of our Lord 1554) and taken him prisoner, he banished him to Tafilet: and afterwards turning his arms against the king of Fez, after having taken him once prisoner, and then releasing him, he yet the second time (because he broke promise) got him into his hands again, deprived him of his estate, and in the end caused both him and his sons to be slain; and by means of his own sons he also took Tremizen. In the mean while Sal Araes' viceroy of Algiers fearing the Xeriffos prosperous success, gathered together a great army, with which he first recovered Tremizen, & afterwards defeating the Xeriffo, conquered Fez, and gave the government thereof to Buasson Prince of Veles: but this man joining battle with the Xeriffo, lost at one instant both his city and kingdom. In the end. Mahumet going to Tarodant was upon the way slain in his pavilion, by the treason of some Turks, suborned thereunto by the viceroy of Algiers, of whom one Assen was the chief: who together with his companions went into Tarodant, and there made havoc of the kings treasures: But in their return home, they were all, but five, slain by the people, in the year 1559: and Mullei Abdala the Xeriffos son, was proclaimed and saluted king. Let thus much suffice to have been spoken of the Xeriffo: whose proceedings appear much like to those of Ishmael the sophy of Persia. Both of them procured followers by blood and the cloak of religion: both of them subdued in short time many countries: both of them grew great by the ruin of their neighbours both of them received grievous checks by the Turks, and lost a part of their states: for Selym took from Ishmael, Cacamit and divers other cities of Diarbena: And the viceroy of Algiers did drive the Xeriffo out of Tremizen, and his other quarters: And even as Selim won Tauris, the head city of Persia, and afterwards gave it over: so Sal Araes' took Fez the head city of Mauritania, and then after abandoned the same. The Xeriffo his revenues, or comings in. THe Xeriffo is absolute Lord of all his subjects goods, yea and of their persons also. For though he charge them with never so burdensome tributes, and impositions; yet dare they not so much as open their mouths: He receiveth from his tributary vassals, the tenths, and first fruits of their corn and cattle. True it is, that for the first fruits he taketh no more but one for twenty, and the whole being above twenty, he demandeth no more than two, though it amount to an hundred. For every days tilth of ground he hath a ducat and a quarter, and so much likewise for every house; as also, he hath after the same rate of every person above fifteen years old, male, or female; and when need requireth, a greater sum: and to the end that the people may the more cheerfully pay that which is imposed upon them, he always demandeth half as much more as he is to receive. Most true it is, that on the mountains there inhabit certain fierce and vatamed people, who by reason of the steep, craggy, and inexpugnable situation of their country cannot be forced to tributes; that which is gotten of them, is the tenth of their corn and fruits, only that they may be permitted to have recourse into the plains. Besides these revenues, the king hath the tolls and customs of Fez, and of other cities: For at the entering of their goods, the natural citizen payeth two in the hundred, and the stranger ten. He hath further, the revenues of mills, and many other things, the Carwen the principal Mahometan temple in Fez, being a mile and an 〈◊〉 about. Read Leo, lib. 3. sum whereof is very great: for the mills yield him little less than half a royal of plate, for every Hanega of corn that is ground in Fez, where, (as they say) there are above four hundred mills. The moschea of Carwen had fourscore thousand ducats of rent: the colleges and hospitals of Fez had also many thousands. All which the king hath at this present. And further he is heir to all the Alcaydes, and them that have pension of him, and at their deaths he possesseth their horses, armour, garments, and all their goods. Howbeit if the deceased leave any sons apt for the service of the wars, he granteth them their father's provision; but if they be but young, he bringeth up the male children to years of service, and the daughters, till they be married. And therefore, that he may have some interest in the goods of rich men, he bestoweth upon them some government, or charge, with provision. Wherefore for fear of confiscation after death, every one coveteth to 〈◊〉 his wealth, or to remove far from the court, and the king's sight. For which cause the city of Fez cometh far short of her ancient glory. Besides, his revenues have been augmented of late years by mighty sums of gold, which he fetcheth from Tombuto and Gago in the land of Negroes; which gold (according to the report of some) may yearly amount to three millions of ducats. His Forces. THe Xeriffo hath not any Fortresses of great importance, but only upon the sea-coast, as Cabo de Guer, Larache, and Tetuan: for as the Turks and Persians do, so he placeth the strength of his state in armed men: but especially in horse. And for this cause he standeth not much upon his artillery; although he hath very great store (which his predecessors took from the Portugals and others) in Fez, Maroco, Tarodant, and in the foresaid 〈◊〉; causing also more to be cast, when need requireth; for he wanteth not masters of Europe in this Science. He hath an house of munition in Maroco, where they make ordinarily six and forty quintals of powder every month; as likewise also calivers and steele-bowes. In the year of our Lord 1569. a fire took hold on these houses with such fury, that a great part of the city was destroyed therewith. But for the Xeriffoes forces, they are of two sorts: the first is of two thousand seven hundred horse, and two thousand harquibuziers, which he hath partly in Fez, but most in Maroco (where he is resident) being as it were of his daily guard. The second is of a royal squadron of six thousand gentlemen, being all of noble parentage, and of great account. These men are mounted upon excellent horses, with furniture and arms, for variety of colour most beautiful, and for riches of ornament beyond measure estimable: for every thing about them shineth with gold, silver, pearl, jewels, and whatsoever else may please the eye, or satisfy the curiosity of beholders. These men, besides provision of corn, oil, butter, and flesh, for themselves, their wives, children, and servants, receive further in wages, from seventy to an hundred ounces of silver a man. The third sort of forces which he hath, consisteth of his * Timariotti: These are a military order, like unto them which hold land 〈◊〉 us under the 〈◊〉 of knight's service. for the Xeriffo granteth to all his sons, and brothers, and other persons of account or authority among the people of Africa, or to the princes of the Arabians, the benefit of great Lordships & tenors for sustentation of his Cavallarie: and the Alchaides themselves till the fields, and afterwards reap rice, oil, barley, butter, sheep, hens, and money, and distribute the same monthly to the soldiers; according to the several quality of their persons. They also give them cloth, linen, and silk to apparel themselves, arms of offence, and defence, and horses, with which they serve in the wars, and if they die or be killed, they allow them other. A thing which was also used in Rome, towards them that served on public horses. Every one of these leaders contendeth to bring his people into the field well ordered, for arms, apparel, and horses: besides this, they have between four and twenty and thirty ounces of silver wages every year. His fourth military forces, are the Arabians, who live continually in their Auari, (for so they call their habitations, each one of them consisting of an hundred, or two hundred 〈◊〉) governed by divers Alchaides, to the end they may be ready in time of need. These serve on horseback, but they are rather to be accounted thieves, then true soldiers. His fifth kind of forces military, are somewhat like unto the trained soldiers of Christian princes; and among these, the inhabitants of cities and villages of the kingdom, and of the mountains are enroled. It is true, that the king makes but little account of them, & very seldom puts arms into their hands, for fear of insurrections and rebellions, except in the wars against the Christians, for than he cannot conveniently forbid them: For it being written in their law, that if à Moor kill a Christian, or is slain by him, he goeth directly into Paradise, (a diabolical invention) men, women, and those of every age and degree, run to the wars hand over head, that at least they may there be slain; and by this means (according to their foolish opinion) gain heaven. No less zeal, to our confusion, may we perceive in the Turks especially for defence of their sect: for one would think they went to a marriage, and not to the war, scarcely being able with patience to attend their prefixed time of going thither. They repute them holy and happy, that die with arms in hand against their enemies; as on the contrary, those men unhappy, and of little worth, that die at home, amidst the lamentation of children, and outcries of women. By the things above set down, we may easily comprehend, what numbers of men the Xeriffo can bring into the field: but yet we may learn better by experience. For Mullei Abdala in the year 1562. besieged Mazagan with two hundred thousand men, choking the ditch with a mountain of earth, and beating down the walls thereof with his Artillery: but for all this, he was enforced by the valour of the Portugals, and the damage which he received by their mines, to give over his siege. Besides, this Prince can not continue a great war, above two, or three months: and the reason hereof is, because his forces living on that provision which he hath daily coming in, as well for sustenance as for apparel, and not being able to have all this conducted thither, where the war requireth, it followeth of necessity, that in short time they must needs return home for their maintenance of life: and further it is an evident thing, that no man can protract a war at length, except he be rich in treasure. Molucco who overthrew Sebastian king of Portugal, had in pay under his ensigns forty thousand horse, and eight thousand foot besides Arabians and adventurers: But it is thought, he could have brought into the field, seventy thousand horse, and more foot than he did. Of the dominions and fortresses which the king of Spain hath upon the Isles and main lands of Africa, and of the great quantity of treasure and other commodities which are brought from thence. BEsides Oran, Mersalquibir, Melilla and Pennon which the king of Spain possesseth within the straits; as likewise, çeuta, Tanger, and Arzil, which by the title of Portugal he holdeth very near the straits of Gibraltar; and Mazagan in like sort without the straits mouth, twenty miles to the southward of Arzil: he hath along the coast of Africa, from Cape de Guer, to that of Guardafu, two sorts of states: for some are immedidiately under him; and others are as it were his adherents. The islands of Madera, Puerto Santo, the Canaries, the Isles of Arguin, of Cabo Verde, the isle Del Principe, with that of Sant Thomas, and others near adjoining, are immediately under his dominion. These islands are maintained with their own victual, and provision, and yet they have also some out of Europe, as in like manner they send some thither: especially sugars and fruits, wherewith the isle of Madera wonderfully aboundeth, as also with wine. And the island of Sant Thomas likewise hath great abundance of sugars. These States have no encumbrance, but by the English and French men of war, * Mine author here much mistaketh the matter. which for all that go not beyond Cape Verde. At the islands of Arguin, and at Sant George de la Mina, the Portugals have planted factories in form of fortresses, by means of which, they trade with the bordering people of Guinie and Libya, and get into their hands the gold of Mandinga, and other places near about. Among the adherent Princes, the richest and most honourable, is the king of Congo, in that his kingdom is one of the most flourishing, and plentiful countries in all Ethiopia. The Portugals have there two Colonies, one in the city of S. Saluador, and an other in the island Loanda. They have divers rich commodities from this kingdom, but the most important is every year about 5000. slaves, which they transport from thence, and sell them at good round prizes in all the isles and main lands of the west Indies: and for the head of every slave so taken up, there is a good tax paid to the crown of Portugal. From this kingdom one might easily go to the country of Prete janni, for it is not thought to be very far off: and it doth so abound with Elephants, victual, and all other necessary things, as would bring singular ease and commodity to such an enterprise. Upon the kingdom of Congo confineth Angola, with whose prince of late years Paulo Dias a Portugal captain made war: And the principal occasion of this war are certain mines of silver, in the mountains of Cabambe, no whit inferior to those of Potossi; but by so much are they better, as fine silver goeth beyond that which is base, and course. And out of doubt, if the Portugals had esteemed so well of things near at hand, as they did of those farther off and remote, and had thither bend their forces wherewith they passed Capo de buena esperança, and went to India, Malaca, and the Malucoes; they had more easily, and with less charge found greater wealth: for there are no countries in the world richer in gold and silver, than the kingdoms of Mandinga, Ethiopia, Congo, Angola, Butua, Toroa, Maticuo, Boro, Quiticui, Monomotapa, Cafati, and Mohenemugi. But human avarice esteemeth more of an other man's, than his own, and things remote appear greater than those near at hand. Between Cabo de buena esperança, and Cape Guardafu, the Portugals have the fortresses of Sena, Cephala, and Mozambique. And by these they continue masters of the trade with the bordering nations, all which abound in gold and ivory. By these fortresses they have special commodity, for their navigation to the Indies; because their fleets sometimes winter, and otherwhiles victual, and refresh themselves there. In these parts the king of Melinde is their greatest friend, and those of Quiloa, and other neighbour-islands, are their tributaries. The Portugals want nothing but men. For besides other islands, which they leave in a manner abandoned, there is that of Saint Laurence, one of the greatest in all the world (being a thousand two hundred miles long, and four hundred and fower-score broad) the which, though it be not well tilled, yet for the goodness of the soil it is apt and fit to be manured, nature having distinguished it with rivers, harbours, & most commodious bay. These States belonging to the crown of Portugal, fear no other but such sea-forces, as may be brought thither by the Turks. But the daily going to and fro of the Portugal fleets, which coast along up and down those seas, altogether secureth them. In the year 1589. they took near unto Mombaza, four galleys, and a galliot, belonging to the Turks, who were so bold as to come even thither. The dominions of the great Turk in Africa. THe great Turk possesseth in Africa all the sea-coast from Velez de Gumera, or (as some hold opinion) from the river Muluia, which is the eastern limit of the kingdom of Fez, even to the Arabian gulf or Red sea, except some few places (as namely Mersalcabir, Melilla, Oran, and Pennon) which the king of Spain holdeth. In which space before mentioned are situate sundry of the most famous cities and kingdoms in all Barbary; that is to say, Tremizen, Alger, Tenez, Bugia, Constantina, Tunis, Tripoli, and all the country of Egypt, from Alexandria to the city of Asna, called of old Siene, together with some part of Arabia Troglodytica, from the town of Suez to that of Suachen. Also in Africa the grand Signior hath five viceroys, called by the names of Beglerbegs or Bassas, namely at Alger, Tunis, Tripoli, at Missir for all Egypt, and at Suachen for those places which are challenged by the great Turk in the dominions of Prete janni. Finally, in this part at Suez in the bottom of the Arabian gulf, is one of his four principal Arsenals, or places for the building, repairing, docking, and harbouring of his warlike galleys, which may lie here under covert, to the number of five and twenty bottoms. A summary discourse of the manifold Religions professed in Africa: and first of the Gentiles. AFrica containeth four sorts of people different in religion: that is to say, Gentiles, jews, mahometans, and Christians. The Gentiles extend themselves along the shore of the Ocean, in a manner from Cabo Blanco, or the white Cape, even to the northern borders of Congo; as likewise, from the southerly bounds of the same kingdom, even to Capo de buena Esperança; & from thence, to that De los Corrientes: and within the land they spread out, from the Ethiopic Ocean, even unto Nilus, and beyond Nilus also from the Ethiopic, to the Arabian sea. These Gentiles are of divers sorts, for some of them have no light of God, or religion, neither they are governed by any rule or law. Whereupon the Arabians call them Cafri, that is to say, lawless, or without law. They have but few habitations, and they live for the most part in caves of mountains, or in woods, wherein they find some harbour from wind and rain. The civilest among them, who have some understanding and light of divinity and religion, obey the Monomotapa, whose dominion extendeth with a great circuit, from the confines of Matama, to the river Cuama: but the noblest part thereof is comprehended between the mighty river of Magnice or Spirito Sancto, and that of 〈◊〉, for the space of six hundred leagues. They have no idols, and believe in one only God, called by them Mozimo. Little differing from these we may esteem the subjects of Mohenemugi. But among all the Cafri, the people called Agag or Giacchi, are reputed most brutish, inhabiting in woods and dens, and being devourers of man's flesh. They dwell upon the left bank of Nilus, between the first and second lake. The Anzichi also have a shambles of man's flesh, as we have of the flesh of oxen. They eat their enemies whom they take in war; they sell their slaves to butchers, if they can light on no greater prize: and they inhabit from the river Zaire, even to the deserts of Nubia. Some others of them are rather addicted to witchcraft, then to idolatry: considering that in a man, the fear of a superior power is so natural, that though he adore nothing under the name and title of a God, yet doth he reverence and fear some superiority, although he know not what it is. Such are the Biafresi, and their neighbours, all of them being addicted in such sort to witchcraft, as that they vaunt, that by force of enchantment, they can not only charm, and make men die, much more molest and bring them to hard point: but further, raise winds and rain, and make the sky to thunder and lighten, and that they can destroy all herbs and plants, and make the flocks and herds of cattle to fall down dead. Whereupon they reverence more the devil than any thing else: sacrificing unto him of their beasts and fruits of the earth, yea their own blood also, and their children. Such are likewise the priests of Angola, whom they call Ganghe. These make profession that they have in their hands dearth and abundance; fair weather and foul; life and death. For which cause it can not be expressed, in what veneration they are held among these Barbarians. In the year 1587. a Portugal captain being in a part of Angola with his soldiers, a Ganga was requested by the people, to refresh the fields, which were dry and withered, with some quantity of water. He needed no great entreaty, but going forth with divers little bells, in presence of the Portugals, he spent an half hour in fetching suudry gambols & skips, & uttering divers superstitious murmurings: and behold, a cloud arose in the air, with lightning and thunder. The Portugals grew amazed; but all the Barbarians with great joy admired and extolled unto heaven, their Ganga, who now gave out intolerable brags, not knowing what hung over his head: For the winds outrageously blowing, the sky thundering after a dreadful manner, in stead of the rain by him promised, there fell a thunderbolt, which like a sword cut his head clean from his shoulders. Some other idolaters not looking much aloft, worship earthly things: such were the people of Congo before their conversion, and are at this day those that have not yet received the Gospel. For these men worship certain dragons with wings, and they foolishly nourish them in their houses, with the delicatest meats that they have. They worship also serpents of horrible shape, goats, tigers, and other creatures, and the more they fear and reverence them, by how much the more deformed and monstrous they are. Amongst the number of their gods also, they reckon bats, owls, owlets, trees, and herbs, with their figures in wood and stone: and they do not only worship these beasts living, but even their versy kins when they are dead, being filled with straw, or some other matter: and the manner of their idolatry is, to bow down before the foresaid things, to cast themselves groveling upon the earth, to cover their faces with dust, and to offer unto them of their best substance. Some lifting up their minds a little higher, worship stars, such be the people of Guinie, and their neighbours, who are inclined to the worship of the sun, the greatest part of them: and they hold opinion, that the souls of those dead that lived well, mount up into heaven, and there dwell perpetually near unto the sun. Neither want there amongst these, certain others so superstitious, as they worship for God the first thing they meet withal, coming out of their houses. They also hold their kings in the account & estimation of Gods, whom they suppose to be descended from heaven, & their kings, to maintain themselves in such high reputation, are served with wonderful ceremonies, neither will they be seen but very seldom. Of the jews. THe jews who have been dispersed by god throughout the whole world, to confirm us in the holy faith, entered into Ethiopia in the Queen of Sabas days, in company of a son that Solomon had by her, to the number (as the Abassins affirm) of twelve thousand, and there multiplied their generation exceedingly. In that they not only filled Abassia, but spread themselves likewiseall over the neighbour provinces. So that at this day also the Abassins affirm, that upon Nilus towards the west, there inhaibteth a most populous nation of the jewish stock, under a mighty K. And some of our modern Cosmographers set down a province in those quarters, which they call The land of the Hebrews, placed as it were under the equinoctial, in certain unknown mountains, between the confines of Abassia, and Congo. And likewise on the north part of the kingdom of Goiame, and the southerly quarter of the kingdom of Gorham, there are certain mountains, peopled with jews, who there maintain themselves free, and absolute, through the inaccessiable situations of the same. For in truth by this means, the inhabitants of the mountains (speaking generally) are the most ancient, and freest people: in that the strong situation of their native soil secureth them, from the incursions of foreign nations, and the violence of their neighbours. Such are the Scots in Britain, and the Biskaines in Spain. But to return again to our purpose: the Anzichi, who extend from the banks of the river Zaire, even to the confines of Nubia, use circumcision, as also divers other bordering people do, a thing that must necessarily have been brought in by the jews, & yet remaining still in use, after the annihilation of the Mosaical law amongst them. Some also think, that the people called Cafri or Cafates at this day, who are gentiles, draw their original from the jews, but being environed on every side by Idolaters, they have by little and little swerved from the law of Moses: and so are become, as it were, insensibly, Idolaters. On the other side, the jews being wonderfully increased in Spain, passed one after an other into Africa and Mauritania, and dispersed themselves even to the confines of Numidia, especially by means of traffic, and the profession of goldsmiths, the which being utterly forbidden the mahometans, is altogether practised amongst them by the jews, as are likewise divers other mechanical crafts, but principally that of black smiths. A thing which notably appeareth in mount Sefsava in the kingdom of Maroco, and in mount Anteta. It is said that Eitdevet, a town in the kingdom of Maroco, was inhabited by the jews, of the stock (as they affirm) of David, who notwithstanding by little and little are grown Mahumetans. The jews increased afterwards in Africa, when first 〈◊〉 king of Spain called The catholic, and after him Emanuel king of Portugal, put them forth of their dominions: For then many went over into the kingdoms of Fez and Maroco, and brought in thither the arts and professions of Europe unknown before to those Barbarians. In Bedis, Teza, Elmedina, Tefsa, and in Segelmesse every placeis full of them. They pass also by way of traffic even to Tombuto, although john Leo writeth how that king was so greatly their enemy, that he confiscated the goods of those that traded with them. It importeth me not to speak of Egypt, because it hath ever been, as well by reason of the nearness of Palestina, as for the commodity of traffic, whereunto they are much inclined, as it were, their second country. Here in great number, and in a manner in all the cities and towns thereof, they exercise mechanical arts, and use traffic and merchandise, as also take upon them the receipt of taxes and customs: but above all other places, in Alexandria and Cairo, where they amount to the number of five and twenty thousand, and the civiller sort among them do usually speak the Castilian tongue. 〈◊〉 much may suffice to have been spoken concerning the jews. It now remaineth, that we come to entreat of the mahometans of Africa. Concerning whom, before we make any particular relation, it will not be amiss; for the readers more perfect instruction, to speak somewhat in general: as namely of the sinister proceedings of their first seducer Mahumet; of the variety and propagation of their damned sects over the east and south parts of the world; of the four principal nations which are the maintainers and upholders of this diabolical religion; and of sundry other particulars most worthy the observation. Of Mahumet, and of his accursed religion in general. MAhumet his father, was a certain profane Idolater called Abdalá, of the stock of Ishmael, and his mother was one * Or Emina. Hennina a jew, both of them being of very humble, and poor condition. He was borne in the year of our Lord 562. and was endowed with a grave countenance and a quick wit. Being grown to man's estate, the Scenite Arabians, accustomed to rob, and run all over the country, took him prisoner, and sold him to a Persian merchant, who discerning him to be apt, and subtle about business, affected and held him in such account, that after his death his mistress remaining a widow, scorned not to take him for her husband. Being therefore enriched by this means, with goods and credit, he raised up his mind to greater matters. The times then answered very fitly for one that would disturb or work any innovation. For the Arabians upon some evil entreaty were malcontented with the Emperor Heraclius. The heresies of Arrius and Nestorius, had in a miserable sort shaken and annoyed the church of God. The jews, though they wanted power, yet amounted they to a great number. The Saracens prevailed mightily, both in number and force. And the Roman Empire was full of slaves. Mahumet therefore taking hold on this opportunity, framed a law, wherein all of them should have some part, or prerogative. In this two Apostata jews, and two heretics, assisted him: of which, one was john, being a scholar of Nestorius' school; and the other Sergius, of the sect of Arrius. Whereupon the principal intention of this cursed law was wholly aimed against the divinity of our Saviour jesus Christ, wickedly oppugned by the jews and Arrians. He persuaded this law, first by giving his wife to understand, and his neighbours by her means, and by little and little others also, that he conversed with the angel Gabriel, unto whose brightness he ascribed the falling sickness, which many times prostrated him upon the earth: dilating and amplifying the same in like sort, by permitting all that which was plausible to sense and the flesh; as also by offering liberty to all slaves that would come to him, and receive his law. Wherefore being prosecuted hard by the masters of those fugitive slaves led away by him, he fled to Medina Talnabi, and there remained some time. From this flight the mahometans fetch the original of their Hegeira. But questionless there was nothing that furthered more the enlargement of the Mahometan sect, than prosperitic in arms, and the multitude of victories; whereby Mahumet overthrew the Persians, became lord of Arabia, and drove the romans out of Syria. And his successors afterwards extended their empire from Euphrates to the Atlantic Ocean, and from the river Niger to the Pirenei mountains, and beyond. They occupied Sicilia, assailed Italy, and with continual prosperity, as it were; for three hundred years, either subdued, or encumbered, both the east & west. But to return to Mahumet his law, it embraceth circumcision, & maketh a difference between meats pure & unpure, partly to allure the jews. It denieth the Divinity of Christ, to reconcile the Arrians, who were then most mighty; it foisteth in many frivolous fables, that it might fit the Gentiles: & looseth the bridle to the flesh, which is a thing acceptable to the greatest part of men. Whereupon Avicen (though he were a Mahometan) writeth thus of such a law: Lex nostra (saith he) quam de dit Mahumeth, etc. that is to say, Our Law, which Mahumet gave us, regardeth the disposition of felicity or misery, according to the body. But there is another promise, which concerneth the mind, or the soul: which wise Divines had a far greater desire to apprehend, then that of the body, which though it be given unto them, yet respect they it not, nor hold it in any estimation, in comparison of that felicity which is a conjunction with truth. Mahumet being dead, * Or Haly. Allé, Abubequer, Omar, and Odoman his kinsmen, each of them pretending to be his true successor, wrote distinctly every one by himself. Upon which there did arise four several sects. Allé was head of the sect Imemia, being followed by the Persians, Indians, and many Arabians, and Gelbines of Africa. Abubequer gave foundation to the sect Melchia, embraced generally by the Arabians, Saracens, and Africans. Omar was author of the Anefia, which is on foot among the Turks in Syria, and in that part of afric which is called Zahará. Odman left behim the Banefia, or Xefaia, as we may term it, which wanteth not followers among the foresaid nations. Of these four sects, in process of time, grown sixty eight other very famous, besides some of less renown and fame. Among the many Mahometan sects, there are the Morabites, who lead their lives for the most part in Hermitages, and make profession of Moral Philosophy, with certain principles differing from the Alcoran. One of these was that Morabite, which certain years past, showing Mahumet his name imprinted in his breast (being done with Aqua Fortis, as I suppose, or some such thing) raised up a great number of Arabians in afric, and laid siege to Tripoli; where being betrayed by his captain, he remained the Turks prisoner, who sent his skin to the grand Signior. This man being in prison, said to an Italian slave, his familiar, who went to visit him; I grieve at nothing but you Christians, who have abandoned me. In that the knights of Malta only sent him small succour, of powder and shot. These Morabites affirm, (to declare some of their fooleries) that when Allé fought, he killed ten thousand Christians with one blow of a sword, and that this sword was an hundred cubits long. Then there is the foolish, and 〈◊〉 sect of Cobtini. One of these showed himself not many years sithence in the market places and quarters of Algiers, mounted on a reed, with a bridle and rains of leather, giving the multitude to understand, that upon that horse in one night, he rid an hundred leagues; and he was for this greatly honoured and reverenced. In tract of time, there grew amongst the mahometans, through the vanity of their law, and the incredible variety and difference of opinions, great disorders: For their sect being not only wicked, and treacherous (as we have declared) but also gross and foolish, those that made profession thereof to defend and maintain it, were enforced to make a thousand interpretations and constructions, far sometimes from reason, and otherwhiles from the express words of Mahumet himself. The Califas endeavoured mightily to reform this; but their provisions of greatest importance were two. For first, Moavia (this man flourished about the year of our Lord 770) called an assembly of learned and judicial men, to establish that which in their sect should be believed, and to this end he caused all the books of Mahumet, and his successors, to be gathered together. But they not agreeing amongst themselves, he chose out of them, six of the most learned, and shutting them within an house, with the said writings, he commanded them, that every one should make choice of that, which seemed best unto him. These men reduced the Mahometan doctrine into six books, setting down the penalty of loss of life, to them that should otherwise speak, or write of the law. But because the Arabians gave their minds to Philosophy, in the universities of Bagdet, Fez, Maroco, and Cordova (and being of piercing and subtle wits) they could not but look into the fopperies of their sect. There was added unto this another proviso, which was a statute, that forbade them the study of Philosophy: by means of which statute, their Universities before most flourishing, have within these four hundred years daily declined. At this day the sects of Mahometan impiety are distinguished more through the might and power of those nations that follow them, then of themselves: and the principal nations are four, that is to say, Arabians, Persians, Tartars, and Turks. The Arabians are most superstitious, and zealous. The Persians stand more upon reason and nature: The Tartars hold much gentilisine and simplicity: and the Turks (especially in Europe) are most of them Libertines, and Martialistes. The Arabians, as they that esteem it for great glory, that Mahumet was of their nation, and buried in Mecca (or as others think in Medina Talnabi) have laboured with all art, and yet procure to spread their sect over the whole world. In India they first prevailed with preaching, and afterwards with arms. Considering that seven hundred years sithence (king Perimal reigning in Malabar) they began there to sow this cockle: and to bring the Gentiles more easily within their net, they took (and at this day take) their daughters to wife, a matter greatly esteemed of them, by reason of these men's wealth. By this policy and the traffic of spices, which yielded them infinite profit, they quickly set foot, and fastened it in India. They built towns, and planted colonies, and the first place, where they grew to a body, was Calicut, which of a small thing, by their concourse and traffic, became a mighty city. They drew king Perimal to their sect, who at their persuasion resolved to go and end his days at Mecca; and for that purpose he put himself onward on the voyage, with certain ships laden with pepper and other precious commodities: but a terrible tempest met him in the midst of his course, and drowned him in the sea. They inhabit in Malabar where two sorts of Arabians or Moors (as we may term them) have more exceedingly increased and prevailed, then in any other part of the Indies: one is of strangers that arrive there by reason of the traffic of Arabia, Cambaia, and Persia: and the other be those that daily are borne of a 〈◊〉 father, and a mother Gentile, or both of father and mother moors, and these (who are called Nateani, and differ from the other people, in person, customs, and habit) make as it were a fourth part of the inhabitants of that country. From Malabar, they went to the Maldive, and Zeilan. Here they began to take upon them the managing of the customs and impositions of cities and towns; and by making them greater than in times past, they attained to the grace and favour of the Princes and Lords, together with great reputation and authority, yea pre-eminence and superiority over the common people: and favouring those who embraced their sect, daily preached and divulged by the Papassis; but holding their hands heavy over such as showed themselves repugnant, they incredibly advanced mahumetism. Afterwards perceiving themselves strong and mighty, both in richesse, and followers, they seized on the towns and cities. So that at this day, they command a good part of the Maldivae, and the ports of the most noble island of Zeilan, except that of Columbo where the Portugals have a fortress. By like stratagem are they become masters of the west part of 〈◊〉, within little 〈◊〉 than these two hundred years, first prevailing by trade, and commerce, then by marriage and affinity, and last of all by arms. From hence going forward, they have taken into their hands the greatest part of the ports of that large Archipelago of the Luçones, Malucos, javas, etc. They are Lords of the city of Sunda, in the greater java, they enjoy the greatest part of the islands of Banda, and Maluco; they reign in Burneo, & Gilolo. They came once as far as Luçon, a most noble Island, and one of the Philippinas, & had planted therein three colonies. On the other side, they conquered upon the firm land, first the rich kingdom of Cambaia, & there established their sect, as they did the like, in all the places adjoining; from hence they went to Bengala, and became Lords thereof. They cut off by little and little, from the crown of Siam, the state of Malaca, (which the Portugals hold at this day) as likewise those of jor, and Pam; and more than two hundred leagues along the coast. Finally they are entered into the most ample kingdom of China, and have built Moscheas in the same; and if the Portugals in India and the Malucos, and afterwards the Spaniards in the Philippinas had not met them on the way, and with the gospel and arms, interrupted their course, they would at this instant have possessed infinite kingdoms of the east: yea in this they are so industrious and bold, to our confusion, that even the Arabian mariners, that go in the Portugal ships will tarry behind in the Gentile-townes, thereto publish their sect; and in the year 1555. one of these men had passed even as far as japon, for this purpose; so that if the Portugals had not remedied it in due time, he would peradventure have wrought there some alteration. The Persian nation, as touching their sect, a little before our time, have been made renowned among those barbarous people, by the valour and arms of Ishmael, called the Sophi. This man accounting himself to be of the race and blood of Alle, brought his own sect into credit and reputation, and waged war against those borderers, who would not accept of it. He wore a red Turban, with twelve points or corners, in memorial of the twelve sons of Ocen, the son of Awl, willing that all his followers should wear the like; and many people came in unto him, and in a manner all those nations which inhabit between the rivers Euphrates and Abianus, and between the Caspian sea & the Persian gulf. Tammas his son sent the said twelue-cornered Turban to the Mahometan Princes of Malabar and Decan, persuading them to receive it with his sect, and bestowing the title of a king, on whomsoever would accept of it, but no others received it, save Nizzamaluco. It is a common voice and opinion, that the greatest part of the mahometans of Syria and the lesser Asia follow and affect inwardly the sect of Allé, and of the Persians; the which the Turks perceiving in the uproar of Techelle, made a mighty slaughter of them, carrying the kinsmen of the slain, and those suspected, out of Asia into Europe. But now let us pass to the Tartars. These (* as otherwhiles we declared) G. B. B. Rel. un. part. 1. lib. 2. dell' Asia. descended of the ten tribes of Israel, being transported by the order and commission of Salmanazar, king of the Assyrians, beyond India, into the of 〈◊〉. Here degenerating into rude and barbarous customs, and forgetting in a great part, or altogether, the Mosaical ceremonies, they hardly retained circumcision. They came out of this their banishment, in the year of our Lord 1200. and in a small time, with the ruin of infinite nations, made themselves terrible to all the east, and no less to the north. Pope Innocent the fourth, being amazed at the horrible storm, that hung over the head of Christendom (for they had spread themselves like locusts With this friar Ascelline was sent johannes de Plano Carpini, whose voyage is put down in the first volume of the 〈◊〉 voyages. even to the banks of Danubius) sent from the council of Lions, Friar Ascellino, of the order of Dominicus, with other Friars, to the great CAN in the year 1246. to exhort him to embrace the name and faith of Christ; or at least to let the Christians alone in peace. Of baptism he accepted not, but promised a league with the Christians, for five years. Others notwithstanding will needs have it, that he was converted, and that taking up arms in favour of the Christians, he caused Mustaceno the Califa of Baldach, to die with famine, amidst the treasures heaped up by him. But afterwards either he, or his successor, together with his people, denying their Christianity, became Mahumetans in religion. And sithence that time, the Tartarian name and fame growing obscure, that of the Turks began to flourish. The Tartars Petegorski notwithstanding upon the mountains of Cumania, remained firm in the Christian faith, but yet corrupted with the errors of the greeks and Moscovites. The Colmugineere the Caspian sea, continued in Paganism, who are termed Capigliati, because they shave not off their hairs, as the other Tartarsdo. The Kirgessi also be Idolaters, as otherwhiles we declared. The other Tartars that are come on this side of Imaus, have all, from one to an other, embraced Mahumetisme. And amongst others the Zagatai, who through the emulation they have with the Persians (upon whom they border and contend for Empire) as concerning sect, follow the opinion of the Turks, as also the Mogores their descendants, who in these our days have enlarged their Empire, between mount Caucasus and the Ocean, and between Ganges, and Indus. But the Tartars of Cataya, resident beyond Imaus, and upon the desert called Lop, remain generally in Idolatry, although there continue many Christians amongst them, of the sect of Nestorius, neither want there some mahometans. Now let us come to the Turks; who in largeness of Empire, are superior to the other sects. Of these, part inhabit in Asia, part in Europe. Those of Asia incline much to the opinion of the Persians, and especially they that inhabit in Anatolia, and the borders. But those of Europe are generally less superstitious than the Asians, and by reason of their daily conversation with Christians, they have a deeper opinion and conceit of Christ then the others, yea, and many of them hold him for God, and Redeemer. And it is not long sithence there were divers put to death in Constantinople with special constancy on their part: and it was thought that many of the grand 〈◊〉 court held the same opinion. The Turks, especially those of Europe, are of two sorts: for some are natural Turks, others accessory, or accidental. Natural I term them, that are borne of Turkish parents: and them I call accidental, who leaving our sacred faith, or the Mosaical law, become Mahumetans: the which the Christians perform by circumcising themselves, and the jews by lifting up a finger. Now the Christians become Turks, partly upon some extreme & violent passion. Cherseogli (who afterwards was great with Bazaieth) turned Turk to be revenged of his father, who took from him his wife, amidst the solemnity of the marriage. Or Olouchali. Vlucciali denied the faith to be revenged of a slave, his companion in the galley, who called him scald pate. Some abjure the faith to release themselves of torments and cruelties; others for hope of honours and temporal greatness: and of these two sorts there are a great number in Constantinople, being thought to be Christians in hart: and yet through slothfulness, or first to gather together more wealth, or expecting opportunity to carry with them, their wives and children, or for fear of being discovered in their departure and voyage, or else through sensuality, and for that they would not be deprived of the licentiousness and 〈◊〉 of the life they lead, resolve not to perform that they are bound unto; deferring thus from month to month, & from year to year, to leave this Babylon & sink of sin. But the greatest part of Renegadoes become Mahumetans without perceiving it. In that the grand Signior sendeth every four years, more or less, according as need requireth, to take through his states of Europe, of every three christian male children one, at the discretion of his Commissaries, by way of tribute, and they take them from the age of ten, to the years of seventeen. These being brought to Constantinople, are without other ceremonies circumcised, and part of them are sent into Anatolia and Caramania to learn the tongue, religion, and fashions of the Turks: and part are employed about the service of the Seraglios, or palaces of Constantinople, Pera, and Andrinople. here living among the Turks, far from their parents, separate from all conversation with the faithful, and deprived of all spiritual aid and help, without perceiving, it they are made Turks. The author of this, the most diabolical institution that ever was made, was a certain Turkish saint, called 〈◊〉 as, in the days of Amurath the second: and in the beginning the number was but three thousand, and afterwards they exceeded not twelve thousand, until the time of Amurath the third, who increased them to the number of four and twenty thousand. But returning to their education: after some time they are called home again to the Seraglios of the Zamoglans (for so are they termed, till they be enroled among the janissaries) to remain there under their heads and governors: and in short time they become janissaries, or Spahies, and either they go to the war, or are bestowed in some garrison, or else are resident in the court of the Turk. They are called The sons of the grand Signior: they live with great licence and liberty: they do whatsoever pleaseth themselves: neither can they be judged by any but the Agaes: during their lives they are seldontimes punished, and yet when it is done, it is with great 〈◊〉: in buying they make their own prizes. These snares are strong enough to procure, that they never care for returning any more to the bosom of the church. But that which is worst of all: every new Prince bestoweth on them a great largesse, and augmenteth their pay, at the Christians charge. They also kill and rob whomsoever they please, especially the Christians throughout the whole country, or in marching to the war, and the Christians dare not so much as in a word find themselves aggrieved: whereupon there groweth in them such a scorn and contempt of the Christian name, that they remain strangers to it. That which I have said of young male children taken from out their mother's bosoms, who without perceiving it become mahumetans, happeneth in like manner unto them, whom the pirates by sea, or soldiers by land make slaves, presenting them to the grand Signior. Besides the foresaid devices, the Turks further spread abroad their sect with all kind of vantage and furtherance. For they abase and bring to extreme misery the Christians and Moors their subjects, not permitting them to ride, nor bear any kind of arms, nor to exercise any manner of justice, or government. They make it lawful to take Christian women that are not married. If the wife of a Christian turneth Turk, and marrieth herself with a Turk, their law permitteth, that the Christian husband by turning Turk may take her again. They forbid the Christians to repair their ruinated Churches, and suffer them in no wise to re-edify them fallen down, without great bribes; and so the Christians through poverty let them come to 〈◊〉: by means where of the public worship of God faileth, and in progress of time also, the very Christian faith and belief. In Asia they will not permit the 〈◊〉 the use of their language, but only in sacred administrations, to the end that together with their language, they may also loose and forget their Christian fashions and customs. The Spahi being Lords for term of life, of infinite villages, take such young men into their servitude, as best pleaseth them; who in process of time, by conversation with their masters, and the favours they hope after, and by the wicked fashions and customs which they learn, as also through the sins and vices, wherein they are drowned, do become Turks. And the greeks children, after the example of their companions, being thus favoured and made much of, incline in such a sort unto this evil, that upon every light occasion, they threaten their fathers and mothers to turn Turks. Further it is forbidden the mahumetans to make restitution of any place, once taken with arms, and wherein they have built a Moschea. To conclude, they use all manner of circumstances, by mean of which they may amplify or enlarge their dominion and sect. Of the mahometans of Africa in particular. THe Mahometan impiety hath spread itself throughout Africa beyond measure: this pestilence entered into Egypt in the year of our Lord 637. by the arms of Omar. From whence a captain of Odoman first passed into Africa in the year 650. with fower-score thousand fight men, who there defeated Gregorius Patritius. But they perpetually cast out of afric the romans with the people of Absimacus, and Leontius the emperor, in the year 699. and wholly impatronized themselves of Barbary. They pierced into Numidia & Libya in the year 710. and overthrew the Azanaghi, and the people of Gualata, Oden, and Tombuto. The year afterwards 973. having passed Gambea, they infected the Negroes, and the first that drunk of their poison were those of Melli. In the year 1067. jaiaia the son of Abubequer entered into the lower Ethiopia, and by little and little subverted those people which confine upon the deserts of Libya and Egypt, piercing even to Nubia & Guinea. The Arabians have augmented their sect in afric, first with force of arms, by banishing of the natural inhabitants, the which they might well do, by reason of their infinite multitude: and of them, that verse of David may well be understood: In circuitu impij ambulant: secundum altitudinem tuam, multiplicasti filios hominum, etc. The wicked walk round about; according to thy greatness, thou hast multiplied the sons of men. Where they could not come, nor give no blow with arms; there they have engraffed themselves, by preaching and traffic. The heresy of Arrius furthered their enterprise, wherewith the Vandals and Goths being then inhabiters of Africa were infected. To further their designments they brought in the Arabic language and letters. They founded Universities and Studies, both for riches of revenue, and magnificence of building most noble, especially in Maroco, and Fez. But there is nothing that hath greatlier furthered the progression of the Mahometan sect, than perpetuity of victory, & the greatness of conquests, first of the Califas in the east, & afterwards of the Miramolines in Africa: In that the greatest part of men, yea, and in a manner all, except such as have fastened their confidence upon the cross of Christ, and settled their hope in eternity, follow that which best agreeth with sense, and measure the grace of God by worldly prosperity. And yet Christ (as justinus the Philosopher, and glorious martyr testifieth) promised no earthly reward to good works. Carnal men therefore perceiving the empire of the Califas and Mahumetans continually to increase in the east and west, taking into their hands both sea and land, (for this their felicity in arms continued three hundred years, wherein they conquered all that which lieth between the river Abianus and the Atlantike Ocean, and subdued Spain, Sicilia, and a part of Italy and France) and judging that temporal prosperity and victories were the effects and fruits, or at least the arguments and signs of the grace and favour of God, they easily fell into Apostasy, whereunto the impiety of Arrius and other heretics opened the way, who for long tract of time estranging themselves more and more from the evangelical truth, fell in the end into Atheism: as we see hath fallen out in the course of some modern enormities. But to return from whence we have digressed; in progress of time there grew great differences between the mahometans: for their sect being no less sottish and foolish, then wicked and perfidious, the maintainers of it were driven to fetch reasons far off for defence of the same. But the Arabians not contented in Africa to have subjugated with arms, and with false doctrine to have pestered Barbary, Numidia, Libya, and the country of Negroes, they further on the other side assailed the lower Ethiopia, both by sea and land. By land entered thereinto in the year 1067. Faiaia the son of Abubequer, and by means of certain Alsachi, he dispersed that pestilence into Nubia, and the neighbour provinces. On the other side passing the Red sea, they first took knowledge of the coast of Ethiopia, even to Cabo de los corrientes, by their continual traffic thither: and afterwards being encouraged by the weakness of the natural inhabitants, they erected the kingdoms of Magadazo, Melinde, Mombazza, Quiloa, Mozambique, and seized on some ports of the island of Saint Laurence: and gathering force by little and little, they enlarged their empire within the land, and established therein the kingdoms of Dangali and Adel. So that on the one side they have spread their sect, from the Red sea to the Atlantike Ocean, and from the Mediterran sea to the river Niger, and farther: and on the other, have taken into their hands all the eastern coast of afric, from Suez to Cape Guardafú, and from this, even to that De los corrientes, and the adjoining islands. In which places though the people be not altogether Mahumetans, yet have the mahometans the weapons & dominion in their hands; the which how much it importeth for the bringing in of sects, we may easily conceive. To conclude, they have often assailed the Prete janni; sometimes the Turks, who have taken from him the ports of the Red sea; and otherwhiles the Moors, under the conduct of the king of Adel, who hath, and doth molest them greatly, leading into captituitie a great number of Abassins, where they become for the most part Mahumetans. Of the Christians of Africa. NOw that we have declared the miseries and darkness of Africa, it remaineth that we set down that little light of true religion which there is; the which I can not pass over, without exceeding glory to the Portugal nation. In that they with inestimable charge, and infinite travail, have first sought to open the way to Ethiopia, and to bring the great Negus of Abassia, called by us Prete janni, to the union of the christian church of Europe, performing whatsoever, after this, for the conversion of the princes of Guinia and Meleghette to the faith, and yet more happily of the king of Congo and the Princes of Angola; and likewise with divers colonies sent to the islands of the Atlantic Ocean, they have no less advanced the honour of their own nation, than the propagating of the christian faith. And finally, passing beyond Cabo de buena esperança, they have resisted the Mahometan sect, which had now extended itself on the backside of Africa, as far as Cabo de los corrientes. Of the Christians in Egypt. THe Christians of Egypt are partly strangers, partly home-born in the country; strangers come thither in regard of traffic which there flourisheth above measure, especially in the cities of Alexandria and Cairo; by reason that this kingdom being most commodiously situate between the Red and Mediterran seas, uniteth the west parts of the world with the east, by mean of an infinite traffic; and therefore is it as it were a ladder, whereby the wealth of India and of the Eoan Ocean, passeth into the lesser Asia, into Africa, and Europe. Whereupon not only the Venetians, Florentines, and Ragusians come thither in great numbers; but also the French, and English. The natural Christians of Egypt, remaining after the spoils and havoc of the Barbarians and the cruelty of the Saracens, Mamalucks, and Turks, exceed not the number of fifty thousand persons, and these dwell dispersed here and there, but principally in the cities of Cairo, Messia, Monfalatto, Bucco, and Elchiasa, all placed upon the banks of Nilus. There are also many in the province of Minia, in which quarter appear divers monasteries. But among the monasteries of Egypt those of Saint Anthony, Saint Paul, and Saint Macarius are the principal. The first lieth in Troglodytica right over against Say't upon a hill, where Saint Anthony was said to be beaten by devils: the second is seated not far from this, in the midst of a desert: the third standeth in the wilderness, to the west of Bulac. This is the monastery which in some histories is called Nitria, as I think, because in that quarter the waters of Nilus, being thickened by the heat of the sun in low places, are converted into salt and niter. Georgia stood upon Nilus, six miles from the city of Munsia, a rich and magnificent Convent, so called after the name of Saint George. There were in the same more than two hundred monks, to the notable benefit and ease of pilgrims & strangers, who were there courteously lodged. But they dying all of the plague, (about some hundred and fifty years sithence,) the place was abandoned. Now to deliver somewhat concerning the estates of these Christians: They are called by some * Or Coptitae. Cofti, and by others, Christians from the girdle upward: for albeit they be baptised, as we are, yet do they circumcise themselves like to the jews: so as a man may say, their Christianity comes no lower than the girdlestead. But that which is worse, they have for these 1000 years followed the heresy of Eutiches, which alloweth but of one nature in Christ: by which heresy they also separate and dismember themselves, from the union of the Church of Europe. The occasion of this separation and 〈◊〉, was the Ephesine council, assembled by Dioscorus in defence of Eutiches, who was now condemned in the Chalcedon counsel by six hundred and thirty fathers congregated together, by the authority of Leo the first. For the Cofti fearing, that to attribute two natures unto Christ, might be all one, as if they had assigned him two hypostases or persons, to avoid the heresy of the Nestorians, they became Eutichians. They say their divine service in the Chaldean tongue, oftentimes repeating Alleluia. They read the Gospel first in Chaldean, and then in Arabic. When the priest saith Pax vobis, the youngest amongst them layeth his hand upon all the people that are present. After consecration, they give a simple piece of bread to the standers by: a ceremony used also in Greece. They exercise their function in the church of Saint Mark amidst the ruins of Alexandria, and in that of Suez, upon the red sea: they obey the Patriarch of Alexandria, and affirm themselves to be of the faith of Prete janni. In our days two Popes have attempted to reduce them to the union of the Romish church; Pius the fourth, and Gregory the thirteenth. Pius the fourth in the year 1563. scent two jesuit-priests for this purpose to Cairo; who stayed there almost a year, but to no purpose, and with great danger of life: for one of them was appointed to the fire, from which he escaped by means of a merchant; who with eight hundred crowns pacified the Turks, and caused the priest suddenly to fly away. But Pope Gregory entered into this enterprise with more hope: for Paulo Mariani a famous Christian merchant, was at the same time in Cairo, who for his wisdom, magnificence, knowledge of tongues, and long practise in the affairs of the world, joined with wonderful eloquence, and presence of body, was in great esteem and reputation, not only among the Christians, but also with the Turks, who equally loved him for his liberality, and honoured him for his valour. This man had conference with the Patriarch of Alexandria about the reconciling of his people to the Romish church: whereunto the 〈◊〉 not showing himself difficult, or hard to be entreated, was contented to call by his letters into those parts, two priests of the same order, who were then with the Maronites in mount Libanus. In the mean while the Pope, who was advertised of all this business, taking the matter quickly in hand, wrote unto the two priests, appointing one of them to go directly to Cairo; and the other to return back to Rome. Wherefore in the year 1582 in the month of October one of the said priests arriving at Cairo, was courteously received by Mariani, and afterwards conducted to the Patriarch, who also made show of great joy and consolation. One might likewise perceive a reasonable disposition in others who had any authority among the Cofti. He advertised the Pope of all; who sent a certain other priest, with one brief to the Patriarch, and an other to the Jesuits, wherein he exhorted them to go forward, and to bring the union, whereof so assured hope was conceived, to good effect. The Patriarch received the brief with great reverence he kissed it, and according to their custom, laid it upon his head, and afterwards demanded what it comprehended: the which with great feeling, and contentment having understood, within few days he instituted a Synod of some bishops, and certain other principal persons of the nation. here the said priests having declared unto them upon how little ground they, who at the first received the faith from Saint Mark, were sequestered from the western church by the authority of one heretic, took much pains afterward in making them capable of the difference that is between a nature and an Hypostasis or person, to their exceeding great admiration, because they were in a manner destitute of all learning. For the Patriarch even from his youth had led his life in the monastery of Saint Macarius, far not only from the studies of learning, but also from the conversation of men, neither appeared there any greater knowledge in the bishops. They had 〈◊〉 any book of the ancient fathers, and yet those they had, were all dusty, and eaten with moths: That where of they made chiefest account, was an old volume, being torn and rend, which they called The confession of the Fathers, full of divers dreams and fables, whereof notwithstanding, and of some other Arabic books, the priests made special good use, for the convincing of them in their errors. Also having framed a compendium of most necessary doctrine, they caused divers copies of the same to be drawn, and gave them to the learned of the Cofti, to be considered of, who wondering at the strangeness of the things propounded unto them, and not knowing how to answer the arguments of the priests, demanded time to search their own writings, and to see what opinion their predecessors had held as concerning that point. In the mean while, they came often to the priests, and inquired of them the doctrine and form of speech used in the Romish church. Whereupon they showed them how greatly the same church had ever detested heresies: and how severely it had condemned the impiety of Nestorius, and chose highly esteemed the authority of Cyrillus Alexandrinus, and the decrees of the first Ephesine Council. Neither (because it confesseth two natures in Christ, joined in one person without confusion) doth it therefore infer two hypostasis or persons. In that a nature and a person are not the self same things. The which may clearly be understood by the deep mystery of the holy Trinity, wherein we acknowledge one nature, and three Hypostasis or persons. We aver therefore, that there are two natures in Christ, one divine, which he hath eternally from his Father, the other human, which he took temporally from the immaculate womb of his mother; both of them joined in one hypostasis or person. By these and other like demonstrations, they cleared the understandings, and confirmed the minds of the Cofti. Howbeit, all this notwithstanding, the Synod being again assembled (wherein were present, the Patriarch, five bishops, divers abbots of monasteries, and thirty other principal persons) they plainly answered the priests that they had turned over their Annals & writings, & were resolved in no wise to depart from the doctrine and faith of their predecessors. This unlookedfor answer, though it greatly troubled and displeased the priests, yet were they determined still to continue, and to proceed further in the enterprise. Whereupon declaring unto them again, how far they were by Dioscorus means estranged from the doctrine taught in the Nicen, Constantinopolitan, and first Ephesine counsel, grounded on the authority of holy Scripture, and the ancient Fathers: and that to disallow of two natures in Christ, was no other but to deny, that he was neither true God nor man, (a matter abominable, not only to their ears, but even to their very understandings) they prevailed so much, as that the matter was yet deferred off to an other month. Being therefore congregated the third time, it seemed that God himself furthered this affair more than usually: for first with common consent they abrogated the law of circumcision, and withal after a disputation of six hours continuance, it was decreed, that as concerning the truth of this point, the priests were to be believed, that there were two natures in Christ, and that the Cofti though they avoided the name and title of two natures, yet denied they not, but that Christ was true man, and true God. Only they were wary of the two natures, for fear of falling by little & little into two hypostases. Thus this business being brought to so good a pass, was by the ambition and obstinacy of one man utterly crossed and hindered. This was the Vicar or Suffragan to the Patriarch, who aspiring himself to the Patriarkship, and seeing that if he followed this union begun with the Roman church, he could not attain to that dignity, but by the Pope's authority, (which he altogether misdoubted) he first made the decree of two natures to be deferred, commanding afterwards that none should subscribe thereunto, and finally caused the Patriarch wholly to give over this business, and to retire himself into the wilderness; whereas he continued for certain months. Afterwards the priests understanding where he was, wrote unto him a letter, signifying therein, what a special desire they had to see him, and what damage the retiring of himself would procure to the silly sheep recommended unto him by God, if he ratified not fully those things which were decreed upon in the last assembly. He courteously answered, making show, that he would return, when he had visited his diocese, and in the mean while they should expect him at Cairo. But while he thought upon return, his own death interrupted him. The Cofti have a law, or custom, that between the death of one Patriarch and the creation of an other, there must be in a manner an whole years space, for so long it is requisite, say they, that the church should bewail the death of her spouse. Whereupon the priests, not to lose so much time, determined to go home into Italy, to acquaint the Pope with the success of all things, and afterwards (need so requiring) to return. The Cofti understanding thus much, writ letters to the Pope, wherein they partly thanked him for the care he had of them; & partly lamented, that their reconciliation with the Romish church was not fully confirmed and finished. While the priests were about to depart on Saint Mathewes day in the morning, there came a rout of armed Turks to their lodging. These laid hands suddenly on two priests, and another companion of theirs, and on three Friars of the order of Saint Francis, lodged in the same house. No man knew the reason of this hurly burly, but for as much as could be learned, all this grew through the envy of a Frenchman. This man aspiring to the degree of Consul or Governor over his nation, which Mariani had obtained, maliciously gave the Bassa of Cairo to understand, that Mariani suborned the people against the grand Signior, & that he had order from the K. of Spain to levy Christian men. And that to this end he kept in his house certain priests, who practised in this behalf with Mariani for the king. There was nothing that more prejudiced the priests, than the Cofties letters, which bred a vehement suspicion in the Turks, that such an union might be concluded with the Roman Church, as might work some extraordinary innovation. They were therefore cast into a filthy and stinking prison. The Venetian Consul assayed first by word of mouth, and after by suit and supplication, to assuage the fury and anger of the Bassá; Howbeit he received such bitter and nipping answers, that he himself was also afraid. But nothing prevaileth further with the Turks than money. For it seemeth that with this only their savage fury is mitigated, and their fierceness appeased. Five thousand crowns therefore were disbursed for the priest's liberty, wherein the Cofti showed themselves very friendly, the richest of them offering one after another to lend money without any interest for the same. But this matter cost Mariani more than ten thousand crowns; and besides that, he was deprived of his degree of Consulship. The priests being thus freed out of prison, and observing how things went, returned one after another back to Rome. A relation touching the state of Christian Religion in the dominions of Prete janni, taken out of an oration of Matthew Dresserus, professor of the Greek and Latin tongues, and of Histories, in the University of Lipsia. Who having first made a general exordium to his auditory, proceedeth at length to the peculiar handling of the foresaid argument, in manner following. NOndum (saith he) uni us seculi aet as exacta est etc. The space of one hundred years is not as yet fully expired, since the fame of the Ethiopians religion came first unto our ears. Which, because it is in many points agreeable unto Christian verity, and carrieth an honest show of piety therewith, is to be esteemed as a matter most worthy of our knowledge. Of this therefore, so far forth as the short time of an oration will permit, I purpose to entreat; to the end it may appear, both where, and what manner of Christian church that of Ethiopia is, and what were the first beginnings thereof. This Ethiopian, not unfitly called * As the church in all the hither parts of Europe hath been called the western, and that of Greece and Asia, the 〈◊〉 church. The southern church, is situate in Africa far south, namely under the Torrid Zone, between the Tropic of Cancer and the Equinoctial; some part thereof also stretching beyond the Equinoctial, towards the Tropic of Capricorn. Two summers they have every year, yea in a manner, one continual summer: so that at the very same time in some fields they sow, and in others they reap. Somewhere also they have every month ripe, some kind of earthly fruits or other, especially pulse. The people are skorched with the heat of the sun, and they are black, and go naked: save only that some cover their privities with cloth of cotton or of silk. The country is very great, and containeth well nigh twenty kingdoms; * Whantsoever Dresserus thinketh; yet divers other authors of good note do hold the dominions of Prete janni to be nothing so large. so that it is almost as large as Europe, or as all Christendom in these parts. At the beginning indeed it had not above two kingdoms; but in process of time it was mightily enlarged by the conquest of country's adjacent. For it is environed on all sides by unbelieving gentiles and 〈◊〉, who are most deadly enemies to the Christian religion; with whom the emperor of Ethiopia is at continual wars, endeavouring by all possible means to reclaim them from their heathenish Idolatry to the faith of jesus Christ. It is reported that certain bordering * These Moors are called Dobas. Moors bear such implacable hatred against these Christians, that none of them may 〈◊〉, before he bringeth testimony, that he hath slain twelve of 〈◊〉. The 〈◊〉 of Ethiopia is not called (as some imagine) 〈◊〉 or priest; but Precious john. For in the Ethiopian tongue he is termed Belul Gian, and in the Chaldean, Encoe Gian, both which additions signify precious or high; so that in a manner he cometh near unto the titles of our princes, who are called Illustres, Excelsi, Serenissimi, etc. to signify, that they are exalted and advanced above other people. And this is a common name to all the christian kings of Ethiopia; as Pharaoh was to the Egyptian kings, and Augustus, to the Roman emperors. Neither is this Precious john a priest by profession, but a civil magistrate; nor is he armed so much with religion and laws, as with military forces. Howbeit he calleth himself The pillar of faith; because he is the maintainer of the Christian faith, not only enjoining his own subjects to the observation thereof; but (what in him lieth) enforcing his enemies also to embrace it. In times past Ethiopia was governed by Queens only. Whereupon we read in the history of the old testament, that the Queen of the south came to King Solomon from Saba, to hear his admirable wisdom, about the year of the world 2954. The name of this Queen (as the Ethiopians report) was Maqueda, who from the head-city of Ethiopia called Saba (which like an Isle, is environed on all sides by the river Nilus) traveled by Egypt and the Red sea to jerusalem. And she brought unto Solomon an hundred & twenty talents of gold, which amount to 720000. golden ducats of Hungary, that is, seven tons of gold, and 20000 Hungarian ducats beside. This mighty sum of gold, with other things of great value, she presented unto Solomon, who likewise requited her with most princely gifts. She contended with him also in propounding of sage questions, & obscure riddles. Amongst other matters (as it is reported by Cedrenus) she brought before him certain damosels, and young men in maids attire, ask the king, how he could discern one sex from another. He answered, that he would find them out by the washing of their faces. And forthwith he commanded all their faces to be washed, and they which washed themselves strongly, were found to be males; but the residue by their tender washing bewrayed themselves to be damosels. The Ethiopian kings suppose, that they are descended from the lineage of David, and from the family of Solomon. And therefore they use to term themselves the sons of David, and of Solomon, and of the holy patriarchs also, as being sprung from their progeny. For Queen Maqueda (say they) had a son by Solomon, whom they named Meilech. But afterward he was called David. This Meilech (as they report) being grown to twenty years of age, was sent back by his mother unto his father and instructor Solomon, that he might learn of him, wisdom and understanding. Which so soon as the said Meilech or David had attained: by the permission of Solomon, taking with him many priests and nobles, out of all the twelve tribes, he returned to his kingdom of Ethiopia, and took upon him the government thereof. As likewise he carried home with him the law of God, and the rite of circumcision. These were the beginnings of the jewish religion in Ethiopia. And it is reported, that even till this present none are admitted into any ministry or canonship in the court, but such as are descended of their race that came first out of Iury. By these therefore the doctrine of God in Ethiopia was first planted, which afterward took such deep root, as it hath since remained to all succeeding ages. For the Ethiopians did both retain the books of the Prophets, and travailed also to jerusalem, that they might there worship the true God revealed in the kingdom of Israel. Which manifestly appeareth Acts of the Apost. cap. 8. verse 26. out of the History of the Ethiopian Eunuch, whose name was Indich, which was a principal governor under Queen Candaces, properly called judith. For he about the tenth year after the death and resurrection of our blessed Saviour, travailed for the space of two hundred and forty miles, to jerusalem. Where having performed due worship unto God, returning homeward, as he sat in his chariot, he read the prophet Esaias. And by the commandment of the holy Spirit, Philip one of Christ his disciples was sent unto him. And when they were both come to the city Bethzur, three miles distant from jerusalem; the Eunuch at the foot of a mountain espied a certain water, wherein he was baptised by Philip. And being returned into Ethiopia, this Eunuch baptised the Queen, and a great part of her family and people. From which time the Ethiopians began to be Christians, who since that have continually professed the Christian faith. They believe also that Philip sent into Ethiopia a disciple of his called Lycanon, who (as they suppose) ordained the very form of religion which they now hold. Now these beginnings aswell of the jewish as the christian religion among the Ethiopians being thus declared: we are next to entreat of the doctrine & religion itself, together with the rites & ceremonies used at this present in the Ethiopicke church, so far forth as we can gather out of the ambassages which have been performed from these parts thither, & back again. Besides which there is no history nor discourse of any worth to be found, which entreateth of the religion, manners, and customs of the Ethiopians. So as it is a matter very strange, that for so many hundred years together, Ethiopia was so barred from our knowledge, that we had not so much as any report thereof. Until about the year of our Lord 1440. certain ambassadors sent from thence to Pope Eugenius, returned back with his letters, and Papal benediction to their king. Which letters are most charily kept among the records of this Ethiopian king, and are preserved for perpetual monuments. From which time also, as though Ethiopia had been again choir debarred from the knowledge and conversation of our men, there were not any Europeans that went into Ethiopia, nor any Ethiopians that came into Europe, till the year of our Lord 1486. what time john the second king of Portugal sent Pedro de Covilham, and Alonço de Paiva, to search out Ethiopia. This Pedro was a man very learned, eloquent, skilful in sundry languages, painful in his endeavours, fortunate in his attempts, and most desirous to find out new countries and people both by sea and land. He therefore in the year above mentioned, together with his companion Alonço de 〈◊〉, (who died in the voyage) travailed first to Alexandria and Cairo in Egypt: from whence in the company of certain Moors of Fez and Tremizen, he proceeded on to El Tor, an haven town upon the Arabian shore of the Red sea, and thence to Aden, situate without the entrance of the Arabian gulf. Where having embarked himself in a ship of Moors, he travailed to Calicut, Goa, and other places of the east Indies; and being fully informed of the state of the Spiceries, he crossed over the main Ocean to çofala, sailed thence to Ormuz, and then returned back to Cairo. From whence (having dispatched letters unto his king) in the company of Rabbi joseph a jew, he made a second voyage to Ormuz; and in his return he took his journey towards Ethiopia, the Emperor whereof at that time, was called Alexander. Unto whom when he had delivered a letter and a map of the world sent from king john, he was most kindly entertained, and rewarded with many rich gifts. And albeit he most earnestly desired to return into his own country, yet could he never obtain leave; but had wealth, honour, and a wife of a noble family bestowed upon him, to assuage his desire of returning home. Wherefore in the year 1526. which was forty years after his departure out of Portugal, he was left, by Rodrigo de Lima the Portugal ambassador, still remaining in the court of Prete janni. In all this mean while sundry Portugals came out of India to the court of the Prete, not so much to visit and salute him, as to declare the good will and kind affection of their king towards him. Whereupon Queen Helena, which was then protectress of the Ethiopian or Abassin empire, to requite the king of Portugal with like friendship; sent unto him in the company of the foresaid Portugals an ambassador or messenger of hers, called Matthew, who was a merchant borne in Armenia, being a man skilful in Matthew the first ambassador sent from Aethiopia to Portugal. sundry languages and in many other matters. This Matthew she not only furnished with letters requisite for such an embassage; but enjoined him also to declare by word of mouth unto the king of Portugal the principal heads of their doctrine or belief, together with their rites and customs, and the present state of the whole church of Ethiopia. Moreover she presented him with a little cross made (as they suppose) of a piece of that very cross, whereon our saviour Christ was crucified; with many other tokens and pledges of mutual christian amity. Thus Matthew being dismissed, took his journey to the east Indies; from whence he was conducted by sea into Portugal; where arriving in the year 1513, he did his message, according to Queen Helenas directions, unto the king Don Emanuel. The king taking wonderful delight at this message, and at these gifts which were sent him from a Christian prince so far remote, not long after prepared a new * This embassage was at the first undertaken by Odoardo Galuano: who dying at the isle of 〈◊〉 in the Red sea, it was performed by Rodrigo de Lima. embassage, with letters, and presents of exceeding value; in which embassage the piety and virtue of Francis Aluarez a Portugal priest extraordinarily appeared. For he remaining six whole years in the court and country of Ethiopia, took there most diligent notice of all matters worthy the observation. And he had often and familiar conference not only with the emperor himself, but also with the patriarch, concerning the whole state of their religion, and of matters ecclesiastical; as also he was a most curious observer of all their rites and ceremonies. Who in the year of Christ 1526. being dismissed by Prete janni, was accompanied into Zagazabo the second ambassador sent from AEthiopia to Portugal. Portugal by another Ethiopian or Abassin ambassador called Zagazabo, and brought letters also to Pope Clement the seventh, with a golden cross of a pound weight. It seemeth likewise that the said ambassador of Prete janni was a very honest, upright, and godly man, who by reason of their continual wars was detained in Portugal till the year of our Lord 1539. The letters of Prete janni to the Pope, were by Francis Aluarez delivered at Bononia, in the year of Christ 1533. Where in the presence of Charles the Emperor, and before a mighty assembly of people, they were read and approved with great joy and acclamation. Both which letters, as well to the Pope as to the king Don Emanuel, were full of Christian piety and love: wherein first that mighty Emperor (though therein he was deceived) with singular reverence and duty, submitted himself unto the Pope of Rome, as to the head of all the church; offering by the said Francis most humble obedience, after the manner of other Christian princes. As likewise he proffered unto them both, the offices of benevolence, charity, and true friendship, intending to join a firm league of amity with them, and signifying that his dominions were free and open to all Christians, that would by sea or land frequent the same. Also he plainly seemed to detest the mutual discords of Christians, exhorting them to bandy their forces against the mahometans, and promising his royal assistance, and most earnest endeavour, for the vanquishing of Christ's enemies, and their conversion to the truth. Lastly he required, that men of learning, and of skill in the holy Scriptures, as likewise diligent Printers, and all sorts of artificers might be sent him, to be employed in the service of his church and common wealth. Signifying that he would not violently detain any man in his dominions, but would dismiss him into his own country, with honour, and liberal rewards. And that he might testify his loving and kind affection to the king of Portugal, by a most worthy monument, he sent him the crown off his own head, as the present of 〈◊〉 dutiful son to his most dear father. Wherefore by this most admirable diligence and industry of the Portugals, Ethiopia in these last times hath been discovered and made known unto us. Neither is there any thing in the Ethiopians religion so hidden and unrevealed, which hath not either been found out by Francis Aluarez, or most largely declared by Zagazabo the Ethiopian ambassador. Out of the relations therefore of these two worthy authors, as out of a fountain, we will derive the whole substance of our speech. The ground of the Ethiopicke religion is the profession of one true God, and of his son jesus Christ, which of all Christians is the peculiar and proper mark, whereby only they are to be named Christians. Concerning this main point the Ethiopians faith stands most firm and entire: for they together with us do confess and adore one God and three persons of the deity, God the father, God the son begotten of his father from everlasting, who for us men was incarnate, died, and rose again; and God the holy Ghost proceeding from the father and the son. In this article they follow the holy creed of the Apostles, and the Nicene creed. Save that they hold that Christ descended into hell for his own soul, and for the soul of Adam, which he received of the virgin Marie. For this opinion they do most steadfastly embrace; saying that it came by most ancient tradition from Christ himself to his Apostles. The old testament they so conjoin with the new, as they allow and receive both jewish & Christian ceremonies. Upon the eight day after their birth, * Whereas the jews circumcised the males 〈◊〉. they circumcise all children both male and female. And unless sickness urgeth them to make the more haste, they defer the baptism of their male children till they be forty, and of their females, till they be eighty days old. Circumcision (they say) they received from Queen Maqueda, which went to hear the wisdom of Solomon: and baptism from Saint Philip, and from the Eunuch which Philip baptised. Yet do they steadfastly hold, that not by circumcision, but by faith in jesus Christ they attain unto true felicity. Their baptism they 〈◊〉 every year: for upon the day of the three Sages, otherwise called epiphany, whereon Christ was baptized in jordan, they meet in great assemblies, and enter naked into the water; where the priest layeth his hand upon them, dippeth them thrice, and pronounceth the words of baptism, saying, I baptise thee in the name of the father, the son, and the holy ghost; adding thereto the sign of the cross. This custom received from their predecessors they do most carefully observe, not thereby to abase or extenuate their first baptism; but that every year they may receive a new absolution from their sins. Also unto their infants upon the very day of their baptism, they give the body of our Lord, under a small morsel of bread. But such as are grown to years of discretion before they come unto the Lords holy supper, do make confession and receive absolution of all their sins from the priest. Then do they all betimes in the morning both clergy and laity receive the whole sacrament of the body and true blood of jesus Christ in their churches. Which being received, they may not under pain of grievous punishment, so much as once spit, till the going down of the sun. Popish confirmation and unction, they neither esteem for sacraments nor use them. The Pope of Rome, either in regard of error and ignorance, or to win his favour, they acknowledge to be head of the church, and do pretend a kind of obedience to the sea of Rome. Albeit that the Pope, before the Portugals discovery of the east Indies could never communicate any assistance unto them, * Yet in the time of Pope Paul the 4. were sent certain priests with a new created Patriarch, and two 〈◊〉: who notwithstanding when they went 〈◊〉 about to bring in the 〈◊〉 religion, and the supremacy of the Pope, were crossed by the Emperor in all their proceedings. nor yet since that time, by reason of the huge distance almost of fifteen thousand miles. For so many miles the ambassador, which was sent out of Portugal to Ethiopia, said that he had travailed. [It is nothing so long a journey through Egypt, Troglodytica, and Barnagasso, but that the way through those countries is stopped by the 〈◊〉 of the Turks.] Howbeit Queen Helena, and after her king David, seem only to have sought and desired some conjunction with the Roman church, and the Christians of Europe: to the end that with their powers and forces united, they might assail and vanquish the mahometans, being most deadly enemies to the Christian name. Moreover these Ethiopic Christians do use to fast upon certain days of the week till sun set: as namely upon Wednesdays, to renew the sad memory of the jews council, wherein they decreed to crucify our Redeemer: and upon Fridays, that they may with thankful minds acknowledge his most bitter passion and death. Likewise the day of Good friday, whereon our blessed Saviour was nailed to the cross, they celebrate with great devotion, especially towards the evening. Unto these they add a Lent of forty days, wherein they live only by bread and water. The feasts both of Christ, of the virgin Marie, and of certain Saints, they keep holy: upon which days meeting in their churches three hours after sun-rising, they read the books of the Prophets, and employ themselves in holy exercises. They sanctify the Sabaoth in 〈◊〉 of the jews: and keep holy the Lord's day according to the apostles institution. On both these days they worship God by performing things holy, and eschewing matters profane. Into their churches they may not come but barefoot only; neither is it there lawful for any man to walk up and down, nor to talk of worldly affairs, nor to spit, nor cough. The chief use of the law (they say) is to show us our sins: neither do they think any man living able to perform the same, but only jesus Christ who fulfilled it on our behalf. The Saints they love indeed and reverence, but do not pray unto them. Unto the blessed virgin Marie the mother of Christ, they ascribe great honour, but neither do they adore her, nor crave assistance at her hands. They have every day one mass only, and that a short one, in stead of a sacrifice: but gains thereby they make none at all. Neither do they elevate or hold up the sacrament of the supper, as the mass-priests do: nor apply the same to redeem dead men's souls from the pains of purgatory. Howbeit, that there is a place of purgatory, they do not deny. Wherefore their dead are buried with crosses and supplications, and especially with the rehearsal of the beginning of Saint john's Gospel. Then the day following they offer alms for them, and upon certain days after they add funerall-banquets; supposing that upon Sabbaths and the Lords days, they which died godly, are freed from all torments in Purgatory, and at length, having received the full measure of chastisement for their sins, that then they go into eternal rest. For the effecting whereof, they do not think any indulgences of their 〈◊〉, but only the mere mercy and grace of God to be available. Marriage is no less permitted to their clergy and priests, then to their laie-people: yet so, that his first wife being dead, a priest cannot marry another without the patriarchs dispensation. Whosoever keepeth a concubine is debarred from all sacred administrations. And whatsoever bishop or clergyman is found to have a bastard, he is utterly deprived of holy orders, and of all his benefices and spiritual dignities. Marriages are often solemnised without the church, a bed being placed before the house of the bride and the bridegroom. Then come three priests, who going thrice about the bridegrooms bed, sing with a loud voice Halleluiah, and other things. This done, they cut one lock of hair from the bridegrooms head, and another from the head of the bride, which they wash in wine made of honey; and then putting upon either of their heads the others lock, they sprinkle them with a kind of holy-water, and so depart. Which being performed, the mariage-feast beginneth, and holdeth on till the night be far spent. At length the bride and bridegroom are brought unto their own house, out of which neither of them may go forth for the space of an whole month after. In some places they are married in the church by the patriarch himself. Where the marriage-bed standing in manner aforesaid, the patriarch with sweet incense and crosses walketh thrice about it, and then turning himself towards them, he layeth his hand upon the bridegrooms head, saying: Do that which god hath commanded in his gospel, and think now that you are not two but one flesh. Having spoken these words, he administereth the communion unto them, and blesseth them. Polygamy, or many wives at once, are permitted by the emperor and civil magistrate unto the Ethiopians: but in their churches there is no place at all for such as have more wives than one. Neither may any such persons presume to enter into their churches, but are held as excommunicate, and are not received into the congregation, before having put away all the residue of their wives, they betake themselves to one only. Divorcements they use very commonly, and often upon light occasions except only the priests, who may by no means depart from their wives. Whereby it appeareth, that their priests approve not that inconstancy in a matter of so great moment. The best remedy which they have to prevent this mischief, is at the day of marriage to alotte some great penalty upon that person which shall first forsake the other. Amongst them likewise, according to the law of Moses, brothers use to marry their brother's wives, to raise up seed unto them. Howbeit this abuse of marriage is not practised by all, but only by the mightier sort. For the countrypeople and those of poorer condition, being every one contented with his own wife, do so painfully employ themselves about their labour, and the getting of their 〈◊〉, that they are free from those violent passions of lust. Infants that die before baptism they name half christians, because, being sanctified only by the faith of 〈◊〉 parents, they are not as yet by baptism thoroughly engrafted into the church. From meats, which the law of Moses accounted unclean, they also do abstain. The heresies of Arrius, Macedonius, and Nestorius, they reject and condemn. The whole church of Ethiopia is governed by a patriarch called in the Ethiopic language Abuna, which signifieth, A Father. This patriarch of theirs is first solemnly created at jerurasem by the voices of those monks which keep the sepulchre of our Lord. Afterward he is confirmed, and sent into Ethiopia by the patriarch of Alexandria. The emperor Prete janni, so often as there is need of a new patriarch, sendeth an embassage with many gifts to jerusalem, and requireth a patriarch from thence. Which patriarch, together with a monk of the order of Saint Antony the Hermit, being come into Ethiopia, is, according to an ancient custom, received with the general consent, congratulation, applause, and rejoicing of all degrees and estates of people. To this high function is singled out some one man of singular piety, gravity, 〈◊〉, and of more ancient years than the rest. His special duties are to give holy orders, to administer church-discipline, and to excommunicate contumaces or obstinate offenders, which are for their stubbornness famished to death. But the authority of giving Bishoprics and spiritual benefices, the Emperor reserveth to himself. In Ethiopia there are infinite numbers of priests, and of monks. Francis Aluarez saw at one time ordained by the Patriarch two thousand three hundred fifty six priests. And the like manner of ordaining or installment they have every year twice. It seemeth that those which are chosen into that order, are men destitute of learning and liberal arts. Unto their priesthood none is admitted before he be full thirty years of age. It falleth out likewise, that during the vacation of the Patriarkship, the church hath great want of priests. Which vacation is often times prolonged by reason of the continual wars between the Christians and the bordering Mahumetans, and Gentiles: whereby all passage from Ethiopia to the monks of jerusalem is quite cut off. Hence proceedeth great desolation in that church. But with monks all places in this Abassin empire do mightily swarm. These do not only confine themselves in monasteries, whereof here are great numbers, but also take upon them offices in the court, and entangle themselves in military affairs, and in buying and selling of merchandise. Neither are there any kind of people in those eastern parts more conversant in trade of merchandise than priests 〈◊〉 monks. So that the old said saw is most truly verified: What ere the world doth put in ure, The Monk will intermeddle, sure. It is 〈◊〉 to be noted, that the priests, monks, and other ministers of 〈◊〉 Ethiopian church, are not maintained by tithes and alms as they are in Europe. They have only certain fields and gardens, which must be manured by the monks and clergy themselves. To beg aught of the common people they are in no wise permitted, unless perhaps some man will of his own accord bestow somewhat in their churches for the exequys of the dead, or for some other sacred uses. These Ethiopians have a certain book, which they suppose to have been written by all the Apostles when they were assembled at jerusalem. This book in their language they call Manda and Abetilis: and do believe that all things therein contained are to be holden for gospel. In it, amongst other matters, are contained certain penal statutes; as for example. If a priest be convicted of Adultery, Manslaughter, Robbery, or perjury, he is to receive like punishment with other malefactors. Likewise, that aswell ecclesiastical, as secular persons, are to abstain from coming to church for the space of four and twenty hours after carnal copulation. Some laws also there are, concerning the purification of women after their months, and their childbirth: which, because we can make but little use of them, I do here pass over in silence. One thing there is in this book very well provided, namely, that twice every year there be a Synod assembled in the church of Christ, for the handling and discussing of all matters ecclesiastical. These are the principal points of the religion, faith, and ceremonies of the Ethiopicke church under Prete janni, which hitherto have come to our knowledge. A good part whereofis agreeable unto the scriptures of the old and new testament. And such in very deed they are, as represent unto us the acknowledgement of one true God, and the faith and worship of our only Lord and Saviour jesus Christ. But as never any church upon earth was quite void of blemish: so neither is this of Ethiopia free from all stains of error. Which notwithstanding may seem the less strange, because in Ethiopia there are no schools nor Seminaries of liberal arts, save only, that the priests themselves (according to their simple skill) train up their sons unto such learning, as may in time make them capable of priesthood. Neither was there ever any man yet, that reform their errors. Francis Aluarez reporteth, that the Patriarch of this Ethiopic church, in a certain private conference, did grievously complain of all such errors as were there maintained, and was most earnestly desirous of a reformation. Which desire of his, as it is most holy & commendable; so is it by all christians to be approved. God almighty grant, that the Ethiopians may one day attain to the accomplishment of this his compassionate well-wishing, and may have a happy reformation of their church. For this to desire and pray for, is far more convenient and Christianlike, then to disgrace them with reproachful words, and to bereave them of the name of Christians. Which hard and unchristian measure, Zagazabo the Ethiopian ambassador, reporteth with grief, that he found among the Popish priests of Portugal; by whom he was quite restrained from the use and communion of the 〈◊〉 supper, as ifhe had been a mere Gentile, or Anathema. It is indeed an error, or rather a great infirmity, that they do as yet retain and use some of the jewish ceremonies. But we are 〈◊〉 to impute it to their ignorance of Christian liberty. And whereas they permit marriage to their priests, it is neither repugnant to the sacred word of God, nor to the institution of the Apostles. Wherefore it ought not to be disallowed of any Christians. Unless they will prefer the decrees of the Pope before the commandment of God, established by Christ and his apostles. Whereby it may plainly appear how impiously and savagely the Priests of Portugal dealt, in that especially for this cause they so sharply inneied against the Ethiopic ambassador, and so uncivilly entreated him. Their yearly renewing ofbaptisme, was at the first brought in by error, and since by ancient use and tradition, hath grown authentical. For in very deed so great is the force of antiquity and custom, that where they once take root, they can hardly be removed. And it is a wonder that the Ethiopians do so often repeat baptism, when as they cannot be circumcised any more than once. But in regard of all these defects, what can we better devise to do, then in our daily prayers to wish them minds better informed, and the purity and integrity of faith, which is agreeable unto god's word? The Ethiopians conceived exceeding joy at the first arrival of the Portugals in their country: hoping that their mutual acquaintance and familiarity, would breed a similitude and conjunction, as well of their religions, as of their affections and minds. But I am verily afraid, lest the reproachful and stern carriage of the Popish priests and monks towards the Ethiopic ambassadors before mentioned, hath more than ever in times past estranged the minds of that nation from the Christians of Europe. Howbeit the singular care and industry of those two renowned Princes, john the second, and Emanuel, kings of Portugal, is most highly to be extolled and celebrated, who by infinite charges employed upon their navigations to The east Indies, and to these parts; have opened a way for the European Christians, to the southern church of Ethiopia; and for the Ethiopians to this western church of Europe. Which had not these two worthy Princes brought to effect, we should not so much as have known the name of a Christian church in Ethiopia. For thither by the way of Arabia and Egypt, in regard of the Arabians and mahometans most deadly enmity to the Christian faith, it is so dangerous and difficult to travel, as it seemeth to be quite barred and shut up. Unless therefore over the Atlantike ethiopic, and Indian seas the Portugals had thither found a passage by navigation; it had almost been impossible for any ambassadors or other persons, to have come out of Ethiopia into these western parts. Thus 〈◊〉 Matthew Dresserus. An embassage sent from Pope Paul the fourth to Claudius the Emperor of Abassia or the higher Ethiopia, for planting of the religion and ceremonies of the church of Rome in his dominions; which embassage took none effect at all. IN the year 1555 john the third king of Portugal, determined to leave no means unattempted for the absolute reconciliation of Prete janni unto the church of Rome. For though David's ambassador had performed obedience to Pope Clement the seventh on his emperors behalf; yet doubted the king of Portugal (as true it was) that for want of speedy prosecution, those forward beginnings would prove but altogether fruitless; in that for all this, they still embraced the heresies of Dioscorus and Eutiches, and depended on the authority of the Patriarch of Alexandria, receiving their Abuna from him, who is the sole arbitrator of all their matters ecclesiastical, the administrer of their sacraments, the giver of orders over all Ethiopia, master of their ceremonies, and Instructor of their faith. Whereupon he supposed, that he could not do any thing more profitable, or necessary, then to send thither a Patriarch appointed at Rome, who might exercise spiritual authority over them, as also with him some priests, of singular integrity and learning, who with their sermons, disputations, & discourses both public and private, might reduce those people from their errors and heresies to the truth, and might confirm and strengthen them in the same. And unto this, it seemed a wide gate was already open; because not many years before, Claudius the emperor of Ethiopia received great succours from the Portugals, against Graadamet king of Zeila, who had brought him to an hard point; and in a letter written from him to Stephen Gama, he called Christopher Gama his brother, who died in this war, by the reverend name of a Martyr. The king of Portugal therefore having imparted this his resolution, first with Pope julius the third, and then with Paul the fourth, it was by them concluded to send into Ethiopia thirteen priests, men of principal estimation and account above others of their quality. john Nuns Barretto was made Patriarch, and there were joined unto him two assisting Bishops, Melchior Carnero, and Andrea Oivedo, under title of the Bishops of Nicaea, and Hierapolis. King john set forth this embassage, not only with whatsoever the voyage itself necessarily required, but further with all royal preparation, and rich presents for Prete janni. Nevertheless, the better to lay open an entrance for the Patriarch, there was by the king's appointment sent before from the city of Goa, Iago Dias, and with him Gonsaluo Rodrigo, into Ethiopia, to discover the mind of the Neguz, and the disposition of his people. These two being admitted to the presence of that Prince, showed him the letters of king john, wherein he congratulated with him, on the behalf of all Christians; for that following the example of his grandfather, and father, he had embraced the Christian faith, and union. Whereat Claudius was amazed, ' as at a thing never before thought of. And The Emperor of Ethiopia will by no means admit the supremacy and religion of the Romish church. it being demanded, why he had written to the king of Portugal to that effect, he excused himself by the writer, and interpreter of his letter: adding thereunto, that though he esteemed that king as his very good brother, yet was he never minded to swerver one jot from the faith of his predecessors. Roderigo for all this, was no whit daunted, but wrought all means to bring Claudius to his opinion. But the greatest difficulty against this his busy enterprise, was the ignorance of the emperor and the princes of Ethiopia in all the general Counsels, and ancient Histories. Afterwards perceiving that the Neguz did not willingly admit him to audience, he wrote and divulged a book in the Chaldean tongue; wherein confuting the opinions of the the Abassins, he laboured mightily to advance the authority of the Roman church. Which book raised so great a tumult, that the emperor, to avoid worse inconveniences which were likely to ensue, was feign quickly to suppress it. Iago Dias perceiving that he did but loose time, & the term of his return approaching, took his leave of the Neguz. And having made known in Goa, how matters stood, it was not thought requisite that the Patriarch should expose his own person, together with the reputation of the Roman church, unto so great hazard. But rather, not wholly to abandon the enterprise, they determined to send thither Andrew Ouiedo, (new elect bishop of Hierapolis) with two or three assistants, who with greater authority might debate of that which Roderigo already had so unfruitfully treated of. Ouiedo most willingly undertaking this attempt, put himself on the voyage, with father Emanuel Fernandez, and some few others. When he was come into Abassia, he stood in more need of patience than disputation. For king Claudius within a few months after, being vanquished and Adamas a new Emperor of Ethiopia. slain, Adamas his brother succeeded, who was a great enemy to the sea of Rome. This man drew 〈◊〉 and his assistants, to the wars with him, and entreated them most barbarously, as also those Abassins whom they had converted. He likewise was afterwards overthrown in battle by the Turks, who stripped Ouiedo and his companions of all things that they had. Whereupon they grew into such poverty and misery, as (all help failing them) they were enforced to get their living with the plough and spade, till they all died one after another. This Ethiopian Christianity is brought at this day to an hard point, by the invasions of the Turks and Moors, as is before declared. Notwithstanding their religious men affirm, that they have prophecies of the coming of a Christian nation to their Ports from far countries, with whom they shall go to the destruction of the Moors: and these they hold to be Portugal's. They have farther, certain presagements of Saint Sinoda, who was an Egyptain Hermite, of the ruin of Mecca, the recovery of the holy sepulchre, and the taking of Egypt and Cairo, by the Abassins, united with the Latins. Of the Christians of the isle of Socotera. Vicinity of place and conformity of customs invite me to cross the sea, and to visit the Christians of Socotera. This island is sixty miles long, and five and twenty in breadth. It is situate over against the Red sea. The people thereof received the faith from Saint Thomas the Apostle: for they affirm, that here he suffered shipwreck, and that of the broken and battered ship he built a church, which is as yet extant. They imitate for the most part the rites, customs, and fashions of the Abassins, but with great ignorance and error: for being separated from all commerce with the Christians of these parts, they remain deprived of that spiritual help, which the western church by communication might impart unto them. They retain circumcision, and some other Moisaicall ceremonies. Also they pray for the dead, and observe ordinary fasts: having prefixed hours for prayer, and bearing great reverence to their religion, in honour whereof, they build chapels, wherein assembling together, with an high and loud voice, they make supplications and prayers in the Hebrew tongue. But their far distance (as I said) from these parts of Christendom, the sterility of the island, and the poverty of the people, are occasions that the little light of truth which they have, is in a manner quite eclipsed by multitudes of errors. Unto other things may be added the tyranny of the king of Fartac a Mahometan, who subdued Fartac a country of Arabia Felix; the king whereof subdued the isle of Zocotera, 1482. them about the year of our Lord 1482. and partly by dominion, partly by affinity and kindred, and partly also by conversation, brought in amongst them the deadly poison of Mahumet. From this servitude they were delivered by Tristan d' Acunna, one of the king of Portugals captains; six and twenty years after they fell into the same. And for their better security, he repaired the fortress, leaving therein a Portugal garrison. But because the charges far surmounted any benefit that came of the island, not long after the said fortress was ruinated, and the island abandoned by the Portugals. john the third king of Portugal had a great desire to assist and free them from the tyranny of the Turks: whereunto after the taking of Aden they were subject. But for fear of provoking the great Turk, or giving him occasion to disturb and molest those seas with his fleets, as also for the dispatching of other affairs he had in hand, he never went about that enterprise. Of the Christians of Nubia. FRantis Aluarez in his Aethiopicke relation, writeth, that he being at the court of Prete janni, there arrived certain ambassadors from Nubia, to make 〈◊〉 unto that prince, for some priests, and ministers of the Gospel and sacraments, by whom they might be instructed in the Christian faith. But Prete janni answered them, that he had not enough for his own country: whereupon they returned home very discontent, so that having no help from the Christians, & on the otherside being daily solicited by the mahometans, upon whom they border on many sides, it is thought, that at this present, they remain in a manner without any religion at all. Notwithstanding at this day, there are more than an hundred and fifty churches standing, with divers other notes and signs of Christianity. Their language partaketh much with the Egyptain, and no less with the Chaldean and Arabic. Of the Christians in the king doom of Congo. HItherto we have described that little, which remaineth of the ancient Christianity of afric. It now resteth, that we give some notice of that, which hath been brought in of late. Congo is a kingdom about the bigness of France, situate (as is before said) beyond the equinoctial between Cabo da Catherina, and Bahia das vacas. It was converted to Christian religion, by the means of Don john the second king of Portugal, in manner following. Don Diego Canon a captain of that king, by his commission coasting along Africa, after a great navigation, arrived at length in the great river of Zaire; and 〈◊〉 to sail up into it, he discovered along the banks thereof many towns, where he found much more affability in the inhabitants, then in those of other countries which before he had discovered. And that he might be able to give the more faithful advertisement thereof to his king, his hart moved him to go to the court of that kingdom. Whither beinng come, and courteously brought to the king's presence, he showed them the vanity of their Idolatry, & the high reverence of christian faith. And he found in that Prince so good a disposition, as returning into Portugal, besides an ambassador he was permitted to carry with him certain youths of noble parentage, to the end they might learn the Christian doctrine, and be well instructed therein; and being baptised also, might afterwards be sent back with Portugal priests to preach the gospel, and to plant the Christian faith in that kingdom. These youths remained in Portugal two years, and were there liberally entertained, and with all diligence instructed in matters of religion, and were at length with great solemnity baptised. When they came to riper years, king john sent them back again into their own country, with an honourable embassage, in whose company went for teachers and instructors of that nation three Dominick-Fryers, reputed for men of exquisite learning and holy life. Being arrived in Congo, they first converted Mani-Sogno the king's uncle, with one of his sons. After that ensued the baptism of the king and Queen; for which cause in short time, there was a goodly Church erected, under the name and title of Santa Cruz. And in the mean while there were infinite Idols burnt. The king was called john, the Queen Leonora, and his eldest son Alonso. This Alonso was a singular good man, who not being satisfied in his own conversion, laboured also with a kind of Apostolical zeal for the conversion of his subjects. But let no man think, that the planting of religion can ever pass without some labour and trouble. These Dominick-Fryers, besides the intemperature of the air and unusual heat, which consumed them, were also evilly entreated by the * So are the inhabitants of Congo called. Moci-Congi. For although they showed themselves docible, and tractable enough, while they were instructed only about ceremonies, and divine mysteries, (because they thought, that the higher those matters were above humane capacity, the more they sorted and were agreeable to the majesty of God) nevertheless when they began to entreat seriously of Temperance, continence, restitution of other men's goods, forgiving of injuries, and other heads of Christian piety, they found not only great hindrance and difficulty, but even plain resistance and opposition. The king himself, who had from the beginning showed notable zeal, was now somewhat cooled; who because he was loath to abandon his soothsayers and fortune tellers, but above all, the multitude of his concubines (this being a general difficulty among the Barbarians) would by no means give ear unto the Preachers. Also the women (who were now rejected one after another) not enduring so suddenly to be banished from their husbands, brought the court and royal city of Saint Saluador into a great uproar. * So called by Osorius lib. 3. de Reb. Gest. Eman. But by Phil. Pigafetta. lib. 2. Cap. 2. Mani-Pango. Paulo Aquitino second son to the king, put tow to this fire, who would by no means be baptised; for which cause there grew great enmity betwixt him and Alonso his elder brother, who with all his power furthered the proceedings, and maintained the growth of the Christian religion. During these troubles, the old king died, and the two brothers fought a battle, which had this success; that Alonso the * Osorius de Reb. Gest. Eman. lib. 3. true heir, with six and thirty soldiers, calling upon the name of jesus, discomfited the huge army of his heathenish brother, who was himself also taken alive, and died prisoner in this his rebellion. God favoured Alonso in this war, with manifest miracles. For first they affirm, that being ready to enter into battle, he saw a light so clear and resplendent, that he and his company which beheld it, remained for a good while with their eyes declined, and their minds so full and replenished with joy and a kind of tender affection, that cannot easily be expressed. And then lifting up their eyes unto heaven, they saw five shining swords, which the king took afterwards for his arms, and his successors use the same at this day. Having obtained this victory, he assembled all his nobles, and straightly enjoined them to bring all the idols of his country to an appointed place, and so upon an high hill, he caused them all to be burned. This Alonso reigned prosperously for fifty years together, in which space he exceedingly furthered by authority and example, as also by preaching and doctrine, the new-planted Christianity. Neither did Don Emanuel the King of Portugal give over this enterprise: for he sent from thence to Congo, twelve of those Friars which the Portugals call Azzurri, of whom Friar john Mariano was head: with architects and smiths for the building and service of Churches, and with rich furniture for the same. After king Alonso, succeeded Don Pedro his son: in whose time there was a Bishop appointed over the isle of Saint Thomas, who had also committed unto him the administration of Congo. Where, at the city of Saint Saluador, was instituted a college of eight and twenty Canons in the Church of Santa Cruz. The second bishop was of the blood royal of Congo, who travailed to Rome, and died in his return homeward. Don Francisco succeeded Don Pedro, who continued but a small space: & Don Diego his near kinsman was after his decease advanced to the crown. In whose time john the third king of Portugal, understanding that neither the king himself cared greatly for religion, and that the merchants and priests of Europe furthered not, but rather with their bad life scandalised the people new converted, he sent thither four jesuits, to renew and re-establish matters of religion. These men arriving first at the isle of Saint Thomas, and then at Congo, were courteously received by the king: and presently going about the business they came for, one of them took upon him to teach six hundred young children, the principles of christian religion: and the other dispersed themselves over the whole country to preach. But all of them, one after another, falling into tedious and long diseases, they were enforced to return into Europe. At this time there was appointed over Congo a third bishop of the Portugal nation, who through the contumacy of the Canons and clergy, found trouble enough. In the mean while Don Diego dying, there arose great tumults touching the succession, by means whereof, all the Portugals in a manner, that were in Saint Saluador (except priests) were slain. In the end, Henry brother to Don Diego obtained the crown, and after him (for he quickly died in the wars of the Anzichi) Don Alvaro his son in law. This man reconciled unto himself the Portugal nation, caused all the religious and lay sort dispersed here and there, throughout the kingdom, to be gathered together, and wrote for his discharge to the king, and to the Bishop of Saint Thomas. The bishop having perused the letters, passed himself into Congo: and giving some order for the discipline of the clergy, he returned to Saint Thomas, where he ended his days. It so fell out, that what for the absence, and what for the want of Bishops, the progression of religion was much hindered. For one Don Francisco, a man for * Called by Philippo Pigafetto 〈◊〉. blood and wealth of no small authority, began freely to say, that it was a vain thing to cleave to one wife only, and afterwards in the end, he fell altogether from the faith, and was an occasion that the king grew wonderfully cold. They affirm, that this Francisco dying, and being buried in the church of Santa Cruz, the devils uncovered a part of that church's roof, and with terrible noise drew his dead carcase out of the tomb, and carried it quite away: a matter that made the king exceedingly amazed: but yet another accident that ensued withal, struck him nearer to the hart: For the Giacchi leaving their own habitations, entered like Locusts into the kingdom Concerning these Giacchi, otherwise called Agag, read the discourse of Mohenemugi before the beginning of john Leo. of Congo, and coming to battle against Don Alvaro the king, put him to flight: who not being secure in the head city, abandoned his kingdom, and together with the Portugal priests, and his own princes, retired himself unto an island of the river Zaire, called The isle of horses. Thus seeing himself brought to such extremity (for besides the loss of his kingdom, his people died of famine and misery, and for maintenance of life sold themselves one to another, and to the Portugals also at a base price) for reparation of his state and religion, he had recourse to Don Sebastian king of Portugal, and obtained of him six hundred soldiers, by whose valour he drove his enemies out of the kingdom, and within a year and an half, re-established himself in his throne. In his time Antonio di Glioun à Spaniard, was made bishop of Saint Thomas, who after much molestation procured him by the captain of that island, went at length into Congo, with two friars and four priests, and ordered matters reasonably well. In the mean while Don Alvaro died, and his son of the same name succeeded him, who failed not to solicit, both Don Sebastian and Don Henry kings of Portugal, and the king of Spain also, that they would send him some competent number of preachers and ecclesiastical persons for the augmentation of the Christian faith in his kingdom: and amidst these determinations he died, and a son of his called also Don Alvaro succeeded him. During these tumults, certain other Portugal Priests went into Congo, labouring to prune that vine which had been long time given over, and forsaken. These men have built them an house in the island of Loanda, where do remain six or seven of their company, that are ready to go sometimes hither, and sometimes thither, as need requireth. In the year of our Lord 1587. king Alvaro, (who because he was not borne of lawful matrimony, was but little esteemed by his people) would needs have one of these priests about him, by whose means and authority he came to reputation and credit. And God himself favoured his proceedings: for meeting a sister of his by the father's side, and one of her brothers, with a great army in the field, he gave him battle, and bore himself therein with such valour, as he did not only overthrow the forces of his enime but further slew the ringleader and general thereof, and in the place where he was slain, he would needs build a church to the honour of Christianity. And the more by his own example to move others, himself was the very first man that put hand to this work: and likewise with edicts and favourable proclamations, he furthered and doth still advance the preaching of the Gospel, and the propagation of religion. Who so is desirous to be more fully instructed concerning the Christianity of this kingdom, let him read the third and eight books of Osorius de Reb. gest. Eman. & the second book of Philippo Pigafetta his story of Congo, most properly and decently translated by the judicious master ABRAHAM HARTWELL. Of the Christian religion in the kingdom of Angola. THose Portugal priests that remain in the Island Loanda, as above we declared, bend themselves more to the conversion of Angola, then of Congo. The reason is (as I suppose) because the enterprise is new, and more nearly concerneth the Portugals, who there make war under the conduct of Paulo Diaz, to get possession of the mountains of Cabambe which abound with rich mines of very fine silver. It seemeth that god hath favoured the amplification of his holy name in those parts with some miraculous victories. For first in the year 1582, a few Portugals in an excursion that they made, put to flight an innumerable company of the Angolans. And by this victory, they brought in a manner the half of that kingdom into their hands: and many Princes and nobles of the land upon this, were moved to request and make suit to be baptised. Among whom was Songa prince of Banza, the kings Father in law, whose brother and children were baptised already. Tondella also, the second person of Angola was converted: many Idols were thrown to the ground, and instead thereof they erected crosses, and built some churches. And within this little while all the Province of Corimba is in a manner converted. Also in the year 1584., an hundred and fifty Portugals, together with such succours as were conducted by Paul Prince of Angola, who was not long before converted; discomfited more than a million of Ethiopians. In an other place we declared the ready means and opportunities that the Princes of Ethiopia and of India have, to assemble and bring together such infinite armies. They say, that certain Ethiopians being demanded by a Portugal, how it came to pass that so great a multitude turned their backs to so few men: they answered, that the Portugals strength did it not, which with a blast they would have confounded, but a woman of incomparable beauty, appareled in shining light and brightness, and an old man that kept her company with a flaming sword in his hand, who went aloft in the air before the Portugals, and overthrew the squadrons of the Angolans, putting them to flight and destruction. In the year 1588., were converted Don Paulo Prince of Mocumba, and with him a thousand persons more. The Christian religion of Monomotapa. IN the dominions of the Monomotapa, the light of the faith being with incredible ease kindled, was also as suddenly 〈◊〉 by the devices of the mahometans. For some Portugals going to the court of that monarch, and giving himself, with some of his Princes and vassals, a taste of the gospel, were an occasion afterwards that Gonsaluo de Sylva, a man no less famous for the integrity of his life, then for his blood and parentage, went over thither from Goa in the year 1570. This man arriving with a prosperous voyage, in the kingdom of Inambane, converted and baptised the king, his wife, children, and sister, with his Barons and nobility, and the greatest part of his people. Through whose persuasion Gonsaluo left his companions, prosecuting his voyage towards the Monomotapa, only with six Portugals. Thus having passed Mozambique, and the mouth of the river Mafuta, and of Colimane, they came to Mengoaxano king of Quiloa, where they were courteously received& entertained. And though they had licence in this place to preach the gospel, yet would not Gonsaluo here stay, judging that upon the conversion of the Monomotapa, that of the neighbour kings would follow without delay. Embarking themselves therefore upon the river Cuama, they sailed along the coast of Africa eight days, till they came to Sena, a very populous village: where Gonsaluo baptised about five hundred slaves, belonging to the Portugal merchants, and prepared for the receiving of the gospel the king of Inamor, one of the Monomotapaes' vassals. In the end Antonio Caiado a Portugal gentleman came from the court, to guide Gonsaluo towards the same place. Whither being in short time come, he was presently visited on the emperors behalf, and bountifully presented with a great sum of gold, and many oxen. But he returning back these presents, gave the Monomotapa to understand, that he should know of Caiado, what he desired. The emperor was astonished at this his magnanimity, & received him afterwards with the greatest honour, that could possibly be devised. And causing him to sit upon the same carpet, whereon also his own mother sat, he presently demanded how many women, how much ground, and how many oxen (things mightily esteemed of in those countries) he would have. Gonsaluo answered, that he would have no other thing but himself. Whereupon the emperor turning to Caiado (who was their interpreter) said; that surely it could not be otherwise, but that he, who made so little account of things so highly valued by others, was no ordinary man; and so with much courtesy he sent him back to his lodging. Not long time after, the emperor let Gonsaluo to understand, that he and his mother were resolved to become Christians, and that therefore he should come to baptise them. But he to instruct them better in the faith, deferred it off for some days. Finally five and twenty days after his arrival, with unspeakable 〈◊〉 and preparation, he gave the water of baptism to the king, and to his mother. He was called Sebastian, and she Maria. And presently after, about three hundred of the principal in this emperors court were baptised. Gonsaluo for his wonderful abstinence, charity, wisdom, and for many other his singular virtues was so reverenced and esteemed by those people, as if he had come down from heaven among them. Now as matters proceeded thus prosperously, and with so desirable success, behold, an horrible tempest arose which drowned the ship. There were in the court four mahometans most dear unto the king. These men finding out some occasion, suggested unto him, that Gonsaluo was a Magioian, who by witchcrafts and 〈◊〉 could turn kingdoms topsy-turvy: and that he was come to pry into his estate, and to stir up his people to rebellion, and so by this means to bring his kingdom under subjection to the Portugals. With these and such like suggestions they brought the king (who was but a young man) to determine the death of Gonsaluo. The effect whereof was, that after long prayer, reposing himself a little; he was by eight of the king's servants slain, and his body thrown into the river Mensigine. near unto the same place, were with like violence put to death, fifty new-conuerted Christians. This rage and fury being over, the king was advertised by the Principal of his kingdom, and then by the Portugals, of the excess and outrage he had therein committed. He excused himself the best he could, causing those mahometans to be slain, who had seduced him; and he sought out some others also who lay hid, to put them to death. Whereupon it seemed that by the death of father Gonsaluo, the conversion of this great king, and of his empire, should have been furthered, and no whit hindered, if the Portugals would rather have prevailed by the word of God, then by force of arms. The which I say, because instead of sending new preachers into those countries, to preserve that which was already gotten, and to make new conversions, they resolved to revenge themselves by war. There departed therefore out of Portugal a good fleet, with a great number of noble Portugals therein, conducted by Francisco Barretto. At the fame of this war, moved against him, the Monomotapa full of fear, sent to demand peace of Barretto. But he aspiring to the infinite mines of gold in that kingdom, contemned all conditions offered him. The effect of this enterprise was, that this army which was so terrible to a mighty Monarch, was in few days consumed by the intemperature of the air, which is there insupportable to the people of Europe. Of the fortresses and colonies maintained by the Spaniards and Portugals upon the main of Africa: by means whereof the Christian religion hath there some small footing. Which albeit in other respects they have been mentioned before, yet here also in this one regard, it seemeth not from our purpose briefly to remember them. TO the propagation of Christianity, those fortresses & colonies wonderfully help, which the Castilians, but much more the Portugals, have planted on the coast of Africa. For they serve very fitly either to convert infidels upon divers occasions, or by getting an habit of their languages and customs, to make a more easy way to their conversion. For those who are not sufficient to preach, serve for interpreters to the preachers. And thus God hath oftentimes been well served, and with excellent fruit and effect, by the endeavour of some soldiers. On the coast of Africa upon the Mediterran sea, the Spaniards have Oran, Mersalchibir, Melilla, etc. and the Portugals, Tanger, and çeuta, and without the straits of Gibraltar, Arzilla, and Mazagan; and in Ethiopia, Saint George de la mina. They have also a settled habitation in the city of Saint Saluador, the Metropolitan of the kingdom of Congo, and in Cumbiba, a country of Angola. Beyond the cape de Buena esperança; they hold the fortresses, and colonies of Sena, Cefala, and Mozambiche. here besides their secular clergy, is a convent of Dominicans, who endeavour themselves to instruct the Portugals, and the Pagans also which there inhabit, and do traffic thither. Of the Islands of the Atlantic Ocean, where the Spaniards and Portugals have planted religion. THe Christian name is also augmented, and doth still increase in the Atlantic Ocean, by means of the colonies conducted thither, partly by the Spaniards and partly by the Portugals. The Spaniards undertook the enterprise of the Canaries, in the year of our Lord 1405. using therein the assistance of john Betancort, a French gentleman, who subdued Lançarota, & Fuerteventura. They were taken again certain years after, and were first subdued by force of arms, & afterwards by the establishment of religion: so that at this present, all the inhabitants are Christians. Also the Portugals have assayed to inhabit certain other islands of that Ocean, & especially Madera, which was discovered in the year 1420. This at the first was all over a thick and mighty wood: but now it is one of the best manured islands that is known. There is in the same, the city of Funcial, being the seat of a bishop. Puerto santo, which is forty miles distant from Madera, was found out in the year 1428. and this also began presently to be inhabited. The isles of Arguin, being six or seven, and all but little ones, came to the knowledge of the Portugals in the year 1443. here the king hath a fortress for the traffic of those countries. The islands of Cabo Verde were discovered in the year 1440. by Antonio di Nolli a Genua, or (as others affirm) in the year 1455. by Aloizius Cadamosto. These be nine in number: the principal of them is Sant jago, being seventy miles in length: where the Portugals have a town situate upon a most pleasant river, called Ribera grand, which consisteth at 〈◊〉 least of five hundred families. The isle of Saint Thomas being somewhat greater than Madera, was the last island discovered by the Portugals, before they doubled the cape De buena Esperança. They have here a colony called Povasaon, with a bishop, who is also the bishop of Congo, and it containeth seven hundred families. Under the government of Saint Thomas are the neighbour islands of Fernando Pó, and that del Principe, which are as it were boroughs belonging to the same. The island Loanda, though it be under the king of Congo, yet is a great part thereof inhabited by the Portugals. For here is the famous port of * Not Mazagan upon the coast of Barbary. Mazagan, whither the ships of Portugal and Brasile do resort. here the fleets are harboured, and the soldiers refreshed, and here they have their hospital. As also here the Portugal priests (who endeavour the conversion of the natural inhabitants) have a place of residence. Of the Negroes. MOst of the Islands inhabited by the Portugals, especially those of Saint Thomas and Madera, besides the Portugals themselves, contain a great multitude of Negro-slaves, brought thither out of Congo and Angola, who till the earth, water the sugarcanes, and serve both in the cities, and in the country. These are for the most part gentiles, but they are daily converted rather through continual conversation, than any other help that they have; and it is a matter likely, that in process of some few years, they will all become Christians. There is no greater hindrance to their conversion, than the avarice of their masters, who, to hold them in the more subjection, are not willing that they should become Christians. Of those poor distressed European Christians in Africa, who are holden as slaves unto the Turks and Moors. But the best and most sincere christianity in all Africa, is that of those poor christians, who are fettered by the feet with chains, being slaves to the Arabians & Turks. For besides them that have remained there ever since the days of Barbarossa and other Turkish captains (which were brought into the mediterran seas by the French) as also since the great loss at Gerbi, and the battle of Alcazar wherein Don Sebastian the king of Portugal was overthrown: there passeth not a year, but the rovers and pirates of those parts, without granting any league or respite to the Northern shore of the Mediterran sea, take great numbers of Christians from off the coasts of Spain, Sardinia, Corsica, Sicilia, yea even from the very mouth of Tiber. It is generally thought, that the number of slaves, which are in Alger amount to eighteen thousand. In Tunis, Bona, and Biserta there are great multitudes: but many more in Fez, and Maroco; as likewise in Mequenez and Tarodant, and in divers other cities of those kingdoms. The estate surely of these distressed people is most worthy of compassion, not so much for the misery wherein they lead their lives, as for the danger whereto their souls are subject. They pass the day in continual travail, and the greatest part of the night without repose or quiet, under insupportable burdens, and cruel stripes. Beasts among us labour not more, nor are more slavishly entreated. Yea, albeit under those brutish Barbarians, they endure all that toil, which beasts do here with us: yet are they neither so well fed, nor so carefully looked unto, as our beasts commonly are. They wear out the whole day in the sun, rain, and wind, in continual labour, sometimes carrying burdens, sometimes digging or ploughing the fields, and otherwhiles in turning of hand-milles, feeding of beasts, or in performance of other labours: being bound to bring in so much every day to their masters, and they themselves to live of the rest, which many times is nothing at 〈◊〉, or (if it were possible) less than nothing. They have always the chain at their necks and feet, being naked 〈◊〉 and summer, and therefore are sometimes scorched with heat, and otherwhiles frozen with cold. They must not fail in any jot of their duties, and yet though they do not, it can not be expressed with what cruelties they are tormented. They use for the chastizing & torture of their bodies, chains of iron, dried sinews of oxen, but-hoops steeped in water, boiling oil, melted tallow, & scalding hot lard. The houses of those Barbarians resound again, with the blows that are given these miserable men, on the feet and belly: and the prisons are filled with hideous lamentations and yell. Their companions hair at this noise stands an end, and their very blood freezeth within them, by considering how near themselves are to the like outrages. They pass the nights in prisons, or in some caves of the earth, being hampered and yoked together like brute beasts. here the vapour and damp choketh them, and the uncleanness and filth of their lodging consumeth them (as rust doth iron) even alive. But though the labours of their bodies be so grievous, yet those of their minds are much more intolerable, for (besides that they want such as might feed them with the word of God, & with the sacraments, and might teach them how to live and die well, so as they remain like plants without moisture) it can not be expressed, with whatforcible temptations their faith is continually assailed. For not only the desire to come forth of these unspeakable miseries, doth tempt them; but the commodities and delights also wherein they see others to live, that have damnably renounced their Christianity. The persecutors of the primitive church, to induce the Martyrs to deny Christ and to sacrifice to their idols, tried them first with torments, and then with ease and delights, which they propounded unto them, if they would become as themselves. For to those, who in the midst of winter were thrown into frozen lakes, there were contrariwise appointed soft and delicate beds, with a fire kindled hard by, and a thousand other restoratives and comforts; to the end they might be doublie tempted, both by the rigour of the cold which benumbed them, and by the sweetness of things comfortable and nourishing, which alured them. The Christian slaves are at this day no less tormented; for on the one side, they are afflicted with beggary, nakedness, hunger, famine, blows, reproaches, and tortures, without any hope in a manner ever to come out thereof: and on the other side they see them that have reneged our holy faith for Mahumets' superstition, to live in all worldly prosperity and delight, to abound with wealth, to flourish in honour, to govern cities, to conduct armies, and to enjoy most ample liberty. But amidst all these so great miseries, they have a double comfort. The one is of priests, who together with themselves were taken captive. These men sometimes administering the sacraments, & other whiles delivering the word of God in the best manner that they can, are some help and assistance to others, being for this greatly 〈◊〉 and respected amongst them. The other is of the religious in general, who contend and labour for their freedom. Wherein Spain deserveth most high commendation. For there be two most honourable orders, whose exercise it is, to move and solicit for the freedom of captives. The one is called La orden de la merced, and it flourisheth most in Arragon; and the other (which is far greater) is named Del Resgate or of ransom or redemption, the which although it largely extendeth over all France, yet at this day above all other places, it is most rife in Castilia. From whence some of them have gone into Sicily, to the kingdom of Naples, and to Rome: and have there begun to lay foundations of their convents. These two religious orders gather every year mighty sums of money, wherewith they make speedy redemption of the foresaid captives. They send their Agents to Fez, and to Alger, who managing this affair, with no less diligence, than loyalty, redeem first all the religious, and priests, and after them those of the younger sort, first the king of Spain's subjects, and then others. They always leave one religious man in Alger, and another in Fez, who inform themselves of the state & quality of the slaves, with their necessity, to make the better way for their liberty the year following The king of Spain (whom it most concerneth) furthereth this so charitable a work, with a bountiful and liberal hand. For ordinarily he giveth as much more, as the foresaid orders have gathered and collected by way of alms. For this is so good an enterprise, that by the ancient canons no other is so much favoured and allowed of. Yea S. Ambrose and other holy men have pawned, for the delivery of Christian captives, the chalices and silver vessels of their churches. And Saint Paulinus for the same end and purpose, sold his own self. For all other actions of charity are some spiritual, and others corporal, but this in a very eminent degree is both spiritual and corporal together. For among corporal miseries the servitude of infidels is most grievous, & among spiritual calamities the danger of apostasy is of all others the greatest: but those slaves so redeemed, are set free both from the one and from the other. Whereupon there are very few borne in Spain, who dying, leave not some alms behind them, for the ransoming of slaves. The 〈◊〉 of redemption have gone also many times to Constantinople: where in the year 1583. by the order of Pope Gregory the thirteenth, they redeemed five hundred persons. The brotherhood also of the Confalone in Rome, labour very diligently in this point, who in Sixtus Quintus time, redeemed a great number of captives. Of whom many also, urged partly by the hardness of servitude, & partly by the sweetness of liberty, free themselves, either by that which they gain over & above their masters due, or by their good demeanour, or else by flight. And they fly away, sometimes by repairing speedily to such fortresses as the king of Spain hath in Africa and in Barbary: and otherwhiles they seize on some shipping, or on the self same galleys wherein they are chained. Many also retire themselves to the Princes of Brisch, etc. who willingly receive and arm them, using their assistance in the war which they continually make with the Turks of Alger. FINIS.